Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
7540 Gall Blvd
GRAPHIC SYMBOLS ........................;TIRE PROJECT DIRECTORY ARCHITECT EDWARDS + HOTCHKISS ARCHITECTS 219 WARD CIRCLE, SUITE ONE BRENTWOOD, TN 37027 CONTACT: MATT NOLL PHONE: 615-377-3111 FAX: 615-377-0978 E-MAIL: mattn@eandharch.com -$WWWpalPUe6"00VCW"**Pq" ul eq q S� a uodsaj cu sewnsse 40eql ' u! >I eel &qjq at aloe A" W A SAP"" aq eq pqs p lisouelldww-uou opm but ails jo u �feulwexa �ay� � Pue POO 1fdAN W ul eje sueld at# let# &=W (4 A*qPuOdm OP SAA84UO3 041 SI it 'sued pWpgns a g 10 I% a eq q PePusqu! iou sl mom slyl 'S91= OP a* OW310ft qW aouelldwoo ul )OP8A1103 alli 1SP8 q M "ej g gI papups Sueld jo mwei sN Ps pe eq aseaW DEVELOPER - construction NEWTON OLDACRE MCDONALD 6141 LEMMING CT PENDLETON, IN 46064 CONTACT: JOHN FLIEG PHONE: 314-892-8480 FAX: 334-365-4183 E-MAIL: jflieg@nomllc.com MP&E ENGINEER STRUCTURAL ENGINEER KURZYNSKE AND ASSOCIATES EMC STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS 825 THIRD AVENUE SOUTH 4525 TROUSDALE DRIVE NASHVILLE, TN 37210 NASHVILLE, TN 37204 CONTACT: MICHAL SKUBENIC CONTACT: JOHNNY JOHNSON PHONE: 615-255-5203 PHONE: 615-781-8199 FAX: 615-255-5207 FAX: 615-781-4088 E-MAIL: mskubenic@kurzynske.com E-MAIL: johnny@emcnashville.com SUBMrrrED AF1 AVEBEENEWED ARCHITECTURAL BY ZEPHYRFIC NORTH Date: Reviewer: V SECTION CUT ZEPHYR COMMONS ROOM NAME ZEPHYRHILLS, FLORIDA ROOM NUMBER 12/1/138 LARGE SCALE DETAIL a WALL LEGEND X BENCH MARK A-X ROOM EXTERIOR ® ELEVATION x A-XX EQUIPMENT NUMBER WINDOW NUMBER REVISION = 0 I DOOR NUMBER ABBREVIATIONS INDEX OF DRAWINGS REVISIONS 1T-1 COVER SHEET LE CIVIL ENGINEER AVID GROUP 2300 CURLEW ROAD, STE 100 PALM HARBOR, FL 34683 CONTACT: BOB PIERRO PHONE: 727-789-9500 FAX: 727-784-6662 E-MAIL: bob.pierro@avidgroup.com FIRE PROTECTION ENGINEER CODE CONSULTANTS, INC. 1804 BORMAN CIRCLE DRIVE ST.LOUIS, MO 63146 CONTACT: BILL DUST PHONE: 314-991-2633 FAX: 314-991-4614 billd@codeconsultants.com E-MAIL: co billd deconsultants.com AFF Above Finish Floor EJ Expansion Joint NIC Not In Contract ABV Above EIFS Exterior Insulation & Finish System NTS Not To Scale ACT Acoustical Ceiling Tile OC On Center FRP Fiberglass Reinforced Polyester OPP Opposite ADJ Ad'acent OH _ Overhead AC Air Conditioning PR Pair AHJ Authority Having Jurisdiction FRT Fire Rated Treated PLAS LAM PLYWD Plastic Laminate Plywood FF Finish Floor ALTN Alternate FFE Finish Floor Elevation PVC PRE-FAB Polyvinyl Chloride Prefabricated ALUM Aluminum APPD Approved FCP Fire Alarm Control Panel PT Pressure Treated APPROX Approximate REI NF Reinforcement ARCH Architectural FAP Fire Alarm Panel RM Room ASPH Asphalt FE Fire Extin uisher SAT Suspended Acoustical Tile AUTO Automatic FO Finished Opening AVG Average FT Foot SCHED Schedule BILK Block FTG Footing SIM Similar BD Board GA Gauge SQ Square BUR Built -Up Roof GC Gen. Contractor SF Square Foot CB Catch Basin GYP BD Gypsum Board SS Stainless Steel CO Cleanout HVAC Heating, Ventilation & Air Conditioning STL Steel CLO Closet STOR Storage CW Cold Water STR _ Structural COL Column HM Hollow Metal TEL Telephone CONC Concrete HORIZ Horizontal T&G Tongue & Groove CMU Concrete Masonry Unit HW Hot Water TO Top Of HR Hour TG Top Of Grade CONT Continuous IN Inch TOS Top Of Steel CORR Corridor INSUL Insulation or Insulated TYP Typical CRS Courses UNFIN Unfinished DIA Diameter INT Interior UNO Unless Noted Otherwise DR Door JAN Janitor's Closet DS Downspout JT Joint VB VERT Vapor Barrier Vertical DWG Drawing LAV Lavatory DF Drinking Fountain MDF Medium Density Fiberboard VEST Vestibule EA Each VCT Vinyl Composition Tile EW Each Way MGR Manager ELEC Electrical MH Manhole V.I.F. Verify In Field EL Elevation MFGR Manufacturer WH Water Heater ELEV Elevation MO Masonry Opening WWF Welded Wire Fabri EQUIP Equipment MAX Maximum W/O Without EF Exhaust Fan MECH Mechanical WD Wood EXIST Existing MIN Minimum EXP Expansion MISC Miscellaneous Expansion Joint MTL Metal GENERAL NOTES ALL NOTES SHALL BE REVIEWED FOR COMPLIANCE TO THE PROJECTS SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT 1. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL REVIEW ALL DOCUMENTS AND VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND FIELD CONDITIONS. HE SHALL CONFIRM WORK SHOWN IS VIABLE. ANY CONFLICTS, OMISSIONS, ETC. SHALL BE REPORTED IMMEDIATELY TO THE ARCHITECT FOR CLARIFICATION PRIOR TO PERFORMANCE OF ANY WORK IN QUESTION. 2. ALL WORK SHALL BE PERFORMED IN STRICT COMPLIANCE WITH LOCAL, COUNTY, STATE & FEDERAL CODES AND ORDINANCES. 3. DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS. IF DIMENSIONS ARE IN QUESTION THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR OBTAINING CLARIFICATION FROM THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE BEFORE CONTINUING WITH CONSTRUCTION. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE TO FACE OF GYP BD. FINISH OR FACE OF BLOCK UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND COORDINATE ALL TRADES. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY ALL EQUIPMENT LOCATIONS AND DIMENSIONS OF EQUIPMENT PRIOR TO ENCLOSING AREA WHERE EQUIPMENT IS TO BE PLACED, INCLUDING CASEWORK SIZES. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY THE LOCATION OF ALL UTILITIES. 4. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR OBTAINING PERMITS FOR FIRE PROTECTION, FIRE ALARM, PLUMBING, SIGNAGE (WHERE APPLICABLE) MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PRIOR TO INSTALLATION OF THOSE SYSTEMS UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 5. CONCEAL ALL PIPING INSIDE WALL, WHERE PIPING IS TOO LARGE, WALLS ARE TO BE FURRED OUT THE MINIMUM DIMENSION TO CONCEAL PIPING. 6. ELECTRICAL PANELS, FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS, ETC. IN STUD WALLS SHALL BE BACKED WITH DRYWALL AS REQUIRED TO MAINTAIN WALL RATING. CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY WALL THICKNESSES REQUIRED FOR ALL ELECTRICAL PANELS, FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS, ETC. 7. PROVIDE DOUBLE STUDS & BLOCKING AS REQUIRED TO SUPPORT EQUIPMENT AND/OR MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS, - TYP. CASEWORK, GRAB BARS, ETC. 8. FIREPROOFING, SEALANTS & DAMPERS MAY NOT BE SHOWN ON SOME DETAILS FOR CLARITY. HOWEVER, ALL ASSEMBLIES MUST BE INSTALLED AS REQUIRED TO MAINTAIN RATING INDICATED ON PLANS. ALL PENETRATION SEALANTS OR ASSEMBLIES SHALL BE UL LISTED (OR EQUIVALENT) FOR INSTALLATION WITHIN THE RATED WALL ASSEMBLY NOTED ON THE PLANS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR OBTAINING CLARIFICATION FROM THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE BEFORE CONTINUING CONSTRUCTION 9. WHERE WALL RATINGS APPEAR ON BOTH SIDES OF DOORS AND OR WINDOWS THE WALL TYPE SHOWN SHALL CONTINUE ABOVE THE FRAME TO THE CEILING OR STRUCTURE AS APPLICABLE. 10. THE HINGE SIDE OF ALL INTERIOR DOOR FRAMES SHALL BE PLACED 5" FROM THE ADJACENT INTERIOR WALL UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. INTERIOR DOORS PLACED IN MASONRY WALLS SHALL BE PLACED A MINIMUM OF 5" AWAY FROM ADJACENT INTERIOR WALLS AND A MAXIMUM OF 8" AWAY FROM ADJACENT INTERIOR WALLS TO COORDINATE WITH MASONRY COURSING. 11. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL RETAIN ONE SET OF THE PLANS IN GOOD CONDITION TO NOTE & DOCUMENT ALL CHANGES DURING CONSTRUCTION. THIS SET OF PLANS SHALL BE RETURNED TO THE OWNER AS PART OF THE REQUIRED CLOSE OUT PACKAGE. 12. SPLIT FACED CORNER BLOCK SHALL BE USED AT ALL EXPOSED CORNERS WHERE SPLIT -FACED C.M.U. IS SPECIFIED. PROVIDE SPECIAL SHAPES AS REQUIRED. 13. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE TO SCHEDULE A WALK-THRU WITH THE OWNER AND TENANT TO REVIEW 50 /o COMPLETION AND 100 /o COMPLETION. p 14. DIMENSIONS ARE TO FACE OF GYP. BD. OR CMU UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. r_ - VICINITY MAP Franey Hill Rd Orange Orove Phelps Rd 1•=3OW C Richland Rd Slevaan Rd P•9elrnsa ,�+,re a 4 Louise Dr 13tis idler, Rd R, 41 C7 < z o unninoha rci pirq pond Pd Cnr.,Estates PRQJ>G'�. i "" ,SITE Fort. - co c SSSYYY gg _ a Zephvrhilts 4- Eiland Skid $d alumet Ave 381 Henry [)t ;`j - - eIger Rd Nonh rive _._-klan i Ve.cle Cwrt ..b'jo r' 3r-dr �._7ub a' s „ a, s• s - o 35A ?icMar,d itis -z 535 L L1,n6rrnk DI VENDORS RESPONSIBILITY CHART CIVIL C1 CIVIL INFORMATION C2 SPECIFICATIONS AND NOTES C3 HORIZONTAL CONTROL PLAN C4 PAVING GRADING & DRAINAGE PLAN C5 UTILITY PLAN C6 STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION NOTES C7 STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION DETAILS C8 DETAIL SHEET C9 DETAIL SHEET C10 DETAIL SHEET L1 LANDSCAPE PLAN L2 LANDSCAPE DETAILS AND SPECIFICATIONS IR1 IRRIGATION PLAN IR2 IRRIGATION DETAILS AND NOTES ARCHITECTURAL LS-1 LIFE SAFETY PLAN/ CODE INFORMATION A-1 ARCHITECUTRAL FLOOR PLAN & SCHEDULES A-2 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN/UPPER DIMENSION A-3 ROOF PLAN & DETAILS A-4 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS A-5 WALL SECTIONS A-6 WALL SECTIONS A-6.1 WALL SECTIONS AND DETAILS A-7 ENLARGED PLAN & INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A-8 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A-9 DETAILS A-10 UNDERGROUND LIFT CONDUIT A-11 SPECIFICATIONS A-12 SPECIFICATIONS A-13 SPECIFICATIONS A-14 SPECIFICATIONS A-15 SPECIFICATIONS A-16 SPECIFICATIONS A-17 SPECIFICATIONS A-18 SPECIFICATIONS A-19 SPECIFICATIONS A-20 SPECIFICATIONS A-21 SPECIFICATIONS A-22 SPECIFICATIONS STRUCTURAL S-0 GENERAL NOTES S-0.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN S-1 FOUNDATION PLAN S-2 ROOF FRAMING PLAN S-3 FOUNDATION SECTIONS & DETAILS S-4 FRAMING SECTIONS & DETAILS S-5 FRAMING SECTIONS & DETAILS S-6 SPECIFICATIONS S-7 SPECIFICATIONS S-8 SPECIFICATIONS S-9 SPECIFICATIONS MECHANICAL M-1 HVAC FLOOR PLAN M-2 MECHANICAL DETAILS MP-1 SPECIFICATIONS PLUMBING P-1 UNDERGROUND PLUMBING FLOOR PLAN P-2 PLUMBING FLOOR PLAN P-3 PLUMBING DETAILS SPRINKLER FP-1 PARTIAL SITE FIRE PROTECTION PLAN AND SPEC. FP-2 FIRE SPRINKLER PLAN, NOTES, AND DETAILS LECTRICAL E-1 LIGHTING\ POWER\ SYSTEMS FLOOR PLAN E-2 ELECTRICAL DETAILS E-3 ELECTRICAL LEGENDS, SCHEDULES AND RISER E-4 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS E-5 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ES-1 ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN # Vendor/National Account Scope Of Work/Product: Purchased by Installed by Contacts 1. US Signs Signage Owner Vendor Nicola Blackwell, 1-800-809-8883, nicola@USSigns.com 2• Specialty Lighting Group Light Fixtures G.C. G.C. Sue Graham, 1-860-767-0110 #208, sg@sslighting.com 3. Girtman & Associates Manned Doors and Hardware G.C. G.C. Tom Breen, 615-350-6000 ext. 46, tbreen@girtman.com 4. Cornell Overhead Doors G.C. G.C. Christina Metz, 1-800-882-6773 ext.614, cmetz@cornellstorefronts.com 5. National Services HVAC G.C. G.C. William Eick, 602-923-6067, w.eick@swnational.com 6. DARKO Company, Inc. Sales Fixtures, Counters, Casework Owner G.C. Allan Forchione, 330-936-7736, allan.forchione@darkoinc.com 7. Guardian Protection Serv. Alarm System Owner Vendor Rick Stark, 1-800-905-5270 ext. 11116, RStark@gpsx.net 8. Green Turtle Americas Ltd. Oil/ Water Interceptor G.C. G.C. Silvano Ferrazzo, 1-877-428-8187, SFerrazzo@Greenturtietech.com 9• IRed River Rack Company Tire Racks TK TK Angrew Ploeger, 940-637-1100, aploeger@ntin.net 10. jEarthworks Vinvl Composite Tile G.C. G.C. Damon Lockhart, 205-873-1444 or Teresa Debow, 1-800-275-7943 ex.8224 NOTE: - ALL ITEMS TO BE PURCHASED BY THE G.C. AND NOT TO BE PURCHASED BY THE SUB -CONTRACTORS - ALL PRODUCTS/ WORK LISTED IN THE CHART ARE TO BE PROVIDED BY THE VENDORSWITHOUT SUBSTITUTION. BIDDING GENERAL CONTRACTORS ARE TO CONTACT EACH VENDOR AND INCLUDE THE VENDOR'S PRICE QUOTE T T17 r tl/ c f T .• `,,y,: i-If� l J1rr1 \�.L V-:Vu: 7�•,tiViTL �Lgp�7-L t Vitt IL Ftj l.�lDLS, FL� )NJD L UILi r"I 8-STRAIGHT PROTOTYPE - REVISION 16 - 06-18-08 V N Y O _ ^ E LU J Z Ov = s +V)UwpMo� �Vo p � oe H Q C 3 m M a oU�DC'f w Q N Ui an d tL N b z `_do. a zzz IU_ i LU O 000 J O h� V J Z� N4 _ N ISSUE DATE 12-1-08 1 • • REV DATE This drawing and the design shown is the property of the architect. The reproduction, copying or use of this drawing without their written consent is prohibited and any infringement will be sub'ecl to legal action. COVER SHEET T=1 LOCATON MAP SECTION 35, TOWNSHIP 25 S, RANGE 21 E [PLAIN flN1131L_, [EX 0 ... Sut'fbu f. L Dr r CA m'ib Ild' 0 ai{.ti<{lIIRG ! -f t�3A i� h4lp s Flij 1" = 3000' Lauivp Dr __=j f �7 A 41 �1 •mq '�� L�atrtki�rtr, PROJECT SITE .r, �5 3 .- - -� 39- Elland Ehvd � i r� ray ( e I I-, P� r R, U..... N Ci r t i I N. i C J i •-ram } ! r t a' 'j'. �.'" .i� MAID-1 1-0-1 [F BOUNDARY AND TOPOGRAPHIC SURVEY SEE SURVEY CIVIL ENGINEERS/PLANNERS: AVID GROUP 2300 CURLEW ROAD; SUITE 100 PALM HARBOR, FLORIDA 34683 PHONE: (727) 789-9500 GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERS: ARDAMAN & ASSOCIATES, INC. 3925 COCONUT PALM DR., STE 115 TAMPA, FLORIDA 33619 PHONE: (813) SURVEYORS: AVID GROUP 2300 CURLEW ROAD; SUITE 100 PALM HARBOR, FLORIDA 34683 PHONE: (727) 789-9500 TRAFFIC ENGINEERS: AVID GROUP 2300 CURLEW ROAD; SUITE 100 PALM HARBOR, FLORIDA 34683 PHONE: (727) 789-9500 ARCHITECT: EDWARDS + HOTCHKISS ARCHITECTS 219 WARD CIRCLE, SUITE ONE BRENTWOOD, TN 37027 PHOME: (615) 377-3111 LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT: AVID GROUP 2300 CURLEW ROAD; SUITE 100 PALM HARBOR, FLORIDA 34683 PHONE: (727) 789-9500 U7�UTV COMP"IAHMS GAS: TECO PEOPLES GAS 1400 CHANNELSIDE DRIVE TAMPA, FLORIDA 33605 KEN MIRACOLA PHONE: (813) 927-7719 TELEPHONE: VERIZON FLORIDA INC. 1778 PARK AVENUE NORTH, SUITE 200 MAITLAND, FLORIDA 32751 JAMES COOPER PHONE: (863) 682-7572 CABLE: BRIGHT HOUSE NETWORKS 30432 SR 54 WESLEY CHAPEL, FLORIDA 33543 PHONE: (813) 856-5129, x84402 POWER: PROGRESS ENERGY FLORIDA, INC. 36453 EILAND BOULEVARD ZEPHYRHILLS, FLORIDA 33542 DARRYLFOSHEE PHONE: (813) 783-6944 SEWER: CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS 5335 EIGHTH STREET ZEPHYRHILLS, FLORIDA 33542-4312 LOUIE SELLARS PHONE: (813) 780-0008 WATER: CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS 5335 EIGHTH STREET ZEPHYRHILLS, FLORIDA 33542-4312 LOUIE SELLARS PHONE: (813) 780-0008 TIRE KINGDOM AsiluNijibLmil A U.S. HWY 301, ZEPHYRHILLS, FL 33542 PASCO COUNTY, FLORIDA Prepared For NOM ZEPHYRHILLS, 3841 GREEN HILLS VILLAGE DRIVE, SUITE 400 NASHVILLE, TN 37215 PHONE: (615) 269-5444 FAX: (615) 383-6866 Prepared By., CIVIL ENGINEERING LAND PLANNING TRAFFIC/TRANSPORTATION LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES SURVEYING GIS 46 HOUR5 BEFORE YOU DIG CALL SUNSHINE 1-800-432-4770 T5 TI1E LAW IN FLORIDA FL STATUTE 553,651 (1 979) KEQUIRE5 MIN. OF 2 DAYS AND MAX. OF 5 DAYS NOTICE BEFORE YOU EXCAVATE. FDOT MAINTENANCE YARD TO EE CONTACTED 72 HOURS PRIOR TO BEGINNING CONSTRUCTION. 2300 CURLEW ROAD, STE 100 PALM HARBOR FLORIDA 34683 PHONE (727) 789-9500 FAX (727) 784-6662 AVIDGROUPCOM LLC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 NO. DATE DESCRIPTION BY R E V I S 1 0 N S THE DESIGN AND IDEAS INCORPORATED HEREIN, AS AN INSTRUMENT OF PROFESSIONAL SERVICE, IS THE PROPERTY OF AVID GROUP AND IS NOT TO BE USED FOR ANY OTHER PROJECT WITHOUT WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION FROM AVID GROUP. DIMENSION INFORMATION SHOULD NOT BE OBTAINED BY SCALING THE PLANS. DIMENSION INFORMATION NOT PROVIDED HEREIN CAN BE OBTAINED BY CONTACTING AVID GROUP, @ (727)789-9500. 1 COVER SHEET 2 SPECIFICATIONS & NOTES 3 HORIZONTAL CONTROL PLAN 4 PAVING GRADING & DRAINAGE PLAN 5 UTILITY PLAN 6 STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION NOTES 7 STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION DETAILS 8 DETAIL SHEET 9 DETAIL SHEET 10 DETAIL SHEET L1 LANDSCAPE PLAN L2 LANDSCAPE DETAILS AND SPECIFICATIONS IR1 IRRIGATION PLAN IR2 IRRIGATION DETAILS AND NOTES S SURVEY z OWNER: NOM ZEPHYRHILLS, LLC 3841 GREEN HILLS VILLAGE DRIVE, SUITE 400 NASHVILLE, TENNESSEE 37215 PROPERTY LOCATION: PROPERTY IS LOCATED WITHIN THE ZEPHYR COMMONS COMMERCIAL SUBDIVISION AND IS RECOGNIZED AS PARCEL 10 IN THE RECORDED PLAT. (BOOK1, PAGE 55) AS SURVEYED BY AVID GROUP JOB NO. 2673-001, DATED 08-24-2008. ZONING: C-2 (COMMERCIAL) FUTURE LAND USE: PROPOSED LAND USE: MU (MIXED USE) COMMERCIAL (AUTO REPAIR FACILITY) BUILDING SETBACK (MIN.): REQUIRED FRONT: 30' SIDE: 0' SIDE 0' REAR: 20' LANDSCAPE BUFFERS: REQUIRED FRONT: 20' SIDE (N) 0' SIDE (S) 5' REAR: 10, LOT COVERAGE CALCULATIONS: ©3s 00-AX (W) 50' (N) 50' (S) 20' (E) PROPOSED 20' WITH IN FUTURE ROW 2.6' 5' 20' AREA % OF TOTAL SITE AREA BUILDING AREA 7,026 SF = PARKING LOT AREA 15,486 SF = SIDEWALK AREA 727 SF = 0.16 AC 0.36 AC 0A2 AC 24% 52% 3% TOTAL IMPERVIOUS AREA 23,239 SF — 0.54 AC 79% PERVIOUS PARKING AREA 2,347 SF = 0,03 AC 5 OPEN SPACE AREA 4,049 SF = 0.11 AC 16% TOTAL PERVIOUS AREA 6,396 SF = 0,14 AC 21% TOTAL SITE AREA 29,635 SF — 0.68 AC 100.00% PARKING (REQUIRED): AUTO REPAIR: RETAIL SPACE:1 / 200 SF X 1,360 SF = 7 SPACES 3 PER BAY X 8 BAYS = 24 SPACES STANDARD STALL SIZE = 9' X 20' HANDICAP STALL SIZE = 12' X 20' 151, PARKING (PROPOSED): �- STANDARD PARKING SPACES = 29 HC SPACES = _ 2 TOTAL PARKING SPACES = 31 FLOOD ZONE: THIS PROPERTY LIES IN FLOOD ZONE "X", AS PER FEDERAL EMERGENCY MANAGEMENT AGENC 0 INSURANCE RATE MAP; COMMUNITY PANEL No. 11202300290D, DATED 9/30/1992 i erg _:D1N NC 0� � n08 TIRE KINGDOM1 0-1 6-2008 AVID GROUP JOB # 2673-001 C-1 Y AVID GROUP IS HEREBY RELEASING THESE PLANS FOR CONSTRUCTION PER THE FOLLOWING PRINCIPAL AUTHORIZATION: n 0 N H = a it a. 0 0 q W M 4 £ I 3 a GENERAL CONSTRUCTION NOTES (9/13/04) CLEARING AND EROSION CONTROL NOTES (4/30/04) SANITARY SEWER NOTES (04/02/04) WATER SYSTEM NOTES (04/02/04) m 1. SEE SURVEY FOR SITE SPECIFIC BENCH MARK AND ELEVATION DATUM. 1. ALL TREES TO REMAIN SHALL BE PROTECTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH LOCAL REGULATIONS PRIOR TO THE START OF ANY CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES. 1. ALL SANITARY SEWER MAINS AND LATERALS SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM OF 36 INCHES OF COVER. 1. ALL WATER MAINS SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM OF 36 INCHES OF COVER. 2. LOCATIONS, DIMENSIONS AND ELEVATIONS OF EXISTING UTILITIES, STRUCTURES, AND OTHER FEATURES ARE SHOWN ACCORDING TO STANDARD UTILITY ATLAS SHEETS OR OTHER INFORMATION OBTAINED AT THE TIME OF PREPARATION OF THESE PLANS. PRIOR 2. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PREPARE THE SITE AS DIRECTED BY THE GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER PRIOR TO STARTING 2. ALL SANITARY SEWER WORK SHALL CONFORM TO LOCAL REGULATORY STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS. 2. ALL WATER SYSTEM WORK SHALL CONFORM TO LOCAL REGULATORY STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS. TO CONSTRUCTION, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY THE LOCATION, DIMENSIONS, AND ELEVATION OF ALL EXISTING UTILITIES, ACTUAL CONSTRUCTION. COPIES OF THE GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER'S RECOMMENDATIONS AND REPORT ARE AVAILABLE Z STRUCTURES AND OTHER FEATURES AFFECTING THE WORK AND MAKE ARRANGEMENTS FOR REQUIRED RELOCATIONS WITH THE THROUGH THE OWNER OR THE GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER. QUESTIONS REGARDING SITE PREPARATION REQUIREMENTS 3. PRIOR TO COMMENCING WORK WHICH REQUIRES CONNECTING NEW WORK TO EXISTING LINES OR APPURTENANCES, THE 3. CONFLICTS BETWEEN WATER AND STORM OR SANITARY SEWER SHALL BE RESOLVED BY ADJUSTING THE WATER O AFFECTED UTILITY. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL COOPERATE WITH THE UTILITY DURING RELOCATION OPERATIONS. SHALL BE DIRECTED TO THE GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER AND OWNER. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY LOCATION AND ELEVATION OF EXISTING CONNECTION POINT AND NOTIFY ENGINEER OF ANY LINES AS REQUIRED. Q CONFLICTS OR DISCREPANCIES. N 3. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL EXERCISE EXTREME CAUTION IN AREAS OF BURIED UTILITIES AND SHALL PROVIDE AT LEAST 48 HOURS 3. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL CLEAR AND GRUB ONLY THOSE PORTIONS OF THE SITE NECESSARY FOR CONSTRUCTION. 4 DUCTILE IRON PI HA BE PR ALL DUC LE 0 PE SHALL PRESSURE CLASS 350 IN ACCORDANCE WITH ANSI A 21,51 AWWA C151 ( ) 0� NOTICE TO ALL UTILITY COMPANIES BEFORE PERFORMING ANY EXCAVATION. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL HAVE UTILITY LOCATIONS ALL DISTURBED OPEN AREAS SHALL BE SEEDED, MULCHED, OR PLANTED WITH OTHER APPROVED LANDSCAPE 4. PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM SPECIFICATION DESIGNATION D-3034, SDR 26. THE JOINTS SHALL AND PIPE SHALL RECEIVE EXTERIOR BITUMINOUS COATING IN ACCORDANCE WITH ANSI A 21.51 (AWWA C151) AND O MARKED BY CALLING "SUNSHINE" AT 1 800 432 4770 AT LEAST 48 HOURS PRIOR TO THE START OF ANY EXCAVATION. MATERIAL IMMEDIATELY FOLLOWING CONSTRUCTION. CONFORM TO ASTM D-3212. INSTALLATION OF SDR 26 PIPE SHALL BE IN STRICT ACCORDANCE WITH THE REQUIREMENTS SHALL BE CEMENT MORTAR LINED, STANDARD THICKNESS IN ACCORDANCE WITH ANSI A 21.4 (,AWWA C104). Z 0 H CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR CONTACTING ALL UTILITIES NOT INCLUDED IN THE "SUNSHINE" PROGRAM. OF ASTM SPECIFICATION SECTION D2321. ALL SANITARY SEWER PIPELINES SHALL BE SOLID GREEN IN COLOR. ::) 4. THE TOP SOIL REMOVED DURING CLEARING AND GRUBBING SHALL BE STOCKPILED AT A SITE DESIGNATED BY THE 5. ALL FITTINGS 3" OR LARGER SHALL BE MECHANICAL JOINT, DUCTILE IRON PRESSURE CLASS 350 IN IL 4. CHAPTER 77 153 OF THE FLORIDA STATUTES REQUIRES THAT AN EXCAVATOR NOTIFY ALL GAS UTILITIES A MINIMUM OF TWO (2) OWNER AND SHALL BE USED FOR LANDSCAPING PURPOSES UNLESS OTHERWISE DIRECTED BY THE OWNER. 5. ALL PVC FORCE MAINS SHALL BE PRESSURE CLASS 200, SDR 21, COLOR GREEN, WITH A GREEN MAGNETIC TAPE A ACCORDANCE WITH ANSI A 21.10 AND A 21.11 (AWWA C110 AND AWWA C111 RESPECTIVELY). FITTINGS SHALL ¢ < WORKING DAYS PRIOR TO EXCAVATING. THESE PLANS SHOW ONLY THE APPROXIMATE LOCATION OF GAS MAINS AND THE GAS MINIMUM OF 2" WIDE PLACED 1 FOOT BELOW THE PROPOSED GRADE. THE PRINTING ON THE MAGNETIC TAPE SHALL READ "FORCE BE CEMENT MORTAR LINED AND BITUMINOUS COATED IN ACCORDANCE WITH AWWA C104 AND AWWA C151 co co a MAINS MUST BE FIELD VERIFIED BY ON SITE INSPECTION BY GAS COMPANY PERSONNEL. EXCAVATORS ARE INSTRUCTED TO 5. ALL CONSTRUCTION DEBRIS AND OTHER WASTE MATERIAL SHALL BE DISPOSED OF OFF -SITE IN ACCORDANCE WITH MAIN" RESPECTIVELY. z TELEPHONE THE GAS COMPANY A MINIMUM OF TWO 2 WORKING F ENTERING ( ) K NG DAYS BEFORE ENE G A CONSTRUCTION AREA.0 ALL APPLICABLE REGULATIONS. Ft 6. ALL DUCTILE IRON PIPE SHALL BE PRESSURE CLASS 350 IN ACCORDANCE WITH ANSI A 21.51-91 (AWWA C151) AND 6. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL TEMPORARY BLOW -OFFS AT THE END OF WATER SERVICE LATERALS TO 5. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL REVIEW THE PLANS FOR CONFLICTS OR OTHER DISCREPANCIES PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. THE 6. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL OBTAIN ALL PERMITS REQUIRED FOR REMOVAL OF EXISTING STRUCTURES. PIPE SHALL RECEIVE EXTERIOR BITUMINOUS COATING IN ACCORDANCE WITH ANSI A 21.51 (AWWA C151) AND SHALL BE ASSURE ADEQUATE FLUSHING AND DISINFECT ION. Z CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY THE ENGINEER AND OWNER OF ANY CONFLICTS OR DISCREPANCIES BEFORE PERFORMING ANY WORK. CEMENT MORTAR LINED, STANDARD THICKNESS IN ACCORDANCE WITH ANSI A 21.4 (AWWA C104). 7_ THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY ALL UTILITIES TO DISCONNECT OR REMOVE THEIR FACILITIES PRIOR TO REMOVAL 7. ALL PVC WATER MAINS 4" THROUGH 12" SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH AWWA C900. PIPE SHALL BE p 6. ALL PROPOSED UNDERGROUND UTILITIES MUST BE IN PLACE, TESTED AND INSPECTED PRIOR TO PAVEMENT SURFACE COURSE OR DEMOLITION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES. 7. ALL SANITARY SEWER GRAVITY MAINS OR SANITARY SEWER FORCE MAINS THAT REQUIRE DIP ARE TO BE POLYLINED OR CLASS 150 AND MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF SDR 18 IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM D-2241. CONSTRUCTION. EPDXY LINED. O 8. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR MAKING A VISUAL INSPECTION OF THE SITE AND SHALL BE WATER MAIN PIPING LARGER THAN 2" AND SMALLER THAN 4" SHALL BE PRESSURE CLASS 200 AND MEET 11,8. 7. IT IS THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO BECOME FAMILIAR WITH THE CONDITIONS AND INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS OF ALL RESPONSIBLE FOR DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL OF ALL UNDERGROUND AND ABOVE GROUND STRUCTURES THAT WILL 8. ALL SANITARY SEWER RIMS AND COVERS SHALL BE TRAFFIC RATED FOR H-20 LOADING. THE REQUIREMENTS OF SDR 21 IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM D2241 UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE. w = PERMITS ISSUED FOR THE PROJECT. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL OBTAIN ALL NECESSARY PERMITS PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION AND NOT BE INCORPORATED WITH THE NEW FACILITIES. SHOULD ANY DISCREPANCY EXIST, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL w F- SHALL SCHEDULE ALL INSPECTIONS IN ACCORDANCE WITH AGENCY REQUIREMENTS. CONTACT THE OWNER FOR CLARIFICATION PRIOR TO DEMOLITION. 9. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE CERTIFIED UTILITY RECORD DRAWINGS, SIGNED AND SEALED BY A PROFESSIONAL 9. ALL PIPE AND FITTINGS 2" AND SMALLER SHALL BE SCHEDULE 40 PVC WITH SOLVENT WELDED SLEEVE TYPE ~ w 8. ALL SPECIFICATIONS AND DOCUMENTS REFERRED TO SHALL BE OF LATEST REVISIONS AND/OR LATEST EDITION. 9. PRIOR TO THE COMPLETION OF CONSTRUCTION, THE RETENTION/ DETENTION AREAS SHALL BE RESHAPED, CLEARED LAND SURVEYOR. THE RECORD DRAWINGS SHALL SHOW FINAL GRADES AND LOCATIONS ON ALL SANITARY SEWER MAINS, STRUCTURES AND SERVICES. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE TEN COPIES OF THE CERTIFIED RECORD DRAWINGS TO THE JOINTS. ❑ d z OF SILT, MUD AND DEBRIS, AND GRASSED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS. ENGINEER. 10. ALL GATE VALVES 2" OR LARGER SHALL BE RESILIENT SEAT OR RESILIENT WEDGE MEETING THE O O 9. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL COMPLETE THE WORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH ALL APPLICABLE STATUTES, RULES, REGULATIONS AND REQUIREMENTS OF AWWA C509 Z U PERMIT CONDITIONS. SANITARY SEWER TESTING AND INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS TESTING04 02 04 ( / / ) 11. ALL FIRE HYDRANTS SHALL MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF AWWA C502 AND SHALL BE APPROVED BY THE � 10. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS TO THE ENGINEER FOR ALL PRECAST AND MANUFACTURED ITEMS TO BE LOCAL UTILITY AND FIRE MARSHAL. z USED ON THE PROJECT. ALL SHOP DRAWINGS ARE TO BE REVIEWED AND APPROVED BY THE CONTRACTOR PRIOR TO SUBMITTAL 00 TO THE ENGINEER. 1. ALL GRAVITY SEWER PIPING SHALL BE SUBJECT TO A VISUAL INSPECTION BY THE ENGINEER. CONTRACTOR SHALL 12. MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION METHODS FOR WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE ¢ T C)CID NOTIFY THE ENGINEER 48 HOURS IN ADVANCE TO SCHEDULE INSPECTION. WITH ALL LOCAL REGULATIONS, PLANS, AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION, LATEST REVISION THEREOF, !!!�a U) c7 p N of 11. AT LEAST THREE (3) WORKING DAYS PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY THE ENGINEER, OWNER, AND PAVING, GRADING AND DRAINAGE NOTES (4/30/04) AND SUPPLEMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS THERETO. APPROVAL AND CONSTRUCTION OF ALL POTABLE WATER SERVICE Z j z = 0 APPROPRIATE PERMITTING AGENCIES OF THE CONTRACTOR'S NAME, STARTING DATE, PROJECTED SCHEDULE, AND OTHER 2. THE GRAVITY SANITARY SEWER AND ALL SERVICE LATERALS SHALL BE SUBJECT TO AN INFILTRATION/EXFILTRATION MAIN EXTENSIONS AND CONNECTIONS MUST BE COORDINATED THROUGH THE LOCAL REGULATORY AGENCY. �, 00 < ti z INFORMATION AS REQUIRED. 1. ALL DELETERIOUS SUBSTANCES (I.E. MUCK, PEAT, BURIED DEBRIS) SHALL BE EXCAVATED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE TEST IN ACCORDANCE WITH LOCAL REGULATIONS. TESTS ARE TO BE CERTIFIED BY THE ENGINEER OF RECORD AND SHALL J Z 2 N w __ PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS, OR AS DIRECTED BY THE GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER OR OWNER. DELETERIOUS MATERIAL IS BE SUBMITTED TO THE LOCAL AUTHORITIES FOR APPROVAL. COORDINATION AND NOTIFICATION OF ALL PARTIES SHALL BE 13. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE CERTIFIED UTILITY RECORD DRAWINGS, SIGNED AND SEALED BY A < < 0 0 ! O 12. WORK PERFORMED UNDER THIS CONTRACT SHALL INTERFACE SMOOTHLY WITH OTHER WORK BEING PERFORMED ON SITE BY TO BE STOCKPILED OR REMOVED FROM THE SITE AS DIRECTED BY THE OWNER. EXCAVATED AREAS SHALL BE THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY. PROFESSIONAL LAND SURVEYOR. THE RECORD DRAWINGS SHALL SHOW THE LOCATIONS, DIMENSIONS AND 0 to Cr Cr ¢ a_ a_ < O_ OTHERS. IT WILL BE NECESSARY FOR THE CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE AND SCHEDULE HIS ACTIVITIES WITH OTHERS WHERE BACKFILLED WITH APPROVED MATERIALS AND COMPACTED AS SPECIFIED BY THE GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER OR OWNER. ELEVATIONS OF ALL WATER MAINS, SERVICES, MANHOLES, GRAVITY SEWER MAINS, SERVICE LATERALS, PUMP w O NECESSARY. 3. ALL FORCE MAINS SHALL BE SUBJECT TO A HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE TEST IN ACCORDANCE WITH LOCAL REGULATIONS. STATIONS AND FORCE MAINS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE TEN COPIES OF THE CERTIFIED RECORD w 2. IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO FIELD ADJUST PAVEMENT ELEVATIONS TO PRESERVE THE ROOT SYSTEMS OF TREES TO BE TESTS SHALL BE CERTIFIED BY THE ENGINEER OF RECORD AND SUBMITTED TO THE LOCAL AUTHORITIES FOR APPROVAL. DRAWINGS TO THE ENGINEER. 0 = H 13. SITE WORK CONCRETE SHALL HAVE A COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF AT LEAST 3,000 PSI. AT 28 DAYS UNLESS OTHERWISE SAVED. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE WITH OWNER'S ENGINEER PRIOR TO ANY GRADE CHANGE. COORDINATION AND NOTIFICATION OF ALL PARTIES SHALL BE THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY. z NOTED. FDEP NOTES (04/02/04) o< 14. ALL PRIVATE AND PUBLIC PROPERTY AFFECTED BY THIS WORK SHALL BE RESTORED TO A CONDITION EQUAL TO OR BETTER 3. THE CONTRACTOR IS TO SUBMIT A PROPOSED JOINTING PATTERN TO THE OWNER FOR APPROVAL PRIOR TO \ 2p o < CONSTRUCTING CONCRETE PAVEMENT. SANITARY SEWER NOTES (09/26/06) B. ALL PIPE, PIPE FITTINGS, PIPE JOINT PACKING AND JOINTING MATERIALS, VALVES, FIRE HYDRANTS, AND O w THAN EXISTING CONDITIONS UNLESS SPECIFICALLY EXEMPTED BY THE PLANS. METERS INSTALLED UNDER THIS PROJECT WILL CONFORM TO APPLICABLE AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION -6 W 0 --I UJI 15. ALL DISTURBED AREAS THAT ARE NOT TO BE SODDED, ARE TO BE SEEDED AND MULCHED IN ACCORDANCE WITH FDOT 4. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AN EXPANSION JOINT AT ABUTMENT OF CONCRETE AND ANY STRUCTURE. 1, DEFLECTION TEST (AWWA) STANDARDS. t F W O a PRIOR TO ACCEPTANCE OF THE COMPLETED PVC SEWER LINE, A MANDREL OF NOT LESS THAN 95 PERCENT OF THE €- `.. z a 0 ,ri M STANDARDS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL MAINTAIN ALL GRASSED AREAS UNTIL A SATISFACTORY STAND OF GRASS, ACCEPTABLE TO 5. ALL PAVEMENT MARKINGS IN PUBLIC RIGHTS OF WAY SHALL BE MADE WITH PERMANENT THERMOPLASTIC, AND SHALL INTERNAL DIAMETER OF THE PLASTIC PIPE SHALL BE PULLED FREELY THROUGH THE PIPE, BY HAND, THROUGH EACH C. ALL PUBLIC WATER SYSTEM COMPONENTS, EXCLUDING FIRE HYDRANTS, THAT WILL BE INSTALLED UNDER THIS V)0 Q M w THE APPLICABLE REGULATORY AGENCIES, OWNER, AND ENGINEER, HAS BEEN ACHIEVED. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BEAR THE CONFORM TO FDOT STANDARD INDEX NO. 17346 UNLESS INDICATED OTHERWISE ON THE DRAWINGS. PARKING STALL REACH OF SEWER. AT LEAST EIGHT (8) MONTHS AFTER INSTALLATION AND FINAL BACKFILL, BUT NO LATER THAN 30 DAYS PROJECT AND THAT WILL COME INTO CONTACT WITH DRINKING WATER WILL CONFORM TO NSF INTERNATIONAL C0 �Q c7 r, m W RESPONSIBILITY OF ALL REMEDIAL WORK REQUIRED UNTIL THE SYSTEM HAS BEEN ACCEPTED. STRIPING SHALL BE 4" WIDE PAINTED WHITE STRIPES UNLESS INDICATED OTHERWISE ON THE DRAWINGS. PRIOR TO FINAL ACCEPTANCE OF THE PROJECT, ALL PLASTIC PIPELINES SHALL BE MEASURED FOR VERTICAL RING STANDARD 61. 'T'; W w ❑ = 16. ALL SODDED AND SEEDED AREAS BE WATERED AND FERTILIZED UNTIL THE PROJECT IS COMPLETED AND ACCEPTED BY THE 6. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL EXTRA BASE MATERIAL WHEN THE DISTANCE BETWEEN THE PAVEMENT ELEVATION DEFLECTION. D. ALL PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS INSTALLED UNDER THIS PROJECT WILL CONTAIN NO MORE THAN 8.0% LEAD, AND I .• I_ -(n < M Z W c'o O a OWNER. AND THE TOP OF THE PIPE EXCEEDS THE MINIMUM DIMENSIONS SHOWN IN FDOT INDEX 205. A VERTICAL RING DEFLECTION TEST SHALL BE REQUIRED PRIOR TO EXPIRATION OF THE CONTRACTOR'S MAINTENANCE OR ANY SOLDER OR FLUX USED IN THIS PROJECT WILL CONTAIN NO MORE THAN 0.2% LEAD. ..f. 6- O 17. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL LOCATE AND FLAG ALL PROPERTY CORNERS PRIOR TO FINAL ENGINEERING INSPECTION AND STANDARD INDICES REFER TO THE LATEST EDITION OF FOOT "ROADWAY AND TRAFFIC DESIGN STANDARDS". PERFORMANCE BOND, APPROXIMATELY 10 MONTHS AFTER FINAL ACCEPTANCE. THIS TEST SHALL BE PERFORMED BY AN INDEPENDENT TESTING LABORATORY. MAXIMUM RING DEFLECTION OF THE PIPELINE UNDER LOAD SHALL BE LIMITED TO FIVE E. ALL PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS INSTALLED UNDER THIS PROJECT WILL BE COLOR CODED OR MARKED IN � �-•t• I N 0 m O p 07. CERTIFICATION. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BEAR ALL COSTS INCURRED AS A CONSEQUENCE OF LOST OR DISTURBED PROPERTY PERCENT (5%) OF THE VERTICAL INTERNAL PIPE DIAMETER. ALL PIPE EXCEEDING THIS DEFLECTION SHALL BE CONSIDERED ACCORDANCE WITH SUBPARAGRAPH 62-555.320(21)(B)3, F.A.C., USING BLUE AS A PREDOMINANT COLOR. ❑ CORNERS. LOST OR DISTURBED PROPERTY CORNERS SHALL BE REESTABLISHED BY A PROFESSIONAL LAND SURVEYOR. 8. ALL STORM SEWER PIPE SHALL BE REINFORCED CONCRETE CLASS III (ASTM C-76) UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED IN TO HAVE REACHED THE LIMIT OF ITS SERVICEABILITY AND SHALL BE RELAID OR REPLACED BY THE CONTRACTOR AT NO (UNDERGROUND PLASTIC PIPE WILL BE SOLID -WALL BLUE PIPE, WILL HAVE A CO -EXTRUDED BLUE EXTERNAL > < 18. THE GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER SHALL SUPPLY THE ENGINEER AND OWNER WITH A PHOTOCOPY OF ALL COMPACTION TESTS AND THE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS. ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER. SKIN, OR WILL BE WHITE OR BLACK PIPE WITH BLUE STRIPES INCORPORATED INTO, OR APPLIED TO, THE PIPE '� OTHER REQUIRED MATERIALS TESTS UNDER THIS CONTRACT. THE GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER SHALL CERTIFY, IN WRITING, TO THE WALL; AND UNDERGROUND METAL OR CONCRETE PIPE WILL HAVE BLUE STRIPES APPLIED TO THE PIPE WALL. ENGINEER AND OWNER, THAT ALL TESTING REQUIREMENTS HAVE BEEN SATISFIED. 9. PVC STORM PIPE, 12" AND SMALLER, SHALL CONFORM TO AWWA C-900, SDR-18, CLASS 150, UNLESS OTHERWISE 2. FORCE MAINS PIPE STRIPED DURING MANUFACTURING OF THE PIPE WILL HAVE CONTINUOUS STRIPES THAT RUN PARALLEL TO C) 11 \N INDICATED IN THE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS. a. ORDER OF OPERATIONS: FILL THE SYSTEM WITH WATER AT A VELOCITY OF APPROXIMATELY 1 FOOT PER SECOND THE AXIS OF THE PIPE, THAT ARE LOCATED AT NO GREATER THAN 90-DEGREE INTERVALS AROUND THE PIPE, ��! r 19. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR COORDINATION OF ALL REQUIRED TESTING WITH THE GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER. WHILE NECESSARY MEASURES ARE TAKEN TO ELIMINATE ALL AIR. DO NOT LEAVE FILL LINE CONNECTED TO SEWER LINE AND THAT WILL REMAIN INTACT DURING AND AFTER INSTALLATION OF THE PIPE. IF TAPE OR PAINT IS USED TO � TESTING IS REQUIRED AS DICTATED BY THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, CONSTRUCTION PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS. UPON 10. PIPE LENGTHS SHOWN ARE APPROXIMATE. UNLESS AN RPZ BACKFLOW PREVENTER IS PLACED BETWEEN THE POTABLE WATER SUPPLY AND THE LINE BEING FILLED. STRIPE PIPE DURING INSTALLATION OF THE PIPE, THE TAPE OR PAINT WILL BE APPLIED IN A CONTINUOUS LINE cn o COMPLETION OF THE WORK, THE GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER SHALL SUBMIT CERTIFICATIONS TO THE ENGINEER AND OWNER THAT THAT RUNS PARALLEL TO THE AXIS OF THE PIPE AND THAT IS LOCATED ALONG THE TOP OF THE PIPE; FOR PIPE WITH AN INTERNAL DIAMETER OF 24 OR o O LO STATE THAT ALL REQUIREMENTS HAVE BEEN MET. 11. ALL DRAINAGE STRUCTURE FRAMES, GRATES AND COVERS WITHIN TRAFFIC AREAS SHALL BE TRAFFIC RATED FOR b. PRESSURE TESTS & LEAKAGE: THE CONTRACTOR SHALL TEST COMPLETED SECTIONS OF LINE, INCLUDING FITTINGS, INCHES GREATER, TAPE OR PAINT WILL BE APPLIED IN < rn N H-20 LOADINGS. WITH WATER. THIS TESTING, HOWEVER, DOES NOT RELIEVE THE CONTRACTOR OF HIS RESPONSIBILITY TO REPAIR OR CONTINUOUS LINES ALONG EACH SIDE OF THE PIPE AS WELL AS ALONG THE TOP OF THE PIPE. ABOVEGROUND p U_ c6 w � 20. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL REVIEW ALL PROJECT GEOTECHNICAL REPORTS PRIOR TO BIDDING AND THE START OF CONSTRUCTION. REPLACE ANY CRACKED OR DEFECTIVE PIPE. ALL WORK NECESSARY TO SECURE A TIGHT LINE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR. TESTING SHALL BE PERFORMED IN THE PRESENCE OF THE INSPECTOR AND THE CONTRACTOR. COST FOR PIPE WILL BE PAINTED BLUE OR WILL BE COLOR CODED OR MARKED LIKE UNDERGROUND PIPE.) °C - m v Op 12. THE CONTRACTOR IS TO GRASS THE RETENTION/DETENTION POND AS INDICATED ON PLANS WITHIN ONE -WEEK w p 21. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL MAINTAIN A COPY OF THE APPROVED CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS AND ALL PERMITS AT THE FOLLOWING CONSTRUCTION OF THE POND. TESTING SHALL BE INCIDENTAL TO LINE CONSTRUCTION. 0. THE OPEN END OF THE AIR RELIEF PIPE FROM ALL AUTOMATIC AIR RELIEF VALVES INSTALLED UNDER THIS Er N iz � CONSTRUCTION SITE. PROJECT WILL BE EXTENDED TO AT LEAST ONE FOOT ABOVE GRADE AND WILL BE PROVIDED WITH A SCREENED, °C a r; O 13. MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION METHODS FOR STREETS AND STORM DRAINAGE CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE IN PRESSURE TEST: THE NEWLY LAID PIPING OR ANY VALVED SECTION OF PIPING SHALL, UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, DOWNWARD -FACING ELBOW. _ = r w C" °C U , 22. THE CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS DO NOT INCLUDE SPECIFICATION FOR CONSTRUC110N SAFETY. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE ACCORDANCE WITH LOCAL REGULATIONS AND THE FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION STANDARD BE SUBJECTED FOR TWO HOURS TO A LEAKAGE TEST. RAISE THE PRESSURE BY PUMP TO 150 PSI, 150% OF DESIGN .j : o � � z �- o J O x RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL MEANS AND METHODS OF CONSTRUCTION SITE SAFETY. SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION, LATEST REVISION THEREOF AND SUPPLEMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS WORKING PRESSURE, OR TEST PRESSURE AS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS, WHICHEVER IS GREATER. MEASURE THE PRESSURE Q. NEW OR ALTERED WATER MAINS INCLUDED IN THIS PROJECT WILL BE INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH o � C:) < I _ < j THERETO. AT THE LOW POINT ON THE SYSTEM COMPENSATING FOR GAUGE ELEVATION. MAINTAIN THIS PRESSURE (+ OR - 5PSI) FOR APPLICABLE AWWA STANDARDS OR IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURERS' RECOMMENDED PROCEDURES. N a cl> a U_ 2 HOURS. IF PRESSURE CANNOT BE MAINTAINED USING REASONABLE PUMPING RATE, DETERMINE CAUSE, REPAIR, AND 14. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE CERTIFIED RECORD DRAWINGS, SIGNED AND SEALED BY A PROFESSIONAL LAND REPEAT THE TEST UNTIL SUCCESSFUL. THE ALLOWABLE LEAKAGE SHALL BE NO GREATER THAN ALLOWANCES SHOWN IN R. A CONTINUOUS AND UNIFORM BEDDING WILL BE PROVIDED IN TRENCHES FOR UNDERGROUND PIPE INSTALLED z z O W z SURVEYOR. THE RECORD DRAWINGS SHALL SHOW FINAL GRADES, INVERTS, AND LOCATIONS OF ALL STORMWATER TABLE 6A - HYDROSTATIC TESTING, SECTION 5.2, OF AWWA C 600-93, AWWA STANDARD FOR INSTALLATION OF DUCTILE UNDER THIS PROJECT; BACKFILL MATERIAL WILL BE TAMPED IN LAYERS AROUND UNDERGROUND PIPE INSTALLED .j F= Z - = U - O TESTING SCHEDULE GUIDE 4/30/04) ( FACILITIES INCLUDING THE STORMWATER POND, DRAINAGE STRUCTURES, BERMS & SWALES. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL IRON WATER MAINS AND THEIR APPURTENANCES. CONTACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL COSTS, LABOR, MATERIALS, UNDER THIS PROJECT AND TO A SUFFICIENT HEIGHT ABOVE THE PIPE TO ADEQUATELY SUPPORT AND PROTECT J w z ¢ U w ' -' PROVIDE TEN COPIES OF THE CERTIFIED RECORD DRAWINGS TO THE ENGINEER FOR THE PURPOSE OF CERTIFYING THE AND EQUIPMENT TO PERFORM THE TESTING. ALL VISIBLE LEAKS, BROKEN OR CRACKED PIPE, VALVES, ETC. SHALL BE THE PIPE; AND UNSUITABLY SIZED STONES (AS DESCRIBED IN APPLICABLE AWWA STANDARDS OR � z _j = W U = STORMWATER MANAGEMENT SYSTEM. REPAIRED. MANUFACTURERS' RECOMMENDED INSTALLATION PROCEDURES) FOUND IN TRENCHES WILL BE REMOVED FOR A = a a a = 07 N ITEM TEST TYPE TEST I.D. REQUIREMENT FREQUENCY DEPTH OF AT LEAST SIX INCHES BELOW THE BOTTOM OF UNDERGROUND PIPE INSTALLED UNDER THIS PROJECT. i z o vD p Q PREREQUISITE CONDITIONS FOR TESTING SHALL BE AS FOLLOWS: It w z z = �_ J .< Embankment Max imum Density AASHTO T180 N/A Per So i I Type PAVING, GRADING & DRAINAGE TESTING AND INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS (4/30/04) S. ALL WATER MAIN TEES, BENDS, PLUGS, AND HYDRANTS INSTALLED UNDER THIS PROJECT WILL BE PROVIDED -1 w w Opt imum Moisture ASTM D1557 ALL PIPE HAS BEEN LAID AND THE TRENCH BACKFILLED. WITH THRUST BLOCKS OR RESTRAINED JOINTS TO PREVENT MOVEMENT. > F- n- M U Field Density AASHTO T191, T204 95% of Maximum One Per 2,500 S.F. 1. THE STORM DRAINAGE PIPING AND FILTRATION SYSTEM SHALL BE SUBJECT TO A VISUAL INSPECTION BY THE VALVES SHALL BE PROPERLY LOCATED, OPERABLE AND AT CORRECT ELEVATION. U U 2,T238 Density Hor i zonta I I y * ENGINEER PRIOR TO THE PLACEMENT OF BACKFILL. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY THE ENGINEER 48 HOURS IN ALL REACTION ANCHORS HAVE HAD SUFFICIENT SET OF 3 DAYS. HIGH EARLY STRENGTH CONCRETE, 4500 PSI OR T. NEW OR ALTERED WATER MAINS THAT ARE INCLUDED IN THIS PROJECT AND THAT WILL BE CONSTRUCTED OF = LL cn = ASTM D1556, D2937 Alternating Lifts (12 Inches) ADVANCE TO SCHEDULE AN INSPECTION. GREATER, MAY BE USED TO REDUCE NUMBER OF DAYS. ASBESTOS -CEMENT OR POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE WILL BE PRESSURE AND LEAKAGE TESTED IN ACCORDANCE < Cl 5; 2. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL MAINTAIN THE STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEMS UNTIL FINAL ACCEPTANCE OF THE PROJECT BY LINES SHALL BE PROPERLY VENTED WHERE ENTRAPPED AIR IS A CONSIDERATION. ALL CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES ON THE PROJECT, THAT REQUIRES TRENCHING OR EXCAVATION WITHIN THE LIMITS OF WITH AWWA STANDARD C603 OR C605, RESPECTIVELY, AND ALL OTHER NEW OR ALTERED WATER MAINS INCLUDED IN THIS PROJECT WILL BE PRESSURE AND LEAKAGE TESTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH AWWA STANDARD a � < z J "' THE OWNER. THE LINE LOCATION, SHALL BE COMPLETED PRIOR TO PRESSURE TESTING OF LINE C600. 0. Utility Maximum Density AASHTO T180 N/A Per Soil Type Trench Backf i f I Opt imum Moisture ASTM D1557 3. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR COORDINATING THE REQUIRED TESTING WITH THE GEOTECHNICAL U. NEW OR ALTERED WATER MAINS, INCLUDING FIRE HYDRANT LEADS AND INCLUDING SERVICE LINES THAT WILL Under Roadways F e I d Density AASHTO T191 , T204 95% of Max imum One Per 2, 500 S.F. ENGINEER. TESTING IS REQUIRED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE TESTING SCHEDULE FOUND IN THE CONSTRUCTION BE UNDER THE CONTROL OF A PUBLIC WATER SYSTEM AND THAT HAVE AN INSIDE DIAMETER OF THREE INCHES and Structures T238 Density Hor i zonta I I y * DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS. UPON COMPLETION OF THE WORK, THE GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER SHALL SUBMIT OR GREATER, WILL BE DISINFECTED AND BACTERIOLOGICALLY EVALUATED IN ACCORDANCE WITH RULE v ASTM D1556, D2937 Every 12" Vertically CERTIFICATIONS TO THE ENGINEER AND OWNER STATING THAT ALL REQUIREMENTS HAVE BEEN MET. F.A.C. O D2922D2922 h4bb, 162-555.340, . . - ..,. .., .................__. ... ....... _. ,... . .A,4I-INTA ('6(It0' T TIE 6A II "I'llI.I..",,.",..1.11,11ll.I . ...... _.... ._ . �T,1,,(�I}�ABLFFRESS ETE�;'L`IFAK'LGF At I east one for each p i pe run AA.NEW OR ALTERED WATER MAINS THAT ARE INCLUDED IN THIS PROJECT AND THAT WILL CROSS UNDER SURFACE WATER WILL HAVE A MINIMUM COVER OF TWO FEET. O Backf i I I of Max imum Density AASHTO T180 N/A Per So i I Type (''allowable Leakage per1000 ft, ofPip€line "in MA Structures Optimum Moisture ASTM D 1557 (Thus table is eArerptech fi lain �"s' VA C 600 Section '^ 2 Table 6A) ,� F i e I d Dens i t AASHTO T191, T204 95% of Max imum Ever 12 Vert i ca I I Y T238 Density y Y ....... ......... .•....: -,.. _-....... ._._"".......... .._.. _...m._ __.m. _ w...d.: __W.,. .."m .-."._.® .__._-�:_.__.._._ -- _�.... _ ...-"..,..-„ ! TEST Nt}11NL PIPE ICI JFTE1 II- WATER SYSTEM TESTING AND INSPECT!OIJ REQUIREMENTS (04/02/04) ASTM D1556, D2937t'i:. D2922 __ _____._..�_. __ __ ! ..__... ,......,.,,E. _.. .. ......,._ �........... .. _ ..._...... j ... I ..__. 11 1'RES,Ii_TfE PSI 1 I ! 3 � 1 £ i I -1 6 S l0 1 1 1.4 16 1S4 ' 3r 36 � _ 11 i,._ d -.. 1. ALL COMPONENTS OF THE WATER SYSTEM, INCLUDING FITTINGS, HYDRANTS, CONNECTIONS, AND VALVES SHALL REMAIN UNCOVERED UNTIL PROPERLY PRESSURE TESTED AND ACCEPTED BY THE ENGINEER AND LOCAL Sub rode Bear i n Va I ues LBR -FLA. D.O.T. One Per So i I T e 9 9 Y P ..,--1--_.. a,. _ e� _ . .�_ _ _ a. ! -L50 ;0.32 10, 10.6=4 0.95+ ' L 1? j 1,5 l.g'1 2.?� '� 55 1 2� 8" 3 �. 3,821 4.78 j � "3 1 6 69 '.64 � fi 60 I AUTHORITIES. PRESSURE TESTS SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH LOCAL WATER DEPARTMENT & FDEP Check Point LBR at LL ... _., ._� . -, - - ' n ` I 17 2," �00 i0,30 10 45 0,60 0lagU E L.:.ly ; 1.�tI 1 S0 - 10 � -0 � .., 0 ?,00 3.ta10 4 `0 i � -41 � +s �L Y �1 � 11 ',I SPECIFICATIONS. CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY OWNERS ENGINEER AND WATER DEPARTMENT INSPECTORS 48 See Typ i ca I 500 L.F. Horizontal Iy Pavement Sect ion , _..�, ._.v_. "_�,._. .... ", ....w :T _ _r w-11 ... _.." -, "` �.fi6 1 5 `T�i 6 •4 j 7fi :, 350 �Q S �i1 � I0 3 ICI 8"4 11,1� 1 0 1 C�9 1 g' ? � ; 2." �".S1 3' -411 1 2, HOURS IN ADVANCE OF PERFORMING TESTS. SEE ITEM "T" ABOVE. Max imum Density AASHTO T180 One Per Soil Type Opt imum Moisture ASTM D1557 __ ....._ .. _.. ... ; ,I .... _ ... ! $ .� k i e 31010 (0426 0 39 0 ^ 0 s L 0�4 ; 1 �4 1 t! L 0S ` � %r0 1 13 3 -4 "� -46 6,.,-4 I .! - 2. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL REQUIRED CHLORINATION/DISINFECTION AND BACTERIOLOGICAL Y AASHTO T 1 91 T238 One Per 2 500 S . F . Thickness ASTM D1556, D2922 Hor i zonta I I y _ ._ T _ _ __ ._.., w , __ __.__ r _ ._. _ _f _ __.M _t-1_. W."-1-1-1�_........ y^ [ r5 , I( , � I , I � � � �, y ; � 1. � �, t_ 5 �� I 0...3" il.. 4l 0 1.00 1 =4 1 4 1 1 99 , . 4 94 3 14 4 9f� 6 . #. _.. ; ,._ [ .._... __._ , ,.... _I __ -- .._.-_ ....`. g I I �_ 0 0 0 �i5 Q 4 � d 1 j f1.9` � 1.19 11- #_ i 1 6� : L 0 [ � 1.4 �' I I � ;� � 4 _ -4 49 �+. ,°(ll �e41 " „ SAMPLING IN ACCORDANCE TO ITEM U ABOVE. CONTRACTOR SHALL OBTAIN CLEARANCE OF DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM. COPIES OF ALL BACTERIOLOGICAL TESTS (WHICH SHALL ALSO INDICATE THE CHLORINE RESIDUAL) SHALL BE SUBMITTED TO ENGINEER. Base Bearing Va I ues LBR -FLA. D.O.T. One Per Source or as Mt I . Changes .,�`� '�� ,0';�0,. Q.4 06S 0 Q 113 135I1 150 `"03 2215 ,.01 3a 05 4 3 _41 603' ...... ...... ...,, _.vt._ .e__ ,-_ F,_.._ o __._ . T _ -- ,_ w_. _. d_. ,'4.46 Check Point LBR at 500 L.F. Horiz. �W,„... ? 2'04 !0°�:L iO3� ,d � 06 ;t10 106 f.2S11�;1 0.1,91 � 12 755 M9 3. �09 � a3 See T i ca I YP -_- _ ._.._... - _.. ' L 0 70 , 0 30 t 0 �0 0 ti9 j a S0 0 99 1 19 L , 1 'y 1 �9 1S 3S E 3 �+ 4 1 4 ?" 5A3 I WATER CLEARANCE REQUIREMENTS(04/02/04) V / Max imum Density AASHTO T180 One Per Source Opt imum Moisture ASTM D1557 Pavement Sect ion Thickness AASHTO T191, T238 One Per 2,500 S.F.-! a-._ n s ..- •. --- . -... r -• �,a 6 3 � � �._ 150 i0,1-9 'O 28 '0 3 #_0 55 I0 "-4 �0,92 I110 11,29 , l4 1.66 1.54 # � 11 I � � �4I � 9' _._ - ', .... ... w E I .. -` m` "' ' L 5 0 1 10,25 0.3�4 54 i; 6 W84 i 1 z 1 14 151 161� , pL 2 � i1 13,gi � 6 4:53 ( I W. NEW OR RELOCATED, UNDERGROUND WATER MAINS INCLUDED IN THIS PROJECT WILL BE LAID TO PROVIDE A Q F i e I d Dens i t ASTM D1556, D2922 Hor i zonta I i y y Gradation AASHTO T27, T98 One Per Source ,101 r_y��___: ___ ?-__.M", ,..,_ i .m ._._ ....._ . s ,,, 111-1 _ "y.. _...._ .",.....__ _ 4 w *F `C I11-11111- 5 1 � 5 � � �- ` 7 i ! 101J U_lE l0,�3 0.a0 0 4' E U,60 0.". _ _ - 105 1 0 E 1 3 1 (J 1 xil 0 3 1 3.6tt (J5 _...,... _ .., ! _ , _, .,._" ... _.... _ 1... _ _. ._......... HORIZONTAL DISTANCE OF AT LEAST THREE FEET BETWEEN THE OUTSIDE OF THE WATER MAIN AND THE OUTSIDE OF ANY EXISTING OR PROPOSED VACUUM -TYPE SANITARY SEWER, STORM SEWER, STORMWATER FORCE MAIN, OR Q � AASHTO T90 !, For pipe �wxtb IS ft.I-101, aatal lengths. To obtain the re-coixux�ended allowable- le-,ikage for pipe ath 20 fit, uourinil lengths, 1 PIPELINE CONVEYING RECLAIMED WATER REGULATED UNDER PART III OF CHAPTER 62-610, F.R.C.; HORIZONTAL � At t e r be r Limits ASTM C136 , D423 , D424 a�nitlti0v the leakage c alcnlatecl fro�in the table by Oi 9, If the pipeWe under test contains sections of various tliimet�er, the A DISTANCE OF AT LEAST SIX FEET BETWEEN THE OUTSIDE OF THE WATER MAIN AND THE OUTSIDE OF ANY M Z So i I Cement Base Mix Design Portland Cement One Per So i i Type0 �lloable lenh�e mill 6e the sim► of the �oitipiiteKl le �k �e for each size. ;._ r _ . .._ w.. �_. __.. _ __ _.___ _. __n._... _... .. _.r .... .... ,.._ ...� --w- •• - EXISTING OR PROPOSED GRAVITY -TYPE SANITARY SEWER (OR A HORIZONTAL DISTANCE OF AT LEAST THREE FEET BETWEEN THE OUTSIDE OF THE WATER MAIN AND THE OUTSIDE OF ANY EXISTING OR PROPOSED 0 Assoc . Specifications (To be if Maximum Density AASHTO T134 One Per Soil Type Daily E_ _ __- _.�_. ._.. _.�.__.. �. _.�...�. __._...:.-._...._ __"",,- _._�.�.- _�-,-, ........-"---,---�---"-,,-----,-,-"",,-,- GRAVITY -TYPE SANITARY SEWER IF THE BOTTOM OF THE WATER MAIN WILL BE LAID AT LEAST SIX INCHES ABOVE THE TOP OF THE SEWER); A HORIZONTAL DISTANCE OF AT LEAST SIX FEET BETWEEN THE OUTSIDE OF 0 co used separation between See Typ i ca I SHWT &bottom of Optimum Moisture (Standard) Pavement Section THE WATER MAIN AND THE OUTSIDE OF ANY EXISTING OR PROPOSED PRESSURE -TYPE SANITARY SEWER, WASTEWATER FORCE MAIN, OR PIPELINE CONVEYING RECLAIMED WATER NOT REGULATED UNDER PART III OF U. 0 W base i s <1 .5') Compressive Port I and Cement One Set of 3 Per So i I CHAPTER 62-610, F.A.C.; AND A HORIZONTAL DISTANCE OF AT LEAST TEN FEET BETWEEN THE OUTSIDE OF THE . Z Strength Specimens Assoc. Specifications Test Cores Portland Cement One Set of 3 Per Soil Assoc. Specifications ** WATER MAIN AND ALL PARTS OF ANY EXISTING OR PROPOSED "ON -SITE SEWAGE TREATMENT AND DISPOSAL SYSTEM." Z .j O Field Densit & AASHTO T191, T238 One Per 2,500 S.F. Y X. NEW OR RELOCATED, UNDERGROUND WATER MAINS THAT ARE INCLUDED IN THIS PROJECT AND THAT WILL Thickness ASTM D1556, D2922 Horizontal CROSS ANY EXISTING OR PROPOSED GRAVITY- OR VACUUM -TYPE SANITARY SEWER OR STORM SEWER WILL BE LAID SO THE OUTSIDE OF THE WATER MAIN IS AT LEAST SIX INCHES ABOVE THE OTHER PIPELINE OR AT LEAST �'(� 12 INCHES BELOW THE OTHER PIPELINE; AND NEW OR RELOCATED, UNDERGROUND WATER MAINS THAT ARE * . = Asphaltic ConcretMaterials Quality AASHTO T164 Bitumen Content, ASTM D2172 .& j- INCLUDED IN THIS PROJECT AND THAT WILL CROSS ANY EXISTING OR PROPOSED PRESSURE -TYPE SANITARY Z d �' Gradation Per Spec i f i cat ions One Per Day SEWER, WASTEWATER OR STORMWATER FORCE MAIN, OR PIPELINE CONVEYING RECLAIMED WATER! WILL BE LAID $te• "�I�t �� SO THE OUTSIDE OF THE WATER MAIN IS AT LEAST 12 INCHES ABOVE OR BELOW THE OTHER PIPELINE. �e�- - Field Density ASTM 02950-81 95% of Lab Density One Per 2,500 S.F. Hor i zonta I �eW I e!'I (�jJ Y. AT THE UTILITY CROSSINGS DESCRIBED IN PART II.C.1.W ABOVE, ONE FULL LENGTH OF WATER MAIN PIPE WILL = Los Angeles AASHTO T96-77 BE CENTERED ABOVE OR BELOW THE OTHER PIPELINE SO THE WATER MAIN JOINTS WILL BE AS FAR AS POSSIBLE FROM THE OTHER PIPELINE OR THE PIPES WILL BE ARRANGED SO THAT ALL WATER MAIN JOINTS ARE Abrasion ASTM C131-81 Per Specifications One Per Source Thickness N/A Per Specifications One Per 2,500 S.F. AT LEAST THREE FEET FROM ALL JOINTS IN VACUUM -TYPE SANITARY SEWERS, STORM SEWERS, STORMWATER FORCE MAINS, OR PIPELINES CONVEYING RECLAIMED WATER REGULATED UNDER PART III OF CHAPTER 62-610, S'/Sr9 NOTES: F.A.C., AND AT LEAST SIX FEET FROM ALL JOINTS IN GRAVITY- OR PRESSURE -TYPE SANITARY SEWERS, 0. * The Contractor sha I I not pave over so i I cement base unt i I a 30 day curing time has e I apsed WASTEWATER FORCE MAINS, OR PIPELINES CONVEYING RECLAIMED WATER NOT REGULATED UNDER PART Ili OF lLn ** Maximum strength limits, as established by soils testing company, shall not be exceeded CHAPTER 62-610, F.A.C. �// U) *** Should any of the information provided herein conflict with either the recommendations of the Geotechnical Engineer, and/or the Geotechnical Report, then the aforementioned recommendations will supercede this "TESTING SCHEDULE GUIDE" S -� H - .. E C=2 -; _ %_ , - - - %. I- - -E T O I I� I I I � I I� /f I I II r I O /I I I NU 17346 kJ 1175 A DR/W 34.01B DG TIE m _ " Ri-1 F I 5' WIDE CONCRETE 20' Yr F I 0 I INTEGRA CURB „ TRUNCATED DOMES SIDEWALK, 1.5%MAX. I . _. .. 'j & SIDEWALK PER FDOT INDEX CROSS SLOPE TRUNCATED DOME S • o o: { u NO. 304 PROPOSED CONCRETE SLAB BELOW ALL BACKFLOWSuj � r (PER FDOT INDEX NO. 304)(TYP.) — -I I LL L� 1 g TIRE KINGDOM REMOVE EXIST 5- WIDE > O I CONCRETE SIDEWALK, > PARCEL 10 Q REPLACE WITH NEW I Q N 7,026 S.F. 5' SIDEWALK r 0 - FFE=126.40 10' LANDSCAPE BUFFER & 0 cp : rn I 5' x 8' CONCRETE SLAB 0 O WITH V CHAMFERS PROGRESS ENERGY EASEMENT I I I 0 I 24' ., ... FOR OIL INTERCEPTOR & VERIZON EASEMENT O 20' BUILDING SETBACK (n I I 33.07' BLDG. TIE { I 4 12'x12' DUMPSTER Iou ENG ARCH. PLANS I 5 hN89°59'50"E 183.33' FOR DETAILS)o 4' _ DEMO. 44LF' TYPE'F' CURB — (n —� — 8" CONCRETE _ v N — • v TYPE'F' CURB NEW DROP (NP) (� HEADER CURB " CURBit II �D 9' I 292' I R5' : , ' FLARED TURNOUT PER I I . ( I I i I O7 F FDOT INDEX NO. 515 as a TIRE STORAGE Ri 1 C ENCLOSURE I 0 N r DEMOLITION NOTES: 1. REMOVE APPROXIMATELY 92 LF OF TYPE "F" CURB ALONG THE EAST SIDE OF THE SITE. REPLACE WITH 2' WIDE DROP CURB. 2. REMOVE APPROXIMATELY 138 LF OF 5' SIDEWALK ALONG THE EAST SIDE OF THE SITE. REPLACE WITH NEW 5' SIDEWALK. 0' 20' 40' SCALE: 1" = 20' SITE LEGEND HANDICAP PARKING ® PROPOSED DRAINAGE INLET PROPOSED CURB —••• •••— SITE BOUNDARY LINE CENTER LINE OF ROAD - RIGHT-OF-WAY - - - - - - EXISTING EDGE OF PAVEMENT 7 PROPOSED CONCRETE PAVEMENT TYP TYPICAL HC HANDICAP 10 10 PARKING SPACES S/W SIDEWALK R5' 5' RADIUS LF LINEAR FEET SF SQUARE FEET SIGN LEGEND: NO TEXT OR SYMBOL SIZE R1-1 STOP 3011x30" ALL SIGNS SHALL CONFORM TO THE MANUAL ON UNIFORM TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES. STRIPING NOTES: TYPICAL PARKING SPACE SHALL BE STRIPED WITH A 4" WHITE STRIPE. SEE DETAILS FOR HANDICAP PARKING. NOTES: 1. FOR PAVEMENT MARKING DETAILS, REFER TO LATEST EDITION OF THE MANUAL OF UNIFORM TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES" FDOT ROADWAY & TRAFFIC DESIGN STANDARDS INDICES # 17346 & 17352, AND THE CITY OF ZEPHYRHILLS `sCla FACILITY DESIGN GUIDELINES. 2. ALL RADII & UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED. �e►}��� 3. DUMPSTER AND TIRE ENCLOSURE EXTERIOR MATERIALS TO CONSIST OF STONE BASE, STONE WATERTABLE, AND EIFS ABOVE TO MATCH BUILDING. SEE FINISH SCHEDULE ON EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR ACTUAL FINISHES. MAP REFERENCE: PROPERTY IS LOCATED WITHIN THE ZEPHYR COMMONS COMMERCIAL SUBDIVISION AND IS RECOGNIZED AS PARCEL 10 IN THE RECORDED PLAT. (BOOK1, PAGE 55) AS SURVEYED BY AVID GROUP JOB NO. 2673-001, DATED 08-24-2008. ELEVATIONS SHOWN ARE NGVD 29. (SEE SURVEY FOR CONVERSION FACTOR) z 0 F- i Iz 0 U) Lu ol w 0 0 z mw>—W-Ozw C) o N w CD CL o p 0 N III } z 2 C'7 � .T � � k 5 N ui O Q O O cn1 o a a o w F � J Oa Zco o �p wN o L �W o .e, wLL O a - zLD a�� ' 0cr C U)w0co L " r zna0 c p Ow co [ cc Q Q>- VO C m c W Q F-o C/) o o ¢ � Q9 �N 0LL 6CID� cc 00 0 v 0W m N r- ZD J ZD cc¢ J V, = r N CC U � O n m Q V = Q> N IL m IL LL. Q 0 0 z w cn CD cn 2-'z o W z J CC: ZF- LU Z 4 U W w _ wQI—W > CD �u _jU Z 0 Z) U Q w Z Z Q ~ -.2J Q Q Z U '- Lu U U 2,cc <LL M- a > z � J W W N hrb 4h, O O Z :p Z a J 0 Z O U J H Z O x S H E E T C=3 N 0 r m -I T �TfT i I i. TIT,_ m I 1 } I + } ' I I I I I I I 10 I I I } I I I } I } I I � I I I I I I I � 11. I+I } + I 0 I i i O I I II f I I I i I I I I I'. ' I I I I i I I II I � I i i I I i \ I \N I I I I I I � I I O 4�h I I � I I + I I I i 0 I I I I 0 i I I I I I I N89059'50"W 196.10' Service Lateral Notes: IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR DURING THE INSTALLATION OF ALL SERVICES LATERALS (SEWER AND WATER) TO COORDINATE ALL VERTICAL CLEARANCES/CONFLICTS WITH EXISTING AND PROPOSED PIPING, CONDUITS, AND SOFT UTILITIES (EXISTING AND FUTURE). Z i 0 �- _a 0 U w ❑ I 0' 20' 40' SCALE: 1" = 20' O 0 z ~ v ¢w>—w—ozw Of h- U) z o 01 O w p O O 11 N m a I\ 00) O Ix z coN Z T ¢ 0 O cm Q O a Ir UTILITY LESSEN® � � a a ❑ w U w w ~ EXISTING SIGNAGE U)Q z m o ) `n COL) UTILITY POLE \ WU) o w w 0 w LL --� EXISTING GUY W/ WIRE Z¢aaJ Iri P ! ❑ aC m W EXISTING WATER MAIN U)W o m w d J (A Q O> (q EXISTING SANITARY MAIN oo - - - - - EXISTING OVER HEAD WIRES �� 0 o ❑ ® EXISTING CHECK VALVE Q EXISTING GATE VALVE o T - EXISTING FIRE HYDRANT Lua i if U) o a EXISTING REDUCER a o � cl, cc co 0 O EXISTING BLOWOFF u oo= cc4 U W m F., co ® EXISTING WATER METER J a � o v _..... _..._. O C-3 = co Z N C:3 EXISTING SANITARY MANHOLE o CD O x Ma -,- =a> N d m a l.L Q EXISTING SANITARY CLEANOUT ar, C7C7zwcnCfcn J ZZo=�Z SS SANITARY SEWER J °; z¢ v W w Z U ¢ • PROPOSED CLEANOUT - CO = c� = J w z Z PROPOSED STRUCTURE NUMBER �_......_. ... J J Q Q Z >_ = CL M ►® PROPOSED GATE VALVE E 0 o Qom V PROPOSED FIRE HYDRANT a J Z ATE VALVE N PROPOSED REDUCER N • PROPOSED BLOWOFF Zi ® PROPOSED WATER METER O 0 oc PROPOSED BACKFLOW PREVENTER Z WL WATER LINE CONNECTTO EXIST. UTILITY NOTES: SANITARY STUB IE = 122.75 1 rnKlT0ArTnGa cue! ! MM rl vC:rsicV ! n('AT!nn!C �! GVAT!nn!C An!rti V. WVly 11 —n I Vl I Vl 1llLL /'wVvv I l "I- V I ILl I ILt.I vvI i I HIN I I I" Lllvil I a Vl CONSTRUCTION TO MEET PROPOSED GRADES. 4. ALL UTILITY SHALL BE C900, DR-18 PVC UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 5. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL PLANS FOR EXACT UTILITY BUILDING ENTRANCE LOCATIONS. 6. CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL AIR RELEASE VALVES AT ALL HIGH POINTS IN PROPOSED FORCEMAIN TO PREVENT AIR LOCKING. 7. WATER SUPPLY (HYDRANT) SHALL BE ACTIVE ADJACENT TO SITE ONCE COMBUSTIBLES ARE BEING BROUGHT ONTO SITE. 8. FDC CONNECTION SHALL BE 5" ANGLED STORZ CONNECTION. IT SHALL BE MARKED WITH SIGNAGE THAT IS EASILY NOTICEABLE_ AT NIGHT. 9. CONSTRUCTION OF BUILDING SHALL BE COMPLIANT WITH NFPA 1 SECTION 30.2, NFPA 101 CHAPTER 40 AND NFPA 30A. 10. ACCESS TO SITE SHALL BE PROVIIDED WITHA A HARD PACKED SURFACE, 20' WIDE SUITABLE TO WITHSTAND THE WEIGHT OF A LARGE FIRE APPARATUS, THIS SHALL BE MAINTAINED DURING CONSTRUCTION. of ii WC C R O S SING S NU T S: MAP REFERENCE: WASTEWATER MAINS SHALL CROSS UNDER POTABLE WATER PROPERTY IS LOCATED WITHIN THE ZEPHYR MAINS, WHENEVER POSSIBLE. THE MINIMUM VERTICAL COMMONS COMMERCIAL SUBDIVISION AND IS DISTANCE BETWEEN MAINS AT A CROSSING IS 18 INCHES. THE RECOGNIZED AS PARCEL 10 IN THE RECORDED CROSSING SHALL BE ARRANGED SO THAT THE WASTEWATER PLAT. (BOOK1, PAGE 55) AS SURVEYED BY AVID GROUP JOB NO.2673-001, DATED 08-24-2008. S MAIN JOINTS WILL BE EQUIDISTANT AND AS FAR AS POSSIBLE H FROM THE WATER MAIN JOINTS. (SEE DETAIL ON SHEET.9) ELEVATIONS SHOWN ARE NGVD 29. E E (SEE SURVEY FOR CONVERSION FACTOR) T NC 5 01 I T i Tr — r!rr a 3 n 0 z a 0 W IL O U W m H O z a 2 cn z g a W U) W 2 H TIRE KINGDOM @ZEPHYR COMMONS STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN SITE DESCRIPTION PROJECT NAME: TIRE KINGDOM � ZEPHYR COMMONS OWNER'S NAME: NOM ZEPHYRHILLS, LLC PROJECT ADDRESS: U.S. HIGHWAY 301, ZEPHYRHILLS, FL. OWNER'S ADDRESS: 3841 GREEN HILLS VILLAGE DRIVE, 400 SECTION: 35, TOWNSHIP: 25 SOUTH, RANGE: 21 EAST PHONE: (615) 269-5444 FAX: (615) 383-6866 DESCRIPTION OF PURPOSE AND TYPES OF SOIL DISTURBING ACTIVITIES: 0.68 ACRES OF TIRE RETAIL SOIL DISTURBING ACTIVITIES WILL INCLUDE: CLEARING AND GRUBBING; INSTALLING A STABILIZED CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCE, PERIMETER AND OTHER EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROLS THROUGHOUT THE SITE; GRADING; EXCAVATION FOR THE RETENTION POND, STORM SEWER, UTILITIES AND BUILDING FOUNDATIONS; CONSTRUCTION OF CURB AND PARKING LOT; PREPARATION FOR FINAL PLANTING AND SEEDING. SEQUENCE OF MAJOR EVENTS: 1. INSTALL STAKED SILT FENCE AS INDICATED ON THE CONSTRUCTION PLANS. 2. CLEAR AND GRUB FOR PONDS TO BE USED AS SEDIMENTATION BASINS. 3. EXCAVATE POND FOR SEDIMENT TRAPS FOR SITE RUNOFFS. 4. BEGIN BUILDING CONSTRUCTION. 5. CONSTRUCT DIVERSION SWALES AROUND PERIMETER OF SITE TO POND, AS NECESSARY. 6. INSTALL STORM SEWER SYSTEM AND ITS SILTATION PROTECTION, UTILITIES AND OUT FALL STRUCTURE. 7. EXCAVATE THE REMAINDER OF THE PONDS INCLUDING REMOVAL OF SILT DEPOSITS. 8. STABILIZE PARKING LOT. 9. CONSTRUCT CURB, BASE AND ASPHALT. 10. COMPLETE FINAL SITE GRADING. 11. INSTALL PERMANENT LANDSCAPING ON SITE. REPAIR ANY WASHED OUT AREAS. 12. WHEN CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITY IS COMPLETE AND THE SITE IS STABILIZED, REMOVE EROSION PROTECTION DEVICES AND AND PLACE SOD AS NECESSARY. NAME OF RECEIVING WATERS: LOST LAKE POLLUTION REDUCTION CONTROLS EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROLS STABILIZATION PRACTICES WIND EROSION STABILIZATION - THE CONTRACTOR SHALL DENUDE ONLY AREAS WHERE IT IS EXPECTED TO BE GRADED OR ALTERED WITHIN A TWO (2) WEEK TIME FRAME. ALL PERVIOUS AREAS OF THE SITE INCLUDED IN GRADING THAT ARE DISTURBED DURING CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE GRADED AND PREPARED WITH A COMBINATION OF SOD AND/OR SEEDING AND MULCHING. PAD AREAS WITHIN FUTURE UNITS WHERE EARTHWORK IS COMPLETED SHALL BE COMPLETELY SEEDED AND MULCHED. AREAS WHERE CONSTRUCTION OPERATIONS WILL BE CONTINUOUS, FUGITIVE DUST SHALL BE MANAGED BY APPLYING A WATER SPRAY TO SATURATE THE SURFACE SOILS ON A DAILY BASIS (OR AS NEEDED) TO MAINTAIN MINIMAL DUST TRANSPORT. FUGITIVE DUST SHALL BE MONITORED CONTINUOUSLY AND ADDITIONAL MEASURES MAY NEED TO BE TAKEN TO CONTROL OFF SITE TRANSPORT OF UNACCEPTABLE LEVELS OF DUST. TEMPORARY STABILIZATION - TOP OF SOIL STOCK PILES AND DISTURBED PORTIONS OF THE SITE WHERE CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITY TEMPORARILY CEASES FOR AT LEAST 21 DAYS SHALL BE STABILIZED WITH TEMPORARY GRASS AND MULCH NO LATER THAN 14 DAYS FROM THE LAST CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITY. GRASS SEED SHALL BE A MIXTURE OF 20 PARTS OF BERMUDA AND 80 PARTS OF PENSACOLA BAHIA. THE SEPARATE TYPES OF SEED USED SHALL BE THOROUGHLY DRY MIXED IMMEDIATELY BEFORE SOWING. SEED WHICH HAS BECOME WET SHALL NOT BE USED. THE MULCH MATERIAL USED SHALL NORMALLY BE DRY MULCH. DRY MULCH SHALL BE STRAW OR HAY CONSISTING OF OAT, RYE OR WHEAT STRAW, OR OF PANGOLA, PEANUT, COASTAL BERMUDA OR BAHIA GRASS HAY. ONLY UNDETERIORATED MULCH WHICH CAN BE READILY CUT INTO THE SOIL. SHALL BE USED. AREAS OF THE SITE WHICH ARE TO BE PAVED WILL BE TEMPORARILY STABILIZED BY APPLYING STABILIZATION AND BASE. PERMANENT STABILIZATION -DISTURBED PORTIONS OF THE SITE WHERE CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITY PERMANENTLY CEASES SHALL BE STABILIZED WITH SOD NO LATER THAN 14 DAYS AFTER LAST CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITY. STRUCTURAL PRACTICES EROSION PROTECTION - DURING THE CONSTRUCTION PHASES, APPROPRIATE PRACTICES INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO SILT FENCE BARRIERS, HAY BALES AND WATERING OR OTHER METHODS NECESSARY WILL BE IMPLEMENTED TO CONTROL FUGITIVE DUST. SEDIMENT BASINS -THE STORM WATER MANAGEMENT AREAS (RETENTION AREAS) WILL SERVE AS SEDIMENT BASINS DURING THE CONSTRUCTION PERIOD. AT THE CONTRACTOR'S DISCRETION, THE SEDIMENT BASINS WILL BE CONSTRUCTED TO THE DESIGN CROSS-SECTION OR A MINIMUM OF 2-FEET BELOW EXISTING GROUND TO ALLOW THE SILT TO BE COLLECTED AND REMOVED PRIOR TO COMPLETION OF THE GRADING. STORM WATER MANAGEMENT STORM WATER DRAINAGE WILL BE PROVIDED BY A CURB, STORM WATER AND CATCH BASIN SYSTEM FOR THE DEVELOPED AREAS. THE AREAS NOT DEVELOPED SHALL BE GRADED TO LESS THAN 2� SLOPES AND HAVE PERMANENT SEEDING OR PLANTINGS. WHEN CONSTRUCTION IS COMPLETE THE SITE WILL DRAIN TO STORM WATER PONDS THAT WERE UTILIZED AS THE TEMPORARY SEDIMENT BASINS DURING THE CONSTRUCTION PROCESS. ANY ACCUMULATED SEDIMENT SHALL BE REMOVED FROM THE SEDIMENT BASINS. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO CONSTRUCT ALL RETENTION/DETENTION AREAS IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE APPROVED CONSTRUCTION PLANS. SPECIFIED OTHER CONTROLS WASTE DISPOSAL WASTE MATERIALS - ALL WASTE MATERIAL SHALL BE COLLECTED AND CONTAINED IN A CONTROLLED AREA PURSUANT TO STATE AND LOCAL SOLID WASTE REGULATIONS. ALL TRASH AND CONSTRUCTION DEBRIS GENERATED FROM CONSTRUCTION IS TO BE REMOVED FROM THE SITE AND DISPOSED OF APPROPRIATELY. NO CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS SHALL BE BURIED ON SITE. ALL PERSONNEL SHALL BE INSTRUCTED REGARDING THE CORRECT PROCEDURE FOR WASTE DISPOSAL. NOTICES STATING THESE PRACTICES SHALL BE POSTED IN THE ON SITE OFFICE TRAILER AND THE CONSTRUCTION MANAGER RESPONSIBLE FOR THE DAY TO DAY SITE OPERATIONS SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SEEING THAT THESE PROCEDURES ARE FOLLOWED. HAZARDOUS WASTE - IF ENCOUNTERED, ALL WASTE MATERIALS SHALL BE DISPOSED OF IN THE MANNER SPECIFIED BY STATE AND/LOCAL REGULATIONS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SEEING THAT THESE PRACTICES ARE FOLLOWED. SANITARY WASTE - ALL SANITARY WASTE SHALL BE COLLECTED FROM PORTABLE UNITS BY A LICENSED SANITARY WASTE MANAGEMENT CONTRACTOR AS REQUIRED BY STATE AND LOCAL CODES AND REGULATIONS. OFF SITE VEHICLE TRACKING STABILIZED CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCES SHALL BE PROVIDED TO HELP REDUCE OFF SITE VEHICLE TRACKING OF SEDIMENTS. THE PAVED STREETS SHALL BE CLEANED AS NEEDED TO REMOVE ANY EXCESS MUD, DIRT OR ROCK TRACKED FROM THE SITE. DUMP TRUCKS HAULING MATERIAL FROM THE SITE SHALL BE COVERED WITH A TARPAULIN AT ALL TIMES. m TIMING OF CONTROL MEASURES AS INDICATED IN THE SEQUENCE OF MAJOR ACTIVITIES, STAKED SILT FENCE, STABILIZED CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCES AND SEDIMENT BASINS SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED PRIOR TO CLEARING OR GRADING OF ANY OTHER PORTIONS OF THE SITE. AREAS o WHERE CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITY TEMPORARILY CEASES FOR MORE THAN 21 DAYS SHALL BE STABILIZED WITH A TEMPORARY GRASS AND MULCH WITHIN 14 DAYS OF THE LAST DISTURBANCE. ONCE CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITY CEASES PERMANENTLY THAT N AREA SHALL BE STABILIZED WITH PERMANENT SOD. AFTER THE ENTIRE SITE IS STABILIZED, THE ACCUMULATED SEDIMENT SHALL o BE REMOVED FROM THE TRAPS AND THE STAKED SILT FENCES SHALL BE REMOVED. Z = o CERTIFICATION OF COMPLIANCE WITH FEDERAL, STATE AND LOCAL REGULATIONS IL a THE STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN REFLECTS THE PASCO COUNTY AND THE SOUTHWEST FLORIDA WATER cUn v MANAGEMENT DISTRICT (SWFWMD) REQUIREMENTS FOR STORM WATER MANAGEMENT AND EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL AS o Of ESTABLISHED BY THE PASCO COUNTY STORM WATER MANAGEMENT TECHNICAL MANUAL AND THE FLORIDA ADMINISTRATIVE a CODE, CHAPTER 40D -4 AND 40D-40. TO ENSURE COMPLIANCE, THIS PLAN WAS PREPARED IN ACCORDANCE WITH SWFWMD'S z "BASIS OF REVIEW FOR SURFACE WATER MANAGEMENT PERMIT APPLICATIONS WITHIN THE SOUTHWEST FLORIDA WATER 0 MANAGEMENT DISTRICT". 0 MAINTENANCE INSPECTION PROCEDURES w w � EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PRACTICES a z THESE ARE THE INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PRACTICES THAT SHALL BE USED TO MAINTAIN EROSION AND SEDIMENT o 0 CONTROL: ¢w>—cn—ozw 1. LESS THAN ONE HALF OF THE SITE SHALL BE DENUDED AT ONE TIME. z 2. ALL CONTROL MEASURES SHALL BE INSPECTED AT LEAST ONCE EACH WEEK AND FOLLOWING ANY STORM EVENT OF r o o0 0.5-INCHES OR GREATER BY A CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE. } Q a I a 3. ALL MEASURES SHALL BE MAINTAINED IN GOOD WORKING ORDER; IF A REPAIR IS NECESSARY, IT SHALL BE INITIATED } m z = co rn o WITHIN 24 HOURS OF REPORT. w z 4� N z 4. BUILT UP SEDIMENT SHALL BE REMOVED FROM SILT FENCE WHEN IT HAS REACHED ONE-THIRD THE HEIGHT OF THE SILT a o o a o a FENCE. a a w 5. SILT FENCE SHALL BE INSPECTED REGULARLY FOR DEPTH OF SEDIMENT AND TEARS TO SEE IF THE FABRIC IS SECURELY w ATTACHED TO THE FENCE POSTS AND TO SEE THAT THE FENCE POSTS ARE FIRMLY IN THE GROUND. o 6. THE SEDIMENT BASINS SHALL BE INSPECTED. DEPTH OF SEDIMENT AND BUILD UP OF SEDIMENT SHALL BE REMOVED cq z WHEN IT REACHES 10% OF THE DESIGN CAPACITY OR AT THE END OF THE JOB. °mcn Z 7 TEMPORARY AND PERMANENT GRASSING AND MULCHING AND SODDING SHALL BE INSPECTED FOR BARE SPOTS, W° o w WASHOUTS AND HEALTHY GROWTH. 06w 0 8. A MAINTENANCE INSPECTION REPORT SHALL BE MADE AFTER EACH INSPECTION BY THE CONTRACTOR AND SHALL BE kts k Zo=_ } KEPT IN AN ACTIVE LOG READILY AVAILABLE AT THE JOB SITE. oo° , w 9. EITHER THE SITE SUPERINTENDENT OR HIS DESIGNEES SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR INSPECTIONS, MAINTENANCE, REPAIR _ C' t7 N¢om w ACTIVITIES AND COMPLETING THE INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE REPORT. ° W�>J = 4 to Q of U 10. PERSONNEL SELECTED FOR INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE RESPONSIBILITIES SHALL RECEIVE TRAINING FROM THE SITE 0) �°� SUPERINTENDENT. THEY SHALL BE TRAINED IN ALL THE INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PRACTICES NECESSARY FOR �� o¢ a KEEPING THE EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROLS USED ON SITE IN GOOD WORKING ORDER. $ ar ° w m c, NON —STORM WATER DISCHARGE 0 0 a IT IS EXPECTED THAT THE FOLLOWING NON -STORM WATER DISCHARGES WILL OCCUR FROM THE SITE DURING THE CONSTRUCTION PERIOD: 1. WATER FROM WATER LINE FLUSHING. T 2• PAVEMENT WASH WATERS (WHERE NO SPILLS OR LEAKS OF TOXIC OR HAZARDOUS MATERIALS HAVE OCCURRED). ; o 0 3• UNCONTAMINATED GROUNDWATER (FROM DEWATERING EXCAVATION). o o U, ALL NON -STORM WATER DISCHARGES SHALL BE DIRECTED TO THE SEDIMENT BASIN PRIOR TO DISCHARGE. o � o � cc coCDo NON —STORM WATER DISCHARGE C� � 4" J m N co a. J �¢=�o J LuNo� IT IS NOT EXPECTED THAT THE FOLLOWING NON -STORM WATER DISCHARGES SHALL NOT OCCUR FROM THE SITE DURING THE �' ; z �o CONSTRUCTION PERIOD: co o CONCRETE FERTILIZERS � N � � � LL DETERGENTS PETROLEUM BASED PRODUCTS J c� c� z w co c� cn zzo�wz� PAINTS (ENAMEL AND LATEX) AND FUELS U J METAL STUDS CLEANING SOLVENTS ''' Z ¢ c� w''' GLASS WOOD zOtnUJ wZz1¢ TAR MASONRY BLOCK J J Q Q z SAND ROOFING SHINGLES STONE U � ww > c� ¢ z SPILL PREVENTION = Qom a z> ~ Jz w MATERIAL MANAGEMENT PRACTICES W THE FOLLOWING ARE THE MATERIAL MANAGEMENT PRACTICES THAT SHALL BE USED TO REDUCE THE RISK OF SPILLS OR \�\ OTHER ACCIDENTAL EXPOSURE OF MATERIALS AND SUBSTANCES TO STORM WATER RUNOFF. v GOOD HOUSEKEEPING: o THE FOLLOWING GOOD HOUSEKEEPING PRACTICES SHALL BE FOLLOWED ON SITE DURING THE CONSTRUCTION PROJECT. 9t AN EFFORT SHALL BE MADE TO STORE ONLY ENOUGH PRODUCT REQUIRED TO COMPLETE THE PROJECT. Z ALL MATERIALS STORED ON SITE SHALL BE STORED IN A NEAT ORDERLY MANNER IN THEIR APPROPRIATE CONTAINERS AND IF POSSIBLE, UNDER A ROOF OR OTHER CONTAINED ENCLOSURE. PRODUCTS SHALL BE KEPT IN THEIR ORIGINAL MANUFACTURERS LABELED CONTAINERS. SUBSTANCES SHALL NOT BE MIXED WITH ONE ANOTHER UNLESS RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER. WHENEVER POSSIBLE, ALL OF THE PRODUCT SHALL BE USED BEFORE DISPOSING OF THE CONTAINER. MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDATIONS FOR PROPER USE AND DISPOSAL SHALL BE FOLLOWED. THE SITE SUPERINTENDENT SHALL INSPECT DAILY TO ENSURE PROPER USE AND DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS ON SITE. HAZARDOUS PRODUCTS: THESE PRACTICES ARE USED TO REDUCE THE RISKS ASSOCIATED WITH HAZARDOUS MATERIALS. PRODUCTS SHALL BE KEPT IN ORIGINAL CONTAINERS UNLESS THEY ARE NOT RESEALABLE. ORIGINAL LABELS AND MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHALL BE RETAINED; THEY CONTAIN IMPORTANT PRODUCT INFORMATION. IF SURPLUS PRODUCT MUST BE DISPOSED OF, MANUFACTURERS OR LOCAL AND STATE RECOMMENDED METHODS OF PROPER DISPOSAL SHALL BE FOLLOWED. Z PETROLEUM PRODUCTS: Q o ALL ON SITE VEHICLES SHALL BE MONITORED FOR LEAKS AND RECEIVE REGULAR PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE TO REDUCE THE CHANCE OF LEAKAGE. PETROLEUM PRODUCTS SHALL BE STORED IN TIGHTLY SEALED CONTAINERS WHICH ARE CLEARLY LABELED. Lu ANY ASPHALT SUBSTANCES USED ON SITE SHALL BE APPLIED ACCORDINGLY TO THE MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDATIONS. = W FERTILIZERS: O 0 o �o FERTILIZERS USED SHALL BE APPLIED ONLY IN THE MINIMUM AMOUNT RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER. ONCE APPLIED, J FERTILIZER SHALL BE WORKED INTO THE SOIL TO LIMIT EXPOSURE TO STORM WATER. STORAGE SHALL BE IN A COVERED SHED. U. o Z THE CONTENTS OF ANY PARTIALLY USED BAGS OF FERTILIZER SHALL BE TRANSFERRED TO A SEALABLE PLASTIC BIN TO AVOID SPILLS. - m Z PAINTS: Z J Im o ALL CONTAINERS SHALL BE TIGHTLY SEALED AND STORED WHEN NOT REQUIRED FOR USE. EXCESS PAINT SHALL NOT BE J Lu - DISCHARGED TO THE STORM SEWER SYSTEM BUT SHALL BE PROPERLY DISPOSED OF ACCORDING TO MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS OR STATE AND LOCAL REGULATIONS. _ Z CONCRETE TRUCKS: �� i W CONTRACTOR SHALL DESIGNATE AN AREA FOR DISCHARGE OF SURPLUS CONCRETE OR DRUM WASH WATER AND SHALL INSTALL A CONTAINMENT BERM AROUND THIS AREA TO PREVENT RUNOFF TO THE REMAINDER OF THE SITE. HARD DEBRIS SHALL BE W DISPOSED OF BY CONTRACTOR UPON COMPLETION OF THE PROJECT. 1 m p a. N � S H E E T N O SPILL CONTROL PRACTICES IN ADDITION TO THE GOOD HOUSEKEEPING AND MATERIAL MANAGEMENT PRACTICES DISCUSSED IN THE PREVIOUS SECTIONS OF THIS PLAN, THE FOLLOWING PRACTICES SHALL BE FOLLOWED FOR SPILL PREVENTION AND CLEANUP: MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDED METHODS FOR SPILL CLEAN UP SHALL BE CLEARLY POSTED AND SITE PERSONNEL SHALL BE MADE AWARE OF THE PROCEDURES AND THE LOCATION OF THE INFORMATION AND CLEAN UP SUPPLIES. MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT NECESSARY FOR SPILL CLEAN UP SHALL BE KEPT IN THE MATERIAL STORAGE AREA ON SITE. EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS SHALL INCLUDE, BUT NOT BE LIMITED T0, BROOMS, DUST PANS, MOPS, RAGS, GLOVES, GOGGLES, KITTY LITTER, SAND, SAWDUST AND PLASTIC AND METAL TRASH CONTAINERS. ALL SPILLS SHALL BE CLEANED UP IMMEDIATELY AFTER DISCOVERY. THE SPILL SHALL BE KEPT WELL VENTILATED AND PERSONNEL SHALL WEAR APPROPRIATE PROTECTIVE CLOTHING TO PREVENT INJURY FROM CONTACT WITH HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCE. SPILLS OF TOXIC OR HAZARDOUS MATERIAL SHALL BE REPORTED TO THE APPROPRIATE STATE OR LOCAL GOVERNMENT AGENCY, REGARDLESS OF THE SIZE. THE SPILL PREVENTION PLAN SHALL BE ADJUSTED TO INCLUDE MEASURES TO PREVENT THIS TYPE OF SPILL FROM REOCCURRING AND THE CLEAN UP PROCEDURES FOR FUTURE USE. A DESCRIPTION OF THE SPILL, ITS CAUSE AND THE CLEAN UP MEASURES SHALL ALSO BE INCLUDED. THE SITE SUPERINTENDENT RESPONSIBLE FOR THE DAY TO DAY SITE OPERATIONS SHALL BE THE SPILL PREVENTION AND CLEAN UP COORDINATOR. HE OR SHE SHALL DESIGNATE OTHER SITE PERSONNEL WHO WILL RECEIVE SPILL PREVENTION AND CLEAN UP TRAINING. THESE INDIVIDUALS SHALL EACH BECOME RESPONSIBLE FOR A PARTICULAR PHASE OF PREVENTION AND CLEAN UP. THE NAMES OF THE RESPONSIBLE SPILL PERSONNEL SHALL BE POSTED IN THE MATERIAL STORAGE AREA OR IN THE OFFICE TRAILER ON SITE, IF APPLICABLE. NOTICE OF TERMINATION A NOTICE OF TERMINATION SHALL BE SUBMITTED TO THE FDEP AFTER THE CONSTRUCTION HAS BEEN COMPLETED AND THE SITE HAS UNDERGONE FINAL STABILIZATION. POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN CERTIFICATION TO THE BEST OF MY KNOWLEDGE, I CERTIFY UNDER PENALTY OF LAW THAT THIS DOCUMENT AND ALL ATTACHMENTS WERE PREPARED UNDER MY DIRECTION OR SUPERVISION IN ACCORDANCE WITH A SYSTEM DESIGNED TO ASSURE THAT QUALIFIED PERSONNEL PROPERLY GATHER AND EVALUATE THE INFORMATION SUBMITTED. BASED ON MY INQUIRY OF THE PERSON OR PERSONS MANAGING THE SYSTEM, OR THOSE PERSONS DIRECTLY RESPONSIBLE FOR GATHERING, THE INFORMATION SUBMITTED IS, TO THE BEST OF MY KNOWLEDGE AND BELIEF, TRUE, ACCURATE AND COMPLETE. I AM AWARE THAT THERE ARE SIGNIFICANT PENALTIES FOR SUBMITTING FALSE INFORMATION, INCLUDING THE POSSIBILITY OF FINES AND IMPRISONMENT FOR. KNOWING VIOLATIONS. OWNER: NAME: TITLE: SIGNATURE: DATE: CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION I CERTIFY UNDER PENALTY OF LAW THAT I UNDERSTAND THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE GENERAL NATIONAL POLLUTANT DISCHARGE ELIMINATION SYSTEM (NPDES) PERMIT THAT AUTHORIZES THE STORM WATER DISCHARGES ASSOCIATED WITH CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITY FROM THE SITE IDENTIFIED AS PART OF THIS CERTIFICATION. SIGNATURE COMPANY NAME AND ADDRESS RESPONSIBLE FOR COMPANY: SIGNATURE: ADDRESS: NAME: PHONE: � GENERAL CONTRACTOR DATE: COMPANY: SIGNATURE: ADDRESS: TEMPORARY AND PERMANENT NAME: PHONE: STABILIZATION DATE: COMPANY: SIGNATURE: ADDRESS: STABILIZED CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCE, NAME: EARTH DIKES, SEDIMENT BASIN DATE: PHONE: �k'er. i— _ — -i r „ -t- — �, a —r-r --i Z--_ r-- r m L PACTED ACKFILL A 1. SET THE STAKES UPSLOPE ALONG THE LINE OF STAKES wnvcti wior rrurr lum Id-1 /o GAUGE, 6 i-- •NCE POSTS, INTO 3. STAPLE FILTER MATERIAL BACKFILL AND COMPACT 4. TO STAKES AND EXTEND IT INTO THE TRENCH. THE EXCAVATED SOIL. Pc�m %BRIC ;E FENCE WOVEN WIRE FENCE ((MIN. 14 1/2 GAUGE, MAX. 6" MESH SPACING) WITH FILTER CLOTH COVER POSTS: STEEL EITHER T OR U TYPE OR 2"x2" HARDWOOD FENCE: WOVEN WIRE, 14-1/2 GA. 6" MAX. MESH OPENING ox FILTER FABRIC: i 1. MIRAFI 140N COMPACTED FINISH GRADE BACKFILL 2. DUPONT TYPAR 3341 FLOW 3. OR APPROVED EQUAL. a E TEND WLRE FENCE OF 2 INTO TRENCH . \`\3 Z �`\-` UNDISTURBED 04 - GROUND 4" 4 BEDDED FILTER FABRI ,T NC N. 8 INTO GROUND \ CROSS-SECTION 1. WOVEN WIRE FENCE TO BE FASTENED SECURELY TO FENCE POSTS WITH WIRE TIES OR STAPLES. 2. FILTER CLOTH TO BE FASTENED SECURELY TO WOVEN WIRE FENCE WITH TIES SPACED EVERY 24" AT TOP AND MID SECTION. 3. WHEN TWO SECTIONS OF FILTER CLOTH ADJOIN EACH OTHER THEY SHALL BE OVERLAPPED BY SIX INCHES AND FOLDED. 4. MAINTENANCE SHALL BE PERFORMED AS NOTED IN THE EROSION CONTROL PLAN. COLLECTED MATERIAI SHALL BE REMOVED WHEN SEDIMENT ACCUMULATES TO HALF THE HEIGHT OF THE SILT FENCE. SEDIMENTATION/SILT FENCE W/ WIRE SUPPORT N.T.S. PROPOSED TOP OF BANK -,,,.STORM PIPE Y Y z z a a m m PROPOSED SWALE o o 0 0 L` a 13- 0 EXISTING SWALE EXISTING SWALE SILT BARRIER INSTALLED INSTALLED DOWNSTREAM OF PROP. DOWNSTREAM OF PROP. SWALE CONNECTION STORM PIPE EXIST. SWALE SILT BARRIER AT SILT BARRIER AT N ONNECTION OF SWALE TO CONNECTION OF STORM PIPE EXISTING SWALE TO EXISTING SWALE IL O N.T.S. N.T.S. a -FILTER FABRIC 0 TER o° o 0 0 0° o 0 o CONCRETE BLOCKS `� �,,,, CONCRETE BLOCKS 'O°O°0°°°°°O°O°°°°°O°O � U- o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 BRIC o000000000 FILTERED ' RUNOFF ♦ oo i Oo0°o WA R 0000 }y o°°Oo ' 0 O , o o �i mni y o0o0 \ - o 0 0000 o°o° \ \ \ INLET / w IL0°0° 0 0 0 r 0000 SEDIMENT FILTER o 0 z w 0°00 00 000 0 0 o E_ oc,0000 m 0000 1. PLACE CONCRETE BLOCKS IN A SINGLE ROW AROUND PERIMETER OF 3 0000 INLET ON THEIR SIDES, WITH ENDS OF ADJACENT BLOCKS ABUTTING. 2. HEIGHT OF BARRIER VARIES. USE STACKS OF 4-INCH, 8-INCH, OR 12" BLOCKS. N 0 = ' 0 0 0 o 0 0 0 0 0 0 c, w > , o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O O O O O O O 000900 ' '00 C00000000000000C 3 3.PLACE FILTER FABRIC OVER VERTICAL FACE OF CONCRETE BLOCKS. w GRATED SEDIMENT 4.THE SEDIMENT FILTER SHALL BE ANY NON -ERODIBLE MATERIAL SUCH AS LOOSE ;v LL INLET FILTER ROCK, BROKEN CONCRETE THAT WILL SLOW THE FLOW OF THE WATER AND ALLOW m PLAN IT TO FILTER THROUGH AND OVER THE MATERIAL BEFORE ENTERING THE INLET. 0 O M z BLOCK AND AGGREGATE a INLET SEDIMENT FILTER w O N.T.S. U V m NOTES: ' H 1. DROP INLET SEDIMENT BARRIERS ARE TO BE USED FOR SMALL, NEARLY LEVEL DRAINAGE AREAS. (LESS THAN 5%) o z 2. THE TOP OF THE FRAME (PONDING HEIGHT) MUST BE WELL BELOW THE GROUND ELEVATION DOWNSLOPE TO PREVENT RUNOFF N FROM BYPASSING THE INLET. A TEMPORARY DIKE MAY BE NECESSARY ON THE DOWNSLOPE SIDE OF THE STRUCTURE. Q N z g e o a w a Y w S H 4' SHEET FLOW INSTALLATION (PERSPECTIVE MEW) 3' MAX A FLAOW yid B POINT 'A' SHALL BE HIGHER THAN POINT DRAINAGEWAY INSTALLATION (FRONT ELEVATION) NOTE: INSTALL IN ACCORDANCE WITH SILT FENCE DETAIL, EXCEPT AS NOTED ABOVE. SEDIMENTATION/SILT FENCE WITHOUT WIRE SUPPORT N.T.S. F SEDIMENT -LADEN FLOW RUNOFF DEPTH BELOW TOP OF INLET: AS REQ'D. MIN. 1'-MAX. 2' AX. SLOPE 2: WEEP HOLES \\/�\\ RGER PARTICLES STORM WATER WIT �// FOR DEWATERING : 'y' \ j�/\ SETTLE OUT LARGE PARTICLES REMOVED / DRAIN INLET SPECIFIC APPLICATION THIS METHOD OF INLET PROTECTION IS APPLICABLE WHERE HEAVY FLOWS ARE EXPECTED AND WHERE AN OVERFLOW CAPABILITY AND EASE OF MAINTENANCE ARE DESIRABLE. EXCAVATED INLET TEMPORARY SEDIMENT SUMP N.T.S. B 15' MIN. w MAX. i FABRIC EXTENDS 1' M SILT FENCE INLET PROTECTION N.T.S. PLAN VIEW SEDIMENT TRAP N.T.S. TEMPORARY I DIKE IF NEEDED ---------- F_r - - -._ H W 1.5 TO ORIGINAL 2.0 2.0 GROUND 1.0' 2.5 2.5 3.0 2.5 ELEVATION 3.5 3.0 4.0 3.0 67 CU. YD./ACRE 2: 2:1 H 5.0 4.5 67 CU. YD./A 4' RIPRAP (EXCAVATED) AX.FILTER FABRIC GRAVEL** GROUND ELEVATION SECTION A -A ** GRAVEL SHALL BE 2"-3" CLEAN STONE A RIPRAP ENGTH (IN FEET) EQUAL 6 X DRAINAGE AREA N.T.S. C ❑El PLACE THE END POST OF THE SECOND FENCE INSIDE THE END POST OF THE FIRST FENCE ROTATE BOTH POST AT LEAST 180 DEGREES IN A CLOCKWISE DIRECTION TO CREATE A TIGHT SEAL WITH THE FABRIC MATERIAL DIRECTION OF RUNOFF WATERS # f f DRIVE BOTH POST ABOUT 10 INCHES INTO THE GROUND AND BURY FLAP ATTACHING TWO SILT FENCES 0 SUPPLY WHEELS DIVERSI❑N RIDGE REQUIRED WHERE GRADE EXCEEDS 2% pj 2/ORC SECTI❑N A -A SPILLWAY aWGl ilk I ABRIC SILT FENCE, 'PROVED METHODS :ZE RUNOFF TO BASIN 1 12' MIN NOTE, 1, THE ENTRANCE SHALL BE MAINTAINED IN A C❑NDITI❑N THAT WILL PREVENT TRACKING OR FLOWING OF SEDIMENT ONTO PUBLIC RIGHTS-❑F-WAY, THIS MAY REQUIRE TOP DRESSING REPAIR AND/OR CLEAN❑UT OF ANY MEASURES USED TO TRAP SEDIMENT, 2, WHEN NECESSARY, WHEELS SHALL BE CLEANED PRI❑R TO ENTRANCE ONTO PUBLIC RIGHT-OF-WAY. 3, WHEN WASHING IS REQUIRED, IT SHALL BE DONE ON AN AREA STABILIZED WITH CRUSHED STONE THAT DRAINS INT❑ AN APPROVED SEDIMENT TRAP OR SEDIMENT BASIN, TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION ACCESS DETAIL N.T.S. 0 U 0 P❑� HEI i Y b es tA1Al�'`• ��•{ y) ���3C -,YPi 5� 11 f 9 A� f-GRAVEL FILLED SANDBAGS PLAN VIEW NOTES; SECTI❑N A -A 1, PLACE CURB TYPE SEDIMENT BARRIERS ON GENTLY SL❑PING STREET SEGMENTS WHERE WATER CAN POND AND ALLOW SEDIMENT TO SEPARATE FROM RUNOFF 2, SANDBAGS OF EITHER BURLAP OR WOVEN GE❑TEXTILE FABRIC, ARE FILLED WITH GRAVEL, LAYERED AND PACKED TIGHTLY 3, LEAVE ONE SANDBAG GAP IN THE TOP ROW TO PR❑VIDE A SPILLWAY FOR OVERFLOW 4, INSPECT BARRIERS AND REMOVE SEDIMENT AS NECESSARY, SEDIMENT AND GRAVEL MUST BE REMOVED FROM THE TRAVELED WAY IMMEDIATELY CURB INLET PROTECTION DETAIL 1' 12"-27"" DIA. PIPE) 1.3 AND LARGER PIPE) - RIPRAP LIM NONWOVEN GEOTEXTILE FABRIC� SECTION b-F N.T.S MINIMUM RIPRAP REQUIRED DIA. Of PIPE iN.) L (�) QUANTITY (C.Y: CLASS 12 3 1 5 Ili 15 8 1 5 Ili is iG 6 Ili 24 12 a III 30 14 12 III 36 16 14 -1[ I 42 48 22 IV 48 24 26 IV >48 µ21 28 1 30 40 1 IV �EaTr : B ONE CUBIC YARD IS 2' 4- APPROXIMATELY 1.4 TONS. 1 �- A tDIA. - PLAN P s SECTION AA -NONWOVEN VPgVECV GES)TEXT I E FABRIC DRAWN BY: "C e c �RFMSED: � STANDARD DETAILS 5_05 APPRov. at RIPRAP DETAIL FOR FLARED END SECTIONS CITY PL. N7. i ST--4 - A m■it. Ri 3 H c Q c ❑ L c O ( z � P=w>-w-Ozw H G co O C w Q a' O O N c m z = C7 L 00 z �� N G w ` -; N iii 00 `< U ¢ O \ cccOC Q C cn 0- a C1 L G L ❑ F cwn � C oQ Z W `- °a O M G L x KSLu p IL L 0 ZOO L6 Oa Od i C , ti j �w0� C tyb w�_> - _j < a G a¢ (Y Q Q 0 c m Z c o\_1' ❑ o CC o L-� Q _5 . N O LL_ o6 m cCE cocoo v U � m CC\1 co d J CC cc: J = T ,_u C\I fr o m oo 0 ❑ m¢� =¢> N d m d U_ Q J 0 (7 z w cn (D cn z z O ir Lu z ,J wZaC3Ww w<I-w > Z JEr 3:z a = N cn �co0¢cq wZz<~ J J Q Q Z > a � U U Q Z 3: EL Q ❑ OC a Z> ¢ z ~ w W N 2 o O Z Z O cn 0 - O� J Q �� O Q J W I.I. 00 C:3 a cn s� Z J Z y�� J W Reps ` = Q Z s W N S H E E T ■ 7 0 24-" m d A 6-CONC. SLAB W/ " a —�v a °:— DOUBLE MAT 6x6 10/10 W.W.M. v d v ° ev 4,000 PSI, 4-6% ENTRAINED AIR v Q �o o° o o° oo o ° ° o ° ° 00 o o ° o ° 8" COMPACTED CRUSHED CONC. ° 0000 o 00 o o ° O O ° (98% DENSITY -TEST LAB) o 0°° oo° o0 0 12" PAINT WHEEL STOP � 12"� HIGH VISIBILITY YELLOW •• • .. IL i ..- °• - id - •• - .d. •. #4 BAR 18" LONG R" JT SURFACE PRECAST CONCRETE WHEEL STOP WHL-STOP.DWG 09/01/94 NTS 7 2 1/4" 3 3/4" 3'-0" PLAN i� FRAME c. d e 2'-0" ; 2'-3 5/8" STEEL GRATE H-20 LOADING ALTERNATE CAST IRON GRATE H-20 LOADING 3 3/4" SECTION NOTES: FOR ADDITIONAL DETAILS SEE FDOT INDEX NO 201 & 232. FDOT INLET TYPE "C" FDOT C INLET.DWG 07/30/06 NTS ABILIZED SUBBASE CONCRETE SLAB DETAIL N.T.S. 2" FLEXI—PAVE B—GRADE (LBR\ 0) \ \ \ FLEXI—PAVE HT2000+ OR APPROVED EQUAL PERVIOUS PAVEMENT SECTION N.T.S. NORMAL FLEXI PAVE 2.0" TYPE S-1 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE SURFACE COURSE BASE 6" CROUSHED CONRETE, LBR 120, PER FDOT STANDARD SPEC 204-2.2, COMPACTED 100% OF AASHTO T-180 SUB —GRADE 12" NORMAL COMPACTED SUB —GRADE LBR 40 COMPACTED TO 98% AASHTO T-180 2 6" WHITE H/C SIGN 6" WHITE ►,":lita r 12, I 5' HANDICAP PARKING PAVEMENT MARKING 4" WHITE REFLECTORIZED PAINT. (SEE PLAN VIEW FOR LOCATIONS) 6" 1'-6" 3/4"R TYPE "F v CURB CURB-F.DWG 06/02/94 NTS Q #4 — REBAR CONTINUOUS STOP ® EACH SIDE OF CJ'S 611 STRUCK JOINT 3" ROUND EDGE SLR. ' PAVEMENT Q. d \ ° - SURFACE ..; 1 6" CONCRETE SIDEWALK WITH 6x6 W1.4xW1.4 INTEGRAL CURB & SIDEWALK SWALK-IC.DWG 06/02/94 NTS 1. CROSSWALK MINIMUM WIDTHS: INTERSECTION CROSSWALK 6' MID BLOCK CROSSWALK 10' 2. CROSSWALK SHALL HAVE A MAXIMUM CROSS —SLOPE OF 2%. VERTICAL CURB (TYP) PEDESTRIAN CROSSWALK NTS WHITE ON BLUE PARKING BY DISABLED PERMIT ONLY BLACK ON T TOW AWAY ZONE WH I TE W/ O FINE UP TO$250.00 1.5" LETTERS HANDICAP SIGN THIS SIGN TYP ® EACH HANDICAP PARKING SPACE i� 3" GALVANIZED STEEL POLE FINISH GRADE d CONCRETE I.... • y . �°.° . d a A - - in • HANDICAP SIGN ASPHALT .\\\ \ \\ N. \\ - \.\\\ \ \\ \\\\\\ SUB —GRADE HEAVY NORMAL DUTY RPkALT 1.5" 2.0" TYPE S-1 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE SURFACE COURSE 6" 8" CRUSHED CONC. BASE — PRIMED 300 PSI AT 7 DAYS COMPACTED TO 97% AASHTO T-134 SUB —GRADE 6" 9" NORMAL COMPACTED SUB —GRADE LBR 20 HEAVY DUTY COMPACTED SUB —GRADE LBR 40 COMPACTED TO 98% AASHTO T-180 TYPICAL PAVEMENT SECTION PAVE-3.DWG 02/16/96 NTS cl 8M HEADER CURB "NT SURFACE 0.1 *D 44 d. ' • , i a 0.2*D CONSTRUCTION JOINT STRUCTURE SINGLE —COMPONENT -"' d° • �. POLYURETHANE SEALANT •. �1/4„ 3/4„ THICK •d '4 _ - .° <- - _]D • ° 4.' a \_ CLOSED CELL SEMI —RIGID PLASTIC JOINT FILLER 1/4" EXPANSION JOINT SINGLE —COMPONENT 1 /2" POLYURETHANE SEALANT 3/4" THICK r 4* •. a° q. a - d D •d - - •.. a •. d .4.. - a ra. :-•. - .• CLOSED CELL SEMI —RIGID PLASTIC JOINT FILLER 1/2" EXPANSION JOINT 1 /4,. D/4 1 d _ �. D CONTROL JOINT PAV-CONI.DWG 10/14/94 NTS 3/4"R 3/4"R SLOPE TO FIT DRIVEWAY ' r.' :.+; .•:• '►' • A CC3 i� D FOR MORE NOTES AND DETAILS SEE FDOT INDEX NO. 300 DROP CURB DROP-C.DWG 01/07/06 NTS NORMAL 40'-0" WITH 4' WIDE SIDEWALK MAXIMUM 50'-0" WITH 5' OR WIDER SIDEWALK 3a Id 3 .♦ EXPANSION JOINT W STRUCK JOINT 6MAX 1/2" EXPANSION JOINT FULL DEPTH BROOM FINISH II D/W EXPANSION JOINT STRUCK JOINT NOTES: 1. SIDEWALK EXPANSION JOINTS TO BE AT ALL TIES TO CONCRETE OTHER THAN DRIVEWAYS. MAXIMUM SPACING SHALL BE 50'. 2. EXPANSION JOINT MATERIAL SHALL BE ASPHALT FIBER IMPREGNATED PREFORMED JOINT FILLER, TO FILL DEPTH OF CONCRETE. 3. SIDEWALK TO BE INSTALLED PER COZ STANDARDS MIN 3000 PSI CONCRETE AND MIN. 4" THICKNESS. TYPICAL SIDEWALK (:DETAILS\ROADWAY\SIDEWALK.DWG 01/16/01 NTS PC OR PT OF RADIUS RETURN 1' a o� ®0�,�\o EDGE OF ®Q �G THRU—LANE Q¢ ��Q' GdZ I SAW CUT FULL DEPTH I OF EXISTING ASPHALT--,,, SAW CUT APPLY PRIME OR TACK MATERIALS AS NECESSARY PC OR PT OF RADIUS RETURN NEW SURFACE NEW BASE rnnr r% r-\/irlr r9A\Ir\•r-!1r roz F C a�w>—cn—Ozcn E F c co c o c Q T w C U (L O r m z 2 C6 L QCE: N t w Z CO 2 C b a X N p O C L w f U) J oa z m 0 \ "' Z5 CD U) o L -6w o � LL \ \\ c z¢a� DEL 0 La mw0n c \� V)w coL'Ili W Z -q, cM E� �w t0 C a A. JQ O C (1) 1>>_ U C m c Lu Q� cn o c o� C> rn cm OLL. J,CID� �� '_TO m Q� J N co d J < = r W N CC J o�� Zoo CD I O N a M a LL Q C7 CO Z w CD CD cn J Z z O� W z c 3 � U - J wza"--)ww W Q H W > =zmo�co� zOv UJCA W Z z OC 1Z J J Q Q W W U U Q z U Q Z ~ Jz W W N ° � O Obib, Z 14 cl o 0 j W U. W = ate J_ J CONNECTION DETAIL AT EXISTING ASPHALT.. PAVEMENTS s H APRON.DWG 061/03/94 NTS E E T C=8 N 101 PIPE RESTRAINT 6"X 6"W1.4XW1.4 } m W m 0 Z a 2 (n Z J a W fn W x METER---- M A T E R I A L S ITEM QUANT. DESCRIPTION 1 1 BACKFLOW PREVENTER ASSEMBLY, DOUBLE CHECK VALVE 2 2 UNIONS - GALV. 3 2 NIPPLES - BRASS 4 2 ELBOWS - GALV. 900 5 2 RISER - GALV. 6 * CONCRETE SLAB 7 2 BALL VALVES - BRASS OR S.S. (PROVIDED WITH BFP ASS Y) NOTE: - FIELD ADJUST AND CUT ITEM 5 TO THE PROPER LENGTH. BFP DEVICE TO BE INSTALLED LEVEL AND PLUMB - MINIMUM CLEARANCE OF 24" TO BE MAINTAINED AROUND DEVICE FOR TESTING. - ENTIRE ASSEMBLY TO BE PAINTED SAFETY BLUE. CONCRETE SLAB TO EXTEND 12" MIN. AROUND ENTIRE DEVICE. DEVICE MUST BE LISTED WITH THE UNIVERSITY OF SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA FOUNDATION FOR CROSS CONNECTION CONTROL AND HYDRAULIC RESEARCH. - BFP MUST BE FREEZE PROTECTED. q. GRADE SERVICE COMMON LENGTHS IN FEET FITTINGS WATER MAINS - TEST PRESSURE 150 PSI FITTING TYPE 11-1 /40 22-1 /20 450 900 DEAD END 4" 2' 4' 8' 20' 45' 611 3' 6' 12' 28' 63' W 811 4' 7' 15' 36' 82' Fn W 10" 4' 9' 18' 43' 98' 0- 1211 5' 10, 21' 50' 116' 1 611 6' 13' 26' 63' 148' 2011 7' 15' 31' 76' 179' 2411 9' 17' 36' 87' 208' FORCE MAINS - TEST PRESSURE 100 PSI FITTING TYPE 11-1 /40 22-1 /20 450 900 DEAD END 4" 1 ' 3' 6' 13' 30' 6" 2' 4' 8' 19, 42' N 8" 2' 5' 10, 24' 55' U) W 10 3' 6' 12' 29' 66' 1 12" 3' 7' 14' 34' 77' 0- 16" 4' 8' 18' 42' 99, 2011 5' 10' 21' 50' 119, 2411 6' ill 24' 58' 139' VAL\ MANUFACTUF SIZE TURNS TO OPENING DIKt:.uiiVIv 2'-0" SQUARE CONC. PAD. VALVE BOX PAD SEE DETAIL Cr � w o� U CJ w za �N 0 Q I Ix a1166 WATER, SEWER, REUSE, ETC. BRASS MARKER W/ VALVE TYPE, SIZE AND VUMBER OF TURNS RIGHT OR LEFT TO OPEN TYPICAL CONCRETE VALVE PAD FINISH GRADE 4" MIN. (TYP.) CAST IRON SLIP TYPE VALVE BOX. NOTE: OPERATING NUT TO BE WITHIN 12" OF GROUND LEVEL WHEN COVER EXCEEDS 4'-0" (TYP. ALL VALVES) WITH AN EXTENSION AND CENTERING DISK. M.J. GATE VALVE, WITH RESTRAINED JOINTS ON EACH SIDE OF VALVE MAIN RESTRAINT LENGTHS ARE MEASURED FROM THE CENTER LINE OF THE FITTING ALONG THE PIPE IN UNDISTURBED EARTH `PUSH -ON JOINT BOTH DIRECTIONS (EXCEPT DEAD ENDS). CREATED 02/24/03 DOUBLE CHECK VALVE PROVIDED FOR INFORMATIONAL CREATED 02/24/03 PROVIDED FOR INFORMATIONAL CREATED 02/24/03 PROVIDED FOR INFORMATIONAL . VALVE BOX DETAIL PURPOSES ONLY. REVISED ASSEMBLY/BACKFLOW PREVENTER PURPOSES ONLY. RESTRAINED JOINT TABLE PURPOSES ONLY NO MODIFICATIONS WITHOUT REVISED COMMON FITTINGS NO MODIFICATIONS WITHOUT REVISED SLIP TYPE N WRIT TEN PCU APPROVAL WITHOUT (SINGLE SERVICE: 3/4" , 1 1 —1 /2 ti, 2") WRITTEN PCU APPROVAL WRITTEN PCU APPROVAL PASCO COUNTY UTILITIES DETAIL 12 r PASCO COUNTY UTILITIES DETAIL 28 PASCO COUNTY UTILITIES DETAIL 27 FREE—STANDING FDC 4" X 2'ft" X 2%" BRASS 90' SIAMESE FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION. 3'-0' ABOVE GRADE INSTALLED WITH 2'/2" CAPS AND CHAINS. 4" WAFER CHECK VALVE WITH CADMIUM PLATED NUTS & BOLTS AND 4" GALVANIZED THREADED ' UNIFLANGE NIPPLE. Z-GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO HAVE / EXPOSED PIPE PAINTED WITH RED 0 ENAMEL PAINT J H U FINISHED GRADE 4" M.J. M( RESTRAINT. SCALE: N.T.S. 24" SQUARE BY 4" DEEP CONCRETE BASE. SEE CIVIL PLANS FOR U, G, CONSTRUCTION FINISHED GRADE STORM OR iv SANITARY I N SEWER PIPE I to Z Q WATER MAIN N POD Z LOCATION OF PUBLIC WATER SYSYEM MAINS IN ACCORDANCE WITH F.A.C. RULE 62-555.314 Other Pipe Horizontal Separation Crossings (1) Joint Spacing (4? Crossings Full Joint Centered Water Main 101. Water Main Alternate 3 ft. minimum Storm Sewer, 3 ft. minimum 12 inches is the minimum; except for storm sewer, then Water Main Stormwater Force Main, 6 inches is the minimum and Reclaimed Water (2) 12 inches is preferred Water Main ater Main alternate 3 ft. m nim l W ater Main Vacuum Sanitary Sewer 10 ft. preferred 3 ft. mirrimum 12 inches preferred 6 inches minimum Water Main t�jater Niain 0 alternate 6 ft. mnunlum .�i, Gravity or Pressure Sanitary Sewer, Sanitary Sewer Force Main, Reclaimed Neater (4) 10 ft. preferred 6 ft. minimum (3) 12 inches is the minimum, except for gravity sewer; then 6 inches is the minimum and 12 inches is preferred WaterMain On -Site Sewage Treatment & Disposal System 10 ft. minimum --- --- _ (1) Water main should cross above other pipe. When water main must be below other pipe, the minimum separation. is 12 inches. (2) Reclaimed water regulated under Pall III of Chapter 62-610, F.A.C. (3) 3 ft. for gravity sanitary sewer where the bottom of the water main is laid at least 6 inches above the top of the gravity sanitary sewer. (4) Reclaimed water not regulated under Part III of Chapter 62-610, F.A.C. Disclaimer — This document isprnvided for your convenience only. Please refer to F.A.C. Rule 62-555.314 for additional construction requirements. 45 DEG DIP ELBOW W/ v I " NOTE: THIS METHOD TO BE USED WHEN RESTRAINED JOINTS (TYP.) INSUFFICIENT COVER EXISTS TO ALLOW WATER MAIN TO CROSS ABOVE SANITARY SEWER LATERAL WITH 18" VERTICAL SEPARATION AND MAINTAIN 42" MIN. COVER TO FINISHED GRADE. UTILITY TRANSITION DETAIL N.TA CURB STOP BALL VAL WITH LOCK EAR 3/4' POLYETHYLENE TUBING 3/4'xl' C❑UPLING 1' POLYETHYLENE TUBING 45' SADDLE UTILITY MAIN no. 1" 0/4" 0/4" WYE FOR SADDLES-2' THRU 4'-BRASS FULL CIRCLE SADDLES POLYETHYLENE TUBING 6' AND UP -DOUBLES STRAP SADDLES, V POLYETHYLENE TUBING SINGLE SERVICE DOUBLE SERVICE WATER SADDLE CONNECTION N,T.S. CONCRETE SIDEWAL• D SURFACE C.I. CLEANOUT COVER U.S. FOUNDARY & MANUFACTURING CORP. USF 7621 REVERSIBLE HANDHOLE RING AND FE RING AND C.I. COVER 6" 6" ^ G e Q 8" PVC PIPE J MIN. 12" LONG PVC CLEAN -OUT AT R/W LINE OR EASEMENT L-+N WYE BRAN MAIN NTS RED BRICK R/W OR EASEMENT LINE MARKER, PAINTED GREE --FINISHED GRADE z x 00 CONNECTION BY CUST UNDISTURBED MATERIAL J. GRADE M A T E R I A L S ITEM QUANT. DESCRIPTION 1 1 3", 4", 6", 8" DOUBLE CHECK VALVE/BFP ASSEMBLY WITH DETECTOR ASSEMBLY 2 2 3", 4", 6", 8" BEND, 90° FLANGE x FLANGE 3 2 3", 4", 6", 8" SPOOL PIECE FLG. x PE. D.I.P. 4 2 3", 4", 6", 8" BEND, 900 M.J. x M.J. 5 4 3", 4", 6", 8" GLAND, RETAINER M.J. (MEGALUG) 6 2 3", 4", 6", 8" VALVE, GATE FLG. x FLG. RESILIENT WEDGE O.S. & Y. 7 2 SUPPORT (AS NEEDED) 8 1 CONCRETE SLAB (6" THICK - 42" WIDE MIN.) NOTE: - NO TIE RODS OR EYE BOLT RETAINERS PERMITTED ABOVE GROUND. - B.F.P. ASSEMBLY TO BE INSTALLED LEVEL & PLUMB. - MINIMUM CLEARANCE OF 36" TO BE MAINTAINED AROUND ENTIRE DEVICE FOR TESTING - ENTIRE ASSEMBLY TO BE PAINTED SAFETY BLUE. - DETECTOR BY-PASS ASSEMBLY TO BE FACTORY INSTALLED AND CERTIFIED - ALL MECHANICAL JOINTS SHALL BE RESTRAINED WITH MEGALUGS OR APPROVED EQUAL - BELL JOINT RESTRAINERS SHALL BE PROVIDED ON ALL UNDERGROUND PIPING AS SPECIFIED IN JOINT RESTRAINT TABLE DETAIL ALL ABOVE GROUND PIPING SHALL BE FLANGED DUCTILE IRON PIPE (NO GALVANIZED OR PVC) - ITEM 3 SHALL BE FIELD CUT TO PROPER LENGTH TO ACHIEVE DESIGNATGED GROUND CLEARANCE - IF SO SPECIFIED, ENTIRE ASSEMBLY TO BE ENCLOSED IN 6' CHAIN LINK FENCE. - BFP DEVICE MUST BE LISTED WITH THE UNIVERSITY OF SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA FOUNDATION FOR CROSS CONNECTION CONTORL AND HYDRAULIC RESEARCH. L A CREATED 02/24/03 SANITARY SEWER —SINGLE WYE CONNECTION PROVIDED FOR INFORMATIONAL CREATED 02/24/03 DOUBLE DETECTOR CHECK VALVE PROVIDED FOR INFORMATIONAL PURPOSES ONLY. PURPOSES ONLY. REVISED NO MODIFICATIONS WITHOUT REVISED ASSEMBLY /B A C K F L 0 W PREVENTER NO MODIFICATIONS WITHOUT AND TYPICAL CLEAN —OUT WRITTEN PCU APPROVAL (SINGLE SERVICE: 3 4 6" 8, 10 WRITTEN PCU APPROVAL PASCO COUNTY IES DETAIL 42 PASCO COUNTY UTILITIES DETAIL 9 1111111111 1111111118 q 0-00 of 0 N C i r CO Z z 2 C6 N C Lii U 0 O N Lii CO O fn , ¢ 0 a cc a Q 0 [ S H E T N 0 o � J O40 a ' zO co W O 06w o U_ w0a_ zIrZ e' • 0 CC CO WC9r 10 l \ wH > f _f ZUQM \, o uj Q¢ o i [ >m U w ¢ U) M 0 o rr ¢0 rnc�f OLL Ir m CO 0 4U N co CL J cc< ^moo = W N CC O coo Z v Q � O n C') ¢ -Zj- _ ¢ > N CL M CL U_ ¢ J 0021-W(1)C U) Z Z O W Z CO J wZF<-C W Q H W W> = z ii a_ coo S) Z 0 � W Z Z J J ¢ ¢ Z j !7 W W U U ¢ Z LL m 0 �ocr a zz IfE W W J N '44 V holh,O O Z a 0 Ooc 0 '�U. W W J � c rn m a 0 N N I Sidewalk ide l eNecessary) ♦S° . J `S° .02 0.02 Ramp Width ! 4' Nln. OA2 Ramp Width (4'Min1 1� 12 (Not Required To Exceed 8' Ramp And Sidewalk Curb l2 '� In Length) Ramp And Sldewalk Cur�`� i Ramp And Sidewalk Curb Po �! z Y rN i amD / 2' Ming �2'Landing** � 2'Landirtg** � �\a•y5\ p�l�to`'�.►`" \b•�`�c ° Crosswalk width and configuration vary; must conform to \ \ Index No. 17344 and 17346. �' � Romp Width (4'Min.1- - i---L" PLAN Ramp And Sidewalk Curb o\ I // Ramp And Sidewalk Cur Romp And Sidewalk Curb/ V / ppb \ry p / Y o Landin p- 2'Landing** P �� \_2'Land/n9** 6" Sidewalk Curb �2, Landing** .._.,� Ramp Width(4'Min.J sit !-Ramp Width(4'Min.)57 Rdw, Pavf 2' If Where Necessary) --�r- �- -� SECTION AA DIMENSIONAL FEATURES FOR PUBLIC SIDEWALK CURB RAMPS FOR UNEAR PEDESTRIAN TRAFFIC E20 9 w DIMENSIONAL FEATURES FOR ofet I Trans. PUBLIC SIDEWALK =BINED C)RNER \ap (H) RAMPS UNDER CONDITIONS OF INFEASIBIUTY 6„ 6"xH Monolithic ar 6",U " Separate H lVariesJ '"- A�Sld�wolkurb i7 Ramp Widths For Curb Romps CR 20, CR 21, CR 22, CR 24, and CR 25 May Be H (Vdrlesl 0• - Reduced To 3'M/n. In Restricted Conditions When Approved By The Engineer- 0.02 Romp, Sidewalk Or Landing iu� 0.02 Ramp, Sidewalk Or Landing / *Lower landing not required at driveways, parking lots, or other areas with pavement cross -slopes less than 2% (0.02). MONOLITHIC CAST CURB SEPARATELY CAST CURB Construct Sidewalk Curb In Absence Of Adequate Buffer, Maintainable Surface Contour, Abut/ng Structure, Or When Called For In The Plans Or Standards RAMP AND SIDEWALK CURB OPTIONS BACK OF SIDEWALK CURB OR BUFFER TRANSITION 2008 FDOT Design Standards a n Sheet No. 07/01/07 4 of 6 _ - PUBLIC SIDEWALK CURB RAMPS I- N. 304 Xx NOTES: 1. FOR GRAVITY APPLICATIONS ONLY. 2. ALL PROCEPTOR UNITS ARE MANUFACTURED WITH FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTICS. PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND THICKNESS: * POLYESTER RESIN AND E GLASS MINIMUM THICKNESS 1 /4" WALL AND 3/8" TOP AND BOTTOM BOWLS. * MINIMUM BURIAL DEPTH = 24" FOR NON TRAFFIC RATED * MINIMUM BURIAL DEPTH = 36" FOR TRAFFIC RATED * MAXIMUM BURIAL DEPTH = 7 FEET (GRADE TO INVERT OF INLET) * TITLE: PROCEPTOR F.O.G. SEPARATOR ❑MC 750 GALLON INTERCEPT❑R 6" INLET & OUTLET 24" MANWAY ALL DIMENSIONS IN INCHES TOTAL WET VOLUME, 750 GAL MAX, ❑IL CAPACITY: 410 GAL MAX, S❑LIDS 200 GAL CAPACITY: PEAK FLOW RATE, 33 GPM MINIMUM ULTIMATE TENSILE STRENGTH , 12,000 PSI * MINIMUM FLEXURAL STRENGTH, 19,000 PSI FOR OIL * MINIMUM FLEXURAL MODULUS, 800,000 PSI FOR DEEPER INSTALLATIONS CALL GREEN TURTLE FOR CUSTOM REINFORCEMENT 3. ALL PROCEPTOR UNITS ARE TO BE INSTALLED IN STRICT ACCORDANCE WITH THE ARCHITECT OF RECORD TO VERIFY MANUFACTURERS INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS, WITH NATIONAL ACCOUNT VENDOR 4. SEE MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION FOR H2O TRAFFIC LOADING. 5. STANDARD PIPE STUBS ARE SOCKET SDR 35 PVC SEWER MATERIAL (SCHEDULE 40 ADAPTORS ADDED FOR ALL PROJECTS IN USA). SIDE VIEW 6. 6" INLET AND OUTLET 7. EXTENSION COLLAR TO BE ORDERED TO MEET FINISHED GRADE, CUT ON SITE FOR FINAL ADJUSTMENT AND CAULKED WITH SIKAFLEX BY CONTRACTOR. 5'x8'x6" CONCRETE COLLAR 8. COVERS AVAILABLE FOR H2O TRAFFIC LOADING, PEDESTRIAN LOADING OR ABOVE GROUND INSTALLATION. NOTE: 9. ALL PROCEPTOR UNITS ARE FACTORY TESTED. 1. OIL INTERCEPTOR DETAILS PROVIDED BY EDWARD & HOTCHKISS ARCHITECTS COMPANIES. MEASUREMENTS VERIFIED BY AVID GROUP. ALL 10. 30 YEAR WARRANTY AGAINST LEAKS, AND STRUCTURAL FAILURESTRUCTURAL AND MATERIAL TO BE APPROVED BY EDWARD & HOTCHKISS ARCHITECTS. 11. U.S. PATENT #5,746,912; CDN PATENT #2,195,822 OIL INTERCEPTOR CUSTOM ALUMINUM CAP E5 TO FIT THE OUTSIDE OF THE STORM PIPE & ROOF LEADER o a� w J L L_ 0 O fr 2'x2'x6" CONCRETE SLAB NISHED GRADE N e 0 90' ELBOW-\ c N STORM PIPE ROOF LEADER CONNECTION ROOF LEADER.DWG 07/30/06 NTS ELEVATION 2'-0" ABOVE TOP OF PIPE. CUT-OFF SHEETING IF REQUIRED. 11 CV ELEVATION TOP OF PIPE OR HYDRAULIC STRUCTURE BEDDING AND BACKFILL WITH SELECTED MATERIALS TO BE PLACED AND COMPACTED IN 6" LIFTS UTILIZING METHODS AND EQUIPMENT APPROVED BY THE ENGINEER. PIPE BEDDING TAMPED AND COMPACTED D VATURAL GROUND DR SUBGRADE (TYP) BACKFILL TO BE COMPACTED TO 100% T-99. LIFT THICKNESS MAY VARY DEPENDENT UPON MATERIAL, EQUIPMENT, AND COMPACTION METHODS USED, BUT IN NO CASE SHALL EXCEED 12". DENSITY TESTS TO BE TAKEN IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE GOVERNMENTAL AGENCY HAVING JURISDICTION, OR AS MAY BE REQUIRED BY THE ENGINEER. 6" MIN - 12" MAX 12" DIA AND UNDER 12" MIN - 18" MAX OVER 12" DIA BOTTOM OF EXCAVATION NOTE: FOR TRENCHES IN PAVED AREAS OR AREAS TO RECEIVE NEW PAVEMENT, SEE PAVEMENT SPECIFICATIONS. I o s z En . � L ^ � w 1L TYPICAL TRENCH SECTION 0 a W W a N TRENCH.DWG 6/09/94 NTS W Y = 1i H 4 A SCALE: NONE 18' PERVIOUS PARKING A IC>I PROPOSED TYPE 'D' CURB BASED THICKNESS VARIES (6" MIN) 2" FLEXI- PAVE SEE TYP PAVEMENT SECTION FOR DETAILS �- SUB GRADE 8" CONCRETE HEADER SLOPED TOWARDS CURB PERVIOUS AREA (SEE DETAIL FOR COMPACTION RATE) TYPICAL PERVIOUS PAVEMENT CROSS SECTION D,Neeoy Width (W ) F• fsee Sheet/1 ^� - R/W Llne T T__ rW) Q DrYSee _ DfN-11 To Be Cansdructed As Called For In .I -�- OrNewoy Pavement heatdth (See Sheet 11 ___ The PI ' Or As Directed By The Engineer Q r ( For Concrete Pavement Jofnf = PaHerne, See 'fNSET' RW J _--_ Open Joints 0 /0'Ctrs.: Very 51h Joint shall le ot DfNe-y To Be conelled As Called Far In The Plans Or As Di -voted By The Engineer,' ,! Conorete Turnout- / J°'nt JOINT PATTERN WHEN CONCRETE DRIVE C6WSTRUCTED INSET PLAN C TURNOUT WITHOUT SIDEWALK Dleianoe Between Conneofiass V. Sae "Skshb Illustrating Dermitiord and General Note No, 3. DrNbwoy Width t WISiree/R/W _ - T 1" Cox Swk. f See Sheet 1) 4° Gox. $dice .� Transition Fal/ Ta v ` 4" Cara. Swk. -�? Varies Imo' 3' GVrb From Zero Hei➢ht P.f End of All Curb And Gutter ComstnzNon Except Poen Jolnie 0 !D'Cirs,h lit r3'Min. Jo Who, Connecifna Ex11 Curb And Gutter. 4 8ae1 Of Sidewalk �' Every SM Joint stall be ¢" DriSo. hoot !W1 ¢ - (See Shoot i) Public Sldewalk Curb Ra p Refer To index Na. - I 310 r 9" Cona Swk (Exo nple Pnryl `� �" joint 5, ¢" Join \ L ¢ joint Beck Of Sidewalk '. Full Height Curb tenon, Voyles: * �- K _ 2M. Bead L1.11. Of Public S/dewlik Lvrb Romps - See Index No. 304. 3'Mrn. Bac.t O/ Sidewalk In be Df FUNin Sidewalk Curb Ramps. oce "Joint ��� \ A, Reyvlrod F°r Connomini To £xlsfing Curb. r` Utility Strip WO/p 1 10, or Crevler 15 -6" Cox. Drhewoy And '', Flere Point. i 6" C Driveway Antl St,e 1k \ / ,yam Q Sldewalk \ , utility strip join \ `\ ✓ \ti -Flare Po1nt Slderlreat Edge ar 1- ment Eatensiun tinc f FUture Edge Of Perement Where Awrlon), a°}\, t-- Less than 10' /r �° Jatoo t j' In Ah Adopted Five Year Tr 4.,tmian Pten I. Yories f To SUH Distaiae -- -'}' Radius Polar j Drop od Allowed Within lde TAeae Ltmlts Except � As For 1'ubilc Sldewalk Curb Ramps Shown DropLore Width V lee) Between Connections 'D 1 But Not Leas TAcm 6' �1- Drap Curb fWidM 4m-iesl -I .Required On Index No. 3OP,� ! � J - I � Corner Clearoxe (Cf. See Gerterat Note No. J. PLAN B PLAN A TURNOUT WITH SIDEWALK AND TURNOUT WiTH SIDEWALK AND UTILITY STRIP (KPOR GREATER) UTILITY STRIP (LESS THAN V) Fmh"fe&r S'EDAL MGM FOR URBAN FLARED TtMW S DESBW MITES FOR U MAN FLARED TURMII/75 All ¢° flats shell be 000shulted WIM preformed joint finer. 1. O,N mby 6° mxrete pavement end atop curb shall meet the ,00terfol 6. Department -,we- of pavement stall extend out to Me right of /. Driv-0. loannnted pa 'AWerse Appllual-'- thee, with z The a onba, tared driveways on this index rrwy not auarturrodle .4 conenn than requtrobomte of Seaflons SPE and SW respectively way ar 2' b ok of sidewalk, whlchever dibi-, ess is l. slopes it& inn awe, orerfbh➢ died for represenbflve vehicles with low bedappendage s, low onder0,rrioge or law feature,. +k I' Op.joints placed of idol ! 2O' max.1 fnlarvo/s for of Me FOOT Sfindad SpetB/mfions. The drNeWay fourlda!lan atafl slanood lwaeenger vehicles tinder N/ry loaded cadit/arrs; ar, Where soy; vehicles are dent^rn vehfcles d Newnys are to have alto drNeways Duet 20' w/de. Jalnis in wrb and prlter M meet the requirement of 5ulmtile 522.1. T. Tha .1domrlce one Merohtn of highway lr➢mtm, traffic eignls. those w!M s/a➢es itaf can aaxtr dfNers who ore /eavfrq She specific fora desiprs or LMagory ffideslpns. mold, jointe fA drNewoya. aesacioled equipmd, and oMer necessary devices stuff be the repcepy to slow or ,wise m the extent that traffic deved 2 For defalla a1 drop wrD had public sidewalk orb romps refer k raspansiblllty of a pub/to ppenBy, rot-. will be Impeded. 3. When speafftc flare type orNowoys are M be harsh acted, the type o Wnen p°nneo I. to eti,an,ot pure and goiter neatens, /rrdexes Nut. 300 oM 30t raspedNe'v. shill be desl➢hah d In the plops uelrq the paslgned vtpM--rb the no drop av/rb limit, should extend bock to the a All povement m A11 gs on the Stare hlo ys, incNMllp acceleration Drryew%fi indlcoted as MoIgcool Ap, ications'are. those With des/➢natter. erdesheef real. purr. With or without pop, and g t er, J. Where turruuts are con frocfed within -enng wrb end gutter the no drNewoy s1W1d encioarh on the miner radius. exlsflM w,b and wafer still be reproved either to the neared) joint end deceteraHon lone morklrrgs, and signing installed for the Memnon of Me Sbte high-/ shill be-hdoln_M by the Department. stapes Nat pun muse overhang drop for ropr000ntott" standard the ppssenaer vehicles aver (illy Jcadad corditipne wAen Ma pose nce beyond 161 flare point or Ja line axon lllne w romainnra esatron r, a DrIleweys IV mncrefe 1 shall be of a uniform width (W; lass Utah 5' "V, earl, drop wrb wrefrocied In azardboor wFill titles 9. Alt sIlAft oM morking !rnsralled for the operation of the mnaectlon d rNo is tilted an the tar side of Fully s ere, m the right of wq /lee. Abs. land L reulh be stop Lars rod stop signs for the connection) shall be Iha ys {Z •f Mfn.. Nay be reduced M 3'Mhr. In restricted condiifons 4. Cost for praformetl Joint Filler shot/k, ! in the Met for the rev/ nrlbroly of Me pe-mI I. °s 'liner) ra are thane with Dtop. Icon thiced when approved by Me Engineer. mnaete paremenf 1onncrete sidewalk, 6" thick). p. Tuldnvol will be paid for under the mntrxt unN price for Concrete lch, o ft red represenmrire standard slopes Nat inn resold cthee. Alpha-mrpmrfa Idantffioat/on of a flared driveway rye, 5. For luntoots with rolal rehrms see the requirements under the "Summary "General Sldewalk f 6° Thick). SY. told, paxtanger rehPolse and tMse that Dan amomnwda/e r.pre Wt,. stance d frocks, vans, buses and t oreatforml apacN/mlry rolled for In Me plate, are sheets 3 and 1. m Geometric leequlramenre For T.,bote". Me tiaras", ibe detafm of "Rom" Tumad CasfrcaFiOn' and the debll of 11. All sldework auM es -7ng d'ryewoys whin a ems slope shown In M!a index b be 0.02 slat) be 0.02 Naxf ho- vehicles oprdll g order .-I crave and superelevan. mrdR/ons. 'Llmirs Of Clearly q & Grubbing. Stahl/ll1/hm And Base At /Mersecffons'. Nile, See &Reel I for WENERAL An W URBAN FLARED TURNOUTS Q A CCI F_ A I HOLD D FRP 2" 5'xl 5%8'X12" MIN CC BALLAST AS RE BY MANUFA- I _.. . . d • -4.- - - 4:.1 • ' a '•TACTILE SURFAC�. -d • d ♦ ?I. • d - • ♦ .� - . d - - i. ••. -• -d .. -. - -• '. .OS - - ♦- i- 'mod • A. O♦O.O B 0 0 0 0 0.O 0 0 - - ...A' • d♦♦ _ _ - • jr� o 0 0 • o o d o o » o J 4 ♦ ' d -•' i • •. ' - - , .. - - 000 AG . - - 0000000�ODOOOOOAo6Ob000 - - -♦ .. - _ A' - A d d ♦� • . . -.. od°oao 000000000000000°0 0 •: n : • . PARKING LOT/TRAVELWAY 6' I 5' STD I 6' 44 MIN CURB RAMP DETECTABLE WARNING SURFACES SHALL EXTEND THE FULL WIDTH OF THE RAMP AND IN THE DIRECTION OF TRAVEL 24" FROM THE BACK OF CURB. DETECTABLE WARNING SURFACES SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED BY TEXTURING A TRUNCATED DOME PATTERN IN CONFORMANCE WITH U.S. DEPARTMENT OF JUSTICE A.D.A. STANDARDS FOR ACCESSIBLE DESIGN, A.D.A. ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES, SECTION 4.29.2. TRANSITION SLOPES ARE NOT TO HAVE DETECTABLE WARNINGS. 12:1 SLOPE 12-1 SLOP.� %4 SECTION AA HANDICAPPED RAMP HC-RAMP4.DWG 2/04/05 NTS 1. PAVEMENT NEXT TO CURB EXTEND BASE TO FACE OF CURB, EXTEND SUB -GRADE TO 6" BEHIND BACK OF CURB 2. PAVEMENT WITH NO CURB EXTEND BASE 6" BEYOND EDGE OF ASHPALT, EXTEND SUB -GRADE 12" BEYOND EDGE OF ASPHALT BASE EXTENSIONS Driveway Width (W) �, IS,, Sheet 11 ` Rn, or Easement - - - - -I - -I--- -�-- F Qi0 b utility Strip j o m I.t 6° Candela OFIV`_ And Side Wotk � (0-4') 1. 6' 1,, 4' Curb PLAN NODIFICATMNS OF 'ADVERSE' AND 'MAJONAL' APPLICATKMIS 4' 5'SldeWalk 2' -� ~ _ o G 24 0-04 5'Sidewalk 2' 3` 5'Sidewalk 3' 'mil' 0.02 4'A 6' _I. 4'G 0.02_ 4't1 G3 G/3 GP3 D.oar--------- 7' 3' 2' 5'Sidewo1k 3' 2' 5'Sldrwalk �0.02 7' 4' 4 0.02 . GE 0.02 _1.0_088-_0-02 0.04 _I __ f 5'Sidewotk 6' 4' 6' 4'1, GI --- Gn------- 7' _I_L' _I 2' 5'5idewa/k 2' 5' .} 4',1 5' sin 0.02 0.02 _ 1 -099 - 0.02 r- 0099-------- r --------' E E NI Nn 3' 5'Side /k 2' 61 4'o y 4' I o_I 0.02 I - 2' 5'Sidewalk 3' I p•02 I _ET P SEW ONT VIEW I" ADVERSE* AND MARONAL* SECTIONS AWFIED -ADVERSE* ACHIEVE GENERAL APPUCArM ADVERSE* SECTWS NWFIED TO ACHIEVE AL APPLICATION * See 'DESIGN NOTES FOR URBAN FLARED TURNOUTS' On Sheet 2 A May Be Reduced To .3'AU.. In Restricted CorMltfons When Approved By The Engineer. DepthLe. Than 3' Aflowobte Only Under Findings Of lnfrgsnbNtry. SIDEWALK AWACENT TO CURB SIDEWALK WffH U77UTY STiNP ON 0.012 SLOPE SIDEWALK WITH UTILITY STRP ON 0.04 SLOPE 2008 FDOT Design Star MODIFICATIONS TO ADVERSE AND MARGINAL SECTIONS - ® TURNOUTS m Z F O Cr U W 0 n o Z F c ¢W>-cn-OzW p H co C o 0 i1 CD 0 iCO z2 C6 u z 2 coN 0 0 ON tW-O - U a a L) M Cra Li 0 L LU H to _ C oQ z coo 0D 0 wN C8 L -6w o DLL®C) a WOa_j �i (D as o Nr o ..Fn U Q tin L �¢�CO L E-A�' G� WH>m 7 e, z Q M G ICD Z)LU co c O C ca O c C] 0 LO ¢� M O LD c6 c 00 CD O CO U J m N r- IL J = r LLI CIJ CC Zoo O � Q v = Q > N IL M n- LL Q J o0Zu.lcnc7cn Z Z O=W Z FD Zr)Zw2,,Qw w Ww> ME;Z rL ) ZC]U)U¢ LU Z CC J J Q aZ Z > � W W U U < Z U < o CC a Z ~ � LL W NSk ° � O O 90 � a W N S "� SneeL Na. H �Io os a of e E Indsx No. 515 E � N 0 i m LANDSCAPE PLAN SCALE: I " = 20' • ALL PROPOSED PLANTING AREAS FOR TREES, PALMS, SHRUBS, AND GKOUNDCOVER5 SHALL BE TOP DRESSED WITH A MAXIMUM OF THREE (3) INCHES OF PINE BARK NUGGETS SPREAD UNIFORMLY IN DEPTH OVER THE PLANTING BEDS A5 DELINEATED ON THE PLANS, UNLESS OTHERWI5E SPECIFIED. • ALL OTHER AREAS DESIGNATED FOR 50D SHALL BE 5T. AUGU5TINE 'FLOKATAM' UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED ON PLANS. • ALL AREA5 DESIGNATED TO RECEIVE 50D AND/OR MULCH SHALL BE FIELD MEASURED BY THE LANDSCAPE CONTRACTOR • ALL TREES TO BE USED FOR REPLACEMENT CREDIT SHALL BE 4" CALIPER • CONTRACTOR SHALL APPLY AN APPROVED PRE -EMERGENT HERBICIDE TO ALL GRADED AREAS RECEIVING 50D OR LANDSCAPING PRIOR TO INSTALLATION OF MULCH • ALL DISTURBED AREAS TO BE SODDED WITH WITH BAHIA SOD IF NOT IRRIGATED. SEE IRRIGATION PLAN. INSTALL 5T. AUGUSTINE SOD IN DISTURBED AREAS WHERE IRRIGATION 15 BEING PROVIDED. City of Zephyrh1115 to be notified prior to the digging of trenches for the used of installation of landscape materials. Soil 5ample5 of the existing soil and the proposed fill soil are to be provided to insure the planted materials survival in the case that heavy clays are encountered. PLANT SCHEDULE TKEE5 CODE QTY BOTANICAL COMMON CONT CALF 51ZE 0 LIN 9 Lager5trOCMIA indica 'Natchez' Natchez Crape Myrtle 25 gal 2.5"Cal 10' ht x 4' 5pd. Multi-trunked 5peclmen5 with 3 canes, I" DBH Ea. 00 FE G Finu5 elliotti ' Den5a' 5135h Fine 45 gal 3"Cal 1 3' ht. x 4' 5pd. Single trunked specimens with one primary leader QV 3 Quercu5 virginiana Southern Live Oak 45 gal 3"Cal 1 4' ht. x 5' 5pd. SHRUBS CODE QTY BOTANICAL COMMON CONT 0 GJ 9 Gardenia ja5minoide5 Gardenia 5 gal ORI 83 Khaphiolep15 indica Indian Hawthorn 5 gal GROUND COVERS CODE QTY BOTANICAL COMMON QUANTITY MU 1,457 5f Mulch Mulch Area (5F) 5A 3,077 5f 5tenotaphrum 5ecundatum ' Floratam' ' Floritam' 5t. Augustine Sod Field Measured Sod 0 48 HOURS BEFORE YOU DIG CALL SUNSHINE 1-800-432-4770 IT'S THE LAW IN FLORIDA FL STATUE 553.851 (i 979) REQUIRE5 MIN. OF 2 DAYS AND MAX. Of 5 DAYS NOTICE BEFORE YOU EXCAVATE. FDOT MAINTENANCE YARD TO BE CONTACTED 72 HOURS PRIOR TO BEGINNING CONSTRUCTION. Z O F- a m U Cl) W 0 n a O Z =W>-W—OZW O N W Q a �, O O N j tf� Z 2 Z g CC0i � -i � N LLi C U R) Cr 0 ¢ a ¢ a Q 0 0 20' 40' 60' S H E Scale: 1" = 20' T N O 0 W J 0Z Z CLI N ao co w 0 z LU w o W wLL Oa-j Za0L LU zQ �WIrA ir) J Cn _ m Q co W W U 2 CD Z Q M 0 O 0 = LL- QQ O U >>- �-m O Z 0 0 w i— o � o 0 LO Q _j rn w OLL o>CID� CC °° cD O 0 LU m N P- d Jcc �a ��o J =Y ,NOC 2 O roiQ� _¢> N d M il- LL Q J c�c�ZwUJ zzOZ� Z:) U J WZ¢i`Zw W Q H W W> Er µ U oC O I _ Cl)U Z�Cl)0Q u_IZZ�� LU > a- U U Q Z U a z ~ J LU W N � o O Z W � — a W N Ll Z a w a North m LY 0 0 z a 0 w IL 0 0 w m F_ 0 z y z a J a W co w x L- LANDSCAPE 5PECIFICATION5 I . WORK UNDER THESE SPECIFICATIONS 5HALL CON515T OF PREPARATION OF PLANTING AREAS, FURNISHING AND PLANTING ALL PROPOSED NEW PLANT MATERIALS SPECIFIED HEREIN AND A5 SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO FINISHED GRADING, FURNISHING TOP501L AND SPREADING, STAKING, WATERING, PRUNING, FERTILIZING, MULCHING, AND LAYING SOD, AND MAINTENANCE AND PROTECTION OF PLANTS UNTIL FINAL ACCEPTANCE BY THE OWNER. 2. THE OWNER SHALL HAVE THE RIGHT TO REJECT ANY AND ALL WORK AND MATERIALS WHICH, IN HIS OPINION, DO NOT MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE PLANTING PLAN, DETAILS, AND THESE SPECIFICATIONS. 3. NO SUBSTITUTIONS SHALL BE MADE TO THE PLANTING PLAN, DETAILS OR THESE SPECIFICATIONS WITHOUT THE EXPRESSED WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT. 4. THE LANDSCAPE CONTRACTOR SHALL CONTACT THE OWNER AND THE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT IMMEDIATELY OF ANY CONFLICTS ARISING DURING CONSTRUCTION OR INSTALLATION OF ANY IMPROVEMENTS SHOWN OR IMPLIED ON THE DRAWINGS AND/OR SPECIFICATIONS. 5. THE LANDSCAPE CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL ALL PLANT5 A5 SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS, A5 SPECIFIED, AND IN THE QUANTITIES LISTED ON THE PLANT MATERIALS LI5T. IN THE EVENT OF A VARIATION BETWEEN THE PLANT LI5T AND THE ACTUAL G. NUMBER OF PLANTS SHOWN ON THE PLANTING PLAN, THE PLANTING PLAN 5HALL CONTROL. 7. ALL PLANTS SHALL BE FLOKIDA NO. I OR BETTER. ALL PLANTS SHALL BE TYPICAL OF THEIR SPECIES OR VARIETY AND SHALL HAVE A NORMAL HABIT OF GROWTH. THEY SHALL BE 50UND, HEALTHY AND VIGOROUS, WELL -BRANCHED AND DENSELY FOLIATED WHEN IN LEAF. THEY SHALL BE FREE OF DISEASE AND INSECT PESTS, EGGS OR LARVAL. THEY SHALL HAVE HEALTHY, WELL -DEVELOPED ROOT SYSTEMS. 8. ALL PLANTS SHALL BE NURSERY GROWN STOCK AND SHALL COMPLY WITH ALL REQUIRED INSPECTIONS, GRADING STANDARDS, PLANT REGULATIONS AND REQUIREMENTS FOR MEASUREMENT, BRANCHING, AND CULTURAL PRACTICES; A5 SET FORTH IN THE FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE "GRADES AND STANDARDS FOR NURSERY PLANTS", PARTS I AND II, INCLUDING ANY REV1510N5 A5 DETERMINED BY THE STATE PLANT BOARD OF FLORIDA. 9. ALL PLANTS SHALL BE HARDY UNDER CLIMATIC CONDITIONS 51MILAR TO THOSE IN THE LOCALITY OF THE PROJECT. 10. A5 PER THESE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS, THE "HT." (HEIGHT) OF PROPOSED PLANT MATERIALS, UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, SHALL MEAN THE ACTUAL DISTANCE AS MEASURED FROM THE SOIL STRESS MARK ON THE TRUNK OR BA5L OF THE PLANT TO THE TOP ELEVATION OF THE PLANT. 1 1. ALL PLANTS SHALL CONFORM TO THE MEASUREMENTS FOR 51ZE A5 SPECIFIED IN THE PLANT LI5T. EXCEPTIONS ARE PLANTS LARGER THAN SPECIFIED IN THE PLANT LI5T MAY BE U5ED IF APPROVED BY THE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT BUT, USE OF SUCH PLANTS SHALL NOT INCREASE THE CONTRACT PRICE. IF THE USE OF LARGER PLANTS 15 APPROVED, THE SPREAD OF ROOTS OR BALL OF EARTH SHALL BE INCREASED IN PROPORTION TO THE 51ZE OF THE PLANT. 12. WHEN PLANTS OF A SPECIFIED KIND OR 51ZE ARE NOT AVAILABLE, A REASONABLE SUBSTITUTION MAY BE MADE UPON REQUEST IN WRITING BY THE LANDSCAPE CONTRACTOR, IF APPROVED BY THE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT . 13. THE LANDSCAPE CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY THE LOCATION OF ALL WORK A5 SHOWN ON THE PLAN AND CONTACT THE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT IMMEDIATELY OF ANY CONFLICTS AND ADJUST A5 PER THE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT'S DIRECTION. 14. THE LANDSCAPE CONTRACTOR SHALL STAKE ALL PLANT MATERIAL LOCATIONS FROM THE PLANTING PLAN PRIOR TO INSTALLATION FOR APPROVAL BY THE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT. 15. LOCATIONS, ELEVATIONS AND DIMENSIONS OF EXISTING UTILITIES, STRUCTURES AND OTHER FEATURES ARE SHOWN ACCORDING TO THE BEST INFORMATION AVAILABLE AT THE TIME OF THE PREPARATION OF THE5E PLANS, BUT DO NOT PURPORT TO BE ABSOLUTELY CORRECT. THE LANDSCAPE CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY THE LOCATIONS, ELEVATIONS AND DIMENSIONS OF ALL EXISTING UTILITIES, STRUCTURES AND OTHER FEATURES AFFECTING HIS WORK PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. I G. IT SHALL BE THE LANDSCAPE CONTRACTOR'S SOLE RESPONSIBILITY TO NOTIFY "SUNSHINE" AND ANY OTHER INTERESTED AGENCIES OR PARTIES OF H15 INTENT TO EXCAVATE AND TO OBTAIN FROM ALL AGENCIES OR OTHER INTERESTED PARTIES LOCATIONS OF ALL EXISTING UTILITIES OF EVERY KIND IN THE AREAS WHERE HE INTENDS OR PLANS TO EXCAVATE. SUCH LOCATIONS SHALL BE OBTAINED PRIOR TO STARTING CONSTRUCTION AND SHALL BE MAINTAINED DURING CONSTRUCTION. 17. THE LANDSCAPE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AT LEAST 48 HOUR5 NOTICE TO THE UTILITY COMPANIES IN ORDER TO PERMIT THE LOCATION OF EXISTING UNDERGROUND UTILITIES IN ADVANCE OF CONSTRUCTION. 18. THE LANDSCAPE CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY THE LOCATION OF ALL UNDERGROUND UTILITIES PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF CONSTRUCTION. 13. ALL PLANTING BED AREAS SHALL BE FINE GRADED BY THE LANDSCAPE CONTRACTOR. 20. ALL PROPOSED PLANTING AREA5 FOR TREE5, PALMS, 5HRUB5, AND GROUND - COVERS SHALL BE TOP DRESSED WITH A MAXIMUM OF THREE (3) INCHES OF PINE BARK NUGGETS SPREAD UNIFORMLY IN DEPTH OVER THE PLANTING BED5 A5 DELINEATED ON THE PLANS, UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED. GENERAL NOTES 1. WARNING: ABOVEGROUND AND/OR UNDERGROUND UTILITIES MAY BE IN THE AREA OF THI5 PROJECT. PROCEED WITH CAUTION: CALL "SUNSHINE" AND THE UTILITY OWNEK(5) FORTY EIGHT (48) HOUR5 BEFORE BEGINNING WORK. TELEPHONE: 1 500-432-4770. 2. ALL CONSTRUCTION SHALL CONFORM TO ALL APPLICABLE CODE5, ORDINANCES AND REGULATIONS OF ZEPHYRHILLS, FL 3. REQUIRED TREE BARRICADES MUST REMAIN INTACT THROUGHOUT CONSTRUCTION. ENCROACHMENT INTO OR FAILURE TO MAINTAIN TREE BARRICADES MAY RESULT IN ENFORCEMENT ACTION. 4. CONTRACTOR SHALL OBTAIN ALL NECESSARY PERMITS PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. 2 1. THE SURFACE OF ALL AKEA5 TO BE GRASSED OR SODDED 511ALL BE PREPARED FOR THE PLACEMENT OF 50D BY THE LANDSCAPE CONTRACTOR. THE LAND5CAPE CONTRACTOR SHALL REMOVE ALL DEBRIS FROM THE AREAS A5 SHOWN ON THE PLAN TO RECEIVE SOD AND LAY 50D EVENLY WITHOUT GAPS. ALL JOINTS SHALL BE STAGGERED. 22. ALL OTHER AKEA5 OUTSIDE THE PROJECT WORK AREA SHALL BE PRESERVED AND PROTECTED BY THE CONTRACTOR; ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE CONTRACTOR IN THE PERFORMANCE OF HIS/HER WORK SHALL BE RESTORED TO EXISTING OR BETTER CONDITION. 23. THE LANDSCAPE CONTRACTOR SHALL CONTROL RUNOFF AND EROSION DURING CONSTRUCTION THROUGH THE USE OF SEDIMENT BASINS, STRAW OR HAY BALES A5 APPROPRIATE. 24. THE LAND5CAPE CONTRACTOR SHALL SPRINKLE OR OTHERWISE MANUALLY APPLY WATER TO AFFECTED CONSTRUCTION AREA TO CONTROL BOTH 51GNIFICANT WIND EROSION AND FUGITIVE DUST. 25. THE LANDSCAPE CONTRACTOR SHALL AT ALL TIMES KEEP THE PREMISES FREE FROM ACCUMULATION OF WA5TE MATERIALS OR DEBRIS CAUSED BY HIS CREWS DURING THE PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK. UPON COMPLETION OF THE WORK, THE LANDSCAPE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROMPTLY REMOVE ALL WASTE MATERIALS, DEBRIS, UNUSED PLANT MATERIAL, EMPTY PLANT CONTAINERS AND ALL EQUIPMENT FROM THE PROJECT 51TL. 2G. THE LANDSCAPE CONTRACTOR SHALL WATER, MULCH, WEED, PRUNE, AND OTHERWISE MAINTAIN ALL PLANTS, INCLUDING SOD, UNTIL COMPLETION OF THE CONTRACT AND FINAL ACCEPTANCE BY THE OWNER. SETTLED PLANTS SHALL BE RESET TO PROPER GRADE, PLANTING 5AUCEK5 RESTORED, AND DEFECTIVE WORK CORRECTED. 27. UPON COMPLETION OF THE WORK, THE LANDSCAPE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY THE OWNER AND THE LAND5CAPE ARCHITECT IN WRITING, AND RE- QUEST A FINAL INSPECTION. ANY ITEMS THAT ARE JUDGED INCOMPLETE OR UNACCEPTABLE BY THE OWNER OR THE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT SHALL BE PROMPTLY CORRECTED BY THE LANDSCAPE CONTRACTOR. 28. THE LANDSCAPE CONTRACTOR SHALL GUARANTEE ALL PLANT MATERIALS FOR A PERIOD OF THREE HUNDRED 51XTY FIVE QG5) CALENDAR DAYS FROM THE DATE OF FINAL ACCEPTANCE IN WRITING FROM THE OWNER. AT THE TIME OF FINAL ACCEPTANCE, THE THREE HUNDRED 51XTY FIVE (3G5) DAY GUARANTEE PERIOD SHALL COMMENCE. ANY MATERIALS WHICH HAVE DIED DURING THIS PERIOD SHALL BE PROMPTLY REPLACED WITH SPECIMENS THAT MEET THE MINIMUM REQUIREMENT5 CALLED FOR ON THE DRAWINGS. THE LANDSCAPE CONTRACTOR 5HALL NOT BE HELD RESPONSIBLE FOR DEATH OR DAMAGE RESULTING FROM LIGHTNING, VANDALISM, AUTOMOBILES OR FROM NEGLIGENCE BY THE OWNER. THE OWNER SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WATERING AND OTHERWISE MAINTAINING PLANTS DURING THE GUARANTEE PERIOD IF A MAINTENANCE AGREEMENT 15 NOT ACCEPTED FROM THE LANDSCAPE CONTRACTOR. 29. 501L IN 51DEWALK CUT OUTS, PARKING LOT ISLANDS, AND OTHER LANDSCAPE SPACES ARE TO BE REPLACED WITH APPROVED IMPORTED OR EXISTING STOCKPILED TOP501L THAT HAS BEEN APPROVED TO A MINIMUM DEPTH OF 18" FROM TOP OF CURB OR WORK AFTER LIGHT COMPACTION TO IMPROVE CONDITIONS. ALL CONSTRUCTION DEBRIS, ROCKS, 5TICK5, LIMEKOCK, SHELL, ETC. ARE TO BE REMOVED FROM THE ENTIRE PLANTING AREA. BACKFILL 501L SHALL BE APPROVED CLEAN TOPSOIL COMPLYING WITH THE FOLLOWING REQUIREMENTS: • 501L MIXTURE PLANTING MEDIUM FOR PLANT PITS SHALL CON515T OF TWO PARTS OF TOP501L AND ONE PART SAND, A5 DESCRIBED BELOW. • TOPSOIL FOR USE IN PREPARING 501L MIXTURE FOR BACKFILLING PLANT PITS SHALL BE FERTILE, FRIABLE, AND OF A LOAMY CHARACTER; REASONABLY FREE OF SUBSOIL, CLAY LUMPS, BRUSH WEEDS AND OTHER LITTER; FREE OF ROOTS, STUMPS, STONES LARGER THAN 2" IN ANY DIRECTION, AND OTHER EXTRANEOUS OR TOXIC MATTER HARMFUL TO PLANT GROWTH. IT SHALL CONTAIN THREE (3) TO FIVE (5) PERCENT DECOMPOSED ORGANIC MATTER AND A PH BETWEEN 5.5 AND 7.0 - SUBMIT SAMPLE AND PH TESTING RESULTS FOR APPROVAL. • SAND SHALL BE COARSE, CLEAN, WELL -DRAINING, NATIVE SAND. CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT RESULTS OF 501L TESTS FOR TOP501L AND SAND PROPOSED FOR USE UNDER THIS CONTRACT FOR APPROVAL BY THE OWNER. • TREES SHALL BE PLANTED IN THE EXISTING NATIVE SOIL ON 51TE, UNLESS DETERMINED TO BE UNSUITABLE - AT WHICH POINT THE CONTRACTOR SHALL CONTACT OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE TO DISCUSS ALTERNATE RECOMMENDATION PRIOR TO PLANTING. • CONTRACTOR TO SUBMIT SAMPLES OF SOIL MIXTURE FOR OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE APPROVAL PRIOR TO PLANT INSTALLATION OPERATIONS COMMENCE. • CITY OF ZEPHYRHILL5 TO BE NOTIFIED PRIOR TO THE DIGGING OF TRENCHES FOR THE USED OF INSTALLATION OF LANDSCAPE MATERIALS. 501L SAMPLES OF THE EXISTING 501L AND THE PROPOSED FILL 501L ARE TO BE PROVIDED TO INSURE THE PLANTED MATERIALS SURVIVAL IN THE CA5E THAT HEAVY CLAYS ARE ENCOUNTERED. FURNISH SOURCE INFORMATION ON WHERE THE BACKFILL 501L 15 TO BE EXCAVATED, STOCKPILED, AND PREPARED FOR USE IN INSTALLING TREE5, 5HRUB5, GROUNDCOVER5, PALMS, AND LAWN5; SUBMIT SAMPLES AND CHEMICAL ANALY515 FOR APPROVAL. 30. THE LAND5CAPE CONTRACTOR SHALL EXAMINE THE 501L5 OF ALL PLANTING AREAS PRIOR TO SUBMITTING BIDS FOR THE SUITABILITY TO SUSTAIN HEALTHY PLANT GROWTH A5 CALLED FOR ON THE PLANTING PLAN, DETAILS, AND THESE SPECIFICATIONS. 3 1 . THE LANDSCAPE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR REMOVING ALL TREE STAKES AND GUY WIRES FROM TREES WHICH ARE ESTABLISHED AT THE END OF ONE (1) COMPLETE GROWING SEASON. TREES, WHICH HAVE BEEN REPLACED SHALL REMAIN STAKED FOR ONE (1) FULL GROWING SEASON, AND THE OWNER SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR REMOVING TREE STAKES AND GUY WIRES. 32. ALL LANDSCAPE BIDS SHALL BE ITEMIZED WITH THE AMOUNTS BASED ON UNIT PRICES. ANY SUBSTITUTIONS, ADDITIONS, OR DELETIONS WILL CHANGE THE TOTAL AMOUNT OF THE CONTRACT FEE BASED ON THE ABOVE MENTIONED UNIT PRICE CRITERIA. 33. THE LANDSCAPE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT A SEPARATE PROPOSAL FOR A ONE (1) YEAR MAINTENANCE AGREEMENT. NOTE: • DESIGN PLANS FOR A TREE WATERING SYSTEM MAY OR MAY NOT BE INCLUDED WITH THESE PLANS. CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL AN AUTOMATIC TREE WATERING SYSTEM USING APPROVED BUBBLERS INSTALLED AT THE EDGE OF THE ROOTBALL RADIUS OF ALL NEW INSTALLED TREES AS PART OF THIS CONTRACT; THIS SYSTEM SHALL INCLUDE PIPE, AUTOMATIC VALVES, WIRING, FITTINGS, ETC. ALL AS REQUIRED TO PROVIDE A TEMPORARY OR PERMANENT WATERING SYSTEM FOR THE ESTABLISHMENT OF HEALTHY TREES FOR THE PROJECT. 3 TIMES THE DIAMETER OF THE ROOTBALL OR FULL DKIFUNE INSTALL SOIL BERM ONLY IF - WATERING MANUALLY. IX PREVAILING WIND TREE STAKE KOOTBALL SOIL BERM FOR WATERING MANUALLY. DRIP LINE REINFORCED BLACK RUBBER HOSE -WHITE FLAG ABOVE TURNBUCKLL -# 10 GAUGE WIRE WITH GALVANIZED TURNBUCKLE MIN. THREE PLACES -MAXIMUM 3" MULCH- DO NOT ALLOW MULCH TO COLLECT OVER THE THE ROOTBALL OF THE TREE. TMAX. 2x4 X 2'-0 WOOD STAKE ( FLUSH WITH GROUND BACKFILL WITH APPROVED IMPORTED OR LX15TING TOP SOIL (THAT HAS ` BEEN APPROVED) FROM SITE. PLACE TREE ON UNDISTURBED BOTTOM OF PIT. LOCATE TREE A MININUM OF 2" (WO INCHES) ABOVE FINISHED GRADE. IN THE EVENT, UNDERGROUND WATER 15 PRESENT, CONTACT THE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT PRIOR TO I N5TALLATI ON. TREE PLANTING DETAIL PREVAILIN WIND INSTALL SOIL BERM ONLY IF WATERING MANUALLY. NOT TO SCALE NOTE: FOR Pi TOPSOIL THA FROM THE LC IS DUG. TREE STAKE PLANT SHRUB SO THAT TOP OF KOOTBALL KOOTBALL IS A MINIMUM OF 2" (TWO INCHES) ABOVE FINISHED GRADE. SOIL BERM FOR WATERING MANUALLY. DRIP LINE REINFORCED BLACK RUBBER H05E # 10 GAUGE WIRE FROM CENTRAL TRUNK TO THREE STAKES THREE 2" DIA. PRESSURE TREATED LODGE POLE PINE STAKES MAXIMUM 3" MULCH. DO NOT ALLOW MULCH TO COLLECT OVER THE THE ROOTBALL OF THE TREE. BACKFILL WITH I I APPROVED IMPORTED PLACE TREE ON UNDISTURBED BOTTOM OF PIT. OR EXISTING TOP SOIL LOCATE TREE A MININUM OF 2" (TWO INCHES) (THAT HAS BEEN ABOVE FINISHED GRADE. IN THE EVENT, APPROVED) FROM SITE. UNDERGROUND WATER IS PRESENT, CONTACT THE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT PRIOR TO 3 TIMES T1 X INSTALLATION. DIAMETER OFHE THE ROOTBALL OR FULL DRIPLINE LE� MULTI-TRU N KED TREE PLANTING DETAIL NOT TO SCALE Recommended Irrigation Schedule and Notes for New Tree Plantings Size of Nursery Stock Irrigation Schedule for Vigor Irrigation Schedule for Survival < 2 inch caliper Daily for 2 weeks; every other Twice weekly for 2 - 3 months day for 2 months; weekly until established 2 - 4 inch caliper Daily for I month; every other Twice weekly for 3 - 4 months day for 3 months; weekly until established > 4 inch caliper Daily for G weeks; every other Twice weekly for 4 - 5 months day for 5 months; weekly until established Notes: I . Delete daily irrigation when planting in winter. Irrigation frequency can be reduced slightly (e.g. 2 - 3 times each week instead of every other day) when planting hardened -off, ficid-grown trees that were root -pruned during production. E5tabll5hment takes 3 (hardine55 zones 10 - I I ) to 4 (hardiness zones 8 - 9) months per inch trunk caliper. 2. Irrigation frequency can be reduced Slightly (e.g, to once or twice each week) when planting hardened -off, field grown trees that were root -pruned during production. 3. At each irrigation, apply 2 - 3 gallons per inch trunk caliper to the root ball. Apply it in a manner 5o all water soaks into the root ball. Do not water if root ball 15 wet/saturated on the irrigation day. '(from "Typical Tree Bid Specifications for Florida" by the Florida Urban Forestry Council and Dr. Edward F. Gillman, University of Florida, Gainesville, Updated June 1 099) Disclaimer: I . The irrigation watering schedule provided on this plan 15 intended as a suggested general guideline for applying water to support the e5tabll5hment of plants/trees only. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to determine, provide and warrant Specific water volume, water quality and watering frequency for all Specific Species of trees, 5hrub5, groundcover5 and Sod a5 identified on these plans. 2. Watering schedule (i.e. time, duration, frequency of application) for automatic low -volume irrigation systems shall fully comply with all state and local jurisdictional rules, regulations, and requirements with regard to any watering restrictions which may be in place. 3. Avid Design Studio or Avid Engineermg shall not be held responsible for any damages resulting from compliance to or non-conformance by the Owner and/or Contractor of the project for the above "Recommended Irrigation Schedule and Notes". PALM PLANTING DETAIL TENS x8 BRACE )TBALL L BERM I TWO STEEL DVIDE MIN. TO PREVENT LM- DE )ALLY, VOLUME TED OR EN .NCE \LL 51DE5 NOT TO SCALE MAXIMUM 3" MULCH SOIL BERM FOR WATERING MANUALLY. PREPARE PLANTING BED THROUGHOUT GROUND COVER AREA. MINIMUM 1 2" DEPTH OF APPROVED PLANTING 501L IN GKOUNDCOVEK PLANTING BEDS PLANTING SOIL MIXED PER 5PECIFICATION5 PROVIDE MINIMUM PIT CLEARANCE AROUND ROOT BALL OF G" SIDES AND BOTTOM. 511RUB AND GROUNDCOVER PLANTING DETAIL NOT TO SCALE ' SEDGE IF PAVEMENT OK i r cuRa j G KA55 1 j j EDGE OF REDLINE NOTE: LOCATE PLANTS IN A TRIANGULAR PATTERN AS SHOWN, SPACED EQUIDISTANT FROM EACH OTHER (AT SPACING SPECIFIED IN THE PLANT LIST). E 5HRUB/GROUNDCOVER 5PACING PLAN L I I NOT TO SCALE E D ,,g_� W M� f%M SMX of CM700 .. To ROTE M TOP OF CLVS) FOR t� .jwr "W :r 54h1l. UMME=MAJ111i.K* OATIS ., s . 48 HOURS BEFORE YOU DIG CALL 5UN5hiNE 1-800-43 2-4770 IT'S THE LAW IN FLORIDA FL STATUE 553.85 I (1979) REQUIRES MIN. OF 2 DAYS AND MAX. OF 5 DAYS NOTICE BEFORE YOU EXCAVATE. FDOT MAINTENANCE YARD TO BE CONTACTED 72 HOURS PRIOR TO BEGINNING CONSTRUCTION. Sjw3f A$YZZ�p�A W W>_W_OzW z _ 0 �a O o m� = a z 2 Cc ui JQ �: -i -iN ui Cr Cr o U o a E E T N 0 z 0 F- a 0 U) w 0 W Q 0 0 z 0 w Q J) oQ -� N CoZ cp O O W Qz U_J Un °5 LLJ 00®aL) Z LLLJZLw ZO, a 0 L z U 0=V) < Wrrom CnWLU -J 0 Q M ') :,f LLL In p Z w W 0¢ LV� Qa o >. U > 1,_m 0 z 0 0 w a Cl) o 0 � 0 � N O L L orn ED Er ¢ v U JOD co N J < cc Q = r L„ of Go � U O n CM a V = ¢ > N d C'9 2 U_ Q Cl)J 0021-wU)0W z z O c w z U J wz< LL' w Q F-w > U a = U) Syr zUCAUa li wzzcc: ~ J J Q Q z Lr w w U U Q Z U i z ~ J IL LU W N °\ v O o 94 z - a W N CD z O f '- Q U_ LL U W rr0- v! 0 z Q J ---- TT III 1 f I u�ili¶I11 �Z ii t 1 L14 Baal If, AI 1111 CA•Ed lil,➢ii, 911 1 11 1 1 1 1 1 i I } m City of Zephyrhills 5ec. 7.OG.04.03 Irrigation Design Standards A. In -ground irrigation systems shall be utilized for new development including commercial development and single and multi -family lots. Irrigation shall be provided for all proposed landscape material. B. The Florida Irrigation Society (PIS) Standards, which is incorporated herein by reference, should be used for all irrigation design and installation procedures, except where the requirements of this Ordinance supersede the F15 standards. C. An irrigation site plan, drawn at a readable scale, shall be submitted illustrating the proposed irrigation zones, delineating micro -irrigation zones and areas utilizing all other irrigation techniques. The plan should indicate the irrigation water source. Existing development with newly irrigated landscape and turf areas shall not be required to submit an irrigation plan. D. Where available, reclaimed wastewater shall be used for landscape irrigation and shall comply with the requirements of this Section. E. The irrigation system shall be designed to accommodate separate landscape plant zones based on differing water requirements. Turf areas shall be on separate irrigation zones from other landscape plant zones. F. 5prinkler spacing shall not exceed fifty-five percent (55%) of the sprinklers' diameter of coverage. G. Sprays and rotors shall have matching application rates within each irrigation zone. 5pray5 and rotors shall not be combined on the same irrigation zone. H. All irrigation systems shall be designed to avoid overspray, runoff or other similar conditions where water flows onto or over adjacent property, non -irrigated areas, walkways, roadways, structures, or water features. Narrow areas (four feet wide or less) shall be irrigated with micro -irrigation only. I. Irrigation control equipment shall include an operable and functioning automatic irrigation controller having program flexibility such as repeat cycles and multiple program capabilities. Automatic irrigation controllers) shall have a battery back-up to retain the irrigation programs. Automatic control systems shall be equipped with operable and functioning rain and wind sensor devices. These devices shall be placed in areas where they can be exposed to natural rainfall and winds. As the technology improves, moisture sensing devices to cut-off irrigation when ground conditions do not warrant watering are encouraged. I The irrigation system shall be maintained and managed to ensure efficient water use and to prevent wasteful practices. These include, but are not limited to, resetting the automatic controller according to season, cleaning irrigation filters, testing the rain and wind sensors, monitoring, adjusting and repairing the irrigation equipment to ensure the efficiency of the system is maintained, replenishing mulch, utilizing turf and landscape best management practices, including plant pruning and cutting grass around sprinkler heads. K. A registered landscape architect or irrigation contractor shall conduct a final field inspection of the irrigation system. A certificate of compliance with the requirements of this article shall be provided to the City of Zephyrhills and the property owner and an "as built" drawing of the irrigation system shall be provided to the property owner and City of Zephyrhills prior to obtaining the certificate of occupancy 0 NOTES: I . THE DE51GN OF THE IRRIGATION 5Y5TEM FOR THIS, PROJECT 15 BASED ON THE PRINCIPALS OF A LOW -VOLUME, WATER CONSERVING, AND WATER-W15E USAGE SYSTEM IN FULL CONFORMANCE WITH THE REQUIREMENTS AND STANDARDS 5ET FORTH IN THE FLORIDA I RRI GATI O N 50CIETY MANUAL, 5TH EDITION, DATED DECEMBER 1, 2005. 2. MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT OF EQUAL TO OR BETTER THAN MAY BE 5UB5TITUTED PROVIDED THE RECOMMENDED MANUFACTURERS SPECIFICATIONS ARE MET FOR QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, INSTALLATION AND WARRANTY, ETC. PROVIDED THE DE51GN INTENT OF THE IRRIGATION PLANS REMAIN IN FULL COMPLIANCE WITH THE AFOREMENTIONED FLORIDA IRRIGATION 50CIETY STANDARDS AND 5PECIFICATION5 IRRIGATION SCHEDULE SYMBOL MAN UFACTURER/MODEUDESCKIPTION ♦ e 0 & 0 Hunter PR05-OG-CV 5' strip -pray ES La RCS a SS Turf Spray, G" popup, with check valve S Hunter AFB AFB Adju5table Flow Bubbler, 1 /2" F1PT, 5tainle55 steel screw adIUu5tment. SYMBOL MAN UFACTUKER/MODEUDEBCKIPTION IS Hunter ICV-A5 Electric Remote Control Valve, plastic, with globe valve, Accu-Bet pressure regulator. © Hunter PC-900 Electromechanical Controller, 9 stations, outdoor model ® Hunter RAIN-CLIK Rain Sensor, with conduit Installation, mount a5 noted FBTI Wilkins 950XL 3/4" Double Check Valve A55embly ❑M Water Meter 3/4" Irrigation Lateral Line: PVC Cla55 200 Only lateral transition pipe sizes 3/4" and above are Indicated on the plan, with all others being 1 /2" in size. Irrigation Mainline: PVC Schedule 40 ...,,.... Pipe 5leeve: PVC Schedule 40 Typical pipe 5leeve for irrigation pipe. Pipe 51eeve 5IZe shall be 2x pipe Size and allow for irrigation piping and their related couplings to easily 511de through 5leeving material. Extend sleeves 16 inches beyond edges of paving or construction. Valve Callout Valve Number # #� Valve GPM # # Application Rate Valve 51ze QTY 46 00 QTY G 1 1,377 Lf. 507 Lf. 56 Lf. .IV E'I'• 48 HOURS BEFORE YOU DIG CALL 5UNSt11NE 1-800-432-4770 175 THE LAW IN FLORJDA FL 5TATUE 553.851 (1 979) REQUIRES MIN. OF 2 DAYS AND MAX. OF 5 DAY5 NOTICE BEFORE YOU EXCAVATE, FDOT MAINTENANCE YARD TO BE CONTACTED 72 HOURS PRIOR TO BEGINNING CONSTRUCTION. ¢W>—W-OZW O Q T N W O CZ C7 a- O _11 r cn z 2 Z < cc Lii CD U Cc It Cr N Q cn ❑ a a ❑ a W N 2 O Z Z O cc U LU 0 LU Q 0 wl d W Q OQ N mZ Z �� o liJ 06w o LU LU Ir OIL z w L9aoL6 Z U ❑ Ir LL_ cn W 0 CC W i.- CO w Z M m ❑ W - ❑� O�� QQ o > >_ U 8 ca 0 Z 0 0 WQ ~o U)o Cl 0 � Q OJ M w Oil wCID� - CC) co 0 W ED N cc¢ � .0 = r W N Q CC)aZtic� O Maw _¢> N a C'M d LL_ Q o o Z W cn 0' w ZZ0 WZC3 U wzZ � UF LU Q W—> cc:U�a0—nZ o C5 —1 W Z Z Q < J J Q Q Z j W W ~ CL M U U Q Z U LLQ Q ~ JZ W W — a W N 0 20' 40' 60' S H E Scale: 111 = 20i T IR1 01 Y North 0. IRRIGATION NOTES: 1 9) ALL SPLICES TO THE 24 VOLT CONTROL WIRING SHALL BE MADE WITH KING TECHNOLOGY (KING 6) SILICONIf- FII-LED SAFETY CONNECTORS. i) THE DRAWINGS ARE DIAGRAMMATIC. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE EXPECTED TO MAKE THOSE MODIFICATIONS IN THE FIELD TO REACT TO ACTUAL FIELD CONDITIONS, WITHOUT 20) ALL CONTROL VALVE WIRES SHALL BE BUNDLED AND TAPED TOGETHER AT 20' INTERVALS DEPARTURE FROM THE DESIGN CONCEPTS OR INTENT. AND PLACED ALONG THE SIDE OF THE MAINLINE PIPE. 2) THE DESIGN OF THE IRRIGATION SYSTEM FOR THIS PROJECT IS BASED ON THE PRINCIPALS 2 1) ALL POP-UP SPRINKLER HEADS SHALL BE INSTALLED LEVEL AND FLUSH TO GRADE. MOUNT OF A LOW -VOLUME, WATER CONSERVING, AND WATER -WISE USAGE SYSTEM IN FULL ALL SPRINKLERS ON FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS AS FOLLOWS: CONFORMANCE WITH THE REQUIREMENTS AND STANDARDS SET FORTH IN THE FLORIDA a) 1/2" INLET SPRAY HEADS: 1 6" OF HEAVY WALL PVC IPS HOSE IRRIGATION SOCIETY MANUAL, 5TH EDITION, DATED DECEMBER 1, 2005. b) 3/4" INLET ROTOR HEADS: 1 6" OF HEAVY WALL PVC IPS HOSE 3) MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT OF EQUAL TO OR BETTER THAN MAY BE SUBSTITUTED 22) LOCATION OF ALL SPRINKLER HEADS SHALL BE SITE ADJUSTED TO MINIMIZE WATER PROVIDED THE RECOMMENDED MANUFACTURERS SPECIFICATIONS ARE MET FOR QUALITY, OVERTHROW ONTO BUILDING SURFACES AND WALKWAYS. THROTTLE VALVES ON SPRAY PERFORMANCE, INSTALLATION AND WARRANTY, ETC. PROVIDED THE DESIGN INTENT OF THE ZONES AS REQUIRED TO PREVENT FOGGING. IRRIGATION PLANS REMAIN IN FULL COMPLIANCE WITH THE AFOREMENTIONED FLORIDA IRRIGATION SOCIETY STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS. 23) THE INSTALLER SHALL BE EXPECTED TO BE FAMILIAR WITH AND FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS CONTAINED HEREIN, ON THE DRAWINGS, IN THE CONSTRUCTION DETAILS, AND IN THE WRITTEN SPECIFICATIONS. SHOULD A CONFLICT BE DISCOVERED WITHIN THE DOCUMENTS, 4) ALL WORK SHALL CONFORM TO ALL APPLICABLE REGULATIONS AND CODES FOR THE THE CONTRACTOR SHALL IMMEDIATELY NOTIFY THE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT AND REQUEST LOCATION OF THE WORK. CONTRACTOR SHALL OBTAIN ALL NECESSARY PERMITS AND CLARIFICATION. INSPECTIONS IN ORDER TO COMPLETE THE WORK. 24) THE IRRIGATION CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR INSTALLING ALL LOW VOLTAGE WIRING 5) DO NOT WILLFULLY INSTALL THE IRRIGATION SYSTEM AS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS WHEN FROM THE CONTROL VALVE TO THE IRRIGATION CONTROLLER, IF SPARE WIRES ARE NOT IT IS OBVIOUS IN THE FIELD THAT CONDITIONS EXIST THAT MIGHT NOT HAVE BEEN AVAILABLE. CONSIDERED IN THE DESIGN PROCESS. FOR EXAMPLE: OBSTRUCTIONS, GRADE DIFFERENCES, WATER LEVELS, DIMEN51ONAL DIFFERENCES, ETC. REFER TO THE LANDSCAPE 25) THE IRRIGATION CONTRACTOR IS TO INSPECT, EVALUATE, AND REPAIR ANY DEFAULTS IN THE PLAN TO AVOID CONFLICTS WITH PROPOSED TREES AND SHRUBS. EXISTING IRRIGATION SYSTEM AND ITS EQUIPMENT IF APPLICABLE PER SCOPE OF PROJECT. 6) PIPING MAY SOMETIMES BE INDICATED AS BEING LOCATED IN UNLIKELY AREAS: I.E. UNDER 26) CONTKOLLEK(5) SHALL BE DIRECTLY WIRED TO THE HOUSE CIRCUIT OF 1 10 / 120 VOLTS. BUILDINGS OR PAVEMENT, OUTSIDE OF PROPERTY LINES, IN LAKES OR DITCHES, ETC. THIS IS DONE FOR GRAPHIC CLARITY ONLY. WHENEVER POSSIBLE, PIPING IS TO BE INSTALLED IN 27) EXACT CONTROLLER LOCATION(S) SHALL BE COORDINATED WITH AN OWNER'S OPEN, "GREEN" AREAS. ALL LINES SHALL BE INSTALLED ON THE PROPERTY AND INSIDE THE REPRESENTATIVE PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. UNLESS OTHERWISE STATED, THE OWNER SHALL LANDSCAPE AREAS. PROVIDE 110 VOLT POWER TO THE CONTROLLER LOCATION(S). THE IRRIGATION CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR THE CONNECTION FROM THE POWER SOURCE TO THE 7) IF REQUIRED, THE IRRIGATION CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE THE NECESSARY "RIGHT OF CONTKOLLER(S). WAY" USE PERMITS. 26) INSTALL A SEPARATE TE/ 120VAC- 15A I SURGE ARRESTER TO THE INCOMING (I 10 VOLT) 8) MAINLINE SHALL BE INSTALLED WITH A MINIMUM OF 18" DEPTH OF COVER. POWER SUPPLY TO EACH CONTROLLER. PROPERLY GROUND EACH CONTROLLER TO A 5/8" X 8' COPPER CLAD GROUND ROD WITH AWG #6 BARE SOLID COPPER WIRE, A PROPER 9) LATERAL LINES ARE TO BE INSTALLED WITH A MINIMUM OF 1 2" DEPTH OF COVER. GROUND SHOULD HAVE 10 OHMS OR LE55 RESISTANCE TO EARTH. USE OF MULTIPLE GROUND RODS MAY BE NECESSARY TO ACHIEVE THE DESIRED RESISTANCE READING. 1 0) ALL WORK SHALL BE CLOSELY COORDINATED WITH THAT OF OTHER TRADES, IN ORDER TO AVOID POTENTIAL CONFLICTS. REFEKTO LANDSCAPE AND UTILITIES PLAN WHEN TRENCHING 29) THE RAIN SHUTOFF DEVICE SHALL BE INSTALLED TO MEET LOCAL CODES AND/OR MINIMUM TO AVOID TREES, SHRUBS AND UNDERGROUND UTILITIES. MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. OBSTRUCTIONS, VANDALISM AND EASE OF SERVICE SHALL BE CONSIDERED IN LOCATING THE DEVICE. ALL WIRING BETWEEN THE RAIN 1 1) ALL MATERIAL AND LABOR REQUIRED TO PROVIDE A COMPLETE, OPERATIONAL AND FULLY SWITCH AND THE IRRIGATION CONTROLLER SHALL BE ENCLOSED IN 1/2" PVC ELECTRICAL GUARANTEED SYSTEM SHALL BE CONSIDERED PART OF THE WORK WHETHER OR NOT SUCH CONDUIT. ITEMS ARE SPECIFICALLY INDICATED IN THESE DOCUMENTS. 30) CONTRACTOR AGREES TO ASSUME COMPLETE RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE JOB SITE 1 2) THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PREPARE AN AS -BUILT DRAWING ON A REPRODUCIBLE MEDIA CONDITIONS DURING THE COURSE OF CONSTRUCTION ON THE PROJECT INCLUDING THE (MYLAR OR SEPIA) SHOWING ALL IRRIGATION INSTALLATION. A MYLAR OR SEPIA OF THE SAFETY OF ALL PERSONS AND PROPERTY. THESE REQUIREMENTS SHALL APPLY ORIGINAL PLAN MAYBE OBTAINED FROM THE LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT FOR A FEE. THE CONTINUOUSLY AND NOT BE LIMITED TO NORMAL WORKING HOURS AND CONTRACTOR DRAWING SHALL LOCATE ALL MAIN LINE AND VALVES BY SHOWING EXACT MEASUREMENTS AGREES TO DEFEND, INDEMNIFY, AND HOLD OWNER AND DESIGN PROFESSIONAL HARMLESS FROM HARD SURFACES. WIRE DIRECTION SHALL BE INDICATED. FROM ANY AND ALL LIABILITY, REAL OR ALLEGED, IN CONNECTION WITH THE PERFORMANCE OF WORK ON THIS PROJECT, EXCEPTING LIABILITY ARISING FROM THE SOLE NEGLIGENCE OF 1 3) ALL HEADS SHALL BE THE PROPER TYPE FOR THE AREAS WHERE LOCATED AND SHALL BE DESIGN PROFESSIONAL. INSTALLED, PLUMBED, AND TO THE PROPER HEIGHT. ALL HEADS AND OTHER EQUIPMENT SHALL BE INSTALLED WITH ADEQUATE AND UNIFORM CLEARANCE FROM ALL HAKDSCAPING 3 1) ANY OTHER EQUIPMENT REQUIRED THAT IS NOT OTHERWISE DETAILED OR SPECIFIED SHALL TO MINIMIZE WATER OVER SPRAY ON IMPERVIOUS AREAS. BE INSTALLED AS PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS AND SPECIFICATIONS. 14 CONTROL WIRING SHALL BE ROUTED WITH THE MAINLINE WHEREVER POSSIBLE SMART CONTROLLER SPECIFIC NOTES: ) LOW -VOLTAGE WIRING SHALL BE UFC# 14PVC JACKETED, SINGLE CONDUCTOR CABLE, USE RED WIRES FOR "HOT" AND WHITE FOR VALVES. COMMON WIRES SHALL BE INSTALLED WITH ADEQUATE SLACK AND SURGE/EXPANSION LOOPS; AND SHALL BE SPLICED ONLY IN VALVE BOXES USING SPEARS "DKIPLINE" WIRE CONNECTORS AND SEALANT. 1 5) UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED, ALL SLEEVES ARE TO BE PVC SCHEDULE 40 AND TWO (2) NOMINAL SIZES LARGER THAN THE PIPE TO BE SLEEVED. FOR EXAMPLE: THE SLEEVE FORA 2" PIPE SHALL BE 4". NO IRRIGATION SLEEVE SHALL BE SMALLER THAN 2" 1 6) WHEREVER PRACTICAL, INSTALL VALVES IN MULCHED BEDS AND/OR OUT OF HIGH TRAFFIC AREAS. ALL VALVES, FLUSH VALVES AND WIRE SPLICES SHALL BE INSTALLED IN CARSON STRUCTURAL FOAM "PLASTIC" VALVE BOXES WITH "PURPLE" LIDS AS FOLLOWS: a) REMOTE CONTROL VALVES: # 14 1 9B- 1 2 STD. KECT. BOX b) ISOLATION GATE VALVES: #9 1 0- 1 2, 1 0" ROUND PIT c) WIRE SPLICES: #91 0- 1 2, 1 0" ROUND PIT 17) REFER TO VALVE DESIGNATION SYMBOLS FOR CONTROLLER, STATION NUMBER AND DESIGNED FLOW RATE FOR EACH REMOTE CONTROL VALVE. 18) ALL 24 VOLT CONTROL CABLE TO BE UL LISTED, SINGLE STRAND, TYPE OF GOO VOLT CONTROL CABLE. SIZE AND COLOR AS FOLLOWS: a) COMMON WIRES - SIZE AWG # 14 OR LARGER AND WHITE IN COLOR. b) HOT WIRES - SIZE AWG # 16 OR LARGER AND RED IN COLOR. c) SPARE WIRES - SIZE AWG # 16 OR LARGER AND BLUE IN COLOR. d LU m r 3 � O o z a � d � N z U a J a 0 LU " v) Y LU I I I LLI I ITl l 117T F T I I) SMART CONTROLLER MODULE INTERFACE SHALL NOT BE PLACED MORE THAN 6' FROM CONTROLLER 2) SMART CONTROLLER SENSOR SHALL NOT BE PLACED MORE THAN 100' FROM SMART CONTROLLER MODULE INTERFACE. 3) SMART CONTROLLER SHALL BE MONITORED FOR FIRST 30 DAYS TO INSURE PROPER OPERATION OF UNIT. 4) SMART CONTROLLER SENSOR SHALL BE MOUNTED MIN. OF 0 ABOVE GRADE 5) PROGRAM 'A' ON LOCAL CONTROLLER SHALL BE PROGRAMMED WITH START/STOP AND RUN TIMES. 6) 5U55TITUTION ALLOWED WITH OTHER SMART CONTROLLER. CONTRACTOR WILL ENSURE LOCAL WEATHER STATION AVAILABLE PRIOR TO SUBSTITUTION (RAINBIRD OR TORO SMART CONTROLLERS). Recommended Irrigation Schedule and Notes for New Tree Plantings Size of Nursery Stock Irrigation Schedule for Vigor Irrigation Schedule for Survival < 2 inch caliper Daily for 2 weeks; every other Twice weekly for 2 - 3 months day for 2 months; weekly until e5tabl15hed 2 - 4 inch caliper Daily for I month; every other Twice weekly for 3 - 4 months Jay for 3 months; weekly until e5tabli5hed > 4 inch caliper Daily for 6 week5; every other Twice weekly for 4 - 5 month5 day for 5 months; weekly until e5tabli5hed Notes: I . Delete daily irrigation when planting in winter. Irrigation frequency can be reduced Slightly (e.g. 2 - 3 times each week instead of every other day) when planting hardened -off, field -grown trees that were root -pruned during production. E5tabli5hment takes 3 (hardiness zones 10 - I I ) to 4 (hardiness zones 8 - 9) months per inch trunk caliper. 2. Irrigation frequency can be reduced slightly (e.g. to once or twice each week) when planting hardened -off, field grown trees that were root -pruned during production. 3. At each irrigation, apply 2 - 3 gallon5 per inch trunk caliper to the root ball. Apply it in a manner 50 all water soaks into the root ball. Do not water if root ball 15 wet/saturated on the irrigation day. *(from "Typical Tree Bid Specifications for Florida" by the Florida Urban Forestry Council and Dr. Edward F. Gillman, University of Florida, Gainesville. Updated June 1 999) D1563imer: I . The irrigation watering schedule provided on this plan 15 intended a5 a suggested general guideline for applying water to 5Upport the e5tabli5hment of plants/trees only. It shall be the Contractor's re5pon5i1bility to determine, provide and warrant 5peCIfIC water volume, water quality and watering frequency for all 5peCIfIC 5peCIC5 of trees, 5hrub5, groundcover5 and Sod as identified on these plans. 2. Watering schedule (i.e. time, duration, frequency of application) for automatic low -volume irrigation 5y5tem5 shall fully comply with all State and local Jurisdictional rules, regulations, and requirements with regard to any watering restrictions which may be in place. 3. Avid Design Studio or Avid Engineering Shall not be held re5pon5ible for any damages resulting from compliance to or non-conformance by the Owner and/or Contractor of the project for the above "Recommended Irrigation Schedule and Notes". CAP ENDS AND STAKE STUB UP MEASUREMENTS FROM 2 REFERENCE POINT TO STUB UP=40'z MARK BACK OF CURB- n TAPE END OF 5LEEVE �-\O&K PIPt ,+ B UP 5CH.40 SOLVENT -WELD PVC (REQUIREMENTS VARY CHECK CODE5 F(R5T) 1 ROUGH (N SLEEVING DETAIL NO SCALE WIRE5 TO INTF PANEL 15 GAL WIRE SIZE MAk WIRE RUN I OC BODY„„ LILJlU�1J�gJ"� FLOW-CLIK 4 NO SCALE FINISH NON-POTABL MODEL #4 MODEL PP05-OG SPRA` WITH 'CV' OPTION IN5 SWING FIUNTER'PRO-FLEX' T H58E-050 ELBOW`_ MAKLEX STREET ELB LATERAL TEE LATER) 6 PR05-06 SPRAY HEAD NO SCALE MODEL AFB BUBBLEK MODEL HCV-50P-50M CHECK VALVE 5CH 80 NIPPLE FINISH GRADE 5CH 40 THREADED COUPLER PRO FLEX SWING JOINT: HUNTER 'PRO -FLEX' TUBING HSBE-050 ELBOWS (2), AL50 MARLEX 5TREET ELBOW (1) LATERAL TEE OR ELL LATERAL PIPE 9 AFB BUBBLER NO SCALE R O 5TAN'DARD VALVE BOX —1140 IRRIGATION CONTRACTOR TO O FINISH GRADE b EN5UKE THAT FIXED RISERS ARE 5ECUKED TO #5 PEBAK TO Z 0 Ol MODEL PF05-00 SPRAY HEAD PREVENT MOVEMENT. PLACE F- OREMOTE CONTROL VALVE MODEL ICV-XXXG ACCU5ET 2 REBAR IN PVC PIPE * CAP TO O5CH 50 NIPPLE PKEVENT CORROSION. V OFIN15H GRADE WATERPROOF CONNECTORS (2) 04 5CH 40 THREADED COUPLER w 0 O 18-24' COILED WIRE SWING JOINT: © SC180i.0.E. NIPPLE HUNTER 'PRO -FLEX TUBING, OH5BE-050 ELBOWS (2), # 3 O MAIN LINE PIPE B FITTINGS MAKLEX STREET ELBOW (1) 4 BRICK 5UPPORT5 (4) © LATERAL TEE OR ELL O LATERAL PIPE 5 O3L4' MINUS WASHED GRAVEL ® MODEL HCV-50E-50M CHECK VALVE H @PVC SLIP UNIONS Q D ICV GLOBE VALVE (_�NOCALE G�__ PR05-00 SPRAY HEAD NO SCALE EXTERIOR WALL (SEE NOTE) WATER METER PLAN MODEL RAIN-CLIK RUN LEAD WIKE5 IN CONDUIT TO CONTROLLER NOTE: MOUNT ON ANY SURFACE WHERE IT WILL BE EXPOSED TO UNOBSTRUCTED RAINFALL, BUT NOT IN PATH OF SPRINKLER SPRAY. 5 ) mullfte RAIN-CLIK No scALE NTEKIOR OR l EXTERIOR WALL1 MINIMUM CLEARANCE FOR DOCK OPENING I - I / N MINIMUM VERTICAL � 2 CLEARANCE NEEDED FOR HINGE PIN REMOVAL 3 MODEL ICC-I 200-PL CONTROL WIRE IN ELECTRICAL CONDUIT. SIZE AND TYPE PER LOCAL CODE 3/4" POWER SUPPLY CONDUIT J BOX INSIDE CONTROLLER CONNECT PER LOCAL CODE *NOTE* MOUNT CONTROLLER WITH LCD SCREEN AT EYE LEVEL. CONTROLLER SHALL BE HARD -WIRED TO GROUNDED 110 or 220 VAC SOURCE. 7 'CC -PL CONTROLLER No scALE (SEE CONTROLLER SCHEDULE; SHEET IR 23) FINISH GRADE MODEL PGJ-OG ROTOR HEAD WITH 'CV' OPTION INSTALLED HUNTER SWING JOINT MODEL SJ-5XX-X LATERAL PIPE LATERAL TEE OR ELBOW 1 O PGJ-06 ROTOR HEAD NO SCALE OMODEL ET SYSTEM SENSOR (OPTIONAL ET WND SHOWN) 5UITA13LE P05T OR POLE MOUNT. MIN Gft. 20ABOVE TURF, OR ON SIDE OF BUILDING OR ROOFTOP. OCONDUIT FROM ET SYSTEM 5EN50K TO ET SYSTEM MODULE MODEL ET SYSTEM MODULE 40MOUNT LE55 THAN G' AWAY FROM CONTROLLER OCOMPATIBLE HUNTER CONTROLLERS: 5RC, PROC, ICC, ACC, ACC-99D ©CONTROL WIRES TO VALVE O7 POWER SOURCE NOTE' ET SYSTEM WIRE FROM MODULE TO 5EN50K SHALL BE AWG # 1 & . U5E 1 1 CONTROLLER SMART PORT TO CONNECT TO MODULE UNIT. No scALE ELEVATION BOX SPECIFICATIONS DEVICE SIZE BOX TYPE 3/4' - 1' Imams 01419 SERIES QR E 11/2' - 2' I CARSON 1730D PM OR EQUAL INSTALLATION SHOWN IS ONLY A SUGGESTION INSTALL USING LOCAL & COUNTY REGULATIONS L DOUBLE CHECK TO BE LOCATED DIRECTLY BEHIND WATER METER. 2. BRASS, STAINLESS, OR PLASTIC PLUGS TO BE INSTALLED IN TEST COCKS IF BELOW GROUND INSTAL.LATIOML $ DOUBLE CHECK VALVE NO SCALE 48 HOUR5 BEFORE YOU DIG CALL SUNSHINE 1-800-432-4770 lk ITS THE LAW IN FLORIDA FL STATUE 553.851 (1 575) REQUIRE5 MIN. OF 2 DAYS AND MAX. OF 5 DAYS NOTICE BEFORE YOU EXCAVATE. FDOT MAINTENANCE YARD TO E5E CONTACTED 72 HOURS PRIOR TO BEGINNING CONSTRUCTION. Repie er• W W>_W_Ozw 0 � �a- o m� a= C6 z LIC cnD LL cn J < -i � CV W U)) Cr U 0 a o S H E E T N O Q� C2 N (�) z lLl Nl�j L0 W W z U_ � J < LLu � OD 0 O OOP 0 z 0 w U) J (� Q co a z W 0 0 00 W 0 LL ¢ I OIL Z Q Z) J E5 a O LO It ¢ C7 co U) W W co _JLn<Mi OQCD Qa 0 > m O z 0 0 LU I.-< - < Cf) o o 0 Lr) < N 0" .1 � CC CID 0 d U J m N a J < cc < � O = L„ N CC U�M ZvU co J O M < v = ¢ > J Li - CD (ZWU3(DW z z o Ir w z TR U wZ<UwLU _ LLJ Q L- Lu > EL 2 fn ZC:1U)UQ wzz<~ J J < <LLJ LU Z > a- U Cj < Z U C ¢ a > Z ~ J W W N ° O O Z 0 0 Q J CMD � z J � J U) W O z 0 Z Q W 0 CODE INFORMATION FIXTURE LEGEND SYMBOL DESCRIPTION • I. Applicable Codes: Table 704.8: Maximum area of exterior wall openings ni s Vlf. Exit Capacity: XI. Plumbing Fixture analysis (Table 403.1): WALL MOUNTED LIGHT FIXTURE, AT EXTERIOR.LIGHT FIXTURES ABOVE A. 2007 Florida Building Code Unlimited with Greater than 25 - 70 %separation greater than 30'. A. I' frnum number of exits: (1018.1) A. Occupant load: DOORS ONLY TO BE EMERGENCY LIGHTS. SEE ELECTRICAL B. 2007 Florida Plumbing Code Greater than 20' - 45 % 1. Occupant load (cumulative) = 92 occupants = 2 exits, min. 1. 92 occupants (46 mate, 46 female) LIGHTED EXIT SIGN WITH BATTERY BACK -UP; C. 2007 Florida Fire Code Greater than 15' - 25 fixtures required: D. 2007 Florida Mechanical Code Greater than 10' - 15 %B. Dumber of exits provided: 5 B' Minim� LOW BAY FIXTURE - NL REPRESENTS NIGHT LIGHT • E. 2002 NFPA 13 Greater than 5' - 10 % 1 •Mate: ONt_ F. 2000 NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code Less than 5'- 0 % C. Minimum exit width required (Table 1005.1): a. 1 toilets (1 water closet) (1 for each 500 mates) G. 2000 International Energy Conservation Code b. 1 lavatories (1 for every 750 mates) � PROPOSED FIRE EXTINGUISHER - EXACT COORDINATE LOCATION WITH 1. Doors: 0.15 inches FE FIRE MARSHALL IV. Fire Suppression System: � person 2. Femme First floor - 92 occupants x 0.15 = 14" of required door width a. 1 toilets 1 for each 500 females N II. Occupancy Group: (Non -separated Mixed Use 302.3.2) A. Fully sprinklered (903.2.6 and 903.2.10) ( ) * PROPOSED PULL STATION - EXACT COORDINATE LOCATION WITH FIRE B. An automatic fire detection system shall be installed throughout high -piled b. 1 lavatories (1 for every 750 females) Ps MARSHALL = d id width it Exwprove: 3. Drinking A. Group S-1 (Storage) (311.2) combustible storage areas where required by the IFC. (907.2.14) D. 9 fountains: Uz g B. GroupM Mercantile 309 C. Fire extinguishers as required b Fire Marshall. 1. Doors: 204" of egress width provided. a. 1 total (1 for each 1000 occupants) WALL MOUNTED BATTERY PACK O co s 9 p D. Provide "Knox Box" if required by local Fire Marshall Locate per Fire 4. Service sinks. + u C. Zoning Classification: Site Specific O M o s a. 1 required, 1 o w° z o ►� III. Construction Type: Q E W � • Marshall directive. VHf . of Exits: � ¢ p m M V. Building Height and Area: WALL LEGEND w L g g A. Separation of Exits: At least 2 exits shall be placed a distance mart equal o ce A. V-B (Table 601) A. AllowableHeight: 2 stories or 60' base on most restrictive occupancy to not less than /the length of maxim�rn overall diagonal dimension nc W Q N Ln = iZ W B. Fire Resistance Requirements (Table 601) (Mercantile), (Table 503 w/ 504.2 increase). of the area bang served (1014.2.1)• 5/8" GYP. BD. ON EACH SIDE ON 358" METAL STUDS @ 16" C. As Listed: Actual Height: 24'-0" B. Maximum travel ce: 2M feet (Table 1015.1). O.C. (20 GA) UNO- TO DECK - PROVIDE SLIP TRACK AT B. Allowable Area: unffmited provided space is fully sprinkled and �J DECK. Required Provided surrounded & adjoined by public ways or yards no less than 60' in width 1. Exterior bearing walls (See Table 602) regt's. below 0 hour (507.2)• IX Other life safety consideratiori 518" GYP. BD. ON EACH SIDE ON 3 5/8" (20 GA) METAL + Actual Area: 7,026 sq. ft. A. Minimum accede sway : 44" (1009.1). STUDS @ 16" O.C. - 8" ABOVE ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE 2. Exterior non -bearing walls (See Table 602) regt's. below 0 hour B. I rfl corn : 44" (1016.2), I I <11 OR AS OTHERWISE NOTED - PROVIDE 3" SOUND BATTS. • 3. Interior bearing walls 0 hour N/A C. Dead end cdrYi r: 20' maxi tri 1016.3 . L_`_J ICI ALL RESTROOM & OFFICES WALLS & CEILINGS ABOVE 4. Combustible materials allowed FRT VI. Occupant Loan (Table 1004.1.2) ( ) (ALL PLUMBING WALLS TO BE 6" METAL STUDS) D. Door clear with: 32" mirtirnurn (1008.1). 5. Structural frame 0 hour N/C A. First floor: 7,026 sf gross, 6,922 sf leasable area E. Interior finishes (Tabe 803.4): 6. Floors 0 hour N/C 1. Vertical Exits/ PCB I 3 STONE VENEER OVER 8" CMU WALL 7. Roofs 0 hour N/C 1. Retail sales space - 1 person per 30 square feet Passageways -is 8. Shaft enclosures 707.4 0 hour N/C 1,360 sq.ft./30 = 45 occupants 2. Exit Access Goorrdors -Class B ( ) in � - 1 f 3. Rooms/ Enclosed Spaces: Class C n 2. Business areas space 1 person per 00 square feet STONE VENEER OVER 12 CMU WALL 4. Floor Finishes -Class if - Fluor finish materials must comply with 9. Fire Wall (@ adjacent mall) 3 hour See Table 705.4 N/A Misc 430 sq.ft./100 = 5 occupants DOC FF-1 'pill test' (804.5), 10. Stairs 1 hour N/A Offices 125 sq.ft./100 = 2 occupants n n w No Rated Floor & Ceiling 5 12 CMU WALL WITH 3 5/8 METAL STUDS AND STONE o • r Service 3,437 sq.ft./100 = 35 occupants VEENEER Fire Resistance rating regt s for Exterior walls based on fire seperation distance Table 602: Total = 42 occupants Less than 5' 2 hour N/A 3. Storage and stock rooms - 1 person per 300 square feet El- G STONEVENEER OVER 16" CMU WALL (12" + 4" CMU) Greater than 5' less than 10' 1 hour NIA 1,674 sq.ft./300 = 6 occupants reater or eq. to 10' 0 hour 0 hour Total occupants = 92 STONE VENEER OVER 16" CMU WALL (12" + 4" CMU) WITH 2 7 5 METAL STUDS (24GA) @ 16" O.C. UNO WITH ONE LAYER IIIJJJ / GYP. BD. TO DECK ANCHORED TO CMU AT Y4 POINTS. STONE VENEER OVER 20" CMU WALL 02" + 8" CMU) WITH 2 ° m 8 Y2" METAL STUDS (24GA) @ 16" O.C. UNO WITH ONE LAYER GYP. BD. TO DECK ANCHORED TO CMU AT Y4 POINTS. o Z Z� W U f V y y C 0r°Jn,M m Ocvad 1 2 0 EMIT #4 (STORAGE) EXIT #a 34 OF EGRESS 34 OF EGRESS O WIDTH PROVIDED WROTH PROVIDED o 0 CONT. SLIP TRACK, SECURE 5' 0" -0" 40'-0" TO DECK i� O METAL TRACK B - - - - - - a� 1 -14 10`-0.' '-5" 24'73" 71 J Y MTL. STUDS E] E `° Q _I G y 5/8" GYP BD, CONT. TO DECK - T- -L7 :T SECURE TO MTL. STUD NOT !I, ., �\ /4$'-� $ O O • SLIP TRACK � 47 3 �+ -(� / r F O J o O 110000 _ • TAILSLIP TRACK - PARALLEL )�E SCALE:3"=1'-0" EXIT #1 W = • 68 OF EGRESS N 4 EXIT #3 E WIDTH PROVIDED N 34" OF EGRESS =' i WIDTH PROVIDED 2 I l r- ISSUE SUE DATE I - --- 12-1-08 MIX y O IMU DIST,� _ . k} RALL IIE� NICE BE EE�I - S r REV DATE E O n I T _ � _ S 1 4 R E � Ar R TMq 1�2 CONT. SLIP TRACK, SECURE _ _ _ -11_111111 __ "----- TO DECK A IBM Beam aima METAL TRACK ate.. • EXIT #2 34" OF EGRESS �tIF MTL. STUDS WIDTH PROVIDED �,_L_5/8"GYP BD, CONT. TO DECK - SECURE TO MTL. STUD NOT SLIP TRACK This drawing and the design shown is the property of the architect. The reproduction, copying or use of this drawing without their written consent is prohibited and any 0 1 2 3 infringement will be sub'ect to legal action. LIFE SAFETY LIFE SAFETY PLAN PLAN / CODE INFO 1 SCALE: 1/8"=1 '-0" • PROJECT NORTH LS= 3 )_�ETAIL,- ,_SLIP TRACK PERPENDICULAR SCALE.3 -1 0 8-STRAIGHT PROTOTYPE - REVISION 16 - 06-18-08 # DOOR AND FRAME SCHEDULE SEE 8/A-9 FOR DOOR TYPES ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE SEE A-7 8t A-8 FOR FINISHES 0 EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE PROVIDED BY TENANT O DOOR FRAME HARDWARE RATING REMARKS NO. ROOM NAME FLOOR FINISH BASE WALLS FINISH CEILING FINISH CEILING HT. PAINT TYPE NO. EQUIPMENT QTY SERVICE REQUIRED NO. LOCATION / ROOM TYPE MATERIAL SIZE (WxHxD) DOOR DETAILS TYPE SET NO. 101 SALES VCT VWB GYP. BD./PAINTED EXPOSED/PAINTED VARIES SEMI -GLOSS 1 PARTS WASHER 1 110V./ 20A./ 1 DIA. • 101 SALES/ 101 A ALUM./ GLASS 6'-0" X 7'-0" X 1-3/4" 6/ A-9 ALUM. 1 - 102 TIRE STORAGE SC-1 - CMU & GYP. BD. EXPOSED VARIES NONE 2 BRAKE LATHES - AMMCO 4000B 1 115V./ 20AMP/ 1 PHASE 102 MANAGER'S OFFICE/ 106 B H.M. 3'-0" X T-0" X 1-3/4" 7/ A-9 H.M. 5 - PT-2 103 SERVICE AREA PC-1 WWB CMU & GYP. BD./PT. EXPOSED/PAINTED VARIES SEMI -GLOSS 3 WORK BENCH 1 - 103 HALL #1/ 108 B H.M. 3'-0" X T-0" X 1-3/4" 7/ A-9 H.M. 6 - PT-2 104 RECEIVING SC-1 - CMU & GYP. BD. EXPOSED VARIES NONE 4 MAG. MACHINE 1 AIR 104 WOMEN'S/ 110 C H.M. 3'-0" X T-0" X 1-3/4" 7/ A-9 H.M. 7 - PT-2 105 WAITING RM VCT VWB GYP. BD./PAINTED ACT-1 11'-0" SEMI -GLOSS 5 COATS 1250 BALANCER - 3DV 3 230VJ 20 AMP/ 1 PHASE TWIST 105 MEN'S/ 111 C H.M. T-0" X 7'-0" X 1-3/4" 7/ A-9 H.M. 7 - PT-2 106 MANAGER'S OFFICE VCT VWB GYP. BD./PAINTED ACT-1 9'-0" FLAT 6 MAG MACHINE 2 115 V. / 20 AMP/ 1 PHASE 106 EMPLOYEE'S/ 112 C H.M. T-0" X T-0" X 1-3/4" 7/ A-9 H.M. 7 - PT-2 107 SERVICE MANAGER PC-1 WWB CMU & GYP. BD./PT. EXPOSED/PAINTED VARIES SEMI -GLOSS 7 STORAGE RACKS - 107 STORAGE/ 102 C H.M. 3'-0" X T-0" X 1-3/4" 7/ A-9 H.M. 9 - PT-2 108 HALL #1 VCT VWB GYP. BD./PAINTED ACT-1 9'-0" S-GLOSS - PT-4 8 ALIGNMENT MACHINE 1 230V./20A. 1 DIA. 108 RECEIVING/ 104 C H.M. T-0" X 7'-0" X 1-3/4" 7/ A-9 H.M. 2 - 4" HEAD 109 HALL #2 VCT VWB GYP. BD./PAINTED ACT-1 11'-0" S-GLOSS - PT-4 9 AIR COMPRESSORS 2 7.5 H.P. @ 208V./ 80A/ 3 DIA. 109 RECEIVING/ 104 E STL. 6'-0" X 10'-0" - - 3 - 110 WOI�iIEN'S RM VCT VWB GYP. BD./PTD - CT @ 4-0" AFF ACT-2 8'-0" SEMI -GLOSS 10 AIR DRYER QUAD BOX 1 115 V. / 15 AMP/ 1 PHASE Y o COIL DOOR = , 110 HALL #3/ 113 C H.M. 3'-0" X T-0" X 1-3/4" 7/ A-9 H.M. 2 - 4" HEAD 111 MEN'S RM VCT VWB GYP. BD./PTD - CT @ 4-0" AFF ACT-2 8'-0" SEMI -GLOSS 11 TWIN POST LIFT 6 208 V./25 A./ 1 DIA. UU L Z E 111 SERVICE AREA/ 103 D H.M. 3'-0" X T-0" X 1-3/4" 7/ A-9 H.M. 2 - 4" HEAD 112 EMPLOYEE'S RM PICA VWB GYP. BD./PTD - FRP @ 4-0" AFF ACT-2 8'-0" SEMI -GLOSS 12 EXTENDED SCISSOR ALIGNMENT LIFT 1 208V. i 22A DISC./ 1-PH/ 60 HZ C L) ~ m Q r i L 112 SERVICE AREA/ 103 C H.M. 3'-0" X T-0" X 1-3/4" 7/ A-9 H.M. 2 - 4" HERD 113 HALL #3 PC-1 VWB GYP. BD./PAINTED EXPOSED/PAINTED VARIES FLAT - PT-4 13 WEIGHT RACK 2 - h- 11J O M s LnU C) 113 SERVICE AREA/ 103 F STL. 10'-0" X 10'-0" 2/ A-6 - 3 - 114 COMMUNICATION ROOM VCT VWB GYP. BD./PAINTED ACT-1 10'-0" FLAT - PT-4 14 STRUT COMP. 1 - ¢ _ < O M M 114 SERVICE AREA/ 103 F STL. 10'-0" X 10'-0" 2/ A-6 - 3 - 115 CLOSET PC-1 VWB GYP. BD./PAINTED ACT-1 9'-0" FLAT - PT-4 15 COOLANT FLUSHER 1 - Q � rn ' " " - - GYP. BD./PAINTED ACT-1 9'-0" SEMI -GLOSS 16 ATF MACHINE 1 _ w Q � tom n 115 SERVICE AREA/ 103 F STL. 10 -0 X 10 -0 2! A-6 3 116 UNIFORM STORAGE PC-1 VWB 116 SERVICE AREA/ 103 F STL. 10'-0" X 10'-0" 2/ A-6 - 3 - u FINISH SCHEDULE NOTES: 2. ALE SHEET A- WALE PAINT TO HAVE CIFACABOE PRINT 17 A/C MACHINE 1 1 V. 2 AMP 1 PHASE 117 SERVICE AREA/ 103 F STL. 10'-0" X 10'-0" 2/ A-6 - 3 - 18 LOW RISE LIFT 1 110 / 0 ! S 118 SERVICE AREA/ 103 F STL. 10'-0" X 10'-0" 2/ A-6 - 3 - KEY MATERIAL COLOR MANUFACTURER REMARKS 19 OIL DRAINER 2 - 119 SERVICE AREA/ 103 F STL. 10'-0" X 10'-0" 2/ A-6 - 3 - SC-1 SEALED CONCRETE DUST PROOFING CHEMICAL SEE SPECIFICATIONS 20 250 GAL. DOUBLE OIL TANK 2 - + 120 SERVICE AREA/ 103 F STL. 10'-0" X 12'-0" 2/ A-6 - 3 - PC-1 PAINTED CONCRETE WHITE NIGHT GREY FLOROCK W/ALUMINUM OXIDE GRANULES 21 FAN BY OWNER 4 - 121 HALL #3/ 113 D H.M. T-0" X 7'-0" X 1-3/4" 7A/ A-9 H.M. 4A - FULL SWING / PT-2 O VCT VINYL COMPOSITE TILE GMT-003 EARTHWERKS METALLIC PATTERN 22 COATS 1750 BALANCER - 115V./ 15 AMP/ 1 PHASE • 122 COMMUNICATION RM/ 114 C H.M. 3'-0" X 7'-0" X 1-3/4" 7A/ A-9 H.M. 4 - PT-2 w/ 24"X18" BOTTOM 0 VWB VINYL WALL BASE BLACK DAHLIA - 82-001 FLEXCO MATTE FINISH 23 55 GAL. DRUM 2 • LOUVER LJL WWB WOOD WALL BASE SW # 7066 GRAY MATTERS _ 24 250 GAL. WASTE OIL HEATER TANK 1 123 CLOSET/ 115 C H.M. 2-0" X T-0" X 1-3/4" 7A/ A-9 H.M. 4 - PT-2 NOTE: 124 MECHANICAL PLATFORM G PRIMED STEEL 3'-0" X 3'-0" 1/ A-6 4A - PT-4 CT CERAMIC TILE SEMI -GLOSS - ARTIC WHITE - 0190 DALTILE 6"; 6" COVE @ WALL BASE/ 6" - WAITING ROOM FURNITURE, SALES KIOSK, SALES FIXTURE, VENDING MACHINE AND FRP FIBER REINFORCED PANEL EMBOSSED - WHITE BULLNOSE AT EDGES OFFICE FURNITURE PROVIDED BY TENANT 126 UNIFORM STORAGE/ 116 C H.M. 3'-0" X 7'-0" X 1-3l4" 7! A-9 H.M. 7 - PT-2 - -PROVIDE BLOCKING @ 96" A.F.F. FOR FANS IN SERVICE AREA NOTE: ACT-1 ACOUSTIC CEILING PANEL WHITE ARI�TR�G 2'-0" X 2'-0" - SEE SPECIFICATIONS SHEETS FOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE ACT-2 ACOUSTIC CEILING PANEL WRITE ARMSTRONG 2'-0" X 2'-0" - WASHABLE 3'-6" - METAL THRESHOLDS FOR PERIMETER WALL EXIT DOORS SHALL BE ALUMINUM STORMPROOF ADA HANDICAP ACCESSIBLE Z PT-1 PAINT SW # 6258 TRICORN BLACK SHERWIN-WILLIAMS 31 • - ALL HARDWARE SHALL BE HANDICAP ACCESSIBLEa � PT-2 PAINT SW # 71iJ66 GRAY MATTERS S S � L) PT-3 PAINT SW # 7065 ARGOS g W — OWINDOW SCHEDULE --� PT-4 PAINT SW # 7063 NEBULOUS V�F11TE W 14' SEE 5/A-9 FOR WINDGW TYPES PT-5 PAINT SW# 5 GYPSY RED SHERWIN WILLIAMS TYPE LOCATION / ROOM SIZE (WxH) FRAME TYPE GLASS TYPE DETAILS REMARKS7 A SALES/ 101 14'-4" X 12'-8" ALUMINUM 1" TEMPERED INSUL. 6/ A-9 PT-6 PAINT SW# 6906 CITRUS SHERWIN WILLIAMS B SALES/ 101 10'-6" X 12'-8" ALUMINUM 1" TEMPERED INSUL. 6/ A-9 CMU WALL o ry C MANAGERS OFFICE/ 106 - WAITING ROOM/ 105 4'-6" X 4'-6" HOLLOW METAL 1/4" PLATE, TEMP. 6/ A-9 PT-1 (TWO-WAY MIRROR PT-7 PAINT PRIMER ONLY SMERWIN WILLIAMS FOR PREP FOR WALLPAPER DETAIL PILASTER R IN MNGR. OFF. #106) PL-1 PLASTIC LAMINATE PEWTER BRUSH MATTE FINISH - #4779-60-1074808 WILSON ART 2 If 11 _ � o �4- "To SCALE:3/8 =1 -O D SALES/101 14'-0" X 12'-8" ALUMINUM 1" TEMPERED INSUL. 6/ A-9 PL-2 PLASTIC LAMINATE BLACK MATTE - #1595 WILSON ART �o WALL LEGEND C" u z3 �N= z t= W ep X Q c`tl X �mcnZcL- M _n__ 5/8" GYP. BD. ON EACH SIDE ON 3$" METAL STUDS @ 16" o 1 O.C. (20 GA) UNO- TO DECK -PROVIDE SLIP TRACK AT 2 1 2 DECK. � CONCRETE STOOP � A-6 A-7 2 A-1 o Q ELECTRICAL EXTERIOR DOOR 7, 5,1" �� O • 5/8" GYP. BD. ON EACH SIDE ON 3 5/8" (20 GA) METAL PANELS - SEE ELEC. STUDS @ 16" O.C. - 8" ABOVE ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE 7'-2" 6'-0" 4'-4^ 82'-I1" 3'-4" 8" 811'-10" 14'•4" 3'4" o OR AS OTHERWISE NOTED - PROVIDE 3" SOUND BATTS. PAINTED FLOOR ooe — 5 STRIPPING M.O.0 ell, 4 � M.©• M.O. IN ALL RESTROOM & OFFICES WALLS & CEILINGS ABOVE 4B" WALL UINTED SHELF UNIFORM ST �.., .� .� �.. ..�Afti (ALL PLUMBING WALLS TO BE 6" METAL STUDS) A-4 A-6'1 11s WITH R TO WITH 6 S7• LBS. OF FORCE. 3 1 6 STONE VENEER OVER 8" CMU WALL —7- - 1� O 1 MP'GO E 7 � ��� -�� �� �� 1 112 111 7 i STONE VENEER OVER 12" CMU WALL 1t#9 ��I STORA i / „ 4 5 O 7 7 1 I 2 Q w a 102 I �� a � ` � � ' \ �� i ` i RECEIVING 1 WW 0 / � 1 Y i �I' ( �-54 0 1 oa 5 y HALL #3 A-5 I I • — 113 2 12 CMU WALL WITH 3 5/8 METAL STUDS AND STONE — — — — — — — — L� C] E5VEENEER - a — — — [ T — — 1 WOME S HA{�L #2 I - EXHAUST OPENING `I ,, i� - IENStON T` 110� SEE SHEET A-4 FOR 1 7 Cn ' ' \ i ' i KS LOCH OI'd \ / 7 Ty 1 104 1 t39 2 1�4'-8'�+►FF Q y MOUNTING HEIGHT. _ �` / SHEET LS-1 121 1 8 V J 6 STONE VENEER OVER 16" CMU WALL (12" + 4" CMU) CD'� �— ��— 1 �' j SEE MECH. FOR MORE INFORMATION. Cr) Iff s s p F A-5 �. STONE VENEER OVER 16" CMU WALL (12" + 4" CMU) WITH 2 3 24 0 2 15 1s 1 3 5 1 13 5 13 5 21 107 I O O I 0. 7 �" METAL STUDS (24GA) @ 16" O.C. LINO WITH ONE LAYER 0 0 74,P11s ® 1s 6 6OA� 3 Q. GYP. BD. TO DECK ANCHORED TO CMU AT 1/a POINTS. BELOW BELOW ABOVE oVE 1 ----- ,� N W 17 3" PAINTED WARNING 2 111110 PROVI 4 LYWOOD B/C I SALES A_5 1 N °0 GRADE MIN. TO 8'-0" AFF WITH STONE VENEER OVER 20 CMU WALL (12 + 8 CMU) WITH 2 COMPRESSOR - M � STRIP AT LIFT PITS 1 101 O r A_4 8 %" METAL STUDS (24GA) @ 16" O.C. UNO WITH ONE LAYER SEE MECHANICAL SMOOTH SIDE OUT, MOUNTING `' - LIFT PIT -SEE HOLES TO BE FILLED, SANDED GYP. BD. TO DECK ANCHORED TO CMU AT %4 POINTS. - � STRUCTURAL SERVICE AREA 4 A-8 3 AND PAINTED. SEE DETAIL 1/A 9. � c M•''� - 103 AIR -HANDLING UNIT ABOVE C AI ING RM 114 O CURB RAMP -SEE ADA DOOR SIGNAGE 2 -_ ----- _ IN SEE ME 105 2 4'_8 A F 4/AS-1 .T IL - S MECHANICAL, ,. 'I Q CLOSET CANOPY ABOVE ISSUE DATE 11 11 11 C 11 11 11 r� R 6 6 8" MAX 12 — 115 \ T`ff� " 2-� - v I I V Iv � V � SHOWN DASHED - tx08 �', 122 -? - ,, 123 i' 1 m --- ' --- HALL #1 • 0'-0" 0'-0" Y8" PER FOOT "' g o �] L d -��' 1 3 1os _ CANOPY DOWN SPOUT CHAIN LINK FENCE A.F.F, u _ ¢ A.F.F. -00 LEVER PER FIRE MARSHAL e o �G J O I o O REV DATE HANDLE — _ SEE DTL 4/A-2 a LW Z V ° 1 2 102 MEN WOMEN o ', TRENCH DRAIN - 0) a A-8 o w ¢ ci ( I in PAINTED FLOOR SEE PLUMBING '_ " C STRIPPING - O -0 1 A.F.F. TYPICAL HANDICAP SIGNAGE Y 0 TRENCH DRAIN 6 7 1 @ TRENCH DRAY r SERVIC MG R OFFICE 1 7 7 --L_----- -- - ---------- --- ---- - -- - - - -----------'------------------- - - ---------- -- ______ _ _ _ ______ ___ _, _ - _ - ____ _____ -- - _-__- - _ _-_ 10 - co cpi -- - --- - - --- - 10B D o t% • 5 - - - 121J -- 11 J - -- 118 - - — -- -- - 117 - - -- 11� 115 114 113 a F O SIGNAGE A �:, 4" CONCRETE Rey 9' CHARACTER PROPORTION. LETTERS AND NUMBERS ON SIGNS SHALL HAVE A WIDTH -TO HEIGHT -0'-3/4" A. F. �'-3/4" A, F.F. 111 SIDEWALK er. RATIO BETWEEN 3:5 AND 1:1 AND ASTROKE-WIDTH-TO-HEIGHT RATIO BETWEEN 1:5 AND 1:10. 6 �ODR R EAD 1 1 ! 1 ! 4 1 @ OVERHEAD 4 6 44 RR RAISED AND BRAILLE CHARACTERS AND PICTORIAL SYMBOL SIGNS. (PICTOGRAMS). LETTERS AND 11 r FOR 9 9 NUMERALS SHALL BE RAISED 1/32 IN., UPPER CASE, SONS SERIF OR SIMPLE SERIF TYPE AND SHALL FIRE SPRINKLER -6" 10'-4" 10'-2"Ill, 10'-0" 10'-0" 10'-0" 10'-0" 10'-0" 10'-0" 3'-4" 9'-8" 11'-10" 14'�" 3'-6" BE ACCOMPANIED WITH GRADE BRAILLE. RAISED CHARACTERS SHALL BEAT LEAST 5/8 IN. (16 MM) RISER M.O. M.O. „ M.O. „ M.O. „ M.O. „ M.O. M.O. " M.O. O. M.O. 1 -8 2 -0 2 -0 2 -0 2 -0 2 -0 2 -0 2 -8" HIGH, BUT NO HIGHER THAN 2 IN. (50 MM). PICTOGRAMS SHALL BE ACCOMPANIED BY THE 4" CONCRETE 145'-0" EQUIVALENT VERBAL DESCRIPTION PLACED DIRECTLY BELOW THE PICTOGRAM. THE BORDER APRON, SLOPE TO DIMENSION OF THE PICTOGRAM SHALL BE 6 IN. (152 MM) MINIMUM OF HEIGHT. PROVIDE POSITIVE NOTES: SIM. DRAINAGE 1. 6" CONCRETE TRANSFORMER PAD �36 2 NO CANOPY 2 FINISH AND CONTRAST. THE CHARACTERS AND BACKGROUND OF SIGNS SHALL BE EGGSHELL, COORDINATE SIZE AND LOCATION WITH MATTE, OR OTHER NON -GLARE FINISH. CHARACTERS AND SYMBOLS SHALL CONTRAST WITH THEIR UTILITY. PROVIDE BOLLARDS FOR A-4 A-6.1 A-5 he BACKGROUND EITHER LIGHT CHARACTERS ON A DARK BACKGROUND OR DARK CHARACTERS ON A PROTECTION. This drawing and the design shown istio property of the architect. The reproduction, LIGHT BACKGROUND. 2. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE copying or use of this drawing without their written consent is prohibited and any WITH EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER FOR infringementwiubesubject toiegaiaction. MOUNTING LOCATION AND HEIGHT. WHERE PERMANENT IDENTIFICATION IS PROVIDED FOR ROOMS REQUIRED CLEARANCES. AND SPACES, SIGNS SHALL BE INSTALLED ON THE WALL ADJACENT TO THE LATCH SIDE OF THE 3. ALL FLOOR PAINTED WARNING STRIPS TO O 1 2 3 ARCHITECTURAL DOOR. WHERE THERE IS NO ALL SPACE TO THE LATCH SIDE OF THE DOOR, INCLUDING AT DOUBLE BE PTA FLOOR PLAN LEAF DOORS, SIGNS SHALL BE PLACED ON THE NEAREST ADJACENT WALL. MOUNTING HEIGHT 1 A.RCHITECTURAL FLOOR PLAN . SHALL BE 60 IN. (1525 MM) ABOVE THE FINISH FLOOR TO THE CENTERLINE OF THE SIGN. MOUNTING 4. CAULK BOTTOM PERIMETER OF SERVICE &SCHEDULES AREA WALLS AND ITS ACCESSORY ROOMS SCALER /8"=1 ill LOCATION FOR SUCH SIGNAGE SHALL BE SO THAT A PERSON MAY APPROACH WITHIN 3 IN. (76 MM) FACING SALES, SERVICE AREA, WAITING OF SIGNAGE WITHOUT ENCOUNTERING PROTRUDING OBJECTS OR STANDING WITHIN THE WING ROOM TO PREVENT WATER INTRUSION A=1 DOOR. SYMBOLS OF ACCESSIBILITY. FACILITIES AND ELEMENTS REQUIRED TO BE IDENTIFIED AS DURING SHOP CLEANING. PROJECT NORTH ACCESSIBLE BY SECTION 4.1 OF THE ADAAG, SHALL USE THE INTERNATIONAL SYMBOL OF ACCESSIBILITY. 8-STRAIGHT PROTOTYPE - REVISION 16 - 06-18-08 WATER HEATER - SEE PLUMBING S 3'-0"x3'-0" ACCESS DOOR PAINTED TO MATCH ADJACENT WALL �(V 3/4" PLYWOOD ON 6" �" METAL STUDS 2'-6" x 1'-3Y2" RETURN AIR CHASE 1 2 MtUHANIUAL SCALE: 1 /4"=1'-0" nrn' t_`ATC r%f'%no 3'-0" A B ELEVATION CE 4X6 TUBE STEEL FRAME PLATFORM SUSPENDED FROM THE BAR JOIST - SEE STRUCTURAL AIR HANDLING UNIT - SEE MECHANICAL 413 A-2 PLAN �4A A-2 N. RECEIVI PAINT JOIST AND UNDERSIDE OF DECK - PT-4 — 0 I GENERAL NOTES 1. REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL LIGHTING FIXTURES, EXACT NUMBER OF FIXTURES, AND LOCATIONS OF FIXTURES. REFER TO MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL HVAC EQUIPMENT AND LOCATIONS. 2. ALL SPRINKLER LINES THROUGHOUT ENTIRE STORE SHALL BE AS HIGH AS POSSIBLE, AND COMPLYING WITH LIFE SAFETY CODES - COORDINATE ROUTING WITH HVAC. 3. SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR EMERGENCY LIGHTING. 4. G.C. TO COORDINATE ALL LOCATIONS OF HVAC DIFFUSERS, GRILLES, ETC. SO AS TO AVOID LIGHTING FIXTURE LOCATIONS. 5. SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR EXTERIOR LIGHTING. 6. ALL EXPOSED DUCTWORK, WIRING, CABLES, ELECTRICAL BOXES, ETC., IN SALES AREAS ARE TO BE PAINTED TO MATCH ADJACENT EXPOSED CEILING AREAS. 7. CENTER 2X2 ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE SO THAT ONE LIGHT FIXTURE IS CENTERED FN THE ROOM UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE SEE PLAN FOR 2X2 LOCATIONS. SYMBOLS SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION 2'-0" X 2'-0" FLUORESCENT LIGHT FIXTURE O SURFACE -MOUNTED UNDER CANOPY FIXTURE 2'-0" X 4'-0" FLUORESCENT LIGHT FIXTURE O EXHAUST FAN O RECESSED DOWNLIGHT FLOURESCENT FIXTURE(IN SALES - 14'-8" AFF, IN STORAGE, SERVICE AREA - ATTACHED TO BAR JOIST WITH UNISTRUT) PENDANT LIGHT NL FLOURESCENT FIXTURE - NL REPRESENTS NIGHT LIGHT WALL MOUNTED LIGHT FIXTURE, AT EXTERIOR ® HVAC RETURN DIFFUSER ®E EXIT SIGN; ARROWS AS SHOWN Dn t�'Il-JI WALL MOUNTED BATTERY PACK SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE SYSTEM O KEYLESS FIXTURE WITH FLOURESCENT BULB HVAC SUPPLY DIFFUSER > SPOT LIGHT CENTER LIGHT FIXTURES BETWEEN HALL #2 JOISTS AND BRIDGING UNIFORM STORAGE HALL #3 WOMENS 109 110 TYP. 11 s 109 EMPLOYEES MIENS 111 112 A �� � ��� I STO GE 'I� �� — 7 ��, i iv/Ac � w 0 -4P — — —� V \ /' i 77/ E EQ. CI WINDO WA TE OIL HEATER -S MECHANI AL FL E THRU R - S RVICE ARE NI SE MECHANI 1 33 NL NL USPENDE MECHANICAL PLATFORM FROM CEILING WINDOW 9,JOIST - SEE DETAIL 2/A-f CEILING ABOVE VENDING CHINES - L 1 '-0"AFF CLOSE F F F —1 F 115 NL I —am lam DOWNSPOUT, SER=107 7 TYP. T CC jl CEILING(')�REFLECTED CALE:1 /8"=1'-0" 145'-0" 0 HALL #1 108 MGR OFFICE 10s ROOF STRUCTURE: DECK, JOISTS, AND WALLS ABOVE 14'-8" IN SALES AREA PAINTED PT-1 11 . RM 1 4 12'-0" 2 4'-2" T in r in T.S. CANOPY FRAME - SEE STRUCTURAL - CENTER LIGHTS WITH STOREFRONT -ELECTRICAL CONDUIT -PAINT UNDERSIDE OF CANOPY & STRUCTURE - STC-1 -CANOPY DOWN SPOUT 0 V) I,, N Y O = M E IU— Z U F- COQ ^ U r L +�U w O w Z ~ Q C M M Q 2 �: LU Z Ce w Q 0 m N D v d 2 0 2 U�'Cr > C D�x � Z C w i OdLUi Z d U N d UJ 0 000 V J� N= _ N ISSUE DATE 12-1-08 REV DATE This drawing and the design shown is the property of the architect. The reproduction, copying or use of this drawing without their written consent is prohibited and any infringement will be subject to legal action. REFLECTED CEILING PLAN/ UPPER DIM. PLAN A=2 &STRAIGHT PROTOTYPE - REVISION 16 - 06-18-08 ROOFING MEMBRANE 51-10" UP PARAPET SEALANT AROUND ENTIRE PERIMETER �2A .050 ALUM. SCUPPER BOX, WOOD TRUSS 40 8„-40e 4" H. x 6" W. W/ 2" FLANGE. A-5 PROVIDE ABSOLUTE SEALANT AROUND WATERTIGHT INSTALLATION ENTIRE PERIMETER — SINGLE PLY LAP TURN MEMBRANE DOWN FLASHING APPLIED W/ INTO PIPE AND SEAL BONDING ADHESIVE 3" DIA. STEEL PIPE - RIGID INSULATION WELD TO CHANNEL - SLOPE FULL PERIMETER WELD - as a HOLD ABOVE EXTEND MIN. OF 2' INTO ROOF DRAINS COLLECTOR BOX ° a a a ' . 4X4 STEEL TUBE ° a aaa aa. 1/4"/FT. +SLOPE 1 1/2" x RIGID CONT. CAULK o' TAPERED CANT SEALANT AND BACKER ROD — -- ROOF DECK EIFS SYSTEM 12X6 STEEL TUBE a a PREFINISHED METAL e COLLECTOR BOX BELOW CONT. CAULK 3X6 CHANNEL - SLOPE L 1 /4"/FT. TO COLLECTOR 2'-9 1 /2" .11� >< BOX CL WELD CHANNEL TO TUBE @ %4" SLOPE TOWARDS PIPE MITER CORNER 5 DETAIL �2yERFLOW SCUPPER 4DETAIL,_ , C SCALE: 1 1/20 SCALE.1 -1 -Off iNITH FOAM INSULATION CONDENSING PIPE INSULATION 'ONDENSING PIPE IN 1 %2" DIAMETER HOLE DETAIL SCALE: 3"=1'-0" SCALE: 3"=1'-0" SEALANT AROUND ENTIRE PERIMETER .050 ALUM. SCUPPER BOX, 4"H.x6"W.W/2"FLANGE. PROVIDE ABSOLUTE WATERTIGHT INSTALLATION SINGLE PLY LAP FLASHING APPLIED W/ BCftDING ADHESIVE RIGID INSULATION - SEE ROOF PLAN FOR CRICKETS I ---\ 'cY ROOFDECK SCALE: 1 1 /2"=1'-0" WOOD TRUSS \ 1/2" 1/2" \\ 10 1/2" SEALANT AROUND ENTIRE PERIMETER HEMMED EDGE a o CONT. CAULK SLOPE ° 1 1/2" a a n r PREFINISHED METAL CONDUCTOR HEAD DOWNSPOUT CONT. EIFS SYSTEM REFER TO MECHANICAL PLANS FOR EXACT LOCATIONS / 5 COORDINATION. a-s 2. NO LADDER OR SCREENING REQUIRED BECAUSE THIS BUILDING HAS A SPLIT -SYSTEM AND EXHAUST FANS THAT ARE WITHIN RESTROOMS. NO ROOFTOP MOUNTED EQUIPMENT IS REQUIRED. REINFORCED MEMBRANE SEAM FASTENING PLATE_ CHEMICAL WELD— / 2 DETAIL_ PIPE SCALE: 3„, -1 -0 V N LAP SEALANT Y o = M E CLAMPING RING � z 08 , ,,.o gyp 0� < E= Q O M � WATER BLOCK `C=`j ui z n �? �U�t_w iuQcvcnmu_ 3 NOTE: COORDINATE ALL SIZES WITH PLUMBING DRAWINGS - SEE GOOFING FERIOR DLYWOOD _DECK ZOD ;EE CAP PILASTER x PROJECT NORTH 0 ISSUE DATE 12-1-08 EV DATE This drawing and the design shown is the property of the architect. The reproduction, copying or use of this drawing without their written consent is prohibited and any infringement will be subject to legal action. ROOF PLAN & DETAILS A=3 8-STRAIGHT PROTOTYPE - REVISION 16 - 06-18-08 '. 2x6 WD TRIM PAINTED E} - TO MATCH EIFS-3 " 1x2 WD TRIM PAINTED TO MATCH EIFS-3 PLYWD END TREATMENT PAINTED TO MATCH EIFS-2 9 UOIN DETAIL SCALE.3/8 -1 -0 4 STONE OR EIFS VENEER SEALANT WITH CLOSED CELL BACKER ROD STONE OR EIFS VENEER SEALANT WITH CLOSED CELL BACKER ROD CMU 11 CONTROL JOINT SCALE: 1 1/2"=V-011 36" DIAMETER MEDALLION. INSTALL PER MFR'S INSTRUCTIONS SIGNAGE, TYP. M-1 T-11$" 2'_58 3 1 A-5 A-5 28'-108" KEY MATERIAL COLOR MANUFACTURER AC - 1 PREFINISHED METAL PAINTED "NATURAL WHITE" #AQM BY ICI PAINTS W.P. HICKMAN CO.,INC. AS - 1 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT CLEAR ANODIZED KAWNEER I= ASR - 1 ASPHALT SHINGLE ROOFING WELSH GRAY GRAND SLATE L) DOS-1 DOWNSPOUTS PAINTED "NATURAL WHITE" #A0050 BY ICI PAINTS ----- W DOS-2 DOWNSPOUTS PAINTED TO MATCH STONE ----- X EDFA EXTERIOR DOOR AND FRAME FINISH PAINTED "NATURAL WHITE" #A0050 BY ICI PAINTS ----- LLJ EDF-2 EXTERIOR DOOR AND FRAME FINISH PAINTED "BROWN BAG" #A1804 BY ICI PAINTS ----- EIFS - 1 EIFS PAINTED "BROWN BAG" #A1 804 BY ICI PAINTS DRYVIT EIFS - 2 EIFS PAINTED "INDIAN LEGEND" #A0083 BY ICI PAINTS DRYVIT EIFS - 3 EIFS PAINTED "NATURAL WHITE" #A0050 BY ICI PAINTS DRYVIT EIFS - 4 EIFS PAINTED "SICILIAN SUMMER" #0469 BY ICI PAINTS DRYVIT EP - 5 ELECTRICAL PANELS PAINTED "NATURAL WHITE" #ADQW BY ICI PAINTS ----- ESJ - 1 EIFS V-SCORE JOINT 1/2" WIDE BY 3/4" DEEP DRYVIT GTRA ALUMINUM GUTTER PAINTED "NATURAL WHITE"#AOM BY ICI PAINTS ----- LF-A LIGHT FIXTURE A DARK BRONZE SEE ELEC. DWGS LF-B LIGHT FIXTURE B DARK BRONZE SEE ELEC. DWGS M - 1 PRECAST MEDALLION 36" DIA. CONTACT DEVELOPER FOR STYLE PINEAPPLE GROVE DESIGNS STC - 1 STEEL CA414OPY PAINTED "MINOR MOUSE" #198 BY ICI PAINTS ----- SF -1 STUCCO FAl PAINTED "NATURAL WMTE" #All BY ICI PAINTS ----- SG - 1 SPANDREL GLASS CLEAR GLASS BLACKED OUT ----- ST - 1 STCq14E VENEER COUNTRY LEDGESTOIME - CHARDONNAY - #CSV20006 OWENS CORNING - CULTURED STONE STQ - 1 STONE QUOIN BUCKSKIN - #SWT 1371 OWENS CORNING - CULTURED STONE STW - 1 STll WATERTABLE tBUCKMN - #I SWT 1371 OWENS CORNING - CULTURED STONE NOTE: - CONTRACTOR TO CONTACT U.S. SIGNS FOR APPROVED StGNAGE LOCATIONS. - CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY EXTERIOR FINISH MATERIALS WITH DEVELOPER'S REPRESENTATIVE PRIOR TO ORDERING AND PROVIDE A MOCK-UP OF EXTERIOR FINISHES TO BE USED BEFORE ANY FINISHES ARE TO COMMENCE ON THE BMDtN'G. CONTACT JOHN FILIEG. 2 PREFINISHED METAL COPIIpiG W/1" STANDING q_5 SEAM END JOINTS AC-1 AC-1 4 2'-58" T-11a° Ell A-5 Ell EIFS-4 SEE DTL e - FOR ROOF END • TOP • - -mil _ate I ■NIMBI Moll • . R MEN Mimi ■MCI '7 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Y Y ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ InEl ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ I! ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ E-� -00 OVERHEAD DOOR, TYP. . -' _ _fir- ,�� �i�!CI�I�,�■ �Iw���l�� C��I��;�!�I� �'���,w.��.- w,����.�- ws.����!� @ . - u - V C -�_------- — — e 1. NO I - - _ PREFINISHED METAL COPING W/1" STANDING SEAM END JOINTS .� 211 T.O.M. EIFS-3 EIFS-3 ;:.. AS-1 STC-1 n h 10'-0" B.O. CANOPY LI C_A I / CIF { ' SEE QUOIN DTL 9/A-4� s , x I z M SEE OTL 101i FOR ROOF END SEE QUOIN DpT�L 9/A-•T EIFS BRACKETS, 20" O.C., TYP. .�,,,�,..,'.._ - — 1AFA • El . OVERHEAD DOOR .— - — .— - — - —...��=='- — — '� `"`�':���"s�= — — — =---- �.'�`""->= ;'"` =_�= -- e +!� -- � �� •Iw-- ■� � +� �� ,���-�-� �, _.- !y!. y...yy 'T�'�`�!�__� `�� —awl.: - = - �- _ _ —ram„r��� -�i� + - -- _— — -� cow '����' CJ IN EIFS, STONE, AND CMU SCALE:1 /8"=1'-0" CJ IN EIFS, CMU WALLS OF STONE, OPENING PAINTED TO AND CMU MATCH EIFS-1 KEY PLAN 3 A-4 4 A-4 �i SMOOTH ROUNDED MORTAR CAP PAINTED 4"0 STANDARD PIPE FILLED WITH CONCRETE, PRIMED AND PAINTED "SAFETY YELLOW" SW #4084 BY SHERWIN WILLIAMS SEE SITE PLAN 0 v Z 0 G G cn 911 [Ill -J� DETAIL TYPICAL BOLLARD Nzl SCALE: 1 "=1'-0" CONCRETE FOOTING — G G G G G G L� CMU PREFINISHED 5 3i4" DOWNSPOUT AND GUARD PREFfNISHED BENT METAL DOWNSPOUT TRANSITION BY ROOFING CONTRACTOR 8" PVC PIPE BOOT TRANSITION TO STORM SEWER STORM SEWER LATERAL PIPE,1 7t, 7 UUVVINSf'UU 1 SCALE: 1 /2"=1 1-0" 1/2" DIA. WEDGE ANCHORS 5%"X5Y/4" DOWNSPOUT 1/8" BENT STL. PLATE DOWNSPOUT GUARDS G L 6�'DOWNSPOUT GU, SCALE:1 1 /2"=1'-O" M 2 cNM OMr�vM v�7c N p 7 .Y X �UNo:i O O ���nZdu`°. ISSUE DATE 12-1-08 REV I DATE 1 Emi JULY 18, 2008 PROTOTYPE REVISION a to reAll �yA . All DOWNSPOUT AND DOWNSPOUT GUARD .I' TRIM BOLT TO NUT 6 A-4 • • L--- -- This drawing and the design shown is the PROVIDE 1/8" BENT property of the architect. The reproduction, p copying or use of this drawing without their r I r STL. PLATE written consent is prohibited and any DOWNSPOUT infringement will be subject to legal action. GUARDS SECURE WITH (4) 2" DIA. EXTERIOR WEDGE ANCHORS ELEVATIONS 5 �scOA�wLE�is,2��OvYo�TGUARD � � Am4 8-STRAIGHT PROTOTYPE - REVISION 16 - 06-18-08 11 I Ili I I i irT 14. IAA-11nl r r-._ -I / I 26'-4" T.O.M. I � I I / PREFINISHED METAL COPING W/1" STANDING SEAM END JOINTS BOND BEAM- SEE STRUCTURAL EXTEND MEMBRANE ROOFING UP CMU PARAPET OVER BLOCK 2x4 MTL STUDS TO FACE OF COPING _ _ I EXTEND MEMBRANE ROOFING UP CMU PARAPET OVER BLOCK MEMBRANE ROOFING / I I TO FACE OF COPING OVER e" APA RATED 6 I I l i SHEATHING 22'-8 3/8 M.O. A-6.1 I ALUMINUM STOREFRONT\ SYSTEM — — SPANDREL GLASS 5 0, gla A-6.1 I 19'-4" M.O. I II 17'-7 1 /2" TOP OF EIFS CORNICE 4 II RIGID INSULATION II ,1, 15'-4 3/4" TOP OF EIFS I/ CORNICE I II I I I STEEL DECK AND BAR JOISTS, SEE STRUCTURAL 3 A-6.1 I 1 13'-4" M.O.RECESS 2" DRIP EDGE. SEE EIFS SCORE JOINT FOR DTL�—/ EIFS SYSTEM I\ 3 �-6 FINISHED GRADE, SLOPE TO PROVIDE POSITIVE DRAINAGE PROVIDE FOAM -FILL INSULATION AT RIGID INSULATION STEEL DECK AND BAR JOISTS, SEE STRUCTURAL Y 0 Qw0aw J = Z - L) LU Qx=)Pz oL 14'-8" a w 0 CO tL �. 13'-4" M.O. CMU WALL WITH 2 Y" METAL STUDS (24 GA) @ 16" O.C. UNO W/ ONE LAYER %" GYP. BD. TO DECK ANCHORED TO CMU AT Y4 POINTS AND 1" RIGID INSULATION. PROVIDE FOAM -FILL INSULATION AT / PERIMETER WALL PERIMETER WALL CMU CMU / PAINT INTERIOR ABOVE b 10'-0" B.O. CANOPY STRIPE AT SERVICE BAYS ONLY \ PAINT STRIPE AT 6A-2 SERVICE BAYS ONLY A-9 io 8'-0" B.O. BAND (6A-3 A-9 PAINT INTERIOR BELOW STRIPE AT SERVICE BAYS ONLY CONCRETE SLAB, SEE _ STRUCTURAL (-�r \ U �"`Y`� C, S��' Jc'; O�.il-ii`� I I I 1 I - I I — — d I P d I I I d I I I I n - I 9 -CONCRETE FOOTING, . I _— SEE STRUCTURAL : I I _ I I I • II 4 WALL SECION - REAR SCALE-3/4 -1TO ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEM 1" INSULATED GLAZING, TEMPERED AS REQUIRED Ili :� :�'.:: •:: 26'-4" T.O.M. COPING W/1" STANDING SEAM END JOINTS BOND BEAM- SEE STRUCTURAL EXTEND MEMBRANE ROOFING UP CMU PARAPET OVER BLOCK TO FACE OF COPING MEMBRANE ROOFING OVER 8" APA RATED SHEATHING—-, I 122'-0 3/8" M.O. I RIGID INSULATION BOND BEAM - SEE 21-S Q X Z STRUCTURAL 1, 14'-8" o- w 0 vn U. q PROVIDE FOAM -FILL DRIP EDGE. SEE EIFS INSULATION AT _ SCORE JOINT FOR DTL PERIMETER WALL i CMU 13'-4" M.O. I 6A-1 CMU WALL WITH 2 Y2" METAL i A-9 STUDS (24 GA) @ 16 O.C. UNO W/ ONE LAYER V GYP. BD. TO / \ DECK ANCHORED TO CMU AT Y4 / ® \ POINTS AND 1" RIGID / \ INSULATION. SLOPE I IN1 1 1/8" PER FT. 10'-T B.9! CANOPY N, Ile LIGHT FIXTURE SEE ELEC. (TYP.) r2A A-5 STONE VENEER BEYOND 6A-4 CONCRETE SLAB, SEE STRUCTURAL i_ kA 31 a - ('C�09�� ° c I I I I ° I CONC F (SO ! TN I , I I I ' I I - 1- __ 5'rH I4 ° I I ' e .4 I. 7-7 I e . I I I I I I I i I I y1/nLL- %JL_V I IVI14 - SCALE:3/4"=V-0" 1" INSULATED GLAZING, TEMPERED AS REQUIRED ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEM — A� 3,-4" M.O. 4" CMU 8" CMU STONE VENEER CONCRETE SLAB, SEE STRUCTURAL 19'-4" M.O. DRIP EDGE. SEE EIFS SCORE JOINT FOR DTL IOC'��`•JOB-'vVr�:��rii;�o,�✓�:'�16r,-�:'�i't;����%ii�J� '� --- --� ---! ----- �'�"� — - I d. I ! I i I EF a + • I - -- tl I - y — • ° a.' 4 �I� I P : 4 d• -- 1 ! -.i j - -- - 1 - - 2 WALL SECTI9 - STO E RO�NT SCALE . 3/4 —1 -0 PREFINISHED METAL COPING W/1" STANDING SEAM END JOINTS BOND BEAM- SEE STRUCTURAL EXTEND MEMBRANE ROOFING UP CMU PARAPET OVER BLOCK TO FACE OF COPING MEMBRANE ROOFING OVER e" APA RATED SHEATHING DIAGONAL BRACING - SEE STRUCTURAL-\ CMU WALL WITH 2 Y2" METAL — STUDS (24 GA) @ 16" O.C. UNO W/ ONE LAYER %" GYP. BD. TO DECK ANCHORED TO CMU AT Y4 POINTS AND 1" RIGID INSULATION. PROVIDE FOAM -FILL INSULATION AT mtRRt:5K Nt MWI-I' i 3/4" P.T. PLYWOOD DECKING PERIMETER CHANNEL PROVIDE CONTIN'UOU; MEMBRANE THROUGH CHANNEL TO WRAP TC OF PERIMETER TUSE CONTINUOUS PRESSU BAR PERIMETER TUBULAR STEEL -SEE STRUCTURAL. STEEL ROOF DECKING PAINT UNDER&DE OF CANOPY DECK AND SUPPORTS VINYL BASE CONCRETE SLAB, SEE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE FOOTING, SEE STRUCTURAL — 26'-4" T.O.M. 164" TOP OF MASONRY r6 Y PREFINISHED METAL COLLECTOR BOX DOWNSPOUT CMU - SEE STRUCTURAL STONE VENEER 1/2" EXPANSION MAIL AT SIDEWALK/BUILDING JOINT, TYP. 4" CONCRETE SIDEWALK, SLOPE TO PROVIDE POSITIVE DRAINAGE CONCRETE FILL II I I I - I I I I II II II I III -- I i I I - - I 4 I I , 1 ° ° 1 -- --- - -- I 4° ° d , i - I I I I i SCALE:3/4"= V-0" 8x8 STL. PLATE 1" DIA. ROD WITH THREADED ENDS TERMINATING AT THREADED SOCKETS 311 3" SECURE WITH THREADED ROD, NUTS, AND WASHERS BOTH SIDES OF BOTTOM BRACKET SUPPORT 10'-0" B.O. CANOPY I Pee. Ln � N Y p M E IULU - Z 08 O_ UOC)s tnU M p s wnew 0ZO; tY I— < C) LUQNtom OL..U_ o O CST �O � �tcQM z`,:, ° c�•;�- '?: Uvv> y w�C`" d n W co 5 O O � t H1 VI zdli UN 1d� ISSUE DATE 12-1-08 DATE fi This drawing and the design shown is the roe of the ar hite P P rtY c ct The re roduction P co in or use of this drawl PY 9 n without their 9 written consent is rohibite p d and any infringement will be subject to legal action. WALL SECTIONS A=45 8-STRAIGHT PROTOTYPE - REVISION 16 - 06-18-08 8"- CSJ 14 METAL STU 16" OC ROOF 1 "X6" STEEL KNUCKLE Y4" J BOLT WELDED TO GATE 4"X4"X%4' STEEL ANGLE FRAME. METAL ROOF DECKING 2"x6"><l PLATE WELDED TO STEEL KNUCKLE AND GALVANIZED POST Ill GALVANIZED POST, FILL - WITH CONCRETE. STONE VENEER 8" CMU C? ED ET,L)�AT SCALE: 1 1/2 -1 -0 'STER 'IRE STORAGE 180 GAL. DRUM FOR USED OIL FILTERS U 8" CMU PAINTED STONE VENEER N TO MATCH EIFS-1 > 7 A D-NI'l— • i i �- BOLLARD METAL ROOF 3'3" DECKING PAINTED TO MATCH YAW 101-01• 3'-10" EIFS-1 PLAN PLAN 6" DIA. STEEL DIAGONAL Y2" HARDI PANEL BRACING GATE POST PAINTED TO MATCH 7'-4" T.O.M. EIFS1 STW-1 METAL ROOF DECKING PAINTED TO MATCH ST-1 BOLLARD- SEE DTL 8/A-4 ELEVATION CANE BOT. BOLTS 16" LG. x 3/4" DIA. ENCLSC OSURE DETAILS BOND BEAM - SEE STRUCTURAL 8'-8" B.O.M. DRIP EDGE. SEE EIFS SCORE JOINT FOR DTL EIFS SYSTEM 2x4 FRAMING 16" O.C. $" SHEATHING TYVEK COMMERCIAL WRAP 4" SEALANT AND BACKER ROD - STONE WATERTABLE - STONE VENEER FINISHED GRADE, SLOPE TO PROVIDE POSITIVE DRAINAGE (3) HEAVY DUTY 180 DEGREE HINGES �1 — Y2" HARDY -PANEL AC-1 PAINTED TO MATCH 1/4" SLOPE MIN. CONCRETE SLAB, SEE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE FOOTING, SEE STRUCTURAL WALL SECTION STONE VENEER SCALE:3/8"=1'-0" 20 MIL. PVC TURN DOWN MIN. 2" FRONT AND BACK, U a EIFS-1 NOTE: - NAIL INPPLACE, SEAL END METALS W/ BITUIVHNOUS JOINTS °Ft � m o COATING TO PREVENT J W = CORROSION. CONTINUOUS LOCK CLEAT NAIL m 6 THRU TOP OR FACE @ 8'-0" WITH ' A-6 METAL COPING W!1" RING SHANK FAILS. PROVIICE 1 STANDING SEAM END JOINTS Y2" PENETRATION. LOCK CLEAT BOLLARD TO BE 2 GUAGES HEAVIER THAN 3�� 9" 2x PT/FRT WOOD METAL COPING METAL ROOF DECI BLOCKING, s" 10'-0" PAINTED TO MATCI s" EIFS, BOLT TO STRUCTURE 7'-4" T O.M. VERIFY REQUIRED PLAN OPENING WITH UTILITY CO. n 4�-O�� O `.. V h PREFORMED ALUM. COPING BOND BEAM- SEE 8" CMU 6" DIA. STEEL DIAGONAL AC - STRUCTURAL ,, GATEPOST BRACING �`� 2" THICK EIFS SYSTEM Ell EIFS-1 PAINT INSIDE OF 4" WIDE SEALANT STW1 METAL ROOF DECIING PAINTED TO MATCH EIFS' ENCLOSURE TO low STONE WATERTABLE MATCH — BOLLARD- SEE DETAIL 8 Aa EIFS-1 STONE VENEER ELEVATION 3C4NDEIBAOT. BOLTS I6"LG. x 3'-4" TOP OF SEE STRUCTURAL DWGS FOR WATE RTAB LE REINFORCEMENT FINISHED GRADE, = SLOPE TO PROVIDE POSITIVE DRAINAGE 9'-4" T.O.M. CONCRETE SLAB, SEE STRUCTURAL J ( Oc V �'o(_;`.', J a���G',� a-- - - ------ -_ - I I d . • x. — 4 I -CONCRETE FOOTING, - -- SEE STRUCTURAL 2 WALL SECTION -VIEW WINDOW SCALE.3/4 -1 -0 6 WALL SECTION SCALE:3/8"=1'-0" DECKING TO MATCH AC-1 ING W/ CONTINUOUS SEALANT AC-1 RDY-PANEL PAINTED TO MATCH AC-1 GA. CEE METAL STUD kL STUD HEADER 6HING W/ CONTINUOUS .ANT AND EIFS BEYOND DETAI L 5 SCALE:3/8"=1'-0" EIFS SYSTEM 4' WIDE SEALANT AND BACKER ROD STONE WATERTABLE METAL BRACKET AND FLASPiiM -SEE MFR S SPECS. STONE VENEER 3 WATERY ��ED�TA�I_LSCALE:1 1 /2"= ROOF DECKING AC-1 TO MATCH FLASHING W/ CONTINUOUS SEALANT Y2' HARDY -PANEL PAINTED AC-1 C 714" T.O.I. TO MATCH Allk 2" THICK EIFS EIFS- SYSTEM STW-1 ST-1 3EE STRUCTURAL FOR REINFORCEMENT FINISHED GRADE MEMBRANE ROOFING OVER RIGID INSULATION STEEL. DECK AND BAR JOISTS, SEE STRUCTURAL SUSPEND WITH — ISOLATION MOUNTS 2" 9 DE AID SCALE: 8"=1'-0" WATER HEATER BEY - SEE PLUMBING AK AIR HANDLING UNIT - SEE MEClie HANICAL 1 �_g8^ 3'-0"x3'-0" ACCESS PANEL PAINTED TO MATCH ADJACENT WALL r— IIo 86" N BLOCKING 7'-0" B.O.LIGHT PROVIDE BLOCKING FOR TV OF COUNTER (FOR MIN. 175 Ibs. TV) 68" TV BLOCKING 35" WATERLINE -SEE PLUMBING I� l 2-10" COUNTER HEIGHT tOOF DECKING TO MATCH Ac-1 "— ING W/ CONTINUOS SEALANT AC-1 ZDY-PANEL PAINTED TO MATCH AC-1 A. CEE METAL STUD 'J i ING W/ CONTINUOUS SIT TO MATCH AC-1 METER THREADED WITH SIMPSON SET '-TIE ANCHORAGE. 7DED 5, AT 2'-0" O.C. NG. YSTEM EIFS-1 ROOF DECKING 1 AC-1 FLASHING W/ COI SEALANT AC-1 72" HARDY -PANEL TO MATCH AC-1 6" 16 GA. CEE ME FLASHING W/ COS AC-1 I SEALANT 1 DIAMETER T RODS WITH SIMI EPDXY -TIE ANt EMBEDDED 5", Al EIFS-1 EIF oD+/E+ DETAIL SCALE:3/8"=1'-0" D ACT FROM STIR PROVIDE UNISTR :TS AS REQUIRED METALSTUD SUPPORT SEE STRUCTURAL KICKER - SEE STRUCTURAL METAL STUDS WITH 5/8" GYPBD. SOFFIT, PAINTED MTL. STUD WALL W/ 5/8" GYP. BD. ON BOTH SIDES - SEE STRUCTURAL FOR SUPPORT OF WINDOW — 1' VARIES VARIES 3%" METAL STUD WALL WITH %" GYP. w w BD. BOTH SIDES. CO 13. x-w WY= fY J (n J � — Q > � >LL aoQ 14'-8" T.O. FOCAL WALL CURVED FOCAL WALL 3/4" PLYWOOD ON 3 8" METAL STUDS CONTINUOS J-MOLD 0 VARIES -10'-0" B.O. SOFFIT — PAINT FACE AND UNDERSIDE OF SOFFIT CONCRETE SIB, SEE CONCRETE SLAB, SEE STRUCTURAL STRUCTURAL a a d .. !a . .. da a... d: s a a^ a de ea ed. .a d a J` G�OO,5 OCo .nef 1 O �� 0:,(� G` GO ,�O, O ��o( no,1O OG-7 -0.G�J11]O , �ALL SECT'O EW WINDOW .E:3/4"=1'-" 8-STRAIGHT PROTOTYPE - REVISION 16 - 06-18-08 N = M E F- J Z O81 O L) ��00� +U 5M; w O �I—<CO�MM N Q = w Z to Ln U w ce ISSUE DATE 12-1-08 REV DATE This drawing and the design shown is the property of the architect. The reproduction, copying or use of this drawing s s a In without their PY 9 9 written consent is prohibited and any infringement will g be subject to legal action. WALL SECTIONS A=6 F Tr -Fr I - - o,nn� vcnrr ono 1 WALL JtU I IVIN — SCALE: 3/4"=1'-0" 13'-6" MIN. RIDGE VENT PER MFR'S DTL PT BLOCKING — EXTEND MEMBRANE ROOFING UP CMU PARAPET OVER BLOCKING TO FACE OF COPING MEMBRANE ROOFING OVER RIGID INSULATION — STEEL DECK AND BAR JMTS, SEE PROVIDE FOAM —FILL STRUCT INSULATION AT PERIMETER WALL CMU PAINT INTERIOR AT SERVICE BAYS SEE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS Ot 10'-0" M.O. OVERHEAD DOOR AND TRACK, COORDINATE WITH MANUF. -0'-3/4" A.F.F. AT OVERHEAD DOORS TRENCH DRAIN SEE PLUMBING DRAWINGS 4-1"A.F.F. AT TRENCH DRAIN — 22'-O" T.O.M. 12 3" VENTED DRIP SCREED `�ram�r FRY I5-75-V-300 EIFS SYSTEM SCORE JOINT BOND BEAM SEE STRUCTURAL PREFINISHED GUTTER AND DOWNSPOUT BEYOND CMU WALLS OF OPENING PAINTED TO MATCH EIFS-1 CONCRETE APRON AT SERVICE BAYS, SLOPE TO PROVIDE POSITIVE DRAINAGE AWAY FROM BUILDING NEEDS TO BE XWIDE WITH A 4" DROP, Ys" PE F V-0LOP SLOPE ° -0'-1" A.F. — p. • a �� 7 77 -- • ° —INCiT-FOOTfNG I i I l TIJRAL I - I ° - e f 77 I I � I i i I ?— SCALE:3/4'I0" l CI rIPF Pt`R 1' MIN 7 PAlAP ET DETAIL SCALE:1 1 /2"=1'-101" 3/4" 1 1/2" g PREFORMED MTL COPING. ATTACH PER MFR'S INSTRUCTIONS PT BLOCKING AS REQ'D — $' APA RATED SHEATHING SEALANT BOND BEAM- SEE STRUCTURAL — 1/2" APA RATED SHEATHING TYVEK COMMERCIAL WRAP EIFS SYSTEM DRYV IT -COMPATIBLE SEALANT WITH CLOSED CELL BACKER ROD METAL FLASHING AND SEALANT TO MATCH STOREFRONT COLOR PT BLOCKING ALUMINUM STOREFRONT CLEAR GLASS BLACKED OUT EIFS/SPANDREL FAD DETAIL 6 SCALE:1 1 /2"=1'—®" CLEAR GLASS BLACKED OUT ALUMINUM STOREFRONT PT BLOCKING METAL FLASHING AND SEALANT TO MATCH EIFS-4 ; _ 1/2" APA RATED cr) IC SLOPE < SHEATHING c 1" PER 1' MIN, e 5 1/2 01I TYVEK COMMERCIAL WRAP CN M- EIFS SYSTEM 11 3" 11 " EIFS/SPANDREL SILL DETAIL SCALE:1 1 /2"=1'—a" QI nDG EIFS DETAIL, SCALE:1 1/2 —1 —01' 1" 'v CO 6" 1/2" 1 1/2" EIFS DETAIL SCALE:1 1/2 ! —1 —011 1/2" APA RATED SHEATHING TYVEK COMMERCIAL WRAP EIFS SYSTEM EIFS SYSTEM io 00 N p 4 1/2" ol 2" TYP. AT BLOCK APPLICATION *_RARAPET,DETAIL SCALE:1 1/2 4" SEALANT AND BACKER ROD ASPHALT SHINGLE ROOFING - SEE MFR FOR DTL 2x4 PT FRAMING DRIP EDGE. SEE EIFS SCORE JOINT FOR DTL TO MATCH 4' SEALANT, BACKER ROD, AND FLASHING BLOCKING AS REQ'D ALUM. STOREFRONT 9 WINDOW ,DETAIL SCALE:1 1/2 —1 —0 SLOPE 1" 1" EIFS 8 DETAIL, SCALE:1 1/2 —1 —0 8-STRAIGHT PROTOTYPE - REVISION 16 - 06-18-08 Ln N � O = M E � Z U _ 00 U � s +VIU Corn H ,,�MOs I. LU Z M M N Q = LU Z Ln Lf) f— pcer'�ne'-o 0 LU Q (V cn = tL u_ N 42^�. z' oM� �_ cc+"o O c�m'1p = y N M 0 M N M C F- � W � MJ � N � _ Z U ms c� Z3- c:n n.0 =* t A 0 m g t is L]MVf Z a. M UNd dLL ISSUE DATE 12-1-08 This drawing and the design shown is the property of the architect. The reproduction, copying or use of this drawing without their written consent is prohibited and any infringement will be subject to legal action. WALL SECTIONS AND DETAILS A=6z 01 i4_1 T-r—,In e➢..I II'� II II .II .Ik �i:4'.'U11,i. 4E I[.Idllll .rtlRl .I r Ilt 71LI,� I �t �F_ — IF FOCAL WALL RETURN PT-3 PT 3 OPEN TO OPEN TO SALTS REP�/\101 S 'LES AR 101 3'-0" WALL BUMPER @ 36"A.F.F. A DECORATIVE PENANT— SEE ELEC. 1 V-0" CEILING HT. OUTLET AND CABLE BOX MOUNTED 67" A.F.F., SIDE BY SIDE CENTERED ON WALL .l. T-0" PLASTIC LAMINATE COUNTERTOP BY NATIONAL VENDOR SEE DETAIL 3 A-9 VWB-1 COFFEE SERVICE BY NATIONAL VENDOR SEE DETAIL 2B A-9 PT-4 MWO 11'-0" T.O. CEILING 1� PT-3 —FOCAL WALL RETURN PT-3 -0" VWB-1 WALL BUMPER @ 36"A.F.F. PROVIDE BLOCKING FOR TV (FOR MIN. 175 Ibs. TV) @ 68" A.F.F., AND @ 86" A.F.F., SQUARED OFF WITH CABINET - OUTLET MOUNTED 27"-32" TVSIDEWAYS, 43 %4" A.F.F. (NIC) CENTERED ON WALL O- - 7.. - O /� EQ. EQ BOTTOM OF OUTLET PT-4 /II\ PT-4 @39"A. F.F. CV \ 2 tLCVH I IUn SCALE:1 /411=1' 5-0" 4'-6" MIN. 1'-0" 3'-6" MIN. O CT 6 4 2 � N 3'-0" MAX. A 4 ELEVAT�91� SCALE.1/4 0 T-0" MAX. J, A 5 ELEVATION SCALE.1/4 1 -0 ` WATER LINE TO BE 35" 4A A.F.F. CENTERED ON WALL A-9 I B Ar-K11 PT-4 7F VENDING VENDING MACHINE MACHINE (NIC) (NIC) 01 11'-0" OL 11'-0" CEILING CEILING 3'-4" 16-112" 20'-8" HT. HT. M.O. 10'-0" DECORATIVE CONDENSING UNIT PIPING TO--8'-3-1" 2 4'4" 14'-0" M.O. PENDANT / ENTER BUILDING AT PLUMBING WALL SEE DETAILS SHEET A-3 SEE ELEC. PT-4 \ 8'-0" 7'-0 GYP. BD. \ UNIFORM STORAGE � ® 6 PT 3CEILING 11s 110 EMPLOYEES A MENS 0 D N \%' 48" WALL MOUNTED A O O 111 4'-4" OP ZN TO FOCAL WALL RETURN SHELF WITH HANGER 7,�1„ - 7,_71„O O TO WITH STAND 400 2 r 2 4/A-7 L$-0" PT-1 20'-8" rIN LBS. OF FORCE. ti 2'-10" CID H LL ; PT-3 FRP SHOWN 3/A-7 B O --ii - / \ DASHED TO 106 C III' o a 8 -0 AFF O 5 105 VWB-1 VWB-1 \ QQ O ADA DOOR SIGNAGE SEE HI-LO DRINKING -n SHEET A-1 FOR MOU TING FOUNTAIN -SEE _ LUMBING 2 Q REQUIREMENTS 8'41" HALL #3 © o 2 113 8'-4" 5'-2" V-7" CLOCKERS BY A 6 ° WOMENS HALL #2 4'_5,, OTHERS, SHOWN r ty - 110 109 FOR REF. ONLY `_�N c 1 p 5/A-7 B COUNTER BY ERVI(SV SNATIONAL INK- EE p O ; i_ll VENDOR LUMB G C CT @ 4'-0" o J SEE - s 121 __ 5 A.F.F. U A-8 ~ I C0 CURVED FOCAL WAITING RM 8'. WALL TO BE O EHI CONTINUOUS OVER BULKHEAD PT-4 PT-4 PT-4 ORNER GUARDS COFFEE SERVICE `') AREA BELOW --- --- COUNTER BY ❑ \\ NATIC NRL CVEN 1 O "1 1 r B C 3 ELEVATI,O�I n EIMPLOYEES RI SCALE.1 /4 -1 -0 HI-LO DRINKING FOUNTAIN - SEE FRP PLUMBING o SERVICE bo e SINK - SEE PTI LUMBING M VWB- *__EL EVATION L #3 SCALE 1144 1 0 o SIN IA-6 bp 2/A-7 A LO 5 4A 5,4„ / 9 6 A -a 8 WALL BUMPER SHOWN DASHED A-9 2 V-5" 0 7 SEE DETAIL � co 6-CPJA-9 FOR HEIGHTS AND � DO PROVIDESMOOTH SALES 101 SPECS. `- 5/8" PLWOOD 42" TO - 6'-11" 3'-112" 48" WIDE TO 96" AFF 2A _ COMM. RM A-8 23 L ET 114 11 VENDING MACHINE BY — O OTHERS SHOWN 1'-112" 7V-8" co 122 FOR REF. ONLY 7 _�" 2 0 `" TRANSITION STRIP CORNER GUARDS 103 HALL #1 toe 3'_0�� O ji^O 4 3'1N MGR OFF I C 102 A-9 OI. 1os SERVICE MGR 107 10'-0" A-9 M1 3 6'-112" A-9 c------------ 111 SERVICE COUNTER AND MANAGER'S DESK BY NATIONAL VENDOR C II e V oQ ' U ' U NOTE: AT LEAST ONE OF ACH TYPE OF SALES COUNTERS IALL HAVE A V-7" o PORTION OF THE C DUNTER WHICH IS p 36" IN LENGTH, WIT I A MAXIMUM HEIGHT OF 36" A.F.F. THE ACCESSIBLE COUNTERS SHALL BE o ON AN ACCESSIBLE: ROUTE. r -4" 14'-0" M.O. r - a� Or D N SCALE:1 /411=11-011 2'-4" a O O (D 2'-4" H PROJECT NORTH TOILET ACCESSORIES 1I) MIRROR TOILET PAPER HOLDER, BY TENANT Q3 36" GRAB BAR 4 48" GRAB BAR 5 PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER, BY TENANT © BABY CHANGER, BY TENANT NOTE: 1. SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR MANUFACTURER. 2. TOILET ACCESSORIES TO BE PROVIDED BY TENANT AND INSTALLED BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR. 3. PROVIDE BLOCKING PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS 2 B A ) 1 '9 I' N ^ m S OCJNM � SMNM U�v s �;`° N L C Wes' tOL� �Lt M VIZ1 Um UN 1 ISSUE DATE 12-1-08 REV This drawing and the design shown is�tlie property of the architect. The reproduction, copying or use of this drawing without their written consent is prohibited and any infringement will be sub'ect to legal action. ENLARGED PLAN & INTERIOR ELEVATIONS Am7 8-STRAIGHT PROTOTYPE - REVISION 16 - 06-18-08 1VI II - ill n -. � � �Ti I T T ....ffi Ti ..isliCUi.l�G; FIRE ALA TO BE M( CLEAR O COMPRE AIR LINE CONNEC CENTERE COLUMN HYDRAUL LIFT LINE TO CONC HYDRAUL CONTROI RESERVC AT HEIGF ACCORDI MANUFAC INSTALLA INSTRUC- CONDUIT TO LIFT 1AUtIAIL QV 5t SCALE:1 /2"=1'-011 2A 5tL I IUN au k SCALE: 1 /211 = 1'-0" 18'-0" BEARING HEIGHT C� WWB/ o 0 nPT-2 i� FARING HEIGHT .L15'-4" YBOTTOM OF WALL DIFFUSER 14'-8" PAINT TRANSITION PT-4 HEAD E PULL I MOUNTED TENSIONER DUPLEX RCPT. GC TO PROVIDE POWER CORD AND PLUG NOTE: 1. CHAIN TENSION ERS TO BE WALL -MOUNTED @ 48" A.F.F. 2. ELECTRICAL RECEPTACLES TO BE MOUNTED @ 30" A.F.F. -3 5/8" MTL. STUD WALL, U.N.O. VERT.SHELF SUPPORT @ 32" O.C. 14"x3/4" MELAMINE SHELF WITH PLASTIC EDGE TRIM HEAVY DUTY METAL SHELF BRACKET (TYP.) PAINT INTERIOR OF SERVICE BAY AREA, INCLUDING DECK & JOISTS - PT-4 H a N F a SERVICE MANAGER — STATION -SEE 4 A-9 EXITSIG ELECTRIC E IT - r - I E i I !�}- --- - - I'=- I i c 4 I j 'b �'_ l - I I -! � � - I -- -- R — -- -._.__ -- q 5 li j -- �',,' M ---r ���C "� apt I A i ---------n ---- i - -e -- � - - r I J I, a s n--- -- -- n - -- — — 7 �-— 4A 1 — -- n 9 f n n � J d rl q a u G I ,I E i .a n :iii I I n s 'i f a nn ,' 'fifi 9 J v i V J ,� Q I1 �a a-' a 'vly l< 'V a lYlt:A i w G a w Its, I,I �E� v u �G G�, I� G 'a :'l�w r �, �(,, G�a PAINT INTERIOR OF SERVICE BAY AREA, INCLUDING DECK & JOISTS - PTA a a PAINT DOOR AND FRAME PT-2 4" EXHAUST OPENING PER MANUF. 1A A-8 1 tLtV/H I IUIN_� SCALE:3/16 ---------------------- ----------------------------------------------------- - --------------------------------- -- I I------ ice; ----------------------------------- - ----------- - --- ---- - ----- , SEE MECHANICAL J, �- J E - SERVICE BAY EQUIPMENT THIS AREA SEE ELECTRICAL PAINT DOOR AND WWB FRAME PT-2 \` \ PT-2 WOOD STUD STANDARD FOR '---PROVIDE 3/4" F.R. PLYWOOD B/C GRADE MIN. TO 8'-0" AFF WITH BLOCKING SMOOTH SIDE OUT, MOUNTING HOLES TO BE FILLED, SANDED AND SHELVES PAINTED. SEE DETAIL 1/A-9. 3'-0" X 3'-0" ACCESS PANE PAINTED TO MATCH ADJACENT WALL a - ------ - - / - - I WWB PROVIDE %" F.R. PLYWOOD B/C CORNER GUARD - SEE PT-2 GRADE MIN. TO 8'-0" AFF WITH SPECS SMOOTH SIDE OUT, MOUNTING HOLES TO BE FILLED, SANDED AND ELEVA�"�T�SNDE IL 1/g9ERVICE AREA/ T 3 SCALE:3/16"=1'-0" 0 N '-0- WIDE AREA \ROUND DISPLAY 8'-0° SOFFI IXTURE DESIGNATED ---- 'OR WALL PAPER. CLOCKING FOR RY DISPLAY @ IzTAF PT-1 O PEN EQ. 4'-0" EQ. 16'-8" BEARING HEIGHT PAINT INTERIOR OF SERVICE BAY AREA, INCLUDING DECK & JOISTS - PT-4 PAINT STRIPE PT-5 V-0" O SERVICE MANAGER STATION, BY NATIONAL VENDOR - SEE 4 A-9 18'-0" BEARING HEIGHT �16-8" BEARING HEIGHT PAINT INTERIOR OF - SERVICE BAY AREA, INCLUDING DECK & JOISTS - PT-4 PAINT STRIPE PT-5 -- -- ---- 8,_0„ FIRE SPRINKLER RISER - SEE PLUMBING L ---- EXHAUST OPENINGS - a SEE MECHANICAL --- - EXIT ----- a PAINT DOOR \ ME C� PVT 2B 14'-8" CURVED FOCAL WALL PAINT TRANSITION SOFFIT DESIGNATED FOR WALL WALL DIFFUS�TO 13'�" M.O. PAPER TO BE PT 4 BE PAINTED PT - 1 PT-3 INSTALLED BY G.C. SEE MECH WIDE AREA AR 4 AROUND DISPLAY FIXTURE DESIGNATED % \ FOR WALL PAPER.�T� / NOTE: WALLPAPER TO BE / \ SUPPLIED BY NTB AND PT 7 INSTALLED BY G.C. ON TO OPIi TO CURVED FOCAL WALL AN NG WAI ING AROUND SALES FIXTURES M R? M VWB-1 6 EVATION , ,I ELSALES SCALE:3/16 1 -0 SCALE:3-/16"=1' FLOURESCENT LIGHT FIXTURES, TYP.- SEE ELECT. NOTE: WALLPAPER TO BE SUPPLIED BY NTB AND INSTALLED BY G.C. ON CURVED FOCAL WALL A AROUND SALES FIXTURES n 18'-0" BEARING HEIGHT 2 FLOURESCENT LIGHT FIXTURES, TYP.- SEE ELECT. 4 2'-0" WIDE AREA AROUND DISPLAY FIXTURE DESIGNATED FOR WALL PAPER. SCALE:3/16"=1' CORNER GUARD - SEE SHEET A-15 PAINT STRIPE PT-5 8' 0" OIL B.O. BAND FIRE SPRINKLER RISER - SEE PLUMBING WWB PT-2 EXIT SIGN - SEE ELECTRICAL 8'-0" OIL PAINT TRANSITION - PAINT STRIPE PT-5 � I Ll LJ PAINT TRANSITION WALLPAPER TO B SUPPLIED BY NTB AND INSTALLED BY G.C. ON CURVED FOCAL WALL AN AROUND SALES FIXTURES FLOURESCENT LIGHT FIXTURES, TYP.- SEE ELECT. PT-1 STRUCTURE, DECK, JOISTS, AND WALLS IN SALES AREA 14'-B" PAINT TRANSITION ! EXIT PT-4 O PT-4 O PT-4 VWB-1 FIRE EXTINGUISHER PULL STATION & (PREFERRED LOCATION) ANUNCIATOR PANEL VERIFY WITH LOCAL A.H.J. (PREFERRED LOCATION) VERIFY WITH LOCAL A.H.J. $ LEV T1R=N , „ SALES SCALE.3116 -1 -0 8-STRAIGHT PROTOTYPE - REVISION 16 - 06-18-08 REV to � N Y � LLJ M IU- Z U p U F- +�UwpMos oLJ c L.0 Lr- I. : Q = LLI M M 3U FLU 0 ne ljO w Q N to OC IL Li ISSUE DATE 12-1-08 r This drawing and the design shown is the property of the architect. The reproduction, copying or use of this drawing without their written consent is prohibited and any infringement will be subject to legal action. INTERIOR ELEVATIONS Amig r6A 1 rraB-1 r6B-1 10..e.0114'-0"01�� .i� 6'-0" 10'-0" 6'-�"' 3'-6" `— 3"-6" -- 3,-6n 3,-52" 3'-5n 3'-52" � 3'-52" 9 SEE SEE SEE // // A-6.1 a SCHEDULE SCHEDULE SCHEDULE 3'-0" it '/ i°'-6 / / / / / 3'-0" g�_p�� c r66-4 BG-1 � PANE • A-6 0 0 0 6A 3ol 4'-s" ,per, /\ • 12 VISION PANEL ® o O 0 0 - m x BC-3 _ TEMP. GLASS q 0D o o o c = �/ A� _ Q -SEE iv it Z� / :v. r: \� z 5 w SCHEDULE ti ti „ cn _ :.<':::: ': �. z .. .. > a N 5/8" INSUL. AT LO FOR -0 1'-0 cm r // // // BB-2 �/ 6C-2 6B-2 // // N �? ❑ ❑ O = o EXTERIOR �/ �/ LOCATIONS / / / / A-s / / CO U w o DOORS in A=fi A-6 c ;n io I— H v H.M DOOR iz+ °D Zo O oo _ 2 -5 6B-4 s' 2 " �~oLU 4" EXHAUST A-6 A °� w tY Z O c OPENWG PER ® ® O T © A 6.1 ¢ = 3 O Z rri A B C D E F °Q��ce 6 -4 r6B3 r65B-3 T = TEMPERED GLAZING O *—QS 6CALE:1/4"=� -4!" A-6.1 �T = TENFERE9 G IG 6" 3,�„ s" + Y2" METAL STUD r ---------- 2E@ PAN E 01 If W/ e" GYP. BD. t ! 8"' SM BEAM -10 lk_5/8" GYP. BO. TYP. SEE STRUCTURAL � .F .. A s 'v • 1 RIGID FOAM INSULATION } CONT. 3 5i8" MTL. STUD WALL, CONT. SEALANT i.rJt..� 4 a a 4'-0" 5 CAULK U.N.O. f) L�IL_J�' ' a A' Ch CONT. CAULK TYPES- 6 - FRAMING CLIP SCALE:1 /4"=1 �-0" e DOME RABBETED - — — x _{>- m.M. FRAME, TYP. - BOND BEAM - DOUBLE RABBETED SEE DOOR SCHEDULE 5 o H.M. FRAME, TYP. FOR DOOR TYPE & SIZES iv SEE STRUCT. 13' 4" / MASON RY / H M DOOR SEALANT 601 O HEM ALUMINUM S ALANT AND O MfA� 8" GM6J TYP. F EQUAL EQUAL STOREFRONT CKER ROD WAITING ROOM/ 104 O HEAD 2 Y2' METAL STUDS 5/8" GYP. BD., TYP. COUNTER TOP AND W/ e" GYP. BD. --- -__-- r 3 5f8" MTL. STUD WALL, 3 "T" ANCHORS PER JAMB BACK SPLASH - P. LAIN. B 4 CONT. 4l.N.O. SEALANT AND CAULK GROUT SOLID OVER Y4" PLYWD. A-g CONT. CAULK COUNTER 8t SPLASH W/ 7'-0" BACKER ROD - 0 SEALANT B BEAM P. LAM EDGE �4N I BOND B G B DING m r, SEE STRUCT. N / Dt1LtBiE RABBETED - TO MATCH PL-1 N v EIFS SYSTEM DOUBLE RABBETED H.M. FRAME, TYP. rl > v z 4" METAL STUDS T.O.BEAM — — — — ° M o H.M. FRAME, TYP. 1X4 NAILERS (TYP.) 2�_©,� 17- F N m Krona o W/ 5" GYP. BD. i \ / v o v 8 FRAMING CLIPS x : E DOOR SCHEDULE FOR / z o H.M. DOOR CASE SIDES - MELAMINE „ I I / I I \ ; r Z 3 TUBE STEEL BEAM - PT-1 AT 4 POINTS x _ DOOR TYPE & SIZES DRAWER FRONT - a/4 MDF W/ - r ; o s SEE STRUCT. 0 JIB ON %4 MOF W/ PVC EDGE P. LAM. AND PVC EDGE ��N / \ _ o M z N d % 1" RIGID FOAM BAN®IiG TO MATCH BALDING TO MATCH PL-2 SEALANT 13'-4" O PL-2 % \ / `° o FRAMING CLIPS INSULATION ?- �I DRAWERS SIDES - 1/2" MDF ` 1" RIGID FOAM "' MASONRY OPNG - _ II TAI STUD r►AL� t rU .L CASE BACK - MELAMINE W/ MELAMINE TO MATCH INSULATION g 'jp16EAM SEALANT DRIP EDGE A B ON " HRDS-D. TO 1.® PL-2 SEALANT `\\ ALUMINUM SEALANT AND 7�.� �-2 o DRAWER E BOTTOMS 1T0 EQUAL EQUAL EQUAL QUAL • ALUMINUM STOREFRONTMOM a BACKER ROD n o � " L-2 SERVICE MANAGER/ 107 SCALE:1-1/2"-1 -0 SHELF - MDF/ MATCH ® @ STOREFRONT ST NE BEYOND MELAMINE AND PVC DOORS - P.LAM. ON 3/a O HEAD & SILL O HEAD EDGE BN�TING TO MDF BOTH SIDES W/ O MATCH PL-2 PVC EDGE BANDING TO A I j SURFACE MOUNTED MATCH PL-2 ALUMINUM STANDAHELF C CLIPS W/ RUBBER BASE 2 E+LEVATI,ONS, CASEWORK STOREFRONT 3" �7CALE:1/2 -1 -0 2X4 HAILERS LINE OF GYP. BD 7'�" T-0" S CT P. C SEWORK c WALL BEYOND A. .F. A.F.F. 5/8" GYP. BD. 4A SCA�L.E:3/4"=V-0" Z � 400 3 5/8" MTL. ALUM. ENTRY �� ALUMINUM STUDS NOTE: ' DOOR -SEE DOOR: , \ STOREFRONT COUNTER TOP AND AT FREESTANDING LOCATIONS, PROVIDE FINISHED SCHEDULE ONT. CAULK BACK SPLASH - P. LAM. BACK W/ P.LAM. OVER MDF EXPOSED AND J 1 - 8-0 HOLLOW METAL OVER /4 PLYWD. MELAMINE SEMI -EXPOSED TO MATCH PL-2 Ll � HEAD &SILL 2 HEAD & SILL T.O. WINDOW FRAME AND COUNTER & SPLASH W/ PROVIDE EDGE CONDITION AT TOP AND ELIMINATE _ O GLAZING STOP P. LAM EDGE BANDING BACKSPLASH I I = ALUMINUM TO MATCH PL-1 2 ' 11111. _ SEALANT ALUM. ENTRY STOREFRONT BOTH SIDLES LS-1 N k • DOOR -SEE DOOR SEALANT AND 1X4 HAILERS (TYP.) 2 W SEALANT s N BACKER ROD SCHEDULE � 3-METAL STUDS W/ %J r CASE SIDES - MELAMINE s n a FI DRAWER FRONT - /4 MDF W/ 5/8 GYP. BD. - ONE PT BLOCKING CAP STONE CUT TO FIT SILL ON 3%4 MDF W/ PVC EDGE P. LAM. AND PVC EDGE LAYER EACH SIDE STO�i BEYOND 5/8" GYP. BD. BALDING TO MATCH BANDING TO MATCH PL-2 THRESHOLD PL-2 CMU FLASHING DRAWERS SIDES - 1/2" MDF SEALANT CASE BACK - CONC. SLAB SIDEWALK 3'-4" ON �" HRDBDMTO MELAMINE 1'-0 r P / 2 ELAMIHE TO MATCH R.O. HOLLOW METAL C] ISSUE DATE 42" FRAME AND AT DRAWER BOTTOMS - Y4" 12-1-08 � B.O. WINDOW GLAZING STOP PL-2 HARDBO W/ MELAMINE TO F.F.EIP j BLOCKING - MATCH PL-2 �. < 3 5/8" MTL. STUD co / S U _ REV DATE WALL, U.N.O. _ n c� SHELF MDF W O SILL O SILL S � / 5/8" GYP. BD. MELAMINE AND PVC DOORS - P.LAM. ON Y4 8'-0" — EDGE BANDING TO MDF BOTH SIDE W � O S / Q2 SILL MATCH PL-2 fib PVC EDGE BANDING TO AI r MATCH PL-2 3/a' F.R. PLYWOOD �Yc'A • SURFACE MOUNTED - 0 GRADE MIN. SMOG P EIFS SYSTEM STANDARDS W/ SIDE OUT- MOUND 5f8 GYP. BD. ELF CLIPS e SHELF C I S RUBBER BASE H e. OLES TO BE FILLED, 1" RIGID FOAM 3" INSULATION 1" RIGID FOAM 3 5/8" MTL. STUD 2X4 HAILERS SEESANDINTER OR ED AND PAINTED - WALL, U.N.O.SECTIO TYP. C SEWORC 2 Yz" META L STUDS INSULATION _ ELEVATIONS FOR l �+ W/8" GYP. BD. eTCAE;3/4"=1 i�n STAGGERING CAULK r= SEALANT - - SEALANT AND 2'-0" BACKER ROD HOLLOW METAL ) SEALANT AND ALUMINUM GLa4ZFRAfNGSTOP PLAS.LAM. OVER 1 AND MGR. OFFICE ALUMINUM STOREFRONT LINE OF BACKER ROD PLYWOOD COUNTER & 2'-8 1/2" @ BREAKROOM STOREFRONT j _ CMU BELOW SEALANT SPLASH PL-1 2'-9" � MGR. OFF' 2X4 PRESSURE This drawing and the design shown is the ALUM. ENTRY LINE OF FLASHING 2'-10" a� WAITING ROOM property of the architect. The reproduction, DOOR -SEE DOOR O JAIL BELOW O JAB TREATED BASE copying or use of this drawing without their written consent is prohibited and any 1 X4 NA16ERS (TYP.) _ A.F.F. infringement will be subject to legal action. SCHEDULE FOR B STORfFROhIT WINDOW INTERIOR SUPPORT BEYOND = DETAILS HEIGHTS a - WINDOW �E���ILS....- O JAMB ,_S CT O(�CR. OFF. / BR OOI�II WALL E - ��9 SCALE:1-1121 0 3 SECTION TIRE RACKS (D777 NT DOOR SCA�L.E:3/4"=1 �-®" SCALE: 3/4"=V-0" 8-STRAIGHT PROTOTYPE - REVISION 16 - 06-18-08 I 21-011 21-011 *A - 6" PVC STUB UP TO LIFT *B - (2)- 211 PVC TO PUMP FOR ELECTRICAL AND AIR *USE MIN. 6" DIA BENDS AT ALL RADII ALIGNMENT RACK LIFT 21-0" UU W z� z�J UL - J Gfl X J x CL CN �- 0 p..- CN � � z U. � U U 1 01�0r1 M.O. FA ECG. 1 ECG. I �Abl� PAD LIFT 18 21_0" A E 9#1 PAD LIFT 18 *A - 2 " PVC STUB UP TO LI-FT *'USE LONG RADIUS FITTINGS In 21-8 r1 W zU �CL ' LLJ - r' UJ O U 21-011 21-011 co1 N *A - 1 1/2" PVC STUB UP TO LIFT *B - CENTERLINE OF 1 1/2" PVC TO PUMP C - TRENCH AREA - SEE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS *USE MIN.6" DIA BENDS AT ALL RADII TWO POST,LIFT 1V. �r0fle •q-�r� �n � N �c o M E I— J Z U O U F-�s cnU too, ma H w Q O M M tv U w W < N to m d ti a ISSUE DATE 12-1-08 REV I DATE This drawing and the design shown is the property of the architect. The reproduction, copying or use of this drawing without their written consent is prohibited and any infringement will be subject to legal action. UNDERGROUND LIFT CONDUIT tst 8—STRAIGHT PROTOTYPE — REVISION 16 — 06-18-08 A=10 01110 -SUMMARY OF WORK . PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE: A. The Work of this Contract shall include the furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat utilities, transportation, insurance, taxes, superintendent, coordination and miscellaneous services required for the construction and completion of the Work, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated into the Work. All Work shall be performed in strict accordance with the Contract Documents. B. In the event of conflict within the Contract Documents or within these Specifications, the provisions of the more stringent, as determined by the Owner's Representative, shall govern. 1.02 WORK OF OTHER RELATED SECTIONS: A. All other Sections and documents contained herein also including the Contract Drawings. 1.03 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES: A. During the entire period of construction, their business owners (outside this contract) will occupy immediately adjacent space to conduct their normal operations. Cooperate all construction operations to minimize conflict and to facilitate their usage of their businesses. 1. Contractor shall have complete and exclusive use of the immediate premises for execution of the Work. 2. Contractor shall at all times conduct his operations as to insure the least inconvenience and the greatest amount of safety and security for adjoining business owners and the general public. 3. Confine operations at site to areas permitted by law ordinances, permits and Contract Documents. 4. Do not unreasonably encumber site with materials or equipment. 5. Do not load structure, new or existing, with weight that will endanger structure. 1.04SITE INVESTIGATION: A. The Contractor acknowledges that he has satisfied himself as to the nature and location of the Work, the general and local conditions, particularly those bearing upon transportation, disposal, handling and storage of materials, availability of labor, water, electric power, roads and uncertainties of weather, ground water table or similar physical conditions at the site, the conformation and condition of the ground, existing conditions of all structures, improvements, building systems, etc., the character, quality and quantity of surface and subsurface materials to be encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed prior to and during the prosecution of the Work, the impact and extent of the work on existing structures, equipment and systems, and all other matters which can in any way affect the Work or the cost thereof under this Contract. Any failure by the Contractor to acquaint himself with all the available information concerning these conditions will not relieve him from responsibility for estimating properly the difficulty or cost of successfully performing the Work. 1.05HAZARDOUS MATERIALS: A. Do not incorporate in the Work hazardous materials or products as currently defined in the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act of 1976 (RCRA), the Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation, and Liability Act of 1980 (CERCLA), or Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) regulations, rules, or requirements, as amended, unless the Contract Documents give no other option than to provide a material or product which contains a hazardous material, component, constituent, waste, or leach. B. In studying the Contract Documents and carrying out the Work, report in writing at once to the Owner's Representative the discovery of a product or material (whether new or already existing on the Project) which contains hazardous materials, components, constituents, waste, or leachate. C. Do not incorporate in the Work a product or material which contains concentrations of a constituent, component, or material above the threshold levels which would require adherence to hazardous waste disposal regulations as currently defined, or could cause a release or threat or release of a hazardous substance at a level that would require a remedial response or removal action as currently defined by RCRA, CERCLA, or the EPA. D. Select materials and products meeting specified requirements that comply with EPA requirements as regards hazardous materials content. In making requests for substitutions, determined that materials and products proposed for substitution comply with RCRA, CERCLA, and EPA requirements. 1.06PARTIAL OWNER OCCUPANCY: A. The Owner reserves the right of partial occupancy or use of facilities, services, and utilities, prior to Substantial Completion, without implying completion or acceptance of any part of the Project. B. The Contractor shall provide access to the building for the Owner's personnel plus provide the correct operation of the heating, ventilating, and air conditioning, and electrical system. C. Necessary restoration and repair of damage resulting from partial occupancy or use shall not be at the expense of the Contractor. D. The Contractor shall also permit the Owner to place and install, or to have other Contractors place and install, as much equipment during the progress of the Work as is possible before the final acceptance of the various parts of the Work, and shall coordinate such placing and installation of the equipment, so that it does not in any way whatever interfere with the progress of the Work or any portion of it. 1.07PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS FOR NEW AND EXISTING CONSTRUCTION: A. Protect the existing building from wind, storms, cold heat, water and dust damage of any sort. Provide all equipment and enclosures to maintain this protection and keep the building interior free of water and dust during the life of the Contract. B. Provide all shoring and bracing required to maintain the integrity and the safety of the existing structure and for the proper execution of the Work. C. Exercise the utmost care to protect all existing utility lines from damage during the progress of the Work. D. Provide and erect before any work begins, and maintain during the progress of the Work, all necessary fences, warning signals, signs and lights. Extent of this work and details of construction shall be in accordance with the requirements of all state and local codes. E. Any portion of the existing building or existing utility services not included as part of this Contract or any portion of the Work damaged because of failure to provide the protection required shall be removed and replaced with new materials and construction at the Contractor's expense. This work shall be accomplished subject to the Owner's Representative's and Owner's approval. 1.08REPLACEMENT AND REPAIR OF ANY STRUCTURES THAT HAVE BEEN DESTROYED IN THE PROGRESS OF THE WORK: A. Because of the installation of the new items of equipment, fixtures, materials, etc., that are required by this Project, it shall become necessary to remove portions of the existing structure, equipment, and/or utility services. Unless specifically noted otherwise on the Drawings, the Contractor shall be responsible for replacing, in a condition of identical appearance, construction, design, working order, and strength as its previous state, any such portion of the existing structure, equipment, and/or utility services so required to be disturbed. The replaced item shall meet the approval of the Owner's Representative before final approval of the Project is given. 1.09RECORD DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS: A. General: As work progresses, prepare and maintain record documents as specified herein. Each record shall be certified by the Contractor. Do not use record documents for construction purposes; protect from deterioration and loss in a secure, fire -resistive location accessible to the Owner's Representative for reference during normal working hours. Upon completion, turn record documents over to the Owner's Representative. B. Record drawings: Maintain a white -print set (blue -line or black -line) of contract drawings (including amendment and change order drawings) and shop drawings in clean, undamaged condition, with mark-up of actual installations which vary from the work as originally shown. Mark whichever drawing is most capable of showing "field" condition fully and accurately; however a cross-reference at corresponding location on working drawings. Mark with red erasable pencil and, where feasible, use other colors to distinguish between variations in separate categories of work. Mark-up new information which is recognized to be of importance, but was for some reason not shown on either contract drawings or shop drawings. Give particular attention to concealed work, which would be difficult to measure and record at a later date. Note related change order number where applicable. Organize record drawing sheets into manageable sets, bind with durable paper cover sheets, and print suitable titles, dates and other identification on cover of each set. C. Record specification: Maintain one copy of specifications, including amendments, change orders and similar notifications issued in printed form during construction, and mark-up variations in actual work in comparison with text of specifications and modifications as issued. Give particular attention to substitutions, selection of options, and similar Information on work where it is concealed or cannot otherwise be readily discerned at a later date by direct observation. Note related record drawing information and product data, where applicable. D. Record product data, certifications and laboratory test reports: Maintain one copy of each product data submittal, product certification, and laboratory test report and mark-up significant variations in actual work in comparison with submitted information. Include both variations in product as delivered to site, and variations from manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation. Give particular attention to concealed products and portions of the work that cannot otherwise be readily discerned at a later date by direct observation. Note related change orders and mark-up of record drawings and specifications.. E. Record sample submittal: Immediately prior to date(s) of substantial completion, the Owner's Representative or his designated representatives will meet with Contractor at the site, and will determine which (if any) of submitted samples maintained by Contractor during progress of the work are to be retained by the Owner. Comply with the Owner's Representative's instructions for packaging, identification marking, and delivery. 101330 - S U B ICI I TTALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: A. Work included: 1. Wherever possible, throughout the Contract Documents, the minimum acceptable quality of workmanship and materials has been defined either by manufacturer's name and catalog number or by reference to recognized industry standards. 2. To ensure that the specified products are furnished and installed in accordance with the design intent, procedures have been established for advance submittal of design data and for its review and approval or rejection by the Architect. B. Submittal schedule: Within 15 days of the date of the Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall provide to NATIONAL TIRE & BATTERY and the Architect a complete schedule of when each proposed submittal shall be made. Provide anticipated submittal dates and correlation to the project progress. Form of schedule shall be satisfactory to NATIONAL TIRE & BATTERY and the Architect. PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. Unless otherwise specifically directed by the Architect, make all Shop Drawings accurately to a scale sufficiently large to show all pertinent features of the item and its method of connection to the Work. B. 4 blue line prints shall be submitted of each shop drawing. After the shop drawing has been reviewed and stamped, the print will be filed at the office of the Architect, and one copy returned to the Contractor, from which he shall make as many copies as he feels is needed for the prosecution of the Work. The Architect will not return multiple copies of shop drawings. 2.02 PRODUCT DATA: A. The Architect will require a minimum of 4 copies to be submitted of Product Data which has not been originally prepared on a transparent material. The Architect will retain 1 of these copies, plus any of the others that are required by his consultants, the Architect will return only one copy of submittals to the Contractor from which he shall make as many copies as he feels is needed for the Work. B. Information not exclusively pertinent to the Project shall be deleted so that there is no possible area of confusion as to what product, series, or model is to be examined. The Architect or Owner will not take responsibility for having examined a product that was not intended by the Contractor to be judged. 2.03 SAMPLES, MOCKUPS, AND COLORS: A. Unless otherwise specifically directed by the Architect, all Samples and Mockups shall be of the precise article proposed to be furnished. B. Samples and mockups shall faithfully represent the product or the assembly as it is proposed to be installed. This shall include, but not be limited to, materials, finishes, method of construction or assembly, relationship to adjacent construction, method of attachment to adjacent construction, plus any electrical or mechanical connection that are required for the product or assembly to function. C. Unless the precise color and pattern is specifically described in the Contract Documents, whenever a choice of color or pattern is available in a specified product submit accurate color charts and pattern charts to the Architect for his review and selection. D. Samples and color charts shall be physical specimens of materials or colors proposed to be provided. Selections and approval of samples will be made by the Architect from these submitted samples and color charts, without increase in costs to the Owner or Architects. Should the Contractor desire a sample returned, he shall submit a sufficient number in order for the Architect to retain one 1 sample and return the remainder to the Contractor. E. In order for the Architect to make a color schedule as quickly as possible and to avoid delivery and pricing problems, the Contractor shall be required to submit all items that require a color selection within 40 days of the Notice to Proceed. Delivery and pricing problems that develop because an item was not submitted within the forty (40) day time limit, shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor and not that of the Owner. F. The color selection on any one item will not be made until after samples of all items that require a color selection have been submitted. 2.04 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION MANUALS: A. Provide information for the Owner's maintenance of each system or operating equipment, including, but not limited to, lubrication, emergency control, parts replacement, spare parts inventory recommendation, listing of tools and accessories needed for maintenance and similar instructions, TAB test reports and other test reports, and including warranty and requirements indicated throughout the Specification. B. Provide manufacturer's operating instructions for each item of mechanical equipment and supplement with additional instructions where necessary. Prepare and submit specific operating instructions for each mechanical system which involves multiple items of equipment, including instructions for charging, start-up, control or sequencing or operation, phase or seasonal variations, shut -down, safety, and similar operational instructions. Prepare in typewritten form, completely explained and easily understood. C. Organize each maintenance manual to include an index followed by thumb tab marked sections for system operating instructions; emergency instructions including addresses and telephone numbers for service sources; regular system maintenance procedures including lubrication; spare parts listing and stocking recommendations, inspection, adjusting, re-baloncing, cleaning, parts replacement, and similar maintenance instructions and recommendations. Manuals shall also include the proper use of tools and accessories; valve schedules and control diagram for each system; manufacturer's data for each operational item in each system; manufacturer's product warranties, and warranties relating to system and equipment items as part of the Work; shop drawings relating to the system, test reports, and Project Record Documents. Bind each maintenance manual in one or more black vinyl covered, 2" thick, three ring binder, plus pocket folder type binders for folded drawings, and mark the back spine of each binder with system identification and volume number. 2.05 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL: A. Prior to submitting shop drawings, assure that equipment proposed for use will fit into space available, considering space for coil removal, filter service, maintenance, and other activities required to keep equipment operating in proper manner. B. Note in "red" all deviations in electrical and/or mechanical arrangement from that indicated, including, but not limited to, such items as electrical loads, electrical connections and physical size. It is understood when submittal is received that all items that effect other trades have been coordinated with those trades. C. Submittal data shall include, but is not limited to the following: 1. Arrangement drawings with complete dimensional data. 2. Performance data listing the following: a. Capacities, CFM, GPM, entering and leaving air and water conditions, pressure losses for air and water side and all component pressure losses. b. Horse power, KW, and total unit electrical requirements. C. Fan curves, discharge arrangement, motor locations, sheaves and belt data. d. Power and control wiring diagrams, showing interlock requirements. e. Isolators and isolator location with selection data. f. Filter data with type, size number required and pressure drop. g. Auxiliary equipment by other manufacturers: Provide name, capacity, dimensions, wiring diagrams and power requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 THE CONTRACTOR'S DUTIES: A. The Contractor shall review, stamp with his approval and submit, with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the work of the Owner or any separate contractor, all submittals required by the Contract Documents. Submittals will not be examined unless it is plainly evident that the Contractor has himself reviewed and approved the material. He shall legibly mark and date each item submitted indicating his approval of the submission. Under no circumstances will material be examined that comes to the Architect directly from a Subcontractor. Any deviations from the Contract Documents shall be clearly and legibly indicated by circling with red ink or highlighting in yellow. B. By approving and submitting submittals, the Contractor represents that he has determined and verified all materials, field measurements, and field construction criteria related thereto, or will do so, and that he has checked and coordinated the information contained within such submittals with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents. C. The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for any deviation from the requirements of the Contract Documents by the Architect's approval of submittals unless the Contractor has specifically informed the Architect in writing of such deviation at the time of submission and the Architect has given written approval to the specific deviation. The Contractor shall not be relieved from responsibility for errors or omissions in the submittals by the Architect's approval thereof. D. Verbal discussion between the Contractor and the Owner or the Architect of a proposed deviation and any subsequent agreements thereto shall not be considered valid unless confirmed in writing by the Owner or the Architect. E. The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted submittals, to revisions other than those requested by the Architect on previous submittals. F. Wherever any product is specified in accordance with the Federal Specifications, an ASTM Standard, a United States Standard Specification, or other association standard, the Contractor shall present an affidavit from the manufacturer certifying that the product complies with the particular standard specification. Where necessary and requested or specified, support test data shall be submitted to substantiate compliance. 3.03 SUBMITTAL LOG: A. Maintain an accurate submittal log for the duration of the construction period, showing status of all submittals of all types. . B. Provide Contractor generated submittal matrix of all submittals with date each item shall be submitted. C. Make the log and submittal matrix available to the Architect for review upon request. 3.04 COORDINATION OF SUBMITTALS: A. Prior to submittal for Architect's review, use all means necessary to fully coordinate all material, including, but not limited to, the following procedures: 1. Determine and verify all field dimensions and conditions, catalog numbers, and similar data. 2. Coordinate as required with all Trades and will all public agencies involved. 3. Secure all necessary approval from public agencies and others; signify by stamp or other means that all required approvals have been obtained. 4. Clearly indicate, in writing, all deviations from the Contract Document. B. Mechanical and electrical coordination: 1. Provide coordination of ductwork, waste, vent, pipes and conduit, as necessary to provide ceiling heights required. Provide necessary information to Architect if relocation of services and/or ceiling height changes will have to be made. 2. Provide scaled equipment layout of mechanical room showing dimensioned equipment pads; floor drain locations; sleeve locations; and equipment location showing required code or service clearance. 3.05 SUBMITTAL SEQUENCE: A. The right is reserved by the Architect to examine submittals and samples in a proper sequence that reflects the logical sequence of erection, installations, and proper assembly. Submittals of products or materials that are the responsibility of separate Trades yet must be assembled in conjunction one with another, shall be submitted at the some time so that they may be examined all together. Should these not be submitted simultaneously, the Architect reserves the right to hold one set while awaiting the arrival of other submittals. B. All submittals within the responsibility of one Trade must be submitted at one time together (i.e. Millwork). Numerous submittals of one product or item of construction over a period of time is not acceptable. In the event of this occurrence, the Architect will hold the submittal data arriving first until the last of the material has arrived. Then, and only then, will he make his examination. 3.06 TIMING OF SUBMITTALS: A. Make all submittals far enough in advance of scheduled dates for installation to provide all required time for reviews, for securing necessary approvals, for possible revision and re -submittals, and for placing orders and securing delivery. B. Costs of delays occasioned by tardiness of submittals may be back -charged as necessary and shall not be borne by the Owner. 3.07 EXAMINATION OF SUBMITTALS: A. Architect's review shall be for general conformance with the design concept and Contract Documents. Markings or comments shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor from compliance with the Drawings and Specifications, nor departures therefrom. The Contractor remains responsible for details and accuracy, for confirming and correlating all quantities and dimensions, for selecting fabrication processes, for techniques of assembly, and for performing his work in a safe manner. B. The Architect will stamp, sign and date each submittal after his review. The stamp will inform the Contractor as to whether the submittal has been approved, rejected, or whether the revisions are required. When the Architect has marked the submittals, "Revise & Resubmit", or word of similar impart, the Contractor shall cause the corrections to be made to the original and shall then proceed for a new submission. C. The Contractor shall not under any circumstances remove any comments, notes, or drawings made by the Architect on the submittals that have been reviewed and stamped by the Architect. Should a conflict develop, the Contractor shall contact the Architect for instruction. D. If the Contractor finds indicated changes to cause a conflict in conjunction with present construction and/or products to be installed at a later date, he must notify the Architect and ask for verification. Should the Contractor not ask for a verification, he shall continue with the construction involving or relating to that product at his own risk. 3.08 COMPOSITE DRAWINGS: A. In instances where submittals affect the Work of more than one Trade and/or when directed by the Architect, the Contractor sha►i prepare and submit composite drawings which indicate and define the Work under oil affected Trades, and obtain the approval of the Architect. Upon receipt of final approval, the Contractor shall distribute print copies of the approved drawings to all affected Trades All affected Trades shall cooperate in the preparation of the composite drawings to assure proper coordination. 01500 -TEMPORARY FACILITIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. The Contractor shall pay ail energy costs for the temporary electricity, heat and ventilation used for the Work of the Project. This shall include the costs of installation and maintenance of temporary equipment, which costs shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall remove all temporary equipment at the end of each work phase. B. Use of alternate temporary facilities is Contractor's option, subject to the Architect's acceptance. C. Comply with Federal, State and local codes/regulations. 1.02 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY AND LIGHTING A. Temporary lighting and power shall be of adequate size to properly service the requirements of the Work, including adequate feeder sizes to prevent excessive voltage drop. Temporary work to be installed in a neat and safe manner in accordance with the National Electrical Code, Article 305, and as required by OSHA or applicable local safety codes. Panelboard shall be equipped with ground tault and be tested daily to ensure proper tunction of ground tault. B. Provide approved construction type power cords or approved wiring as necessary for the performance of this work. Power cords or wiring that does not comply with codes/regulations will not be allowed under any circumstances. C. If higher voltages are required, make arrangements with local electric power company, make connections to primary source, and pay installation fees and meter charges. D. The Contractor will see to the provisions of temporary lighting for construction operations. E. Permanent lighting may be used during construction. 1.03 TEMPORARY HEAT AND VENTILATION A. The Contractor shall make provisions for the use of the permanent system at the appropriate time. B. Equipment used for temporary heat must meet all safety requirements and be in compliance with local codes and regulations. C. The temporary electrical service shall not be used for temporary heating. 1.04 TEMPORARY TELEPHONE SERVICE A. The Contractor shall provide telephone service for his and the Architect's use. 1.05 TEMPORARY WATER A. The Contractor shall make provisions for temporary water service required for construction operations. B. Provide branch piping, hoses for their own use. C. Be responsible for providing drinking water in approved sanitary containers and disposable cups for their workers. 1.06 SANITARY FACILITIES A. Make provisions for temporary toilet facilities for the use of all contractors. 1.07CONSTRUCTION AIDS A. Provide hoisting equipment, scaffolding, etc. as needed to properly perform this work. 1.08 PUMPING AND DEWATERING A. Provide and operate drainage and pumping equipment as may be necessary for the proper performance of this work. In doing so he must maintain the site, the construction work area and adjacent areas free from water resulting from their operation. 1.09 BARRICADES A. Make provisions for barricades to surround the areas of work. Maintain these barricades when the operations are adjacent to and confined within these barricades. Should the Contractor find it necessary to remove a portion of the barricades in the performance of his operations, then the Contractor shall provide all necessary warnings, temporary guard rails and other safety measures required, and shall place the temporary barricade back to its proper conditions as soon as practical, but in any case at the end of each work day. Should the Contractor fail to replace the barricade as required, then the Architect, if he deems it necessary, may do so without notice to the Contractor, and charge the Contractor the full cost thereof. B. Provide barricades and warning lights at locations where their operations present a hazard to the Owner. 1.10 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION A. Provide a project identification sign designed by the Architect or Owner. B. Other signs will not be permitted. 1.11 FIELD OFFICE AND SHEDS A. Provide a temporary field office for Contractor's, the Owner and the Architect's use. B. Provide a weather tight structure, with heat and ventilation for products requiring controlled conditions, with adequate space for organized storage and access, and lighting for inspection of stored materials. C. The location, appearance and type of temporary field office and storage facilities must be approved by the Architect prior to its use. 1.13 SITE SECURITY A. In addition to placing the permanent fire protection facilities in operating condition at the earliest feasible date, provide fire extinguishers of types and sizes recommended by NFPA No. 10 for the general construction areas. The extinguishers will be located on each story of construction, near each entrance and stairway. B. Provide similar fire extinguishers for specific areas of work. C. Smoking will not be allowed except in marked, non -hazardous areas. D. Employ and pay for watchman services as he deems appropriate and necessary. 1.14 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Be wholly responsible for the protection of the finished Work, except to the extent covered by Property Insurance to be maintained by Owner. B. Upon completion of the Work and before acceptance, the Contractor shall, without extra compensation, repair an/or refinish his work that may have been damaged. 1.15 REMOVAL A. Be responsible for the removal of temporary materials, equipment, services, and construction at such time as to allow the work on the Project to proceed according to the established Construction Schedule. B. Repair damage caused by installation and use of temporary facilities. C. Restore existing facilities used during construction to specified or to original condition. 01630 - SUBSTITUTIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES S� A. Requirements for requesting approval of proposed substitutions. 40,46�e ii B. The requirements of this section govern the use of "Substitution Request Form - Section �ye�� 01631" available upon request from architect. e 1.02 LIMITATIONS ON SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions will not be considered unless the "Substitution Request Form - Section 01631" available upon request from architect is used and the requirements of this section and Section 01631 are fully complied with. Other types of forms are not acceptable. B. Substitutions will not be considered when indicated on shop drawings or product data submittals without separate formal request complying with "submittal procedures" specified in this section. C. Substitutions will not be considered unless submitted through the Contractor. D. If the Contractor proposes to substitute any material, fixtures, article, device, method of construction, arrangement of components, or other items that differ from that called for in the Contract Documents, he shall include all costs involved including work required by other contractors or subcontractors affected by the substitution. 1. The Contractor shall additionally include cost for additional studies, investigation, submittals, redesign and/or analysis that is necessitated by the Owner, his representative, or the Architect. 2. Provide drawings, cuts, manufacturer's information, performance data and all other information necessary for evaluation. E. Substitute products shall not be ordered or installed * 09i'tW01UP")9QrF@_0VISION 16 - 06-18-08 Ln � N Y O^ M E I- J Z U C) ~��s _ U +�U pM°'s U ,.o 0 U ce Z ^ C Ce I- Q C) 3: M M N ¢=3-ZLU L, + "^ M ' y�� y 7 E�"''D - c m� �, � c, a I S y N M ��r% � M N M rj ,�CCcc a v - v0 E� zu,= � 5 6,0 CY 6j�u �M- U G) _C C Z� �,o ISSUE DATE 12-1-08 REV 0 This drawing and the design shown is the property of the architect. The reproduction, copying or use of this drawing without their written consent is prohibited and any infringement will be subject to legal action. SPECIFICATIONS Amll 01110 -SUMMARY OF WORK to substitutions, selection of options, and similar information on work where it is concealed or PART 3 - EXECUTION ground fault and be tested daily to ensure proper function of ground fault. PART 1 - GENERAL cannot otherwise be readily discerned at a later date by direct observation. Note related record drawing information and product data, where applicable. 3.01 THE CONTRACTOR'S DUTIES: B. Provide approved construction type power cords or approved wiring as necessary for the 1.01 SCOPE: performance of this work. Power cords or wiring that does not comply with codes/regulations will D. Record product data, certifications and laboratory test reports: Maintain one copy of each product A. The Contractor shall review, stamp with his approval and submit, with reasonable promptness and not be allowed under any circumstances. A. The Work of this Contract shall include the furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment, tools, data submittal, product certification, and laboratory test report and mark-up significant variations in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the work of the Owner or any separate construction equipment and machinery, water, heat utilities, transportation, insurance, taxes, in actual work in comparison with submitted information. Include both variations in product as contractor, all submittals required by the Contract Documents. Submittals will not be examined C. If higher voltages are required, make arrangements with local electric power company, make superintendent, coordination and miscellaneous services required for the construction and completion delivered to site, and variations from manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for unless it is plainly evident that the Contractor has himself reviewed and approved the material. He connections to primary source, and pay installation fees and meter charges. of the Work, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be installation. Give particular attention to concealed products and portions of the work that cannot shall legibly mark and date each item submitted indicating his approval of the submission. Under incorporated into the Work. All Work shall be performed in strict accordance with the Contract otherwise be readily discerned at a later date by direct observation. Note related change orders no circumstances will material be examined that corner to the Architect directly from a D. The Contractor will see to the provisions of temporary lighting for construction operations. Documents. and mark-up of record drawings and specifications. Subcontractor. Any deviations from the Contract Documents shall be clearly and legibly indicated by circling with red ink or highlighting in yellow. E. Permanent lighting may be used during construction. • B. In the event of conflict within the Contract Documents or within these Specifications, the provisions E. Record sample submittal: Immediately prior to date(s) of substantial completion, the Owner's of the more stringent, as determined by the Owner's Representative, shall govern. Representative or his designated representatives will meet with Contractor at the site, and will B. By approving and submitting submittals, the Contractor represents that he has determined and 1.03 TEMPORARY HEAT AND VENTILATION determine which (if any) of submitted samples maintained by Cantractor during progress of the verified all materials, field measurements, and field construction criteria related thereto, or will do 1.02 WORK OF OTHER RELATED SECTIONS: work are to be retained by the Owner. Comply with the Owner's Representative's instructions for so, and that he has checked and coordinated the information contained within such submittals with A. The Contractor shall make provisions for the use of the permanent system at the appropriate time. packaging, identification marking, and delivery. the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents. V) N A. All other Sections and documents contained herein also including the Contract Drawings. B. Equipment used for temporary heat must meet all safety requirements and be in compliance with Y o 01330 -SUBMITTALS C. The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for any deviation from the requirements of local codes and regulations. = M E 1.03 CONTRACTORS USE OF PREMISES: the Contract Documents by the Architects approval of submittals unless the Contractor has � � Z ° specifically informed the Architect in writing of such deviation at the time of submission and the C. The temporary electrical service shall not be used for temporary heating. 0 U 1- s PART 1-GENERAL P Y 9 = Ce -� U A. During the entire period of construction, their business owners (outside this contract) will occupy Architect has given written approval to the specific deviation. The Contractor shall not be relieved + v, U 0 rn M 1.04 TEMPORARY TELEPHONE SERVICE i_ M o � immediately adjacent space to conduct their normal operations. Cooperate all construction 1.01 DESCRIPTION: from responsibility for errors or omissions in the submittals by the Architect's approval thereof. Ln w C Z C) ^ -0 operations to minimize conflict and to facilitate their usage of their businesses. Q M M a, 1. Contractor shall have complete and exclusive use of the immediate premises for execution of A. Work included: proposed A. The Contractor shall provide telephone service for his and the Architects use. Q - U, z 3 D. Verbal discussion between the Contractor and the Owner or the Architect of a ro osed deviation = ,1, L" and an subse cent agreements thereto shall not be considered valid unless confirmed in writing b U Cs - W - the Work. 1. Wherever possible, throughout the Contract Documents, the minimum acceptable unlit of Y q 9 9 Y , D IY � � P g P quality 1.05 TEMPORARY WATER 0 2. Contractor shall at all times conduct his operations as to insure the least inconvenience and workmanship and materials has been defined either by manufacturer's name and catalog the Owner or the Architect. W ¢ N V) m IZ Li- the greatest amount of safety and security for adjoining business owners and the general number or by reference to recognized industry standards. A. The Contractor shall make provisions for temporary water service required for construction public. 2. To ensure that the specified products are furnished and installed in accordance with the E. The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted submittals, to revisions 3. Confine operations at site to areas permitted b law ordinances permits and Contract P P other than those requested b the Architect on previous submittals. operations. P P Y � P design intent, procedures have been established far advance submittal of design data and for q Y Documents. its review and approval or rejection by the Architect. B. Provide branch piping, hoses for their own use. 4. Do not unreasonably encumber site with materials or equipment. F. Wherever any product is specified in accordance with the Federal Specifications, an ASTM P P g� 5. Do not load structure, new or existing, with weight that will endanger structure. B. Submittal schedule: Within 15 days of the date of the Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall Standard, a United States Standard Specification, or other association standard, the Contractor shall Y C. Be responsible for providing drinking water in approved sanitary containers and disposable cups for provide to NATIONAL TIRE & BATTERY and the Architect a complete schedule of when each proposed present an affidavit from the manufacturer certifying that the product complies with the particular their workers. + 1.04SITE INVESTIGATION: submittal shall be made. Provide anticipated submittal dates and correlation to the project standard specification. Where necessary and requested or specified, support test data shall be A. The Contractor acknowledges that he has satisfied himself as to the nature and location of the progress. Form of schedule shall be satisfactory to NATIONAL TIRE & BATTERY and the Architect. submitted to substantiate compliance. 1.06 SANITARY FACILITIES Work, the general and local conditions, particularly those bearing upon transportation, disposal, PART 2 - PRODUCTS 3.03 SUBMITTAL LOG: A. Fake provisions for temporary toilet facilities for the use of all contractors. handling and storage of materials, availability of labor, water, electric power, roads and uncertainties 4 of weather, ground water table or similar physical conditions at the site, the conformation and 2.01 SHOP DRAWINGS: A. Maintain an accurate submittal log for the duration of the construction period, showing status of condition of the ground, existing conditions of all structures, improvements, building systems, etc., all submittals of all types. 1.07CONSTRUCTION AIDS the character, quality and quantity of surface and subsurface materials to be encountered, the A. Unless otherwise specifically directed by the Architect, make all Shop Drawings accurately to a A. Provide hoisting equipment, scaffolding, etc. as needed to properly perform this work. character of equipment and facilities needed prior to and during the prosecution of the Work, the scale sufficiently large to show all pertinent features of the item and its method of connection to B. Provide Contractor generated submittal matrix of all submittals with date each item shall be impact and extent of the work on existing structures, equipment and systems, and all other the Work. submitted. 1.08 PUMPING AND DEWATERING matters which can in any way affect the Work or the cost thereof under this Contract. Any failure by the Contractor to acquaint himself with all the available information concerning these conditions B. 4 blue line prints shall be submitted of each shop drawing. After the shop drawing has been C. Make the log and submittal matrix available to the Architect for review upon request. will not relieve him from responsibility for estimating properly the difficult or cost of successful) P P g• P g A. Provide and operate drainage and pumping equipment as may be necessary for the proper P Y g P P Y Y Y reviewed and stamped, the print will be filed at the office of the Architect, and one copy returned performance of this work. In doing so he must maintain the site, the construction work area and performing the Work. to the Contractor, from which he shall make as many copies as he feels is needed for the 3.04 COORDINATION OF SUBMITTALS: adjacent areas free from water resulting from their operation. prosecution of the Work. The Architect will not return multiple copies of shop drawings. o � 1.05HAZARDOUS MATERIALS: A. Prior to submittal for Architect's review, use all means necessary to fully coordinate all material, 1.09 BARRICADES 2.02 PRODUCT DATA: including, but not limited to, the following procedures: a A. Do not incorporate in the Work hazardous materials or products as currently defined in the 1. Determine and verify all field dimensions and conditions, catalog numbers, and A. Make provisions for barricades to surround the areas of work. Maintain these barricades when � Resource Conservation and Recover Act of 1976 (RCRA), the Comprehensive Environmental A. The Architect will require a minimum of 4 copies to be submitted of Product Data which has not similar data. Y P q P the operations are adjacent to and confined within these barricades. Should the Contractor find it 11-1 Response, Compensation, and Liability Act of 1980 (CERCLA), or Environmental Protection Agency been originallyre ared on a transparent material. The Architect will retain 1 of these copies, plus 2. Coordinate as required with all Trades and will all public agencies involved. P � P � Y ( ) 9 Y prepared P P P necessary to remove a portion of the barricades in the performance of his operations, then the (EPA)EPA regulations, rules, or requirements, as amended, unless the Contract Documents give no other an of the others that are required b his consultants, the Architect will return only one co of 3. Secure all necessary approval from public agencies and others; signify by stamp or 9 q 9� Y q Y Y PY Contractor shall provide all necessary warnings, temporary guard rails and other safety measures option than to provide a material or product which contains a hazardous material, component, submittals to the Contractor from which he shall make as many copies ies as he feels is needed for other means that all required approvals have been obtained. 4. Clear) indicate, in writing, all deviations from the Contract Document. required, and shall place the temporary barricade back to its proper conditions as soon as practical, constituent, waste, or leach. the Work. Y g� but in any case at the end of each work day. Should the Contractor fail to replace the barricade as required, then the Architect, if he deems it necessary, may do so without notice to the B. In studying the Contract Documents and carrying out the Work, report in writing at once to the B. Information not exclusively pertinent to the Project shall be deleted so that there is no possible B. Mechanical and electrical coordination: Contractor, and charge the Contractor the full cost thereof. t::�) Owner's Representative the discovery of a product or material (whether new or already existing on area of confusion as to what product, series, or model is to be examined. The Architect or Owner 1. Provide coordination of ductwork, waste, vent, pipes and conduit, as necessary to will not take responsibility for having examined a product that was not intended b the Contractor provide ceiling heights required. Provide necessary information to Architect if o N the Project) which contains hazardous materials, components, constituents, waste, or leachate. P Y g P y B. Provide barricades and warning lights at locations where their operations present a hazard to the � M, to be judged. relocation of services and/or ceiling height changes will have to be made. Owner. _ 0.. 2. Provide scaled equipment layout of mechanical room showing dimensioned "� C. Do not incorporate in the Work a product or material which contains concentrations of a o� Z =� 2.03 SAMPLES, MOCKUPS, AND COLORS: equipment pads; floor drain locations; sleeve locations; and equipment location = ; °� ° MNA constituent, component, or material above the threshold levels which would require adherence to 1.10 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION hazardous waste disposal regulations as current) defined, or could cause a release or threat or showing required code or service clearance. �. �� = i e�N P g y A. Unless otherwise specifically directed b the Architect, all Samples and Mockups shall be of the u��> release of a hazardous substance at a level that would require a remedial response or removal P Y Y P P A. Provide a project identification sign designed by the Architect or Owner. ws = .. Z� action as currently defined by RCRA, CERCLA, or the EPA. precise article proposed to be furnished. 3.05 SUBMITTAL SEQUENCE: Z, I z d - ° � � _ Other signs will not be permitted. D. Select materials and products meeting specified requirements that comply with EPA requirements as B. Samples and mockups shall faithfully represent the product or the assembly as it is proposed to A. The right is reserved by the Architect to examine submittals and samples in a proper sequence B. o be installed. This shall include, but not be limited to, materials, finishes, method of construction or that reflects the logical sequence of erection, installations, and proper assembly. Submittals of regards hazardous materials content. In making requests for substitutions, determined that 1.11 FIELD OFFICE AND SHEDS materials and products proposed for substitution comply with RCRA, CERCLA, and EPA requirements. assembly, relationship to adjacent construction, method of attachment to adjacent construction, products or materials that are the responsibility of separate Trades yet must be assembled in plus any electrical or mechanical connection that are required for the product or assembly to conjunction one with another, shall be submitted at the same time so that they may be examined A. Provide a temporary field office for Contractor's, the Owner and the Architect's use. (2)1.06PARTIAL OWNER OCCUPANCY: function. all together. Should these not be submitted simultaneously, the Architect reserves the right to hold one set while awaiting the arrival of other submittals. o • C. Unless the precise color and pattern is specifically described in the Contract Documents, whenever B. Provide a weather tight structure, with heat and ventilation for products requiring controlled A. The Owner reserves the right of partial occupancy or use of facilities, services, and utilities, prior to conditions, with adequate space for organized storage and access, and lighting for inspection of a o Substantial Completion, without implying completion or acceptance of any part of the Project. a choice of color or pattern is available in a specified product submit accurate color charts and B. All submittals within the responsibility of one Trade must be submitted at one time together (i.e. stored materials. � pattern charts to the Architect for his review and selection. Millwork). Numerous submittals of one product or item of construction over a period of time is not B. The Contractor shall provide access to the building for the Owner's personnel plus provide the acceptable. In the event of this occurrence, the Architect will hold the submittal data arriving first C. The location, appearance and type of temporary field office and storage facilities must be approved P g P P P D. Samples and color charts shall be physical specimens of materials or colors proposed to be until the last of the material has arrived. Then, and onlythen, will he make his examination. PP P y g PP correct operation of the heating, ventilating, and air conditioning, and electrical system. provided. Selections and approval of samples will be made by the Architect from these submitted by the Architect prior to its use. C. Necessary restoration and repair of damage resulting from partial occupancy or use shall not be at samples and color charts, without increase in costs to the Owner or Architects. Should the 3.06 TIMING OF SUBMITTALS: 1.13 SITE SECURITY the expense of the Contractor. Contractor desire a sample returned, he shall submit a sufficient number in order for the Architect to retain one 1 sample and return the remainder to the Contractor. A. Make all submittals far enough in advance of scheduled dates for installation to provide all A. In addition to placing the permanent fire protection facilities in operating condition at the earliest D. The Contractor shall also permit the Owner to place and install, or to have other Contractors place required time for reviews, for securing necessary approvals, for possible revision and re -submittals, feasible date, provide fire extinguishers of types and sizes recommended by NFPA No. 10 for the E. In order for the Architect to make a color schedule as quickly as possible and to avoid delivery and for placing orders and securing deliver and install, as much equipment during the progress of the Work as is possible before the final P 9 9 Y• general construction areas. The extinguishers will be located on each story of construction, near require a color to submit all items that re the Contractor shall be re problems, pricing p, qq acceptance of the various parts of the Work, and shall coordinate such placing and installation of and peach entrance and stairway. 'Q selection within 40 days of the Notice to Proceed. Delivery and pricing problems that develop B. Costs of delays occasioned b tardiness of submittals may be back -charged as necessary and a the equipment, so that it does not in any way whatever interfere with the progress of the Work or Y y 9 y H any portion of it. because an item was not submitted within the forty (40) day time limit, shall be the sole shall not be borne by the Owner. B. Provide similar fire extinguishers for specific areas of work. 0Z cc responsibility of the Contractor and not that of the Owner. c J 1.07PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS FOR NEW AND EXISTING CONSTRUCTION: 3.07 EXAMINATION OF SUBMITTALS: C. Smoking will not be allowed except in marked, non -hazardous areas. cc a � F. The color selection on any one item will not be made until after samples of all items that require a color selection have been submitted. A. Architect's review shall be for general conformance with the design concept and Contract W 0 A. Protect the existing building from wind, storms, cold heat, water and dust damage of any sort. 9 9 P D. Employ and pay for watchman services as he deems appropriate and necessary. � Provide all equipment and enclosures to maintain this protection and keep the building interior free Documents. Markings or comments shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor from (j J of water and dust during the life of the Contract. 2.04 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION MANUALS: compliance with the Drawings and Specifications, nor departures therefrom. The Contractor remains 1.14 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK (3a responsible for details and accuracy, for confirming and correlating all quantities and dimensions, for :„ B. Provide all shoringand bracing required to maintain the integrity and the safety of the existing A. Provide information for the Owner's maintenance of each system or operating equipment, including, selecting fabrication processes, for techniques of assembly, and for performing his work in a safe A. Be wholly responsible for the protection of the finished Work, except to the extent covered b 4. 9 q 9 Y Y 9 Y P P P Y : structure and for the proper execution of the Work. but not limited to, lubrication, emergency control, parts replacement, spare parts inventory manner. Property Insurance to be maintained by Owner. - - recommendation, listing of tools and accessories needed for maintenance and similar instructions, N C. Exercise the utmost care to protect all existing utility lines from damage during the progress of the TAB test reports and other test reports, and including warranty and requirements indicated B. The Architect will stamp, sign and date each submittal after his review. The stamp will inform the B. Upon completion of the Work and before acceptance, the Contractor shall, without extra ' W IL Work. throughout the Specification. Contractor as to whether the submittal has been approved, rejected, or whether the revisions are compensation, repair on/or refinish his work that may have been damaged. N required. When the Architect has marked the submittals, "Revise & Resubmit", or word of similar D. Provide and erect before any work begins, and maintain during the progress of the Work, all B. Provide manufacturer's operating instructions for each item of mechanical equipment and import, the Contractor shall cause the corrections to be made to the original and shall then 1.15 REMOVAL necessary fences, warning signals, signs and lights. Extent of this work and details of construction supplement with additional instructions where necessary. Prepare and submit specific operating proceed for a new submission. shall be in accordance with the requirements of all state and local codes. instructions for each mechanical system which involves multiple items of equipment, including A. Be responsible for the removal of temporary materials, equipment, services, and construction at instructions for charging, start-up, control or sequencing or operation, phase or seasonal variations, C. The Contractor shall not under any circumstances remove any comments, notes, or drawings made such time as to allow the work on the Project to proceed according to the established Construction E. Any portion of the existing building or existing utility services not included as part of this Contract shut -down, safety, and similar operational instructions. Prepare in typewritten form, completely by the Architect on the submittals that have been reviewed and stomped by the Architect. Should Schedule. or any portion of the Work damaged because of failure to provide the protection required shall be explained and easily understood. a conflict develop, the Contractor shall contact the Architect for instruction. removed and replaced with new materials and construction at the Contractor's expense. This work B. Repair damage caused by installation and use of temporary facilities. ISSUE DATE shall be accomplished subject to the Owner's Representative's and Owner's approval. C. Organize each maintenance manual to include an index followed by thumb tab marked sections for D. If the Contractor finds indicated changes to cause a conflict in conjunction with present 12-1-08 � system operating instructions; emergency instructions including addresses and telephone numbers for construction and/or products to be installed at a later date, he must notify the Architect and ask C. Restore existing facilities used during construction to specified or to original condition. 1.08REPLACEMENT AND REPAIR OF ANY STRUCTURES THAT HAVE BEEN DESTROYED IN THE PROGRESS OF service sources; regular system maintenance procedures including lubrication; spare parts listing and for verification. Should the Contractor not ask for a verification, he shall continue with the • stocking recommendations, inspection, adjusting, re -balancing, cleaning, parts replacement, and construction involvingor relating to that product at his own risk. 01 �� -SUBSTITUTIONS THE WORK: similar maintenance instructions and recommendations. Manuals shall also include the proper use of g REV DATE A. Because of the installation of the new items of equipment, fixtures, materials, etc., that are tools and accessories; valve schedules and control diagram for each system; manufacturer's data 3.08 COMPOSITE DRAWINGS: required by this Project, it shall become necessary to remove portions of the existing structure, for each operational item in each system; manufacturer's product warranties, and warranties relating PART 1 - GENERAL equipment, and/or utility services. Unless specifically noted otherwise on the Drawings, the to system and equipment items as part of the Work; shop drawings relating to the system, test A. In instances where submittals affect the Work of more than one Trade and/or when directed by Contractor shall be responsible for replacing, in a condition of identical appearance, construction, reports, and Project Record Documents. Bind each maintenance manual in one or more black vinyl the Architect, the Contractor shall prepare and submit composite drawings which indicate and define 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES s design, working order, and strength as its previous state, any such portion of the existing structure, covered, 2" thick, three ring binder, plus pocket folder type binders for folded drawings, and mark the Work under all affected Trades, and obtain the approval of the Architect. Upon receipt of final equipment, and/or utility services so required to be disturbed. The replaced item shall meet the the back spine of each binder with system identification and volume number. approval, the Contractor shall distribute print copies of the approved drawings to all affected Trades. A. Requirements for requesting approval of proposed substitutions. 2� • All affected Trades shall cooperate in the preparation of the composite drawings to assure proper �p approval of the Owner's Representative before final approval of the Project is given. er., ' '� 2.05 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL: coordination. B. The requirements of this section govern the use of Substitution Request Form -Section e� r 1.09RECORD DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS: 01631" available upon request from architect. e�. `� A. Prior to submitting shop drawings, assure that equipment proposed for use will fit into space .j�'� �`e�/� A. General: As work progresses, prepare and maintain record documents as specified herein. Each available, considering space for coil removal, filter service, maintenance, and other activities required 01500 - TEMPORARY O Y FACILITIES 1.02 LIMITATIONS ON SUBSTITUTIONS a� to keep equipment operating in proper manner. record shall be certified by the Contractor. Do not use record documents for construction O protect from deterioration and loss in a secure, fire -resistive location accessible to the A. Substitutions will not be considered unless the Substitution Request Farm -Section 01631 purposes; p " " PART 1 - GENERAL Owner's Representative for reference during normal working hours. Upon completion, turn record B. Note in red all deviations in electrical and/or mechanical arrangement from that indicated, available upon request from architect is used and the requirements of this section and Section documents over to the Owner's Representative. including, but not limited to, such items as electrical loads, electrical connections and physical size. 1.01 SUMMARY 01631 are fully complied with. Other types of forms are not acceptable. It is understood when submittal is received that all items that effect other trades have been 11. coordinated with those trades. B. Substitutions will not be considered when indicated on shop drawings or product data submittals B. Record drawings: Maintain a white -print set (blue -line or black -line) of contract drawings A. The Contractor shall pay all energy costs for the temporary electricity, heat and ventilation " „ (including amendment and change order drawings) and shop drawings clean, undamaged condition, used for the Work of the Project. This shall include the costs of installation and maintenance of without separate formal request complying with submittal procedures specified in this section. ( 9 9 9) P 9 9 C. Submittal data shall include, but is not limited to the following: temporary equipment, which costs shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall Topertyofthe dthedesTh shown do with mark-up of actual installations "field" vary from the work as originally shown. Mark whichever 1. Arrangement drawings with complete dimensional data. P YP Y C. Substitutions will not be considered unless submitted through the Contractor. �opyngoruse ofthis dawngrwthouttheir drawing is most capable of showing field condition fully and accurately; however a cross-reference 2. Performance data listing the following: remove all temporary equipment at the end of each work phase. written consent is prohibited and any at corresponding location on working drawings. Mark with red erasable pencil and, where feasible, a. Capacities, CFM, GPM, entering and leaving air and water conditions, pressure , D. If the Contractor proposes to substitute any material, fixtures, article, device, method of infringement will be subject to legal action. use other colors to distinguish between variations in separate categories of work. Mark-up new B. Use of alternate temporary facilities is Contractors option, subject to the Architects acceptance. SPECIFICATIONS 9 P 9 P losses for air and water side and all component pressure losses. construction, arrangement of components, or other items that differ from that called for in the � information which is recognized to be of importance, but was for some reason not shown on either b. Horse power, KW, and total unit electrical requirements. Contract Documents, he shall include all costs involved including work required by other contractors contract drawings or shop drawings. Give particular attention to concealed work, which would be C. Fan curves, discharge arrangement, motor locations, sheaves and belt data. C. Comply with Federal, State and local codes/regulations. g g or subcontractors affected by the substitution. difficult to measure and record at a later date. Note related change order number where d. Power and control wiring diagrams, showing interlock requirements. 1. The Contractor shall additionally include cost for additional studies, investigation, submittals, applicable. Organize record drawing sheets into manageable sets, bind with durable paper cover e. Isolators and isolator location with selection data. 1.02 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY AND LIGHTING redesign and/or analysis that is necessitated by the Owner, his representative, or the Architect. sheets, and print suitable titles, dates and other identification on cover of each set. f. Filter data with type, size number required and pressure drop. 2. Provide drawings, cuts, manufacturer's information, performance data and all other information A=11 g. Auxiliary equipment by other manufacturers: Provide name, capacity, A. Temporary lighting and power shall be of adequate size to properly service the requirements of the C. Record specification: Maintain one copy of specifications, including amendments, change orders and dimensions, wiring diagrams and power requirements. Work, including adequate feeder sizes to prevent excessive voltage drop. Temporary work to be necessary for evaluation. similar notifications issued in printed form during construction, and mark-up variations in actual installed in a neat and safe manner in accordance with the National Electrical Code, Article 305, work in comparison with text of specifications and modifications as issued. Give articular attention and as required by OSHA or applicable local safety codes. Panelboard shall be equipped with E. Substitute products shall not be ordered or installed �li�C l�db1 4�dISION 16 - 06-18-08 i 111 I-- T-il I --vt I - 1`1111 I I ;i�,11 ,II 1�: kl I, I-i ..'I-�!:..I I I I I 01630 - SUBSTITUTIONS D. Common brick (used only for unexposed back-up): ASTM C62, grade MW. accordance with the manufacturers recommendations 1. Air 2.02 MORTAR: F. Only one request for substitution for each product will be considered. When substitution is not C. Optional slip -resistant properties shall be achieved by broadcasting #36 or #50 white Aluminum 2. Substrate accepted by the Architect, provide the specified product. Oxide granules into the first wet urethane coat and back -rolled into place. 3. Dew Point A. Portland cement: ASTM C150, type 1. 1.02 Submittals 3.05 Cleaning ` G. Architect will determine the acceptability of all substitutions. A. Product Data A. Disposal B. Masonry cement: ASTM C91, packaged cement. 1. Current edition of manufacturer's product literature including physical data, chemical resistance, 1. Properly remove and dispose of any excess materials. 1.03 REQUESTS FOR SUBSTITUTIONS surface preparation, and application instructions. B. Samples C. Sand: Natural siliceous sand conforming to ASTM C144. A. Contractor's Representation D. Water: Potable. 1. Request for substitution constitutes a representation that the Contractor has investigated the 1. A 6 inch (150mm) square sample of the proposed system shall be submittal to represent the C4210 - BRICK tMASONRY (OPTIONAL) ro osed product and has determined that it is equal to or superior in all respects to the finish system. E. Mortar type N brick veneer One art masonry cement and three arts sand b volume. proposed q P P C. Warranty PART 1- GENERAL ( ) P Y P Y • specified product. 1. Manufacturers standard warranty 2. Request for substitution constitutes a representation that the Contractor will provide same type F. Unless specifically noted otherwise, no admixtures will be permitted. 2. Applicators standard warranty of warranty for substitution as for specified product. Contractor's warranty shall be in writing 1.01 SCOPE: guaranteeing all substituted products have some or superior performance as the product 1.03 Quality Assurance G. Retempering will be allowed only as necessary to maintain flow. A. Qualifications specified. A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and services required to furnish and place the masonry work. 1. The manufacturer shall have a minimum of 10ppyears experience in the production, sales and H. Use no mortar more than two hours old. 3. Request for substitution constitutes a representation that the Contractor will coordinate the technical support of polymer -based coating and be required to meet all provisions of this to installation of the accepted substitute, making such changes as may be required for the U, specification as well as provide evidence for compatibility between components to the satisfaction I. Color of mortar. Non-fadin Match existing. Y Work to be complete in all respects. 1.02QUALITY ASSURANCE: g g• = M E 4. Request for substitution constitutes a representation that the Contractor waives all claims for of the Architect. U w o additional costs related to substitutions that consequently become apparent. 2. Applicator must be approved by the Manufacturer of Florock. A. Comply with all pertinent codes and regulations. 2.03 BRICK VENEER TIES TO METAL STUD BACKUP: ~ U z q Y PP B. Pre -Bid Conference P Y P g � � F-- 5. � m v Request for substitution constitutes a representation that the cost data is complete and includes 1. A pre -bid conference should be held between prospective applicators and the Architect to review to U c rn all related cost under his Contract, but excludes any approved Architect's design fees required B. Before and after the brick is in place in the wall, the manufacturer, the installer and the A. DW 10 galvanized steel VEE tie by Hohmann and Barnard Inc., or an approved equal. Hot -dip + � w O o s surface preparation, application, clean-up procedures, and design issues. to 0 a by substitution. Contractor will be held responsible for compliance with the requirements and standards set forth in galvanize after fabrication with 1.5 oz. zinc coating, ASTM A153, Class B2. U O C. Packing and Shipping r Q Z i. 6. Request for substitution constitutes a representation that the Contractor has thoroughly the Contract Documents. M m v investigated the proposed substitute to determine if license fees and royalties are pending on 1. All materials are to be delivered to the job site in the manufacturers original packaging. The 2.04 BRICK VENEER TIES TO STRUCTURAL STEEL BACKUP: ¢ v S L z the proposed substitute, for compliance with the General Conditions of the Contract/AIA 201. product code and other identification marks should be clear) marked and visible. P y C. Qualifications of workmen: D. Storage ad Protection 1. All material is to be stored in a cool, dry place out of the direct sunlight and away from any 1. Far the actual cutting and placing of brick, use only skilled journeyman masons who are A. DW 10 galvanized steel VEE tie by Hohmann and Barnard, Inc., or an approved equal. Hot -dip B. Requests for substitutions shall be submitted on "Substitution Request Form - Section 01631" thoroughly experienced with the materials and methods specified and thoroughly familiar with galvanize after fabrication with 1.5 oz. zinc coating, ASTM A153, Class B2. available upon request from architect. Legible copies of this form shall be complete with data ignition sources. The applicator should refer to the manufacturers literature and material safety the substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with requirements of Contract Documents data sheets for more information design requirements. 2.05 FLEXIBLE ANCHORS: including the following information: acceptance or rejection Material safety Data Sheets are to be kept on site and made readily available for all personnel. 2. In acce tance of installed brick, no allowance will be made for lack of skill on the 3. Keep containers sealed and ready for use. part of workmen. A. Where masonry is indicated to be anchored to structural framework with flexible anchors, provide 1. Project title and Architect's project number. E. Concrete Floor Testing 3. Provide at least one skilled journeyman mason who shall be present at all times during 2-piece anchors which will permit horizontal and vertical movement of masonry but will provide 2. Identification of product specified including Specifications Section and Paragraph Number. 1. Moisture Emission Level Test: The Contractor shall provide testing to confirm moisture vapor execution lateral restraint. + 3. Identification of proposed substitute complete with manufacturer's name and address, trade name emission levels, in accordance with ASTM F 1869.98 'Standard Test method for Measuring Moisture on the work of this Section and who shall personally direct the execution of this portion of the of product, and model or catalog number. Attach product data. Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Sub -floor Using Calcium Chloride". This testing must be Work. 2.06 PREMOLDED CONTROL JOINT STRIPS: 4. List of fabricator and supplier (with address and phone number) for proposed substitute. providing 4. As requested by the Architect, provide data demonstrating the capabilities and experience of 5. The affect of substitution on dimensions, material thicknesses, wiring, piping, duct work, etc. in an enclosed, temperature controlled building shell approximately 30 days prior to the epoxy the A. Solid rubber strips with a Shore A durometer hardness of 60 to 80, designed to fit standard sash • indicated in Contract Documents. flooring installation. workmen proposed to do the work. Include list of completed projects with project names, block and maintain lateral stability in masonry wall, size and configuration as indicated. 6. The affect of substitution on other trades. a. Maximum Acceptable Moisture Emission Level: Moisture Vapor shall not exceed 3.0 pounds addresses, telephone numbers, names of Architects and Owners, and other information 7. The affect of substitution on construction schedule. per necessary PART 3 - EXECUTION 8. Differences in quality and performance between specified product and proposed substitute. 1000 square feet per 24-hour period. to prove competence. 9. Comparison of manufacturer's guarantees of specified product and proposed substitute. b. Note that the specified "acceptable emission level for this flooring product is different then 3.01 COORDINATION: 10.Availability of maintenance services and replacement materials for proposed substitute. for D. Tolerance for construction: 11.Cost data comparing proposed substitute with specified product, and amount of net change to other flooring products scheduled. 1. Variation from the plumb in the lines and surfaces of columns, walls and arises shall not A. Carefully coordinate with all other Trades to ensure proper and adequate interface of the work of Contract Sum. 2. Material Safety Data Sheets are to be kept on site and made readily available exceed other Trades with the work of this Section. 12.License fees and/or royalties pending on proposed substitute. for all personnel. / Y P 9 P P 1 /8" in 10'-0" and 1 /4" in a story height or 20'-0" maximum. Variation from plumb for 3. Keep containers sealed and ready for use. 3.02 GENERAL: external corners, expansion joints and other conspicuous lines, shall not exceed 1/4 in any 02360 -SOIL TREATMENT 1.04 Project Conditions „ A. Environmental Requirements story or 20 -0 maximum. a q A. Cut masonry units with motor -driven saw designed to cut masonry with clean sharp, unchipped 1. Optimum air and substrate temperature for product application is between 35f 13 C and 95 F 2• Variation from the level of the grades indicated on the Drawings for exposed lintels, sills, p p p pp ( edges. Cut units as required to provide pattern shown and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full e PART 1 - GENERAL parapets, horizontal grooves, and other conspicuous lines shall not exceed 1/4 in any bay or (35C). Consult the manufacture for product application suggestions for temperatures out of the units without cutting where ever possible. � specified range. module or 20 -0 , (whichever dimension is the least) nor ❑ in 40 -0 or more. 1.01 SCOPE: 2. Verify the work environment is properly equipped with vapor barriers and perimeter drains. 3. Variation of the linear building line from an established position in plan and related portion of B. Wet clay brick having ASTM C67 (Absorption rates greater than 0.025 oz. per s in. per minute). , Y 9 ( P 9 P q• P ) A.Provide all of the labor, materials, equipment, and services required to complete the soil poisoning 3. Maintain proper lighting throughout the work environment: the lighting should be comparable to columns, walls and partitions shall not exceed 1/4 in any bay or module or 20-0 , (whichever work. the dimension is the least) nor ❑" in 40'-0" or more. C. Frozen materials and work: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or 1. Prevent termite, carpenter ant and other wood destroying insect infestation. final lighting level of the space. 4. Variation in cross -sectional dimensions of columns and thickness of walls shall not exceed frost. For masonry which is specified to be wetted, comply with the BIA recommendations. Do not 4. Store and dispose of any waste in accordance with regulations of local authorities. minus build on frozen work. Remove and replace masonry work. damaged by frost or freezing. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: B. Safety Requirements 1 /4", nor plus ❑" from the dimensions indicated on the Drawings. A. In addition to requirements of these Contract Documents, comply with the manufacturer's instructions 1. `No Smoking" signs shall be posted throughout the work area prior to application. D. Layout walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns, with uniform joint widths and recommendations for work, including preparation of substrate and application. 2. The owner shall be responsible for removing and foodstuffs from work area. A. Single source responsibility for brick: Provide brick of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform and to properly locate openings, movement -type joints, returns and offsets. Avoid the use of ° B. The applicator shall be a company specializing in soil treatment for insect control with a minimum of 3. Open flames, spark producing tools/items, and ignition sources shall be removed from the work blend within the ranges accepted by the Architect. Obtain brick from one manufacturer for each less -than -half size units at corners, jambs and wherever possible at other locations. `, one year of documented experience. area prior to application. different product to provide a continuous visually related surface. > ; �Co zCo ao C. Engage a professional pest control operator, licensed in accordance with regulations of governing 4. Only work -related personnel shall be allowed within the work area. E. Lay-up walls plumb and true and with courses level, accurately spaced and coordinated with other = C. authorities for application of soil treatment solution. 1.05 Warranty B. Job mock-up -Brick: work. �o �N ?= D. Work shall conform to rules and regulations for pest control as determined b the State in which the 1. Prior to installation of masonry work, erect sample wall panel mock-up using materials, bond ��� 9 P Y A. Coordination Y P P P 9 „s Z 3 Project is being constructed. 1. The manufacturer of Florock offers a full, one year warrant a ainst defects in materials. and joint tooling required for final work. Provide special features including, but not limited to, 3.03 COURSING AND BOND: W "_ �s °� HX. Y Y 9 dnnzdW uNic E. Products shall conform to the requirements of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Warranties concerning the installation of the material are solely the responsibility of the applicator. caulking, control and expansion joints, juncture with adjacent materials and continuous work. regulations for insecticides. Provide samples of all masonry and non -masonry trims and moldings that will be incorporated. A. 3 brick and mortar joints equal 8". o 1.03 SUBMITTALS: Part 2: Products Mock-up shall demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as quality of materials and execution. A. Prior to application, submit for review by the Architect the following: 2.01 Manufactures Construct one mock-up for each type of brick required. 3.04 LAYING MASONRY - GENERAL: 1. Indicate toxicant to be used, composition by percentage, dilution schedule, and intended application A. Crawford Laboratories, Inc. 2. Build mock-up at the site, where directed, of full thickness and approximately 4' x 4', o rate. 4165 South Emerald Avenue indicating A. Lay masonry plumb, true, and level. 2. Certification that products used comply with U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) regulations Chicago, IL 60609 the proposed range of color, texture and workmanship to be expected in the completed work. 0 • for insecticides. Phone: (773) 376-7132 Panel shall include, but not be limited to, wall ❑back up❑construction indicating ❑back up❑ B. Lay masonry with full head and bed joints on surfaces joined, unless indicated otherwise. B. For project record documents: Submit data showing moisture content of the soil before treatment, Fax: (773) 376-0945 material construction, dampproofing, insulation, etc. o date and rate of application, areas of application, diary of meter readings and corresponding soil www.florock.net 3. Obtain Architect's acceptance of visual qualities of the mock-up before start of masonry work. C. Realignment of masonry shall not be permitted after a higher or following course has been laid. coverage. 2.02 Materials Retain mock-up during construction as a standard for judging completed masonry work. Do Any masonry which is disturbed after the mortar has stiffened shall be removed and relaid with A. Primer not fresh mortar. 1.04 GUARANTEE: 1. The Primer shall be as recommended by Manufacturer alter, move or destroy mock-up until work is completed. A. Form of guarantee: The guarantee shall be in form acceptable to the Architect and shall be drawn 4. Use sample panels to test proposed cleaning procedures. D. When work has been stopped and about to resume again, rack back 1/2-masonry unit length in B. Basecoat (Body Coat) P P P P 9 P pp g / y g in favor of the Owner, his successor, and his assigns. 1. The basecoat shall be Florock Floropoxy SL 4805. each course. Do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry and remove loose masonry B. Provisions required: C. Topcoats 1.04 SUBMITTALS: units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry. 1. The soil treatment has been performed in accordance with all requirements of the Contract 1. The topcoat shall be Florock Florothane CR 420/250: two coats must be applied Documents. D. Optional A. Prior to manufacturing, submit to the Architect for review the following: E. Do not lay masonry when air temperature is below 40 degrees F, forecasted to go below 40 2. The effectiveness of the soil treatment against insect infestation shall continue for not less 1. Product data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and other data for each type of masonry degrees F within 24 hours, Or when it is raining. Q 1. Aluminum Oxide into the first topcoat of Florock Florothane CR 420/250 for skid resistance. than 5 years after the Date of Substantial Completion. unit, accessory, and other manufactured products, including certifications that each type LU h 0 3. All evidence of re -infestation within the guarantee period shall be treated, without additional complies F. Provide weep holes in head joints in the first course immediately above all flashing by leaving head Z . cost to the Owner. Part 3: Execution 301 Inspection with specified requirements. Include instructions for handling, storage, installations and joint free and clean of mortar or by placing and leaving sash cord in joint. Maximum spacing shall O O • 4. Complete performance of the guarantee is assured by Surety acceptable to the Owner. protection. be 24" o.c. unless indicated otherwise. Kee wee holes and area above flashing free of mortar A. General P P 9 4. C. Performance guarantee: Treat, in accordance with all terms of the guarantee, all evidence of insect 2. Samples for selection of color and texture: droppings. infestation which is discovered within the guarantee period. 1. Examine the areas and conditions where the chemical resistant urethane floor is to be installed g P and notify the architect of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the 3. Facing brick samples showing full range of colors and textures available in products complying O h work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected by the with specified requirements. Furnish samples made up of actual bricks or sections of brick. 3.05 BUILT-IN WORK: expected she Ci J Include in each set a maximum variation to betin finished work. •. PART 2 -PRODUCTS contractor in a manner acceptable to the Architect. 3.02 Preparation B. Colored masonry mortar samples showing full range of colors. A. As the work progresses, build -in items specified under this and other sections of these A. Patching and Joint Preparation 1. Certification that mortar and masonry products are compatible products and that they will Specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. 2.01 SOIL TREATMENT SOLUTION: the floor shall be examined for s alls, itts, , non-functional function properly together to achieve a successful result. 4 1. Before application, p p holes, cracks _ A. Use an emulsified concentrate insecticide for dilution with water, specially formulated to prevent B. Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solid) with mortar. W • infestation b insects. Fuel oil will not be permitted as a diluent. joints etc... These must be treated after preparation and before application. Patch with forock P Y Y N W Y P 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS: B. Product shall physically bear a federal registration number of the EPA and shall be approved by local Floropoxy 4700 or FloroGel. For functional or expansion joints, these shall be treated with Florock system 6500. C. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal N authorities having jurisdiction. B. Concrete Surfaces A. Protection of work: During erection, cover top of walls with heavy waterproof sheeting at end of lath in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core. s7ft 1. Shot -blast, diamond grind or power scarify as required to obtain clean, open porous concrete. each days work. Cover partially completed structures when work is not in progress. PART 3 EXECUTION Remove sufficient material to provide a sound surface, free of laitance, glaze, and efflorescence. 3.06 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING: C. Materials B. Extend cover a minimum of 24 down both sides and hold cover securely in place. 1. Mix com ontents when required, and prepare materials according to flooring system manufacture's A. Mix and prepare mortar in accordance with ASTM C270. 3.01 INSPECTION: P q P P g g y C. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loading for at least 12 hours after building masonry walls or A.Verify the soil surfaces are unfrozen sufficiently dry to absorb toxicant, ready to receive treatment. instructions. PP Y 9 9 Y B.Beginning of application means acceptance of soil conditions. columns. B. Measure and batch materials either by volume or weight, such that the required proportions for C.Remove foreign matter which could decrease effectiveness of treatment on areas to be treated. 3.03 Application mortar can be accurately controlled and maintained. Measurement of sand exclusively by shovel will ISSUE DATE Loosen, rake, and level soil to be treated, except previously compacted areas under slabs and A. General D. Do not apply concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns. not be permitted. 12-1-08 foundations. 1. The system shall be installed in the order described below: a. substrate Preparation E. Staining: Prevent grout or mortar from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or C. Mix mortars with the maximum amount of water consistent with workability to provide maximum • 3.02 APPLICATION: b. Priming painted. Remove immediately grout or mortar in contact with such masonry. tensile bond strength within the capacity of the mortar. A. Apply toxicant prior to installation of vapor barrier under slab -on -grade or finish grading outside of c. Basecoat (Body Coat) Application F. Protect sills, ledges and projections from droppings of mortar. D. Mix mortar ingredients for a minimum of 5 minutes in a mechanical batch mixer. Use water REV DATE foundation walls. d. Topcoat applications w/optional Aluminum Oxide clean and free of deleterious materials which would impair the work. Do not use mortar which has B. Allow not less than 12 hours for drying after application before beginning concrete placement or 2. Concrete surfaces on grade shall have been constructed with a vapor barrier to protect against G. Cold weather protection: begun to set, or if more than 2-1/2 hours has elapsed since initial mixing. Retemper mortar other construction activities. the effects of vapor transmission and possible delaminating of the system. Remove any ice or snow formed on masonry bed by carefully applying heat until top surface is during 2-1/2 hour period as required to restore workability. C. Post signs in the areas of application warning workers that soil poisoning has been applied. Remove 3. The surface should be dry prior to application of any of the aforementioned steps. Futhermore, 1. � dry to the touch. $'��, signs when areas are covered by other construction. the 40 2. Remove all masonry determined to be frozen or damaged by freezing conditions. E. Lay brick with completely filled bed, head and collar joints; butter ends with sufficient mor max' • D. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation or other construction substrate shall always be kept clean, dry and free of any contaminants. Concrete must be free of + activities following application. curing compounds, sealers and all incompatible substances. 4. When 3. or he hmeaonll daig apro{ee temperature is or completed degrees es F to 20masonry and nde degrry not ees F, he following worked on: fill head joints and shove into place. Do not slush head joints. E. Application areas shall include, but not be limited to: 4. The handling and mixture of any material associated with the installation of the system shall be y P g g p precautions as needed: Protect masonry from rain or snow for at least 24 hours by covering F. Joints: Maintain joint widths shown, except for minor variations required to maintain bond 1. Within the building area, with or without slabs -on -grade in with weather -resistive membrane; completely cover masonry with weather -resistive membrane �. 2. Along interior sides of all foundation walls. accordance with the manufacturers recommendations and approved by the Architect. P Y Y alignment. If not otherwise indicated, lay walls with m joints. Cut joints flush for masonry walls 3. Where exterior is abutted by concrete slabs, asphalt, or other permanent surfacing, treat 5. The system shall follow the contours of the substrate unless otherwise specified by the Architect. for which are to be concealed or to be covered by other materials. Tool exposed joints to match at least 24 hours; completely cover masonry with insulating blankets or similar protection for existing. Rake out mortar in preparation fora application of caulking or sealants where shown. exterior sides at the some rate. 6. A neat finish with well defined boundaries and straight edges shall be provided by the applicator. at g p p PP 9 1 4. Outside building perimeter in a strip at least 2'-0" wide, under porches, areaways, aprons, B. Priming least 24 hours. ads, stair landings Or paved extensions. 1. All areas considered for the application shall be rimed with the manufacturer's rimer to seal G. Remove masonry units disturbed above laying; clean and relay in fresh mortar. m not pound P 9 P PP P P 5. When the mean daily air temperature is from 20 degrees F and below, take the following corners at jambs to fit stretcher units which have been set in position. If adjustments are 5. At pavement abutting structures, limit treatment under pavement at a 2'-0" wide strip adjacent and precautions as needed: Maintain masonry temperature above 32 degrees F for 24 hours using required, remove units, clean off mortar, and reset in fresh mortar. to structure. penetrate the substrate in preparation for applying the basecoat and grout coats. enclosures and supplementary heat, electric heating blankets, infrared lamps, or other 6. In absorbent soil or fill (sand, sand and gravel mix, gravel) increase the application rate as 2. Porous concrete substrates may require additional applications of primer. acceptable 3.07 INSTALLING VENEER TIES: recommended by the manufacturer. C. Basecoat methods. This drawing and the design shown is the 7. At hollow masonry foundations, treat the voids by pouring directly into the hollow spaces. 1. The Basecoat shall consist of the manufacturers approved epoxy basecoat to seal the surface „ property of the architect. The reproduction, A. All ties require a minimum embedment depth of 2 into the bed joints of the veneer. The ties copying or use of this drawing without their 8. At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slab will be penetrated. and PART 2 - PRODUCTS give the floor impact resistance. shall be completely surrounded by mortar. Maximum spacing of ties shall be 24" O.C. written consent ibesubeprohibited and eany la F. Application rates shall be in accordance with the manufacturers instructions. 9 P infringement will be subject. to legal action. D. Topcoats 2.01 BRICK: SPECIFICATIONS 1. The topcoat(s) shall be consistent with the manufacturer's recommended chemical resistant B. Space veneer anchors as shown, Or if not shown, space to more than 24 o.c. vertically and 03360 - SPECIAL CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES urethane for the system. A. Type and size: See Drawings. horizontally. Provide additional anchors within -0" of openings and space not more than 3'-0" 2. No traffic or equipment shall be permitted on the floor during the curing period. around perimeter. B. Provide special molded shapes where shown and for applications which cannot be sawn from Florothane CR- Chemical Resistant Urethane 25 mi. System 3.04 Field Quality Control standard brick sizes. Provide solid units where surfaces of bricks are exposed other than the C. Metal stud or structural steel back-up: Attach ties to back-up material as recommended by Part 1: General A. Test & inspection finished face or ends. manufacturer. Anchor veneer to structural members with metal anchors embedded in masonryA=12 1.01 System Description 1. The following tests shall be preformed by the applicator and recorded during application to the joints and attached to structure. Provide anchors with flexible tie section, unless otherwise A. Florock Florothane CR 420/250 Chemical Resistant Urethane System Architect: C. Face brick: ASTM C216, grade SW, FIBS. indicated. B. This system shall be applied to the prepared substrate(s) as defined by the plans strictly in a. Temperature During installation 8-STRAIGHT PROTOTYPE - REVISION 16 - 06-18-08 04210 -BRICK MASONRY OPTIONAL 3.08 LINTELS: A. Install loose lintels of steel and other materials where shown. B. Provide minimum bearing at each jamb, of 4" for openings less than 6'-0" wide, and 8" for wider openings. C. Lay regular course of masonry overhead and reinforce next joint with joint reinforcing equal in length to rods specified above. 3.09 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS: A. Provide vertical expansion, control and isolation joints in masonry where shown. Build -in related masonry accessory items as the masonry work progresses. B. See Division 7 for sealants. C. Build -in joint fillers where shown, specified in Division 7. D. Control joints: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: 1. Provide vertical control joints in all masonry walls that exceed 40'-0" in length and/or exceed a ratio of panel length to height (L/H) of 3. These joints shall be placed at the following locations: a. Changes in wall height or thickness. b. At construction joints in foundation, in roof, and in floors. c. At chases and recesses for piping, columns, fixtures, etc. d. At abutment of wall and columns. e. At return angles in "L", "T", and "U" shaped structures. f. At other locations designated on the Drawings. g. All joint locations must be verified and approved by the Architect. h. Create control joints with the use of the control joint gasket, backer rod and sealant. The gasket shall run continuous throughout the full height of the wall. 3.10 FLASHING: A. Exposed metal flashing: 1. Metal flashings shall be installed in strict accordance with the Architectural Sheet Metal Manual of the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. 2. Interlock end joints of deformed metal flashings by overlapping deformations not less than 1-1/2" and seal lap with elastic sealant. 3. Concealed flashing: a. Provide concealed flashings in masonry work at, or above, all shelf angles, lintels, ledges and other obstructions to the downward flow of water in the wall so as to divert such water to the exterior. Prepare masonry surfaces smooth and free from projections which could puncture flashing. Place through -wall flashing on bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Seal penetrations, laps, and edges (vertically and horizontally) in flashing with mastic before covering the mortar. b. Extend flashings the full length of lintels and shelf angles and minimum of 4" into masonry each end. Extend flashing from a line 1/2" in from exterior face of outer wythe of masonry, through the outer wythe, turned up a minimum of 4", and through the inner wythe to within 1/2" of the interior face of the wall in exposed work. Where interior surface of inner wythe is concealed by furring, carry flashing completely through the inner wythe and turn up approximately 2". c. Install flashings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related work where shown to be built into masonry work. 3.11 REPAIR, POINTING AND CLEANING - GENERAL: A. Remove and replace masonry units which are loose, chipped, broken, stained or otherwise damaged, or if units do not match adjoining units as intended. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes, except weepholes, and completely fill with mortar. Point -up all joints at corners, openings and adjacent work to provide a neat, uniform appearance, properly prepared for application of caulking or sealant compounds. C. Clean exposed masonry by dry brushing at the end of each days work and after final pointing to remove mortar spots and droppings. 3.12 CLEANING OF BRICK: A. To minimize cleaning problems, keep brick as clean as possible during construction. Wet down before laying all high absorption and all brick laid during hot weather, except low absorption brick. B. Do not start cleaning operation before the mortar is thoroughly set and cured and the wall is dry of construction water. Protect all non -masonry surfaces adjacent to brickwork that may be affect by the cleaning solution. C. Test cleaning agent on an inconspicuous part of the building wall. D. Use clear water and a pressure hose and a brush. Add a cleaning agent if necessary to get the masonry clean. The cleaning agent shall be of a type as recommended by the brick manufacturer. E. Cleaning shall be in accordance with these Specifications and the Brick Institute of America Technical Notes 20. In all cases, use plenty of water before, during and after cleaning. F. Clean only a small area at a time - approximately 10 to 20 square feet. This is a precaution against the brickwork drying out during cleaning and sucking the dissolved mortar into the pores of the brick. G. Remove large particles of mortar with a wood paddle and flush off loose mortar and dirt with water. Use a chisel or wire brush, only if necessary, and never on glazed brick. H. Soak the area to be cleaned with plenty of water before applying the cleaning solution. This will prevent any mortar dissolved by the cleaning solution from being drawn into the face of the brick. I. Scrub the brick, not the mortar joints. Keep the brickwork below the area being cleaned thoroughly soaked with water. This will prevent dissolved mortar from being drawn into the face of the brick below. J. Throw away the cleaning solution when it becomes dirty. Rinse the brush frequently in clean water. K. Wash the wall thoroughly with plenty of water after scrubbing with the cleaning solution. Mortar stains are dissolved during the cleaning and must be washed away completely. Do not spare the use of water before, during or after the cleaning operation. 04220 - BLOCK MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE: A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and services required to furnish and place the masonry work. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Comply with requirements for materials and installation established by governing authorities for the construction and fire -resistance rating indicated. 1. 2 hr. concrete unit masonry. ASTM Classification D-2. 2. 3 hr. concrete unit masonry. ASTM Classification C-3. 3. 4 hr. concrete unit masonry. ASTM Classification B-4. B. Comply with all pertinent codes and regulations. C. Qualifications of workmen: 1.For the actual cutting and placing of concrete masonry units, use only skilled journeyman masons who are thoroughly experienced with the materials and methods specified and thoroughly familiar with the design requirements. 2.In acceptance or rejection of installed concrete masonry units, no allowance will be made for lack of skill on the part of workmen. 3.Provide at least one skilled journeyman mason who shall be present at all times during execution of the work of this Section and who shall personally direct the execution of this portion of the Work. 4. Tolerance for construction: a. Variation from the plumb in the lines and surfaces of columns, walls and arises shall not exceed 1 /8" in 10'-0" and 1/4" in a storyheight or 20'-0" maximum. Variation from plumb for external corners, expansion joints and other conspicuous lines, shall not exceed 1/4" in any story or 20'-0" maximum. b. Variation from the level of the grades indicated on the Drawings for exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves, and other conspicuous lines shall not exceed 1/4" in any bay or module or 20'-0", (whichever dimension is the least) nor 1/2" in 40'-0" or more. c. Variation of the linear building line from an established position in plan and related portion of columns, walls and partitions shall not exceed 1/4" in any bay or module or 20'-0", (whichever dimension is the least) nor 1/2" in 40'-0" or more. d. Variation in cross -sectional dimensions of columns and thickness of walls shall not exceed minus 1/4", nor plus 1/2" from the dimensions indicated on the Drawings. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Prior to manufacturing, submit to the Architect for review the following: 1.Product data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and other data for each type of masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured products, including certifications that each type complies with specifiedrequirements. Include instructions for handling, storage, installations and protection. 2.Letter of certification: Submit a letter of certification, signed jointly by an officer of the manufacturing company and the Contractor, that the concrete masonry units furnished to and installed on this Project meet in all respects the Project requirements. Submit test data made by an independent testing laboratory approved by the Architect, certifying that the concrete masonry units being used are in fact the block specified. 3. Certification that mortar and masonry products are compatible materials and that they will function properly together to achieve a successful result. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS: A. Protection of work: During erection, cover top of walls with heavy waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed structures when work is not in progress. B. Extend cover a minimum of 24" down both sides and hold cover securely in place. C. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loading for at least 12 hours after building masonry walls or columns. D. Do not apply concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns. E, Staining: Prevent grout or mortar from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted Remove immediately grout or mortar in contact with such masonry. F. Protect sills, ledges and projections from droppings of mortar. G. Cold weather protection: 1. Remove any ice or snow formed on masonry bed by carefully applying heat until top surface 1 dry to the touch. 2. Remove all masonry determined to be frozen or damaged by freezing conditions. 3. Perform the following protections for completed masonry and masonry not being worked on: a. When the mean daily air temperature is from 400 degree F to 32 degree F, protect masonry from rain or snow for at least 24 hours by covering with weather -resistive membrane. b. When the mean daily air temperature is from 32 degree F to 25 degree F, completely cover masonry with weather -resistive membrane for at least 24 hours. c. When the mean daily air temperature is from 25 degree F to 20 degree F, completely cover masonry with insulating blankets or similar protection for at least 24 hours. d. When the mean daily air temperature is from 20 degree F and below, maintain masonry temperature above 32 degree F for 24 hours using enclosures and supplementary heat, electric heating blankets, infrared lamps, or other acceptable methods. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 UNGLAZED CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMU): A. Type: 1. Standard C90 unit, exterior units inegrally waterproofed. 2. Split faced units, integrally waterproofed. 3. Scored units, integrally waterproofed. 4. Size: a. Nominal face dimensions of 16" x 8'. b. For other sizes, see Drawings. 5. Special shapes: Provide where required for lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints, headers, bonding and other special conditions. B. Description: 1 . Hollow load bearing CMU: Units shall conform to ASTM C91`0-75, grade N-I. 2. Solid load bearing CMU: ASTM C90, grade N-1. 3. Weight: a. Lightweight units: Use expanded rotary kiln shale or clay. Conform to ASTM C331-81. Dry net unit weight shall not exceed 105 lbs./cu.ft. b. Normal weight: Conform to ASTM C33. Dry net unit weight shall be not less than 125 lbs./cu. ft. 4. Materials in exposed surfaces shall be free of chips, cracks or other imperfections. C. Admix for block: 1. Product/manufacturer: a. Acme Shield Integral Water Repellency System. b. W. R. Grace Dry -Block. 2. The addition of this admix is to achieve water repeflency. Make addition of admix at the block plant, under the direction of the manufacturer. 2.02 MORTAR: A. Materials: 1. Portland cement: ASTM C150-81, type 1. 2. Masonry cement: ASTM C91-78, packaged cement. 3. Sand: Natural siliceous sand conforming to ASTM C144-81. 4. Water: Potable. B. Mortar type M and S: 1. Exterior block walls and load -bearing walls. 2. Type M mortar shall be one part portland cement, one part masonry cement, and five parts sand by volume. 3.Use type S mortar for masonry in contact with earth. a. Type S mortar shall be one half part portland cement, one part masonry cement, and four parts sand by volume. C. Mortar type N: 1. Use type N for interior non -loading bearing walls. 2. Type N mortar shall be one part masonry cement and three parts sand by volume. D. Unless specifically noted otherwise, no admixtures will be permitted. E. Retempering will be allowed only as necessary to maintain flow. F. Use no mortar more than two hours old. G.Admix for mortar: 1. Product/manufacturer: a. Acme Shield Integral Water Repellency System. b. W. R. Grace Dry -Block. 2. The addition of this admix is to achieve water repellency. Make addition of admix under the direction of the manufacturer. 2.03 GROUT FOR BOND BEAMS, CORE FILLING, AND REINFORCED MASONRY: A. One part Portland cement, three parts sand by volume. Where grout is required to be poured, add sufficient water to form a thick fluid. Shall meet or exceed ASTM C-476-80. B. Aggregate for grout: ASTM C404-76, size no. 8. 2.04 CONTINUOUS WIRE REINFORCEMENT: A. Provide welded wire units prefabricated in straight lengths of not less than 10', with matching corner and tee units. Fabricate from cold -drawn steel wire complying with ASTM A82, with deformed continuous side rods and plain cross -rods, and a unit width of 1-1/2" to 2" less than thickness of wall or partition. B. Provide units fabricated as follows: 1. Ladder type fabricated with single pair of 9 ga. side rods and 9 ga. perpendicular cross -rods spaced not more than 16" o.c. 2. Interior walls: Fabricate from galvanized wire, .40 oz per sq. ft., conforming to ASTM A641, Class 1. 3. Exterior walls: Hot -dip galvanized after fabrication with 1.5 oz. zinc coating, ASTM A153, Class B2 if exposed to moisture and/or weather; .80 oz. zinc coating, ASTM A641, Class 3 if completely embedded in mortar or grout. 2.05 REINFORCING BARS: A. Deformed steel, ASTM A615, Grade 60. 2.06 INTERSECTING WALL ANCHOR: A. Z-type rigid steel bar 1/4" x 1" x 24" with 3" i.d. bends. Hot -dip galvanized after fabrication. B. Install in alternate courses with horizontal wall reinforcing. C. Block cores into which the ties are placed shall be filled with grout. 2.07 FLEXIBLE ANCHORS: A. Where masonry is indicated to be anchored to structural framework with flexible anchors, provide 2-piece anchors which will permit horizontal and vertical movement of masonry but will provide lateral restraint. 2.08 CONCEALED FLASHING: A. See Section 07651 Laminated Sheet Flashing. 2.09 PREMOLDED CONTROL JOINT STRIPS: A. Solid rubber strips with a Shore A durometer hardness of 60 to 80, designed to fit standard sash block and maintain lateral stability in masonry wall, size and configuration as indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 COORDINATION: A. Carefully coordinate with all other Trades to ensure proper and adequate interface of the work of otner I rases wltin the work oT tnls Jection. 3.02 GENERAL: A. Thickness: Build masonry construction to the full thickness shown, except, build single-wythe walls (if any) to the actual thickness of the masonry units, using units of nominal thickness shown or specified. B. Build chases and recesses as shown and as required for the work of other trades. Provide not les than 8" of masonry between chase or recess and jamb of openings, and between adjacent chases and recesses. C. Cut masonry units with motor -driven saw designed to cut masonry with clean sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide pattern shown and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units without cutting wherever possible. D. Do not wet concrete masonry units. E. Frozen materials and work: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen work. Remove and replace masonry work damaged by frost or freezing. F. Layout walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns, with uniform joint widths and to properly locate openings, movement -type joints, returns and offsets. Avoid the use of less -than -half size units at corners, jambs and wherever possible at other locations. G. Lay-up walls plumb and true and with courses level, accurately spaced and coordinated with other work. 3.03 COURSING: A. One concrete masonry unit plus one joint shall equal 8". B. All joints shall be 3/8", unless indicated otherwise. C. Pattern bond: Running bond. 3.04 LAYING MASONRY - GENERAL: A. Lay masonry plumb, true, and level. B. Lay masonry with full head and bed joints an surfaces joined, unless indicated otherwise. C. Where vertical cells are filled with grout and reinforced, cells shall be aligned to provide clear openings. Cross webs adjacent to vertical cores which are to be fllled with grout shall be fully bedded in mortar to prevent leakage of grout. Cut off face of blocks wherever splices occur to provide cleanout and inspection ports. When reinforcing bars have been installed, mortar in the new faces on cut block to match other block. D. Where thickness of concrete block diminishes, (e.g.: 8" block is set on 12" block) use solid top FICA blocks in top course of thicker portion of wafl. E.Realignment of masonry shall not be permitted after a higher or following course has been laid. Any masonry which is disturbed after the mortar has stiffened shall be removed and reiaid with fresh mortar. F. When work has been stopped and about to resume again, rack back 1/2-masonry unit length in each course. Do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry and remove loose masonry units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry. GDo not lay masonry when air temperature is below 40 degrees F, forecasted to go below 40 degrees F within 24 hours, or when it is raining. 3.05 BUILT-IN WORK: A. As the work progresses, build -in items specified under this and other sections of these Specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. B. Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar. C.Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core. 3.06 INTERSECTING LOAD -BEARING WALLS: A. If carried up seporateiy, block vertical joint with 8" maximum offsets and provide rigid steel anchors spaced not mare than 4'-0" o.c. vertically, or omit blocking and provide rigid steel anchors at not more than 2'-0" o.c. vertically. If used with hollow masonry units, embed ends in mortar filled cares. 3.07 NON -BEARING FNTERIOR PARTITION WALLS: A. Build full height of story to underside of solid structure move, unless otherwise indicated. 3.08 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING: A. Mix in accordwce with ASTM C270. B.Measure and batch materials either by votwme or weight, such that the required proportions for mortar can be accurately controlled and maintained. Measurement of sand exclusively by shovel will not be permitted. C. Fixing: 1.Mix mortars with the maximum amount of water consistent with warkala#ity to provide maximum tensile bond strength within the capacity of the mortar. 2.Mix mortar ingredients for a minirnum of 5 minutes in a mechanical batch mixer. Use water clean and free of deleterious materials which would impair the work. Do not use mortar which has begun to set, or if more than 2-1/2 hours has elapsed since initial mixing. Keep mortar tempered on the board. Retempering in mixer or in mortar box shall not be allowed. D. Laying masonry units: 1.With completely filled bed, head and collar joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not slush head joints. 2. Lay hollow concrete masonry units with full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells; also bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and foundation walls and in all courses of piers, columns and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be reinforced or to be filled with concrete or grout. E.Joints: Maintain joint widths except for minor variations required to maintain bond alignment. If not otherwise indicated, lay walls with 3/8" joints. Cut joints flush for masonry walls which are to be concealed or to be covered by other materials. Tool exposed joints slightly concave. Rake out mortar in preparation for application of caulking or sealants where shown. F.Remove masonry units disturbed above laying; clean and relay in fresh mortar. Do not pound corners at jambs to fit stretcher units which have been set in position. If adjustments are required, remove units, clean off mortar, and reset in fresh mortar. 3.09 CAVITY WALLS: A. Keep cavity clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Strike joints facing cavity, flush. B.Tie exterior wythe to back-up with continuous horizontal joint reinforcing embedded in mortar joints at not more than 16" o.c. vertically. 3.10 CONTINUOUS HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCING - SINGLE WYTHE AND MULTI-WYTHE WALLS: A.Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcing. Fully embed longitudinal side rods in mortar for their entire length with a minimum cover of 5/8" on exterior side of walls and 1/2" at other locations. Lap reinforcements a minimum of 6" at ends of units. Do not bridge control and expansion joints with reinforcing, unless otherwise indicated. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by use of prefabricated "L" and "T" sections. Cut and bend units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures and other special conditions. B.Space continuous horizontal reinforcing as follows: 1.For multi-wythe walls (solid or cavity) where continuous horizontal reinforcing also acts as structural bond or tie between wythes, space reinforcing as required by code but not less than 16" o.c. vertically. 2. For single-wythe walls, space reinforcing at 16" o.c. vertically unless, otherwise indicated. 3. For parapets, space reinforcing at 8" o.c. vertically, unless otherwise indicated. C. Reinforce masonry openings greater than 1'-0" wide, with horizontal joint reinforcing placed in 2 horizontal joints approximately 8" apart, both immediately above the lintel and below the sill. Extend reinforcing a minimum of 2'-0" beyond jambs of the opening, bridging control joints where provided. 3.11 LINTELS: A. Install loose lintels of steel and other materials where shown. B. Provide masonry lintels where shown and wherever openings of more than 1'-0" are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels. Provide precast or formed -in -place masonry lintels. Thoroughly cure precast lintels before handling and installation. Temporarily support farmed -in -place lintels. C. For hollow concrete masonry unit walls, use specially formed "U"-shaped lintel units with reinforcing bars placed as shown and filled with grout. D. Provide minimum bearing at each jamb, of 4" for openings less than 6'-0" wide, and 8" for wider openings.E. Openings in 6" through 12" thick wall: Erect adequate work to support masonry over openings. Keep in place until grout in bond beam lintels has set sufficiently to support the load. Set concrete masonry units in mortar. Lay so that all concrete lintels may be poured in one operation. F. Lay regular course of masonry overhead and reinforce next joint with joint reinforcing equal in length to rods specified above. 3.12 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS: A. Provide vertical expansion, control and isolation joints in masonry where shown. Build -in related masonry accessory items as the masonry work progresses. B. See Division 7 for sealants. C. Build -in joint fillers where shown, specified in a Division 7 Section. D. Control joints: 1. Provide vertical control joints in all masonry walls that exceed 40'-0" in length and/or exceed a ratio of panel length to height (L/H) of 3. These joints shall be placed at the following locations: a. Changes in wall height or thickness. b. At construction joints in foundation, in roof, and in floors. c. At chases and recesses for piping, columns, fixtures, etc. d. At abutment of wall and columns. e. At return angles in "L", "T", and "U" shaped structures. f. At other locations designated on the Drawings. 2. All joint locations must be verified and approved by the Architect. .5. Greate control joints with the use of the control joint gasket, backer rod and sealant. the gasket shall run continuous throughout the full height of the wall. E. Build flanges of metal expansion strips into masonry. Lap each joint 4" in direction of flow. Seal joints below grade and at junctures with horizontal expansion joints, if any. F. Build -in flanges of factory -fabricated expansion joint units, specified in a Division 7. 3.13 FLASHING: A. Exposed metal flashing: 1. Metal flashings shall be installed in strict accordance with the Architectural Sheet Metal Manual of the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. 2. Interlock end joints of deformed metal flashings by overlapping deformations not less than 1-1/2" and seal lap with elastic sealant. B. Concealed flashing: 1.Provide concealed flashings in masonry work at, or above, all shelf angles, lintels, ledges and other obstructions to the downward flow of water in the wall so as to divert such water to the exterior. Prepare masonry surfaces smooth and free from projections which could puncture flashing. Place through -wall flashing on bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Seal penetrations, laps, and edges in flashing with mastic before covering the mortar. 2. Extend flashings the full length of lintels and shelf angles and minimum of 4" into masonry each end. Extend flashing from a line 1/2" in from exterior face of outer wythe of masonry, through the outer wythe, turned up a minimum of 4", and through the inner wythe to within 1/2" of the interior face of the wall in exposed work. Where interior surface of inner wythe is concealed by furring, carry flashing completely through the inner wythe and turn up approximately 2". 3. Install flashings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related work where shown to be built into masonry work. 3.14 (REPAIR, POINTING AND CLEANING - GENERAL: A. Remove and replace masonry units which are loose, chipped, broken, stained or otherwise damaged, or if units do not match adjoining units as intended. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes, except weepholes, and completely fill with mortar. Point -up all joints at corners, openings and adjacent work to provide a neat, uniform appearance, properly prepared for application of caulking or sealant compounds. C. Clean exposed CMU masonry by dry brushing at the end of each days work and after final pointing to remove mortar spots and droppings. 04700 - MANUFACTURED MASONRY Part 1 - General 1.01 Summary A. Section Includes: Manufactured stone veneer, Manufactured stone trim, and application materials. 1.02 References A. American Concrete Institute (ACI). B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM C 39, Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. 2. ASTM C 67, Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay Tile. 3. ASTM C 177, Standard Test Method for Steady -State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded -Hot -Plate Apparatus. 4. ASTM C 192, Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Laboratory. 5. ASTM C 270, Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry. 6. ASTM C 482, Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Ceramic Tile to Portland Cement. 7. ASTM D 226, Standard Specification for Asphalt -Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. C. Building Materials Evaluation Commission. D. International Code Council (ICC): 1. ES Report. 2. UBC Standard No. 14-1, Kraft Waterproof Building Paper. E. Masonry Standards Joint Committee (MSJC) of The Masonry Society. F. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): 1. Listing in Material Approval Guide. 2. UL 723, Standard for Safety for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 1.03 Submittals A. Reference Section 01 33 0-Slarbmittal Procedures; submit following items: 1. Product Data: Manufactured masonry and application materials including mortar color charts, and weather resistant barrier. 2. Samples: Panel containing full-size samples of specified manufactured masonry showing full range of colors and textures complete with specified mortar. a. Actual size of masonry sample approximately 12 by 12 inches (300 by 300 mm). 3. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: a. Qualifications: 1) Proof of manufacturer qualifications. 2)Proof of installer qualifications. b. Certificates: ICC-ES Report. c. Test Reports for physical properties. d. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions. B. Closeout Submittals: Reference Section 01330-Closeout Submittals; submit following items: 1. Maintenance Instructions. 2. Special Warranties. 1.04 Quality Assurance A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer Qualifications: a. Minimum five years experience in producing manufactured masonry. b. Member of following organizations: 1) MSJC. 2) ACI. 3) ASTM. 2. Installer Qualifications: Company with documented experience in installation of manufactured masonry including minimum 5 projects within 400 mile radius of this Project. B. Certifications: 1. Current ICC-ES Report. 2. UL: Listing in Material Approval Guide. 3. Building Materials Evaluation Commission. 4. HUD: Material Release Number. 5. Florida Product Approval Number. 1.05 Delivery, Storage, and Handling A. Reference Section 01 66 00-Product Storage and Handling Requirements. B. Follow manufacturer's instructions. C. Store moisture -sensitive materials in weather protected enclosures. 1.06 Project/SITE Conditions A. Environmental Requirements: Maintain materials and ambient temperature in area of installation at minimum 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) prior to, during, and for 48 hours following installation. 1.07 Warranty A. Special Warranty. Provide manufacturer's standard limited warranty against defects in manufacturing for a period of 50 years following date of Substantial Completion. By 1.08 Maintenance 4� sre; A. Extra Materials: Furnish extra manufactured stone material in a variety of shapes and sizes in"ew quantity equal to three percent of the installed stone. Part 2 - Products 2.01 Manufacturer A.Owens CorningTel: (800) 255-1727 One Owens Corning Parkway Fax: (866) 213-3037 Toledo, OH 43659 Website: www.culturedstone.com <http: //www.culturedstone.com/> B. Substitutions: None permitted. 2.02 Manufactured masonry Materials A. Cultured Stone Textures: 1. Single Texture: Country Ledgestone, Chardonnay. B. Architectural Trim: 1. Quoins -Stone Textured: a. Color: As shown on Drawings b. Size: 12 by 8 by 8 inches high (300 by 200 by 200 mm high). 2. Watertable/Sill-Stone Textured: a. Color: As shown on Drawings. b. Size: 2 (front), 2-1/2 (back), by 3 by 18 inches (50 (front), 65 (back) by 75 by 455 mm). c. Provide sloped top surface and drip edge. 3. Receptacle Stones -Raised Chamfered Edge: 8-STRAIGHT PROTOTYPE - REVISION 16 - 06-18-08 N Y _ M >_ J Z U F_�rb U +cnU fn U o w p M LU OR z <O�MM < = 3 w Z pne 02 o� w < cal En m n- ri ISSUE DATE 12-1-08 DATE This drawing and the design shown is the property of the architect. The reproduction, copying or use of this drawing without their written consent is prohibited and any infringement will be subject to legal action. SPECIFICATIONS A=13 T , --ter- ,�-1- , 1,r n-F._,TJ 04700 - MANUFACTURED MASONRY I D. USE- curnmurl W! t-, flullS, exurpt us utherwist: noted. Uzm linishing nutis lur Ilifth work. Sul U : a. Color: As shown on Drawings. G. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, carbon steel, ANSI 818.21.1. 3.03 ANGLES AT ROOF DECK OPENINGS: fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will H. Expansion anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to A. Provide angles in single lengths where indicated. Drill 2" holes for attachment of wood, with a b. Size: 6 by 8 by 1-1/2 inches (150 by 205 by 38 mm). 9 9 9 c. Provide single receptacle 2 b 4 b 1-1 2 inch 50 b 100 b 38 mm UL approved metal sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and minimum of two attachment points and a maximum spacing of 24" o.c. receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without 9 P Y Y / ( Y Y ) PP splitting of wood; predrill as required. • extension box. equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E4$8 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 3.04 LOOSE LINTELS: ,� 3.02 WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS, BLOCKING AND SLEEPERS: 1. Carbon steel components zinc -plated to comply with ASTM B633, Class Fe/Zn 5. A. Make loose lintels Ion enough to provide 8 of bearing on each end. C. Manufactured Masonry Physical Properties: 9 9 P 9 A. Provide for screeding or attachment of other work. Form to shapes as shown and cut as 1. Compressive Strength: ASTM C 192 and ASTM C39, 1800 psi (12.4 MPa), 5 specimen average, 2. Group 1 alloy 304 or 316 stainless -steel bolts and nuts comply with ASTM F593 (ASTM 1. Hot -dip galvanized. required for true line and level of work to be attached. Coordinate location with other work 1500 psi (10.3 MPa) minimum for individual unit. F738M) and ASTM F594 (ASTM F836M). 2. Provide loose lintels to the masonry trade for installation. involved. I. Toggle bolts: FS FF-B-588, tumble -wing type, class and style as required. B. Attach to wall framing to support applied loading. 2. Bond Between Stone Unit, Type S Mortar, and Backing: ASTM C 482, 50 psi (345 kPa). 9 PP PP � 9• 3. Thermal Resistance: ASTM C 177, R-factor, 0.355 per inch (25.4 mm) of thickness. J. Concrete anchors: Phillips Red Head, self -drilling anchors. Catalog No. S-38 with machine bolts 3.05 WELDING PLATES: 1. Countersink bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise shown. and washers. A. Fabricate plates of sizes indicated. Fabricate to have a minimum of two Nelson Studs on bottom 2. Build into masonry during installation of masonry work. 4. Freeze/Thaw: ASTM C 67, no disintegration and less than 3 percent weight loss. side of plates. Use stud sizes indicated plates. Use stud sizes indicated. 3. Where possible, anchor to formwork before concrete placement. 5. Fire Hazard Test, UL 723: 2.04 GROUT: 4. In stud walls, provide blocking for support of wall cabinets, toilet vanities, etc. a. Flame spread: 0. A. Nonshrink, metallic grout: Factory -packaged, ferrous -aggregate grout comply with ASTM C1107, 3.06 SHOP COAT: C. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, preservative treated, key -beveled lumber not less than b. Smoke Development: 0. specifically recommended by manufacturer for heavy-duty loading applications. A. Before steel leaves shop, remove loose mill scale, rust and foreign matter, and apply one coat of 6. Maximum Veneer Unit Weight: 15 sf 73 k m2 . 1-1/2" wide and of thickness. required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material 9 P ( 9/ ) B. Nonshrink, nonmetallic grout: Factory -packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout primer. Do not paint surfaces at places to be welded. involved. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required. Ln � complying with ASTM C1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and �„ r14 2.03 related materials exterior application. 3.07 ERECTION: 3.03 WOOD NAILERS AT ROOF PERIMETER FOR ELASTOMERIC SHEET ROOFING: Y o A. Weather Resistant Barrier: Kraft waterproof building paper, UBC Standard No. 14-1 No. 15, Type A. Use only experienced welders qualified by American Welding Society prescribed testing. = M E I, asphalt saturated felt, ASTM D 226. A. Install wood Hailers at the roof perimeter for the installation of elastomeric roofing. Anchor firmly U ,.,., o P 2.05 FABRICATION: B. Miscellaneous angles, bent plates, and clip angles: Install as indicated. to deck at 3'-0" o.c. to resist a force of 175 lbs. per lineal foot in any direction. Where the deck ~O u � s B. Metal Lath: [2.5 lb (1.4 kg/m2) galvanized expanded metal lath] [18 (1.3 mm) gauge woven A. Form metal fabrications from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated but not less than C. Bent plates at roof edges: Before welding plates to structural members, accurately align them so consists of material with limited holdingcapability, the anchoringshall be accomplished b fastening= � - _ co U wire mesh] [3.4 lb (1.8 kg/m2) galvanized expanded rib lath]. that needed to comply with performance requirements indicated. Work to dimensions indicated or that wood members shall be installed on bent plates can be plumbed with face of brick. After bent to the supporting steel or with toggle bolts penetrating to the nderside of the deck or such meas + � v O �; °� s C. Fasteners: accepted on shop drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support. Use type of materials plates are lined up, weld them securely in place. PP g gg P g „ v �'--' O o as may be approved in writing the roof manufacturer. 2 vents aces shall be provided between 0 w ne Z c 1. Into Wood Studs: Minimum 0.120 inch (3 mm) shank diameter galvanized nails or staples of indicated or specified for various components of each metal fabrication. D. Welding plates: Install welding plates when concrete and bond beams are set. When concrete has Y PP g P P � � Q O � M M adjacent lengths of nailers. Q - w i- sufficient length to penetrate 1-3/8 inches (35 mm) minimum into the stud. begun to set, clean off tops of plates to assure clean welding surfaces. 2 3 F- Z ,1j 11j B. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles on surfaces and straight sharp E. Steel plates: Install plates as indicated. U rn - w - 2. Into Metal Studs: Minimum 7/16 inch (11.1 mm) head diameter, corrosion -resistant , P g g P P P p D ce '-C� � self-drilling,self tapping, pancake head screws of sufficient length to penetrate 3 8 inch 10 edge.C. Exterior work: Allow for thermal movement resulting from change in ambient temperature in F. Threaded anchor bolts: Have anchor bolts formed into slab as indicated. w ¢ N U) CO 0- PP g' P g P / ( the design, fabrication, and installation of installed metal assemblies to prevent buckling, opening up (�(� mm) minimum into the stud. of joints, and overstressing of welds and fasteners. Base design calculations on actual surface 3.08 CLEAN-UP: 06400 - M I LL V V�/�� ORK D. Mortar: Premixed Type N or mortar mixed using components and proportions following temperatures of metals due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss. A. When steel has been installed, clean up spatter and debris resulting from welding. Where welding is manufactured masonry manufacturer's installation instructions. Comply with ASTM C 270. C. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs. rough and may interfere with smooth laying of metal deck, grind welds. 1. Mortar Color: Iron oxide pigments. D. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32", unless otherwise indicated. Form PART 1 - GENERAL Part 3 - Execution bent -metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing 3.09 TOUCH-UP PAINTING: work. A. When steel has been installed, touch-up welds, scarred and abraded places on bent plates, 1.01 SCOPE: + 3.01 Examination E. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces. structural steel and bar joists with rust -inhibiting paint. Ensure compatibility with finish, field paint. A. Provide all of the labor, materials, equipment and services required to install the millwork. Millwork F. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: See Section 09900. to be provided by national vendor - Darko Company, Inc. A. Examine substrates upon which manufactured masonry will be installed. 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion B. Coordinate with responsible entity to correct unsatisfactory conditions. /� p R� 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: 1 4 • C.Commencement of work b installer is acceptance of substrate conditions. resistance Obtain base metals. 1 -GENERAL CARPENTRY y P 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. A. In addition to complying with all pertinent codes and regulations, the "Quality Standards" of the 3. Remove welding flux immediately. Architectural Woodwork Institute shall apply and by reference are hereby made a part of these 3.02 Preparation �> „ „„ » A. Protection: Prevent work from occurring on the opposite of walls to which manufactured 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so that no Contract Documents. Any reference to premium , custom", or economy shall be defined in the PART 1 -GENERAL masonry is applied during and for 48 hours following installation of the manufactured masonry. roughness shows after finishing, and contour of welded surface matches those adjacent. latest edition of AWI "Quality Standards". G. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners wherever B. Field measurements: Check actual locations of walls and other construction to which millwork B. Surface Preparation: Follow manufacturer's instructions designated below for the appropriate 1.01 SCOPE: P 9possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, Phillips flat -head A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and services required to complete the general carpentry fabrications must fit by accurate field measurements before fabrication. Show recorded type of manufactured masonry and substrate. countersunk screws or bolts. Locate joints where least conspicuous. measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to (countersunk) J P work miscellaneous equipment and material installation. P 9 P 9 3.03 INSTALLATION H. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and space avoid delaying the Work. anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A.Install Cultured Stone? products in accordance with manufacturer's Cultured Stone? installation I. Shop assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing A. Lumber standards: Comply with PS 20 and with applicable rules of the respective agencies for 1.03 SUBMITTALS: instructions using [grouted] [mortarless] joints. and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use species and products specified. A. Prior to fabrication, submit to the Architect for review the following: c3 • B.Install architectural trim products in accordance with manufacturer's Cultured Stone? installation connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and 1. Shop drawings that at a minimum shall show the following: o B. Plywood product standards: Comply with PS 1 (ANSI A199.1) or, for products not manufactured instructions. coordinated installation. under PS 1 provisions, with applicable APA Performance Standard for type of panel indicated. a. All materials (solid wood, plywood, particleboard, fiberwood board, plastic laminate and � • C.Install/Apply Related Materials specified above in accordance with type of substrate and J. Cut, reinforce, drill, and top metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and hardware). manufactured masonry manufacturer's installation instructions. similar items. 1.03 PRODUCT HANDLING: b. All thicknesses and dimensions. `J K. Fabricate joints that will u exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or provide weep A. Do not deliver shop fabricated carpentry items until site conditions are adequate to receive the c. Specie, grade and cut of woods and veneers. 11 3.04 field quality control holes where water may accumulate. work. Protect items from weather while in transit. d. Jointing and bolting. A. Manufacturer's Field Services: Provide 2 periodic site visits, each of approximately one hour B. Store indoors, in ventilated area with a constant, minimum temperature of 60 degrees F, maximum e. The name of the manufacturer and the model number of all factory fabricated items. duration. 2.06 ROUGH HARDWARE: humidity of 25 to 55 percent. f. Fuld size details drawn in related and dimensioned positions to facilitate checking of A. Furnish bent, or otherwise custom -fabricated, bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, dowels, and other intersecting and string dimensions. 3.05 Cleaning miscellaneous steel and iron shapes as required. g. Clear description of work to be done in the shop and work to be done in the field. A. Reference Section 01 74 00-Cleaning and Waste Management. B. Fabricate items to sizes, shapes, and dimensions required. Furnish malleable -iron washers for PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2. Manufacturer's literature of specialty items not manufactured by the architectural woodworker. : M heads and nuts that bear on wood structural connections, and furnish steel washers elsewhere. ° N B. Clean manufactured masonry in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. m M 2.07 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS: 2.01 LUMBER: 1.04 PRODUCT HANDLING: �� ,° 3.06 Protection A. Dimensions: Conform to standards established by the American Lumber Standards Committee. A. Millwork shall not be delivered until the building and storage areas are sufficiently dry so that the n o A. Provide steel framingand supports for applications indicated that are not a art of structural steel = „NM MNM A. Protect finished work from rain during and for 48 hours following installation. PP PP P B. Moisture content: Unseasoned or 19% maximum at the time of permanent closing in of the millwork will not be damaged by excessive changes in moisture content. : ��, 6 _ r framework as required to complete the Work. �o N B. Protect finished work from damage during remainder of construction period. structure. Z _ Ce �_ B. Fabricate units to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and required to receive other adjacent C. Surfacing: S4S. PART 2 - PRODUCTS UPzfLL r z�:=i;� construction retained by framing and supports. Fabricate from structural steel shapes, p "" ° m ° x lutes, and W �o -s 05500 -MISCELLANEOUS METAL steel bars of welded construction usingmitered joints for field connection. Cut, drill, and to units D. Miscellaneous lumber: o u N - d - J p to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items. 1. Provide FRT wood for support or attachment of other work including, but not limited to, 2.01 CASEWORK - PLASTIC LAMINATE FINISH: o cant strips, bucks, nailers, plates, blocking, bracing, furring, grounds, stripping and similar members. A. AWI quality grade (Section 400): Premium. 1. Equip units with integrally welded anchors for casting into concrete or building into masonry. Provide lumber of sizes indicated, worked into shapes shown. B. Exposed surfaces plastic laminate: 1 16" high pressure plastic laminate as required b AWI PART 1 -GENERAL Furnish inserts if units must be installed after concrete is placed. P P / g P P q y 2. Shall be #2, FRT, GM, SYP, KDAT (Kiln Dried After Treatment). quality grade and conforming to NEMA Publication No. LDI-.1964, Part 3 - Abrasion Class I. 1.01 SCOPE: C. Semi -exposed surfaces: As governed by selected AWI quality grade. o 2.08 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM: O A. Provide all of the labor, materials, equipment and services required to furnish and install the A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from structural steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles 2.02 PLYWOOD - GENERAL: • miscellaneous metal items. shown with continuously welded joints, and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed A. Identify each panel with the appropriate grade APA trademark and shall meet the requirements of 2.02 COUNTERTOPS: B. All items of miscellaneous metal work and related parts are not necessarily described. The most field splices wherever possible. the latest edition of U. S. Product Standard PSI or one of APA's Performance Standards. A. AWI quality grade (Section 400): Premium. o a important and those requiring detailed description are usually mentioned. Provide all other work as B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as required to coordinate assembly and installation with B. All plywood which has an edge or surface permanently exposed to the weather shall be classed B. Plastic laminate: Exterior. 1. 1 16" high pressure plastic laminate as required b AWI unlit rode and conforming to indicated on the Drawings and/or necessary to complete the Contract, except for items which may other work. / 9 P P q Y quality 9 9 be specifically excluded from the work of this Section. C. Panel thickness, grade, and Group or Identification Index shall be at least equal to that shown on NEMA Publication No. LDI-1964, Part 3 - Abrasion Class I. 2.09 SHOP COAT: the Drawings. Installation shall be in accordance with the APA recommendations. 2. All tops in which sinks occur shall have a core of exterior grade hardwood faced plywood or D. Fire rated plywood: phenolic resin particleboard. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Prepare uncoated ferrous metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for P P A. In addition to complying with all pertinent codes and regulations, comply with: SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal 1. Provide for mounting electrical or teiephone equipment and as otherwise noted. 1. "Specification for Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Building" of the fabrications: 2. 3/4", APA C-D Plugged INT with exterior glue. 2.03 CASEWORK HARDWARE: American Institute of Steel Construction. 1. Exteriors: SSPC-SP 6 "Commercial Blast Cleaning". A. All cabinet hardware shall be furnished and installed by the casework manufacturer. 2. "Code for Welding in Building Construction" of the American Welding Society. 2. Interiors: SSPC-SP 3 "Power Tool Cleaning". 2.03 SOFFITS: 1. Drawer slides: Knape & Vogt No. 1300. 256. No. Vogt & APA A-C EXT. 2. Shelf standards and brackets: Knape 255 3. Manual of Steel Construction, 9th edition, Part 1 for types of steel required. B. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized finishes A. P g / Q B. Conflicting requirements: In the event of conflict between pertinent codes and regulations and the or to be embedded in concrete, sprayed -on fireproofing, or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. B. Continuous soffit vent: Fry Reglet DCS-625-V-300 (verify profile and dimensions required). a. Parts shelving: Provide extra heavy duty brackets. e requirements of the referenced standards of these Specifications, the provisions of the more stringent Comply with requirements of SSPC-PA 1 "Paint Application Specification No. 1" for shop painting. 3. Shelf standards and support clips: Knape & Vogt No. 233/256. h cc P Y q PP P P g' 2.04 WOOD TREATi®�ENT -PRESERVATIVE: ac Z 0 shall govern. Use only top quality, rust -inhibiting primer. a. Parts shelving: Provide extra heavy duty standards and clips. O O • C. Certifythat each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes A. Lumber or plywood shall be preservative treated in the following instances: 4. Hinges: Concealed casework hinge with self -closing feature. a J Y P q 9 P 1. Ensure that primer is compatible with finish, field paint. See Section 09900. 1. Whenever wood is laced in the round; g g g LL involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification. P g 5. Pulls: 4" brushed aluminum wire pull. 2. Whenever wood is placed in water; 6. Locks: Corbin Cabinet Locks No. C2L cam lock. 2.10 GALVANIZING: 3. Wherever wood comes in contact with masonry or concrete; O yw 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Any metal that has any surface or edge exposed to the weather shall be hot -dip galvanized after y V `4 A. Prior to installation, submit to the Architect for review the following:4. Wherever wood is exposed to wetting and corrosive environments; 2.04 CLOSET AND STORAGE SHELVING - PAINT FINISH: (5 J fabrication All galvanized shall meet the requirements set forth in ASTM A 446-76 and ASTM A 5. Wherever wood would be susceptible to deco organisms or insects. og ... • 1. Shop drawings showing all locations, markings, quantities, materials, sizes, and shapes and 525-80. y g A. AWI quality grade (Section 600): Custom. >.- indicate all methods of connecting,anchoring, fastening, bracing, and attachingto the work B. Comply with applicable requirements of AWPA Standards C2 (Lumber) and C9 (Plywood) and of B. Provide hardwood edge strips. It 9• 9• 9� of other Trades. AWPB Standards listed below. Mark each treated item with the AWPB Quality Mark Requirements. g P � 2.11 MANUFACTURED ITEMS: C LP-3 P-4 and -22 as applicable. _ 2. Prequalified welding procedures, prepared by the steel fabricator and erector, as a written A. Manufactured items of types normally carried in stock inventories, as distinguished from items C. Water borne preservatives shall comply with AWPB LP 2, L LP app 2.05 OTHER MATERIALS: W � • procedure specification to the Architect. Prepare these procedures in accordance with After treatment, kiln -dry to a maximum moisture content of 159a A. All other materials, not N W P P P P fabricated especially for this Project, shall be fabricated from materials customarily used by the specifically described, but required for a complete and proper installation Appendix E of the AWS Structural Welding Code. manufacturer, irrespective of the requirements of this Specification, unless in particular instances, D. Complete fabrication of treated items prior to treatment, where possible. If cut after treatment, of the millwork items, shall be as selected by the Contractor but subject to the approval of the NJ 3. Written erection sequence and procedure to be used by steel erector. special materials shall be specified. With respect to shop prime coats of point on such stocked coat cut surfaces with heavy brush coat of same aged ai used for treatment. Inspect each piece Architect. . I)S2 4. Mill certification that steel supplied meets requirements of specifications. items, manufacturer's standard finish will be accepted unless specified otherwise. of lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces. 5. Electrode manufacturer's certification that the electrode and flux combination meets the PART 3 - EXECUTION ;t requirements of the particular classification or grade of electrodes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 2.05 WOOD TREATMENT - FIRE -RETARDANT: 6. Certification that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding A. Provide materials which comply with AWPA standards for pressure impregnation with fire -retardant 3.01 PREPARATION FOR FINISHING: processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification. chemicals, and which have a flame spread rating of not more than 25 when tested in accordance A. Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, fillip countersunk fasteners, sealing of P P 9 3.01 PREPARATION: P y q Y 9� 9 9 7. Certification that surface preparation has been completed in accordance with the instructions with UL Test 723 or ASTM E84, and sholl show no increase in flame spread and significant concealed surfaces and similar preparations for finishing of millwork as applicable to each unit of P P P A. Coordinate and furnish anchorage, setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions P P 9 PP and recommendations of the point or coating manufacturer. progressive combustion upon continuation of test for additional 20 minutes. work P 9 for installing anchorages, including concrete inserts, sleeves, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items ISSUE DATE 8. Shop primer: Complete manufacturer?s literature fully describing the product, mill thickness havingintegral anchors that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate B. Where treated items are exposed to exterior or to Pugh humidities or are to have a transparent g Y finish in form of stain or sealer, provide materials which show no chap in fire -hazard 12-1-08 • and application. delivery of such items to Project site. P � 3.02 PREPARATION FOR INSTALLATION: classification when subjected to standard rain test (UL 790 or ASTM 82898). A. Condition millwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas prior to installing. 1.04 PRODUCT HANDLING: C. Use fire -retardant treatment which will not bleed through or adversely affect type of finish B. Deliver concrete inserts and similar anchoring devices to be built into substrates, well in advance 3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL: 9 A. Stack and store steel above ground on platforms, studs, or other supports. Protect steel from A. Fastening to in -place construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for indicated and which does not require brush treatment of fieid-made end cuts to maintain of the time substrates are to be built. corrosion and damage. Kee materials clean. fire -hazard classification. C. Prior to installation of architectural woodwork, examine shop fabricated work for completion, and REV DATE 9 P securing miscellaneous metal fabrications to in -place construction. Include threaded fasteners for P P B. Store other materials in a weatherti ht, dry lace until read for use. D. Where transparent finish is indicated, use type of treatment and species which permits milling of complete work as required, including back priming and removal of packing. 9 Y P Y concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through -belts, wood screws, and other connectors as P q 9 P 9 P 9• C. Store packaged materials in their original, unbroken package or container. lumber after treatment without altering indicated fire- hazard classification, as determined by fire D. Back rime all surfaces that shall be concealed after installation. P 9P 9 necessitated. P B. Cutting, fitting, and placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing testing. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS: miscellaneous metal fabrications. Set metal fabrication accurately in location, alignment, and E. KDAT items to maximum moisture content of 19X 3.03 INSTALLATION: A. Field measurements: Check actual locations of walls and other construction to which metal F. Provide UL label on each piece of fire -retardant lumber or plywood. A. Install the work plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions. Shim as required using • elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from G. Inspect each piece of treated lumber or. plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective P g q g fabrications must fit by accurate field measurements before fabrication. Show recorded established lines and levels. 1e P P �' y g g concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8" in 8'-O" for plumb and level; and with 1/16" 2 measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in from work for items that are to be built into concrete P maximum offset in flush adjoining surfaces, 1/8 maximum offsets in revealed adjoining surfaces..? ��' avoid delaying the Work. masonry or similar construction. B. Scribe and cut work to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish at e`; 2.06 WOOD NAILERS AT ROOF PERIMETER FOR ELASTOMERIC SHEET ROOFING: D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not cuts. er. e�,, � A. Nailers shall be #2 or better lumber, wolmanized pressure treated for fire and rot resistance. PART 2 -PRODUCTS to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop -welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not C. Anchor millwork to anchors or built-in blocking. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with Creosote and asphaltic preservatives are not acceptable. Surface height of nailers shall be matched weld, cut, or abrade the surfaces of exterior units that have been hot -dip galvanized after fabrication to that of the new insulation thickness being used. countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation. Except � 2.01 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL SHAPES: and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections. g where prefinished matching fastener heads are required, use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, A. ASTM A 36. E. Field welding: countersunk and filled flush with millwork, and matching final finish where transparent finish is `9�' 4 B. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials selected for their 2.07 FASTENERS AND ANCHORAGE: p P P 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion AProvide t material d finish indicated d dapplicable standards, indicated. surface flatness, smoothness, and freedom from surface blemishes. Do not use materials with resistance of base metals. A. rove size, e, maeraanas anas recommended b Y pp exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. complying with Federal Specifications for nails, staples, screws, bolts, nuts, washers and anchoring 3.04 CASEWORK: devices. Provide metal hangers and framing anchors of the size and type recommended by the 3. Remove welding flux immediately. A. Set and secure casework in place rigid, plumb and square. 2.02 WELDING ELECTRODES: 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so that no manufacturer for each use including recommending nails. B. Use purpose designed fixture attachments for wall mounted components. Attach wall mounted A. Electrodes having low hydrogen covering shall be purchased in hermetically sealed containers. roughness shows after finishing, and contour of welded surface matches those adjacent. B. Where rough carpentry work is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high humidity, cabinets in order that they can withstand all superimposed loading. B. For fabricating plant use: E-70 electrodes, AWS A5.5, A5.17, and A5.20. F. Corrosion protection: Protect concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with provide fasteners and anchorages with a hot -dip zinc coating (ASTM A 153). C. Use thread steel concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units and C. For field use: E-70 electrodes, AWS A5.5, A5.17, and A5.20. " counter tops. grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with a minimum layer of 8 neoprene sheet, D. Permanently fix cabinet and counter bases to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages. 2.03 FASTENERS: washer, or plywood. Bituminous paint may be allowed in certain areas as approved by the Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION E. Counter -sink semi -concealed anchorage devices used to wall mount components, and conceal with A. Provide plated fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for electro-deposited zinc 3.03 CONTINUOUS BENT PLATES: solid plugs of species to match surrounding wood. Place flush with surrounding surfaces. coating,for exterior use or where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for the type, grade, and 3.01 GENERAL: � g A. Provide continuous single angles in Ion lengths where indicated or necessitated. Drill 2" holes for F. Carefully scribe cabinetwork which is against other building materials leaving gaps of 1/32" 9 9 9 9 A. Discard units of material with defects which might impair quality of work, and units which are too class required.B. Bolts and nuts: Regular hexagon -head bolts, ASTM A307, Grade A (ASTM F568, ., maximum. Seal gaps with sealant tinted to match adjacent surfaces. Do not use additional wood attachment at 24 o.c. where required. small to use in fabricating work with minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement. Property Class 4.6), with hex nuts, ASTM A563 (ASTM A563M), and, where indicated, flat washers. overlay trim for this purpose. B. Set carpentry work accurately to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true and C. Machine screws: ANSI 618.6.3. G. Install and adjust cabinet hardware to ensure smooth and correct operation. 3.02 MISCELLANEOUS CLIP ANGLES AND BENT PLATES: accurately cut and fitted. D. Lag screws: ANSI B end, 1 (ANSI teal,B18.ANSI A. Provide as indicated or necessitated. Drill 2" holes for wood attachment at 24" o.c. where C. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as shown and as required E. Wood screws: Flat head, carbon steel, ANSI B18.6.1. required. by recognized standards. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes. 3.05 ADJUSTMENT, CLEANING, FINISHING AND PROTECTION: F. Plain washers: Round carbon steel ANSI B18.22.1 ANSI B18.22M0 . 8-STRAIGHT PROTOTYPE -REVISION 16 - 06-18-08 ' -- T1 I i I 11 I 1 I - --- - -- I I ---------T-- -:;.,. ,- . __ i I , I j, .f- _,I 1,- li A a t��r -_. i s 06400 - MILLWORK A. Repair damaged and defective millwork wherever possible to eliminate defects functionally and 3.02 INSTALLATION OVER METAL DECK: 19. ASTM E 2485 (formerly EIMA Std. 101.01) Standard Test Method for Freeze -Thaw Resistance and installation sequence. visually; where not possible to repair properly, replace millwork. Adjust joinery for uniform A. Verify that flutes are dry and clean. of Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS) and Water -Resistive Barrier Coatings appearance. B. Roof deck insulation: 20. ASTM E 2486 (formerly EIMA Std. 101.86) Standard Test Method for Impact Resistance of C. Samples: The contractor shall submit to the owner/architect two (2) samples of the B. Clean hardware, lubricate and make final adjustments for proper operation. 1. Loose lay insulation board. Lay boards with moderate contact without forcing joints. Cut Class PB and PI Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS) Outsulation System for each finish, texture and color to be used on the project. The same C. Clean millwork on exposed and semi -exposed surfaces. Touch-up shop -applied finishes to restore insulation to fit neatly to perimeter blocking and protrusions. Install in layers as tools and techniques proposed for the actual installation shall be used. Samples shall be of P P P21. ASTM G 155 (Federal Test Standard 141 A Method 6151) Standard Practice for damaged or soiled areas. recommended by roof insulation manufacturer to achieve thickness and slope required. sufficient size to accurately represent each color and texture being utilized on the project. 9 Operating -Xenon Arc Light Apparatus, for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials D. Provide final St protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to fabricator and installer, Stagger end joints in adjoining; stagger joints in each layer with those of layer below. Butt P P 22. DS107, Dryvit Outstrlatian System Installation Details which ensures millwork being without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. each panel to adjoining panels. Discard damaged panels. 23. DS131, Dryvit Expanded Polystyrene Ins-ulati in Board Specification D. Test Reports - When requested, the contractor shall submit to the owner/architect copies of 2. If insulation board dues not have facer that is compatible with roof membrane, cover entire 24. DS135, Specification for Outsulation System with Mechanical Fasteners selected test reports verifying the performance of the Outsulation System. area with recover board. 25. D5151, Custom Brick? Polymer System Specifications for Use on Vertical Walls 07214 -FOAMED -IN-PLACE INSULATION 3. Mechanically attach (through all layers) to substrate. Attach using fasteners and method of 26. DS152, Dryvit Cleaning and Recooting 1,06 QUALITY ASSURANCE fastening as approved by the manufacturer. Minimum placement throughout the field shall be 27. DS153, Dryvit Expansion Joints and Sealants A. Qualifications • 1 plate and 1 fastener every 2 sq. ft. Around the building perimeter and at building corners, 28. DS159, Dryvit Water Vapor Transmission 1. System Manufacturer: Shall be Dryvit Systems, Inc. All materials shall be manufactured or PART 1 - GENERAL increase plate/fastener placement in accordance with referenced FM standard. 29. DS204, Dryvit Outsulation System Application Instructions sold by Dryvit and shall be purchased from Dryvit or its authorized distributors. 4. Fasteners shall penetrate a maximum of 1" below the roof deck surface. 30. DS456, Rapidry DM? 35-50 or DS457, Rapidry DM? 50-75 Data Sheets a. Materials shall be manufactured at a facility covered by a current ISO 9001:2000 1.01 - SCOPE: 31. DS494, Dryvit AquaFlash? System certification and ISO 14001:2004. Certification of the facility shall be done by a registrar A. Provide all of the labor, materials, equipment, and services to furnish and install the 3.03 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED ROOF INSULATION MATERIAL: 32. Mil Std E5272 Environmental Testing accredited by the American National Standards Institute, Registrar Accreditation Board N ,� foamed -in -place insulation. (ANSI-RAB). N A. Protect installed product from weather that might cause damage and the finish surface from 33. Mil Std 8108 Environmental Test Methods Y o damage during the progress of construction. Maintain this protection throughout the installation of 34. UBC Std 26-4 (Formerly UBC 17-6) Multi -Story Fire Evaluation of Exterior Non 2. Contractor: Shall be knowledgeable in the proper installation of the Dryvit Outsulation System = M E 1.02 - QUALITY ASSURANCE: and shall be experienced and competent in the installation of Exterior Insulation and Finish U w o the roofing and flashing materials. Do not deform or otherwise damage the roof insulation during Load-Bearin Foam Plastic Insulated Wall Systems P P i- Z U A. Installation shall be by an experienced installer who is approved by the manufacturer of the g Systems. Additional) the contractor shall possess a current Outsulation System Trained O U entire roofing applications sequences. Deformed or damaged materials will be removed and new 35. NFPA 268 Standard Test Method for Determining Ignitibility of Exterior Wall Assemblies Using Ys Y� P Ys CO insulation material. materials shall be installed. a Radiant Heat Energy Source. Contractor Certificate* issued by Dryvit Systems, Inc. = U n - M - B. Independent testing (ASTM E84-81A) shall be provided to verify that the 3. Insulation Board Manufacturer: Shall be listed b Dryvit Systems, Inc., shall be capable of �,, M o B. During the installation period and prior to the installation of the roofing membrane, protect the 36. NFPA 285 Standard Method of Test for the Evaluation of Flammability Characteristics of y �` Y P to U O 1. Flame Spread Factor: 25 OR LESS. producing the Expanded Polystyrene EPS in accordance with current Dryvit Specification for p w ce Z deck underneath the roof insulation from adverse weather or from water penetrating into the area. Exterior Nan Load -Bearing Wall Assemblies Containin Combustible Components Using the P 9 P(EPS) Yv P Smoke Density Factor: 450 OR LESS. P g g g P gn Q O m Intermediate -Scale, Multistory Test Apparatus Insulation Board, DS131, and shall subscribe to the Dryvit Third Party Certification and Quality ¢ _ ,,, 2. This testing shall also verify that, when this standard test is extended to 30 minutes, there Ln 3.04 INSPECTION: 37. ULC S101 Standard Methods of Fire Endurance Tests of BuildingConstruction Materials Assurance Program. 3 U a, � w - is no further flame progression. p - � A. Upon completion of the installation, visually inspect each insulated area and verify that all 38. ANSI FM 4880 Evaluating Insulated Wall or Wall and Roof/Ceiling Assemblies; Plastic Interior 4. Panel Fabricator: Shall be a contractor experienced and competent in the fabrication of ,�, Q o, N m ,_ C. Independent testing and evaluations shall d provided to verify that the cementitious foam insulation is complete and properly installed. architectural wall panels and shall possess a current Outsulation System Contractor Certificate* insulation does not contain formaldehyde and is approximately 98� inorganic. Finish Materials; Plastic Exterior Building Panels; Wall/Ceiling Coating Systems; Interior or issued by Dryvit Systems, Inc. D. The manufacturer shall certify that the cementitious foam insulation is free from asbestos. Exterior Finish Systems 5. Panel Erector: Shall be experienced and competent in the installation of architectural wall 1.03 SUBMITTALS: 07230 - PERIMETER INSULATION 1.03 DEFINITIONS panel systems and shall be: A. Base Coat: Material used to encapsulate one or more layers of reinforcingmesh full embedded a. The panel fabricator, or A.Prior to installation, submit the following the Architect for review: P � y b. An erector approved by the panel fabricator or 1. Complete and fully descriptive manufacturer's literature describing the product and its proper PART 1 -GENERAL that is applied to the outside surface of the EPS. c. An erector under the direct supervision of the panel fabricator + installation for this Project. 1.01 SCOPE: B. Building Expansion Joint: A joint through the entire building structure designed to accommodate 1.04 DELIVERY AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS: A. Provide all of the labor, materials, equipment, and services to furnish and install the perimeter structural movement. B. Regulatory Requirements insulation.. 1. The EPS shall be separated from the interior of the building by a minimum 15-minute A. The Contractor shall transport materials to job site in his own vehicle and provide protection from thermal barrier. er• damage and exposure. C. Contractor: The contractor that installs the Outsulation System to the substrate. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: 2. The use and maximum thickness of EPS shall be in accordance with the applicable building codes. � 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS: A. Single source responsibility for insulation products: Obtain each type of building insulation from D. Dryvit: Dryvit Systems, Inc., the manufacturer of the Outsulation System, a Rhode Island A. The installer shall examine the wall cavities and conditions under which the insulation work is to a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and corporation. C. Certification be performed, and notify the Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. 1. The Outsulation System shall be recognized for the intended use by the applicable building the insulation work until the unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable E. Expansion Joint: A structural discontinuity in the Outsulation System. code(s). to installer. Installation shall be done in a manner that will not endanger the building or its 1.03 SUBMITTALS: occupants. A. Prior to installation, submit to the Architect for review the following: F. Finish: An acrylic -based coating, available in a variety of textures and colors that is applied 1. Manufacturer's product data indicating density, insulating volue, water absorption over the base coat. D. Mock -Up PART 2 - PRODUCTS characteristics and recommended adhesive for the application. 1. The contractor shall, before the project commences, provide the owner/architect with a G. Insulation Board: Expandedpolystyrene EPS insulation board, which is affixed to the substrate. mock-up for approval. 2. Manufacturers installation instructions. p (EPS) 2. The mock-up shall be of suitable size as required to accurately represent the products being 10 2.01 FOAMED -IN -PLACE INSULATION: b A. Product manufacturer: 1.04 DELIVERY AND STORAGE: H. Panel Erector: The contractor who installs the panelized Outsulation System. installed, as well as each color and texture to be utilized on the project. / 3. The mock-up shall be prepared with the same products, tools, equipment and techniques `� � 1. Air Krete cementitious Foam Insulation - Thermal Krete (Density 2.0 lbs./cu.ft.). as A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing manufacturers labels required for the actual application. The finish used shall be from the same batch that is manufactured b Air Krete, Inc. indicating the brand name and descriptive data confirming compliance with requirements herein I. Panel Fabricator: The contractor who fabricates the panelized Outsulation System. 4 . Y being used on the project. 2. Core-Fill-500 as manufactured b Tailored Chemical Products, Inc. specified. Y 4 3. An approved equal. J. Reinforcing Mesh: Glass fiber mesh(es) used to reinforce the base coat and to provide impact . The approved mock-up shall be available and maintained at the job site. 1.05 COORDINATING: resistance. 5. For panelized construction, the mock-up shall be available and maintained at the panel PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Coordinate shipment and delivery with job progress and other trades for timely installation to fabrication location. preclude delays and interferences and to minimize job storage time. Especially work closely with K. Sheathing: A substrate in sheet form. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION: concrete installers to ensure proper installation. L. Substrate: The material to which the Outsulation System is affixed. A. All Dryvit materials shall be delivered to the job site in the original, unopened packages with A. Comply with manufacturer's printed instructions for the application required on the Project. labels intact. B. Coordinate cutting, patching and installation of insulation with project manager and project G.P.M. PART 2 - PRODUCTS o schedule. M. Substrate System: The total wall assembly including the attached substrate to which the 2.01 PERIMETER INSULATION: Outsulation System is affixed. B. Upon arrival, materials shall be inspected for physical damage, freezing, or overheating. �� C. Clean up and remove all excess foam and other debris so that work area is ready for other t It Questionable materials shall not be used. > ��� cc �'� cc trades. A. Product/manufacturer: 1. Materials shall be stored at the obsite in a cool, dry location, out of direct sunlight, = o 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION i y g = N M G �J N 1. 2" Dow Styrofoam. protected from weather and other sources of damage. Minimum storage temperature shall be A. General: The Dryvit Outsulation System is an Exterior Insulation and Finish System, Class PB, ��� 3.02 BLOCK CORE FILL APPLICATION: 2. An approved equal. as follows: z �= PP q consisting of an adhesive, expanded polystyrene insulation board base coat reinforcing uc� N3-v� A. Insert application hose into each core of cement block and push hose (hose stiffener may be B. Description: a. Demandit? Revyvit?: 7 'C (45 'F) t� N o u Za mesh(es) and finish. Mechanically attached systems shall conform to Dryvit specification DS135. U N LL used to the bottom of the cavity.Slow) withdraw application hose while foaming core full. 1. Rigid, extruded polystyrene. ? TerraNeo? and Lymestone?: 10 'C (50 'F) y pp g b. Ameristone., 2. Compressive strength: 40 lbs./sq. in., min. B. Methods of Installation c. DPR, PMR? and E? Finishes, Color Prime?, Primus?, Genesis and NCB?: 4 'C (40 'F) o 07220 -ROOF DECK INSULATION 3. Water absorption: by volume, max. 1. Field Applied: The Outsulation System is applied to the substrate system in place. 4. R-value: 5.0 deg. F./ft. sq./hr/Btu/in. min. 2. Panelized: The Outsulation System is shop -applied to the prefabricated wall panels. PART 1 - GENERAL 2.02 ADHESIVE: 07311 -ASPHALT SHINGLES A. Type as recommended by the insulation manufacturer for the application involved. C. Design Requirements O • 1. Acceptable substrates for the Outsulation System shall be: O 1.01 SCOPE: a. Exterior grade sum sheathing meeting ASTM C 1396 former) C 79 requirements for PART 1 GENERAL PART 3 - EXECUTION g gypsum g g (formerly ) q 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES o A. Provide all of the labor, materials, equipment, and services required to furnish and install the roof water-resistant core or Type X core at the time of application of the Outsulation System. deck insulation. 3.01 PREPARATION: b. Exterior sheathing having a water-resistant core with fiberglass mat facers meeting ASTM A. Asphalt roofing shingles. C 1177 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Verify that substrate and adjacent materials, and insulation boards, are dry and ready to C Exterior fiber reinforced cement or calcium silicate boards. B.Leak barrier and deck protection. O A. Single source responsibility for insulation products: Obtain each type of building insulation from a receive insulation and adhesive. d. Exterior Exterior or Exposure 1 Rated Plywood, Grade C-D or better, nominal 12.7 min (1 /2 single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical B. Verify that substrate is flat and free of irregularities and materials that will impede adhesive C.Metal flashing associated with shingle roofing. properties without delaying progress of the Work. bond. in), minimum 4-ply. C. Verifythat insulation boards are unbroken and free of damage, including board skin. e. Unglazed brick, cement plaster, concrete, or masonry. B. Work associated with roof deck insulation including (but not limited to) membrane roofing and 9 g D.Attic Ventilation. flashing shall be performed by and be the responsibility of a single installer. Coordinate with f. APA Exposure 1 rated Oriented Strand Board (OSB), nominal 12.7 mm (1/2 in). Section 07531. 3.02 INSTALLATION: g. Galvanized expanded metal lath 1.4 or 1.8 kg/m2 (2.5 or 3.4 Ibs/yd2) installed over a 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Recess the insulation enough to allow the slab to remain at its full thickness above the solid substrate. A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry. Framing, wood decking, and roof sheathing. Q 1.03 SUBMITTALS: insulation. Install over vapor barrier. h. Exterior grade fire retardant treated plywood. Note: Fire retardant treated plywood requires the use of Backstop NT. Refer to DS181 B.Section 07620 - Flashingand Sheet Metal: Sheet metal flashing not associated with shingle Z A. Prior to fabrication, submit to the Architect for review the following: BackstopNT Application Instructions.downspouts. g g � PP roofing; utters and downs outs. 1. Manufacturer's literature fully and completely describing each product and its proper method g g P O O • 0 of installation for this Project. 2. Deflection of substrate systems shall not exceed 1 240 times the span. 2. Physical sample of each product named herein that the Contractor proposes to provide to 07240 - OUTSULATION EXTERIOR INSULATION 3. The substrate shall be flat within 6.4 mm (1/4 in) in a 1.2 m (4 ft) radius. 1.03 REFERENCES _ � q �+ Q the Project. AND FINISH SYSTEM C1�.1-1�7S P'<J 4. The slope of inclined surfaces shall not be less than 6 in 12 (27'), and the length shall not A. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) or O y 3. Test data and calculations proving that the insulation in the thickness and number of layers exceed 305 mm (12 in). Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process. loft(� J to be installed will, in fact, meet the required "U" or "R" value. 5. All areas requiring an impact resistance classification higher than "standard", as defined by . 4. Manufacturer's certification that product facer is compatible with roofing membrane. PART I - GENERAL ASTM E 2486 (formerly EIMA Std. 101.86), shall be as detailed in the drawings and described B.ASTM B 209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate. 5. Shop drawings: Insulation and cant thickness and layout. Coordinate with Section 07531, in the contract documents. Refer to Section 1.04.D.1.c of this specification. Z Elastomeric Sheet Roofing (EPDM). 1.01 SUMMARY 6. Expansion Joints C.ASTM B 370 - Standard Specification for Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction. 4 = a. Design and location of expansion joints in the Outsulation System is the responsibility of N 4 • the project designer and shall be noted on the project drawings. As a minimum, expansion D.ASTM D 3018 - Standard Specification for Class A Asphalt Shingles Surfaced with Mineral 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. This document is to be used in preparing specifications for projects utilizing the Dryvit P j 9 P 1e 9 P W A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and Outsulation System. For complete product description and usage refer to: joints shall be placed at the following locations: Granules. N other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer=s recommendations 1. Dryvit Outsulation System Data Sheet, DS447. 1) Where expansion joints occur in the substrate system. for handling, storage, and protection during installation. 2. Dryvit Outsulation System Application Instructions, DS204. 2) Where building expansion joints occur. E.ASTM D 3161 - Standard Test Method for Wind -Resistance of Asphalt Shingles (Fan -Induced B. Protect plastic insulation as follows: 3. Dryvit Outsulation System Installation Details, DS107. 3) At floor lines in wood frame construction. Method). 1. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and 4) At floor lines of non -wood framed buildings where significant movement is expected. concealment. B. Related Sections 5) Where the Outsulation System abuts dissimilar materials. F. ASTM D 3462 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Shingles Made From Glass Felt and Surfaced � 2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to project 1. Unit Masonry - Section 04200 6) Where the substrate type changes with Mineral Granules. site ahead of installation time. 2. Concrete - Sections 03300 and 03400 7 Where prefabricated panels abut one another 3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area 3. Light Gauge Cold Formed Steel Framing - Section 05400 ) P P G.ASTM D 4586 -Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos -Free. ISSUE DATE of construction. 4. Wood Framing - Section 06100 8) In continuous elevations at intervals not exceeding 23 m (75 ft). 12-1-08 5. Sealant - Section 07900 9) Where significant structural movement occurs such as changes in roofline, building shape H. UL 790 - Tests for Fire Resistance of Roof Covering Materials. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 6. Flashing - Section 07600 or structural system. • 7. Terminations I. UL 997 - Wind Resistance of Prepared Roof Covering Materials. 2.01 ROOF DECK INSULATION - POLYI SOCYAN U RATE BOARD: 1.02. REFERENCES a. Prior to applying the Dryvit Outsulation System, wall openings shall be treated with Dryvit REV DATE A. Pol yisocyan u rate foam insulation board with organic/inorganic facers. A. Section Includes AquaFlash System or Flashing Tape. Refer to Dryvit Outsulation System Installation Details, J. Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association (ARMA) 1. Facers shall be of type to be compatible with adhered single ply membrane roof material, 1. ASTM B 117 (Federal Test Standard 141A Method 6061) Standard Practice for Operating Salt DS107. b. The Outsulation System shall be held back from adjoining materials around openings and K.National Roofing Contractors Association NRCA and thereby avoiding use of recover board. Spray (Fog) Apparatus 9 ( ) 2. Provide both flat and tapered board. 2. ASTM C 150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement penetrations such as windows, doors and mechanical equipment a minimum of 19 mm (3/4 s►� 3. Provide in multiple layers to conform to required thickness and/or R-value. 3. ASTM C 297 Standard Test Method for Flatwise Tensile Strength of Sandwich Constructions in) for sealant application. See Dryvit's Outsulation System Installation Details, DS107. 1.04 SUBMITTALS 4. Minimum thickness: R-20. 4. ASTM C 1177 Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing c. The system shall be terminated a minimum of 203 mm (8 in) above finished grade. A. Submit copies of GAFMC 's product data sheets, detail drawings and samples for eaN; • 5. ASTM C 1396 (formerly C 79) Standard Specification for Gypsum Board d. Sealants of roofing product. �'L 2.02 ADHESIVE: 6. ASTM D 968 (Federal Test Standard 141A Method 6191) Standard Test Methods for Abrasion 1) Shall be manufactured and supplied by others. A. Product: Resistance of Organic Coatings by Falling Abrasive 2) Shall be compatible with Outsulation System materials. Refer to current Dryvit 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. Pol yisocyan u rate adhesive as approved and produced by the manufacturer of the roof 7. ASTM D 2247 (Federal Test Standard 141A Method 6201) Standard Practice for Testing Publication DS153 for listing of sealants tested by sealant manufacturer for A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Provide all primary roofing products, including shingles, membrane system. Water Resistance of Coatings in 100% Relative Humidity compatibility. underlayment, leak barrier, and ventilation, by a single manufacturer. 2. Product shall not void the roof system warranty. 8. ASTM D 2898 Standard Test Method for Accelerated Weathering of Fire -Retardant -Treated 3) The sealant backer rod shall be of closed cell.' Wood for Fire Testing 8. Vapor Retorders - The use and location of vapor retarders within a wall assembly is the B.Installer Qualifications: PART 3 -EXECUTION 9. ASTM D 3273 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold an the Surface of responsibility of the project designer and shall comply with local building code requirements. 1.Instailer must be approved for installation of all roofing products to be installed under this Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber The type and location shall be noted on the project drawings and specifications. Vapor section. 3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS: 10. ASTM D 4060 Standard Test Method far Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings by the retarders may be inappropriate in certain climates and can result in condensation within the 2.Installer must be an Authorized Contractor as defined and certified by GAFMC. A. Installation shall be in accordance with the Contract Documents, the approved submittals, and the Taber Abraser wall assembly. Refer to Dryvit Publication DS159 for additional information. 3.Installer must be a Master Elite Contractor as defined and certified by GAFMC. manufacturer's current, written instructions. 11. ASTM E 84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 9. Dark Colors - The use of dark colors must be considered in relation to wall surface B. Verify deck is clean and smooth, free of depressions, waves, or projections, properly sloped to 12. ASTM E 96 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials temperature as a function of local climatic conditions. Use of dark colors in high temperature 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS This drawing a the design shown do drain. p P g P A. Provide a roofing system achieving an Underwriters Laboratories property or architect. drawing without ttheir 13. ASTM E 119 Standard Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials climates can affect the performance of the system. 9 Ys 9 (UL) Class A fire copying or use of this drawing witnouttheir C. Verify roof openings penetrating elements through roof are solidly set, reglets are in place. Verify 14. ASTM E 330 Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors and Curtain 10. Flashin Shall be provided at all roof -wall intersections, windows, doors, chimneys, decks, classification. written consent is prohibited and any g P Ys� infringement will be subject to legal action. deck is supported and secured. Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference balconies and other areas as necessary to prevent water from entering behind the Outsulation SPECIFICATIONS D. Do not apply to damp, frozen, dirty, dusty, or deck surfaces unacceptable to manufacturer and 15. ASTM E 331 Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors and System. B.Install all roofing products in accordance with all federal, state and local building codes. applicator. Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. E. Beginning installation means acceptance of substrate. 16. ASTM E 2098 Test Method for Determining the Tensile Breaking Strength of Glass Fiber C.AII work shall be performed in a manner consistent with current OSHA guidelines. F. Provide tapered units for crickets. Taper and board thickness shall be as necessitated to achieve Reinforcing Mesh for use in Class PB Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS), after 1.05 SUBMITTALS required slope. Exposure to Sodium Hydroxide Solution A. Product Data - The contractor shall submit to the owner/architect the manufacturer's product 1.07 PREINSTALLATION MEETING G. In addition to locations indicated, provide crickets at HVAC roof curbs 4' or more in width. 17. ASTM E 2134 Test Method for Evaluating the Tensile -Adhesion Performance of Exterior data sheets describing products, which will be used on this project. A=145 H. Do not install any more insulation than can be covered by finished roofing in one day. At the Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS) end of the day, do not leave the underlayment and the insulation exposed to the elements. 18. ASTM E 2430 Standard Specification for Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) Thermal Insulation B. Shop Drawing for Panelized Construction: The panel fabricator shall prepare and submit to the P-rds for use in Exterior InsulaVion and Finish System (F-tFS) owner/architect complete drawings, showing: wall layout, connections, details, expansion joints 8-STRAIGHT PROTOTYPE - REVISION 16 - 06-18-08 07311 -ASPHALT SHINGLES A. General: For all projects in excess of 250 squares of roofing, a pre -installation meeting is C.Install crickets on the upslope side of all chimneys in the north, any chimney wider than 24", moisture and contaminants. sealant to exposed sheet edges, tapering application as recommended by manufacturer. strongly recommended. and on all roofs steeper than 6/12. Install mechanical fasteners, fleshings and coun_terflashings, and accessories at locations and ®7531 - E /\ (,�TOMERIC SHEET ROOFING (EPDM) as recommended by manufacturer. B.Timing: The meeting shall take place at the start of the roofing installation, no more than 2 3.04 PREPARATION ***Recover Only*** L.,/�V V �✓ mil t V 2. Mechanical fastened. weeks into the roofing project. A. Verify that the deck is structurally sound and free of deteriorated decking. All deteriorated decking shall be removed and replaced with new materials. PART 1 - GENERAL 3.05 FLASHING: C.Attendees: Meeting to be called for by manufacturer's certified contractor. Meeting's mandatory 1.01 SCOPE: A. Coordinate with the requirements of Section 07600. attendees shall include the certified contractor and the manufacturer's representative. B.Verify that the existing shingles are dry, sound, clean and smooth. All curled, buckled or loose A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and services required to furnish and install the B. Use the longest pieces of material which are practical. All flashings and terminations shall be Non -mandatory attendees shall include the owner's representative, architect or engineer's tabs shall be nailed down or removed. elastomeric sheet roofing. installed in accordance with the membrane manufacturer approved details and instructions. representative, and the general contractor's representative. C. When using a continuation of deck membrane as flashing, bond the membrane to the surface to C.Clean shingle surfaces thoroughly prior to installation of eaves protection membrane and 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: be flashed without folding the membrane in the corners and prior to installing the fastening strip underlayment. A. Installers: in the angle change. • D.requir : Certified contractor and manufacturers representative shall review all pertinent 1. The roofing and flashing installer shall be currently approved by the manufacturer of the D. Terminate edges in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. requirements for the project, including but not limited rr scheduling, weather considerations, 3.05 UNDERLAYMENT APPLICATION ***Required for New or Tearoff - Optional for Recover *** selected elastomeric roofing system. E. Flash roof penetrations in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Make flashing directly project duration, and requirements for the specified warranty. A. General; 2. For actual installation of roofingand flashing, use only competent and skilled roofers 9� Y P to the perimeter wall, gravel stop or penetration passing through the membrane system. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 1.Install using methods recommended by GAFMC, in accordance with local building codes. When completely familiar with the products and the manufacturer's currently recommended local codes and application instructions are in conflict, the more stringent requirements shall methods of installation. 3.06 PROTECTION: u A. Store all products in manufacturer's unopened, labeled packaging until they are ready for take precedence. `4 installation. p 3. Work associated with single -ply membrane roofing, including (but not limited to) insulation, A. After completing roofing (including associated work), institute appropriate procedures for = o0 flashing, and membrane sheet joint sealers, shall be performed by the installer of this Work. surveillance and protection of roofing during remainder of construction period. At the end of the E Urn B.Eaves: Coordinate with Section 07220 and 07600. construction period, or at a time when remaining construction will in no way affect or endanger l- � Z ° B.Store products in a covered, ventilated area, at temperature not more than 110 degrees F (43 O U t 1.Install eaves edge metal flashing tight with fascia boards; lap joints 2 inches (50 mm) and B. Obtain primary single -ply membrane roofing from a single manufacturer. Provide secondary roofing, make a final inspection of roofing and prepare a written report to Owner, describing = S � degrees C); do not store near steam pipes, radiators, or in direct sunlight. seal with plastic cement; nail at the top of the flange. materials as recommended by manufacturer of primary materials. nature and extent of deterioration or damage. + Ln U 0 M rn s 2.In the north, and on all roofs between 2/12 and 4/12 (low slopes) install eaves protection C. Pre -roofing conference: Before installing roofing and associated work, meet at mutually agreed B. Repair or replace deteriorated or defective work found at the time of final inspection to a to U 0 LLIZ C o C.Store bundles on a flat surface. Maximum stacking height shall not exceed GAFMC s membrane up the slope from eaves edge a full 36 inches or to at least 24 inches (610 mm) location with the installer, roofing manufacturer, installers of related work, and other entities condition free of damage and deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion and according ne � ¢ O M M recommendations. Store all rolls on end. beyond the interior "warm wail". Lap ends 6 inches (150 mm) and Land. concerned with roofing performance, including governing authorities, Architect and Owner. Record to the requirements of the specified warranty. Q = w z y Sri discussions and agreements and furnish c to each participant. Provide at least 72 hours C. Water cut-offs: U a� �= w - D.Store and dispose of solvent -based materials in accordance with all federal state and local �Y P P CN V) = ' C.Valleys: advance notice to participants prior to convening pre -roofing conference. 1. Provide where and when a danger exists that water caused by precipitation may get under w Q �, � m � � 3 regulations. 1. Install eaves protection membrane at least 36 inches wide and centered on the valley. Lap the new roofing membrane. ends 6 inches (150 mm) and seal. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: 2. Construct by extending the membrane beyond the insulation and securely setting the end 1.09 WEATHER CONDITIONS A. Prior to delivery of materials, submit to the Architect for review the following: of the membrane in 6" of plastic roofing cement. A. Proceed with work only when existing and forecasted weather conditions will permit work to 2.Where valleys are indicated to be "open valleys", install metal flashing over eaves protection , membrane before roof deck underlayment is installed; DO NOT nail through the flashing. 1. Manufacturers literature fully describing each product. 3. All temporary water cut-offs shall be removed prior to proceeding with the next work be performed in accordance with GAFMC s recommendations 2. A complete description (including, but not limited to, literature and drawings) of all roofing period, by cutting off that portion of the membrane that has been in contact with the Secure the flashing by nailing at 18 inches (457 mm) on center just beyond edge of flashing 1.10 WARRANTY so that nail heads hold down the edge. and flashing systems required, listing all components and manufacturers of each. plastic roofing cement and disposing of it. 3. Shop drawings shall include, but not be limited to: + A. Provide to the owner a GAFMC Smart Choice System Plus 20 year Warranty. D.Roof Deck: a. Outline of roof and roof size. 3.07 CLEAN UP: PART 2 PRODUCTS 1.lnstall one layer of roof deck underlayment over the entire area not protected by eaves or b. Number of sheets and their respective sizes. A. Clean up entire roof surface. Promptly remove foreign matter, debris, equipment, and surplus valley membrane. Install sheets horizontally so water sheds and nail in place. c. Seaming locations. materials from job site. 2.01 MANUFACTURERS 2.On roofs sloped at more than 4 in 12, lop horizontal edges at least 2 inches (50 mm) and d. Location and type of all penetrations. e. Number of flashing tells by width. METAL /� f� A. Acceptable Manufacturer: GAF Materials Corporation, 1361 Alps Rd. Wayne NJ 07470. Tel: at least 2 inches (50 mm) over eaves protection membrane. f. Details of termination is eaves, vertical surfaces, and roof penetrations. 7 - I®L Tf L FL! SI� V , 1-973-628-3000. 3.On roofs sloped between 2 in 12 and 4 in 12, lap horizontal edges of least 19 inches (480 g. Insulation thickness and layout. mm) and at least 19 inches (485 mm) over eaves protection membrane. h. Submit certification from the roof manufacturer that the roof system (including roof B.Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01600. 4.Lap ends at least 4 inches (100 mm). Stagger end laps of each layer at least 36 inches membrane, flashings) will resist code uplift forces of Factory Mutual Bulletin 1-29, PART 1 - GENERAL 2.02 SHINGLES (915 mm). that the roof deck insulation is being provided and installed in an acceptable manner 5.Lap underlayment over valley protection at least 6 inches (150 mm). and that the roof system warranty will not be violated. 1.01 SCOPE: A. Super -heavyweight "Plus", granule surfaced, self sealing asphalt shingle with a strong A. Provide all of the labor, materials, equipment, and services to furnish and install the flashing fiberglass reinforced Micro Weave core and an Algae Eater mineral granule surfacing. Extra E.Penetrations: 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS: and sheet metal. thick tabs and bold profile provide a real slate appearance with an 8" exposure. Meets ASTM 1. Vent pipes: Install a 24 inch (610 mm) square piece of eaves protection membrane lapping A. Weather: Proceed with roofing work when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit work B. All sheet metal items are not necessarily individually described. The most important parts and D 3018, ASTM D 3161, and ASTM D 3462; UL 790 Class A rated with UL 997 Wind Resistance over roof deck underlayment; seal tightly to pipe. to be performed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and warranty requirements. those requiring detailed description are usually mentioned. Other work as indicated or necessary e Label. Grand Slate Shingles by GAFMC. 2.Vertical walls: Install eaves protection membrane extending at least 6 inches (150 mm) up B. Substrate conditions: Do not begin roofing installation until substrates have been inspected and shall be provided unless specifically excluded from the work of this Section. e 1. Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range. the wall and 12 inches (305 mm) an to the roof a surface. Lap the membrane over the roof are determined to be in satisfactory condition. 2.Color: Welsh Gray deck underlayment. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: 3.Skylights and roof hatches: Install eaves protection membrane from under the built-in 1.05 GUARANTEE: A. In addition to complying with all pertinent codes and standards, comply with all pertinent 2.03 HIP AND RIDGE SHINGLES A. The roofing system manufacturer shall guarantee to maintain the total roofs system in a recommendations of: counterflashing and 12 inches (305 min) on to the roof surface lapping over roof deck 9 Ys 9 Ys A. High profile self sealing hip and ridge cap shingle matching the color of selected roof watertight condition at his own expense for period of fifteen 15 years from the Date of 1. "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual", 5th edition. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning shingle. Each bundle covers approx. 20 lineal feet. Timbertex Distinctive Ridge Cap Shingles, by underlayment. g P P ( ) GAFMC. 4.Chimneys: Install eaves protection membrane around entire chimney extending at least 6 Substantial Completion. Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA). inches (150 mm) up the wall and 12 inches (305 mm) on to the roof surface. Lap the B. This guarantee is solely intended to aver any condition caused by the manufacturer's defective B. Performance requirements: 2.04 Starter Stripmembrane over the roof deck underlayment. materials, the installation or ordinary wear and teor thereof. It shall not include any condition 1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, structural movement, 5.Rake Edges: Install metal edge flashing over eaves protection membrane and roof deck due to lightning, full gales, hurricanes or similar unusual natural occurrences or any condition thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failing. A. Self sealing starter course. Each strip measures 17" tall by 40" wide. One bundle covers caused b an deiiberote act or negligence in maintaining said roofing system. Liabilities C. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA requirements: approximately 100 lineal feet when used with shingles with less than a 6" exposure and 50' underlayment; set tight to rake boards; lap joints at least 2 inches (50 min) and seal with Y Y9 9 Ys o` plastic cement; secure with nails. hereunder shall be limited to the cost of repair or installation of the manufacturer's new roofing 1. Hanging gutter. Figure 1-16 (see Drawings for profile and size). ° when used with shingles with greater than a 6 exposure. Universal Starter Strip Shingles by materials b an authorized applicator, and there shall be no liability for damn to other 2. Downspouts: - y� Z y pp Y N �T GAFMC. 3.06 INSTALLATION OF SHINGLES components of the roof or of the building nor for any consequential domage.d a. Profile: Figure 1-32 (see Drawings for profile and size). - o COD$"D 2.05 LEAK BARRIER A. General: C. This guarantee will not cover damage due to repair or subsequent work or through the roof b. Hanger design: Figure 1-35 (see Drawings for profile and size). a�� A. Self -adhering, self sealing, leak barrier surfaced with fine, skid -resistant 1.Install in accordance with GAFMC's instructions and local building codes. When local codes and without the roof systems manufacturers written approval of the methods and materials that 3. Gutter/downspout connection: Figure 1-33, Detail 1. ZU.- � �- g g shall be used. 4. Conductor heads: Fi Figures 1-25C and 1-26. I� ° r ° Z0 i o x » application instructions are in conflict, the more stringent requirements shall take precedence. 9 `��" " ° u ° granules. Each Roll contains approx. 150 sq ft, 65 Ibs (29.9 kg), 36 X 50 or 200 sq ft, 85 W 1 Z. o �, `s „ 2.Minimize breakage of shingles by avoiding dropping bundles on edge, by separating shingles D. During the term of this guarantee, the manufacturer, his agents, or employees, shall have free 5. Scupper: Figure 1-26. °�,�,zdLL ""��LL � Ibs (38.6 kg), 36 X 66.7. 58 mils thick. WeatherWatch by GAFMC. carefully (not by "breaking" over ridge or bundles), and by taking extra precautions in access to the roof during business hours. D. Installers: o temperatures below 40 degrees F (4 degrees C). 1. For actual installation of roofing and flashing, use only competent and skilled roofers 2.06 SHINGLE UNDERLAYMENT 3.Handle carefully in hot weather to avoid scuffing the surfacing, or damaging the shingle PART 2 - PRODUCTS completely familiar with the products and the manufacturer's currently recommended A. Water repellent, breather type cellulose/glass fiber composite roofing underlayment. methods of installation. Shingle -Mate by GAFMC. edges. 2.01 ELASTOMERIC SHEET ROOFING - ADHERED: 2. Work associated with flashing including (but not limited to) membrane roofing and roof O B.Placement and Nailing: ***Tear -Off or New Construction*** A. Product/manufacturer: deck insulation shall be performed by and be the responsibility of a single installer. O • B.ofA repellent, breather type cellulose fiber building paper. Meets or exceeds **e requirements 1. Secure with 4, 5, or 6 nails per shingle per GAFMC's instructions or local codes. 1. Universal Design "A" Fully Adhered EPDM Roofing System as manufactured by Carlisle Tire Coordinate with Section 07531. of ASTM D-226 Type I. Leatherback #15 by GAFMC. Western Region Only* 2.Placement of nails varies based on the type of shingle specified. Consult the application and Rubber Company. a o C.Water repellent, breather type cellulose fiber buildingpaper. Meets or exceeds the requirements instructions for the specified shingle for details. 2. Sure -Weld (TPO) Mechanical fastened Roofing System as manufactured by Carlisle Tire and 1.03 SUBMITTALS: of ASTMPD-226 Type II. Leatherback 30 b GAFMC. ***Western Region Onl *** q 3.Nails must be driven flush with the shingle surface. Do not overdrive or underdrive the nails. Rubber Company. A. Prior to installation, submit to the Architect for review the following: YP # Y g y 4.Shingle offset varies based on the type of shingle specified. Consult the application 3. A comparable system as manufactured by Firestone Rubberguard Roofing Systems or 1. Complete and fully descriptive manufacturers literature for all factory fabricated items O D.#15 Roofing Underlayment - By Others: Water repellent breather type cellulose fiber building instructions for the specified shingle for details. approved as equal. naming all materials, dimensions, finishes and accompanying accessory items. paper. Meets or exceeds the requirements of ASTM D-4869 Type I. ***Generic*** B. Provide an elastomeric roofing system including all incidental and accessory items as drawn and 2. Complete shop drawings and erection drawings for each product named which shall include C.Placement and Nailing: ***Recover Only*** specified which shall included, but not be limited to the following: a material schedule, details, profiles, gauges, dimensions, layout, anchorage and joint E.#30 Roofing Underlayment - By Others: Water repellent breather type cellulose fiber building 1. Beginning with the starter strip, trim shingles so that they "nest" within the shingle located 1. Membrane: .045 non -reinforced EPDM. details. ***Generic*** beneath it. This procedure will veld a first course that is typically 3" to 4" rather than a .045 reinforced TPO 3. Physical samples - full range of finishes and coloration. paper. Meets or exceeds the requirements of ASTM D-4869 Type II. Generic P Y � Y 2. Flushing - EPDM 60 MIL fully exposed shingle. Q 2.07 ROOFING CEMENT 2.Laterally, offset the new shingles from the existing keyways, to avoid waves or depressions 3. Bonding Adhesive 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS: A. General purpose asphalt roofing cement meeting the requirements of ASTM D 4586, Type I y p g 4. Splicing Cement A. Coordinate work with interfacing and adjoining work for proper sequencing of each installation. caused b excessive dips in the roofing materials. 5. Splice Cleaner Ensure best possible weather resistance, durability of work, and protection of materials and y or Il. Leak Buster Matrix 203 Plastic Roof Cement, by BMCA., by BMCA. 3.Using the bottom of the tab on existing shingles, align subsequent courses. Z 6. La Sealant finishes. *Note: DO NOT install standard sized shingles (5" exposure) over metric (5 5/8" exposure) p C • UJ 7. Water Cut-off Mastic J 0 B.General purpose asphalt roofing cement meeting the requirements of ASTM D 4586, Type I or shingles, as it will overexpose the shingles and reveal the nails. Use standard alignment 7. Water Pipe Flashing PART 2 - PRODUCTS CC rumn II. Leak Buster Matrix Standard Wet Dr Roof Cement 204 b BMCA. methods to assure proper shingle placement. / Y # Y 9. Nite Seal 4.Secure with 4, 5, or 6 nails per shingle per GAFMC s instructi ns or local codes. 10. Pourable Sealer 2.01 ALUMINUM SHEET:V J C.Asphalt Plastic Roofing Cement meeting the requirements of ASTM D 4586, Type I or II. 5.Placement of nails varies based on the type of shingle specified. Consult the application 11. Stare -Seal rubber Fastening Strip and Universal Fasteners A. Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish instructions for the specified shingle for details. 12. Insulation Fasteners indicated and with not less than the strength durability of alloy and temper designated below: 0 208 ATTIC VENTILATION 6.Nails must be driven flush with the shingle surface. Do not overdrive or underdrive the nails. 13. Insulation 1. Factory painted aluminum sheet: _ A. Flexible ride ventilator designed to allow the passage of air from attics. Provides 16.9" 7.Shingle offset varies based on the type of shingle specified. Consult the application 9 9 P 9 14. Wood Nailers. a. Counterflashing: 0.0320". Q. NFVA (Hand Nail) and 14.1" NFVA (Nail Gun) per lineal foot. Cobra? Ridge Vent by GAFMC. instructions for the specified shingle for details. b. Other items: ASTM B209, 3003-H14, with a minimum thickness of 0.040", unless 14 • D.Valle s ***Choose a Method*** 2.02 WOOD NAILERS AT ROOF PERIMETER: otherwise indicated. N W 2.09 SKYLIGHTS y A. See Section 06100, "General Carpentry". B. Finish: Fluoropolymer 2-coat coating system: Manufacturer's standard 2 coat thermocured N A. Fixed, transparent, flat glazed skylight designed to permit passage of light into the 1.Install valleys using the "open valley" method: rg building.Tempered, low emissivity, as filled sealed glazing with a re -finished wood frame a Sna diverging chalk lines on the metal flashing, starting at 3 inches 75 min each side system composed of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fight; po complymerying color topcoat P Y� 9 9 9 P a)Snap 9� g 9� 9 ( ) 2.03 INSULATION: containing not less than 70% polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 605.2. and weather resistant metal cladding. Various sizes to accommodate rafter and truss of top of valley, spreading at 1/8 inch per foot (9 mm per meter) to the eaves. A. See Section 07220, "Roof Deck Insulation". 1. Color and gloss: As selected by the Architect from the manufacturer's full range of construction. Heavenscape? FX Skylights by GAFMC. b) Run shingles to chalk line. standard and custom colors and gloss. c) Trim last shingle in each course to match the chalk line; do not trim shingles to less 2.04 FOAM TUBING AND FILLER: Tempered, ed, low emissivity, gas filled sealed glazing wtransparent, flat glazed skylight designed with permit passage of light into the building.th apre-finished wood frame and weather than 12 inches (305 mm) wide. A. Cellular foam sponge tubing 50% larger than joint with safing insulation backup filler. 2.02 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES: Td) Apply a 2 inch (50 min) wide strip of plastic cement under ends of shingles, sealing them A. Fasteners: resistant metal cladding. Various sizes to accommodate rafter and truss construction. to the metal flashing 2.05 OTHER MATERIALS: 1. Same metal as sheet metal flashing or other non -corrosive metal as recommended by ISSUE DATE Heavenscape? FV Skylights by GAFMC. A. All other materials, not specifically described but required for a proper completion and sheet metal manufacturer. 12-1-08 • 2.10 NAILS 2.lnstall valleys using the "closed cut valley" method: watertightness of the roof system shall be as selected by the Contractor, but subject to the 2. Match finish of exposed heads with material being fastened. a roof slope her from the shingles the first course of Run a hi at least 12 approval of the Architect. B. Asphalt mastic: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent -type asphalt mastic, nominally free of sulfur and • A. Standard round wire, zinc -coated steel or aluminum; 10 to 12 gauge, barbed or deformed ) g g Pe across the valley containing no asbestos fibers, compounded for 15 mil dry film thickness per coat. shank, with heads 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) to 7/16 inch (11 mm) in diameter. Length must be inches (305 min). PART 3 - EXECUTION C. Mastic sealant: Pol isobut lene; non -hardening, non -skinning, non-drying, non -migrating ratio sealant. sufficient to penetrate into solid wood at least 3/4 inch (19 mm) or through plywood or b) Run succeeding courses of shingles from the lower roof slope across the valley at least 12 D. Elastomeric sealant: Generic type recommended by sheet meg metal manufacturer and fabricator of REV DATE oriented strand board by at least 1 /8 inch. inches (305 mm) and nail not closer than 6 inches (150 mm) to' center of valley. 3.01 PREPARING SUBSTRATE AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: components being scaled and complying with requirements for joint sealants. c) Run shingles from the upper roof slope into the valley and trim 2 inches (50 mm) from A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions to prepare substrate to receive single -ply membrane E. Epoxy seam sealer: 2 part, non -corrosive, aluminum seam cementing compound, recommende>►� 2.11 METAL FLASHING the center line. system. by aluminum manufacturer for exterior and interior non-moving joints, including riveted joints..4,� , A. .24 gauge hot -dip galvanized steel sheet, complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90/Z275. 1. Verify that expansion joints, blocking, drains, sleeves, curbs and other penetrations which F. Adhesives: Type recommended by flashing sheet metal manufacturer for waterproof and , E. Penetrations ass through surfaces to receive roofing are rigidly installed and clamped into position. weather -resistant seaming and adhesive application of flashing sheet metal. dP� • 1. All Penetrations are to be flashed according to GAFMC, ARMA and NRCA application P g g g Y P P g pp g PART 3 EXECUTION 9 PP B. Clean substrate of dust, debris and other substances detrimental to single -ply system G. Paper slip sheet: 5 lb./square red rosin, sized building paper conforming to FS UU-B-790, instructions and construction details. installation. Remove sharp projections. I, style 1b. 3.01 EXAMINATION C. Install cant strips, flashings, and accessory items as shown and as recommended by the H. Polyethylene underlayment: ASTM D4397, minimum 6 mil thick black polyethylene film, resistant A. Do not begin installation until the roof deck has been properly prepared. F.Skylights and Roof Hatches manufacturer. to decay when tested according to ASTM E154. 1. Consult the manufacturer of the skylight or roof hatch for specific installation D. Prime substrate where recommended by the manufacturer of the materials being installed. I. Metal accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory B.If roof deck preparation is the responsibilityY g g of another installer, notify the architect or building recommendations. E. On wood decks to receive bituminous materials, install nailed course of paper slip sheet. units as required for installation of work, matching or compatible with material beinginstalled; owner of unsatisfactory preparationbefore proceeding. 2.Skylights and roof hatches shall be installed with pre -fabricated metal flashings specifically F. Prevent compounds from entering and clogging drains and conductors and from spilling or non -corrosive; size and thickness required for performance. designed for the application of the unit. migrating onto surfaces of other work. 3.02 PREPARATION ***Tear -Off Only*** G. Provide protection to the roof insulation and to set up area with 3/4" exterior grade plywood. 2.03 FABRICATION: A. Remove all existing roofing down to the roof deck. 3.07 VENTILATION Coordinate with Section 07220. A. Comply with details shown to fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that fit substrates and A. General result in waterproof and weather -resistant performance once installed. Verify shapes and B.Verify that the deck is dry, sound, clean and smooth. It shall be free of any depressions, 1. Ventilation must meet or exceed current F.H.A., H.U.D. and local code requirements. 3.02 APPLICATION OF ROOFING: dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. waves, and projections. Cover with sheet metal, all holes over 1 inch (25 mm) in diameter, A. Apply materials strictly in accordance with the roofing manufacturer's printed specifications. Do B. Form exposed sheet metal work that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks This drawing and the design shown is the cracks over 1/2 inch (12 mm) in width, loose knots and excessively resinous areas. B.Ridge / Soffit ventilation no work and install no materials that will in any manner violate or void the guarantee. and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. property of the architect. The reproduction, 1.Install ridge vent along the entire length of ridges: B. Start installation only in the presence of manufacturer's technical representative. C. Seams: Fabricate non-moving seams in aluminum with flat -lock seams. Form seams and seal copying or use nsent i prohiawing danda withouttheir written consent is prohibited and an 2.Cut continuous vent slots through the sheathing, stopping 6 inches (150 mm) from each end with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength. infringement will be subject to legal action. C.Replace damaged deck with new materials. 1. Cut out and repair membrane defects at the end of each days work. P Y j g of the ridge. C. When work is stopped at the end of a work day, and when work is stopped because of the D. Expansion: Space movement joints at maximum of 10' with no joints allowed within 24" of _SPECIFICATIONS 3.On roofs without a ride board, make a slot 2 inches 50 min wide, centered on the ridge. PP y' pp P P D.Clean deck surfaces thoroughly prior to installation of eaves protection membrane and 9 ( ) 9 probability of precipitation, seal loose edge of roof membrane in accordance with the roofing corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet -type expansion provisions in work cannot be underlayment. 4.On roofs with a ridge board, make two slots 1-3/4 inches (42 mm) wide, one on each side. manufacturer's printed specifications. Take care to ensure that water does not flow beneath used or would not be sufficiently weatherproof and waterproof, form expansion joints of 5.lnstall ridge vent material along the full length of the ridge, including uncut areas. completed sections of roof. When work is resumed, pull the roof membrane free before continuing intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed with 3.03 PREPARATION ***New Construction*** 6.Butt ends of ridge vent material and join using roofing cement. installation and completely remove any adhesive used. joints). A. Clean deck surfaces thoroughly prior to installation of eaves protection membrane and 7.lnstall eaves vents in sufficient quantity to equal or exceed the ridge vent area. D. Fully adhered membrane: E. Sealed joints: Form non -expansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric. Aw16 underlayment. 1. Install membrane by unrolling over prepared substrate, lapping adjoining sheets as sealant to comply with SMACNA standards. 3.08 PROTECTION recommended by manufacturer. Apply adhesive to surfaces to be bonded and roll into F. Separate metal from non -compatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed B.At areas that receive eaves protection membrane, fill knotholes and cracks with latex filler. A. Protect installed products from foot traffic until completion of the project. place when adhesive has properly cured. Treat seams with special adhesive and apply B.Any roof areas that are not completed by the end of the workday are to be protected from 8-STRAIGHT PROTOTYPE - REVISION 16 - 06-18-08 07600 - METAL FLASHING _ surfaces at locations of contact with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as op drawings indicating ing materials, s, shapes an profiles, es, connections an 'installation a ion details. s. b. MM Systems. and/or the construction condition requires special surface preparation, these instructions shall be recommended by the manufacturer. B. Finish: Kynar 500. Refer to Architectural drawings for color. complied with. G. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed PART 2 -PRODUCTS on faces of sheet metal exposed to public view. 2.02 FASCIA/DRIP EDGES: 2.06 CLEANERS: H. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as sheet metal component being 2.01 ALUMINUM SILL PANS AND END DAMS: A. Types: A. Where required by manufacturer's instructions in lieu of primers, shall be of the type and kind A. Materials: " recommended b the sealant manufacturer. anchored or from compatible, non -corrosive metal recommended by sheet metal manufacturer. 1. Aluminum sheet 5050 alloy with finish to match windows. 1. Drain -Through Gravel Stop (.050 aluminum) as manufactured by Hickman Company Y 1. Size: As recommended by SMACNA manual or sheet metal manufacturer for application but 2. Break and fabricate shapes before finishing. 2. Or a comparable product as manufactured by. never less than thickness of metal being secured. „ a. Metal -Era Roof Edge Systems. 3. Thickness: .073 . b. MM Systems. PART 3 -EXECUTION 2.04 CAULKING (SEALANT): B,Fasteners: Stainless steel screws of proper size for the application. B. Finish: Kynar 500. Refer to Architectural drawings for color. 3.01 CHOICE OF CAULKING MATERIAL: A. Product: PART 3 - EXECUTION • 1. One part polysulfide. A. Use only that caulking material which is best suited to the installation and is so recommended 2. An approved equal. 3.01 INSTALLATION: PART 3 - EXECUTION by the caulking material manufacturer. 2.05 OTHER MATERIALS: A. Install in accordance with approved shop drawings. Take care not to scratch or abrade 3.01 INSTALLATION: 3.02 BACK-UP MATERIALS: A. All other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation surfaces. A. Coping and fascia shall be formed and installed straight and true to line. A. Verify the compatibility of filler material with caulking before installation. of flashing and sheet metal, shall be new, first quality of their respective kinds, and subject to B. Splice joints to have 6" wide concealed splice plates. Caulking shall be of a type and installed B. Use filler about 1/3 to 2 wider than width of joint so sufficient pressure is exerted by filler to V h the approval of the Architect. in a manner as approved by the manufacturer. Provide 12" wide field formed aluminum flashing provide substantial resistance to displacement. Y o at all splice joints. Provide shop welded, prefabricated corners. Provide continuous hold-down C. All filler materials shall be non -oily, non -staining, back-up filler such as polyethylene foam U w n E PART 3 - EXECUTION strips. Provide all fasteners in a finish and color to match the coping and fascia. rod, expanded polyurethane, neoprene or other filler completely compatible with the caulking i- � z y 07651 - LAMINATED SHEET FLASHING material. O oe 3.01 MEASUREMENTS: _ �, U _ CO - rn M A. Verify all dimensions shown on the Drawings by taking field measurements, proper fit and U O -a PART 1 -GENERAL 3.03 PREPARATION: + F- w M o attachment of all part is required. A. Surface cleaning of joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to p w Ce C) ,^\ 1.01 SCOPE: 07840 - PENETRATION SEALS < ~ L comply with recommendations of joint sealant manufacturer and the following requirements: Q - „� i- "'• `''"? � A. Provide all of the labor, materials, equipment, and services required to furnish and install the = z rn rn 3.02 WORKMANSHIP -GENERAL: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of � U a, _ ,.,., wall flashing. p o 0 A. Unless specifically detailed or specified otherwise, all work shall be in accordance with the B. The purpose of this flashing is to prevent penetration of water through the exterior shell of the PART 1 - GENERAL joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings, tested and w Q N to m 0- recommendations of the SMACNA Manual. building. approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint B. Form all sheet metal accurately to the dimensions and shapes required, finishing all molded and 1.01 SCOPE: sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. broken surfaces with true, sharp, and straight lines and angles and, where intercepting other 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Provide all of the labor, materials, equipment and services to furnish and install the penetration 2. Clean concrete, masonry, unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile, similar porous joint substrate members, coping to an accurate fit and soldering securely. A. Qualifications of installers: seals. surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of C. Reinforcement, fasteners and expansion provisions shall be wholly concealed within the finished 1. Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during execution of the work B. Work, in general, includes, but is not limited to, providing fire and smoke barrier penetration these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond assembly. of this Section and who shall be thoroughly trained and experienced in the materials and seals for openings in floors, walls, and other elements of construction. with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by D. Turn exposed edges back 2". methods required and who shall direct the entire flashing installation. vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil -free compressed air. E. General: 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: 3. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete and masonry. 2. Provide the Architect with the name of responsible person and his job title. 1. Install exposed sheet metal work that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool A. Applicator qualifications: Two years experience installing UL Classified fire stopping materials. 4. Clean metal, glass, porcelain enamel, glazed surfaces of ceramic tile, and other marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form 1.03 SUBMITTALS: B. Performance: Materials shall have been tested to provide fire rating equal to that of the non -porous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof A. Prior to installation, submit to the Architect for review the following: construction. substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. and weather -resistant performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be B. Prime joint substrates where indicated and also where recommended by joint sealant 1. Complete and fully descriptive manufacturers literature which shall include installation � covered before fabricating sheet metal. instructions as applicable for this Project. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: manufacturer based on preconstruction joint sealant -substrate tests or prior experience. Apply F. Seams/Waterproofing: 2. A schedule of all locations where the Contractor proposes use of this product. A. Prior to installation, submit to the Architect for his review the following: primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's recommendations. Confine primers to areas 1. Finish watertight and weathertight. 3. Physical sample of the product intended to be installed. 1. Shop drawings showing each condition requiring penetration seals in dictating proposed UL of joint sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. 2. Make all lock seam work flat and true to line systems materials, anchorage, methods of installation, and actual adjacent construction. C. Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that 3. Make all flat and lap seams in direction of flow. 1.04 PRODUCT HANDLING: 2. Copy of UL illustration of each proposed system indicating manufacturer approved otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods 4. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength. A. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect flashing materials before, during and after modifications. required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other Trades. 3. Manufacturer's data: Specifications, recommendations, installation instructions, and joint seal. G. Joints: B. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements maintenance data for each type of material required. Include letter indicating that each 1. Join parts with rivets or sheet metal screws where necessary for strength or stiffness. necessary to the approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner. material complies with the requirements and is recommended for the applications shown. 3.04 APPLICATION OF CAULKING: 2. Provide suitable watertight expansion joints for all runs of more than 40 feet, except 4. Qualifications statement: Past projects indicating required experience. A. Do not caulk under weather conditions or sun conditions potentially harmful to the set and where closer spacing is indicated on the Drawing or required for proper installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS curing of the caulking material. e 3. Joints and corners shall be accurately machined, filed and fitted, and rigidly framed 2.01 LAMINATED SHEET FLASHING: 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: B. Deliver materials to the job or place of application in original unopened containers bearing together and connected. All components shall be matched to produce perfect continuity of A. Product/manufacturer: A. Deliver materials undamaged in manufacturer's clearly labeled, unopened containers, identified manufacturer's name and product designation. line and design. Joints and connections in exterior face metal shall be made watertight. 1. Cop-R-Tex Duplex as manufactured by York. with brand, type, grade, and UL label where applicable. C. Install caulking in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, taking care to Face of metal shall have hairline joints. 2. Or comparable products as manufactured by: B. Coordinate delivery with scheduled installation date to allow minimum storage time at site. produce beads of proper width and depth, to tool as recommended by the manufacturer, and to 4. Form non expansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to a. Advanced Building Products. C. Store materials in clean, dry, ventilated location. Protect from soiling, abused, and moisture. immediately remove all surplus caulking. comply with SMACNA standards. Fill joint with sealant and form metal to completely b. Sandell Manufacturing Co. Follow manufacturer's instructions. conceal sealant. B. Metal: 5 oz. copper bonded on both sides with kraft paper. 3.05 CAULKING SCHEDULE: 5. Use joint adhesive for non-moving joints specified not to be soldered. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS: A. Carefully study the Drawings and furnish and install the proper caulking at each point where H. Nailing: 2.02 ACCEPTABLE EQUAL PRODUCT: A. Existing conditions: called for on the Drawings plus at all other points, whether specifically designated or not, where 1. Whenever possible, secure metal by means of clips or cleats without nailing through the A. Product/manufacturer: 1. Verify existing conditions and substrates before starting work. Correct unsatisfactory caulking is essential in maintaining the continued integrity of the intended watertight barrier. metal. 1. Perm -A -Barrier Wall Flashing as manufactured by W. R. Grace. conditions before proceeding. ° 2. In general, space all nails, rivets, and screws not more than 8" apart and, when exposed 2. Or an approved equal. 2. Proceed with installation only after penetrations of the substrate and supporting brackets /� /� �+ a to the weather, use lead washers. PPhave been installed. 079 - SEALANTS ' ��� z"o I. Expansion: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed sheet metal work. Space movement joints B. Environmental requirements: _ °M N „ B. Description: at maximum of 10 with no joints allowed within 24 of corner or intersection. Where lapped or 1. 32 mils, self-adhesive rubberized a halt inte integrally bonded to 8 mils of cross -laminated, 1. Furnish adequate ventilation if using solvent. PART 1 - GENERAL �o TAN asphalt 9 Y z = U = - v •• bayonet -type expansion provisions in work cannot be used or would not be sufficiently high -density polyethylene film to provide a minimum of 40 mil thick membrane. 2. Furnish forced air ventilation during installation if required by manufacturer. u Z = W ? mL .. O o weatherproof and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 2. Membrane shall be interleaved with disposable silicone -coated release paper until installed. 3. Keep flammable materials away from sparks of flame. 1.01 SCOPE: 0M�zd U,_ 1" deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints). 4. Provide masking and drop cloths to prevent contamination of adjacent surfaces by fire A. Provide all of the labor, materials, equipment, and services required to furnish and install the 2.03 OTHER MATERIALS: stopping materials. sealant. o J. Separations: Separate metal from non -compatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating A. All other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation B. The purpose of sealant in this Work is to provide a positive barrier against penetration of air concealed surfaces, at locations of contact, with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as of flashing,shall be new, first quality of their respective kinds, and subject to the a 1.06 GUARANTEE: and moisture at joints between items where sealant is essential to continued integrity of the recommended by manufacturer. Architect.q y p approval of the rit A. Submit copies of written guarantee agreeing to repair or replace joint sealers which fail in joint barrier. J g y 1. Underlayment: Where installing aluminum directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install adhesion, cohesion, abrasion resistance, weather resistance, extrusion resistance, migration O a slip sheet of red -rosin paper and a course of polyethylene underlayment. PART 3 - EXECUTION resistance, stain resistance, or general durability or appear to deteriorate in any other manner 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: O • 2. Bed flanges of work in a thick coat of roofing cement where required for waterproof 3.01 GENERAL: not clearly specified by submitted manufacturer's data as an inherent quality of the material for A. Compatibility and adhesion testing: Submit to joint sealant manufacturers samples of materials o performance. A. Install flashingin all locations where the flashing shall be total) concealed. the exposure indicated. The guarantee period shall be one year from the Date of Substantial that will contact or affect joint sealants for compatibility and adhesion testing as indicated o K. Embed all metal in connection with roofs in a solid bed of caulkin g y P g P Y J P Y 9 9• B. After installation, cut wall flashing flush with exterior faces of joints. Completion. below: L. Finishes shall be factory applied. Shapes shall be formed in the field. Do not break or crack C. Under sills, over exterior openings, and as otherwise indicated, extend flashing into underside of 1. Use test methods standard with manufacturer to determine if priming and other specific the finishes during field forming and installation. frame or next higher joint of back-up. PART 2 - PRODUCTS joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint O D. Provide concealed flashings in masonry work at or above all shelf angles, lintels, ledges and sealants to joint substrates. 3.03 COUNTER OR CAP FLASHING: other obstructions to the downward flow of water in the wail so as to divert such water to the 2.01 MANUFACTURERS: 2. Perform tests under normal environmental conditions that will exist during actual A. Flashing shall be provided with all base flashings. The flashing shall be formed of sheets not exterior. Prepare masonry surfaces smooth and free from projections which could puncture A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the manufacturers installation. longer than 10'-0" and shall be built into the masonry approximately 4" with the inner edge flashing. Place through -wall flashing on bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Seal penetrations, approved by UL for the type of installation condition listed herein. 3. Submit not less than 9 pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates, shims, terminating in a 1/4" hook dam or, alternately, turning up 1" behind the first masonry course. laps, and edges (vertically and horizontally) in flashing with mastic before covering the mortar. joint sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials. The apron shall be of sufficient width to overlap the base flashing not less than 3". Ends of E. Extend flashings the full length of lintels and shelf angles and minimum of 4" into masonry each 2.02 PRODUCTS: 4. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analysis of results to prevent delay in the adjacent lengths of flashing shall overlap not less than 3" and the built-in horizontal portion of end. Extend flashing from a line 1" beyond from exterior face of outer wythe of masonry (trim A. Provide materials classified by UL to provide fire stopping equal to time rating of construction progress of the Work. O " beingpenetrated. 5. Investigate materials failing compatibility or adhesion tests and obtain joint sealant the joint shall be set in elastic cement. The flashing shall have a layer of mortar above and and seal after installation), through the outer wythe, turned up a minimum of 4", and through the B. Provie asbestos free materials that comply with applicable codes and have been tested under g g P y J h below the horizontal flange in the wall. inner wythe to within 2" of the interior face of the wall in exposed work. Where interior surface p Y M manufacturers written recommendations for corrective measures, including use of specially Z � p positive pressure in accordance with UL 1479 or ASTM E814. formulated primers. O � • of inner wythe is concealed by furring, carry flashing completely through the inner wythe and turn *4 3.04 SCUPPERS, CONDUCTOR HEADS AND DOWNSPOUTS: �� 6. Testing will not be required when joint sealant manufacturer is able to submit joint � � up approximately 2". PART 3 - EXECUTION data required that are acceptable to Architect and are based on previous A. Scupper and conductor head: preparation q P 1. Attach conductor head to wall with masonry fasteners. Overflow openings in conductor F. Seal joints with cold setting cement or mastic. testing of current sealant products for adhesion to, and compatibility with, joint substrates O h 3.01 PREPARATION: and other materials matching those submitted. V J head shall be provided. 9 .,� A. Clean surfaces to be in contact with penetration seal materials, of dirt, grease, oil, B. Product testing: Provide comprehensive test data for each type of joint sealant based on tests 2. A closure flange shall be locked to the scupper and soldered at the top. The juncture 07661-PREFABRICATED ALUM. COPING AND FASCI ??? g P YP J � _ Ioose10SOa...x materials, rust, or ether substances that may affect proper fitting, adhesion, or conducted b a qualified independent testing laboratory on current product formulations with in a i.� between the top of the closure flange and masonry wall shall be sealed. Y q P 9 Y the required fire resistance. 24 month period preceding date of Contractor❑s submittal of test results to Architect. 3. From the roof side a flange shall be formed and soldered to the scupper prior to its P P 9 �. insertion into the wall. 1. Test elastomeric sealants for compliance with requirements specified by reference to ASTM IL 1111.111 = • B. Downspouts: PART 1 - GENERAL 3.02 INSTALLATION: C920. Include test results for hardness, stain resistance, adhesion and cohesion under A. Install penetration seal materials in accordance with printed instructions of the UL Fire cyclic movement (per ASTM C719 low -temperature flexibility, modulus of elasticity at W 1. Form to size and shape indicated. Longitudinal joints shall be locked. End joints shall yc • (p ), p y, y 1.01 SCOPE: Resistance Directory in accordance with manufacturer's instruction. 100% strain, effects of heat aging, and effects of accelerated weathering. N telescope 1-1 /2". 9. 9� 9• A. Provide all of the labor, materials, equipment, and services required to furnish and install the B. Seal holes or voids made by penetrations to ensure an effective smoke barrier. C. Engage an ex experienced installer who has completed joint sealant applications similar in material, cc IL 2. Support leaders in position clear of wall by 1 /8" x 3" red brass or copper straps no�`P P J PP prefabricated aluminum coping and fascia. C. Where floor openings without penetrating items are more than 4 in width and subject to design, and extent required herein. His work shall have resulted in construction with a record more than 10 apart. Prongs w high by 3/b long shall be punched from the traffic or loading, install fire stopping materials capable of supporting same loading as floor. of successful in-service performance and shall be able to show proof of successful similar strap to hold leader 3/4" from wall, or a red brass rod 1/4" die. shall extend 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: D. Protect materials from damage on surfaces subject to traffic. projects completed over the past 7 years. through the strap back of the leader. Extend straps on wall surface 2" on each A. High performance gravel stop shall be certified by the fascia manufacturer to comply with D. Obtain joint sealant materials from a single manufacturer for each different product required. side of leader and secure to masonry with bronze expansion shields and bronze 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: machine bolts of the cinch bolt type. Attachment to wood shall be with bronze la ANSI/SPRI Standard ES-1-98. Fascia shall meet performance design criteria according to the g following test standards: A. Examine penetration sealed areas to ensure proper installation before concealing or enclosing 1.03 SUBMITTALS: screws. Provide a shoulder of solder on each side of leader above each strap to areas. A. Prior to installation, submit to the Architect for review the following: ISSUE DATE 1. ANSI/SPRI ES-1-98 Test Method RE-1 Test for Roof Edge Termination of Single -ply 9� carry weight of leader. B. Kee areas of work accessible until inspection b applicable code authorities. ' 3. Provide elbows at bottom where leaders empty onto splash blocks. Roofing Membranes: The fascia system shall be tested to secure the membrane to P P Y PP 1. Complete and fully descriptive manufacturers literature for each type of sealant used 12-1-08 � P Y P C. Perform under this section patching and repairing of fire stopping caused b cutting or minimum 100 lbs./ft in accord with the ANSI/SPRI ES-1-98 Test Method RE-1. Use the P g P g PP g y g naming product formulation and giving product limitations. penetration by other trades. 2. Data rosin the product meets or exceeds the Fed. Sec. referenced. • 3.05 GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS: current edition of ANSI/SPRI ES-1 Wind Design Standard for Edge Systems Used with Low proving P P A. Gutters: Slope Roofing Systems. Physical P 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING: 3. Ph ical sample of all colors for the Architect's selection. A. Clean up spills of liquid components. 4. Submit statements by the manufacturers and installers of their acceptance of these REV DATE 1. Slip back edge of gutters under drip edges and hang with specified hangers at S-0" o.c. 2. ANSI/SPRI ES-1-98 Test Method RE-2 Pull -Off Test for Fascia: The fascia system shall B. Neatly cut and trim materials as required. 2. Bolt or rivet hangers to front lip of utter. Attach back end of hangers with screws, be tested in accord with the ANSI SPRI ES-1-98 Test Method RE-2. Use the current documents and conditions and/or any modification proposed to the use of the products. 9 P 9 g / C. Remove equipment, materials and debris, leaving area in undamaged, clean condition. Include a statement from the manufacturer that the proposed use of the product for the penetrating the gutter and the drip edge into the wood back-up. edition of ANSI/SPRI ES-1 Wind Design Standard for Edge Systems Used with Low Slope conditions encountered is proper. 3. Seal holes through drip edge with spots of flashing cement between heads of screws and Roofing Systems. 3.05 SYSTEMS AND APPLICATION SCHEDULE INCLUDES, BUT IS NOT LIMITED TO: 5. Submit a guarantee warranting all defects of material and/or application for a period of fives drip edge. 3. FMRC Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 APerimeter Flashing®. The fascia product shall A. Metal pipe or conduit through round opening. �- 4. Solder joints in utters. be listed in current Factor mutual Research Corporation Approval Guide approved for the B. Insulated metal i e throu h round o enin (5) years from Date of Substantial Completion. Any failure that may occur within this 10 • j 9 Y P Pp PP P P 9 P g• ;911 warrant period, due to defective application 5. Where closed ends occur at expansion joints, install covers over joints so that water zone in which the work is being accomplished. C. Metal pipes or conduits through large opening. y p app c on and/or materials shall, upon written d'ek, 9 cannot run down between sections of gutter. B. High performance coping shall be certified by the coping manufacturer to meet performance D. Busway through rectangular opening. notification of such failure, be repaired or replaced with proper materials and/or labor as '`eke B. Downspouts: design criteria according to the following test standards: E. Blank opening. approved by the Architect, at no additional cost to the Owner. S 1. Telescope joints in downspouts at least 2". 1. ANSI/SPRI ES-1-98 Test RE-3 for Coping : Wind Design Guide for Edge Systems Used F. Non-metallic (plastic) pipe or conduit through opening. 2. Install downspouts per SMACNA detail Figure 1-351. with Low Sloe Roofing Systems current edition). The coping system shall be tested G. Metal pipe or conduit through sum board wall. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: P P 9 P 9 Ys ( ) P• 9 Ys P�P 9 9YP s 3. Place one hanger directly below gutter/downspout connection, and one near the bottom simultaneously on horizontal and vertical surfaces and shall exceed horizontal and vertical H. Non-metallic (plastic) pipe or conduit through gypsum board wall. A. Deliver materials to site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating end of each downspout. design wind pressure as calculated in accord wit the ANSI/SPRI ES-1-98 Test RE-3. Use I. Insulated metal pipe through gypsum board wall. manufacturer product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing 4. Place intermediate hangers at 6'-0" o.c. maximum. the current edition of ANSI/SPRI ES-1 Wind Design Standard for Edge Systems Used with time, and mixing instructions. d B 5. Flash and seal joint between gutters and downspouts. Low Slope Roofing Systems. 2.04 SEALANT - EXTERIOR FINISH AND INSULATION SYSTEM: . Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations to prevent their 6. Attach hangers to masonry with self -drilling masonry anchors and stainless steel machine 2. FMRC Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 APerimeter Flashing@. The coping product shall A. Product/manufacturer: deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other screws. Attach hangers to sides of down -spouts with one rust -resisting, be listed in current Factory Mutual Research Corporation Approval Guide approved for the 1. 864 Low -modulus Silicone Sealant as manufactured by Pecora Corp. causes. self -tapping sheet metal screw (prefinished to match the downspout) in each side of zone in which the work is being accomplished. 2. Spectrem 3 Silicone Sealant as manufactured by Tremco. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS: downspout at each hanger. 3. Sonolastic Omniseal as manufactured by Sonneborn. This drawing and the design shown is the 1.03 SUBMITTALS: 4. Or as otherwise recommended by the EFIS manfuacturer. A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions. property of the architect. The reproduction, 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted b writcoptngonsentir use prohibidrated da,outtneir 07622 -ALUMINUM SILL PANS A. Prior to installation, submit the following to Architect for review: B. Type: One -part, low -modulus, neutral -curing, high-performance silicone. P P Y written consent ispronibitetlandany 1. Complete and fully descriptive manufacturer's literature describing the product and the 1. FS TT-S-1543A. joint sealant manufacturer. infringement will be subject to legal action. proper installation for this Project. 2. FS TT-S-230C, Class A. 2. When joint substrates are wet. SPECIFICATIONS3. Where joint widths are less than allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for application � PART 1 -GENERAL 2. Physical sample indicating the finish and color to be provided. 3. CGSB-19GP-9. type S Grade NS Use NT G A M 0. indicated. 4. ASTM C-920, Class poi yp 4. Until contaminants capable of interfering with their adhesion are removed from joint 1.01 SCOPE: PART 2 - PRODUCTS C. Joint backing: Open cell polyurethane foam of closed cell polyethylene. P 9 substrates. A. Provide all of the labor, materials, equipment, and services required to furnish and install the B. Note: Typical joint width shall be 3 8" unless otherwise advised b the joint manufacturer for aluminum sill pans and end dams at all windows, storefront and curtain wall installations. 2.01 COPING: 2.05 PRIMERS: the joint tp a involved or indicated differently on the Drawings. Y A=17 A. Product/manufacturer: A. As recommended by the sealant manufacturer for use in conjunction with the sealant for 1 YP Y 9 1.02 SUBMITTALS: 1. Permasnap Coping (.050" aluminum) as manufactured by Hickman Company. application onto the various types of materials to which the sealant applied, and complying with A. Prior to installation, submit to the Architect for review the following: 2. Or a comparable product as manufactured by. the requirements above. When the manufacturer's instructions make reference to use of primers 8-STRAIGHT PROTOTYPE - REVISION 16 - 06-18-08 I � I �� I l ,�-- Tli r .r �rrn-r-AT r; -a�r,i ��:, ire , :. 1 11 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i - - - -- 07900 - SEALANT 1.01 SCOPE: a.Operation and Maintenance Manual. PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and services to furnish and install the hollow metal b.Certificate stating that installed materials comply with this specification. work. ®$3'® _OVERHEAD DOORS 2.01 SEALANT - EXPANSION JOINTS, CONTROL JOINTS, AND PERIMETER OF DOOR AND WINDOW 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE • FRAMES: 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: PART 1 - GENERAL A. Product/manufacturer: A. Comply with all pertinent codes and regulations. A. Qualifications: 1. Dynatrol II as manufactured by Pecora Corp. B. Manufacture all labeled hollow metal work in accordance with the requirements of Underwriter's 1. Manufacturer Qualifications: ISO 9001:2000 registered and a minimum of five years experience in 1.01 SCOPE: 2. Dymeric as manfactured by Tremco. Laboratories. producing doors of the type specified. A. Provide all of the labor, materials, equipment, and services to furnish and install the sectional 3. Sonloastic NP2 as manufactured by Sonneborn. 1. Provide doors and frames with fire -resistance ratings indicated or required to comply with 2. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturers approval. overhead door. 4. An approved equal. governing regulations. B. Type: Two-part, non -sag, low -modulus polyurethane rubber sealant. 2. All labeled doors and frames shall be manufactured in accordance with the specifications 1.5 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: 1. FS TT-S-00227E, Class A, Type II. procedures of the Underwriter's Laboratories. All labeled doors and frames shall physically A. Provide each sectional overhead door as a complete unit produced by one manufacturer, 2. ASTM C-920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, use NT, MA, A ,G, and 0. bear the U.L. label showingthe rating required. A. Deliver materials and products in labeled protective packages. Store and handle in strict 9 q including hardware, accessories, mounting and installation components. C. Joint Backing: Closed -cell polyethylene. a. The followingnot table: compliance wmanufacturers instructions anrecommendations. Protect damage from are acceptable: liwith ftittid dtiPtt fdf P 1. Provide sectional overhead door units by one manufacturer for entire Project. D. Where joint depth does not permit use of joint backing, a release paper or bond breaker shall 1 Stick -on type labels. weather, excessive temperatures and construction operations. be used. () YP B. Wind loading: Unless otherwise noted, design and reinforce upward coiling doors to withstand a (2) Embossed frames. B. Follow manufacturer's instructions. 23 psf 120 mph wind loading pressure. E. On horizontal joints, surface must be cleaned and primed using primer as recommended by the „ sealant manufacturer. (3) Labels not visible after frame installation. C. Installation shall be by an authorized door manufacturers authorized representative. F.In all cases at aluminum storefront, curtain wall and windows, ensure and verify that specified 3. Agency under whom the testing was performed shall be the same for the door and the 1.6 WARRANTY o frame. Labels on the door and frame shall be the same and shall riot indicate different 1.03 SUBMITTALS: sealant is compatible with aluminum finish. A. Standard Warrant Two years from date of shipment against defects in material and workmanship. U w m o testing agencies. Y P g p A. Prior to installation, submit to the Architect for review the following:�- Z U 1. If not, notify the Architect immediately in order that a new product may be selected. 9 9 B. Maintenance: Submit for owner's consideration and acceptance of a maintenance service agreement O u s 4. UL 10C (positive pressure)/UBC7-2-97. Catagory A. P g 1. Shop and erection drawings indicating the following: _ Ce co U 2. Submit the aluminum storefront, curtain wall and window manufacturer❑s recommendation for installed products. a. Dimensions, materials and gauges. � u rn rc as to the type of product that should be substituted. C. Supplier 9 9 + � w 0 o O 1. per a national account agreement all material in the section must be purchased and b. Material finishes. to U 0 Z 0 -a PART 2 PRODUCTS w me 2.02 SEALANT - GENERAL PERIMETER SEALING AT TOILET FIXTURES, ACCESS DOORS, DOOR FRAMES, installed by the General Contractor from Gutman &Associates 7115 Cockrill Bend Blvd. c. Door operation. ce Q 0 m M VANITIES, ETC. IN WET AREAS: Nashville, TN 37209. Ph (615)350-6000 Contact: Thomas Breen. d. Weatherstripping Q = L_ Z Ln L 2.1 MANUFACTURER e. Hardware 3 v A.Product/manufacturer: 0 :D ne "R � 1. 898 SanitarySilicone Sealant as manufactured b Pecora Corp.. Submit operation and maintenance manual. W ¢ �, to m a U_ 1.03 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING: P Y P• A. Manufacturer: Cornell Iron Works, Inc., Crestwood Industrial Park, Mountaintop, PA 18707. Telephone: 2. Tremsil 200 as manufactured by Tremco. A. Deliver hollow metal work cartoned or crated to provide protection during transit and job 800 233-8366 Fax: 800 526-0841. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. UL ISO 9OD1:2000 3. Sonolastic Omniplus as manufactured by Sonneborn. storage. ( ) � ( ) ( )� 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: Registered. A. Deliver materials and products in labeled protective packages. Store and handle in strict 4. An approved equal. B. Inspect hollow metal work upon delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided P P P 9 B. Model: ESD20, 120 P.S.F., 20/24 GA compliance with manufacturers instructions and recommendations. Protect from damage from B. Type: One -part, neutral -curing silicone. refinished items are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to the Architect; 1. FS TT-S-001543A. otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as directed. weather, excessive temperatures and construction operations. 2. FS TT-S-00230C, Class A. C. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4" high wood 2.2 MATERIALS PART 2 - PRODUCTS + 3. ASTM C920, Class 25. blocking. Avoid use of non -vented plastic or canvas shelters which could create humidity C. Install after completion of all painting. chamber. If cardboard wrapper on door becomes wet, remove carton immediately. Provide 1/4" spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation. A. Curtain: 2.01 OVERHEAD DOOR: 2.03 SETTING THRESHOLDS; FLASHING; AND GENERAL SEALING NOT OTHERWISE DELEGATED: 1. Slat Material: No. 6F, (Listed Exterior/Interior): A. Products/manufacturer: • A. Product/manufacturer: PART 2 - PRODUCTS a.Galvanized Steel/Galvanized Steel: 24/24 gauge, Grade 40, ASTM A 653 galvanized steel 1. Model 3200W8 by Clopay Building Products Company. 1. AC-20 + Silicone as manufactured by Pecora Corp. 2.01 DOORS: zinc coating. B. Description: 2. Tremflex 834 as manufactured by Tremco. A. Description: b.lnsulation: 7/8 inch (22 mm) foamed -in -place, closed cell urethane. 1. 2 thick roll -formed commercial quality 24 gauge galvaneal steel. 3. Sonolastic Sonolac as manufactured by Sonneborn. 1. 1-3/4" thick, of composite construction, and fabricated of two sheets roller -leveled prime c.Total Slat Thickness: 15/16 inch (24 mm). 2. Rabbitted meeting rails to form a weatherseal between sections. 4. An approved equal. quality cold -rolled steel sheets. d.Slats have a Flame Spread Index of 0 and a Smoke Developed Index of 10 as tested per 3. Channel -shaped end stiles of 14 gauge steel to wrap face of section by full 1". B. Type: Siliconized one -part, non -sag, acrylic latex caulk a. Exterior: ASTM E84. 4. Z-shaped intermediate stiles: 16 gauge steel. 1. ASTM C-834. (1) 16 gauge. e.Slat has an R-value of 8.0 and an STC rating of 26. 5. Galvanized hardware to include hinges, adjustable top roller brackets and bottom fixtures C. Joint Backing: Round closed -cell polyethylene. (2) SDI Grade III, extra heavy Model 1, A-60 galvanized. 2. Bottom Bar: Reinforced extruded aluminum interior face with full depth insulation and exterior that have cable adjustment. b. Interior: skin slat to match curtain material and gauge. 6. Tracks: Vertical tracks to be minimum 16 gauge galvanized steel. Horizontal tracks to be 2.04 SEALANT - EXTERIOR FINISH AND INSULATION SYSTEM: (1) 16 gauge. 3. Fabricate interlocking sections with high strength nylon endlocks on alternate slats each secured minimum 14 gauge galvanized steel. Sized by manufactured to conform to door size and operation. A. Product/manufacturer: 2 SDI Grade III, extra heavyModel 1. with two Y4" (6.35 mm) rivets. Provide windlocks as required to meet specified wind load. o P 1. 864 Low -modulus Silicone Sealant as manufactured b Pecora Corp. ) 4. Exterior Slat Finish: 7. Heavy duty -oil tempered wire torsion springs on continuous ball bearing cross header shaft. °4 • Y P• 2. Provide rust -inhibitive primer, either air -drying or baking, suitable as base for specified 8. Lock: Slide locks O 2. Spectrem 3 Silicone Sealant as manufactured by Tremco. finish paints. a.Galvaldex Coating System to include an ASTM A 653 galvanized base coating treated with -\C e 3. Sonolastic Omniseal as manufactured by Sonneborn. P dual process rinsing agents in preparation of a chemical bonding, light gray baked -on 9. Bottom of door to have U-shape all-weather vinyl seal designed to conform and seal at 3. Thermal/sound insulation: Interior of door shall be completely filled with rigid urethane base coat and a light gray baked -on polyester finish coat. The scientific organic the floor surface and seal at the floor surface. 4. Or as otherwise recommended by the EFTS manfuacturer. polyester 9 9 Y P Ye 9 r, core foamed in place and chemically bonded to all interior surfaces. Urethane shall be material composition and chemical bonding process of GalvaNex produces a superior finish 10. Finish: Factory -applied electrostatically painted. Color to be selected by the Architect. B. Type: One -part, low -modulus, neutral -curing, high-performance silicone. P 9 P P P self- bonding, self -hardening, and self -extinguishing. against corrosion and abrasion. GalvaNex components include a limited two year finish 11. Windows: 8" x 24 See Drawings for number of rows and area to be lazed. 1. FS TT-S-1543A. 9 P Y 9 9 4. Doors shall have flush seamless face sheets with mechanically locked vertical edges. warrant 12. Track: High lift. Size as recommended b the manufacturer. 3. CGSB-I9GP-9. 2. FS -SP-9. Class A. Exposed hairline seam on lock and hinge rail edge are acceptable. y 5. Interior Slat Finish: 13. Operation:g y Manual, chain operation. 5. Top and bottom of the doors shall be closed flush by 16 ga. steel channels. » 4. ASTM C-920, Class 25, type S, Grade NS, Use NT, G, A, M, 0. a. GalvaNex Coating System to include an ASTM A 653 galvanized base coating treated with 14. 4 exhaust opening to be installed as recommended by the manufacturer. C. Joint backing: Open cell polyurethane foam of closed cell polyethylene. 6. Hardware preparation: dual process rinsing agents in preparation of a chemical bonding, light gray baked -on 15. Hand chain tensionner - Manufactured by Torque Force a division of Canimex. a. Hinge reinforcements shall be 7 ga. steel, drilled and tapped by the manufacturer. polyester base coat and a light gray baked -on polyester finish coat. The scientific organic b. Doors shall be mortised for template hinges and prepared for locksets. material composition and chemical bonding process of GalvaNex produces a superior finish PART 3 - EXECUTION 2.05 INTERIOR SEALANT; UNDER GYPSUM BOARD IN SERVICE AREA 7. Doors prepared for lights shall have the openings framed and securely attached. Glazing P 9 P P P o N A. manufacturer: Product against corrosion and abrasion. GalvaNex components include a limited two year finish 3.01 FABRICATION: M / beads shall be screwless snap -in type. b 1. Pecora Corp.f Harleysville, PA warranty. A. Fabricate overhead door in strict accordance with the approved Shop Drawings. - 2 p Y B. UL 10C Positive Pressure: > � Z A o 2. Tremco Inc. of Cleveland, OH 6. Bottom Bar Finish:TO 1. Coordinate with Section 08710, Finish Hardware. _ ° A ° 0M ry 3. Dow Corning No. 732 a.Exterior Face: Match slats. 3.02 INSTALLATION: ��M ? b- 4. An approved equal. b.lnterior Face: Mill finish. A. Install all overhead doors in strict accordance with the original desi n, all pertinent codes and ��� 2.02 FRAMES: 9 P z �a ro B. Type: Acrlic Latex B. Guides: Fabricate with minimum 3/16 inch (4.76 mm) structural steel angles. Provide windlock regulations, the approved shop drawings, and the manufacturers recommendations, anchoring all �.� o u z o i c .. A. Welded unit frames: Wes ; mL � o � � a 1. ASTM C-834. bars of some material when windlocks are required to meet specified wind load. Top of inner and components firmly in place for long life under hard use. om�Zf- uN�d� 1. Exterior: an C. Joint Backing: Non -absorbent, closed cell, foam polyethylene material, sgaouter guide angles to be flared outwards to form bellmouth for smooth entry ure or round in shape a. 14 ga. commercial quality, cold -rolled steel. g g y of curtain into o and shall be sized to cause a 30% compression in the joint. b. A-60 galvanized. guides. 1 3.03 TOUCHING UP: 2. Interior: Provide removable guide stoppers to prevent over travel of curtain and bottom bar. Top 16 h" A. Upon completion of the installation, touch up all scuffs and abrasions in the shop priming coat, 2.06 PRIMERS: 419.10 mm of coil side guide angles to be removable for ease of curtain installation and as using primer specified above. a. 16 go. commercial quality, cold -rolled steel. ( ) 9 9 A. As recommended by the sealant manufacturer for use in conjunction with the sealant for B. Description: needed for future curtain service. O o application onto the various types of materials to which the sealant applied, and complyingwith 1. Finish: 3.04 INSTRUCTIONS: PP YP ' PP r 1. Head and jamb members shall be mitered, securely welded and ground smooth. O • the requirements above. When the manufacturers instructions make reference to use of primers 2. Provide rust -inhibitive primer, either air -drying or baking, suitable as base for specified a.Steel: Phosphate treatment followed by a light gray bared -on polyester powder coat; A. Upon completion of the installation, and as a condition of its acceptance, instruct the Owner's and/or the construction condition requires special surface preparation, these instructions shall be finish paints. minimum 2.5 mils (0.065 mm) cured film thickness. maintenance and operation personnel with the operation and maintenance of the overhead door. o a complied with. 3. Provide 5/8" high integral stops and 2" faces normally available from stock. C. Counterbalance Shaft Assembly: 4. Provide with appropriate jamb anchors and with floor anchors which are adjustable. 1. Barrel: Steel pipe capable of supporting curtain load with maximum deflection of 0.03 inches per OQ/� 1 ® _ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRON 2.07 CLEANERS: 5. Double swing doors: Provide two rubber silencers for strike jambs and heads. foot (2.5 mm per meter) of width. Vi'T O A. Where required by manufacturer's instructions in lieu of primers, shall be of the type and kind C. Hardware preparation: 2. Spring Balance: Oil -tempered, heat -treated steel helical torsion spring assembly designed for recommended by the sealant manufacturer. 1. Minimum gauges for hardware reinforcements: proper balance of door to ensure that maximum effort to operate will not exceed 25 Ibs (110 (1) Hinge reinforcements: 7 gauge. N). Provide wheel for applying and adjusting spring torque. PART 1 -GENERAL PART 3 -EXECUTION (2) Universal strike reinforcements: 12 gauge. D. Brackets: Fabricate from minimum 3/16 inch (5 mm) steel plate with permanently lubricated ball 1.01 SCOPE: 2. Hinge jambs shall be mortised for template hinges and lock jambs shall be mortised for or roller bearings at rotating support points to support counterbalance shaft assembl and form A. Provide all of the labor, materials, equipment, and services required to furnish and install the 3.01 CHOICE OF CAULKING MATERIAL: g J P 9 J g g PP P PP Y aluminum entrances and storefronts. ANSI A115.1 and .2 universal lock strike. end closures. A.Use only that caulking material which is best suited to the installation and is so recommended 3. Plaster guards shall be snap -in type. 1. Finish: 0 by the caulking material manufacturer. 4. Hinge and strike reinforcements shall be drilled and tapped b the manufacturer. a.Steel: Phosphate treatment followed b a light gray baked -on polyester powder coat; 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: 9 PP Y P y g g y P y P A. Engage an experienced installer who has completed installation of aluminum storefront and H � minimum 2.5 mils (0.065 mm) cured film thickness. it 3.02 BACK-UP MATERIALS: entrances similar in design and extent to those required for the project and whose work has Z 2.03 LABELED DOORS AND FRAMES: E. Hood: 24 gauge galvanized steel with reinforced top and bottom edges. Provide minimum 1 /4 inch C C • resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. A. Verify the compatibility of filler material with caulking before installation. A. Provide labeled doors and frames for those openings re requiring fire protection ratings. � 4 B. Use filler about 1 3 to ❑ wider than width of oint so sufficient pressure is exerted b filler to q g P g (6.35 mm) steel intermediate support brackets as required to prevent excessive sag. B. Single -source responsibility: Provide aluminum storefront and entrances from one source and LL / J P Y 1. Construct and test in accordance with the standards of Underwriter's Laboratories (UL). 1. Finish: produced by a single manufacturer. provide substantial resistance to displacement. 2. The UL physical label shall be affixed to all labeled units as evidence of compliance with a.GalvaNex CoatingSystem to include an ASTM A 653 galvanized base coating treated with O y C.AII filler materials shall be non -oil non -staining, Ys 9 9 C. Finishes: All finishes shall be in accordance with the standards of the: y, g back-up filler such as polyethylene foam the procedures of the labeling agency. C� `4 rod, expanded polyurethane, neoprene or other filler completely compatible with the caulking P gdual process rinsing agents in preparation of a chemical bonding, light gray baked -on 1. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA). J P P Yu P P Y P g 3. Advise the Architect prior to fabricating if any door or frame that is required to be polyester base coat and a light gray baked -on polyester finish coat. The scientific organic _ • material. fire -rated cannot qualify for appropriate labeling because of its design, hardware or for material composition and chemical bonding process of GalvaNex produces a superior finish an other reason. P g P P P 1.03 SUBMITTALS: 3.03 PREPARATION: y against corrosion and abrasion. GalvaNex components include a limited two year finish A. Prior to fabrication, submit to the Architect for review the following: 4 warranty. 1. Shop drawings showing the following: LU _ • A. Surface cleaning of joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to PART 3 - EXECUTION F. Weatherstripping: a. A description of all materials, sizes, dimensions, and gauges. N W comply with recommendations of joint sealant manufacturer and the following requirements: 3.01 INSTALLATION: 1. Bottom Bar: Replaceable, bulb -style, compressible EDPM gasket extending into guides. b. Size of openings. 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of A. Install all hollow metal in strict accordance with all pertinent codes and regulations, the 2. Guides: Replaceable vinyl strip on guides sealing against fascia side of curtain. c. Method of fabrication and assembly. N joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings, tested and approved submittals, the Contract Documents, and the manufacturer's current recommendations, 3. Lintel Seal: Nylon brush seal fitted at door header to impede air flow. d. Method of joining. approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint anchoring all components firmly in position for long life under hard use. e. Any concealed stiffening and reinforcement. sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. B. Prior to installation, all frames must be checked and corrected for rack, twist, and 2.3 ACCESSORIES f. Type of spacing of fasteners. 2. Clean concrete, masonry, unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile, similar porous joint substrate out -of -square. g. Method of providing for expansion and contraction. CC surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these C. Erect frames plumb and true, firmly bracing in position until masonry work has reached full A. Locking: h. Method of attachment to adjacent construction. methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with height of frames. Spreader bars are for shipment only. Remove temorary speader bars before 1. Pad`lockable slide bolt on coil side of bottom bar at each jamb extending into slots in guides. i. Method of glazing. joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by setting frame. j. Location of sealant. vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil -free compressed air. D. Leave all installed material clean, free of all foreign matter, or rust spots ready to receive 2.4 OPERATION 2. Physical Sample: An aluminum corner section of system in the color and finish proposed ISSUE DATE 3. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete and masonry. finish painting. (See Section 09900, "Paint".) to be provided. Sample shall show complete range of light and dark of color finish. 12-1-08 • 4. Clean metal, glass, porcelain enamel, glazed surfaces of ceramic tile, and other E. Install all finish hardware in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, A. Manual Chain Hoist: Provide chain hoist operator with endless steel chain, chain pocket wheel and 3. Complete hardware schedule organized into sets based on hardware specified. Coordinate non -porous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm eliminating all hinge -bound conditions and making all items smoothly operating and firmly guard, geared reduction unit, and chain keeper secured to guide. hardware with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. anchored into position. function, and finish. Include item name, name of the manufacturer and complete B. Prime joint substrates where indicated and also where recommended by joint sealant PART 3 EXECUTION designations of every item required for each door opening. REV DATE manufacturer based on preconstruction joint sealant -substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's recommendations. Confine primers to areas 08330 - ROLLING SERVICE DOOR 3.1 EXAMINATION 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS: of joint sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. A. Field measurements: Check actual openings by accurate filed measurement before fabrication. S' C. Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that PART 1 GENERAL A. Examine substrates upon which work will be installed and verify conditions are in accordance with Show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods approved shop drawings. construction progress to avoid delay of work. t • required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing B. Coordinate with responsible entity to perform corrective work on unsatisfactory substrates. ,�16 joint seal. 1.1 SUMMARY C. Commencement of work b installer is acceptance of substrate. e��e l Y P 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: der �S 3.04 APPLICATION OF CAULKING: A. Section Includes: Manual overhead insulated rolling doors. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Deliver aluminum entrance and storefront components in the manufacturer's original protective A. Do not caulkunder weather conditions or sun conditions potentially harmful to the set and packaging. B. Store aluminum components `Q � curing of the caulking material. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ponents in a clean dry location away from uncured masonry or conrete. A. General: Install door and operating equipment with necessary hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers Cover components with waterproof paper, tarpaulin or polyethylene sheeting in a manner to permit B. Deliver materials to the job or place of application in original unopened containers bearing and supports. circulation of air. A. Design Requirements: n manufacturer's name and product designation. B. Follow manufacturers installation instructions. 1. Wind Loading: Supply doors to withstand up to 120 psf maximum wind load. C. Stack framing components in a manner that will prevent bending and avoid significant or permanent damage. C. Install caulking in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, taking care to 2. Insulated Door Slat Material Requirements: produce beads of proper width and depth, to tool as recommended by the manufacturer, and to a.Flame Spread Index of 0 and a Smoke Developed Index of 10 as tested per ASTM E84. 3.3 ADJUSTING immediately remove all surplus caulking. 1.06 WARRANTY: b.Minimum Sound Transmission Class (STC) rating of 26 as tested per ASTM E90. c.Minimum R-value of 8.0 (U-factor of 0.125) as calculated using the ASHRAE Handbook of A. Following completion of installation, including related work or others, lubricate, test, and adjust A. Manufacturer's warranty: Submit, for Owner's acceptance, manufacturer's standard warranty 3.05 CAULKING SCHEDULE: doers for ease of operation, free from warp, twist, or distortion. document executed by authorized company official. Manufacturer's warranty is in addition to, and Fundamentals. This drawing and the design shown is the A. Carefully study the Drawings and furnish and install the proper caulking at each point where not a limitation of, other rights Owner may have under the Contract Documents. property of the architect. The reproduction, d.lnsulation to be CFC Free with on Ozone Depletion Potential (ODP) rating of zero. 3.4 CLEANING 1. Beneficiary: Issue warranty in the name of the project Owner. copying or use of this drawing without their called for on the Drawings plus at all other points, whether specifically designated or not, -where written consent is prohibited and any caulking2. Warranty period: infringement will be subject to legal action. is essential in maintaining the continued integrity of the intended watertight barrier. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Clean surfaces soiled by work as recommended by manufacturer. 3. 2 years commencing from the Date of Substantial Completion. SPECIFICATIONS B. Remove surplus materials and debris from the site. 4. Installation: Warranted a ainst defects for 1 year from the Date of Substantial Completion. A. Prior to installation, submit to the Architect for review the following: 9 Y P 1. Product Data. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION 2. Shop Drawings: Include special conditions not detailed in Product Data. Show interface with PART 2 - PRODUCTS. 08110 -HOLLOW METAL DOORS adjacent work. A. Demonstrate proper operation to Owner's Representative. 2.01 EXTERIOR STOREFRONT FRAMING: 3. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: A. Product manufacturer: a.Provide proof of manufacturer ISO 9001:20W registration. B. Instruct Owners Representative in maintenance procedures. 1. TriFab VG 451(T) as manufactured by Kawneer Co. Amlig PART 1 -GENERAL b.Provide proof of manufacturer and installer qualifications - see 1.4 beiow. 2. Comparable product as manufactured by. c. Provide manufacturer's installation instructions. 4. Closeout Submittals: 8-STRAIGHT PROTOTYPE - REVISION 16 - 06-18-08 08410 - ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONT' a. Vistawall. anchors approved by the Architect, according to the materials to which the hardware is to be SC 1 PERMANENT CYLINDER CORE 80-037 X 26D 1AA b. Tubelight. applied and the recommendations of the hardware manufacturer. LC 1 CLOSER 4041 CUSH AL 001001010 - G_ LA71 NG c. YKK. C. All fastenings shall harmonize with the hardware as to material and finish. HA 1 PROTECTION PLATE 190S 8"H X 34"W X 32D B. Description: NA 1 DRIP CAP 16 A X 40" PART 1 - GENERAL , �� �� 2.02 FINISH: " 1. Tube size: 2 x 4-1 /2 . NA 1 DOOR BOTTOM SWEEP 102 VA X 2. Material: Extruded aluminum, ASTM B 221; alloyand temper. A. As specified in the hardware sets. " " 1.01 SCORE: P NA 1 PERIMETER GASt4ETING SET 160 V 36 X 84 3. Wall thickness: Each framingmember shall provide structural strength to meets specified B. Door closers and brackets shall have commercial sprayed finish to match other hardware. » P 9 P NA 1 SADDLE THRESHOLD 425 X 36 A. Provide all of the labor, materials, equipment and services to furnish and install the glass and performance requirements. HA 3 DOOR SILENCERS 307D X GREY glazing accessories. 4. Fasteners: Stainless steel. 2.03 KEYING: 9 B. It is the intent of the Documents that all units shall be glazed so that there will be no A. All locks shall be Grand Master keyed, and Master keyed as directed by the Architect. All 5. Gaskets: EPDM rubber. HARDWARE SET # 3 OVERHEAD DOORS passage of air or moisture. The Contractor shall provide whatever materials are necessary, 6. Perimeter anchors: Aluminum. Where steel anchors are used, provide insulation between cylinders shall 7 pin interchangeable core with restricted keyway. TYP PER EA OH DOOR ON SCHEDULE whether specified or not, to achieve this condition. • steel material and alumnum material to prevent galvanic action. » 2.04 BUTT HINGES: 7. Thermal barrier: 1/4 separation consisting of two part chemically curing, high density MFR QTY DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER KEY 1.02 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS: polyurethane which is mechanically and adhesively joined to alumnum store front sections. A. Provide in non-ferrous materiel for all exterior doors. All interior doors, unless otherwise FL 1 PADLOCK KS41Fl200 A. Provide glazing systems that are produced, fabricated, and installed to withstand normal 8. Finish: AAMA 611-98, Class 1 - 7 mils minimum coating thickness, black anodized. indicated in the hardware sets, shall be manufactured of steel, plated to match adjacent SC 1 PERMANENT CYLINDER CORE 80-037 X 626 1AA g g » hardware. thermal movement, wind loading, and impact loading (where applicable), without failure including C. Glazing: 1 insulating. See Section 08810. B. Approved manufacturers: SHIPPED WITH PERMANENT CORE INSTALLED TO - TIRE KINGDOM SET UP STAFF loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: to 1. Hager 1. Defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation. to N _ 2.02 STOREFRONT DOORS: HARDWARE SET # 4 INTERIOR CLOSET DOORS 2. Failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight. A. Stile and rail face dimensions shall be: 2.05 CYLINDRICAL LOCKSETS: SINGLE HM FRAME SCH£D 5 3/4 W/ 2 FACE HEAD 3. Deterioration of glazing materials. U ,,, o 1. Narrow stile: Vertical stile: 2-1/8", Top rail: 2-y4", Bottom rail: 12". A. Locks shall be certified as meeting ANSI A156-2 1976 Grade 1 requirements. Where required HM DOOR SCHED 4. Other defects resulting in construction. C) u i B. Corner construction: Both sigma deep penetration weld and mechanical fastening. and specified in hardware sets, non-ferrous locksets shall have stainless steel chassis. Locks = � E C. Glazing stops: Snap -in type with neoprene bulb -type glazing. No exposed screws of secure shall be regularly furnished for 1-3/8" to 2" doors, available for doors up to 2-1/2" thick. MFR QTY DESCRIPTION PART NUItifBER" KEY 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: � � � w O rn o M stops. Stops on exterior side shall be lock -in tamper -proof type. Locks shall be listed far all classes labeled doors. HA 3 HINGES ECBB1100 4 )z X 4 1h X 26D A. Codes and standards: p 11J � Z O � � � FL 1 STOREROOM FUNCTION LOCKSET T581 FIC D X 626 1. In addition to complying with all pertinent codes and regulations, comply with all t Q O M , D. Door leaf: Equip with adjustable mechanisms located in top rail near lock stile which will A. Approved manufacturers: Q = w r provide for minor adjustments after installation. 1. Falcon SC 1 CONSTRUCTION CYLINDER CORE B11-035 X GREEN CKA pertinent recommendations contained in the "Manual of Glazing" of the Flat Glass Marketing U i- Z E. Weatherstripping: Weatherstrip door on three sides with pile type material installed on the door SC 1 PERMANENT CYLINDER CORE 80-037 X 26D 1AA Association (FGMA). � � � � � `D `O and/or the frame. Provide adjustable pile weatherstripping at pivoted stiles and at the meeting 2.06 TOUCH BAR EXIT DEVICE: LC 1 CLOSER 4031 LD A AL 2. Comply with all the requirements of the SafetyStandard for Architectural Glazing Q / J P� PP' g P g HA 1 FLOC STOP 242E x 26D p y �� 9 stiles of a pair of doors. Bottom shall be weatherstripped with a pile sweep strip applied to the A. Provide with horizontal housing and trim base of extruded aluminum. The lock stile chassis, " Materials (16 CFR 1201) as issued by the Consumer Product Safety Commission. door rail. back plate and end caps shall be forged aluminum, with lotcf' dt of forged bronze. The device HA 2 PROTEC n0N PLATE 190S 8 H X 344 W X 32D 3. Insulating glass: SIGMA TM-3000 AVertical Glazing Guidelines®. F. Finish: Match storefront framing. shall be non -handed with horizontal and vertical roller bearings to minimize fricticn and proms a HA 3 DOOR SILENCER'S 307D X GREY 4. Safety glass: Products complying with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR G. Hardware: uniform smooth operation along the entire surface of the tcuch bar. Device shall have one point Port 1201 for category II materials. 1. Offset pivots. positive dogging accomplished by one eighth turn of dog key. HARDWARE SET # 4A DOUBLE ACTING TRAMC DR B. Engage an experienced gla-tier who has completed glazing similar in material, design, and extent 2. Closers: Concealed overhead. B. Approved manufacturers: ACCESS PANEL DOOR to that indicated for Project with a record of successful in-service performance. .�. 3. Panic devices: Concealed vertical rod - Kowneer "Poneline". 1. Monarch IGLE HM FRAME CASED OPEN 5 Y" 11/ 2" FACE C. Single -source responsibility: Obtain glass from one source for each product indicated below: 4. Push/pull: Manufacturer's standard. IAA TRAFFIC DR 62OSS 1. Primary g1-ass of each type and crass indicated. 5. Locks and flush bolts (cylinders to be provided with finish hardware). 2.07 AUTOMATIC FLUSH BOLTS: 2. Heat -treated glass of each condition indicated. 6. Thresholds. A. Shall have positively driven linkage coupled to an over ride feature. Bolt shall have all steel MFR QTY DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER KEY 3. Insulating glass of each construction indicated. • chassis plated for corrosive resistance. HARDWARE BY DOOR MFR D. Single source responsibility for glazing accessories: Obtain glazing accessories from one source 2.03 GLASS: B. Approved manufacturers: for each product and installation method indicated. A. See Section 08810, "Glazing". 1. Hager (specified numbers) HARDWARE SET # 5 INTERIOR MCR OFFICE DOOR SINGLE " FRAME 3070 5 < W/ 2" FACE HEAD 1.03 SUBMITTALS: PART 3 - EXECUTION 2.08 SURFACE BOLTS: HM DOOR 3070 A. Prior to fabrication, submit to the Architect for review the following: 3.01 GENERAL: A. Heavy duty construction. 1. Physical sample: 12" square samples of each type of glass indicated (except for clear A. Installation shall be in accordance with the Contract Documents, the approved submittals, and B. Approved manufacturers: MFR QTY DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER KEY monolithic glass products) and 12" long samples of each color required (except black) for the manufacturer's instructions. 1. Hager (specified numbers) HA 3 HINGES ECBB1100 4 Y2" X 4 1h" X 26D each type of sealant or gasket exposed to view. Install sealant or gasket sample between FL 1 OFFICE FUNCTION LOCKSET T511 FIC D X 625 two strips of material representative in color of the adjoining framing system. 3.02 FABRICATION: 2.09 MANUAL FLUSH BOLTS: Sc 1 CONSTRUCTION CYLINDER CORE 8,0-035 X GREEN CKA 2. Manufacturer's literature completely describing each product. A. Shopprefabricate all doors and frames into complete units, verifying all measurements at the A. Approved manufacturers: SC 1 PERMANENT CYLINDER CORE 80-037 X 26D SKD1 3. Product certificates signed b glazing materials manufacturer's certifying that their °O P P Y 9 9 y 9 9 Y 9 a � job site prior to fabrication. 1. Hager HA 1 FLOOR STOP 242F X 26D products comply with specified requirements. B. Fabricate in strict accordance with the approved submittals and the manufacturer's published HA 2 PROTECTION PLATE 190S 8"H X 34"W X 32D 4. Separate certifications are not required for glazing materials bearing manufacturer's 2.10 DOOR STOPS: HA 3 DOOR SILENCERS 307D X GREY recommendations. permanent labels designating type and thickness of glass, provided labels represent a A. Wall stops shall be furnished whenever possible. Where wail stops cannot be used effectively, C. Accurately miter and fit all members to hairline joints. quality control program of a recognized certification agency or independent testing agency D. Weld or mechanically fasten along entire line of contact on the unexposed side. floor stops shall be used as applicable. HARDWARE SET # 6 INTERIOR PUSH PULL DOORS acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. E. No discoloration on the face after anodizing will be acceptable. 1. Hager 236W SINGLE HM FRAME 3070 5 31" W/ 2" FACE HEAD 5. Compatibility and adhesion test reports from sealant manufacturer indicating that glazing 2.11 EXTERIOR STOPS AND HOLDERS: HIM DOOR 3070 materials were tested for compatibility and adhesion with glazing sealants. Include sealant 3.03 ERECTION: manufacturer's interpretation of test results relative to sealant performance and A. Approved manufacturers: MFR QTY DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER KEY A. Install all members with adequate provision for setting, expanding, and contracting to occur recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. without breaking glass. 1. Hager (specified numbers) HA 3 HINGES ECB81100 4 Y2" X 4 Yi" X 26D 6. Compatibility test report from manufacturer of insulating glass edge sealant indicating B. Firmly anchor all members, using all anchoring devices required to ensure positive attachment of HA 1 PUSH PLATE 30S 4" X 16" X 32D that glass edge sealants were tested for compatibility with other glazing materials including the members for Ion life under hard use. 2.12 ROLLER BUMPERS: » » o N 9 HA 1 PULL WITH PLATE 3ZSG 4 X 16 X 32D sealants, glazing tape, gaskets, setting blocks, and edge blocks. C. All items shall be set in their correct locations and shall be level, square, plumb, and at proper A. Where the opening of two doors interfere with each other, roller bumpers shall be furnished. LC 1 CLOSER 4031 LD/PA AL P YP glazing 9 9 - q p p p 7. Product test reports for each type of )azin sealant and gasket indicated evidencing elevations and in alignment with other work. 1. Ives: 472. HA 1 FLOOR STOP 242F X 260 compliance with requirements specified. 5: zN�� D. All joints between interior metal and masonry and between interior glass framing and mullion " " 8. Maintenance data for lass and other glazing materials to include in operating and = N M o M N M members shall be tightly caulked in order to secure a watertight job. 2.13 DOOR CLOSERS: HA 2 PROTECTION PLATE 1 SOS 8 H X 34 W X 32D 9 9 9 P 9 G� " maintenance manual. �o „�� � �, ���, E. All metal shall be screwed in lace, using backing, masonry plugs, or anchor straps as required. A. Closers shall be rack and pinion construction with both rack and pinion of heat treated steel. NA 1 DOOR BOTTOM SWEEP 102 VAX 36 ®103 ONLY Z�� N P g g' y P g ' P q Case shall b8 cast hydraulic iron. Closing the door shall be controlled with full adjustable NA 1 PERIMETER GASKET1NG SET 16fl V 36" X 84" ®103 ONLY ° N o u z o i o x F. Where moldings are joined, they shall be accurately cut and fitted to result in a tightly closed g y 1.04 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING: n�._ ML � o� � 0 backcheck. Valves shall be of needle vaivet a and concealed o ainst unauthorized adjustment. " o I,� Z U N o d LL joint. type 9 Ju NA 1 SADDLE THRESHOLD 425 X 36 ® 103 ONLY A. Protect glazing materials to comply with manufacturer's directions and as needed to prevent G. Protection: Where delayed action closer are specified, indicate hand of door to insure valve will be positioned at HA 3 DOOR SILENCERS 3070 X GREY a to of closer for concealment. Closers shall be surface applied with rectangular cover, damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure 1. Wherever aluminum is in contact with steel, concrete, or other material potentially creative p " � " g to sun, or other causes. of electrolytic action, provide all required permanent isolation of the aluminum by projection not over 2-3/4 and capable of being applied an 1-3/4 top rail or top jamb for HARDWARE SET # 7 INTERIOR RESTROOMS backpainting with first quality bituminous paint or by such other isolation as is approved in inverted mounting. All closers shall be covered by a written 10 year guarantee from SINGLE HM FRAME 3070 5 3/4" W/ 2" FACE HEAD 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS: advance b the Architect. manufacturer. KM DOOR 3070 O o Y A. Environmental conditions: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature 2. Protect all finished surfaces as necessary to prevent damage during progress of the Work. B. Approved manufacturers: conditions are outside the limits permitted by glazing materials manufacturer or when glazing O • 1. LCN MFR QTY DESCRIPTION PARTNUMBER KEY channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 3.04 CLEANING UP: HA 3 HINGES ECBB1100 4 Y2" X 4 X" X 26D o 0 A. Immediate) prior to acceptance of the work remove all protective materials from the storefront 2.14 DOOR SILENCERS: FL 1 PRIVACY FUNCTION LOCKSET T301 D X 626 Y P P � P 1.06 WARRANTY: system and clean. all exposed members. A. Provide 3 for each single door and 2 for each pair of doors. LC 1 CLOSER 4031 LD/PA AL A. Coated glass products: Submit written warranty signed by coated glass manufacturer agreeing B. Do not use abrasives or harmful cleaning agents. HA 1 FLOOR STOP 242E X 26D to furnish replacements for those coated glass units that deteriorate, f.o.b. point of O 2.15 DOOR COORDINATORS: HA 2 PROTECTION PLATE 190S 8"H X 34"W X 32D manufacture, freight allowed Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. A. Shall be furnished on pairs of doors. s required. Furnish prime point for painting after HA 3 DOOR SILENCERS 307D X GREY Warranty covers only deterioration due to normal conditions of use and not to handling, installing, m 08710 - F I N I S H HARDWARE installation match dflor frame. Furnish cut for panic hardware as required. HA 1 ADA WOMEN RESTROOM SIGN 368W-W3 ® WOMEN ONLY and cleaning practices contrary to glass manufacturer's published instructions. B. Approved manufacturers: HA 1 ADA MEN RESTROOM SIGN 368M-W3 0 MEN ONLY 1. Warranty period: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than 5 years after date of 1. Hager (specified numbers) HA 1 ADA UNISEX RESTROOM SIGN 3£r8U-W3 ®EMPLOYEE ONLY Substantial Completion. PART 1 -GENERAL B. Insulating glass: Submit written warranty signet) by coated glass manufacturer agreeing to 2.16 THRESHOLDS AND WEATHERSTRIPPING: furnish replacements for those insulating glass units that deteriorate, f.o.b. point of manufacture, Q 1.01 SCOPE: A. Approved manufacturers: HARDWARE SET # 8 INTERIOR BREAKROOM DOOR freight allowed Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. Warranty covers y A. Provide all of the labor, materials, equipment and services required to furnish and install the 1. Hager (specified numbers) 3 " " finish hardware. SINGLE HM FRAME 3070 5 l4 W/ 2 FACE HEAD only deterioration due to normal conditions of use and not to handling, installing, and cleaning Z � HM DOOR 3070 practices contrary to glass manufacturer's published instructions. O O • B. Items not specifically mentioned, though necessary to the completion of the Work, shall be 2.22 KEY CABINET: J provided and shall be of equal quality and design to those specified items. A. Provide complete with all systems components and instructions. Cabinet capacity shall be to 1. Warranty period: Manufacturers standard, but not less than 10 years after date of �L P q q y g P P � p P y MFR QTY DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER KEY C. No extras will be allowed unless covered by a written order issued by the Owner and the 50% in excess of actual requirements. HA 3 HINGES EC661100 4 /% » X 4 1 l6 » Substantial Completion. X 26D y O Architect. B. Approved manufacturer: Telkee. .1 FL 1 PASSAGE FUNCTION LATCH SET T101 S D X 626 PART 2 -PRODUCTS V J D. The Contractor to whom the hardware award is made is responsible for providing templates and LC 1 CLOSER 4031 LD/PA AL � -ft PART 3 -EXECUTION ` all necessary information pertaining to the installation of the hardware. HA 1 FLOOR STOP 242F X 26D 2.01 TEMPERED GLASS: 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: 3.01 INSTALLATION: HA 2 PROTECTION PLATE 190S 8"H X 34"W X 32D A. Glass so indicated and required by federal and local regulations and the authorities having C A. Conform to the following: A. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in Pecom ead, o_cations for Btild.ers Har .rvcre for HA 3 DOOR SILENCERS 307D X GREY jurisdiction shall be fully tempered conforming to ANSI Standard Z97.1-1972 "Performance {� _ • 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Standard Stee moors artd Frames by the Door and Hardware Institute, except as specifically Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety Glazing Material Used in Buildings" and Fed. Spec. N W 2. American Society of Hardware Consultants (ASHC) indicated or required to comply with governing regulations, and except as may be otherwise DD-G-1403. N directed b Architect. HARDWARE SET # 9 TIRE STORAGE B. Provide in doors, sidelights and other designated locations. 3. Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA) Y » 9 9 4. Federal Specifications (FS) B. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and SINGLE HM FRAME 3070 5 Y4 W/ 2 FACE HEAD recommendations. Wherever cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into HM DOOR 3070 2.02 FLOAT OR PLATE GLASS - CLEAR: B. Supplier: Per a national account agreement, al1l1 material in this section is to be purchased and 5. National Builders Hardware Association (N surfaces which are later to be painted or finished in another way coordinate removal storage and A. 1/4" thick (unless noted otherwise). Shall meet or exceed Fed. Spec. DD-G-451c. mreinstallation or application of surface protections with finishing work specified in the Division 9 MFR QTY DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER KEY installed by the General Contractor from Girtman & Associates 7115 Cockrill Bend Blvd. Nashville, " » 615 350-6000 Contact: Donna Howard AHC. sections. Do not install surface -mounted items until finishes have been completed on the HA 3 HINGES ECB81100 4 i. �i X 4 �z X 26D 2.03 INSULATING GLASS -CLEAR: TN 37209 Ph ( ) substrate. FL 1 STORE ROOM LATCH SET T581 D FIC X 626 D X 626 A. Hermetically sealed assembly consisting of two (2) glass plies (float or plate) with an C. Fire -rated openings: C. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment SC 1 CONSTRUCTION CYLINDER CORE 80-035 X GREEN CKA entrapped desiccated airs ace between. 1. Provide hardware for fire -rated openings in com compliance with NFPA Standard No. 80. P J PP P ISSUE DATE P substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. SC 1 .PERMANENT CYLINDER CORE 8fl-037 X 261J SKD1 1. Provide argon filled, multi -layer low-E coated unit at exterior storefront units. Provide only hardware which has been tested and listed by UL for types and sizes of doors 12-1-08 D. Drill and countersink units which are not factory -prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space LC 1 CLOSER 4031 LD/PA AL 2. Meta) spacer insert between plies of glass: Black. required and complies with requirements of door and door frame labels. 2. Where emergency exit devices are required on fire -rated doors, provide UL label on exit fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards. HA 1 FLOOR STOP 242E X 26D B. Total unit thickness: 1" � HA 2 PROTECTION PLATE 190S 8"H X 34"W X 32D devices indicating Fire Exit Hardware. D. All hardware shall provided in accordance with the requirements of the Americans with 3.02 ADJUST AND CLEAN: HA 3 DOOR SILENCERS 3fl7D X GREY 2.04 SEALANT - GLASS: REV DATE A. Adjust and clean each operating item of hardware and each door, to ensure proper operation or VD 1 ELECTRICA STRIKE 6211 12VDC FSE A. One -part acrylic terpolymer. Disabilities Act (ADA). function of every unit. Replace units which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly B. Tape: Resilient of lsobut ene but extruded tape. Physical Characteristics: Self -adhering, as intended for the application made. HARDWARE SET MH MISCELLANEOUS HARDWARE p P Y / P y 1.03 SUBMITTALS: PP � remaining permanently elastic even at low temperatures. B. Final adjustment: Wherever hardware installation is made more than one month prior to TYP AS REQUIRED PER SCHEDULE C. Adhesion capabilities shall remain constant. Shall be unaffected b ultra -violet through lass. 1. Maintenance manual: Provide maintenance manual for all items of hardware. See Section acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, return to the work during the weak prior to P y g g 01300 fort a of manual. p P Y p g P Serviceability range - 40 degree F to 200 degree F. Shall be non -staining with no coil YP acceptance or occupancy, and make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such MFR QTY DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER KEY exudation. `S • space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of NA 2 VISION FRAME FOR DR 24" X 36" L-FRA100 2436 UJ 1.04 PRODUCT HANDLING: hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final aeration of heating " O f A. Packaging: J Pe P g NA 1 VISION FRAME FOR DR 12 X 12 L-FRA10fl 1212 �r and ventilating equipment. NA 1 LOUVER FOR DR 24" X 18" L-700-RX 2418 PART 3 - EXECUTION 1. Furnish all finish hardware with each unit clearly marked or numbered in accordance with C. Instruct Owner's Personnel in er adjustment and maintenance of hardware and hardware » » red ro the hardware schedule. P P J BA 1 ACCESS PANEL 36 X 36 BNTC 363fi ep, a 2. Pack each item complete with all necessary pieces and fasteners. finishes, during the final adjustment of hardware. 3.01 LABELING: � 3. Properly wrap and cushion each item to prevent scratches during delivering and storage. NTB -TIRE KINGDOM PROTOTYPE ZOfl7 A. Each item shall be graded and arrive at the site bearing a label setting forth the quality and B. Delivery. Deliver all finish hardware to the installers in a timely manner to ensure orderly 3.03 HARDWARE SCHEDULE: FINISH HARDWARE type of glass and the manufacturer's name and brand designation. Labels shall remain intact progress of the total Work. HARDWARE SET # 1 ALUMINUM ENTRY DOORS ABBREVIATION, BASED ON, &LEGEND INFORMATION until their removal is authorized by the Architect. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS: MFR QTY DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER KEY 3.02 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS: A. Coordination: Coordinate hardware with other work. Tag each item or package separately, with SC 1 MORTISE CYLINDER HOUSINGC 80-103 X 613 MFR A. Glazing shall not be done when the temperature is 40 degrees F or below. identification related to the final hardware schedule, and include basic installation design for use BA BABCOCK -DAVIS ( ACCESS PANEL ) SC 1 CONSTRUCTION CYLINDER CORE 80-035 X GREEN CKA 3.03 PREPARATION FOR GLAZING: on doors and frames of the thicknesses, profile, swing, security and similar requirements HA HALER HINGES,PUSH,PULL,PLATES,STOPS This drawing and the design shown is the SC 1 PERMANENT CYLINDER CORE 80-037 X 626 1AA ( A. Check the openings to determine if the conform to the sizes shown on the Drawings and shop property of the architect. The reproduction, indicated, as necessary for proper installation and function. Deliver individually packaged FL FALCON LOCK LOCKSETS AND CYLINDER HOUSINGS y g P copying or use of this drawing without their FL 1 THUMBTURN 385T X 613 ( ) drawings. hardware items at the proper times to the proper locations (shop or Project site) for installation. BALANCE BY ALUM DR PROVIDER LC LCN ( CLOSERS) g written consent is prohibited and any B. Make certain that the glazing rabbets are clean and in proper condition to receive the sealant. infringement will be subject to legal action. B. Templates: Furnish to any and all affected Trades all required templates, reinforcing units, and MO MONARCH ( EXIT DEVICES AND EXIT DEVICE OPERATING TRIM LEVERS) C. The glazing channel and all sealing surfaces of wood or carbon steel shall have a coat of SPECIFICATIONS information as necessary to properly reinforce, drill and tap as required for proper attachment and HARDWARE SET # 2 EXTERIOR ENTRY DOORS NA NATIONAL GUARD PRODUCTS ( VISION FRAMES,LOUVERS, WEATHERSTRIP) g g g anchorage, where necessary, physical templates shall be furnished. prime paint. The sealing rabbets of all metal holding members shall have all grease, foreign SINGLE HM FRAME 3070 5 3/4" W/ 4" FACE HEAD SC SCHLAGE LOCK ( CYLINDER CORES AND KEY SYSTEM) matter, lacquers or other organic protective coatings removed. HM DOOR 3070 VD VON DUFRfN D. Make certain that the corners and intersections of the framing members are properly joined or PART 2 -PRODUCTS sealed so as to prevent water leakage. If they are not, advise the Architect in writing. This MFR QTY DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER KEY KEY SYMBOL INFORMATION condition shall be rectified before commencing the glazing operation. A=19 A.01 FASTENERS: HA 3 HINGES ECS91100 4 Yi" X 4 %" X 26D bolts, and other fasteners of suitable size E. Tempered glass must be ordered from the factory by size and not altered after fabrication. A. Furnish all finish hardware with all necessary screws, and type to anchor the hardware in position for long life under hard use. MO 1 EXIT DEVICE 18-R-L-DANE X 32D CKA CONSTRUCTION CYLINDER CORES ( GREEN ) KEYED ALIKE B. Furnish fastenings where necessary with expansion shields, toggle bolts, sex bolts, and other Sc 1 RIM CYLINDER HOUSING 80-129 X 260 1AA PERMANENT CYLINDER CORES KEYED ALIKE ( ALL CYL EXCEPT MGR OFFICE ) Sc 1 CONSTRUCTION CYLINDER CORE 80-035 X GREEN CKA SKpi SIMUE KEYED DIFFERENT USM ONLY AT MGR OFFICE I 8-STRAIGHT PROTOTYPE - REVISION 16 - 06-18-08 -� - - - i -- - 08810 - GLAZING 3.04 SEALANT: 1. elf -drilling, self -tapping steel screws to comply with ASTM 646. and in locations approved by the Architect for visual effect. C. Scribe and cut panels for accurate fit at borders and at interruptions and penetrations by A. Sealing of glass shall be as recommended in the Glazing Sealing Systems Manual as published 2. Type S and S12, Pan and Bugle head. other work through ceilings. by the Flat Glass Marketing Association, latest edition. 3. Length of screw to be equal to panel(s) thickness plus 3/8". 1. For tegular or reveal edge panels, cut and reveal or rabbit edges of ceiling tiles at all 3.05 BREAKAGE OR SURFACE DAMAGE: 2.10 JOINT TREATMENT: 09510 - ACOUSTIC CEILINGS border areas and vertical surfaces. A. Solutions used on the surface of the building to clean and/or seal shall be applied in a A. All products to comply with ASTM C-475, Joint T_rea_tr_nent MaterLals for Gypsum yi(aLLb.oard 3.06 CLEANING AND PROTECTION: manner to avoid contact with the glass. Solutions to clean the glass shall be a selected Construction. PART 1 - GENERAL A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panels and of trim, edge moldings, and suspension product that will not cause damage to the glass surface, exterior building surface or the sealant. 1. Joint reinforcing tape: USG Perf-A-Tape Reinforcing Tape. members; comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch-up of minor finish B. Remove promptly any "wash off" from pre -oxidized metal. 2. Joint compounds: USG All-purpose Joint Compound. 1.01 SCOPE: damage. Remove and replace work which cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to C. Apply tapes or banners to the framing and suspend over the glass to alert workmen that the A. Provide all of the labor, materials, equipment, and services required to furnish and install the permanently eliminate evidence of damage. opening has been glazed. Directly marking on glass surfaces shall not be permitted. 2.11 OTHER MATERIALS: acoustical ceilings. B. Institute required protection for acoustical panel ceilings, including temperature and humidity A. All other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation limitations and dust control, so that work will be without damage and deterioration at time of • 3.06 CLEANING: of gypsum drywall, shall be as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: substantial completion. A. Remove all excess putty or compound smears. Architect. A. In addition to complying with all pertinent codes and regulations, comply with all pertinent B. Remove any excess sealant materials left on the surfaces of the glass or the surrounding recommendations published by the Ceilings and Interior Systems Contracting Association and the members immediately during the work life of the sealant. PART 3 - EXECUTION requirements of ASTM C63b (latest edition). C10 - CONCRETE FLOOR SEALER C. All glass at the completion of the Work shall be clean and polished to the approval of the B. Single source responsibility. V) I,,Architect. .3.01 GENERAL: 1. Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling unit from a single source with resources to provide Y o D. Wash, rinse and dry glass at frequent intervals during the Work. Use soft, clean, grime -free A. All materials shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers current printed directions, products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying CONCRETE FLOOR SEALER = M E cloths, mild soap, detergent or a slightly acidic cleaning solution; follow immediately with clean approved submittals and the Contract Documents. In the case of a conflict between these progress of the Work. J J Z o rinse water, and prompt removal of excess rinse water with clean squeegee. Remove grease and instructions, the most stringent condition shall preside. 2. Obtain each type of suspension system from a single source with resources to provide PART 1 _GENERAL O U ~ y glazing materials with commercial solvents such as xylene, toluene, mineral spirits or naphtha, products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying = U 1, and follow with normal wash and rinse. Be careful not to damage glazing or insulating unit 3.02 METAL STUD ERECTION: progress of the Work. 1- M o 9 9 9 9 P °g 1.01 SCOPE: to U 0 seals by over generous application of strong solvents. A. Install all metal studs and accessory items in strict accordance with the approved submittal of C. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical ceiling units and suspension system components 0 W Z E. Remove immediately any staining or leaching resulting from surrounding materials. The manufacturers recommendations, anchoring all members in position for long life under hard with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including, but not A. Provide all of the labor, materials, equipment and services to furnish and install the concrete floor Q = ¢ (D meet Contractor shall be responsible for protecting the glass against any such damage. use. limited to, light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire -suppression system components, and partition q P U � E w � sealer. The product is only for application to those floors that will not receive an additional � me� � B. Align all partition and wall assemblies to a tolerance of one in 200 horizontally and one in 500 system• finish material (e.g.: Tile). Q N D m C 09250 - GYPSUM WALLBOARD vertically. C. Attach steel runners at floor and ceiling to structural elements with suitable fasteners located 1.03 SUBMITTALS: 1.02 SUBMITTALS: 2" from each end and spaced 24" o.c. To suspended ceilings, use toggle bolts or hollow wall A. Prior to installation, submit to the Architect for review the following: spac ed d 16" 1. Submit manufacturer's project specifications and installation instructions for each type PART 1 -GENERAL anchors � o.c. A. Prior to fabrication, submit to the Owners Representative for review the following: D. Position studs vertically, with open side facing in same direction, engaging floor and ceiling of acoustical panel and suspension system required, including certified laboratory test runners. When necessary, splice studs with 8" nested I and two positive attachments per stud reports and other data necessary to show compliance with these specifications. 1.Manufacturer's literature fully describing each product and its proper installation for this Project. 1.01 SCOPE: Y P P P 2. Include manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning and refinishing acoustical panels, A. Provide all of the labor, materials, equipment and services to furnish and install the gypsum flange. Place studs in direct contact with all door frame jambs, abutting partitions, partition g 9 P PART 2 _PRODUCTS wallboard and the associated products. corners and existing construction elements. Where studs are installed directly against exterior including precautions against materials and methods which may be detrimental to finishes walls and a possibility of water penetration through walls exists install asphalt felt strips between and acoustical performances. P Y P g p P 3. Shop drawings, showing layout of each type of cer7in system in relation to surrounding2.01 CONCRETE FLOOR SEALER: 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: studs and wall surfaces. oP 9 � 9 � yP 9 Ys � A. References: E. Anchor all studs for shelf -walls and those adjacent to door and window frames, partition structure, mechanical work (which snail include, but not be limited to, duct work and A. Product/manufacturer: • 1. United States Gypsum Company Gypsum Construction Handbook. intersections, corners and free-standing furring to ceiling and flour runner flanges with metal piping), lighting and electrical work, and any other pertinent fixtures and equipment. YP P Y YP 1. CT Densifyer 201 as manufactured by Chemprobe Coating Systems (g Division of Tnemec). � lock fastener tool or screws. Securely anchor studs to jamb and head anchors of door or Drawings shall also show location of accessible panels. The reproduction of Architect's 2. Gypsum Association (GA) Publications. g P P 2. Or an approved equal. l ht ed-li rr Over metal door and b bolt or screw attachment ht frames b gy . borrowed -light Drawings as the basis of these shop drawings will not be acceptable. B. Fire -test -response characteristics: Where fire -rated assemblies are indicated, provide borrowed -light B. Description: Clear, penetrating, water based sealer for densifying and dustproofing. frames, place horizontally a cut -to -length section of runner, with a web -flange bend at each 4. Physical Samples: Ceiling board and/or tile and exposed rid in finish and pattern materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM ys� P 9 / P grid E119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having end, and secure to strut -studs with two screws in each bent web. Position a cut -to -length proposed to be furnished. PART 3 _ EXECUTION jurisdiction. stud (extending to ceiling runner) at vertical panel joints over door frame header. When B. Operations and maintenance manual: C. Single -source responsibility: attaching studs to steel grid system, structural adequacy of grid to support end reaction of wall 1. Include manufacturer's recommendations for cfeariing and refinishing acoustical panels, 3.01 INSTALLATION: 1. Obtain steel framing members for gypsum board assemblies from a single manufacturer. must be determined. including precautions against materials and methods which may be detrimental to finishes 2. Obtain each type of gypsum board and other panel products from a single manufacturer. and acoustical performances. A. Prepare the substrate the substrate and install the product in strict accordance with the original 3. Obtain finishing materials from either the same manufacturer that supplies gypsum board 3.03 GYPSUM PANEL INSTALLATION - GENERAL: design and the manufacturer's recommendations. and other panel products or from a manufacturer acceptable to sum board A. Install and finish in accordance with ASTM C840 and gypsum wallboard manufacturers 1.04 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING: P P P 9YP B. Prepare substrate. manufacturer. recommendations. A. Deliver acoustical ceiling units to project site in original, unopened packages and store them in 1. Surface shall be free of oil, grease and any extraneous matter which could interfere B. Install sound attenuation blankets where indicated prior to installing gypsum panels unless a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct products penetration. Pressure wash the concrete substrate to remove contamination, loose � 1.03 SUBMITTALS: blankets are readily installed after the parrs have been installed on one side. sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. or broken cement paste and aggregate. Remove or rework all loose or broken mortar. After A. Prior to installation, submit to the Architect for review the following: C. Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and B. Before installing acoustical ceiling units, permit them to reach room temperature and a pressure washing, the substrate shall readily absorb water and not show any signs of water 1. Manufacturer's literature fully describing each product named which shall include, but not avoid abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of stabilized moisture content. beading. adjacent panels not less than one framing member. C. Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. C. Application: lication: be limited to, the manufacturers name and catalog number for each item. 2. Accompanying the materials list, submit two (2) copies of the manufacturer's current D. Install wall/partition board panels to minimize the number of abutting end joints or avoid them 1. Do not dilute or thin. entirely. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of 1.05 JOB CON�3ITIONS: 2. Apply using a low pressure rotary or ear um sprayer with a fan tip. Applications using recommended method of installation for each item. board. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally with end abutting joints over A. Do not install interior acoustical panel ceilings until space enclosed and weatherproof, and until PP Y 9 P Y g pumpp' PP 9 a commercial grade pump up spray tank, roller or brush are also acceptable (depending on studs and staggered. work above ceilings completed, and until ambient conditions of temperature and humidity will be 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: the substrate and project circumstances; follow manufacturers directions). Airless paint E. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged, or damp panels. continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy. 7 A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and n sprayers are not acceptable. o identification of manufacturer or supplier. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 of open 3. Allow product to fully cure prior to putting the substrate into service. m B. ,Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from space between panels. Do not force into place. Do not allow gypsum panels to directly contact PART 2 - PRODUCTS P Y P 9 9 4. Application rate of first coat: 300 to 350 sq ft/gallon. weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. concrete or masonry surface. Hold the panels away from these surfaces approximately 1/8 . 5. Apply using a uniform spray pattern overlapped slightly on each ass. Apply material 2.01 ACOUSTICAL CEILING: pp Y 9 p y P pp 9 Y P PP Y = v° °� M N M Neat) stack sum oasis flat to reveal sagging. F. Locate both edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where Y 9YP P P 99 9 sufficiently for a wet appearance but do not leave excess material stand in low areas. Broom intermediate supports or sum board back -blocking is provided behind end joints. Position A. ACT-1 Ceiling panel N v�� C. Handle gypsum board to prevent damage to edges, ends, and surfaces. Do not bend or PP 9)'P 9 P j out or squeegee excess material as soon as possible. z�� �- ad' adjoining panels so that tapered edges abut tapered es, and field -cut edges abut field -cut 1. Armstrong Cortega Tegular No. 770. u 3- otherwise damage metal corner beads and trim. Jo 9 P P 9 P9 9 n n n 6. After completing the first coat allow at least one hour then apply a second coat at 350 �CO� o Z• o x 9 P P 9 9 99e joints / w� s �t o� �s edges and ends. Do not lace tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagg r vertical ints 2. Size: 24 x 24 x 5 8 . o M Z N d 0-- A. over different studs on apposite sides of partitions. Avoid joints at corners of framed in 3. Ed Square. to 400 sq ft/gallon. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS: DPP P 1a� openings �� q o Environmental conditions: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for applying and where possible. 4. Color: Mite. �1 C finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C840 and with gypsum board manufacturer's G. Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so that the leading edge or end of each panel is 5. Suspension system: 15/16 �53 - RESILIENT FLOORING recommendations. attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. B. ACT-2 Ceiling panel: B. Room temperatures: H. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts. 1. Armstrong Fine Fissured Ceramoguard No. 607. 1. Non -adhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing: Maintain not less than 40 deg. F. I. Spot grout hofiow metal door frames for solid core wood doors, hollow metal doors, and doors 2. S Ze: 24" x 24" x 5/8". SPECIFICATION Tire Kingdom • 2. For adhesive attachment and finish of gypsum board: Maintain not less than 50 deg. F over 32" wide. Apply spot grout at each jamb anchor clip and 'immediately insert gypsum panels 3. Edge: Square) Flooring shall be earthwerks by the Swiff-Train Company. o for 48 hours prior to application and continuously after until dry. into frames. 4. Color: White. o 3. Do not exceed 95 deg. F when using temporary heat sources. J. Form control joints and expansion joints at locations indicated and as detailed, with space 5. Suspension system: 15/16". S►aSTAINABiLITY ISO 14001 third party certified C. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces, as required, for drying joint treatment materials. Avoid between edges of adjoining gypsum panels, as well as supporting framing behind gypsum panels. Minimum 50 % post consumer recycled content drafts during hot dry weather to prevent finishing materials from drying too rapidly. K. Cover both faces of stuff partition framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above 2.02 OTHER MATERIALS: G4L qualified removable, reusable, recyclable � ceilings, etc.) except in chase walls that are braced internafly. A. Afl other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper 1.nch Except where concealed application is indicated or required for strand, fire, air, or instialtvIion of the suspended atawstftl ceiling, sl' c l be as selected by the Contractor subject to PRODUCT Metallic Pattern PART 2 - PRODUCTS smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft, in the approval of the Architect. area. COLOR GMT 003 2.01 MANUFACTURERS: 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3.01 SURFACE Cal ITONS: A. The products of the following manufacturers are suitable for use: 3. Where partitions intersect open concrete coffers, concrete joists, and other structural A. Prior to ail work of this Section, corefwfly inspect the installed work of all other Trades and EMBOSS Thumb Print 1. USG. members project below underside of floor/roof slobs and decks, cut gypsum parcels to fit verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly 2. National Gypsum/Gold Bond. profile formed by coffers, joists, and other structural members; allow 1/4" to 2" wide commence' EDGES Square 3. G-P Gypsum Corp. joints to install sealant. 1. Do not proceed until all wet work (eg: Concrete and painting) has been completed and y 4. Or an approved equal. L. Isolate perimeter of non -load -bearing gypsum board partitions at structural abutments, except thoroughly dried out, unless expressly permitted by manufacturer's printed instructions. SIZE 18 " x 18" B. The sake of convenience, the product numbers are descriptions given herein are those of USG. floors. Provide 1/4" to 2" wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where B. Verify that suspended acoustical ceiling may be installed in accordance with the original design,0 C J Products as manufactured by any one of the manufacturers named above will be acceptable. edges of gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural all codes and regulations having jurisdiction, the manufacturers current recommendations and THICKNESS 1/8th inch (nominal) surfaces with acoustical sealant. the approved submittals. y� 2.02 GYPSUM WALLBOARD: M. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and C. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect. WEAR LAYER .50 mm (20 mils) V J A. 5/8" Fire rated: USG "X" board. Conform to Specification for Gypsum Drywall, ASTM C36 for finishing standard and manufocturert's recommendations. D. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been J type "X" gypsum board. N. Coordinate work with that of other Trades. Neatly cut face boards to fit around fully resolved. PRINTED LAYER 0.07 mm (2.8 mils) _ penetrations through wall.Provide suitable back-up anchorage as required for the attachment of = 3.02 COORDINATION WITH MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL: CENTER LAYER 1.38 mm 54.3 mils 2.03 SOUND BLANKETS: shelves and cabinets. ( ) C A. USG Sound Attenuation Blankets. 0. Screw heads shall provide a slight depression below the surface of the board. Do not install A. Coordinate with the requirements of other Trades. Use all means necessary to interface with W = • B. Non-combustible: " adjacent materials. LBS. PIECE 1.97 N W screw closer than 3/8 from edges and ends of the board. / 1. Flames read: 15. B. Where recessed lighting fixtures are installed in suspension system, consult with the fixture P P. Treat joints, screw head depressions, or defects incurred during the installation of the gypsum N 2. Smoke developed: 0. manufacturer prior to preparation of shop drawings so that the work of this Section shall be P board in prescribed manner with joint treatment. PIECES/CARTON 16 C. Perimeter caulking: USG Acoustical Sealant. installed ready to receive the lighting fixtures. Modify the suspension system members adjacent Q. Properly space all fasteners in careful accordance with the manufacturers recommendations and code requirements with heads driven slightly below the surface for proper cementing but to fixture locations as approved by the Architect and to the extent necessary to accommodate SQ.. FT./CARTON 34.88 2.04 METAL STUDS: without breaking the paper cover. the fixtures. A. Standard: R. Loosely butt all joints to be taped; firmly butt all joints to be left untreated. C. In the event lighting fixtures or air distribution or return air equipment other than those LBS./CARTON 38.63 1. Non -load bearing, screw -type, channel studs, roll -formed with 25 gauge S. Stagger all end joints and the joints between panels to achieve a maximum of bridging and a specified should be substituted under their respective Sections and/or Drawings and should the electro-galvanized steel in sizes as indicated on the Drawings. minimum of continued joints. substituted fixtures require more extensive modifications, the Contractor shall make such required additional modifications and an additional cost shall be aid b the Contractor. PIECES/PALLET 832 2. Flanges shall be at least 1-1/4" wide. q y P Y ISSUE DATE 3. Webs shall be punched to receive bridging, conduit, piping, etc. 3.04 GYPSUM BOARD APPLICATION METHODS: D. Where wide or deep air conditioning ducts above suspended acoustical ceilings interfere with 4. Meet or exceed ASTM C645, Light -Gauge Studs. Runners. and Ri id Furring Ch_an.nels. suspension hangers, provide independent framing below the duct work to support the ceiling as SQ. FT./PALLET 1,813.74 12-1-08 9 9� 9 A. Single layer application: an obligation under this Section. Framing shall meet the approval of the Architect. Framing 5. Unless otherwise directed, install on 16" centers. 1. On ceilings, apply sum panels prior to wall artition board application to the greatest g g pp 9 • 6. Size as indicated on Drawings. 9 PP Y gypsum P P /P Pn g shall be supported from floor or roof structure above and shall in no case be attached to the CARTONS/PALLET 52 9 extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated. duct work, piping or conduit. 2. Apply gypsum panels either vertically or horizontally. Position all edges over studs for LBS./PALLET 2,008 REV DATE 2.05 METAL FURRING CHANNELS: vertical application; all ends over studs for horizontal application. Use maximum practical 3.03 SUSPENDED CEILING INSTALLATION: A. Furring channels: lengths to minimize end joints. Stagger joints on apposite ends of partition. A. Comply with ASTM C 63`6 as applicable to acoustical ceiling systems, except to extent PIECES CONTAINER 16,640 20 foot container, stacked 2 high 1. Galvanized steel designed similar to USG Metal Furring Channels. 3. Fasten with screws. P yP panel g ys p 2. Face width 1-3/8", depth 7/8", length 12'-0". B. Double -layer application: more stringent requirements indicated or required for compliance with governing regulations or 2 B. Furring channel clips: fire resistance ratings. SQ.FT/CONTAINER 36,274.80 Do not store pallets stacked on top of one another after �A 9 P 1. On ceilings, apply base layer prior to applying base layer on walls/partitions; apply face B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building structural members only, and only as indicated. R 1. Galvanized wire for use in attachingfurring channels. " � g � g y� y shipping, ey• ' • g layers in same sequence. Offset face -layer joints at least 10 from parallel base -layer 1. Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to metal clips 2. Install on alternate sides of the carrying channels. Where clips cannot be alternated, joints. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members unless otherwise indicated. designed for type of member involved, or where possible, by looping and wire -tying PALLETS C�3NTAINER 20 wire tying must be employed. 2. On partitions/wails, apply base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with directly to members. /, joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face layer joints offset at C. a hangers not more than 4'-0" o.c. along each member supported direct) from hangers, 2.06 COLD -ROLLED CHANNELS; Space g g � Y g LBS./CONTAINER 40,160 least one stud or furring member with base layer joints. Stagger joints on opposite sides unless otherwise shown, and provide hanger not more than 6" from ends of each member. All A. Description: P 9 s of partitions. hanger wires shall be installed straight and true. Splayed or dig diagonally Installed wire is not 1. 16 gauge galvanized steel for use in furring, suspended ceilings, and partition 9 9h9 Y ASTMS 662 Smoke Density Passes Less then 450 construction. 3. Fasten both base and face layers separately to supports with screws. acceptable. ASTME 648-99 Critical Radiant Flux Class 1 Passes 2. Sizes: 3/4", /4 , 1-1/2", and 2 required y 305 INSTALLING TRIM AND ACCESSORIES: q 9 () y ( y as re b the Drawings. .D. For the support of light fixtures, the fixtwre load shall be supported by supplemental hangers ITTS 205 Wear Tabor method 4.5 Very Good 50 000 cycles) within 6" of each corner, or the fixture shall be supported separately. A. The Drawings do not purport to show all trim required; verify with the Architect the precise pp se. P y' ASTMD 2047-99 Slip Resistance Passes ADA compliant 2.07 METAL TRIM: locations and types of trim to be used. ASTMC 1028 Coefficient of Friction (dry) 0.6997 Very Good A. Trim: 3.04 MOLDINGS: B. In addition to locations shown on Drawings, install trim at ceiling angles and around cut -onto A. Co exposed flanges of intersecting members so that flange faces will be flush. Coefficient of Friction (wet) 0.6783 Very Good 1. USG #200 series. I� P g 9 g ASTM 1799 Includes all testing below from F 970-99 to F 1514 and openings. 9 2. All metal that shall be concealed when wall is finished out. B. Install edge moldings of type indicated at edges of each acoustical panel ceiling area, and at „ C. Install all trim in strict accordance with the manufacturers recommendations, paying particular locations where edge of panel would otherwise be exposed after completion of work. Fine ASTM F970-99 Indentation 0005 Excellent ThisdrawingrhedesTh shown do 3. Sizes to accommodate drywall thickness. � P P P property of the architect. The reproduction, attention to make all trim installation plumb, level, and true to line, with firm attachment to C. Secure moldings to building construction b fastening through holes drilled in vertical le ASTM F536 Size, Tolerance 17.7 in/lin ft. 0.016 in/In. ft. (+ or -) copying or use of this drawing without their B. Corner bead: g g y g g g' written consent is prohibited and any supporting members. " n ASTM F386 Thickness 0.131 in. As specified 0.005 in. 1. USG "Dura-A-Bead" all metal heavygauge hot -dipped galvanized steel reinforcement for Space holes not more than 3 from each end and not more than 16 o.c. Draw -up fasteners infringement will be subject to legal action. 9 9 PP 9 D. For trim accessories with back flanges, fasten to framing with the same fasteners used to ASTM F540 Square Hess 0.015 in. Max 0.010 in. protecting external corners. for tight set against vertical surfaces. SPECIFICATIONS fasten gypsum board. Otherwise, fasten trim accessories according to accessory manufacturers D. Miter corners of moldings accurate) to provide hairline Dints. ASTM F1914 Residual Indentation 0.009% Avg. <8%, max, single 2. Shall be concealed when wall is finished out. directions for type, length, and spacing of fasteners. g y P J 10% / E. Level moldings with ceiling suspension system, to level tolerance of 1/8 in 12 -0 . ASTM F137 Flexibility / 2.08 HANGER AND TIE WIRE: E. Reinforce all vertical and horizontal exterior corners with corner bead fastened with 9 16" y No cracks breaks 1-in. mandrel, no crack A. Soft annealed, low carbon steel wire, zinc -coated. rosin -coated staples 9" o.d. on both flanges along entire length of bead. 3.05 ACOUSTICAL PANEL INSTALLATION: or break F. Metal trim: Where assembly terminates against masonry or other dissimilar material, apply A. Plan each layout to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling area. Avoid use FTMS 501a method 6211 Dimensional Stability 0 0.020 in./In. ft. max 1. No. 9 gauge for hanger wire. y PP g 9 a slight 2. No. 18 gauge for tie wire. metal trim over panel edge and fasten with screws or 9/16" rosin-coatedASTM F925 Resistance to Chemicals No anon9 No more than ht staples 12" o.c. of less -than -half width units wherever possible. Comply with Architect's reflected ceiling plans g A=20 Install edge trim where edge of gypsum panels would otherwise be exposed or semi -exposed. to greatest extent possible. 2.09 FASTENERS: Provide edge trim type with face flange formed to joint compound. B. Install acoustical panels in coordination with suspension system, with edges concealed by �\ G. Install control ioints at locations indicated, and where not indicated according to ASTM C840, ®t o 8-STRAIGHT PROTOTYPE -REVISION 16 - 06-18-08 1. I T � 1111iiI� IIGT{IiJl1 11 1 i l i d Sl7 1 ti- 09653 - RESILIENT FLOORING ASTM F1515 Resistance to Light A E=5.4 ^E<8 avg. max. 2. In each case where material proposed is not the material specified or specifically described material. labels. ASTM F1514 Resistance to Heat ^E=1.5 " E<8 avg. max. as an acceptable alternate in this Section of these Specifications, submit for the Architect's B. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. review the current recommended method of application published by the Manufacturer of the 3.07 REINSTALLATION OF REMOVED ITEMS: ADHESIVE spraywerks 22 oz cans (coverage is approximately 150 f2 / can) proposed material. A. Following completion of painting in each space, promptly reinstall all. items removed for painting, • 3. Submit complete set of colors and finishes for Architect's selections. The Architect has the using only workmen skilled in the particular Trade. PART 2 - PRODUCTS HANDLING As per earthwerks detailed instructions. option of selecting as many colors and finishes from any of the various paint or paint related products to be specified here, as he may desire without additional cost to the Owner or the 3.08 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT: 2.01 CORNER GUARDS: INSTALLATION FCICA standards, in accordance with earthwerks detailed installation instructions. Architect. A. Coordinate with the requirements of Divisions 15 and 16. A. Type: 4. After Architect has selected colors and finishes and has furnished a schedule, prepare B. Remove grilles, covers and access panels for mechanical and electrical systems from location 1. (3" x 3") C\S Acrovyn's Surface Mounted Type SM-20; Protek's Surface Mounted Type MAINTENANCE Please see maintenance uidelines.Maintenance savings will vary from region to samples of each color for approval b the Architect before proceeding with this work. These job and paint separately. 9 9 Y 9• P PP Y P 9 J CG-10 "Sum Line" with top cap and bottom caps). Color to be #108 Black or as noted. region and from application to application. applied samples shall serve as a minimum acceptable standard for the finished work in color and C. Prime and paint insulated and bare pipes, conduits, boxes, insulated and bar ducts, hangers, 2. Comparable products as manufactured by Balco Inc. are acceptable for bidding. appearance. brackets, collars and supports, except where items are plated or covered with a pre -finished • WARRANTY 10 years in accordance with earthwerks detailed warranty program.For additional coating. 2.02 WALL GUARDS: assistance please call your local sales representative or your earthwerks team member. B. Certification that all standards and requirements have been met. These shall include, but not D. Replace identification markings an mechanical or electrical equipment when painted over or A. McCue Corporation, Sales Area: Cortguard 1 (CGB-10, CGT-10, CGE-10, CGC-10) to be #401 be limted to: spattered. stock black. G.0 to provide 2x8 blocking as required at all wall bumpers. 1. Delivery. E. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts, convector and baseboard heating cabinets that are visible SEALER: 2. Storage. through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black point, to limit of sight line. Paint dampers PART 3 - EXECUTION r" 3. Conditions under which the materials were installed. exposed immediately behind louvers, grilles, convector and baseboard cabinets to match face Y o Mark NoMor 4. Product complies with specified requirements. panels. _ P sP q 3.01 GENERAL: n E 5. Specified number coats and mil thickness have been applied. F. Point exposed conduit and electrical equipment occurring in finished areas. Color and texture to U w o P PP A. Install in strict accordance with the Contract Documents and the approved submittals. � J Z 1. Product Description match adjacent surfaces. B. Notify the Architect in writing of any irregularities that will adversely affect the proper O �_ ~ CO 1.04 PRODUCT HANDLING: G. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboords for electrical equipment before installing = p r" backboards and mounting equipment on them. installation of the cabinet. Commencement of work shall imply acceptance of the wall and + V) U O m � s A special 2-part sealer with increased resistance to chemical dyes for the long-term protection of A. Deliver all paint and stain materials to the job site in their original unopened containers with all 9opening. U p w O o -c resilient flooring. Particularly suitable for environments such as hairdressing salons and medical labels intact and legible at time of use. C. Install square and plumb, and securely anchor wall and corner guards to substrate per Q 0 M M sector. Also increases resistance to plasticizer migrations (e.g., from rubber as well as colorless 3.09 CLEANING: A. As work proceeds and upon completion, promptly remove paint where spilled, splashed or manufacturers instructions. _ P Z I L 3 chemicals and disinfections. Ahard-wearing sealer film, it reduces dirt adhesion and the time and PART 2 - PRODUCTS P P P P P Y P A P U a, _ 1U ���me�� effort required for floor care. High solid content, satin finish. Only for professional users. B. During progress of work, keep remises free from an unnecessaryaccumulation of tools, � ¢ `�' `" m � 2.01 APPROVED PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS: g P P P y 1 0520 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS 2. Areas of Application A. Manufacturers: equipment, surplus materials and debris. 1. Sherwin Williams C. Upon completion of work, leave premises neat and clean, to the satisfaction of the Architect. PVC, linoleum and rubber flooring with a plain or slightly structured surface, including qualities with 2. Or an approved equal. 3.10 PAINT AND FINISH SCHEDULE - EXTERIOR: PART 1 - GENERAL a polyurethane factory finish. Not suitable for conductive floorings. B. Approved manufacturers for isolated items named will be listed with the product. C. In general and with the exception of those manufacturers named for isolated items, numbers A. Exterior steel surfaces: 3. Method of Application and descriptive names used are those of Porter Paint Company and are for the purpose of 1. Shall include, but not be limited to: 1.01 SCOPE: + convenience, identification, and establishing a standard quality for the materials required. Any of a. Hollow metal doors and frames. A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and services required to furnish and install the fire First thoroughly clean the newly installed floor or clean and strip the floor mechanically using a the mentioned manufacturers shall be acceptable. provided a submittal of finished physical sample, b. Overhead doors. extinguishers and cabinets. green pad (with a PU silver pad in the case of floor qualities with a PU factory finish). The floor full description, and formulation of products, and the surfaces that are to be covered are c. Metal flashing. surface must be clean and dry, free from dust, grease, oil and residues of care products. When submitted. d. Scuppers and downspouts. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: • treating floor types with non -permanent factory care finish, this must have been removed D. All paints, stains, sealers, oils, thinners, turpentine or other materials required to accomplish e. Any type piping and conduit associated with mechanical and electrical. A. Provide portable fire extinguishers, cabinets, and accessories by some manufacturer. • the painting and finishing shall be first quality materials. f. Bollards. B. Provide new portable fire extinguishers which are UL listed and bear UL AListing Mark@ for type, � completely. P g 9 q Y g. Steel lintels. rating and classification of extinguisher indicated. Thoroughly shake up the containers of Sealer and Cross Linker. Add the cross linker to the sealer 2.02 MATERIALS COMPATIBILITY: h. Plumbing shoes C. Comply with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities. container and immediately mix both components thoroughly by shaking well. When preparing partial A. All paint and stain materials and equipment shall be compatible in use; finish coats shall be i. Gas piping. quantities, always mix Sealer and Cross Linker in a ratio of 4:1, adding the Cross Linker to the compatible with prime coats; prime coats shall be compatible with the surface to be coated; all j. Any edge or surface exposed to view or the weather. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: Sealer. Room/Working temperature 15-25C. tools and equipment shall be compatible with the coating to be applied. 2. Product/application: A.Prior to installation, submit to the Architect for review the following: B. Thinners, when used, shall be only those thinners recommended for that purpose by the a. Bare steel: 1 coat PPG HPC Multiprime FD Epoxy Primer, 3.0 mils DFT. 1. Shop Drawings: Show all materials, dimensions, and finishes. Allow the sealer mixture to rest for 10 minutes. Subsequently roll it out evenly over the floor using manufacturer of the materials to be thinned. b. Painted steel: 1 coat PPG HPC Pitt Guard Rapid Coat DTR Epoxy 95-245, 5.0 DFT. 2. Physical Sample: Cabinet finish proposed to be provided. a dry lacquer Roller„ Aquatop 10mm. Commence work on side with the main incidence of light c. Finish coat: 1 coat PPG HPC Pitthane High Build Acrylic Aliphatic Urethane 95-8400, 3. Manufacturers literature fully describing the product. (i.e., as a rule the side of the room where there is a window) and work away from the light PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.0 mils DFT. 4 - source in order to be able to keep an eye on the floor area during work and immediately correct B. Galvanized steel: 1.04 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE: p • any problems that might arise. Apply the sealer and distribute it with the roller, working in 3.01 INSPECTION: 1. Which shall include, but not be limited to: A. Products shall be delivered to job -site in original unopened packages bearing manufacturer's sections of a maximum of one meter in width at right angles to the incidence of light (i.e., A. Thoroughly examine surfaces scheduled to be painted prior to commencement of work. Report a. Hollow metal doors and frames. labels. parallel to the window wall) and then roll it out evenly working towards the light. Always work wet in writing to the Architect, any condition that may potentially affect proper application. Do not b. Underside of metal canopy. B. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. ^1 commence until such defects have been corrected. c. Overhead doors. on wet but avoid the formation of pools. After allowing a sufficient period of time for drying (at B. Correct defects and deficiencies in, surfaces which may adversely affect work of this Section. d. Metal flashing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS least 2 hours, but on the some day), apply a second coat. The floor can be used with care 24 C. Commencement of work shall be construed as acceptance of the surfaces and, therefore, the e. Scuppers and downspouts. hours after the last sealer has been applied. At room temperature, the sealer film reached its final Contractor shall be fully responsible for satisfactory work as required herein. f. Any type piping and conduit associated with mechanical and electrical. 2.01 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS: state of permanence approx. seven days after application. g. Bollards. A. Type: 3.02 PREPARATION OF SURFACES: h. Steel lintels. 1. UL rating: 4A-60B: C. Notes: The mixture of PU-Anticolor and Cross Linker, if used at the prescribed temperature, has a A. Remove mildew, by scrubbing with solution of tri-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with i. Plumbing shoes 2. Description: 10 lb., ABC multi -purpose, dry chemical or per jurisdiction. processing period of approx. 1-hour. Only mix the quantity of sealer that can be processed within clean water and allow surface to dry completely. j. Gas piping. this period of time. When the temperature of the Sealer and Cross Linker are higher, there is a B. Concrete floors: Remove contamination, acid etch and rinse with clear water. Ensure required I. Any edge or surface exposed to view or the weather. 2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS: m reduction in the period of time during which they can be 'Worked". If the two components are cold, acid -alkali balance is achieved. Allow to thoroughly dry. 2. Product/application: A. Manufacturer: they cannot be mixed with sufficient thoroughness. Do not tightly seal a container the sealer C. Gypsum wallboard: Remove contamination and prime to show defects, if any. Paint after a. Clean with Porter 5143 Solvent. Be sure solvent is evaporated. 1. Potter -Roemer, Inc. = o mixture since reactive gases occur as a result of the inter -action between the sealer and the defects have been remedied. b. Pretreatment - Porter 5 Golvaprep. 2. Larsen's Manufacturing Co. v Q cross linker. D. Concrete and concrete block: c. Primer: 1 coat Porter 272,276 Porter Guard Alkyd Metal Primer, 1.9 mil DFT. per N Yd P 3. J. L. Industries z��= Ensure that there is sufficient ventilation duringapplication and drying operations but avoid drafts 1. Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, powder and other forei n matter. Remove oil and coat. -' .s z3 PP y g P 9 B. Description: W �L o �L and exposure to string sunlight and protect the floor surface from dust. Turn off under floor grease with a solution of tri-sodium phosphate, rinse well and allow to thoroughly dry. d. Finish: 2 coats Porter 2710 Porter Guard Gloss Alkyd Enamel, 1.3mil DFT each coat. 1. Wall mounting: Surface mounted. °�,JIZdLL 0"H central heating well before use. 2. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with a solution of sodium 2. Door: ADV® Duo Vertical Panel with clear acrylic glazing. o metasilicate after being thoroughly wetted with water. Allow to thoroughly dry. C. Concrete block (wall to be sealed against moisture): 3. Finish: Steel with electrostatically applied, thermally -fused polyester coating with recoatable Usage: 50 g/sq. m. sealer mixture per application 3. Apply masonry filler as required to provide even, consistent (filling of voids), with filler 1. 2 coats Porter 222 Block Lock Epoxy Ester Block Filler. white finish. material. Methods of application which "bridge" voids will not be acceptable. 2. Brush and scrub into block pores. After 3 days, surface with a fine mist of water to post 4. Size: To properly accommodate extinguisher. Attention: Remove highly colored products from the sealer surface as quickly as possible - within E. Completely mask, remove, or otherwise adequately protect all hardware, accessories, machined cure. o 30 minutes. Severe mechanical damage causes acceleration in wear and tear. surfaces, 1.5 mil DFT each coat. 2.03 WALL BRACKET: O plates, lighting fixtures, and similar items in contact with painted surfaces but not 3. 2 coats Porter 520 Acri-Shield Flat Exterior Acrylic, � If a repair and renewal of the sealer file is required, remove the shine from the floor surface scheduled to receive paint. A. Extinguisher manufacturer's standard. O before applying the sealer mixture with the PU silver pad in order to achieve uniformity in F. Spot prime ail exposed nails and other metals which are to be pointed with emulsion paints, 3.12 PAINT SCHEDULE - INTERIOR: o 0 transition areas and guarantee an optimum adhesion of the sealer film. This preliminary treatment using a primer recommended by the manufacturer of the coating system. A. All exposed metal surfaces not otherwise provided for below. is suitable for homogeneous flooring qualities with a smooth or slightly structured surface. G. Adequate illumination shall be provided in all areas where painting and staining operations are in 1. These shall include, but not limited to, the following: PART 3 - EXECUTION Regarding heterogeneous or more definitely structured flooring types, consult our Technical progress. a. Hollow metal doors and frames. O Applications Advisory Service before commencing work. H. Efflorescence on any area that is scheduled to be painted shall be removed. b. Overhead doors 3.01 GENERAL: I. Clean shop coats that become marred. Touch-up with specified shop coats. c. Panel boxes. A. Install in strict accordance with the Contract Documents and the approved submittals. 4. Technical Data d. Miscellaneous metals. B. Notify the Architect in writing of any irregularities that will adversely affect the proper 3.03 PREPARATION OF METAL SURFACES: e. Exposed metal structure and framing. installation of the cabinet. Commencement of work shall imply acceptance of the wall and pH level: Sealer, approx. 8.0 (concentrate) A. Steel and iron: f. Grilles and diffusers, opening. Ingredients: Polymer, solvents, additive 1. Remove grease, rust, scale, dirt and dust from steel and iron surfaces. Where heavy g. Exposed sheet metal and ductwork. C. Install square and plumb, and securely anchor mountings brackets and fire extinguisher cabinets pH level (Cross linker): coatings of scale are evident, remove by wire brushing, sandblasting or any other h. Access doors. to substrate per manufacturer's instructions. Q Ingredients: Polyisocyanate, solvents necessary method. Ensure steel surfaces are satisfactory before paint finishing. i. Exposed piping and conduit. D. Upon installation employ a certified fire suppression contractor to inspect, certify, tag and date Q Giscode: W3/DD+ (Product Code for Surface Treatment Products) 2. Clean unprimed steel surfaces by washing with solvent. Apply at treatment of phosphoric 2. Product/opplication: each fire extinguisher. Z Storage Life: 9 Months acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts and nuts are similarly cleaned. Prime surfaces to a. 1 coat Porter 272/276 Porter Guard Alkyd Metal Primer. This may be deleted if the E. Remove and replace damaged, defective or undercharged extinguishers. 0 O O VOC-Ingridiens: Limit value for the product in accordance with 2004/42/EG (Cat. A/j) 140 indicate defects, if any. Paint after defects have been remedied. item has previously received prime coating. 272/276 shall be applied to give 2.0 J litre 2007 2010 The read mixed product contains max, 140 litre VOC. 3. Sand and scrape shop primed steel surfaces to remove loose primer and rust. Feather mils DFT. LL The cross Linker is governed by the regulations relating to hazardous substances and is marked out edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime b. 2 coats Porter 129 Promaster 2000 Alkyd Satin Enamel, 1.6 mils DFT each coat. �'Q bare steel surfaces. Prime steel including shop rimed steels. 1 -0 - TOILET ACCESSORIES O h with hazard symbol "Xj" and the hazard warning 'Sensitisation through skin contact possible". Avoid ( 9 oP P ) B. Concrete block- Enamel (Semi Gloss): V .� contact between the skin and the Cross Linker and Sealer mixture. Wear suitable gloves. B. Galvanized metal: 1. 1 coat Porter 6223 Promaster 2000 Latex Block Filler • Store PU-Anticolor in sealed original containers in a dry lace at temperature between 5C and 1. Clean all surfaces thoroughly with solvent until they are completely free from dirt, oil, and 2. 2 coats Porter 129 Promaster 2000 Alkyd Satin Enamel, 1.6 mils DFT each coat. Y P P � PART 1 -GENERAL _ 30C. Kee locked away and out of the reach of children. Cross linker may not contact humidity. grease. P Y Y Y C. Gypsum wallboard- Enamel (Semi Gloss): Tightly re -seal the original containers container immediate) after use and use u as quickly as 2. Thoroughly treat the cleaned surface with phosphoric acid etch. _ �. 9 YY P q Y 1. 1 coot Porter 867 Promaster 20iTfl Latex Primer Sealer, 1.1 mils DFT. 1.01 SCOPE: � possible. 3. Remove all excess etching solution and allow to dry completely before application of paint. 2. 2 coats Porter 129 Promaster 2000 Alkyd Satin Enamel, 1.5 mils DFT each coat. A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and services required to furnish and install the toilet N 4 • C. Remove surface contamination and oils from zinc coated surfaces and prepare for Amin in accessories. W 5. Canister Size P � priming D. Dry fog for overhead steel structure: N accordance with metal manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Bare galvanized steel: 1 coat application Porter No. 9628 Vinyl acrlic / acrylic spray dry 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: 2.0 litre canister (PU-Anticolor) + 0.5 litre bottle (Cross Linker) D. Other metals: fog A. Inserts and anchorages: Furnish accessory manufacturers standard inserts and anchoring devices 2. Pre -primed steel: 1 coat application Porter No. 9520 Alkyd Dry Fog. that must be set in concrete or built into masonry. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid 2. Allow to dry thoroughly before application of point. delay. CONTACTS Commercial Sales Damon Lockhart 205-873-1444 3.13 STENCILING RATED WALLS: B. Single source responsibility. Unless otherwise noted, provide products of same manufacturer for Leatha Whitfield 706-694-2308 3.04 APPLICATION: A. Stencil both sides of all corridor partitions, smoke, fire, horizontal exits, exit enclosures, and each type of accessory unit and for units exposed to view in same areas. Technical Service Robert Thomas 361-765-6042 A. All materials shall be applied under adequate illumination, evenly spread, and smoothly flowed on " with the proper type and size of brushes, roller covers, bucket rids, and spray equipment to other rated partitions with permanent 2 high letters. Customer Service Teresa Debow 800-275-7943, 224 P P � g P Y1. Color: Bright Red. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: ISSUE DATE avoid run, sags, holidays, brush marks, air bubbles, and excessive roller stipple. B. Coverage and hide shall be complete. When color, stain, mark of any kind, dirt or undercoats 2. Identify the name and hour rating of the partition approximately 8 above the ceiling every A. Prior to installation, submit to the Architect for review the following: 12-1-08 • 09900 - PAINT show through the final schedule coat of point to the surface, it shall be covered by additional 25 on both sides of the partition. 1. Complete and fully descriptive manufacturers literature which shall include a picture of the coats until the paint film is of uniform finish, color, appearance and coverage at no additional 3. Identify once in each space having fire -rated or smoke walls. product, product size, material type and gauge, finish, and installation detail. • PART 1 - GENERAL cost to the Owner. 4. Identify walls as applicable: 2. Setting drawings where cutouts are required in other work, including templates, substrate 1.01 SCOPE: A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, and services required to furnish and apply the painting q pp y P g and staining materials. B. The term ap int as used herein means coating systems materials, which includes primers, emulsions, enamels, stain, sealers and fillers, and other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate or finish coats. C. Paint exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designated in any schedule, except where natural finish of material is specifically noted as not to be painted. Where items or surfaces are not specifically mentioned, paint these some as adjacent similar materials or areas. If color or finish is not designated, Architect will select the colors. C. Do not add thinners to the paint or paint related products. D. Finished areas shall be free from sags, runs, crawls, brush marks, and other defects. E. Touch-up painting as required to provide smooth, even finish prior to final acceptance of work. F. Do not apply finishes on surfaces that are not sufficiently dry. G. Allow each coat of finish to dry before following coat is applied, unless directed otherwise by manufacturer. H. Where clear finishes are required, ensure tint fillers match wood. Work fillers well into the grain before set. Wrpe excess from the surface. I. Environmental conditions: 1. Comply with the manufacturer's recommendations as to environmental conditions under which the coating systems may be applied. 2. Do not apply in areas where dust is being a. 1 HOUR FIRE. b. 2 HOUR FIRE. c. 1 HOUR SMOKE. d. 2 HOUR FIRE AND SMOKE. e. 1 HOUR SMOKE TIGHT CO?RIQOR. f. NON -RATED SMOKE TIGHT CORRIDOR. Other identifying Ian ua a as necessor . g Yt g g" 9 y 5. Identification shall be above any decorative cellhg and in concealed spaces and shall be acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. preparation instructions, and directions for preparing cutouts and Installing anchorage devices. 3. A complete list of all accessories proposed for use and the room identified b room P P oP (� Y number and room name) and the number of accessories of each type installed in that S particular area. Include rough -in drawings for recessed accessories and details of back 4. Maintenance instructions including replaceable parts and service recommendations. B. Operation and maintenance manual: Submit accessory manufacturers maintenance guides*f Owners use in maintaining all products herein specified. Include replaceable parts and servicw recommendations. e.- 1.04 PI?OJECT CONDITIONS: A. Coordinate accessory locations, installation, and sequencing with other work to avoid interference (� - 1 GU��S D. All surfaces that are left unfinished by the requirements of other Sections, whether specifically paint generated. biz iLR mentioned or not, shall be painted or finished as part of the work covered by this Section. J. Moisture content: with an ensure proper installation, operation, adjustment, cleaning, and servicing of toilet 1. Use a moisture meter approved by the Architect to test surfaces. accessory items. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: 2. Do not apply the initial coating until moisture meter reading is within normal limits PART 1 - GENERAL A. In addition to complying with all pertinent codes and regulations, comply with Standard (Type 1) recommended by the paint materials manufacturers. 1.01 SCOPE: 1.05 WARRANTY: as defined by the Painting and Decorating Contractors of America in their Modern Guide to Paint K. Defects: Sand and dust between coats to remove ail defects visible to the unaided eye from a A. Submit a written warranty executed by mirror manufacturer, agreeing to replace any mirrors that current edition. S. distance of five feet. A. Provide All labor, material, equipment and services necessary to provide wall and corners as develop visible silver spoilage defects within warranty period. B. Provide finish coats which are compatible with prime paints used. Review other Sections of Provide L. Color of undercoats: Slightly vary the color of succeeding coats. indicated or specified. 1. Warranty period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion. these Specifications in which prime paints are to be provided to ensure compatibility of total 3.05 OBSERVATION WORK: 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: coatings system for various substrates. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove a A. Do not apply additional coats until completed coat has been observed and approved by the ad A. Provide wall and corner guards by some manufacturer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS and reprime. Notify. Architect in writing of any anticipated problems using coating systems as Architect. B. Comply with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities. specified with substrates primed by others. C. Single source: Unless indicated otherwise, obtain all materials from a single manufacturer. B. Only observed and approved coats of paint will be considered in determining the number of 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS: coats applied. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. The following manufacturers are approved for this project: 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Prior to installation, submit to the Architect for review the following: 1. Bradley Corporation. 3.06 DRY FILM THICKNESS: 1. Shop Drawings: Show all materials, dimensions, and finishes. 2. Bobrick Washroom Equipment (specified). A. Prior to application, submit to the Architect for review the following: A. DFT represents Dried Film Thickness. It shall be checked on metal surfaces with a Nordson 2. Physical Sample: Guard samples proposed to be provided. 3. American Specialties. 1. Submit a complete list of all materials proposed to be furnished and installed under this Mikrotest Dry Filmor and ba❑❑❑❑a Thickness Gauge. For other surfaces, a Tooke Dry Film 3. Manufacturer's literature fully describing the product. portion of the Work. This shall in no way be construed as permitting substitution of materials for Thickness Gauge shall be used. Surfaces may also be checked while surface is wet by using a those specified or approved for this Work by the Architect. Nordson Wet Film Gauge. Should an average of three readings out of five show film less than 1.04 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE: specified, additional materials should be applied until the surface has the proper amount of .1 A. Products shall be delivered to job -site in original unopened packages bearing manufacturer's1 8-STRAIGHT PROTOTYPE -REVISION 16 - 06-18-08 REV DATE �L (SJ rP tit' b- I This drawing and the design shown is the property of the architect. The reproduction, copying or use of this drawing without their written consent is prohibited and any infringement will be subject to legal action. SPECIFICATIONS A=21 10800 - TOILET ACCESSORIES 2.02 TOILET ACCESSORIES: A. Grab bars: 1-1/2" dia., 304 stainless steel with peened, sanitary safety finish. Provide concealed mounting. See Drawings for profile. B. Mirror: B-165, 18" x 30". C. Soap Dispenser: (provided by National Tire & Battery and general contractor to install) D. Toilet Tissue Dispenser: B-2888, surface, wall mount. (provided by National Tire & Battery and general contractor to install) E. Paper Towel Dispenser: B-262, surface, wall mount. (provided by National Tire & Battery and general contractor to install) F. Baby Changing Station: KB 100-05 Koala Baby Changing Stations. (provided by National to Tire & Battery and general contractor to install) 1. Withstand static loads up to 350 lbs. _ E 2. Steel —on —steel hinges to eliminate plastic wear points for extensive durability and child U w o protection. O UCOu 3. Built—in 10 ga. steel mounting supports. = p ir�, 4. Conforms to ANSI A117.1 for handicapped accessibility. + � U �,, OLn 5. Pneumatic gas spring mechanism for smooth, safe open and close motions. p LU., Ce Z C) 6. Child protection strap features snap lock fastener to hold child secure. �= Q O M M 7. FDA approved high —impact polyethylene resists fungal and bacterial growth. < v 3 LU z 8. Built—in sanitary liner dispenser. p °' ne Iq � w Q N n m 0- U 2.03 FASTENING: A. All items of toilet accessories shall be provided complete with all required fastening devices. All fastening devices shall harmonize, in finish, with the item being fastened. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. Install all toilet accessory units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, using fasteners which are appropriate to substrate and recommended by manufacturer of unit. Install units plumb and level, firmly in anchored in locations indicated. B. Secure mirrors to walls in concealed, tamperproof manner with special hangers, toggle bolts, or • screws. Set units plumb, level, and square at locations indicated, according to manufacturer's instructions for type of substrate involved. C. Grab bars: Finished installation of grab bars shall be capable of withstanding 250 lbs. of pressure from any direction. 3.02 ADJUST AND CLEAN: A. Adjust toilet accessories for proper operation and verify that mechanisms function smoothly. B. Clean and polish all exposed surfaces after removing protective coatings. bQ 00 r, � N b�0 � v n in o n — ¢ _ M O Q �D i`f ZUo _ �s Z3° nZd UV oddii 0 O O � a a a O y� Q J • _ � VIN N4 _ N ISSUE DATE 12-1-08 • • REV DATE r� d� r • s s This drawing and the design shown is the property of the architect. The reproduction, copying or use of this drawing without their written consent is prohibited and any infringement will be subject to legal action. SPECIFICATIONS A=22 8-STRAIGHT PROTOTYPE - REVISION 16 - 06-18-08 r I�+I Ili -TT - I➢i I' :CIS-9�?lltf.R I -- - -- -- ---F - T i M F1 - DESIGN AND CODE INFORMATION REINFORCED CONCRETE STRUCTURAL STEEL 1. ALL CONSTRUCTION SHALL CONFORM TO THE 2007 FLORIDA BUILDING CODE. 1. ALL CONCRETE WORK SHALL CONFORM TO ACI 318, "BUILDING 1. ALL STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK SHALL CONFORM TO THE THIRTEENEH CODE REQUIREMENTS FOR REINFORCED CONCRETE". EDITION OF THE "SPECIFICATION FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL 2. REPRODUCTION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR USE AS SHOP BUILDINGS" OF THE A.I.S.C. DRAWINGS IS NOT PERMITTED. 2. THE 28-DAY STRENGTH OF ALL CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE SHALL BE 3000 PSI. 3. ALL SHOP DRAWINGS MUST BE REVIEWED AND STAMPED "REVIEWED" 2. FABRICATORS AND ERECTORS SHALL BE MEMBERS OF THE A.I.S.C. BY THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR PRIOR TO SUBMITTAL. UNSTAMPED 3. CONCRETE SHALL HAVE A MAXIMUM WATER CEMENT RATIO OF OR CERTIFIED FOR CATEGORY I, CONVENTIONAL STEEL STRUCTURES, SHOP DRAWINGS WILL BE REJECTED WITHOUT REVIEW. 0.5. THE USE OF FLY ASH IS PERMITTED. CONCRETE MIX A.I.S.0 QUALITY CERTIFICATION PROGRAM. 4. FOR LOCATION OF MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS (SUCH AS DESIGNS SHALL BE SUBMITTED AND APPROVED PRIOR TO CASTING OF ANY CONCRETE. 3. SHOP DRAWINGS FOR ALL STRUCTURAL STEEL SHALL BE OPENINGS, INSERTS, ETC. AFFECTING STRUCTURAL WORK, SEE SUBMITTED AND APPROVED PRIOR TO ANY FABRICATION. ARCHITECTURAL, MECHANICAL, AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS, ALL 4. ALL CONCRETE PLACED SHALL BE VIBRATED BY MECHANICAL OPENINGS NOT SHOWN ON THE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS SHALL BE VIBRATORS. 4. STRUCTURAL STEEL SHALL MEET THE FOLLOWING ASTM APPROVED BY THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER. SPECIFICATIONS: 5. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS AND 5. REINFORCING BARS SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM-A615, "SPECIFICATION FOR DEFORMED AND PLAIN BILLET -STEEL BARS * STRUCTURAL TUBE: A500 GRADE B. DIMENSIONS AND NOTIFY ARCHITECT OF ANY CONDITIONS WHICH FOR CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT". THE MINIMUM YIELD STRESS OF DO NOT COMPLY WITH PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS. REINFORCING BARS SHALL BE 60,000 PSI, STEEL JOISTS: AS REQUIRED BY THE STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 6. STEEL STAIRS (IF REQUIRED) SHALL BE DESIGNED BY THE FABRICATOR OF THE STEEL JOIST INSTITUTE. UNDER UNDER THE SUPERVISION OF AN ENGINEER REGISTERED IN THE PROJECT 6. WELDED WIRE FABRIC SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM-A185 "SPECIFICATION FOR WELDED STEEL WIRE FABRIC FOR CONCRETE * ALL OTHER FRAMING: A36 UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE ON LOCATIONSTATE AND ALL DETAILS SUBMITTED FOR APPROVAL SHALL REINFORCEMENT, FLAT SHEETS ONLY, CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. BEAR HIS SEAL. 7. DESIGN LOADS: 7. COMPLETE DRAWINGS FOR FABRICATION AND PLACING OF 5. STEEL FRAMING CONNECTIONS SHALL BE BOLTED OR WELDED. REINFORCING STEEL SHALL BE SUBMITTED FOR APPROVAL. NO BOLTS SHALL BE A MINIMUM OF 3/4" DIAMETER AND SHALL BE ROOF DEAD LOAD: 20 PSF FABRICATION MAY BEGIN UNTIL DRAWINGS ARE COMPLETED AND ASTM A325. EACH FASTENER SHALL BE TIGHTENED TO THE ROOF LIVE LOAD: 20 PSF UNIFORM OR 300 LBS CONCENTRATED APPROVED. MINIMUM TENSION FOR THE SIZE AND GRADE OF FASTENER USED FLOOR LIVE LOAD: 100 PSF AS DETERMINED BY ONE OF THE FOLLOWING METHODS: 8, LAP SPLICES FOR REINFORCING STEEL SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE 8. LOADS FOR ITEMS TO BE DESIGNED AND DETAILED BY OTHERS: WITH ACI 318. ALL UNSPECIFIED LAP SPLICES SHALL BE MAXIMUM * TURN OF THE NUT (A.I.S.C) GRAB BARS: 250 LBS. CONCENTRATED LOAD APPLIED IN LENGTH. ANY DIRECTION. * CALIBRATED WRENCH 9. REINFORCING OF ALL CONCRETE MEMBERS SHALL HAVE COVER 9. WIND DATA: CONFORMING TO SECTION 7.7 OF ACI 318. * LOAD INDICATOR WASHERS BASIC SPEED (3-SEC GUST): 110 MPH 10. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE CHAIRS AT 4'-0" CENTER * LOAD INDICATOR BOLTS. IMPORTANCE FACTOR, I: 1.0 TO CENTER TO SUPPORT WIRE MESH WHILE CASTING SLAB. PULL OCCUPANCY CATEGORY: II FABRIC UP BETWEEN SUPPORTS TO PROVIDE 2" CLEARANCE TO TOP INTERNAL PRESSURE COEFFICIENT: 0.18 OF SLAB, MINIMUM SIDE AND END LAP ON FABRIC SHALL BE ONE 6. ROOF DECKING SHALL BE INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE COMPONENT AND CLADDING LOAD: 30 PSF WIRE SPACE. WITH THE STEEL DECK INSTITUTE AND MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. WHERE WELDING IS ACCEPTED, THE 11. ANCHOR BOLTS SHALL BE ASTM A36. SELECTION OF ELECTRODE AND AMPERAGE IS LEFT TO THE FOUNDATION DESIGN CONTRACTOR. WELDING WASHERS ARE REQUIRED FOR DECK WITH 12, WELDING OF REINFORCING STEEL SHALL BE DONE IN STRICT A THICKNESS LESS THAN .028 INCHES AND ARE OPTIONAL FOR 1. FOOTINGS WERE DESIGNED FOR AN ALLOWABLE BEARING PRESSURE OF 2500 PSF. ACCORDANCE WITH THE WELDING SOCIETY "REINFORCING HEAVIER SECTIONS. PUDDLE WELDS SHALL BE AT LEAST 5 / 8 INCH IN DIAMETER AND SHALL PENETRATE ALL LAYERS OF DECK STEEL WELLDINGDING CODE", A.W.S.D1.4. ALL FOOTINGS SHALL BEAR ON SOIL UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED OTHERWISE. FOOTING PREHEATING OF REINFORCING SHALL BE BASED ON THE CARBON MATERIAL AT END LAPS AND SIDE LAPS AND HAVE GOOD FUSION EXCAVATIONS SHALL BE INSPECTED AND APPROVED BY THE GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER EQUIVALENT DETERMINED FROM REINFORCING MILL REPORTS. TO THE SUPPORTING MEMBER. DECKING SHALL BE PLACED IN A GRADE 40 REINFORCING SHALL BE WELDED WITH LOW THREE -SPAN CONTINUOUS CONDITION. SINGLE AND DOUBLE SPAN 2. THE BOTTOM OF ALL FOOTINGS SHALL BE 2'-0" MINIMUM BELOW FINISHED NG SHALL BE HYDROGEN ELECTRODES, AND GRADE 60 REINFORCING CONDITIONS SHALL BE APPROVED BY THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER. GRADE UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. WELDED WITH E9018 LOW HYDROGEN ELECTRODES. 7. BEAMS SHALL BE FABRICATED AND ERECTED WITH NATURAL 3, WHERE FOOTINGS STEPS ARE NECESSARY, THEY SHALL BE NO STEEPER THAN 1 13. CONCRETE WALLS SHALL BE REINFORCED AROUND ALL OPENINGS CAMBER UP. VERTICAL TO 2 HORIZONTAL EXCEPT AS SHOWN ON THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. WITH 2 #6 BARS ALL SIDES AND EXTENDED 2'-0" BEYOND OPENING UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 8. ALL WELDS SHALL CONFORM TO ANSI/AWS, "STRUCTURAL 4. SITE PREPARATION SHALL BE DONE IN CONFORMANCE WITH REQUIREMENTS WELDING CODE". ALL GROOVE WELDS SHOWN ON CONTRACT OF THE GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER, 14. THE LONGITUDINAL REINFORCING STEEL IN BOND BEAMS, WALLS DOCUMENTS SHALL BE FULL PENETRATION UNLESS NOTED AND FOOTINGS SHALL BE CONTINUOUS AROUND CORNERS. SEE OTHERWISE. WELDING SHALL BE DONE WITH E-7018 ELECTRODES 5. BOTTOM OF FOOTING ELEVATIONS SHOWN ON CONTRACT DOCUMENTS TYPICAL DETAILS. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. ARE APPROXIMATE. CONTRACTOR SHALL ADJUST ELEVATIONS AS REQUIRED FOR CONSTRUCTABILITY MAINTAINING THE MINIMUM 15. EXTERIOR SLABS -ON -GRADE NOT SUBJECT TO VEHICLE LOADS 9. STRUCTURAL STEEL EMBEDDED IN CONCRETE SHALL NOT BE SPECIFIED DEPTH AS WELL AS LOCAL CODE REQUIREMENTS. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE 4" THICK ON A 4" THICK GRAVEL FILL AND REINFORCED PAINTED, SHALL VERIFY BOTTOM OF FOOTING ELEVATIONS SHOWN ON CONTRACT DOCUMENTS WITH 6x6 W5.5xW5.5 WWF UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. CONTRACTION JOINTS MEET MINIMUM DEPTH REQUIREMENTS AS COMPARED TO FINISHED GRADE 12'-0" c/c MAXIMUM. CONCRETE FOR EXTERIOR SLABS SHALL BE AIR 10. SHOP OR FIELD SPLICES NOT SHOWN ON THE CONTRACT PRIOR TO CASTING OF CONCRETE FOOTINGS. ENTRAINED TO 5% + OR - 1 %. DOCUMENTS SHALL BE SUBMITTED TO THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER FOR APPROVAL. 16. SAWN JOINTS IN SLABS -ON -GRADE SHALL BE ACCOMPLISHED REINFORCED MASONRY WITHIN 24 HOURS OF SLAB PLACEMENT. 11. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING SHALL BE ERECTED TRUE AND PLUMB IN ACCORDANCE WITH A.I.S.C. CODE OF STANDARD 17, CASTS OF SLABS -ON -GRADE SHALL HAVE NO LENGTH -TO -WIDTH PRACTICE. ANY FRAMING EXCEEDING TOLERANCES OF THE CODE 1. ALL MASONRY CONSTRUCTION SHALL COMPLY WITH ACI 530, RATIOS EXCEEDING 3 TO 2, ADJACENT CASTS SHALL BE OF STANDARD PRACTICE SHALL BE CORRECTED BY THE "BUILDING CODE REQUIREMENTS FOR MASONRY STRUCTURES". DELAYED A MINIMUM OF THREE DAYS. CONTRACTOR AT HIS EXPENSE AS DIRECTED BY THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER. 2. ALL CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS FOR LOAD -BEARING WALLS SHALL 18. USE EXPANSION JOINT MATERIAL BETWEEN ALL EXTERIOR SLABS- CONFORM TO ASTM C-90, "SPECIFICATION FOR HOLLOW LOAD- ON -GRADE AND THE ABUTTING STRUCTURE EXCEPT AT RETAINING 12. THE STRUCTURAL STEEL ERECTOR SHALL PROVIDE TEMPORARY BEARING CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS". TYPE M MORTAR WALLS. BRACING OF THE STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAME WORK AGAINST SHALL BE USED. LATERAL LOADINGS SUCH AS WIND. THIS BRACING SHALL REMAIN 19. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT 48 HOURS PRIOR TO IN PLACE UNTIL THE FINAL SYSTEM FOR RESISTING LATERAL 3. ALL LOAD -BEARING BLOCK MASONRY SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM CASTING ANY CONCRETE. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOT POUR ANY LOADS IS IN PLACE AND EFFECTIVE AS APPROVED BY THE PRISM STRENGTH OF 2500 PSI UNO. CONCRETE OR GROUT USED CONCRETE WITHOUT REVIEW AND APPROVAL OF ALL REINFORCING STRUCTURAL ENGINEER. FOR FILLING CELLS SHALL BE 3000 PSI. STEEL BY THE ARCHITECT OR HIS REPRESENTATIVE. 4. ALL REINFORCED HOLLOW UNIT MASONRY SHALL BE BUILT TO 13. BAR JOISTS SHALL BE DESIGNED UNDER THE PRESERVE THE UNOBSTRUCTED VERTICAL CONTINUITY OF THE SUPERVISION OF AN ENGINEER REGISTERED IN THE PROJECT LOCATION CELLS TO BE FILLED. WALLS AND CROSS WEBS FORMING SUCH STATE AND SHALL BE CAPABLE OF SUPPORTING LOADS SPECIFIED CELLS TO BE FILLED SHALL BE FULL -BEDDED IN MORTAR TO IN PUBLISHED SJI LITERATURE. PREVENT LEAKAGE OF GROUT. ALL HEAD (OR END) JOINTS SHALL BE SOLIDLY FILLED WITH MORTAR FOR A DISTANCE IN FROM THE FACE OF THE WALL OR UNIT NOT LESS THAN THE THICKNESS OF 14. BAR JOISTS SHALL BE FABRICATED AND ERECTED, BRACED WITH THE LONGITUDINAL FACE SHELLS. BOND SHALL BE PROVIDED BY RIGID DIAGONAL BRIDGING AND ANCHORED TO THE SUPPORTING LAPPING UNITS IN SUCCESSIVE VERTICAL COURSES OR BY MEMBERS IN STRICT ACCORDANCE WITH THE STANDARD EQUIVALENT MECHANICAL ANCHORAGE. SPECIFICATIONS OF THE STEEL JOIST INSTITUTE. END BEARING SHALL BE 4" OVER MASONRY OR POURED CONCRETE SUPPORTS OR 5. VERTICAL CELLS TO BE FILLED SHALL HAVE VERTICAL ALIGNMENT 1" BEYOND CENTERLINE OF BEAM FLANGE AT STEEL SUPPORTS, SUFFICIENT TO MAINTAIN A CLEAR, UNOBSTRUCTED, CONTINUOUS BEARINGS SHALL BE 2-1/2" DEEP UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE VERTICAL CELL MEASURING NOT LESS THAN 3" AND HAVING A CLEAR AREA OF 10 SQUARE INCHES. 15. ALL STRUCTURAL STEEL, JOISTS AND DECK TO BE PAINTED WITH GRAY PRIMER. 6. CLEANOUT OPENINGS SHALL BE PROVIDED AT THE BOTTOM OF ALL CELLS TO BE FILLED IN EACH POUR OF GROUT WHERE SUCH GROUT POUR IS IN EXCESS OF 4 FEET IN HEIGHT. ANY OVERHANGING MORTAR OR OTHER OBSTRUCTION OR DEBRIS SHALL BE REMOVED FROM THE INSIDES OF SUCH CELL WALLS. THE CLEANOUTS SHALL BE SEALED BEFORE GROUTING, AFTER INSPECTION. 7. VERTICAL REINFORCEMENT SHALL BE HELD IN POSITION AT TOP AND BOTTOM AND AT INTERVALS NOT EXCEEDING 192 DIAMETERS OF THE REINFORCEMENT OR 10 FEET. 8. ALL CELLS CONTAINING REINFORCEMENT SHALL BE FILLED SOLIDLY WITH GROUT. GROUT SHALL BE POURED IN LIFTS OF 8 FEET MAXIMUM HEIGHT. ALL GROUT SHALL BE CONSOLIDATED AT TIME OF POURING BY PUDDLING OR VIBRATION AND THEN RECONSOLIDATED AGAIN BY PUDDLING LATER, BEFORE PLASTICITY IS LOST. 9. WHEN TOTAL GROUT POUR EXCEEDS 8 FEET IN HEIGHT, THE GROUT SHALL BE PLACED IN FOUR FOOT LIFTS AND SPECIAL INSPECTION DURING GROUTING SHALL BE REQUIRED. MINIMUM CELL DIMENSION SHALL BE 3 INCHES. 10. WHEN THE GROUTING IS STOPPED FOR ONE HOUR OR LONGER, HORIZONTAL CONSTRUCTION JOINTS SHALL BE FORMED BY STOPPING THE POUR OF GROUT NOT LESS THAN 1/2 INCH BELOW THE TOP OF THE UPPERMOST UNIT GROUTED. 11. THE ARCHITECT SHALL BE GIVEN A MINIMUM 72 HOURS NOTICE PRIOR TO EACH REINFORCED BLOCK GROUTING OR CONCRETING OPERATION. 12. WHERE LINTELS BEAR ON MASONRY WALLS, THEY SHALL BEAR ON EITHER A BOND BEAM COURSE OR ON CORES FILLED WITH CONCRETE. ALL LINTELS SHALL HAVE AT LEAST 8" OF BEARING AT EACH END UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. - r - - - - --- - - - - ii lil I tAlal ut .��IiGI i Il STANDARD LINTEL SCHEDULE OPENINGS UP TO 6'-0" WALL SIZE LINTEL TYPE 4" BLOCK L4x3Y2x516 8" BLOCK 8"x8" CONC w/2-#4 T&B 8"x8" BOND BM w/1-#5 T&B 12" BLOCK 12%8" CONC w/2-#4 T&B 12%8" BOND BM w 2- 5 T&B GREATER THAN 6'-0" TO 8'-0" WALL SIZE LINTEL TYPE 4" BLOCK L5x3Y2x%6 8" BLOCK 8%8" CONC w/2-#5 T&B 8%16" BOND BM w 1- 6 T&B 12" BLOCK 12%8" CONC w/2-#4 T&B 12%8" BOND BM w/2- 5 T&B GREATER THAN 8'-0" TO 12'-0" WALL SIZE LINTEL TYPE 4" BRICK L6x3Y2xY8 8" BLOCK 8"x12" CONC w/2-#5 T&B 8%16" BOND BM w/2-#5 T&B 12" BLOCK 12"02" CONC w/2-#6 T&B 12"06" BOND BM w/2-#5 T&B GREATER THAN 12'-0" TO 16'-0" WALL SIZE LINTEL TYPE 4" BLOCK L7x4A8 8" BLOCK 8%16" CONC w/2-#5 T&B 8%16" BOND BM w 2- 5 T&B 12" BLOCK 12"06" CONC w/2-#5 T&B 12"06" BOND BM w/2-#6 T&B NOTE: 1. 2. ALL LINTELS SHALL HAVE AT LEAST 8" OF BEARING AT EACH END UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. BOND BEAMS HAVE TO BE USED AT STOREFRONT OPENINGS (BECAUSE IT HAS TO BE SINGLE -SCORED) 08323 8-STRAIGHT PROTOTYPE - REVISION 16 - 06-18-08 -1 __ _. --___.---.T�T LA � N � o V M >_ O U o U O o � s t,,, c -� wz o NN c � ~ Q M M Q = L1J Lf� Lf) o cue w Q N (n m 0.. LL ,o U ao N C) Z �^pLin� C p d cNM 0 p OMNM Z Lo OU`•'LorL. � 0m zf Lu C-000" NJ V we W = NL N ISSUE DATE 12-01-08 This drawtnn anti the design shown Is the property of the t3rcttit�cf. The rsorc ductlan, copying or use N thus dr9 ing ,ejthioui that; written consent is prrahibit d and any insnngement will be subject to iegai action. GENERAL NOTES STRUCTURAL QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN GENERAL: THIS STRUCTURAL QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN IDENTIFIES THE RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE CONTRACTOR AND THE SPECIAL INSPECTOR IN PERFORMING THE TESTING AND INSPECTION OF THE WORK REQUIRED BY CHAPTER 17 OF THE BUILDING CODE THAT IS WITHIN THE SCOPE OF THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING SERVICES FOR THIS PROJECT. REFER TO OTHER PORTIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS FOR TESTING AND INSPECTIONS REQUIRED OF ARCHITECTURAL, MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL, OR OTHER BUILDING COMPONENTS. CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES: THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT TO THE BUILDING OFFICIAL AND THE ARCHITECT A WRITTEN STATEMENT OF RESPONSIBILITY THAT CONTAINS THE FOLLOWING: 1. ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF AWARENESS OF THE SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS CONTAINED WITHIN THIS STRUCTURAL QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN. 2. ACKNOWLEDGEMENT THAT CONTROL SHALL BE EXERCISED TO OBTAIN CONFORMANCE WITH THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS APPROVED BY THE BUILDING OFFICIAL. 3. PROCEDURES FOR EXERCISING CONTROL WITHIN THE CONTRACTOR'S ORGANIZATION, THE METHOD AND FREQUENCY OF REPORTING, AND THE DISTRIBUTION OF REPORTS. 4. IDENTIFICATION AND QUALIFICATIONS OF THE PERSON(S) EXERCISING SUCH CONTROL AND THEIR POSITIONS) IN THE ORGANIZATION. THE STRUCTURAL TESTING/INSPECTION AGENCY THAT IS TO ACT AS THE SPECIAL INSPECTOR WILL BE HIRED BY THE OWNER, BUT CONTRACTOR SHALL PAY FOR ANY ADDITIONAL STRUCTURAL TESTING/INSPECTION REQUIRED FOR WORK OR MATERIALS NOT COMPLYING WITH THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS DUE TO NEGLIGENCE OR NONCONFORMANCE AND SHALL PAY FOR ANY ADDITIONAL STRUCTURAL TESTING/INSPECTION REQUIRED FOR HIS CONVENIENCE. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE TO ENSURE THAT THE SPECIAL INSPECTOR IS PRESENT FOR ALL WORK REQUIRING SPECIAL INSPECTION. ANY WORK THAT REQUIRES SPECIAL INSPECTION AND IS PERFORMED WITHOUT THE SPECIAL INSPECTOR BEING PRESENT IS SUBJECT TO BEING DEMOLISHED AND RECONSTRUCTED. CONTRACTOR HAS THE FOLLOWING RESPONSIBILITIES TO THE SPECIAL INSPECTOR: 1. PROVIDE COPY OF CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS TO THE SPECIAL INSPECTOR. 2. NOTIFY THE SPECIAL INSPECTOR SUFFICIENTLY IN ADVANCE OF OPERATIONS TO ALLOW ASSIGNMENT OF PERSONNEL AND SCHEDULING OF TESTS. 3. COOPERATE WITH SPECIAL INSPECTOR AND PROVIDE ACCESS TO WORK. 4. PROVIDE SAMPLES OF MATERIALS TO BE TESTED IN REQUIRED QUANTITIES. 5. PROVIDE STORAGE SPACE FOR THE SPECIAL INSPECTOR'S EXCLUSIVE USE, SUCH AS FOR STORING AND CURING CONCRETE TESTING SAMPLES. 6. PROVIDE LABOR TO ASSIST THE SPECIAL INSPECTOR IN PERFORMING TESTS/INSPECTIONS. SPECIAL INSPECTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES: THE SPECIAL INSPECTOR SHALL BE A PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER LICENSED IN AND PRACTICING IN THE STATE OF FLORIDA. SPECIAL INSPECTORS SHALL BE A LICENSED ENGINEER IN THE STATE OF FLORIDA OR IS PERFORMING APPROPRIATE DUTIES DIRECTLY UNDER THE SUPERVISION OF A LICENSED PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER IN THE STATE OF FLORIDA AND HAS A THOROUGH UNDERSTANDING OF THE SPECIAL INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS OF THE 2000 AND 2003 IBC, THE SPECIAL INSPECTOR SHALL BE AN INDIVIDUAL OR INDIVIDUALS CERTIFIED OR EXPERIENCED TO PERFORM SUCH INSPECTIONS IN A PARTICULAR FIELD. THE SPECIAL INSPECTOR SHALL KEEP RECORDS OF ALL INSPECTIONS AND FURNISH REPORTS TO THE BUILDING OFFICIAL AND TO THE REGISTERED DESIGN PROFESSIONAL IN RESPONSIBLE CHARGE. PERIODIC REPORTS SHALL BE PROVIDED AND SHALL INDICATE THAT WORK INSPECTED WAS DONE IN CONFORMANCE TO APPROVED CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS. DISCREPANCIES SHALL BE BROUGHT TO THE IMMEDIATE ATTENTION OF THE CONTRACTOR FOR CORRECTION. IF THE DISCREPANCIES ARE NOT CORRECTED TO THE SATISFACTION OF THE SPECIAL INSPECTOR, THE DISCREPANCIES SHALL BE BROUGHT TO THE IMMEDIATE ATTENTION OF THE BUILDING OFFICIAL AND TO THE REGISTERED DESIGN PROFESSIONAL IN RESPONSIBLE CHARGE. A WEEKLY REPORT OF INSPECTIONS DOCUMENTING REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND CORRECTION OF ANY DISCREPANCIES NOTED IN THE INSPECTIONS SHALL BE SUBMITTED. AT THE COMPLETION OF THE SPECIAL INSPECTIONS, THE LICENSED PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER IN CHARGE OF PERFORMING THE SPECIAL INSPECTION SHALL CERTIFY THE FINAL SPECIAL INSPECTION REPORT AND AFFIX HIS/HER SEAL TO THE SPECIAL INSPECTOR'S FINAL REPORT. PROVIDE THREE (3) COPIES OF THIS REPORT; TWO TO THE ARCHITECT AND ONE TO THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER OF RECORD. THE SPECIAL INSPECTOR FOR THIS PROJECT IS AS FOLLOWS: NAME: -------------------------- COMPANY: ---------------------- ADDRESS: ----------------------- TELEPHONE #: ____ --------------- SOILS: SPECIAL INSPECTOR SHALL PERFORM THE FOLLOWING: 1. VERIFY STRUCTURAL FILL COMPLIES WITH SPECIFICATIONS AND THE PROJECT GEOTECHNICAL, 2. OBSERVE PROOFROLLING. 3. PERFORM FIELD DENSITY TEST TO VERIFY COMPACTION OF STRUCTURAL FILL. AS A MINIMUM, PERFORM ONE TEST PER LIFT FOR EVERY 2500 SQUARE FEET OF FILL PLACED. 4. VERIFY FOUNDATION BEARING CAPACITY. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE: CONTRACTOR SHALL PERFORM THE FOLLOWING: 1. SUBMIT MANUFACTURER'S DATA FOR TENSILE AND COMPRESSIVE SPLICERS. 2. ESTABLISH CONCRETE MIX DESIGN PROPORTIONS PER ACI 318, CHAPTER 5. SUBMIT THREE COPIES OF THE CONCRETE MIX DESIGNS. INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING: A. TYPE AND QUANTITIES OF MATERIALS B. SLUMP C. AIR CONTENT D. FRESH UNIT WEIGHT E. AGGREGATES SIEVE ANALYSIS F. DESIGN COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH G. LOCATION OF PLACEMENT IN STRUCTURE H. METHOD OF PLACEMENT I. METHOD OF CURING J. SEVEN-DAY AND 28-DAY COMPRESSIVE STRENGTHS 3. SUBMIT A CERTIFICATION FROM EACH MANUFACTURER OR SUPPLIER STATING THAT MATERIALS MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE SPECIFIED ASTM AND ACI STANDARDS. 4. SUBMIT CERTIFICATION THAT THE READY -MIXED CONCRETE PLANT COMPLIES WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE NATIONAL READY MIX CONCRETE ASSOCIATION. SPECIAL INSPECTOR SHALL PERFORM THE FOLLOWING: 1. VERIFY GRADE, QUANTITY, LOCATION, AND THE PLACEMENT OF REINFORCING STEEL PRIOR TO CONCRETE PLACEMENT. 2. EXAMINE CONCRETE IN TRUCK TO VERIFY THAT CONCRETE APPEARS PROPERLY MIXED. 3. PERFORM A SLUMP TEST AS DEEMED NECESSARY FOR EACH CONCRETE LOAD. RECORD IF WATER OR ADMIXTURES ARE ADDED TO THE CONCRETE AT THE JOB SITE. PERFORM ADDITIONAL SLUMP TESTS AFTER JOB SITE ADJUSTMENTS, 4. MOLD FIVE SPECIMENS PER SET FOR COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH TESTING; ONE SET FOR EACH 75 CUBIC YARDS OF EACH MIX DESIGN PLACED IN ANY ONE DAY. FOR EACH SET MOLDED, RECORD: A. SLUMP B. AIR CONTENT C, UNIT WEIGHT D. TEMPERATURE, AMBIENT, AND CONCRETE E. LOCATION OF PLACEMENT F. ANY PERTINENT INFORMATION, SUCH AS ADDITION OF WATER, ADDITION OF ADMIXTURES, ETC. PERFORM ONE 7-DAY AND TWO 28-DAY COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH TESTS. (USE TWO AS A SPARE TO BE BROKEN AS DIRECTED BY THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER IF COMPRESSIVE STRENGTHS DO NOT APPEAR ADEQUATE.) 5. REPORTS OF COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH TESTS SHALL CONTAIN THE PROJECT IDENTIFICATION NAME AND NUMBER, DATE OF CONCRETE PLACEMENT ,NAME OF CONCRETE TESTING AGENCY, CONCRETE DESIGN COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH, LOCATION OF CONCRETE PLACEMENT IN STRUCTURE, CONCRETE MIX PROPORTIONS AND MATERIALS, COMPRESSIVE BREAKING STRENGTH AND TYPE OF BREAK. STRUCTURAL STEEL: CONTRACTOR SHALL PERFORM THE FOLLOWING: 1. SUBMIT CERTIFICATION THAT THE FABRICATOR IS REGISTERED AND APPROVED BY THE BUILDING OFFICIAL TO PERFORM REQUIRED WORK WITHOUT SPECIAL INSPECTIONS, 2. IF FABRICATOR IS NOT REGISTERED AND APPROVED, SPECIAL INSPECTION OF THE FABRICATED ITEMS SHALL BE REQUIRED. SPECIAL INSPECTOR SHALL VERIFY THAT THE FABRICATOR MAINTAINS DETAILED FABRICATION AND QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURES THAT PROVIDE A BASIS FOR INSPECTION CONTROL OF THE WORKMANSHIP AND THE FABRICATOR'S ABILITY TO CONFORM TO APPROVED CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AND REFERENCED STANDARDS. SPECIAL INSPECTOR SHALL REVIEW THE PROCEDURES FOR COMPLETENESS AND ADEQUACY RELATIVE TO THE CODE REQUIREMENTS FOR THE FABRICATOR'S SCOPE OF WORK. 3. SUBMIT CERTIFIED MILL TEST REPORTS FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL. 4. SUBMIT MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE FOR HIGH -STRENGTH BOLTING AND WELD FILLER MATERIALS, SPECIAL INSPECTOR SHALL PERFORM THE FOLLOWING: 1. INSPECTION OF STEEL FRAMING TO VERIFY COMPLIANCE WITH DETAILS SHOWN ON THE APPROVED CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AND SHOP DRAWINGS INCLUDING MEMBER LOCATIONS, BRACING, CONNECTION DETAILS, ETC. 2. PROVIDE CONTINUOUS INSPECTION TO VERIFY COMPLIANCE OF THE FOLLOWING: A. COMPLETE AND PARTIAL PENETRATION GROOVE WELDS. ULTRASONICALLY INSPECT 100% OF THE COMPLETE PENETRATION WELDS. B. MULTI -PASS FILLET WELDS AND SINGLE -PASS FILLET WELDS GREATER THAN 5/ 16". 3. PROVIDE PERIODIC INSPECTION TO VERIFY COMPLIANCE OF THE FOLLOWING: A. MATERIAL VERIFICATION OF HIGH -STRENGTH BOLTS, NUTS, AND WASHERS. B. MATERIAL VERIFICATION OF WELD FILLER MATERIAL, C. VERIFICATION OF ANCHOR ROD SIZE, CONFIGURATION, AND EMBEDMENT PRIOR TO PLACEMENT OF CONCRETE. D. VISUALLY INSPECT ALL BOLTED CONNECTIONS IN ACCORDANCE WITH AISC SPECIFICATIONS FOR STRUCTURAL JOINTS USING ASTM A325 OR A490 BOLTS. PRIOR TO VISUAL AND PHYSICAL TESTING, TENSION TESTING USING A CALIBRATION DEVICE (SKIDMORE-WILHELM) MUST INDICATE TENSIONS AT LEAST 5% IN EXCESS OF THE AISC MINIMUM. STRUCTURAL STEEL ERECTOR SHALL SUPPLY THE TENSION CALIBRATION DEVICE. TEST A MINIMUM OF 10% OF THE BOLTED CONNECTIONS. E. VISUALLY INSPECT ALL FIELD -WELDED CONNECTIONS. VISUAL INSPECTION OF WELDED JOINTS INCLUDES PERIODIC EXAMINATION OF FITUP. 4. WELD INSPECTIONS TO INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING: A. WELD INSPECTIONS SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH AWS D1.1. B. REVIEW AND VERIFY COMPLIANCE OF WRITTEN WELDING PROCEDURES WITH AWS REQUIREMENTS. C. VERIFY THAT WELDING PROCEDURES ARE BEING ADHERED TO DURING FIELD WELDING, D. VERIFY WELDER QUALIFICATIONS. E, USE ALL MEANS NECESSARY TO DETERMINE THE QUALITY OF WELDS, THE INSPECTOR MAY USE GAMMA RAY, MAGNAFLUX, TREPANNING, SONICS OR ANY OTHER AID TO VISUAL INSPECTION THAT THE SPECIAL INSPECTOR MAY DEEM NECESSARY TO BE ASSURED OF THE ADEQUACY OF THE WELDING. F. KEEP A SYSTEMATIC RECORD OF ALL WELDS THAT INCLUDES, IN ADDITION TO OTHER REQUIRED RECORDS, THE IDENTIFICATION MARKS OF WELDERS, A LIST OF DEFECTIVE WELDS, AND THE MANNER OF CORRECTING DEFECTS. STEEL JOISTS: CONTRACTOR SHALL PERFORM THE FOLLOWING: 1. SUBMIT CERTIFICATION THAT THE FABRICATOR IS REGISTERED AND APPROVED BY THE BUILDING OFFICIAL TO PERFORM REQUIRED WORK WITHOUT SPECIAL INSPECTIONS. 2.. IF FABRICATOR IS NOT REGISTERED AND APPROVED, SPECIAL INSPECTION OF THE FABRICATED ITEMS SHALL BE REQUIRED. SPECIAL INSPECTOR SHALL VERIFY THAT THE FABRICATOR MAINTAINS DETAILED FABRICATION AND QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURES THAT PROVIDE A BASIS FOR INSPECTION CONTROL OF THE WORKMANSHIP AND THE FABRICATOR'S ABILITY TO CONFORM TO APPROVED CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AND REFERENCED STANDARDS. SPECIAL INSPECTOR SHALL REVIEW THE PROCEDURES FOR COMPLETENESS AND ADEQUACY RELATIVE TO THE CODE REQUIREMENTS FOR THE FABRICATOR'S SCOPE OF WORK. SPECIAL INSPECTOR SHALL PERFORM PERIODIC INSPECTIONS OF THE FOLLOWING: 1. VISUAL INSPECTION OF BOLTED AND WELDED CONNECTIONS. 2. VERIFY INSTALLATION OF BRIDGING AND BRACES. 3. VERIFY CONNECTIONS FOR TOP AND BOTTOM CHORDS. 4. VERIFY REINFORCEMENT OF MEMBERS FOR CONCENTRATED LOADS. 5. VERIFY PROPER BEARING. STEEL DECK: CONTRACTOR SHALL PERFORM THE FOLLOWING: 1. SUBMIT MILL CERTIFICATION THAT THE SUPPLIED STEEL COMPLIES WITH THE SPECIFICATIONS. SPECIAL INSPECTOR SHALL PERFORM PERIODIC INSPECTIONS OF THE FOLLOWING: 1. VERIFY GENERAL ALIGNMENT AND DECK LAP, 2. VERIFY WELDS FOR SIZE AND PATTERN. 3. VERIFY SPACING AND TYPE OF SIDELAP ATTACHMENTS. 4. VERIFY INSTALLATION OF DECK CLOSURES. STRUCTURAL MASONRY: CONTRACTOR SHALL PERFORM THE FOLLOWING: 1. SUBMIT MANUFACTURER'S DATA FOR TENSILE AND COMPRESSIVE SPLICERS, 2. SUBMIT A CERTIFICATION FROM EACH MANUFACTURER OR SUPPLIER STATING THAT MATERIALS MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE SPECIFIED ASTM AND ACI STANDARDS. 3. SUBMIT CERTIFICATION THAT THE READY -MIXED CONCRETE PLANT COMPLIES WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE NATIONAL READY MIX CONCRETE ASSOCIATION. SPECIAL INSPECTOR SHALL PERFORM THE FOLLOWING: 1. AS MASONRY CONSTRUCTION BEGINS, THE FOLLOWING SHALL BE VERIFIED TO ENSURE COMPLIANCE: A. PROPORTIONS OF SITE -PREPARED MORTAR. B. CONSTRUCTION OF MORTAR JOINTS. C. LOCATION OF REINFORCEMENT AND CONNECTORS. 2. THE INSPECTION PROGRAM SHALL VERIFY: A. SIZE AND LOCATION OF STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS. B. TYPE, SIZE, AND LOCATION OF ANCHORS, INCLUDING OTHER DETAILS OF ANCHORAGE OF MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS, FRAMES OR OTHER CONSTRUCTION. C. SPECIFIED SIZE, GRADE, AND TYPE OF REINFORCEMENT. D. PLACEMENT OF MASONRY DURING COLD WEATHER (TEMPERATURE BELOW 40 DEGREES FARENHEIT) OR HOT WEATHER (TEMPERATURE ABOVE 90 DEGREES FARENHEIT). 3. PRIOR TO GROUTING, THE FOLLOWING SHALL BE VERIFIED TO ENSURE COMPLIANCE: A. CLEANLINESS OF GROUT SPACE. B. PLACEMENT OF REINFORCEMENT AND CONNECTORS. C. PROPORTIONS OF SITE -PREPARED GROUT. D. CONSTRUCTION OF MORTAR JOINTS. 4. GROUT PLACEMENT SHALL BE VERIFIED TO ENSURE COMPLIANCE WITH CODE AND CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT PROVISIONS. 5. PREPARATION OF ANY REQUIRED GROUT SPECIMENS, AND/OR PRISMS SHALL BE OBSERVED. 6. COMPLIANCE WITH REQUIRED INSPECTION PROVISIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AND THE APPROVED SUBMITTALS SHALL BE VERIFIED. 0 R I cc b h h K o cn V) N o u M EI �-LLJ z $, O _V + Lin U,s,Ocno-a �Lwce N c OC I- Q C) N GJ � U C) e- e- LLJ p Z) W Q N (n m 0_ LL Ln In th t� y C C I Nco M NM C t- H rn ? ,�Q LinM 8 v�R ne „-2 Z� yr "'7 z3 w`° I mv�Zi C) ISSUE DATE 12-01-08 This drawina e:nu the design sa!uwn i5 "'\ property of the architect, The reproduction, copying or use of thus'Immrig without their •,vrittf3n consent is prohibited and aru' iWnngement vMi he subjoct to Iaga! ,notion, QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN Yam, - 06323 8-STRAIGHT PROTOTYPE - REVISION 16 - 06-18-08 S�ppE MITER ENDS. BUTT WELD AND GRIND SMOOTH USE SEPARATE PIECES OF ANGLE 2 EDGE ANGLE TRANSITION SCALE: 3/4 = 1 -0 F.F.E. OIL INW DBL. JOIST ROOF FRAMING PLAN - TIRE ENCLOSURE #6 ® 24" O.C. ADD 1-#6 ® ALL CORNERS 5" CONC. SLAB REINF. W/6x6 - W2.9xW2.9 W.W.F. ON 10 MIL. VAPOR RETARDER ON 4" THICK GRANULAR BASE, OVER COMPACTED SUBGRADE. FOUNDATION PLAN -TIRE ENCLOSURE 6-#6 ® 16" 12" CMU DETAIL A DETAIL B D ETAI L C 145'-0" 8" CMU w/ 3-#5 0 16" SPC EQ g w 8" CM w N 4" I N F _._ Ac MAMC DETAIL D CMU 4'-0" MIN. BETWEEN STEPS 5LU I IUN ORCEME' .- # LI ELEVATION STEPS PLAN INTERSECTION PLAN CORNER � TYP FOOTING DETAILS SCALE: NONE 7'-2" 6'-0" 87'-1%11 61-5y4" 20'-5%" 14'-4" 1 2 CMU 8" CMU 4 8" CMU 12" CMU $ 9 S-3 #6048" o.c. S-3 S-3 7'-103/" 4 I 0 -7 10' 6" PIT 1'-81, 5'-6" 10'-4" .rr rr ^� -r - rr�r - rr-��'r.�ri ' - r '���►- r-� r -�'r rrr� -err -r .�-rr� -r � -r ^-r w'r rrr .rrrr '� -1s-r�rrrr -•-� rrr w-rrrr�.Y �- ♦♦ ► n_ �-.... 1, 5. �� ►�i►� sue. i�@►a.,!is�►:!i�z��sa�3ia1! i4sss*'►�sL�a_.-w'ii�s!a�k_ww�-.ri!l!i_a1Ci�7�!� +. ��i�!�w��►w�'! ��[�s���J.�S a�R l►_�w.�sO i�+z� r!�INT4 0�'f►!aw-UN! ���4-�s s��is ��!Q►sTi���7+_���s�A ► ai��reals�s7E►s ,r.►� !7!s iis9 i �i�i!� a�'7 $-� PLACES) $,3 2'-0" 2'-0" 2'-0" 2'-0" 2'-011 2'-0" 10'-2" 10'-0" 10'-0" 10'-0" 10'-0" 10'-0" 145'-0" 5" CONC. SLAB REINF. W/6x6 - W2.9xW2.9 W.W.F. ON 10 MIL. VAPOR RETARDER ON 4" THICK GRANULAR BASE, OVER COMPACTED SUBGRADE. 1..� J FOUNDATION PLAN - DUMPSTER MISaftmJILIINL\I11110 1 1 3'-4" IL 21'-6" 14'-4" PROJECT NORTH 3'-611 3'-611 a N I n 0 0 1. SEE SHEET S- 0 FOR STRUCTURAL GENERAL NOTES. 2. TOP OF EXTERIOR FOOTINGS SHALL BE THE LOWER OF THE FOLLOWING: F.F.E. - 16" FINISHED GRADE - 12 2c� CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE FOOTING ELEVATIONS AND ate STEPS WITH FINAL GRADING PLAN. �r 3. GROUT ALL REINFORCED CELLS IN CMU SOLID. 4. REFER TO DRAWING S-3 FOR TYPICAL DETAILS. 5. SEE 1/S-3 FOR TYPICAL CONTROL JOINT DETAIL. 6. SEE 2/S-3 FOR CONSTRUCTION JOINT DETAIL. 7. FINISHED FLOOR ELEV. = REFERENCE ARCH. & CIVIL DRAWINGS. 8. VERIFY DIMENSIONS WITH ARCH. DRAWINGS. DIMENSIONS SHOWN ON ARCH. DRAWINGS TAKE PRECEDENCE OVER DIMENSIONS SHOWN ON THIS PLAN. 9. REFERENCE ARCH. DRAWINGS FOR EXACT LOCATION & EXTENTS OF SLAB DEPRESSIONS. MAINTAIN SPECIFIED SLAB DEPTH. 10, LOWER FOOTINGS WHERE REQUIRED TO ACCOMODATE PLUMBING, SLAB RECESSES, FINISH GRADE, ETC. REFERENCE ARCH. & PLUMBING DRAWINGS. 11 COORD. W/VENDOR/ELEC. DWG'S FOR CONDUIT RUNS. UNDER SLAB. DENOTES OPTIONAL SLAB LEAVE -OUT AREA. ci v 6-1 o N VZ Mai � N 0 2 % 2 h ohs m L � N S O U M E O v � 00 � �vp„�CMo� N N-a oLuod NN � OCf_QO MM GJ Q = � Iw. Z Ln Ln 6> w � � ww<NLnma- t_ pip M A Z Qa Ln ID L dNM C H NM Nrn CJ C_� Ln VIU"> ti W Xo co L 0 M i L tb M V1 ZC. LL UN11u. ISSUE DATE 12-01-08 This drawing and the ciesign shave Is the Property of the architect. The reproauction, copying r,,r use of this drawing without their wr; let consent is prohibifec and any infringement wili be subject to loyal _fiction FOUNDATION PLAN 8-STRAIGHT PROTOTYPE - REVISION 16 - 06-18-08 smi I OIL J.B.E. _ 18'-0" A.F.F. PIP6 STD BRACE 0— 6'-0" O.C. MAX. SPC, U.N.O. SEE 1 /S-2, SIM. 16'-8" A.F.F. -0 —" 7A DCC DESIGN WIND UPLIFT PRESSURES a7:flMAIMII mm PROJECT NORTH BOND BEAM REINF ot SEE ARCH. W/2 - #5 CONT. _ PL. W"x8"03" w/ 2- %" DIA. x6" EPDXY ANCHOR 2� 2-#5 CONT 8" CMU PE 6 STD. ±2.5K +2.5K BRACE REACTION TO OF JOIST BASE PLATE %"x8"x8" m 6 VARIES O. SEE 3/S-4 PARAPET BRACE SCALE: NONE PIP6 STD BRACE 6'-0" O.C. MAX. SPC, U.N.O. SEE 1 /S-2, SIM. SS12x6x% HSS4x4x-6 TYP. ® 2'-6" MAX. O.C. (COORD. W/ARCH.) HSS12x6x% PIPE 6 STD. ® EA. JOIST SEE 1 /S-2 JOIST DIRECTION VALUES NOTES: 1. ALL JOISTS SHALL BE DESIGNED FOR A NET UPLIFT AS SHOWN ON THE NET UPLIFT PLAN. 2. ALL JOISTS SHALL HAVE 2 1 /2" BEARING SEATS UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 3. BRIDGING FOR JOISTS SHALL BE SIZED & LOCATED BY THE JOIST MANUFACTURER IN ACCORDANCE W/ SJI REQUIREMENTS. 4. GROUT ALL REINFORCED CELLS IN CMU SOLID. 5. REFER TO DRAWING S-0 FOR GENERAL NOTES AND DRAWINGS S-3, S-4, AND S-5 FOR TYPICAL DETAILS. 6. VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS & ELEVATIONS WITH ARCH. DRAWINGS. DIMENSIONS SHOWN ON ARCH DRAWINGS TAKE PRECEDENCE OVER DIMENSIONS SHOWN ON THIS PLAN. 7. JOISTS SHALL BE SPACED ® 6'-0"O.C. MAX. (TYPICAL - U.N.O.) 8. COORDINATE W/ ARCH. FOR JOIST AND BEAM BEARING ELEVATIONS. 9. SEE 10/S-4 FOR CMU WALL REINF. (TYP. U.N.O.) � N y..,�lQ^Q� GG��C �N�� y y c_ ���L ��� IOJ Z3•� iu��( LLJ 7 t l0 �MVI ZILL O Ln � N UN EL 4 0 0000 _ W6 UJ v C9 OC W = Nd W N ISSUE DATE 12-01-08 This dmoving Nd the sic property cf fh2 ai �itect copying or use of this rave written consent is prohi infrince:me;nt mill he •ubjec 7 �i TI1Tt lurlii l N illi;r,il��„V�u31t a st.tit�i Al 06323 8-STRAIGHT PROTOTYPE - REVISION 16 - 06-18-08 Sm2 STOREFRONT SEE ARCH. I � 2-#5 CONT. W N L2x2xY4 CONT.(DISCONTIN000S AT ADD #5 ® 48" OC. a w SLOPE TRANSITION (SEE 2/S-1)) W1.3 1'r %"O C C" HD STUDS `;^^ i I N Finn �E #4@ 18" O.C. N N #6 0 48rr VERT REINF W/ I i STOREFRONT _ DOWELS FROM FTG TO MATCH ! ® Y2" EXP. JT. MATERIAL (ALT - EXTEND DOWELS FULL Y" EXP. JT. MATERIAL it I I SEE ARCH. o HT OF STEM WALL) - -»-»-" T/EXTERIOR SLAB T/SLAB T/EXTERIOR SLAB I T/SLAB U o B SLOPE TO (SEE CIVIL) (SEE CIVIL) DRAIN O u M-N-N-N-N • w w N-« 2 � Q�� V cz wN g #4 CONT. _________ N OMor LLJ a » » « N » » N « N N p Z 0 C OMM co rr 12" CMU �UCIt=Z.t�� 8 '-�` PERIMETER INSULATION f' / SEE ARCH. 8" CMU PERIMETER INSULATION p oc oc r SEE ARCH. W Q N Cn co ci� LL SEE 5/S-3 FOR SEE 4 S-3 FOR FTG. SIZE AND REINF. FTG. SIZE AND REINF. + 1 nv of �1 • • @@_aSEECTION„ - LIFT PITS 9 SECTION„ - STOREFRONT 6 SECTION, - , „ 3 TYP FOOTING DETAILS ScALE. 3/4 - 1 -0 SCALE. 3/4 - 1 -0 SCALE. 3/4 - 1 -0 SCALE: NONE �4 q TRENCH VERT. REINF. i #6 024" O.C. 2'-6" w c, c� 8" CMU SEE S-1 FOR VERT. REINF, SEE ARCH. PIER REINFORCING PREVIOUSLY NEW SLAB GROUT ALL CELLS SEE PLAN AND10/S-4 SOLID BELOW FIN. (U.N.O.) 12" CMU SEE ARCH. POURED SLAB FLOOR Y" EXP. JT. MATERIAL 12" CMU ° "^ COORD. W/ARCH. & PLUMB. FOR GROUT ALL CELLS N SAW CUT 1/8" WIDE x�� T/EXTERIOR SLAB Y2" EXP. JT. MATERIAL DRAIN REQMT'S. SOLID BELOW 4 DEEP. FIN. Y2" EXP. JT. MATERIAL T y = $ z / STOP REINFORCEMENT (SEE CIVIL) T/SLAB FLOOR + BEFORE JOINT N 52, T/EXTERIOR SLAB ' I SLOPE SLAB AS T/EXTERIOR SLAB T/SLAB SLAB REINFORCEMENT ��L �� Z3 � W SLOPE I (SEE CIVIL) � . (SEE CIVIL) H M. °o-�(( � L 0 GROUT VOID SOLID BELOW T ~ FIN. FLOOR r' GROUT ALL CELLS CONSTRUCTION GROUT VOID PERIMETER INSULATION MIN. 4" COMPACTED JOINT SEE ARCH. SOLID BELOW FIN. — SOLID BELOW - --- CRUSHED STONE BASE (TYP.) _ _ PVC CONDUIT, COORD. • FLOOR ---- - FIN. FLOOR cr- -J 4-5 CONT W/ ELEC. AND VENDOR #--- --- --, DWG. #40 18" O.C. o 0 4-#4 CONT (2 TOP & 2 BOTTOM) MIN. 10 MIL. (4) - #5 CONT. POLYETHLYENE � COMPACTED #5 0 12" O.C, T & B VAPOR BARRIER 3" CLR (TYP.) SEE SPECS. SUBGRADE 3'-6" 3'-6" x 3'-6" 3-#5 x 3'-0" LG 3" CLR #3 36" O.C. EA WAY 10Y2" 2'-4" a 0 0 00 mj �t SECTION DUMPSTER/TIRE ENCLOSURES 8 SECTION PILASTER 0 mi 11 mi SCALE: 3/4" = V-0" SCALE: 3/4" = V-0" 5SCALE: 3/4" = V-0" SCALE: NONE °C = • IL Nd W N TRENCH 2'-6rr VERT, REINF. SEE PLAN AND10/S-4 12 CMU SEE ARCH. (U.N.O.) CMU WALL SEE PLAN AND100/SN 4 8" CMU ISSUE DATE GROUT ALL CELLS (BEYOND) (U.N.O.) SEE ARCH. 12-01-08 • SOLID BELOW FIN. Y" EXP. JT. MATERIAL FLOOR 1-#4 CONT COORD. W/ARCH. &PLUMB. FOR GROUT ALL CELLS 1 8" SAW CUT DRAIN REQMT S. SOLID T/EXTERIOR SLAB T/SLAB FLOOR BELOW FIN. Yz EXP. JT. MATERIAL Y2 EXP. JT. MATERIAL Ln �-' REV DATE (SEE CIVIL) T/EXTERIOR SLAB SLOPE SLAB AS T/EXTERIOR SLAB T/SLAB m Ln w +, «—«—»—»—« (SEE CIVIL) SLOPE � SLOPE REQ'D. FOR DRAIN (SEE CIVIL) * * II 1� --------------- PERIMETER INSULATION • —» »—«— - »—»— « N-M-«-«—N = �7 SEE ARCH. SOLID BELOW , � � -�_ �����« �� ~ �� � • FIN. FLOOR i'rJr f --� PERIMETER INSULATION 4® 18 O.C. GROUT VOID �°ry # CONSTRUCTION SOLID BELOW _.� SEE ARCH. JOINT FIN. FLOOR Ift a i � i O S t (4) - #5 CON. 10 MIL. T'S i #40 18" O.C. MIN. POLYETHLYENE 3 2-#4 CONT (2 TOP & 2 BOTTOM) 4-#5 CONT VAPOR BARRIER CLR #3 ®36" O.C. (TYP.) SEE SPECS. SEE 4/S-3 FOR " 1 _ FTG. SIZE AND REINF. 3CLR #3 TIES ® 36" O.C. r rr 8" This drawing and the design shown is the property of the architect The reproduction, 21 —$rr copying or use of this cinwina' without their wrliten consent 2'-0" frir gun ent will �hc subjectrt tu regard al action FOUNDATION SECTIONS & DETAILS SECTION PILASTER 7 SECTION ^ SECTION TYP. CONTROL JOINT Sm3 1 o SCALE: 3/4" = V-0" SCALE: 3/4" = V-0" `'�' SCALE: 3/4" = V-0" 1 SCALE: NONE �8323 8-STRAIGHT PROTOTYPE -REVISION 16 - 06-18-08 SIMPSON HGAM10 ATTACH TO CMU W/ 4 T/MASONRY ELEV. CCE7 nDf'U nulr'C i, T/MASONRY ELEV. _ I TITEN SCREWS x 4 i' —in= KA SEE ARCH DWGS '.' '• BOND BEAM REINF W/2 - #5 CONT. h T/MASONRY ELEV. � MECH. EQUIP. SUPPORT — AT TOP CHORD cj a a � a o .. P.T. BLOCKING-- i e " $.M 8 DEEP BOND BEAM ... - L3x3x% CONT. -SEE ARCH. L3x3xY4 CONT. W/5r� O SIMPSON W 2 W/1 - 5 UUNI. EPDXY SEI ANCHORS 0 2'-0" C/C VERT. REINF. INTO BOND BEAM. EMBED - 4" I �" ° m�� Q 8 DEEP BOND M SEE 10 S-4 ( ) (2) L2x2x�s � ��- W/2 - #5 C 2 VENEER -RE: ARCH DWGS , `� ;�� BUTT WELD OR SPLICE ® JOINTS. $ mw� hh 2 IF GREATER m�^ 2-#5 CONT STEEL JOIST THAN 6 h L3x3x% CONT. Y vi�°� U s 12 i 2 8" CMU �8 METAL ROOF DECK METAL ROOF DECK SEE PLAN ys 2 SEE PLAN s METAL ROOF DECK N SEE PLAN ELEV. VARIES Y c J.B.E. -SEE PLAN = � (SEE PLAN) U W M Eo J.B.E..- SEE PLAN 8" DEEP BOND BEAM JOIST O U W/2 - #5 CONT. ` SEE PLANo U JOIST VERT. REINF. SEE PLAN 0 BOND BEAM REINF. Z J z SEE 10/S-4 W/2-#5 CONT. ¢ _ ,`r N 0) � ATTACHSIMPSONTO CMUOW/ • (U.N.O.) PL. Y4"x5"x1'-0 STEP BOND BEAM W/ _ r PL. "x5"x1'-0" _j W 2 Y2"O x 4" ROOF SLOPE AS REQ'D. BRIDGING PER l w '< N cn m a: u: 4-SIMPSON Y4 X23/4 W Y4 „� x 4" a w HD (STUDS - � SJI 1 TITEN SCREWS HID (ST STUDS = o HOT DIPPED GALV L6x4x s w/ #4 VERT ~ SIMPSON %" DIA x 5" TITEN -s TYP. P.T. 2x6 w/ %" DIA. HD SCREWS 0 32" O.C. L4x4x s x 0'-6" BRIDGING LINES 6 EPDXY ANCHORS 0 VERT. REINF. c� 0 8" O.C. i SEE PLAN N WIY O SIMPSON WEDGE -ALL 24 O.C. ANCHORS (EMBED - �") + 10/S-4(U.N.O.) W/VERT. SLOTTED HOLE. 8" DEEP BOND BEAM 12 CMU W/2 - #5 CONT. RE: ARCH DWGS y a 12" CMU 2-#7 CONT � MECH. EQUIP. SUPPORT AT BOTTOM CHORD 12 9 6 3OIST SUPPORT DETAIL SCALE: N/A SCALE: 3/4 1 -0 SCALE: 3/4 - 1 -0 SCALE. N.T.S. 8 BOND BEAM REINF. OIL T/MASONRY ELEV. - - - - - - - - - HORIZ. T&B SEE PLAN - SEE ARCH. BRIDGING ` U L3x3xY4 CONT. m SIMPSON HGAM10 -- -- -- -- -- ATTACH TO CMU W/co 4-SIMPSON Y4 X2/4" DIAGONAL 'X' BRIDGING ROOF JOISTS � SEE 12/S-4 FOR JOIST TITEN SCREWS 2 BAYS BEARING ABOVE � 2 - - - - - - - - - - 2-#6 CONT. ACROSS P.T. BLOCKING 2 ALL DOOR OPENINGS • ca L4x4x% � M j. TYP. -s y g$ OUTSIDE FACE OF BUILDING = „N t�MA AL his OR OPENING, ETC. ~ �" 2 ;� SEE STEEL JOIST INSTITUTE FOR NUMBER OF ROWS OF z v o METAL ROOF DECK BRIDGING PER BAY. JOIST SUPPLIER TO PROVIDE ADDITIONAL WIm � = A c z o o .Bz=� o-H uj o SEE PLAN ROWS OF BRIDGING AS REQ'D. FOR UPLIFT. ° L z a z #4 VERT 0 f 0 8" O.C. J - EE PLAN „ i 12" CMU /8' YJOIST TYP.TYP.BOND BEAM___ ---I • W/2 - #5 CONT. SEE PLAN RE: ARCH DWGS MECH. UNIT 2-#6 CONT. ACROSS PROVIDED BY ALL DOOR OPENINGS PL. Y4"x5"x1'-0" MANUFACTURER (950 LBS. MAX. WEIGHT) MOUNTING BRACKET � SIMPSON HGAM10 PL. Y4 Yz"0 x 4" RER UNIT TYP. ATTACH TO CMU W/ HD STUDS 4-SIMPSON Y4"x2-Y4" TITEN SCREWS (2) BOND BEAM W/ ( a "'*'�L VERT. REINF. 2-#5 CONT. IN EACH p SEE PLAN SEE SJI FOR ANGLE i O C 10/S-4 (U.N.O.) SIZE REQUIREMENTS 0 0 _ � W SECTION LINTEL P. I BR TYP. BRIDGING DETAIL U j 11 $ TYP. JOIST G. 5 G G S zmaj SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" SCALE: N.T.S. SCALE: 3/4"=1'-0" _ TYP. WALL REINF. W d SEE S-1 JAMB REINFORCEMENT TYP. U.N.O.: N N z 0 J z 0 U 8" & 12" WALLS: CONTINUOU 1-VERT. BAR 0 OF WALL F EACH SIDE OF JOINT. REINFORCE BAR SIZE SHALL MATCH (TOP & BO TYP. VERT. WALL REINF. PIER OPNG. < 5'-4" WIDE: 1-VERT. BAR EA. SIDE OF OPENING S REINFORCING AT TOP OPNG. > 5'-4" WIDE: 2-VERT. BARS EA. SIDE OF OPENING OR DIAPHRAGM CHORD. BAR SIZE SHALL MATCH TYP. VERT. WALL REINF. WITH 2-#5 BARS (U.N.O.) ALL ROOF DECK SHALL BE T. ® 8" BOND BEAM) 90' HOOK, TYP. VULCRAFT 1.513-18 GAUGE, OR EQUIVALENT 2'-0" (TYP.) TOP OF WALL ISSUE DATE 3-#6 0 INTERMEDIATE SUPPORTS 12-01-08 � • CORNERS - - REV DATE Q #10 SELF TAPPING SCREWS 1:1a 4 CONNECTORS PER SPAN (7) 3/4 PUDDLE WELDS • 0 ENDS AND INTERMEDIATE SUPPORTS -Y4"O PUDDLE WELDS ® 6" O.C. AT ROOF PERIMETER 012. FFE 'Tot, U11 Ttis r "AN". Gecign showy. is the ecL The reproduclice NOTE: SEE GENERAL NOTES & SPECIFICATIONS PROVIDE MATCHING FTG. REFER TO S-0 FOR BOND DLt'VVI JlrIGL/OL.G FOR FOR Meru ns1,111 t axc a'•' hi'�r Infr amen wi b FOR JOINT REINFORCEMENT. NOTE: VERTICAL REINFORCING SHALL BE CONTINUOUS STD. 90' HOOK DOWELS FOR ALL VERT. DEPTH & REINFORCING LINTELS & BELOW OPENINGS. F S FROM TOP OF FOOTING TO 2" CLEAR OF TOP OF WALL, TYP. BARS AT LOAD -BEARING ABOVE WITH DOWELS FROM FOOTING TO MATCH. PROVIDE WALLS. & 90' HOOK IN BOND BEAM ON ALL VERT. BARS. ELEVATION OF A TYPICAL MASONRY WALL 1 O ^ `�' Sm4 1 08323 - SCALE: N.T.S. SCALE: NONE SCALE: N.T.S. 8-STRAIGHT PROTOTYPE -REVISION 16 - 06-18-08 T/MASONRY ELEV. — SEE ARCH. ci a � v Y4 � V LQ 2 M i t 0 0 8" HIGH BOND BEAM J o q 9 v� ° Y2"x1'-2"x1'-2" x 1'-8" REINF. W/2 — #5 CONT. HSS12x6 T MASONRY ELEV. •�� o � W/4 — Y2"O THREADED ANCHOR RODS 00 DRILL & ANCHOR W/SIMPSON SET —SEE ARCH. IY N qhh N EPDXY ADESIVE (EMBED = 4Y") • • h i 0 o VERT. REINF. C3x4.1 L3x3xY4 CONT. W/� � SIMPSON L3x3xY4 CONT. W/I SIMPSON EPDXY SET ANCHORS 0 2'-8" C/C SEE 10/S-4 EPDXY SET ANCHORS ® 2'-8" C/C SEE PLAN N INTO BOND BEAM. (EMBED — 4") INTO BOND BEAM. (EMBED — 4") Lin c�v Y4 BUTT WELD OR SPLICE 0 JOINTS. BUTT WELD OR SPLICE ® JOINTS. U W o 0 B-B METAL ROOF DECK 8" CMU METAL ROOF DECK SEE PLAN ~ J z SEE PLAN O+ Ln U 0 � cz ROOF JOISTS p��Z�INc PL. 'I Q�Q� MM c� ce w "_ vi —0Y2 " W/4 — "� THREADED ANCHOR RODS . • 3 uLn DRILL & ANCHOR W/SIMPSON SET 8 TYP. DEEP BOND BEAM `` 0 < `O 1' `�� W QLL EPDXY ADHESIVE (EMBED = 4Y4") REINF. W/1 — #5 CONT. his STEP BOND BEAM W/ 0 0 12" CMU%<'� ROOF SLOPE AS REQ'D. L4x4x3i� 0 0 BRIDGING PER '� � BRIDGING PER SJI SJI + �s Y2" PL. WII HOLE L4x4x%6 x 0'-6" BRIDGING LINES L4x4x5/' s x 0'-6" BRIDGING LINES 4 LOCATIONS his A W/Y"O SIMPSON WEDGE —ALL W/Y2"O� SIMPSON WEDGE —ALL RODS H(A 6)R ANCHORS (EMBED — V2") #6 ® 24" O.C. MAX. ANCHORS (EMBED — 3Y") A —A A W/VERT. SLOTTED HOLE. W/VERT. SLOTTED HOLE. R=3" 2—#5 CONT ACROSS ENTIRE 2—#5 CONT ACROSS ENTIRE J J 1 '-0" CENTER OF PLATE LENGTH OF WALL o LENGTH OF WALL o ~ rA ® . HOT DIPPED GALV L6x4xs w/ l_ MECH. L4x4x KICKER —PROVIDE 'V SIMPSON DIA x 5 TITEN UNIT KICKER IN ORTHOGINAL 1 "0 (A36) HANGER OD HD SCREWS ® 32" O.C. MECH. DIRECTION NOT SHOWN. W/%"O A325 BOLTS UNIT , (T/C = 5K) SERVICE 2—#5 CONT ACROSS ENTIRE M 2—#5 CONT ACROSS ENTIRE 2c,4 i LENGTH OF WALL LENGTH OF WALL Y4" PLYWOOD .� ` B LINTEL ELEV. 916 B LINTEL ELEV. / , _ — r� ---------------------- — — CO — 13— � 5� = 13 —4 HSS6x441s i1 B Y" PL. W/I HOLE � C6x8.2 SEE 4/S-5 FOR DRAIN TROUGH CANOPY INFO. HSS6x4�6 R = 3 VERT. REINF. ROOF DECK — SEE PLAN -s _ $ ° o W " SEE PLAN S-1 SLOPE TO DRAIN = 0 A DRAIN TROUGH - Z C6x8.2 COORD. W/ARCH. v ; ` - NVrizow" P:L.x Zp t+Cxx. --- ` HSS12x6 �++7 AL tp 00 � 0 Urvaa� HSS4x4 HSS4x4 5'-0" MAX. � HSS12x6 —� 10'-0" B.O. CANOPY B/CANOPY ELEV. -------------------- --- ---- = 10'-0" B SEE PLAN FOR I • Y4 TYP.B 16" DEEP BOND BEAM LOCATION • REINF. W/(2) — #5 CONT. NOTE: Aft MAX. SUPERIMPOSED LOADS DL = 30psf HSS TO HSS LL = 15psf TYP.0 z 0 00 L6 ALL SECDON a CANOPY W/ PILASTER ALL SECIIQN a CANOPY W/LINTEL FICTION (d) MECH. PLATFORM v 6 SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-011 oc • = d� Nd N 6 N R-%"x8"xO'-8" W/ (4)— . .�P ® �\\ 12" CMU WALL. 6"GAGE) HEADED STUDS L4x4 3�16 �,P ( y ISSUE DATE EA JOIST 3Xs sus �P' Nis 12-01-08 HSS 12x6 _ L4x4xY4 (SEE PLAN) ® 6'-0" O.C. t --- \ i a 0 Y4 REV DATE \p A[— --------------------- SPLICE PL. his \\\ \\\ \\ Y4"x3"x0'-10" \\ \ L4x4x91s \\ \\ —------------------- B/CANOPY ELEV. L4x4x91s CONT. \\\\\\ W/VERT. SLIDE CLIP L4x4x91s CONT. \\\ L4x4x94s CONT.=10'-0" \ \\ TO EACH STUD W/VERT. SLIDE CLIP I i TO EA. STUD LT. GA. CLIP L4x4x16 GA. LT. GA. CLIP L4x4x16 GA. TYP. 0 EA. STUD W/ TYP. @ EA. STUD W/ (2) — #12-24 SELF —DRILLING (2) — #12-24 SELF —DRILLING SCREWS TO ANGLE & (3) — 1/4 SCREWS TO ANGLE & (3) — 3 x 18 GA. \ STUD #10 TEK SCREWS TO EA. \ #10 TEK SCREWS TO EA. STUDS ®16 O.C. \\ �' STUD TYP. .\\\\\\ SEE ARCH. STUD TYP. \\\\\\\ we� �s 1 L \ 1 L \ 1\\\\\\ 1 \\\\\\\ \ \ \ \ %rV iJ4, �t;nd the design shown is the +• +� STUD WALL SEE vv +v +� �o��yii e C d�owi grithout their (4) — #10 TEK ARCH. FOR LOCATIONS vv+ ���' c�'�; sS"I"Aedand `1ny SCREWS v`.l� nfrIng ,F,nt w . to legal arbor,. FRA SECTIONS ' & ETAILS TERIOR PARTITION WALL SUPPORT �� _ � �� �� _ � �� 1 UBE CONNECTION AT MASONARY 08323 SM5 5 SCALE: 3/4 = 1 -0 SCALE: 3/4 — 1 -0 SCALE: N.T.S. 8-STRAIGHT PROTOTYPE -REVISION 16 - 06-18-08 — — — — --- 4 03300 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE PART1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies cast -in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mix design, placement procedures, and finishes. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for drainage fill under slabs -on -grade. 2. Division 2 Section "Cement Concrete Pavement" for concrete pavement and walks. 3. Division 3 Section "Concrete Toppings" for metallic and nonmetallic concrete floor toppings. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast -furnace slag, and silica fume. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated. B. Design Mixes: For each concrete mix. Include alternate mix designs when characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. 1. Indicate amounts of mix water to be withheld for later addition at Project site. C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Details of fabrication, bending, and placement, prepared according to ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Include material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, arrangement, and supports of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required for openings through concrete structures. D. Formwork Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of formwork. Design and engineering of formwork are Contractor's responsibility. E. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel. F. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated, based on comprehensive testing of current materials: G. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following items complies with requirements: 1. Cementitious materials and aggregates. 2. Form materials and form -release agents. 3. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories. 4. Admixtures. 5. Waterstops. 6. Curing materials. 7. Floor and slab treatments. 8. Bonding agents. 9. Adhesives. 10. Vapor retarders. 11. Epoxy joint filler. 12. Joint -filler strips. 13. Repair materials. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed concrete Work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready -mixed concrete products complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment. 1. Manufacturer must be certified according to the National Ready Mixed Concrete Association's Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities. C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. 1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program. D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, each aggregate from one source, and each admixture from the same manufacturer. E. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code --Reinforcing Steel." F. ACI Publications: Comply with the following, unless more stringent provisions are indicated: 1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete." 2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." 1. Before submitting design mixes, review concrete mix design and examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast -in -place concrete to attend, including the following: a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixes. c. Ready -mix concrete producer. d. Concrete subcontractor. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage. 1. Avoid damaging coatings on steel reinforcement. 2. Repair damaged epoxy coatings on steel reinforcement according to ASTM D 3963/D 3963M. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM -FACING MATERIALS A. Smooth -Formed Finished Concrete: Form -facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. 1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials. 2. Exterior -grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1, and as follows: a. High -density overlay, Class 1, or better. b. Medium -density overlay, Class 1, or better, mill -release agent treated and edge sealed. c. Structural 1, B-B, or better, mill oiled and edge sealed. d. B-B (Concrete Form), Class 1, or better, mill oiled and edge sealed. B. Rough -Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. C. Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass -fiber -reinforced plastic, paper, or fiber tubes that will produce surfaces with gradual or abrupt irregularities not exceeding specified formwork surface class. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation. D. Pan -Type Forms: Glass -fiber -reinforced plastic or formed steel, stiffened to resist plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation. E. Void Forms: Biodegradable paper surface, treated for moisture resistance, structurally sufficient to support weight of plastic concrete and other superimposed loads. F. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch (19 by 19 mm), minimum. G. Form -Release Agent: Commercially formulated form -release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 1. Formulate form -release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form -facing materials. H. Form Ties: Factory -fabricated, removable or snap -off metal or glass -fiber -reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal. 1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch (25 mm) to the plane of the exposed concrete surface. 2. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes not larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in diameter in concrete surface. 3. Furnish ties with integral water -barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing or waterproofing. 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed. B. Low -Alloy -Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed. C. Plain -Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, as drawn. D. Plain -Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as -drawn steel wire into flat sheets. 2.3 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES A. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete or fiber -reinforced concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete, and as follows: 1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic -protected or CRSI Class 2 stainless -steel bar supports. B. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain -steel bars, ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420). Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs. 2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. 1. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F. B. Silica Fume: ASTM C 1240, amorphous silica. C. Normal -Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, uniformly graded, and as follows: 1. Class: Moderate weathering region, but not less than 3M. 2. Nominal Maximum Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch (19 mm). 3. Combined Aggregate Gradation: Well graded from coarsest to finest with not more than 18 percent and not less than 8 percent retained on an individual sieve, except that less than 8 percent may be retained on coarsest sieve and on No. 50 (0.3-mm) sieve, and less than 8 percent may be retained on sieves finer than No. 50 (0.3 mm). D. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94. 2.5 ADMIXTURES A. General: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material and to be compatible with other admixtures and cementitious materials. Do not use admixtures containing calcium chloride. B. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. C. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A. D. High -Range, Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F. E. Water -Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type E. F. Water -Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D. G. Corrosion -Inhibiting Admixture: Commercially formulated, anodic inhibitor or mixed cathodic and anodic inhibitor; capable of forming a protective barrier and minimizing chloride reactions with steel reinforcement in concrete. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Catexol 1000CL; Axim Concrete Technologies. b. MCI 2000 or MCI 2005; Cortec Corporation. c. DCI or DCI-S; W. R. Grace & Co., Construction Products Div. d. Rheocrete 222+; Master Builders, Inc. e. FerroGard-901; Sika Corporation. 2.6 WATERSTOPS A. Flexible Rubber Waterstops: CE CRD-C 513, for embedding in concrete to prevent passage of fluids through joints. Factory fabricate corners, intersections, and directional changes. 1. Profile: Flat, dumbbell with center bulb. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Rubber Waterstops: a. Greenstreak. b. Progress Unlimited Inc. c. Westec Barrier Technologies; Div. of Western Textile Products, Inc. d. Williams Products, Inc. 2.7 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class C, of one of the following materials; or polyethylene sheet, ASTM D 4397, not less than 10 mils (0.25 mm) thick: 1. Nonwoven, polyester -reinforced, polyethylene coated sheet; 10 mils (0.25 mm) thick. B. Granular Fill: Clean mixture of crushed stone or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448, Size 57, with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (38-mm)sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve. 2.8 CURING MATERIALS A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete. B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) dry. C. Moisture -Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap -polyethylene sheet. D. Water: Potable. E. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Evaporation Retarder: a. Cimfilm; Axim Concrete Technologies. b. Finishing Aid Concentrate; Burke Group, LLC (The). c. Spray -Film; ChemMasters. d. Aquafilm; Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc. e. Sure Film; Dayton Superior Corporation. f. Eucobar; Euclid Chemical Co. g. Vapor Aid; Kaufman Products, Inc. h. Lambco Skin; Lambert Corporation. i. E-Con; L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. j. Confilm; Master Builders, Inc. k. Waterhold; Metalcrete Industries. 1. Rich Film; Richmond Screw Anchor Co. m. SikaFilm; Sika Corporation. n. Finishing Aid; Symons Corporation. o. Certi-Vex EnvioAssist; Vexcon Chemicals, Inc. 2.9 RELATED MATERIALS A. Joint -Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt -saturated cellulosic fiber. B. Epoxy Joint Filler: Two -component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a Shore A hardness of 80 per ASTM D 2240. C. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene. D. Reglets: Fabricate reglets of not less than 0.0217-inch- (0.55-mm-) thick galvanized steel sheet. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of reglet to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris. E. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot -dip galvanized steel sheet, not less than 0.0336 inch (0.85 mm) thick, with bent tab anchors. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of slots to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris. 2.10 REPAIR MATERIALS A. Repair Underlayment: Cement -based, polymer -modified, self -leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well -graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi (29 MPa) at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M. B. Repair Topping: Traffic -bearing, cement -based, polymer -modified, self -leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch (6 mm). 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well -graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as recommended by topping manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5700 psi (39 MPa) at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M. 2.11 CONCRETE MIXES A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete determined by either laboratory trial mix or field test data bases, as follows: 1. Proportion normal -weight concrete according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301. 2. Proportion lightweight structural concrete according to ACI 211.2 and ACI 301. B. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs for the laboratory trial mix basis. C. Footings and Foundation Walls: Proportion normal -weight concrete mix as follows: 1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 3000 psi (20.7 MPa). 2. Maximum Slump: 4 inches (100 mm). 3. Maximum Slump for Concrete Containing High -Range Water -Reducing Admixture: 8 inches (200 mm) after admixture is added to concrete with 2- to 4-inch (50- to 100-mm) slump. D. Slab -on -Grade: Proportion normal -weight concrete mix as follows: 1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 3000 psi (20.7 MPa). 2. Maximum Slump: 4 inches (100 mm). E. Cementitious Materials: For concrete exposed to deicers, limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement according to ACI 301 requirements. F. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows: 1. Fly Ash: 25 percent. 2. Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 25 percent. 3. Ground Granulated Blast -Furnace Slag: 50 percent. 4. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolan and Ground Granulated Blast -Furnace Slag: 50 percent portland cement minimum, with fly ash or pozzolan not exceeding 25 percent. 5. Silica Fume: 10 percent. 6. Combined Fly Ash, Pozzolans, and Silica Fume: 35 percent with fly ash or pozzolans not exceeding 25 percent and silica fume not exceeding 10 percent. 7. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolans, Ground Granulated Blast -Furnace Slag, and Silica Fume: 50 percent portland cement minimum, with fly ash or pozzolans not exceeding 25 percent and silica fume not exceeding 10 percent. G. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.50 for concrete required to have low water permeability. H. Air Content: Add air -entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having an air content of 2 to 4 percent, unless otherwise indicated. I. Do not air entrain concrete to trowel -finished interior floors slabs. Do not allow entrapped air content to exceed 3 percent. J. Limit water-soluble, chloride -ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of cement. K. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use water -reducing admixture or high -range water -reducing admixture (superplasticizer) in concrete, as required, for placement and workability. 2. Use water -reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions. 3. Use water -reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy -use industrial slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50. 2.12 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." 2.13 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready -Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94 and ASTM C 1116, and furnish batch ticket information. 1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FORMWORK A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until concrete structure can support such loads. B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117. C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as follows: 1. Class A, 1/8 inch (3 mm). D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar. E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. 1. Do not use rust -stained steel form -facing material. F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike -off templates or compacting -type screeds. G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations. H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete. I. Do not chamfer corners or edges of concrete. J. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items. K. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete. L. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. M. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form -release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement. 3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast -in -place concrete. Use Setting Drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 1. Install anchor bolts, accurately located, to elevations required. 2. Install reglets to receive top edge of foundation sheet waterproofing and to receive through -wall flashings in outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and other conditions. 3. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated. 3.3 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Vapor Retarder: Place, protect, and repair vapor -retarder sheets according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Fine -Graded Granular Material: Cover vapor retarder with fine -graded granular material, moisten, and compact with mechanical equipment to elevation tolerances of plus 0 inch (0 mm) or minus 3/4 inch (19 mm). C. Granular Fill: Cover vapor retarder with granular fill, moisten, and compact with mechanical equipment to elevation tolerances of plus 0 inch (0 mm) or minus 3/4 inch (19 mm). 1. Place and compact a 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick layer of fine -graded granular material over granular fill. 3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement. 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials. C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. 1. Shop- or field -weld reinforcement according to AWS DI A, where indicated. D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. E. Install welded wire fabric in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire. 3.5 JOINTS A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. 1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs. 2. Form from preformed galvanized steel, plastic keyway -section forms, or bulkhead forms with keys, unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1 /2 inches (3 8 mm) into concrete. s 3. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or 4�_ partially hardened concrete surfaces. C. Contraction Joints in Slabs -on -Grade: Form weakened -plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal A to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness, as follows: 1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch (3 mm). Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces. 2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond -rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks. �D8323 8-STRAIGHT PROTOTYPE - REVISION 16 - 06-18-08 It to N S2 O v M E O U o = ce d;: +"'UWOMo-a � W.J N N c cCF_QO Men a) ¢=�WZU)U) DW�� W Q N Cn m 2 LL l � N� b� ;_4 co w� O M Z^�c c N M O O M N Cl din y�Ln U L c o N UZ01 Z c c Eli = 1111 O O V)ZCL UUnidi ISSUE DATE 12-01-08 This dr:ave Ian ';e de by > the properT or th arch ,r.?. T?1;1 ?ipr. oppyln,, nr Use his o, wind, tout their VWrit?en C011st!nt IS I, hib t "and any rfnngement will be So, c`t to 'gal action Sm6 i�'f Ti - . I , t. 03300 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE (CONT') D. Hard Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first trowel finish and consolidate concrete by hand or power -driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten D. Isolation Joints in Slabs -on -Grade: After removing formwork, install joint -filler strips at until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. coverings. 1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to floor and slab surfaces exposed to 1. Extend joint -filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated. cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin film -finish coating system 2. Terminate full -width joint -filler strips not less than 1/2 inch (12 mm) or more than 1 2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, measured within 24 hours according to inch (25 mm) below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in ASTM E 1155/E 1155M for a randomly trafficked floor surface: Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants," are indicated. a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 25; and levelness, F(L) 20; with 3. Install joint -filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 17; and levelness, F(L) 15. is required, lace or clip sections together. E. Trowel and Fine -Broom Finish: Apply a partial trowel finish, stopping after second E. Dowel Joints: Install dowel sleeves and dowels or dowel bar and support assemblies at troweling, to surfaces indicated and to surfaces where ceramic or quarry the is to be joints where indicated. installed by either thickset or thin -set method. Immediately after second troweling, and 1. Use dowel sleeves or lubricate or asphalt -coat one-half of dowel length to prevent when concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom. concrete bonding to one side of joint. F. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps, and 3.6 WATERSTOPS elsewhere as indicated. A. Flexible Waterstops: Install in construction joints as indicated to form a continuous 1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming diaphragm. Install in longest lengths practicable. Support and protect exposed waterstops with fiber -bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required during progress of Work. Field -fabricate joints in waterstops according to manufacturer's final finish with Architect before application. written instructions. G. Slip -Resistive Aggregate Finish: Before final floating, apply slip -resistive aggregate finish where indicated and to concrete stair treads, platforms, and ramps. Apply 3.7 CONCRETE PLACEMENT according to manufacturer's written instructions and as follows: A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and 1. Uniformly spread 25 lb/100 sq. ft. (12 kg/10 sq. m) of dampened slip -resistive embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed. aggregate over surface in one or two applications. Tamp aggregate flush with B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement, unless surface, but do not force below surface. approved by Architect. 2. After broadcasting and tamping, apply float finish. C. Before placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 3. After curing, lightly work surface with a steel wire brush or an abrasive stone, and 301. water to expose slip -resistive aggregate. 1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high -range water -reducing admixtures to 3.10 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS mix. A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless otherwise D. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be indicated, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a specified, to blend with in -place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as specified. Deposit filling indicated or required to complete Work. concrete to avoid segregation. B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is 1. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment. Use equipment still green and by steel -troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, and procedures for consolidating concrete recommended by ACI 309R. intersections, and terminations slightly rounded. 2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and vertically at uniformly spaced locations no farther than the visible effectiveness of the foundations as shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at vibrator. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches (150 correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates of manufacturer furnishing mm) into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that machines and equipment. have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time D. Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads, landings, and associated necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and items. Cast -in inserts and accessories as shown on Drawings. Screed, tamp, and other embedded items without causing mix constituents to segregate. trowel -finish concrete surfaces. 3. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 4. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3.11 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING 5. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot 6. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold -weather protection and with 7. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open -textured recommendations in ACI 305R for hot -weather protection during curing. surface plane, free of humps or hollows, before excess moisture or bleedwater B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. in x operations. h) before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written E. Cold -Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, float finishing. or low temperatures. C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, 1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C), supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue temperature of not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) and not more than 80 deg F (27 deg curing by one or a combination of the following methods: C) at point of placement. D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces, by one or concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. a combination of the following methods: 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with chemical accelerators, unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs. the following materials: F. Hot -Weather Placement: Place concrete according to recommendations in ACI 305R and a. Water. as follows, when hot -weather conditions exist: b. Continuous water -fog spray. 1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete deg C) at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers. control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of 2. Moisture -Retaining -Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture -retaining mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends 2. Cover steel reinforcement with water -soaked burlap so steel temperature will not lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete. for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing 3. Fog -spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. period using cover material and waterproof tape. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. a. Moisture cure or use moisture -retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings. 3.8 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES b. Moisture cure or use moisture -retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to A. Rough -Formed Finish: As -cast concrete texture imparted by form -facing material with tie receive penetrating liquid floor treatments. 3. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture -retaining holes and defective areas repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer recommends for use with floor exceeding ACI 347R limits for class of surface specified. B. Smooth -Formed Finish: As -cast concrete texture imparted by form -facing material, coverings. arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defective areas. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/8 inch 3.12 JOINT FILLING (3 mm) in height. A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view or to be covered with a coating or 1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least six months. Do not fill joints until covering material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, construction traffic has permanently ceased. veneer plaster, or painting. B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave 2. Do not apply rubbed finish to smooth -formed finish. contact faces of joint clean and dry. C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed C. Install semirigid epoxy joint filler full depth in saw -cut joints and at least 2 inches (50 surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching mm) deep in formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly hardening. across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 3.9 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS A. General: Comply with recommendations in ACI 302.1R for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull -floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes. 1. Apply scratch finish to surfaces indicated and to surfaces to receive concrete floor topping or mortar setting beds for ceramic or quarry tile, portland cement terrazzo, and other bonded cementitious floor finishes. C. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power -driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill - low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, • smooth, granular texture. 1. Apply float finish to surfaces indicated, to surfaces to receive trowel finish, and to • floor and slab surfaces to be covered with fluid -applied or sheet waterproofing, built-up or membrane roofing, or sand -bed terrazzo. 3.13 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval. B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry -pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 (1.2-mm) sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing. C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spa1ls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. 1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) in any dimension in solid concrete but not less than 1 inch (25 mm) in depth. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush -coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form -tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface. 3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect. D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for fmish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template. 1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch (0.25 min) wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions. 2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. 4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch (6 mm) to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. 6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least 3/4 inch (19 mm) clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mix as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. 7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours. E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar. F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval. 3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement. Sampling and testing for quality control may include those specified in this Article. B. Testing Services: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mix exceeding 5 cu. yd. (4 cu. m), but less than 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m), plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m) or fraction thereof. a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive -strength tests for each concrete mix, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. 2. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal -weight concrete; ASTM C 173, volumetric method, for structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. 4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each composite sample. 5. Unit Weight: ASTM C 567, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. 6. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M; cast and laboratory cure one set of four standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. a. Cast and field cure one set of four standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. 7. Compressive -Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; test two laboratory -cured specimens at 7 days and two at 28 days. a. Test two field -cured specimens at 7 days and two at 28 days. b. A compressive -strength test shall be the average compressive strength from two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated. C. When strength of field -cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory -cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in -place concrete. D. Strength of each concrete mix will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive -strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive -strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa). E. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive -strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7-and 28-day tests. F. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete. G. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42 or by other methods as directed by Architect. END OF SECTION 03300 08323 8-STRAIGHT PROTOTYPE - REVISION 16 - 06-18-08 cn N 4 0 U M E J H U O U r- t 25_ ONO +"'U,,,Oc�ot o0Z���= CGf�QO MM ¢=��Z�Ln poUc°'�� 0 0 W QNtnMCLW. U �A CD ;-4 co �Ln.0 v Z � M O "C; yC ~ NM 0 �( Q W i 0 � Znfn Z(ZX UN 1 Cam. Li ISSUE DATE 12-01-08 S dra4lfir pIICi S;CiI Shown IS Che prop of tT e i chi . The reprodu�tinn. ying ' use o d without their writ icon t is pte i any infringe .nt wi e. Su _ to ega, aciion_ SP TIONS Sm7 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL PART1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Structural steel. 2. Grout. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for independent testing agency procedures and administrative requirements. 2. Division 5 Section "Steel Deck" for field installation of shear connectors. 3. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel lintels or shelf angles not attached to structural -steel frame miscellaneous steel fabrications and other metal items not defined as structural steel. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Structural Steel: Elements of structural -steel frame, as classified by AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," that support design loads. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Connections: Provide details of simple shear connections required by the Contract Documents to be selected or completed by structural -steel fabricator to withstand ASD-service loads indicated and comply with other information and restrictions indicated. 1. Select and complete connections using AISC's "Manual of Steel Construction, Allowable Stress Design" 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural -steel components. 1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. 2. Include embedment drawings. 3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. C. Welding certificates. D. Qualification Data: For Installer, fabricator, and testing agency. E. Mill Test Reports: Signed by manufacturers certifying that the following products comply with requirements: 1. Structural steel including chemical and physical properties. 2. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis. 3. Direct -tension indicators. 4. Tension -control, high -strength bolt -nut -washer assemblies. 5. Shop primers. 6. Nonshrink grout. F. Source quality -control test reports. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category I. B. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category I. C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code --Steel." D. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: 1. AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 2. AISC's "Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings" and "Supplement No. 2." 3. AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings --Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design" 4. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration. 1. Store fasteners in a protected place. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. 2. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Furnish anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STRUCTURAL -STEEL MATERIALS A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992 Grade 50. B. Channels, Angles: ASTM A 36 Grade 36. C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36, Grade 36. D. Cold -Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B, structural tubing. E. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements. 2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS A. High -Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon -steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 hardened carbon -steel washers. 1. Finish: Plain 2. Direct -Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325 (ASTM F 959M, Type 8.8) compressible -washer type. a. Finish: Plain B. Clevises Turnbuckles: ASTM A 108, Grade 1035, cold -finished carbon steel. C. Eye Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A 108, Grade 1030, cold -finished carbon steel. D. Sleeve Nuts: ASTM A 108, Grade 1018, cold -finished carbon steel. 2.3 PRIMER A. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate -free, nonasphaltic, rust -inhibiting primer. 2.4 GROUT A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage -Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory -packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings --Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design" 1. Camber structural -steel members where indicated. 2. Mark and match -mark materials for field assembly. 3. Complete structural -steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop -priming operations. B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible. 1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1. C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill,or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads. 2.6 SHOP CONNECTIONS A. High -Strength Bolts: Shop install high -strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: Bearing B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances, appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs, back gouge, and grind steel smooth. a. Grind butt welds flush. b. Grind or fill exposed fillet welds to smooth profile. Dress exposed welds. 2.7 SHOP PRIMING A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following: 1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches (50 mm). 2. Surfaces to be field welded. 3. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire -resistive materials. 4. Galvanized surfaces. 5. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. B. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. 2. Apply two coats of shop paint to inaccessible surfaces after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first. C. Painting: Apply a 1-coat, nonasphaltic primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide 7.00, "Painting System Guide 7.00: Guide for Selecting One -Coat Shop Painting Systems," to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). 2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform shop tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural -steel work is being fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections. B. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents. C. Bolted Connections: Shop -bolted connections will be inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." D. Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, shop -welded connections will be tested and inspected according to AWS D 1.1 and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: 1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. 2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. 3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. 4. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94. All joist girder gravity bearing bracket welds to columns shall be tested. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify elevations of concrete- and masonry -bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments, with steel erector present, for compliance with requirements. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction until cast -in -place concrete has attained its design compressive strength. 3.3 ERECTION A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings --Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design" B. Base Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry -bearing surfaces of bond -reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting base plates. Clean bottom surface of base plates. l . Set base plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Weld plate washers to top of base plate. 3. Snug -tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base plate before packing with grout. 4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and base plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage -resistant grouts. C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." D. Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. 2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature when structure is completed and in service. E. Splice members only where indicated. F. Remove erection bolts on welded, architecturally exposed structural steel; fill holes with plug welds; and grind smooth at exposed surfaces. G. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. 3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS A. High -Strength Bolts: Shop install high -strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: Bearing. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances, appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Comply with AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings --Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design" for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. 2. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs, back gouge, and grind steel smooth. 3. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for mill material. a. Grind butt welds flush. b. Grind or fill exposed fillet welds to smooth profile. Dress exposed welds. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field welds and high -strength bolted connections. B. Bolted Connections: Shop -bolted connections will be inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." C. Welded Connections: Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1. D. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents. 3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Touchup Painting: After installation, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime -painted joists and accessories and abutting structural steel. 1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand -tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power -tool cleaning. 2. Apply a compatible primer of same type as shop primer used on adjacent surfaces. END OF SECTION 05120 to N N Y o U M E W Z 0 O U t-os 2 ce Q �N L + a' V 0 M o�O�r: OGF-QOMM CZ U W r- r- 0 r- W � LL ISSUE DATE 12-01-08 This draw! anti �e dFAld h the property or ti��. archit. Th a� iqn, copying or use o, is d . trig t cut their aariiten consent iS p hibila and er.y Infringement will be s i ct to gal action. SPECIFICATIONS 05323 8-STRAIGHT PROTOTYPE - REVISION 16 - 06-18-08 Sm8 05210 - STEEL JOISTS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Open -web K-series steel joists. 2. KCS-type, open -web K-series steel joists. 3. Joist accessories. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for installing bearing plates in concrete. 2. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for installing bearing plates in unit masonry. 3. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for furnishing steel bearing plates. 4. Division 9 Section "Painting" for prime painting. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Special Joists: Joists requiring modification by the manufacturer to support nonuniform, unequal, or special loading conditions that invalidate SJI's "Standard Specifications Load Tables and Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders." 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide special joists and connections capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated. B. Design joists to withstand design loads with live load deflections no greater than the following: 1. Floor Joists: Vertical deflection of 1/360of the span. 2. Roof Joists: Vertical deflection of 1/240 of the span. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of joist, accessory, and product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show layout, mark, number, type, location, and spacings of joists. Include joining and anchorage details, bracing, bridging, accessories; splice and connection locations and details; and attachments to other construction. 1. Indicate locations and details of anchorage devices and bearing plates to be embedded in other construction. 2. Comprehensive engineering analysis by the qualified professional engineer responsible for its preparation. C. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel. D. Mill certificates signed by manufacturers of bolts certifying that their products comply with specified requirements. E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. F. Research/Evaluation Reports: Evidence of steel joists' compliance with building code in effect for Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing joists similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. 1. Manufacturer must be certified by SJI to manufacture joists complying with SJI standard specifications and load tables. 2. Assumes responsibility for engineering special joists to comply with performance requirements. This responsibility includes preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer. 3. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally authorized to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of joists that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. B. SJI Specifications: Comply with SJI's "Standard Specifications Load Tables and Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders" (hereafter, "Specifications"), applicable to types of joists indicated. C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code --Steel"; and AWS D1.3 "Structural Welding Code --Sheet Steel." 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle joists as recommended in SJI's "Specifications." B. Protect joists from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. 1.8 SEQUENCING A. Deliver steel bearing plates and other devices to be built into concrete and masonry construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Steel: Comply with SJI's "Specifications" for chord and web members. B. Steel Bearing Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M. C. High -Strength Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts, heavy hex carbon -steel nuts, and hardened carbon -steel washers. 1. Finish: Plain D. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards. 2.2 PRIMERS A. Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, Type I, red oxide; FS TT-P-636, red oxide; or manufacturer's standard shop primer complying with performance requirements of either of these red -oxide primers. 2.3 OPEN -WEB K-SERIES STEEL JOISTS A. Manufacture steel joists according to "Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists, K-Series," in SJI's "Specifications," with steel -angle top- and bottom -chord members, underslung ends, and parallel top chord and double pitched top chord; of joist type indicated. 1. Joist Type: K-series steel joists and KCS-type K-series steel joists. B. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for shop welding, appearance, quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. C. Provide holes in chord members for connecting and securing other construction to joists. D. Top -Chord Extensions: Extend top chords of joists with SJI's Type S top -chord extensions where indicated, complying with SJI's "Specifications." E. Extended Ends: Extend bearing ends of joists with SJI's Type R extended ends where indicated, complying with SJI's "Specifications." A. Camber joists according to SJI's "Specifications." B. Equip bearing ends of joists with manufacturer's standard beveled ends or sloped shoes if joist slope exceeds 1/4 inch per 12 inches (1:48). 2.4 JOIST ACCESSORIES A. Bridging: Provide bridging anchors and number of rows of horizontal or diagonal bridging of material, size, and type required by SJI's "Specifications" for type of joist, chord size, spacing, and span. B. Supply miscellaneous accessories, including splice plates and bolts required by joist manufacturer to complete joist installation. 2.5 CLEANING AND SHOP PAINTING A. Clean and remove loose scale, heavy rust, and other foreign materials from fabricated joists and accessories hand -tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 2 or power -tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 3. B. Apply one shop coat of primer to joists and joist accessories to be primed to provide a continuous, dry paint film not less than 1 mil (0.025 mm) thick. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine supporting substrates, embedded bearing plates, and abutting structural framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Do not install joists until supporting construction is in place and secured. B. Install joists and accessories plumb, square, and true to line; securely fasten to supporting construction according to SJI's "Specifications," joist manufacturer's written recommendations, and requirements in this Section. 1. Before installation, splice joists delivered to Project site in more than one piece. 2. Space, adjust, and align joists accurately in location before permanently fastening. 3. Install temporary bracing and erection bridging, connections, and anchors to ensure that joists are stabilized during construction. 4. Delay rigidly connecting bottom -chord extensions to columns or supports until dead loads have been applied. C. Field weld joists to supporting steel bearing plates. Coordinate welding sequence and procedure with placement of joists. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. D. Bolt joists to supporting steel framework using carbon -steel bolts, unless otherwise indicated. E. Bolt joists to supporting steel framework using high -strength structural bolts, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with RCSC's "Allowable Stress Design Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or ASTM A 490 Bolts" for high -strength structural bolt installation and tightening requirements. F. Install and connect bridging concurrently with joist erection, before construction loads are applied. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords if terminating at walls or beams. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field welds and high -strength bolted connections. B. Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1. C. Bolted connections will be visually inspected. 1. High -strength, field -bolted connections will be tested and verified according to procedures in RCSC's "Allowable Stress Design Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or ASTM A 490 Bolts." D. Correct deficiencies in Work that inspections and test reports have indicated are not in compliance with specified requirements. E. Additional testing will be performed to determine compliance of corrected Work with specified requirements. 3.4 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Touchup Painting: After installation, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime -painted joists and accessories, and abutting structural steel. 1. Clean and prepare surfaces by hand -tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 2, or power -tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 3. 2. Apply a compatible primer of the same type as the shop primer used on adjacent surfaces. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure joists and accessories are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 05210 05310 - STEEL DECK 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Steel roof deck. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for framing openings with miscellaneous steel shapes. 2. Division 9 Section "Painting" for touchup and repair painting of deck. 3. Division 9 Section "Special Coatings" for touchup and repair of special deck coatings. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of deck, accessory, and product specified. C. Shop drawings showing layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, pans, deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction. 1. For steel deck indicated to comply with certain design loadings, include structural analysis data sealed and signed by the qualified professional engineer who was responsible for its preparation. D. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of steel deck certifying that their products comply with specified requirements. E. Welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements specified under the "Quality Assurance" Article. F. Research reports or evaluation reports of the model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that evidence steel deck's compliance with the building code in effect for the Project. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed steel deck similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: To qualify for acceptance, an independent testing agency must demonstrate to Architect's satisfaction, based on evaluation of agency -submitted criteria conforming to ASTM E 699, that it has the experience and capability to satisfactorily conduct the testing indicated without delaying the Work. C. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code --Steel" and AWS D1.3 "Structural Welding Code --Sheet Steel." 1. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification. D. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide steel deck panels identical to those tested as part of an assembly for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspection agency performing testing and follow-up services, that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Fire -Resistance Ratings: As indicated by design designations listed in UL "Fire Resistance Directory," or by Warnock Hersey or another testing and inspecting agency. 2. Labeling: Identify steel deck with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. E. Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer legally authorized to practice in the jurisdiction where Project is located and experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated that have resulted in the installation of steel deck similar to this Project in material, design, and extent and that have a record of successful in-service performance. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Bowman Metal Deck Armco, Inc. 2. Consolidated Systems, Inc. 3. Epic Metals Corp. 4. United Steel Deck, Inc. 5. Vulcraft Div. of Nucor Corp. 6. Wheeling Corrugating Co., Div. of Wheeling-Pittsburgh Steel Corp. 2.2 ROOF DECK A. Steel Roof Deck: Fabricate panels without top -flange stiffening grooves conforming to SDI Publication No. 28 "Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck" and the following: 1. Deck Profile: Type WR, wide rib. 2. Profile Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). 3. Design Uncoated -Steel Thickness: 0.0295 inch (0.75 mm). 4. Span Condition: Triple span or more. 5. Side Joints: Overlapped. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide accessory materials for steel deck that comply with requirements indicated and recommendations of the steel deck manufacturer. B. Mechanical Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard, corrosion -resistant, low -velocity, powder -actuated or pneumatically driven carbon steel fasteners; or self -drilling, self -threading screws. C. Side Lap Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard, corrosion -resistant, hexagonal washer head; self -drilling, carbon steel screws, No. 10 (4.8 mm) minimum diameter. D. Rib Closure Strips: Manufacturer's standard vulcanized, closed -cell, synthetic rubber. E. Sound -Absorbing Insulation: Manufacturer's standard premolded roll or strip glass fiber or mineral fiber. F. Miscellaneous Roof Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, 0.0359-inch- (0.91-mm-) thick minimum ridge and valley plates, finish strips, and reinforcing channels, of same material as roof deck. G. Column Closures, End Closures, Z-Closures, and Cover Plates: Steel sheet, of same material and thickness as deck panels, unless otherwise indicated. H. Weld Washers: Manufacturer's standard uncoated -steel sheet weld washers, shaped to fit deck rib, 0.0598 inch (1.5 mm) thick with 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) minimum diameter prepunched hole. I. Recessed Sump Pans: Manufacturer's standard size, single piece steel sheet 0.071-inch- (1.8-mm-) thick minimum, of same material as deck panels, with 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) minimum deep level recessed pans and 3-inch- (76-mm-) wide flanges. Cut holes for drains in the field. J. Flat Receiver Pan: Manufacturer's standard size, single -piece steel sheet, 0.071-inch- (1.8-mm-) thick minimum units, of same material as deck panels. Cut holes for drains in the field. K. Steel Sheet Accessories: ASTM A 446, G 60 (ASTM A 446M, Z 180) coating class, galvanized according to ASTM A 525 (ASTM A 525M). L. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or DOD-P-21035, with dry film containing a minimum of 94 percent zinc dust by weight. M. Preset Inserts: Manufacturer's standard, UL-labeled single -piece preset inserts, fabricated from either steel sheet galvanized according to ASTM A 525, G 60 (ASTM A 525M, Z 180) coating class, or zinc sheet, with removable covers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine supporting framing and field conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of steel deck. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Locate decking bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary of SDI Publication No. 28, manufacturer's recommendations, and requirements of this Section. B. Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels when required to meet deflection limitations. C. Place deck panels on supporting framing and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting framing before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side lap interlocks. D. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting framing without warp or deflection. E. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting through or adjacent to the decking. F. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of decking, and support of other work. G. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. H. Mechanical fasteners may be used in lieu of welding to fasten deck. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to deck manufacturer's instructions. 3.4 ROOF DECK INSTALLATION A. Fasten roof deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface diameter indicated or arc seam welds with an equal perimeter, but not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) long, and as follows: 1. Weld Diameter: 3/4 inch (16 mm), nominal. 2. Weld Spacing: Space and locate welds as indicated. B. Side Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between supports, at intervals not exceeding 36 inches (9 10 mm), using one of the following methods: 1. Mechanically fasten with self -drilling No. 10- (4.8-mm-) diameter or larger carbon steel screws. C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting framing with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), with end joints as follows: 1. End Joints: Lapped 2 inches (51 mm) minimum. D. Roof Sump Pans and Sump Plates: Install over openings provided in roof decking, and weld flanges to top of deck. Space welds not more than 12 inches (305 mm) apart with at least one weld at each corner. E. Miscellaneous Roof Deck Accessories: Install ridge and valley plates, finish strips, cover plates, end closures, and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's recommendations. Weld to substrate to provide a complete deck installation. F. Flexible Closure Strips: Install flexible closure strips over partitions, walls, and where indicated. Install with adhesive according to manufacturer's instructions to ensure complete closure. G. Sound -Absorbing Insulation: Install premolded, roll or strip sound -absorbing insulation according to deck manufacturer's instructions. 3.5 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and the manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure steel decking is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 05310 L � N Y o U w M O .� Z u O U F-�o� _ �_ 0 � N L -}'`r'U OMos 0ZO�� Q 0 M M ¢=��ZLnLf, LW<N nmCLU_ C' ■ J �co w� 0 10 Z1% O OJ LU 19A !. _ OC W = Nd N ISSUE DATE 12-01-08 Property c� thr, r,Re The, u�r B a �r r sc: of s r1 a� v"'Atentcd jn#rjr}y€;!75�;?ti vu;ti �- Static ' tp FICATI SPECI 06323 8-STRAIGHT PROTOTYPE - REVISION 16 - 06-18-08 EF-3 IN CEILING WITH 12x 12" DISCHARGE UP TO ROOF CAP 18x18" EXHAUST GRILLE, 500E CFM. COORD. EXACT MOUNTING HEIGHT IN FIELD WITH OWNER, COORD. LOCATION W/ SPRINKLER HEADS. --, WASTE OIL STORAGE TANK, OIL PUMP, PIPING & STEEL PIPE VENT THRU WALL. INSTALLATION STRICTLY PER MFGR'S INSTRUCTIONS. CONDENSING UNIT ON 4" CONCRETE PAD W/ \\ CHAMFERED EDGES. PAD TO OVERLAP UNIT'S \\� FOOTPRINT BY MIN. 4" IN EACH DIRECTION. COORD. EXACT LOCATION W/ CIVIL. TYP. CU-2 REFRIGERANT LINES. SEE DETAILS FOR HANGING & WALL PENETRATION. COORD. EXACT ROUTING LOCATION WITH ARCH. 0 : rea�1 THREE-WAY SWITCH FOR EF-1 (TYP. TWO). SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY, PROVIDED BY DIV. 16; REFER TO E-1 REFRIGERANT PIPING SLEEVED THRU SECURE PIPING TO WALL & OR STRUCTURE AS EXTERIOR WALL AT 1'-0" ABOVE GRADE REQUIRED. ALIGN IN HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL IN WATER TIGHT SEALED CONDUIT PLANE, PARALLELL OR PERPENDICULAR TO PRINCIPAL BUILDING AXES. ROUTE AS STRAIGHT rj AS POSSIBLE, USE MINIMAL POSSIBLE NUMBER OF ELBOWS. SIZING & INSTALLATION PER MFGR "LONG LINES GUIDELINE" MFGR RECOMMENDED - CLEARANCE. BUT NOT LESS THAN 24" EXTERIOR WALL 4" CONCRETE PAD W/ /4S MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDED CLEARANCE BETWEEN UNITS BUT NOT LESS THAN 30" CONDENSING UNIT APPLICATION SCALE: NONE EF-2 ABV CEILING. 10x1O DISCHARGE TO ROOF CAP. 6"0 75 - - — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — J — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — I II ---- �'� �s \/ I \l I/V V I/\I �o I o\ I �0 I o I I I 100 \J----U----k —\J---- iL-1----1/ —\i, I 6» i L—— ————— —————— —— ————— — — — — —J L ——— ——————— — — — — — 126" tt` I---------------------------j r----------------� L J SAR - �— --- ___—._ 1— !�-----�— �— — ®J L- r®� —I�--_�--�-N _ I I 100 �o V `o '/\I Io�I �o Io�I V I/\I V I/\I Io�I io�I I I II\� 670-------- --- --- --- — — ------60 ---__--------- — —- - CO ? O O SF 1L SF-1 SF t SF-1 A/C-1 26x16 22x16 = 36x16 IUXIU " "'" 855 _ 855 850 CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTOR; INSTALL TITUS 30ORL SUPPLY DIFFUSER, SIZE 24x8", (TYP. 5). OA INTAKE Xi4 ON ROOF. NIELD MIN. 10� AT 48" A.F.F.; TYPICAL TWO (2). MOUNT BOTTOM OF GRILLE AT 15'-4" A.F.F. FT, FROM ANY VENT, FLUE ETC. n PROVIDE PROTECTIVE WIRE GUARD A/C-2 f t a t a a t a a a a a a : + a a a a 0 u -`----------------------------------------------------------- PUROGRAMMABLEVTRSTAT TYP . —/ t3 26x12" RETURN DUCT DOWN IN WALL TO 24x48" WALL RETURN GRILLE W/ O.B.D. HIGH INSTALL "CLASS A" DOUBLE WALL INSULATED STACK W/ S/S LINER UP THRU BELOW CEILING; BALANCE 1,60OR ROOF TO NONRESTRICTIVE "CLASS A" STACK CAP. ALL DIMENSIONS, MATERIALS, PENETRATIONS & SUPPORT STRICTLY PER MFGR WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS. WASTE OIL FIRED UNIT HEATER WOH-1: CLEAN BURN MODEL NO. CB-3500. SEE SCHEDULE ON M-2. HANG UNIT FROM STRUCTURE (836 LBS), PROVIDE W/ SPRING TYPE VIBRATION INSULATORS. LOCATE T-STAT ON WALL EXHAUST FAN EF-1 THRU WALL, UPON DETECTION OF CARBON MONOXIDE LEVEL EXCEEDING 25 PARTS PER MILLION BY ANY OF TWO (2) CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTORS, EXHAUST FAN EF-1 SHALL ENERGIZE. AFTER CONCENTRATION OF CARBON MONOXIDE DECREASES BELOW INDICATED LEVEL, FAN EF-1 SHALL REMAIN ENERGIZED FOR ADDITIONAL TEN (10) MINUTE PERIOD, AFTER WHICH FAN SHALL STOP. IN ADDITION, FAN EF-1 SHALL ALSO BE OPERATED BY THREE-WAY OVERRIDE SWITCHES INSTALLED WHERE SHOWN ON PLAN. GENERAL NOTES: A. HVAC CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY ALL CLEARANCES AND SPACES PRIOR TO EQUIPMENT FABRICATION AND/OR INSTALLATION. B. DUCTWORK, DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, GRILLES AND OTHER ITEMS OF THE AIR HANDLING SYSTEM SHALL NOT BE SUPPORTED BY THE CEILING SYSTEM. COORDINATE LOCATIONS OF SYSTEM AND ALL ACCESSORIES WITH ARCHITECTURAL, STRUCTURAL, ELECTRICAL & PLUMBING WORK. C. ALL DUCTWORK DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE CLEAR INSIDE DIMENSIONS - SIZES SHOWN ARE FOR REFERENCE, APPROPRIATE ALTERNATE SIZES ARE ACCEPTABLE. D. ALL WALL MOUNTED THERMOSTATS SHALL BE INSTALLED AT A CENTERLINE OF 48" ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR. THERMOSTATS TO BE IN TAMPER PROOF ENCLOSURE. E. ALL MECHANICAL WORK TO BE PERFORMED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE MECHANICAL CODE AND ALL APPLICABLE LOCAL CODES AND ORDINANCES HAVING JURISDICTION. F. INSTALL ALL HVAC EQUIPMENT AND DEVICES IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS & RECOMMENDATIONS. PROVIDE OUTSIDE AIR PER ASHRAE 62 (LATEST EDITION). G. PROVIDE SMOKE DETECTOR IN THE RETURN AIR PLENUM OF EACH AIR HANDLING UNIT (PRIOR TO OA INTAKE CONNECTION). DETECTOR TO BE PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY MECHANICAL CONCTRACTOR. DETECTOR TO BE SIMPLEX 120V WITH SAMPLING TUBE, N.C. CONTACTS, AND REMOTE INDICATOR. H. CONDENSATE DRAINS TO BE RUN TO PERVIOUS AREAS OR TO AN APPROVED DRY -WELL SYSTEM. 6x6/ 1 OOE 6x6/100E l � 12x10 . -- 1;/�Ilm 1600 `--a 001E L T-------- -$AC-t i1 _ 26x12 ✓JiI 2-0 'o,� 25 (2) 2424 RETURN 20x t GRILLE, 1,60OR RA ' _- 7 lox 16 16x1 a, 26x 12 J. r 12" T 325 TITUS 30ORL SUPPLY — 20x 12 DIFFUSER 12x8, 400 CFM , TYP. 7) MOUNT BOTTOM GRILLE AT 15'-4" AFF 6" 25 :F UCT TO BE ROUTED 18x10 IN JOIST SPACE (TYP) 12x10 16x12 — _- 0 F (2)12x12 RAG WITH �� 12x6 TRANSFER DUCT 8"0 150 HVAC FLOOR PLAN SCALE: 1/8"=1'-0" CENTER OF GRILLE 6'-0" OFF OF MASONARY WALL (TYP. EACH SIDE) op �re. a tU W -- ' �UW av N 0 ip � zN J �0 �N OD L O Z E aZ U to N Y p _ ELU '' O L) _ � CO _ v + U LJJ O M 0 �UQZOr rl — QO�Mm Q LU UU EZ,n,n 6, w � �- Q�x—�t1° �t0 w Q c V in ma: ti lzq 0 0 00 `o Lp ow �C U) z4t r14 U) z Uj Nef Y Q a v =5 oLL- �- 1 N M4 �� v�� v Z Cam° O 8_ NA �o � Z o =yam F =Vr v_ O � dL CL ISSUE DATE 12-01-08 and the design shown is the architect. The reproduction, this drawing without their n (('ohibited and any bb`ject to legal action. M- A I 8-STRAIGHT PROTOTYPE - REVISION 16 - 06-18-08 REFRIGERANT PIPING. INSTALLATION, SIZE, TRAP ETC. PER MFGR WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS. ROUTE LINES THROUGH STRUCTURE JOISTS �r— 4" FLEX Of CONNECT HANGER RODS — AND RETUR TO STRUCTURE AS REQ'D, SUPPLY A/C UNIT DUCT VIBRATION ISOLATORS & Jf BRACKETS / FULL SIZE RUN - OUTS (INCLUDING HOSE KIT FURNISHED WITH EQUIPMENT TO UNIT CONNECTION. EMERGENCY DRAIN PAN rnuunni ni iTCinC AID ROUTE TO JAN. SINK. PROVIDE CLEANOUTS IN ALL 90 DEG TURNS. NOTES - PROVIDE MINIMUM 30" CLEAR ON PIPING SIDE OF UNIT FOR SERVICE ACCESS. - MOTORIZED O.A. DAMPER OPERATION: DURING OCCUPIED PERIODS, DAMPER TO OPEN IF ANY OF A/C UNITS IS IN OPERATION. DURING UNOCCUPIED PERIODS, DAMPER IS TO REMAIN CLOSED. D.X. FAN COIL UNIT SCALE: NONE IECC (2006) ANALYSIS * This Design has been developed in accordance with the prescriptive and mandatory requirements of the 2006 edition of International Energy Conservation Code. * The Exterior design conditions: Climate Zone #4A as defined in Chapter 3 of 2006 IECC. * The Interior design temperatures used for heating and cooling food calculations are: Indoor temperature (heating) TH = 68 deg. F Indoor temperature (cooling) Te = 75 deg. F * Building Envelope Requirements: Opaque Assemblies Roof R = 19 Exterior Wolfs R = 13 * Building Envelope Requirements: Fenestration Max. vertical fenestration 40% of above grade walls Framing U—Foctor 0.65 Entrance Door U—Foctor 0.90 SHGC 0.40 SUPPLY DUCT UP RETURN OR EXHAUST DUCT UP SUPPLY DUCT DOWN RETURN OR EXHAUST REGISTER RETURN OR EXHAUST DUCT DOWN 45 DEGREE TEE FITTING - "SHOE" TYPE OPPOSED BLADE MANUAL BALANCING DAMPER — TYPICAL EACH BRANCH TAKE OFF OR RUNOUT. RATED WALL — SEE PLANS FOR TYPE - FIRE DAMPER — SEE PLANS FOR TYPE -FIRE DAMPER ACCESS DOOR o° SQUARE ELL WITH TURNING VANES 0o r SUPPLY AIR DIFFUSER FLEX RUNOUT ROUND SHEET METAL RUNOUT WITH EXTERNAL INSULATION BELL MOUTH FITTING W/ M.V.D. OR SPIN —IN W/M.V.D. TRANSITION FULL RADIUS ELL OR SQUARE ELL WITH TURNING VANES FULL RADIUS ELL OR SQUARE ELL TURNING VANES TYPICAL SUPPLY, RETURN OR EXHAUST DUCT SYSTEM SCALE: NONE SUSPEND EXHAUST FAN FROM STRUCTURE WITH ISOLATED HANGERS REF. SPECS, FLEX (TYP) TO EXHAUST REGISTERS REF. H.V.A.C. FLOOR PLAN FOR CONT. -� EXHAUST FAN ABOVE CEILING - SEE SCHEDULE AND SPECIFICATIONS IN -LINE EXHAUST FAN TRANSITION (TYP) EXTEND TO ROOF CAP '/ AIR fL0 SCALE: NONE HANG FROM BUILDING STRUCTURE MIN. 12" SECTION OF INSULATION UNDER HANGER FOR LIQUID LINE CEILING - REFERENCE ARCHITECTURAL DWGS. 1 /2" WIDE COPPER STRAP 1 /2" INSULATION ROUTE REFRIGERANT LINES THROUGH STRUCTURE JOISTS. NO PIPING ALLOWED BELOW BOTTOM CHORD. DETAIL FOR REFRIGERANT LINE HANGER SCALE: NONE I FAN SCHEDULE UNIT DESIGNATION EF-1 EF-2 EF-3 SF-1 TYPE WALL PROP INLINE INLINE VENT FAN SERVICE SHOP TOILETS STORAGE SHOP C.F.M. 4000 300 500 5000 MIN; EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE 0,25 0,25 0,25 --- SONES --- --- --- H.P. 1 /4 1 /8 1 /8 1 /3 VOLTAGE 120/1/60 120/1/60 120/t/60 120/1/60 ACCESSORIES DAMPER TYPE BACKDRAFT DAMPER GRAVITY BACKDRAFT DPR GRAVITY BACKDRAFT DPR --- SCREEN TYPE BIRDSCREN BIRDSCREN BIRDSCREEN --- MOTOR WITH INTERNAL OVERLOAD --- --- --- --- S.S.S. CONTROLLER NO YES YES NO j ACCESSORIES WIRE GUARD ROOF CAP ROOF CAP --- MANUFACTURER LOREN COOK LOREN COOK LOREN COOK i --- MODEL # XLW-20 GN-640 GN-640 * BY TENANT WASTE OIL HEATER SCHEDULE UNIT DESIGNATION WOH-1 TYPE WASTE OIL FIRED SERVICE SHOP FUEL , WASTE OIL MAX. FUEL CONSUMPTION 2.5 GPH VENT SIZE 8" INPUT M.B.H. 350.0 OUTPUT M.B.H. 300.0 MIN. COMBUSTION EFFICIENCY 867. BLOWER C.F.M. 3,900 E.S.P. 0.40 W.G. TOTAL UNIT AAPACITY 24.7 A EL. DATA, Vf�/Hz 230/ 1 /60 M.O.C.P. 30 A ACCESSORIES THERMOSTAT WALL MTD. OTHER UL LISTED WORK BENCH TANK MANUFACTURER CLEAN BURN MODEL # CB-3500 NOTES: * CONFIRM WITH PROJECT MANAGER WHETHER THIS HEATER IS TO BE USED. * 2.0 CFM 0 25 PSI COMPRESSED AIR REQUIRED * HANG UNIT FROM STRUCTURE (836 LB.) UNIT TO UTILIZE TWO (2) FANS, 1 /4 HP EACH A/C THERMOSTATS j FURNISH & INSTALL AUTO CHANGEOVER FULLY PROGRAMMABLE (24/7/365 HOLIDAYS/SETBACK SCHEDULING & 2—HR OVERRIDE CAPABILITIES) THERMOSTAT FOR EACH DX SPLIT SYSTEM. PROVIDE WITH LOCKING COVER OR PASSWORD PROTECTION OPTION. SET TEMPERATURES AS FOLLOWS: OCCUPIED COOLING Tco = 75 deg. F * OCCUPIED HEATING Tito = 68 deg. F * UNOCCUPIED COOLING Tau = 85 deg. F * UNOCCUPIED HEATING Tm = 55 deg. F COORDINATE FINAL LOCATIONS OF THERMOSTATS IN FIELD W/ OWNER OR ARCHITECT (MOUNT 4e A.F.F.). PROVIDE SHIELDED CABLE FOR ALL CONTROL WIRING BETWEEN T'STAT & UNIT. GENERAL MECHANICAL LEGEND i SYMBOL I DESCRIPTION 771 SUPPLY DUCTWORK RETURN DUCTWORK EXHAUST DUCTWORK SUPPLY AIR DIFFUSER N RETURN OR EXHAUST AIR REGISTER A UNDERCUT DOOR 1" S.D. SMOKE DETECTOR " 200 8"0 NECK SUPPLY AIR DIFFUSER fit► 200 C.F.M. 8x8 15OOOE 8x8" RETURN AIR REGISTER @ 150 C.F.M. 6x6" EXHAUST AIR REGISTER 0 100 C.F.M. I (D SPACE THERMOSTAT MOUNTING HEIGHT PER ADA (48" AFF) 0C SPACE T'STAT W/BLANK COVER, MTG. HT. PER ADA (48" AFF) SUPPLY DUCT THRU SLAB OR ROOF - SEE PLANS RETURN OR EXHAUST DUCT THRU SLAB OR ROOF - SEE PLANS ROUND DUCTWORK OR FLUE UP THRU ROOF OR SLAB DX SPLIT SYSTEM W/ ELECTRIC HEAT AIR HANDLING UNIT UNIT DESIGNATION A/C-1, A/C-2 TYPE HORIZONTAL APPROX. WEIGHT, LBS 216 MFGR, MODEL # (NO SUBSTITUTION) LENNOX, CB27UH-060 (NO SUBSTITUTION) ACCESSORIES FILTERS 1 " THROWAWAY FAN TOTAL C.F.M. 1950 O.A. MINIMUM 350 EXTERNAL S,P. 0.5 UNIT M.C.A./M.O.C.P. 10.0/ 15 VOLTAGE 208/ 1 /60 COOLING MODE TOT/SENS CAP, (MBH) 61.5/38.1 ENTERING AIR D.B./W.B. 80/67 HEATING MODE HEATING CAPACITY M.B.H./kW 38.6/11.3 STAGES 1 VOLTAGE 208/3/60 M.C.A./M.O.C.P. 49.0/50 CONDENSING UNIT UNIT DESIGNATION CU-1, CU-2 TYPE AIR COOLED AMBIENT AIR D.B. 95 VOLTAGE 208/3/60 COMPRESSOR R.L.A. 15.3 CONDENSER FAN F.L.A. 1.7 UNIT M.C.A./M.O.C.P, 20.8/35 E.E.R./S.E.E.R 11.50/13.00 MFGR, MODEL # (NO SUBSTITUTION) LENNOX, TSA06OS2 (NO SUBSTITUTION) * NO SUBSTITUTION EQUIPMENT WILL BE CONSIDERED. * PROVIDE INDOOR UNIT W/ SINGLE POINT POWER SOURCE CONNECTION. * PROVIDE COMPRESSOR START ASSIST CAPACITOR & RELAY, CRANKCASE HEATER, TXV HARD SHUTOFF, SOLENOID VALVE, TIME DELAY RELAY, HAIL GUARDS. * CONTACT MFGR TECHNICAL SUPPORT FOR REFRIGERANT LINE SIZES. FOLLOW "LENNOX REFRIGERANT PIPING GUIDE (Corp. 9351-L9)" INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. 8-STRAIGHT PROTOTYPE - REVISION 16 - 06-18-08 v =° WM 3 N �- �I Z > N �UW aC N Qz ` v� N to s x� i �Z its az 0 46 t_1 o v re) E 0 i 00 rn C) LU Ce z r W¢ N Cf7 ll ti O 0 w Y CO LO :44Z • N a- w NJz - LLij � � J �Q :Eo J eL a r, m M V i v Y c z Cc z o- rrov p O.� t] cn Z d ti ti d ti ISSUE DATE 12-01-08 This drawing and the design shown is the property of the architect. The reproduction, copying or use of this drawing without their written consent is prohibited and any infringement will be subject to legal action. MECHANICAL DETAILS AND SCHEDULES Mm2 Domestic Water Piping under Slob Carderlsde Drains B. Heating and Coding Systems Condersote Drains Refrigerant Suction Plong (inside) Refrigerant Suction Piping outside) Refrigerant Hot Gas FlLE)GBLE GLASS FIBER RLMKi3C IhMATIgV SDUILE: DUCTWORK Low Press,re Supply. %km and Outside Air Ductwork Flexkle Duct Canrrecfals Flees at ARU END OF SECTION SECTION 15400 - PLUMBING SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Required. B. Shop Drawings: Required. SECTION 15050 - BASIC METHODS AND MATERIALS SUBMITTALS: A Product Data: Required. B. Shop Drawings: Required. C. Project Record Documents: Required. GAGES: A. Pressure Gages: Steel or aluminum case, 3-1/2 inch diameter, one (1 %) percent mid-scole accuracy. B. Stem Type Thermometers: Red appearing mercury, lens front tube, cost aluminum case, 9 inch scale. MOTORS: A. Electric Service: Refer to Division 16. B. Motors: NEMA MG 1. C. Single Phase Motors: Permanent split capacitor. D. Three Phase Motors: NEMA MG 1 Class B high efficiency. MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION: A. Plastic Nameplates and Togs: Laminated three -layer plastic. VIBRATION ISOLATION: A. Vibration Isolators: 1. Neoprene Pod Isolators. 2. Rubber Mount or Hanger. INSTALLATION: A. Install pressure gages with pulsation dampers, needle valve. B. Install thermometers in piping systems in sockets or on flanges_ C. Install plastic nameplates with adhesive. D. Install plastic tags with corrosion resistant metal chain. E. Provide vibration isolation on motor driven equipment over 0.5 HP, plus connected piping and ductwork. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING: A. Report Forms: AABC National Standards for Total System Balance forms. B. Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 5 percent for supply systems and plus or minus 10 percent for return and exhaust systems of design. C. Air Outlets and inlets: Adjust to within plus or minus 10 percent of design. END OF SECTION SECTION 15250 - MECHANICAL INSULATION S 019ITAIS A Product Dota Required. PIPE IN31ATK)k A Gloss Fiber: R9d molded, nonoorrtiustUe Qh vapor borne jacket; V value: O24 at 75 degrees F. Monfoduers: Murmlle, K d, Owes -Coming or CertanTeed. R Cdlulor Foorrr Fletade, cedar elcstomeric, molded or sheet; V value: 0.28 at 75 degrees F. Manufacturers: Am -strong, Manville, or Iran C. 1. RC Plastic One p;eoe added type fitting corers and sheet material, off -*Re odor. 2 Car%m Jodael: UL fisted fabric. I Aluminum Joold: Sheet, smooth finish. D, CPKW INSUlA11M A Flexible Gloss Fber: Flexible, noncantustible bloriad with vapor barrier jo:W. »K» value: 024 at 75 degrees F. INSfAIJ.ATUt A Piping Insulation: 1. Roi& cold pipes with vapor barrier jod0s. Insulate oorrplete system 2 Ftouide hat pipes with standard jodrets. Beuel and sed ends of insulation at equipment, flanges, and more 3. In rrechoricd rooms or ridshed spores, poide PVC jacket and fitting Covers. B. Extemol Dudwork irs+latiorc 1. Projide cold ductwork with vapor borne jacket. Seal vapor barrier penetrotiars with vapor bonier of esive. GLASS FIBER PIPING INSU.A" S{}OJLE: A PlO g ImMiore Pipe Sze Irch Domestic Cold Wailer all sizes Do restic Hot Water on sizes Hot Water Reproaiotion an sizes Cadersote Drains all sizes CELLIIAR FOW PIPING INSULATICN Sf] EDU.E: A Plumbing Systems Pipe Sze Inch an sizes all sizes all sizes all sizes on sizes all sizes Thidwiess Inch 1/2» 1/2» 1/2a 1/2» 3/4" 2» TH100f% FINISH 1-1/2» FSK 1-1/2» FSK 1-1 f2" FSK PIPING: A. Sanitary Sewer Buried Beyond Building: Cost iron, PVC. B. Sanitary Sewer Buried and Above Grade: Cost iron, PVC. U.L. assembly must be PIovzled of PVC penetrotions of rated wills. C. Water Buried Beyond Building: Cost iron, copper tube, PVC. D. Water BuriedUnder Building: Copper tube. E. Water Above Grade: Copper tube. F. Natural Gas Buried: Steel. G. Natural Gas Above Grade: Steel. VALVES: A. GATE VALVES: 1. Screwed - Up To and Including 2 Inches: a) Manufacturers: 1. Nibco Model T134. 2. Milwaukee Model 1151. 3. Hammond Model 1B629. 4. Kitz Model 42. b) Bronze body, bronze trim, union bonnet, rising stem, hondwheel, inside screw, solid wedge disc, threaded ends. 2. Soldered - Up to and Including 2 Inches: a) Manufacturers 1. Nibco Model S-134. 2. Milwaukee Model 1169. 3. Hammond Model 18648. 4. Kitz Model 43. b) Bronze body, bronze trim, union bonnet, rising stem, hondwheel, inside screw, solid wedge disc, solder ends. B. BALL VALVES: 1. Screwed - Up To and Including 2 Inches: a) Manufacturers: 1. Nibco Model T585-70. 2. M;Iwoukee Model BA300. 3. Hammond Model 8300. 4. Kitz Model 68. b) Bronze two piece full port body, chrome plated brass boll. Teflon seats and stuffing box ring, lever handle, threaded ends. 2. Soldered - Up to and Including 2 inches: a) Manufacturers: 1. Nibco Model S-585-70. 2. Milwaukee Model BA-150. 3. Hammond Model 8311. 4. K;tz Model 69. b) Bronze two piece full port body, chrome plated brass bolt, Teflon seats and stuffing box ring, lever handle, solder ends. C. SWING CHECK VALVES: 1. Screwed - Up To and including 2 Inches: o) Manufacturers: 1. Nibco Model T413. 2. Milwaukee Model 554. 3. Hammond Model IB940. 4. Kitz Model 04. b) Bronze body, bronze trim, bronze rotating swing check with composite disc, threaded ends. 2. Soldered - Up to and Including 2 Inches: a) Manufacturers: 1. Nibco Model S413. 2. Milwaukee Model 1509. 3. Hammond Model I8-912. 4. Kitz Model 14. b) Bronze body, bronze trim, bronze rotating swing check with composite disc, solder ends. D. PLUG VALVES: 1. Manufacturers: a) DeZurik Permoseol. b) Other manufacturers offering equivalent products will be considered. 2. Up to and including 2 inches: Carbon steel body stainless steel plug, non - lubricated, Teflon packing, Teflon seats, screwed ends. 3. Over 2 inches: Carbon steel body, stainless steel plug, Teflon packing, Teflon seat, non-lubricoted, flanged ends. E. WATER PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES: 1. Manufacturers: a) Wotts. b Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. 1. Mueller. 2. Wilkins. 2. Up to 2 Inches: Bronze body, stainless steel and thermoplastic internal ports, fabric reinforced diaphragm, strainer, threaded and single union 3. Over 2 Inches: Cost iron body, bronze fitted, elostomeric diaphragm, Thickness stainless steel seat and seat disc, flanged. Inch F. STRAINERS: 1» 1. Manufacturers: 1» a) Watts. 1/2" b Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivolent products. 1. Mueller. 2. Size 2 inch and Under: Screwed brass or iron body for 175 psig working pressure, Y pattern with?inch stainless steel perforated screen. SPECIALTIES: G. Oil Interceptors: Fiberglass reinforced plastic, rated 90 gal/min flow and 54 gol oil capacity. See detail on P-3. H. Cleonouts: Lacquered cast iron, two piece body with round scoriated cover in service areas and round cover, depressed to accept floor finish in finished floor areas. Manufacturers: J.R. Smith, Josom, Wade, or Jonespec. 1. Bockflow Preventers: 1, Reduced Pressure Bockflow Preventers: ASSE 1013; bronze body; assembled with two gate valves, strainer, and four test cocks. Manufacturers: Watts Model 909, Febco, Wilkens, or Hersey. J. Water Hammer Arresters: To PDI WH-201, prechorged. PLUMBING FIXTURES - See Fixture Schedule. EQUIPMENT: A. Electric Water Heaters: 1. Foctory-ossembled and wired, electric, vertical storage type. 2. Welded steel ASME labeled pressure vessel, gloss lined, with automatic immersion water thermostat, flanged or screw -in nichrome elements. INSTALLATION: A. Provide dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals. B. Install water hommer arresters complete with accessible isolation valve. C. Install each fixture with chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies with screwdriver stops, reducers, and escutcheons. D. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. E. Install ball valves for shut-off and to isolote equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers. F. install boll valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services. END OF SECTION SECTION 15600 - FURNACES & AIR HANDLING UNITS SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Required. B. Shop Drawings: Required. WARRANTY: A. Special Warranty for refrigeration compressors: 5 years. FORCED AIR FURNACES: A. Manufacturers: 1. Carrier. 2. Lennox. 3. Trone. B. Units: Self-contained, packaged, factory assembled, high efficiency, condensing type, pre -wired unit consisting of cabinet, supply ion, controls, air filter, and accessories; wired for single power connection with control transformer, 1. Air Flow Configuration: Horizontal, 2. Heating: Electric. 3. Electric Refrigeration: Refrigeront cooling coil and outdoor package containing compressor, condenser coil and condenser fon. 4. Accessories: Concentric roof termination kit. C. Furnace Refrigeration Package: 1. Evaporator Coil. 2. Air Cooled Condenser: Coil with direct drive propeller fan, galvanized fon guard and compressor. D. Electric solid stote microcomputer based room thermostat with remote sensor. FUEL FIRED UNIT HEATERS: A Units: Self-contained, packaged, factory assembled, pre -wired unit consisting of cabinet, propeller supply fon, heat exchanger, burner with electronic pilot ignition, controls, and accessories. 1. Heating: Natural gas fired. 2. Discharge Louvers: Adjustable horizontal louvers. 3. Downturn Nozzle: 30 degree. B. Gas F'ured Unit: 1. Heat Exchanger: Aluminized welded construction. 2. Burner: Atmospheric type with electronic pilot ignition, and combustion air blower. C. Operating Controls: Room thermostat with manual switch for continuous fan operation. FUEL FIRED PACKAGED AIR UNITS: A. Units: Self-contained, packaged, factory assembled, pre -wired unit consisting of cabinet and centrifugal supply fon assembly, and duct furnaces each consisting of heat exchanger and burner, for natural gas firing. B. Filter: One inch thick gloss fiber throw-owoy type. C. Mixing Dampers: Outside and return dampers with domper operator and control package to automatically vory outside air quantity. Outside air domper sholt fall to closed position. INSTALLATION: A. Pipe drain from cooling coils to nearest floor droin, B. Mount air cooled condenser -compressor package on vibration isolators. END OF SECTION SECTION 15650 - DX REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Required. B. Shop Drawings: Required. C. Project record Documents: Required. PIPING AND REFRIGERANT SPECIALTIES: A Copper Tubing: Type ACR hard drown, silver brazed. B. Copper Tubing to 7/8 inch (22 mm) OD: Type K, annealed, flared joints. C. Refrigerant: R-22. D. Refrigeront Specialties: 1. Moisture and Liquid Indicators. 2. Straight tine Type Strainers. 3. Straight Through Type Check Valves. 4. Permanent Straight Through Type Filter Driers. 5. Solenoid Valves. 6. Expansion Valves. 7. Flexible Connectors. HERMETIC COMPRESSORS: A. Scroll Compressors: Direct Drive, hermetic, 3600 RPM, fixed compression, scroll motor -compressor with control panel, centrifugal oil pump, sump oil heater, oil level sight gloss, oil charging valve, check valve on scroll discharge port. CONDENSING UNITS: A. Units: Self-contained, packaged, factory assembled and prewired units for outdoor use consisting of cabinet, compressors, condensing coil and funs, integral sub -cooling coil, controls, and liquid receiver. INSTALLATION: A Install units on with rubber in shear isolators. B. Pressure test system with dry nitrogen. Perform final tests using electronic leak detector. Test to no leakage. APPLICATION: A Provide fine size liquid indicators in main liquid lime leaving condenser, or if receiver is provided, in liquid line leaving receiver. B. Provide line size strainer upstream of each outomot;c valve. Where multiple expansion valves with integral strainers ore used install single main liquid line strainer. C. On steel piping systems, provide strainer in suction line. D. Provide shut-off valve on each side of strainer. E. Utilize flexible connectors at or near compressors where piping configuration does not absorb vibration. END OF SECTION SECTION 15850 - AIR HANDLING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Required. B. Shop Drawings: Required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 AIR HANDLING UNITS A. Configuration: Fabricate with fon and coil section plus accessories. 1. Heating coil. 2. Filter section. B. Casing: Galvanized steel, welded and pointed. C. Insulation: One inch thick, neoprene coated, glass fibre. D. Drain Pons: Galvanized steel with welded corners, cross broken and pitched to droin connection, under entire unit E. Fan Section 1. Fan: Centrifugal. 2. Bose: Welded steel with motor slide roils, mounted on open spring Vibration isolators. 3. Mounting: Locate motor, drive, and belt guard on integral casing framework on exterior of casing. F. Coil Section: Enclose coils with headers and return bends within casing. G. Filters 1. Flat arrangement with 2 inch (50 mm) deep disposable panel filters. 2.2 PROPELLER FANS A. Impeller: Shaped steel or steel reinforced aluminum blade with heavy hubs, keyed and locked to shaft, directly connected to motor or provided with V belt drive. B. Frame: One piece, square steel with die formed venturi orifice, mounting flanges and supports, with baked enamel finish. C. Backdroft Damper: Gravity actuated, olum;num multiple blade construction, felt edged with nylon bearings. D. Safety Screens: One inch galvanized wire over inlet, motor, and drive. 2.3 CABINET AND CEILING EXHAUST FANS A Centrifugol Fan Unit: V belt or direct driven with galvanized steel housing, resilient mounted motor, gravity bockdroft dumper in discharge. B. Grille: Molded white plastic or aluminum with baked white enomel finish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install fans on vibration isolators. B. Install foes with resilient mountings and flexible electrical leads. Install flexible connections between ion inlet and discharge ductwork. END OF SECTION SECTION 15880 - AIR DISTRIBUTION SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Required. B. Shop Drawings: Required. FILTERS: A. Disposable, Extended Area Panel Fitters: Pleated, reinforced cotton or glass fiber fabric; supported and bonded to welded wire grid, two inches thick, cardboard frome, 25-30 dust spot efficiency. DUCTWORK: A. Materials: 1. Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel sheet, lock -forming quality. 2. Flexible Ducts: Fabric supported by helically wound spring steel wire or flat steel bonds. B. Metal Ductwork: 1. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. 2. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of 1-1/2 times width of duct on center line or provide turning vanes. 3. increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 30 degrees divergence and 45 degrees convergence. C. Sealant: Hordcost DT5300 tape with FTA-20 adhesive or approved equal. DUCT ACCESSORIES: A. Volume Control Dampers: 1. Fabrication: SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. 2. Splitter Dampers: Some gage as duct to 24 inches size and two gages heavier for larger sizes. 3. Single Blade Dampers: Fabricate for duct sizes to 12 x 30 inch. 4. End Bearings: Provide except in round ductwork 12 inches and smaller. 5. Quadrants: Provide locking, indicating regulators on dampers. Where width exceeds 30 inches provide regulator at both ends. B. Backdroft Dampers: Fabricate mufti-blode, parallel action gravity balanced bockdroft dampers of galvanized steel or extruded aluminum, with center pivoted blades linked together. C. Flexible Duct Connections: UL listed Eire-retordont neoprene coated woven gloss fiber fabric to NFPA 90A, approximately 3 inches wide, crimped into metal edging strip, D. Duct Access Doors: 1. Fobricote in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. 2. Access doors smaller than 12 inches square may be secured with sash locks. Access doors with sheet metal screw fasteners ore not acceptable. AIR OUTLETS: A. Ceiling Diffusers: Rectangular adjustable pattern, stomped or spun, multi -core type diffuser to discharge air in 360 degree pattern, with sectorizing baffles where indicated; radial opposed blode domper and equoiiz'ing grid; baked enomel off-white finish. Manufacturers: MetolAire Modet 5800-A, Titus, Anemostot, or Tuttle & Bailey. B. Registers/Grilles: Streamlined and individually adjustable blades, one-way deflection, domper with factory white enomel finish, Manufacturers: Metowre Model CC5D, Titus, Anemostot, or Tuttle & Bailey. C. Louvers: 4 inches deep with blades on 45 degree slope, heavy channel frome, birdscreen witAnch square mesh for exhaust ond,*4rnch for intake. Manufacturers: Ruskin Model ELF375DD, Dowco, Louvers & Dampers, or Comes. 1. Material: 16 goge thick galvanized steel. 2. Finish: Factory baked enamel finish; color to be selected. 3. Installation: Interior flat flonge. D. Roof Hoods: Fabricate air inlet or exhaust hoods in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, of galvanized steel or aluminum, with removable hood; birdscreen withkinch square mesh for exhaust ondY4;nch for intake, and factory finish. INSTALLATION: A. Install and seal ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC duct construction standards. Seal ducts as specified. B. Provide bockdroft dampers on discharge of exhaust fans. C. Connect diffusers to low pressure ducts with 5 feet maximum length of flexible duct. D. Provide flexible connections immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with Eons and motorized equipment. E. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters, coils, fans, automatic dampers, at fire dampers, and elsewhere as indicated. F. Check location of air outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform with architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement. G. Provide balancing dampers on duct toke-off to diffusers, and grilles and registers. H. Point ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets motte block. Refer to Division 9. SCHEDULES A. DUCTWORK MATERIAL SCHEDULE: AIR SYSTEM MATERIAL Low Pressure Supply Steel Return and Relief Steel General Exhaust Steel Outside Air Intake Steel B. DUCTWORK PRESSURE CLASS SCHEDULE: AIR SYSTEM PRESSURE CLASS Low Pressure Supply 1 inch Return and Relief 1 inch General Exhaust 1 /2 inch Outside Air Intake 1 /2 inch END OF SECTION a yo W o2 co V) � N .,..4 W N Q c p v� ZN x Q rn �r N. a o Z CO 0 Z o y U 12. to � tJ'S N o L i= ULLJ O J o r 0 v Ln U Q W O M O Q O M M LLJZLr) LnCe 3 W Q N to m Q LL N 6f -��� _�° C 0gsT° O NM CMJ y ~ ¢ M Z o_ Q L �v Z ? C o N X Q N X UoddLL ISSUE DATE 12-01-08 the design shown is the hitect. The reproduction, drawing without their kited and any P,Gu , o legal action. MP-1 8-STRAIGHT PROTOTYPE - REVISION 16 - 06-18-08 CONTRACTOR IS REQUIRED TO VERIFY EXACT LOCATIONS OF STUBOUTS AND DIAMETERS OF PVC CONDUITS W/ OWNER AND W/ EQUIPMENT MANURACTURER PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. TYP. CONDENSATE DRAIN LINE FROM AIR COMPRESSORS TO SPILL TO GRADE. TRAP PRIMER CONNECTIONS UNDER SLAB TO THREE (3) P-6 FIXTURES SEE P-1 --, 3/4"0 DOWN IN WALL; PROVIDE SHUT OFF VALVE IN DROP (TYP) P-5 1-1/2" 1-1/2" DOMESTIC WATER ENTRANCE UNDER GRADE. SEE CIVIL FOR CONTINUATION. NEW 6" FIRE SPRINKLER ENTRANCE. SEE CIVIL & RISER DETAIL INSTALL COMPRESSED AIR LINE TO WASTE OIL HEATER IN ACCORDANCE WITH MFGR'S RECOMMENDATIONS. AIR LINE SHALL HAVE EASILY ACCESSIBLE SHUT-OFF VALVE IN AIRLINE SO BURNER CAN BE SERVICED WITHOUT SHUTTING OFF SHOP AIR TO SERVICE AREA. PRESSURE REGULATOR AS REQUIRED, WATER TRAP, AND 'FIRE-O-MATIC' SAFETY VALVE AS REQUIRED BY LOCAL CODE 1 j2" DOWN TO I' COFFEE MAKER i WH-1 ` > C "�� 1-1 /4" 1 /2" TO ' — " 3/4 �� 1-1 /4" REFRIGERATOR (3/4 �l P-2 l 1/2"-/ y � P-4 � 3/4" N P-1' 1/2 t.r / P-2jt P-1 P-1LLP-2 -�-3/4" I' DOMESTIC WATER LIMES RISER P-5 J NO SCALE NOTE: AIR LOOP PIPING SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY. ALL AIR LOOP, INCLUDING HOSES, TO BE PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY TENANT P-5 1/2" 3/4" ,r P-2 — ----———————— — — — — —— ---I r-—————————————————— — — — — —— — —ill r L---- — _. — — — — — — — h �� � � � ��-----�� � � - � � - �� it �. „-� • P-1i 4"VTR L /I ! k- ----� �----V -\1 �-CA __1 r,-_jj---�-�--- � -�, I I 1 1~ ._� P-2 �--------- - - - - ------ - - - --�------------ - - - - -� t----------------------- - - - --,----------- - - - --i LJ r� P-3 ---{ L- La - ----- - i-- i I -- a— —. JL — — — LJ— — — —� J_ — k J L L T —L — —- --- ----------- -----'--------------------- --- P- - ----- J 2 ---� --t 11/4" .—.—. .—.— �--- I Y 3" PVC STUB 1-1 /2"o PVC ` UP TO LIFT STUB UP TO LIFT 1 � t i / E_s n tV 1-1 /4" AIR LINE LOCATED 2'-0" ABOVE DOOR Fp-] TRACK r— 3/4" AIR LINE PIPE DEPTH: POWER UNIT 9-1/2" 0 TWIN POST FIT BETWEEN 7" 0 SINGLE POST DOOR TRACKS CUT-OFF VALVE DISC. COUPLING BY TENANT (1) #5 BAR 0 12" O.C. EACH - UNION WAY x 8'-0" EA. LIFT. N 3/4" AIR LINE W/ INLINE 0 PRESSURE REGULATOR L3/8" AIR LINE r 1'_6" _ 1/2" DRAIN VALVE -0" -- � 1 /4" AIR LINE BY OTHERS 2" PVC BY G.C. EXTEND 1" MAX #5 BAR EA. WAY INTO TUBE. SEAL ALL JOINTS. —CLEAN PEA GRAVEL FILL BY OTHERS. LIFT TUBE BY OTHERS TYPICAL AIR LINE RISER SCALE: NONE CENTERLINE OF 3" PVC TO PUMP CENTERLINE OF 1-1/2" PVC TO PUMP / CENTERLINE OF 1-1/2" PVC TO (TYP) 1-1 /2"0 PVC STUB UP TO LIFT 2"0 PVC STUB UP TO LIFT 3/4" 1H i H n r IN AIR LOOP VI'1-1 ON MECH. TFORM 3 4" 1-1/4 10-1 � n P-5 2"0 PVC STUB TYPICAL AIR DROP FOR LIFT. UP TO PUMP SEE DETAIL THIS SHEET. 1 /2" TO REFRIGERATOR 1 /2" DOWN CENTER ON CABINET TO COFFEE MAKER ABOVE GROUND PLUMBING FLOOR PLAN SCALE: 1 /8"= I'-0" GENERAL NOTES: 1. INSTALLATION SHALL CONFORM TO THE ENERGY CONSERVATION DESIGN MANUAL STANDARDS FOR NEW NONRESIDENTIAL BLDGS. LAVATORIES FLOW SHALL BE RESTRICTED TO 0.5 G.P.M. & DEVICES THAT LIMIT TEMPERATURE TO MAX. OF 110 DEGREE F SHALL BE INSTALLED. 2. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY DEPTH, SIZE & LOCATION OF ALL EXISTING UTILITIES IN SCOPE OF WORK PRIOR TO BEGINNING CONSTRUCTION. 3. CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE INSTALLATION OF PLUMBING WORK WITH ALL OTHER TRADES SO AS TO AVOID UNNECESSARY DELAY OR INTERFERENCES. 4. ALL PLUMBING WORK AND MATERIALS SHALL BE INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE PLUMBING CODE & ALL OTHER APPLICABLE CODES. ORDINANCES AND REGULATIONS HAVING JURISDICTION. CONTRACTOR SHALL OBTAIN ALL REQUIRED APPROVALS AND PERMITS FROM REGULATING AGENCIES PRIOR TO BEGINNING WORK. 5. SOIL AND WASTE PIPE SHALL HAVE A MIN. SLOPE OF 2% U.O.N. 6. PLUMBING CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL ALL BACK -FLOW PROTECTION DEVICES AND WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS AS REQUIRED BY AGENCIES HAVING JURISDICTION. 7. PLUMBING CONTRACTOR PROVIDES: CONDENSATE DRAIN FROM HVAC UNIT TO APPROVED DRAIN POINT (SEE DRAWINGS). COLD WATER TO UNIT AND ALL FINAL CONNECTIONS SO AS TO PROVIDE A COMPLETE INSTALLATION. 8. CONTRACTOR TO OBTAIN AND PAY FOR ALL PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS AS REQUIRED BY GOVERNING AUTHORITIES FOR SCOPE OF WORK. 9. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING: ABOVE GROUND - COPPER TYPE "L". BELOW GRADE OUTSIDE OF BUILDING - TYPE "K". 10. SOIL PIPING: ABS SEWER PIPE OR PVC-DWV WITH CEMENTED COMPATIBLE FITTINGS. 11. CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING: COPPER TYPE V. 12. INSTALL SHUT-OFF VALVES ON ALL DOMESTIC WATER LINES AND BRANCHES. ALL EXPOSED LINES TO BE CHROME PLATED. 13 ALL DRAIN AND WATER PIPING SHALL BE KEPT TIGHT TO THE UNDERSIDE OF EQUIPMENT AND FIXTURES AND SECURED IN PLACE. 14. THE EQUIPMENT ROUGH -INS AS SHOWN ARE ACCURATE TO THE BEST OF THE ARCHITECT'S KNOWLEDGE. IN SOME INSTANCES THE OWNER OR SUPPLIER MAY SUBSTITUTE OR THE ITEM MAY VARY FROM WHAT IS SHOWN. THEREFORE THE CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY ALL CRITICAL DIMENSIONS WITH THE OWNER PRIOR TO BEGINNING CONSTRUCTION. 15. PROVIDE ESCUTCHEON PLATES WHERE PIPING PENETRATES WALLS AND/OR PARTITIONS. 16. ROUTE ALL OVERHEAD PIPING (WATER, VENT, REFRIGERANT ETC.) THROUGH STRUCTURE TRUSSES. NO PIPING IS ALLOWED BELOW BOTTOM CHORD OF TRUSSES. TYPICAL --t 11/4" .—.—. .—.— �--- I Y 3" PVC STUB 1-1 /2"o PVC ` UP TO LIFT STUB UP TO LIFT 1 � t i / E_s n tV 1-1 /4" AIR LINE LOCATED 2'-0" ABOVE DOOR Fp-] TRACK r— 3/4" AIR LINE PIPE DEPTH: POWER UNIT 9-1/2" 0 TWIN POST FIT BETWEEN 7" 0 SINGLE POST DOOR TRACKS CUT-OFF VALVE DISC. COUPLING BY TENANT (1) #5 BAR 0 12" O.C. EACH - UNION WAY x 8'-0" EA. LIFT. N 3/4" AIR LINE W/ INLINE 0 PRESSURE REGULATOR L3/8" AIR LINE r 1'_6" _ 1/2" DRAIN VALVE -0" -- � 1 /4" AIR LINE BY OTHERS 2" PVC BY G.C. EXTEND 1" MAX #5 BAR EA. WAY INTO TUBE. SEAL ALL JOINTS. —CLEAN PEA GRAVEL FILL BY OTHERS. LIFT TUBE BY OTHERS TYPICAL AIR LINE RISER SCALE: NONE CENTERLINE OF 3" PVC TO PUMP CENTERLINE OF 1-1/2" PVC TO PUMP / CENTERLINE OF 1-1/2" PVC TO (TYP) 1-1 /2"0 PVC STUB UP TO LIFT 2"0 PVC STUB UP TO LIFT 3/4" 1H i H n r IN AIR LOOP VI'1-1 ON MECH. TFORM 3 4" 1-1/4 10-1 � n P-5 2"0 PVC STUB TYPICAL AIR DROP FOR LIFT. UP TO PUMP SEE DETAIL THIS SHEET. 1 /2" TO REFRIGERATOR 1 /2" DOWN CENTER ON CABINET TO COFFEE MAKER ABOVE GROUND PLUMBING FLOOR PLAN SCALE: 1 /8"= I'-0" GENERAL NOTES: 1. INSTALLATION SHALL CONFORM TO THE ENERGY CONSERVATION DESIGN MANUAL STANDARDS FOR NEW NONRESIDENTIAL BLDGS. LAVATORIES FLOW SHALL BE RESTRICTED TO 0.5 G.P.M. & DEVICES THAT LIMIT TEMPERATURE TO MAX. OF 110 DEGREE F SHALL BE INSTALLED. 2. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY DEPTH, SIZE & LOCATION OF ALL EXISTING UTILITIES IN SCOPE OF WORK PRIOR TO BEGINNING CONSTRUCTION. 3. CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE INSTALLATION OF PLUMBING WORK WITH ALL OTHER TRADES SO AS TO AVOID UNNECESSARY DELAY OR INTERFERENCES. 4. ALL PLUMBING WORK AND MATERIALS SHALL BE INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE PLUMBING CODE & ALL OTHER APPLICABLE CODES. ORDINANCES AND REGULATIONS HAVING JURISDICTION. CONTRACTOR SHALL OBTAIN ALL REQUIRED APPROVALS AND PERMITS FROM REGULATING AGENCIES PRIOR TO BEGINNING WORK. 5. SOIL AND WASTE PIPE SHALL HAVE A MIN. SLOPE OF 2% U.O.N. 6. PLUMBING CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL ALL BACK -FLOW PROTECTION DEVICES AND WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS AS REQUIRED BY AGENCIES HAVING JURISDICTION. 7. PLUMBING CONTRACTOR PROVIDES: CONDENSATE DRAIN FROM HVAC UNIT TO APPROVED DRAIN POINT (SEE DRAWINGS). COLD WATER TO UNIT AND ALL FINAL CONNECTIONS SO AS TO PROVIDE A COMPLETE INSTALLATION. 8. CONTRACTOR TO OBTAIN AND PAY FOR ALL PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS AS REQUIRED BY GOVERNING AUTHORITIES FOR SCOPE OF WORK. 9. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING: ABOVE GROUND - COPPER TYPE "L". BELOW GRADE OUTSIDE OF BUILDING - TYPE "K". 10. SOIL PIPING: ABS SEWER PIPE OR PVC-DWV WITH CEMENTED COMPATIBLE FITTINGS. 11. CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING: COPPER TYPE V. 12. INSTALL SHUT-OFF VALVES ON ALL DOMESTIC WATER LINES AND BRANCHES. ALL EXPOSED LINES TO BE CHROME PLATED. 13 ALL DRAIN AND WATER PIPING SHALL BE KEPT TIGHT TO THE UNDERSIDE OF EQUIPMENT AND FIXTURES AND SECURED IN PLACE. 14. THE EQUIPMENT ROUGH -INS AS SHOWN ARE ACCURATE TO THE BEST OF THE ARCHITECT'S KNOWLEDGE. IN SOME INSTANCES THE OWNER OR SUPPLIER MAY SUBSTITUTE OR THE ITEM MAY VARY FROM WHAT IS SHOWN. THEREFORE THE CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY ALL CRITICAL DIMENSIONS WITH THE OWNER PRIOR TO BEGINNING CONSTRUCTION. 15. PROVIDE ESCUTCHEON PLATES WHERE PIPING PENETRATES WALLS AND/OR PARTITIONS. 16. ROUTE ALL OVERHEAD PIPING (WATER, VENT, REFRIGERANT ETC.) THROUGH STRUCTURE TRUSSES. NO PIPING IS ALLOWED BELOW BOTTOM CHORD OF TRUSSES. TYPICAL W W z 0 0n zW U� � N 0 . W N Cc: po z� o x�i co04 z 0 "p a` q� Ln � Y �p U Cn LU 0 O U F- ^ r Q� U S 25 :.�J r too,+ U Ce Zw o M o� �UCeO�,� a tY Q= 3 esF- Z Ln L 3 Urn—LU o 3 nw< gV)miZti ao 0 0 0 w Co Y CO z� N > w �z U_ Y Q mio 1 w "CC ('1 N n i O = yNM m r v tir E f �o vzo� Z ott = ro= > N -1 C X O ry X(nZd1f°i ten. V ISSUE DATE 12-01-08 m IM the design shown is the rhitect. The reproduction; COPS drawing without their p l!ted and any u tfdjto legal action. P-2 ,jz 8-STRAIGHT PROTOTYPE - REVISION 16 - 06-18-08 m 0 ON U) W co 0 mP_1 z > C) Cm N 00 C k ;.4 M F: 11 d 0 z 3 LO > 0 �4 --t 0 N NZ CO 0 Um 0 Z F.- z C' BUILDING WALL (REF.) ---------- AS__z� BULK FEED MAIN TO SPRINKLER SYSTEM WATER MOTOR GONG---,,-, SIZED BY HYDRAULIC CALCULATIONS RETARD CHAMBER WITH FLOW SWITCH • CHECK VALVE -40- SPARE SPRINKLER HEAD WITH BALL DRIP CABINET MTD. ON WALL. FIXTURE CONNECTION SCHEDULE WALL MOUNTED ALARM CHECK VALVE P_# DESCRIPTION C.W. (IN.) H.W. (IN.) WASTE (IN.) VENT (IN.) F.D. SIAMESE ASSEMBLY w/TRIM CONNECTION 6" BACKFLOW 2" MAIN DRAIN PREVENTION DEVICE 7r:T 9 ASSEMBLY w/TAMPER SWITCHES ON SHUT-OFF VALVES. 1/1 A 4" TO ON -SITE POST FINISHED FLOOR (REF.) TYPE F.D. SIAMESE CONN. SEE SITE UTILITY PLANS V') r14 0 L rn E LU CU, ._J z 0 L) - 00 _r_ T_ Ly= ci , r" U + U 0 — 0 LU to U 0 ,1,U 02 Z C: orz U 0.� LU 0 04 — Ce LU < r"14 to m CL: U_ P-1 WATER CLOSET-AMERICAN STANDARD MODEL #2998.012 WITH CHURCH 9500C WHITE OPEN FRONT SEAT 3/4" --- 4 2* P-2 LAVATORY-AMERICAN STANDARD MODEL #0355.012 WITH AMERICAN STANDARD MODEL #2385.403 FAUCET 1/2" 1/2" 2" 1-1/2" P-3 ELECTRIC DRINKING- FOUNTAIN OASIS MODEL #PV8ACSL SPLIT LEVEL DRINKING FOUNTAIN 1/2" 2" 1-112" P-4 SERVICE SINK-AMERICAN STANDARD MODEL #7695.008 SINK 1/2" 1/2* 2" 1-1/2" FOR CONTINUATION 2" SCH. 40 STEEL BRIDLE ROD (TYP.) PIPE SUPPORT WITH 8379.026 RIM GUARD; 8340.243 FAUCET AND F —CONCRETE THRUST BLOCK (TYP.) 6" . SEEFIRE SITELINE UTILITYSUPPLYPLANS 7798.030 P-TRAP P-5 HOSE BIBB-JAY R SMITH MODEL #55090T NON FREEZE WALL HYDRANT 1/2" --- --- --- REDUCED PRESSURE BACKFLOW PREVENTER SCHEDULE FOR CONTINUATION WET PIPE AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER ENTRANCE RISER DETAIL SCALE: NONE NOTE: PROVIDE PERMANENT TAGS/LABELS AT RISER PER NFPA 13. F8 P-6 FLOOR DRAIN - JAY R SMITH MODEL #2005Y-B FLOOR DRAIN 1/2-0 TRAP PRIMER CONNECTION --- --- 3' 2" DESIGNATION QUANTITY SERVING G.P.M. P.D. (psig) MANUFACTURER MODEL NUMBER REMARKS RPBP-1 I DOM. WATER -- 23 10 WATTS 909 OT --------- co co UJ LO C�) U') 7;-:M >_ UJ r1_J co Lu < 7�! 0 I NOTE: 21 TO SERVICE BAYS 1. ALL PIPING, FITTINGS, SUPPORTS, VALVES TO BE PROVIDED AND �2 1-1/4" INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR. AIR LINE 1-1/4" 2. VALVES -BALL TYPE 8 & K 150 WSP. AIR PRESSURE NOTE: GUAGE- BYPASS 0#-300# PSI LINE UNION VERIFY WITH OWNER IF AIR LINES ARE IN CONTRACT. VALVE FILTER TER 0— VALVE & f VALVE & UNION UNION In M >_ In M >_ UJ m W m Ilai m ft: lax UJ 0:: UJ M V) _J �i 2 __J Q� ;5 , 0 aC) V U U V NOTE: ALL PIPING TO BE RIGIDLY SUPPORTED. 1 1/4" C.W. TO BLDG. DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM LO+ AS REQUIRED PRESSURE GAUGE-----.. (TYP.) 1 1/4- REDUCED PRESSURE BACKFLOW PREVENTER FULL LINE SIZE WYE STRAINER WITH 1/2- BLOWDOWN r 4'- 6" MAX. 4'�V6 AB E ABOVE FLOOR SERVICE MAIN SHUT-OFF VALVE FINISHED FLOOR FULL SIZE DRAIN PORT CONNECTION • TERMINATE R.P.B.P. DRAIN 1-1/4*0 WATER SERVICE ABOVE FLOOR DRAIN AT SEE SITE UTILITY TWICE THE DIAMETER OF _7 PLANS FOR CONT. R.P.B.P. DRAIN PORT SIZE R.P.B.P. No. 1 CAST IRON CLEANOUT WITH 18" X 18" X 6" THICK COVER & "T" HANDLE CONCRETE PAD ASPHALT PAVING --------------------- FINISHED GRADE 0 go, 0 Q6- g6� I H I ET GRANULAR BASE EXTENSION - SAME SIZE 6" AS SEWER, UP TO LONG SWEEP 1/4" BEND OR COMB. Y & 1/8" BEND SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR MATERIAL SEE PLANS FOR SIZE FLOW Sm- ii > ',o = Z 0 20, Q_ U- 9-:1 � z a, D 0 REDUCED PRESSURE BACKFLOW PREVENTER DETAIL V3/4- SCALE: NONE NOTE: R.P.B.P. MANUFACTURER AND INSTALLATION SHALL BE AS APPROVED BY LOCAL & STATE AUTHORITIES. B 17 EXTERIOR CLEANOUT DETAIL SCALE: NONE Al CONDENSATE LINE TO EXTERIOR TYPICAL COMPRESSOR PIPING LAYOUT SCALE: NONE 141 00z .4 LL ELECTRIC WATER HEATER SCHEDULE DESIGNATION ELEMENT WATTAGE, kW EL. DATA V/I$l/Hz NO. OF ELEMENTS TEMP, RISE RECOVERY RATE, G.P.H. STORAGE CAPACITY, GAL. TANK DIA., IN TANK MIN. HEIGHT, IN ENERGY FACTOR MANUFACTURER MODEL NUMBER NOTES: BAFFLE 1. FOR GRAVITY APPLICATIONS ONLY. TITLE: PROCEPTOR F.O.G. SEPARATOR OMC 750 GALLON INTERCEPTOR ACCESSWAY 2. ALL PROCEPTOR UNITS ARE MANUFACTURED WITH FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTICS. 6" INLET & OUTLET PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND THICKNESS: 24"MANWAY ALL DIMENSIONS IN INCHES POLYESTER RESIN AND E GLASS MINIMUM THICKNESS 1/4- WALL AND 3/8- TOP AND BOTTOM BOWLS. TOTAL WET VOLUME: 750 GAL MAX. OIL CAPACITY: 410 GAL MINIMUM BURIAL DEPTH = 24 FOR NON TRAFFIC RATED MAX. SOLIDS CAPACITY: 200 GAL MINIMUM BURIAL DEPTH = 36" FOR TRAFFIC RATED PEAK FLOW RATE, LESS MAXIMUM BURIAL DEPTH = 7 FEET (GRADE TO INVERT OF INLET) THAN 10 MG/L FOR OIL 33 GPM INLET OO OUTLET MINIMUM ULTIMATE TENSILE STRENGTH , 12,000 PSI MINIMUM FLEXURAL STRENGTH, 19,000 PSI p Q� N lu IN WH-1 1.5 120/1/60 1 50 12.0 20 18 24 0.94 LOCHINAR JRCO20E THERMOMETER 3/4" VACUUM RELIEF VALVE OR DIP TUBE CONNECTION HOT WATER TO SYSTEM CHECK VALVE (TYP) MTD IN HORIZONTAL POSITION BALL VALVE (TYP.) M COLD WATER TO HEATER DIELECTRIC UNION (TYPICAL) A.S.M.E. TEMPERATURE & PRESSURE A RELIEF VALVE GALVANIZED NIPPLE (TYPICAL) \—ASTM MINIMUM FLEXURAL MODULUS, 800,000 PSI FOR DEEPER INSTALLATIONS CALL GREEN TURTLE FOR CUSTOM REINFORCEMENT 3"0 VENT 3. ALL PROCEPTOR UNITS ARE TO BE INSTALLED IN STRICT ACCORDANCE WITH THE ARCHITECT OF RECORD TO VERIFY PORTS (2) WITH NATIONAL ACCOUNT VENDOR TOP VIEW MANUFACTURERS INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. HOLD DOWN BRACKET ISSUE DATE 12-01-08 EXPANSION TANK T PIPE FULL SIZE TO DRAIN PAN BUILDING WALL FRP 2- ANGLE (I OF 4 4. SEE MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION FOR H2O TRAFFIC LOADING. 5. STANDARD PIPE STUBS ARE SOCKET SDR 35 PVC SEWER MATERIAL (SCHEDULE 40 24"0 REV DATE WATER ,,—SET THERMOSTAT CONTROL ADAPTORS ADDED FOR ALL PROJECTS IN USA). SIDE VIEW FRONT VIEW HEATER FOR 106 F HOT WATER DRAIN PAN DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE 6. 6" INLET AND OUTLET ------- --- - ------ DRAIN VALVE, PIPE CONNECTION SIZE TO DRAIN PAN. 7. EXTENSION COLLAR TO BE ORDERED TO MEET FINISHED GRADE, CUT ON SITE FOR FINAL --------------------------------- 12" )1;- ADJUSTMENT AND CAULKED WITH SIKAFLEX BY CONTRACTOR. 6 "0 6"0 WATER HEATER LOCATED ON 1" TRAPPED PIPE FROM DRAIN MECHANICAL PLATFORM. COORD. z .&— EXACT LOCATION WITH ARCH. I TO SERVICE SINK DRAWINGS. ADJUST FOR 105' F HOT WATER TEMPERATURE WATER HEATER No. 1 ELECTRIC WATER HEATER DETAIL 8. COVERS AVAILABLE FOR H2O TRAFFIC LOADING, PEDESTRIAN LOADING OR ABOVE GROUND INSTALLATION. 9. ALL PROCEPTOR UNITS ARE FACTORY TESTED. elf 45" 10. 30 YEAR WARRANTY AGAINST LEAKS, AND STRUCTURAL FAILURE. L 43" LL 11. U.S. PATENT #5.746,912; CDN PATENT #2,195,822 is drawing and the design shown is the rty of the architect. The reproduction, o or use of this drawing without their to sent is prohibited and any SCALE: NONE -------------------------- OIL INTERCEPTOR 62" 96" SCALE: NONE E 5 in m ill be subject to legal action. ING AND DULES _H2 P�3 8-STRAIGHT PROTOTYPE - REVISION 16 - 06-18-08 *NOTEi THIS DOCUMENT CERTIFIES THAT THE BUILDING MATERIALS SPECIFIED IN THE PLANNING COMMISSION APPROVAL OF THIS PROJECT (BPC0803-001) ARE LIKEWISE PROVIDED FOR IN THE PLANS SUBMITTED, ANY DEVIATION FROM THE APPROVED BUILDING MATERIALS WILL NEGATE ANY STAFF APPROVAL OF SAID PLANS, PROPOSED CHANGES TO PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS WILL BE SUBMITTED TO THE PLANNING COMMISSION FOR FURTHER CONSIDERATION. FIRE SPRINKLER SPECIFICATION FIRE SPRINKLER SPECIFICATION FIRE SPRINKLER SPECIFICATION 10 15 SECTION 15300 - FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 2.05 WATERFLOW SWITCH _J 0 PART I - GENERAL A. All work shall meet the requirements of Section 1.03. A. Vane Type: Shall be mounted in accordance with its listing and the 0 LU manufacturer's instructions; designed to signal any flow of water that equals or 1.01 SUMMARY B. The fire sprinkler contractor shall not pursue any approvals or interpretations of CCI's exceeds 10 gpm; detector switch mechanism shall incorporate an instantly Construction Documents except through CC]. recycling pneumatic retard element with an adjustable range of 0 to 60 seconds; A. Related Documents: Conditions of the Contract, Division 1 - General two single pole, double throw switches shall be provided suitable for operation on C, E. Requirements and Drawings apply to the Work of this Section. C. Sprinkler piping shall not be concealed where it is inaccessible unless it is first 24-volt D.C. or 11 0-volt A.C.; dust tight construction; tamper resistant screws on inspected and accepted by a representative of the authority having jurisdiction. enclosure; corrosion resistant components within waterway. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK D. Any work performed prior to the satisfactory review by CCI and approval by the 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Guardian, Potter Electric, Starfire, Systemmom A. Provide all required labor, materials, equipment, testing and services necessary authority having jurisdiction and the insurance underwriter, will be solely at the fire Sensor or approved equal. for a complete and operational fire protection system for the Tire Kingdom space sprinkler contractor's risk. as hereinafter described and as shown on the engineering drawings. B. The detector shall be furnished and installed by the fire sprinkler contractor and cn Cn E. The system will not be acceptable until final testing and receipt of the Contractor's wired complete by the fire alarm/electrical contractor. B. Work shall begin at 8 in and 4 in blind flange approximately I ft. above the Material and Test Certificate has been obtained. S�7 CDcll� finished floor and shall include the following: 2.06 SUPERVISORY SWITCH _J LLJ 0 1.07 SUBMITTALS o0 00 1. Wet pipe fire sprinkler system for NTB space. A. Switches shall be mounted so as not to interfere with the normal operation of the 1', 0 U� E5 0) A. The engineering drawings have been prepared using AUTOCAD. The engineering valve; adjust to operate within two revolutions of the valve control or when the + LLJ [::� C) U 2. Coordination of work and schedules with other trades. drawing IS 100% CAD. The hydraulic calculations have been prepared using HASS. stem has moved no more than one -fifth of the distance from its normal position; Z 0 cf) LLJ 0 r- C These documents will be made available to the successful fire sprinkler contractor in two single pole, double throw switches shall be provided suitable for operation on 0 C�l I_ < 3: rq 0 Er- Q� C. Site Work - None. either electronic form or hard copy. Utilization of these documents for the 24-volt D.C. or 11 0-volt A.C.; dust tight construction; tamper resistant screws on < LLJ Ln Lc� development of shop drawings and submittals does not relieve the fire sprinkler enclosure. � U 0-) LLJ ,::, oo� - 0�- co co D. Interior Work - Provide the Following: contractor from any of his responsibilities required herein. L'i < N Cn M 0- LL- 1 . Acceptable Manufacturers: Guardian, Potter Electric, Starfire, System 1. Pressure gauge. B. Submit the following: Sensor or approved equal. 2. Flow switch. 1. Two (2) reproducibles of each shop drawing. Submittal must be B. The supervisory switch shall be furnished and installed by the fire sprinkler comprehensive of entire project, complete in all detail and the same scale contractor and wired complete by the fire alarm/electrical contractor. 3. Overhead pipe, fittings, hangers and sprinklers. as the engineering drawings. 2.07 SPRINKLERS + 4. Inspectors test connection, main drain and auxiliary drains. 2. Five (5) sets of hydraulic calculations. Calculations shall include peaking information. A. Types: 5. Engineered Corrosion Solutions (ECS) Inspector Corrosion Monitoring Station. 3. Five (5) sets of the manufacturer's literature on all system equipment. 1. ESFR-25 pendent - Glass bulb ESFR pendent sprinkler. Literature shall clearly identify exactly what components are being U) U) E. It is intended that the engineering drawings and specification shall describe and provided which shall include: finish, size, type, options, etc. Literature 2. Chrome Recessed - Glass Bulb Quick Response Recessed Sprinkler with 0 F_ X :2-- < provide for a working installation complete in every detail and all items necessary which is not clearly identified will be rejected. polished chrome recessed escutcheon. LU 0- M W for such complete installation shall be provided whether or not specifically Z Lu2 U) 0 :Z mentioned herein or shown on the engineering drawing. 4. Two (2) samples of each type of fire sprinkler. All submitted 3. Brass Upright - Glass Bulb Standard Response Upright Sprinkler. < < escutcheons/coverplates shall have a label/stamp which identifies 5 0 1.03 REFERENCES manufacturer and model number. 4. Brass Pendent - Glass Bulb Standard Response Pendent Sprinkler. L, U) LL_ Z - < 0 0 Cf) of LU m F- W 0- 0 n- 0 A. All work shall be installed in accordance with all applicable codes and referenced C. CCI will review this submittal for consistency with CCI's Construction Documents. 5. Brass Horizontal Sidewall - Glass Bulb Standard Response Horizontal U) __J U) UJ u- CD Cf) W design standards: Sidewall Sprinkler. LU W UJ Z 0 L. cl- 'j IR D. After the satisfactory review by CCI, provide submittals to the authority having 0X CL 0 LU 1. Florida Building Code - 2004 Edition jurisdiction and the insurance underwriter for approval. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Globe, Reliable, Tyco, VictauliG and Viking. >_ 1JJ _J W 0 Uj LLJ Z Cn C.,J be 5 I W W21- 2. NFPA 13, Sprinkler Systems - 2007 Edition E. The fires contractor shall be responsible for responding, in writing, to any C. Only sprinklers manufactured after January 1, 2007 will be accepted for use. C) Ji < < 0 0 0 ui UJ 0 Of -A LL, W en U_ LJ_ comments from the authority having jurisdiction or the insurance underwriter within 0,- UJ _J _J >< 0 U) 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ten (10) working days after the receipt of their comments. Copies of the response D. Only sprinklers manufactured utilizing Belleville spring seals will be acceptable for LL- LU < LL_ F_ ZD = < 0 [if shall be sent to the General Contractor and CCI. use. Li- C) - 0 LU > A A. FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM DESIGN CRITERIA SHALL BE STRICTLY PER 11J 0 t= < Of 0 THIS SPECIFICATION. 1.08 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS E. Provide at the riser manifold one (1) six (6) head spare sprinkler cabinets stocked < LU m U� = UJ 0 Of with sprinklers and escutcheon assemblies proportionate to those provided in the _J < Ill- 2� 1,- :Z < B. Fire sprinkler system to provide fire protection for the Tire Kingdom. A. Provide record documents in accordance with requirements of the General building and all necessary sprinkler wrenches. Z UJ 0 < LU W LU U) Conditions of the Contract. LI- LU cn or LU 0 il Elf LU C. interface fire sprinkler system with building fire and smoke alarm systems. 2.08 SIGNS 1.09 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA co if) Co (o no 1 Ln (o D. Mechanics Bays/Sales Areas (Ordinary Hazard wet pipe fire sprinkler system): A. ANCo pproved enameled metal signs shall be securely attached at main drain, 0 Co N Co . Density - 0.20 gpm/sq. ft. A. Provide operating and maintenance instructions to the Owner in accordance with requirements of the General Conditions of the Contract. auxiliary drains, inspectors test connection and control valves. i c, 0 0 !E Z-0 L" �6 B. Provide a permanently attached placard indicating hydraulic design criteria placed . Operating Area - 1,500 sq. ft. 1.10 WARRANTY on riser. :;:.t 0 Z 0 _0 C, woo 73 _r_ 0 , -C IV)= a- L 0 C14 n_ CL Ll_ . Temperature Classification I Nominal K-factor I Response Type - ORD A. Repair all defective workmanship or replace all defective materials for a period of 2.09 TEST AND DRAIN CONNECTIONS HORN/STROBE @ 10'--0" PROPoAb'8,, O'G. VARIES SR & QR (QR in light hazard areas) one year from the date of acceptance by the Owner. Workmanship or equipment EXISTINIG U.G. ABOVE GRADE (BY FIRE FIRE,SERVVICE V- PUBLIC"WATERVAIN . Hose Stream Allowance - 250 found to be defective during that period shall be replaced without cost to the Owner. A. Provide combination inspector's tesUmain drain valve with pressure relief equal to the AGF Manufacturing Co. Model 1011, 2 in. 1/2 in. -ALARM-GONTRAC 4M CT gprn E. Tire Storage 15 psi ESFR wet pipe fire sprinkler systems: PART 2 - PRODUCTS size with test orifice where indicated on drawings. 7� OTHERS) 8" FP1 'Ull • Minimum end head 15 2.01 PIPING B. Auxiliary drains consisting of plugs, or globe valves and plugs where capacity of F pressure psi A. Underground Piping: None. trapped pipe section exceeds 5 gallons, shall be provided to drain all points in the system that cannot be drained back to main riser. - ----- t . 8� • Minimum number of sprinklers calculated - Twelve (12) hydraulically most 23'-,T' remote sprinklers, four (4) per branch line. B. Overhead Pipe: Per local requirements and NFPA 13. All pipe shall have a 2.10 INSPECTOR'S TEST CONNECTION Temperature Classification Nominal K Sprinkler Type ORD 25.2 Corrosion Resistance Ratio [CRR] equal to or greater than 1.00. Refer to the current PR OPOSEO t-D DOUBLE -factor - UL Fire Protection Equipment Directory - Steel Sprinkler Pipe for acceptable A� Provide inspector's test connection for the system as required. DETECTORCI,4`EC_K, ESFR manufacturers, sizes, and joining methods. BACKFLOW PRr:VENTERl • Hose Stream Allowance - 250 gprn C. THE ENGINEER'S HYDRAULIC CALCULATIONS ANTICIPATES THAT ALL WET 2.11 CORROSION MANAGEMENT (BY 0 NOTE. This design criteria will protect rubber tire storage, on -side or on -tread, in PIPE SYSTEM RISERS, FEED AND CROSS MAINS AND BRANCH LINES SHALL HAVE HYDRAULIC CHARACTERISTICS EQUAL TO OR GREATER THAN A. Engineered Corrosion Solutions (ECS) - Inspector Corrosion Monitoring Station: PROPOSED 4-11.G.--FIRE- SERVICE MAIN TO To palletized portable racks or fixed racks without solid shelves up to 25 ft. in up to 30 ft building per the 2007 edition of NFPA 13, table 18.4(d). SCHEDULE 10 PIPE. 1. Furnish and install Inspector, 175 psi rated working pressure. Install per G IRE E FREE-STANDING FIRE DE RT*-,NT CON NECTION �N CTION, Z 2.02 JOINING OF PIPE AND FITTINGS manufacturer's instructions. The fire sprinkler contractor shall install the 411 0 0 • F. SPRINKLER SPACING SHALL BE AS SHOWN ON THE ENGINEERING DRAWINGS. A. All pipe shall be joined in accordance with NFPA 13 and manufacturers supplied test coupons in the coupon rack. -7 M J LL recommendations. 2. The fire sprinkler contractor shall leave the isolation valve in the open -PRQPPSEDv 'STORZ 0 U) 1. Acoustical Tile - Locate sprinklers in accordance with the engineering drawings. Not more than a 3 in. radius tolerance about the point B. Fittings shall be 175 psi screwed or flanged black cast iron or approved equal such position after the installation of the test coupons and corrosion monitoring probe. FREE-STANDING FIRE DEPA,RTMENT J identified by dimension will be accepted. Where rows of sprinklers are provided within the same ceiling plane, any part of the tolerance used for one sprinkler shall be the same for all others in that same row. as mechanical, grooved, plain end or welded connections. Where GROOVED FITTINGS AND COUPLINGS are used together they shall be of the same manufacturer. 3. The Inspector shall be purchased from Engineered Corrosion Solutions,-- Craigshire Plaza Building, 1850 Craigshire Road, Suite 302, St. Louis, CONNECTION (BY *0* OTHERS�__ - _ MO 63146. The contact person is Tim Davis (Phone No. 314-432-1377). 2. Hard Ceilings - Locate sprinklers in accordance with the engineering C. BUSHINGS SHALL NOT BE USED. N L drawings. Sprinklers shall be in line with light fixtures and other sprinklers where indicated on the drawings. Coordinate closely with the electrical 2.03 HANGERS AND SLEEVES PART 3 - EXECUTION N contractor. 3.01 COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES PROPOSED FIRE A. Sleeves shall be set for all pipes passing through concrete floors, foundations and ? HYDRANT W/ CURB 3. Unfinished Areas - Locate sprinklers as shown on the engineering masonry walls. A. Coordinate closely with all other trades to expedite construction and avoid F % BOX KEY VALVE (BY drawing. interference. OTHERS) B. Provide primed escutcheon plates at all wall penetrations where the hole would G. A waterflow test conducted on September 26, 2008 near the site indicates that otherwise be exposed to view. 3.02 PAINTING AND PATCHING the coordinates of 47 psi static, 38 psi residual, while flowing 1,520 gpm would ISSUE DATE best describe the public water supply to the site. The effective point of this flow C. All hangers to be of approved materials and spaced in accordance with NFPA 13 A. Painting of sprinkler piping is not included in this contract. Z 12 -01-08 • test shall be considered to be at the connection to the existing public main at an and the piping manufacturer's specifications. approximate elevation equal to the finished floor of the proposed Tire Kingdom. No the data its be The B. Holes in walls or floors cut during the performance of this work shall be patched if the holes be by substitution of water supply or effective point will allowed. D. The section modulus required by NFPA 13 shall be provided for all trapeze members cannot covered standard escutcheon plates so as to completely above coordinates include a 10% safety factor and shall be maintained. supporting piping. conceal the cuts where they would otherwise be exposed to view. REV DATE H. Fire department connection will be provided by others as indicated on the 2.04 VALVES C. Fire stop all penetrations of fire rated assemblies. PROJECT NORTH engineering drawing. A. Exterior Valves: None. 3.03 SYSTEM TESTS SITE FIRE PROTECTION PLAN (FOR INFORMATION ONLY). 05 N I. Provide all necessary offsets, raises or drops in main or branch line piping and auxiliary drains required by building conditions whether or not shown on the B. Interior Valves: A. Hydrostatically test entire system in accordance with NFPA 13. SCALE: 1 30'-0" FIN. FLOOR ELEV. 100'-0" (126.40'MSL) engineering drawing. 1. Butterfly valve: indicating type; 175 psi rated working pressure. B. Tests shall be witnessed by the authority having jurisdiction, and Owner's J. Examine the job conditions and verify all measurements, distances, elevations, authorized agent. clearances, pipe sizes, etc. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: Gruvlok, Nibco, Tyco, Victaulic, Viking or approved equal. C. Preliminary testing procedures shall be conducted as mentioned above to assure K. It is understood, unless specifically indicated otherwise, that the pipe sizes as proper operation when the final testing is performed. shown on the engineering drawing will be used. 2. Check valve: horizontal swing or wafer; 175 psi rated working pressure. D. The Contractor's Material and Test Certificates as shown in NFPA 13 must be 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE a. Acceptable Manufacturers: Gruvlok, Muelller, Stockham, Tyco, completed and submitted to the Engineer before final acceptance may be given. lop'. United or approved equal. A. Equipment and components not specifically specified shall be listed by END OF SECTION :0l Underwriters laboratories, Inc. for fire protection systems installation. 3. Globe valve: bronze threaded; renewable composition disc; 175 psi rated SECTION 15300 - FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS IILI�J_ 10�b , working pressure. This ro, I n e design s wn the of the CL - ec , In 0 ion, a. Acceptable Manufacturers: Crane, Milwaukee, Nibco, Stockharn Ora pproved equal. Co yin or r ing without ir otte is prohibited a an in nt wRI, loe suloje to al ction. PARTIAL IRE PROTECTION LAN AND SPECIFICATION FP=1 )KN❑TEI THIS DOCUMENT CERTIFIES THAT THE BUILDING MATERIALS SPECIFIED IN THE PLANNING C❑MMISSI❑N APPROVAL OF THIS PROJECT (BPC0803-001) ARE LIKEW SUBMITTED TO THE PLANNING C❑MMISSI❑N FOR FURTHER C❑NSIDERATI❑N, BRANCH LINE HANGER SHALL BE ATTACHED TO TRAPEZE MEMBER WITHIN ROOF/FLOOR DECK THIS 1'-0" SPACE DIRECTLY BETWEEN TWO JOISTS MIN. ROOF DECK/ FLOOR 12" MAX. - - - - - - - �i 112" ROD JOIST II>'nR" IIy� A >_ 36 JOIST TYPICAL JOIST EQ 1'-0" EQ CLEARANCE REQUIREMENT NOT TO SCALE (STANDARD COVERAGE UPRIGHT) PIPES LARGER THAN 4"DJ MAN REQi BRANCH LINE 3" ROOF DECK/ FLOOR DIST ROOF/FLOOR DECK ��r4x JOIST FOR IN THE PLANS SUBMITTED. ANY DEVIATI❑N FROM THE APPROVED BUILDING MATERIALS WILL NEGATE ANY STAFF APPROVAL OF SAID PLANS. PROPOSE ING 1/4" MINIMUM DISTANCE MIN. 10" MAX. 1/2"ROD VERTICAL TOLERANCE FOR RECESSED SPRINKLERS \-12" MIN. JOIST CLEARANCE REQUIREMENT NOT TO SCALE (PENDENT ESFR) NOTE: ALL JOIST BRIDGING SHALL BE LOCATED SUCH THAT THE LEADING EDGE OF ANY BRIDGING MEMBER IS A MINIMUM OF V-0" (MEASURED HORIZONTALLY) FROM THE CENTERLINE OF ALL ESFR SPRINKLERS LOCATED IN EXPOSED STRUCTURE AREAS. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATIONS OF BRIDGING WITH THE DIMENSIONAL INFORMATION SHOWN ON THE FIRE SPRINKLER CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PREPARED BY CC]. NO VARIATION FROM THIS MINIMUM CLEARANCE WILL BE PERMITTED. (ELECTRONIC FILES OF THE FIRE SPRINKLER CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS WILL BE FURNISHED BY CCI UPON REQUEST.) FLOOR/ ROOF OBSTRUCTION STRUCTURE SPRINKLER PIPE HELD TIGHT TO CEILING OBSTRUCTION TYPICAL OFFSET @ OBSTRUCTION NOT TO SCALE DRAIN PLUG: IF OVER 5 GAL. OF WATER IS TRAPPED, PROVIDE 1" GLOBE VALVE PIPES LARGER THAN 4" 0 TYPICAL DETAIL FOR SPRINKLER PIPES LARGER THAN 4" 0 NOT TO SCALE I AREA 3 - TIRE STORAGE ESFR HYDRAULICALLY MOST REMOTE 13 SPRINKLERS (960 SQ. FT. MIN.) 15 PSI MIN SPRINKLER BELOW FESFR ROLL-BACK DOOR II `ah' �h :J I �I 0 CID �I 8" U.G. FIRE SERVICE LEAD-IN (SEE PARTIAL SITE PLAN ON FP-1 FOR CONTINUATION) I 12'-0" 1 1 /2" 34 \35A - I 12'-0" 12'-0" NOT TO SCALE NOTE: 1. CORROSION MONITORING STATION SHALL BE CONNECTED TO RISER AND INSTALLED PARALLEL TO FLOOR. A CORROSION MONITORING STATION, IS FULLY ASSEMBLED FOR RISER INSTALLATION BY FIRE SPRINKLER CONTRACTOR AIR INLET ISOLATION VALVE (NORMALLY CLOSED) CORROSION MONITORING STATION RISER I� �I I I IS FULLY ASSEMBLED, FOR INSTALLATION BY FIRE SPRINKLER (� SIGHT GLASS (INSTALL I I 1" NPT OUTLET PROVIDED CONTRACTOR BY FIRE SPRINKLER FOR BEST VISIBILITY) I CONTRACTOR DRAIN VALVE J — — CORROSION MONITORING (NORMALLY CLOSED) PROBE WITH ECS DETECTOR -CORROSION MONITORING PROBE ISOLATION VALVE (NORMALLY OPEN) A ELEVATION A -A ECS INSPECTOR - CORROSION MONITORING STATION INSTALLED ON EACH RISER HORN/STROBE @ 10'-0" A GRADE (BY FIRE ALARM CONTRACTOR) T 2" A.G.F. "TEST & DRAIN' COMB. INSP. TEST/ AIN DRAIN VALVE W/ RELIEF 8" TO FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM TOR F —1 L I oD ENGINEERED CORROSION SOLUTIONS (ECS) INSPECTOR CORROSION MONITORING STATION W/ DETECTOR CORROSION MONITORING PROBE O 21/2" HOSE CONNECTIONS FOR BACKFLOW PREVENTION TESTING 00 " CHECK VALVE PRESSURE GAUGE 8" SUPERVISED INDICATING °O BUTTERFLY VALVE FLOW SWITCH FIRE SPRINKLER CONTRACTOR'S WORK SHALL BEGIN @ THE 8" & 4" 2" MAIN DRAIN TO EXTERIOR BLIND FLANGE APPROX. V-0" A.F.F. BOR FINISHED FLOOR � 7j_ E1E3 8" U.G. FIRE SERVICE LEAD-IN T 4" U.G. FIRE SERVICE MAIN (BY OTHERS) j Or,,-4" TO FREE-STANDING FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION (BY OTHERS) ELEVATION AT SPRINKLER RISER NOT TO SCALE 5 4 3 2 _77 n 8 11/2" a I i a - 12' 0" 12 0 12' 0" 12 -0" 11'-6' 8 `- -- - ., -- I - 3 - 3h �I � I .o. I I I I � 3" I I -goy __� � 'Ill r°= h. I - ---- - -_.- I 0; � _ L ,I I II _ if f,I FIRE SPRINKLER PLAN SCALE: 1/8" = V-0" FIN. FLOOR ELEV. = 100'-0" (126.40.) r -HANGES TO PROJECT SPECIFICATI❑NS WILL SYMBOL KEY • CHROME RECESSED ORD / 5.6K / QR ESFR-25 PENDENT ORD / 25.2K / ESFR O BRASS UPRIGHT ORD / 8.OK / SR O BRASS PENDENT ORD / 5.6K / QR BRASS HORIZONTAL SIDEWALL ORD / 5.6K / SR RECOMMENDED CENTER LINE ELEVATION OF PIPE A.F.F. AND/OR CENTER LINE ELEVATION OF PIPE FROM TOP OF JOIST —G RISE FROM LEFT TO RIGHT AND DROP FROM RIGHT TO LEFT �— CAPPED PIPE O HYDRAULIC REFERENCE POINT - 0 - CENTER LINE OF SPRINKLER: ALIGN WITH LIGHTS AND/OR OTHER SPRINKLERS: COORDINATE WITH OTHER TRADES. GENERAL NOTES 1. PROVIDE ALL NECESSARY OFFSETS, RAISES OR DROPS IN PIPING AND AUXILIARY DRAINS REQUIRED BY BUILDING CONDITIONS WHETHER OR NOT SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS. 2. EXAMINE THE JOB CONDITIONS AND VERIFY ALL MEASUREMENTS, DISTANCES, ELEVATIONS, PIPE SIZES, CLEARANCES ETC. 3. ARCHITECTURAL, STRUCTURAL, MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL BACKGROUND INFORMATION IS SHOWN FOR COORDINATION PURPOSES ONLY. REFER TO THE PROPER DRAWINGS FOR EXACT LOCATIONS, SIZES AND QUANTITIES OF OTHER TRADES' WORK. 4. THE ENGINEERING DRAWINGS HAVE BEEN PREPARED USING AUTOCAD. THE DRAWINGS ARE 100% CAD. THE HYDRAULIC CALCULATIONS HAVE BEEN PREPARED USING HASS. THESE DOCUMENTS WILL BE MADE AVAILABLE TO THE SUCCESSFUL FIRE SPRINKLER CONTRACTOR IN EITHER ELECTRONIC FORM OR HARD COPY. 5. IT IS UNDERSTOOD, UNLESS SPECIFICALLY INDICATED OTHERWISE, THAT THE PIPE SIZES AS SHOWN ON THE ENGINEERING DRAWINGS WILL BE USED. HANGER NOTES 1. PIPES LARGER THAN 4 IN. RUNNING PARALLEL TO BAR JOIST SHALL BE HUNG FROM TRAPEZE HANGERS SUPPORTED NEARLY EQUALLY BY TWO JOISTS. 2. ONLY ONE PIPE SHALL BE SUPPORTED FROM A SINGLE TRAPEZE HANGER UNLESS OTHERWISE APPROVED IN WRITING BY THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER OF RECORD. 3. HANGERS WITH MORE THAN 150 POUNDS OF LOAD SHOULD BE ATTACHED TO THE JOIST AT A PANEL POINT, 4. COORDINATE ALL HANGER TYPES AND LOCATIONS WITH THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER OF RECORD. TYPICAL SPRINKLER LOCATIONS CIEI24'LINGxTILE) SECOND LOOK" V-0" 0 o o; SPRINKLER (TYP.) 3" RADIUS TOLERANCE (TYP.) NOTE: SPRINKLERS SHALL BE POSITIONED AS SHOWN WITH A 3" TOLERANCE. HOWEVER, SHOULD ANY PART OF THE TOLERANCE BE USED, THEN ALL THE SPRINKLERS IN THE ROW SHALL BE OFFSET BY THE SAME DISTANCE IN THE SAME DIRECTION. INSTALLATION NOTES 1. PROVIDE SPRINKLER PROTECTION BELOW DUCTS IN EXPOSED STRUCTURE AREAS PER NFPA-13. 2. ALL JOIST BRIDGING, LIGHTING, AND CONDUIT RUNS SHALL BE LOCATED SUCH THAT THE LEADING EDGE OF ANY OBSTRUCTION IS A MINIMUM OF V-0" (MEASURED HORIZONTALLY) FROM THE CENTERLINE OF ALL ESFR SPRINKLERS. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATIONS OF SPRINKLERS WITH OTHER OC DISCIPLINES PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. NO VARIATION FROM THIS MINIMUM CLEARANCE WILL BE PERMITTED. MANUAL AIR RELEASE NOTE: CONTRACTOR SHALL VENT AIR MANUALLY OUT OF PIPE AND DRAIN TO OUTSIDE. U) 0 U)< Lua LL, U) 0 ¢o UQ�Ka< O � ¢ — U U w } C) U w o7 E O z O = O U cn ¢ arra ~�z C) 'nw�C7 ww �oz U (n UJ owowz a o w w m z a z = 0 w w p 0 0 W p X Q O Z zC7Q Owaf 2-- 0 — aU) Lw� Uw o¢ z r J w O= ¢w m_cj1—U aFcnw0Q w = o ¢ w U) _ w cn�g� �WwW0 V) cn o E = w o J U ~ U � O � v = U m 0 +voz0 cn LEI O 0 � 3: n Df L' J o�-DDf � W QN(nma-LL_ • m W j:js =�a2 y" J eD N H �e ® = v R rn • LLJ � uu Vim^ m Y p V! lai W ca N� D N LO(O �Lo00 �LO 00 I (D I y y^03 ZO�NCo r o,nr1) .-� Ea 00 �v(O Q' O— (O � > C (n� = N O x ZO E O x OUNddLO mi�ol ma-LZ db • • a 0 Z 0 00 • C V J J • W = NW • _ N ISSUE DATE 12-01-08 • • REV DATE • d A is rr T dr wing design sho Is he p of the archit t, e o tIon, copying u o phis wing without th 'r w 'tte t is prohibited a an in t will be sub jec to ega t n, FIRE SP R PLAN, NOTE AND ' DETAILS FP-2 j A-15 THRU PHOTOCELL 01 01 G � Li- •--- - -- [\ - ��- �- �- T_ -/- -' E`-- .1----clF_I- � �� F- i --T II o E A2 I M I\/I I\/I I\/ 1 I\/ i I I 3 /\ / \ / \ /\ /\ OCCUPANCY TYPE Cl r- -____� J____I/ _� ®�® �I____L_�� r_J��I___IL_�___J/ _� I I A EX WALL SWITCH (TYP) --- - --------- - - - - ------ - - - - -J L—--------J II r-———————— — — — ---————— — — — —-, r---- — — — —-, A-il}C1 — — — — — — Ll� _ - � i- h 1— I\ � - C 1 T\ - /11 t-� J L_ — — — — - - - - -� - 1 C 1 I I NL EX \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ I I E1 / '/\ /\ A / / I I A 0 E C Q C k k -\J E LL____ IJ - - - n (I TYP) --- --- --- - - - - r I EX F AT ACCESS 00 E El: I - - - - - - E Lry DOOR p �l i I I EX A-9 A-7 I I I C C THRU C1 C C C C THRU C1 C C i I pl pl C C !D NL �j NL F � O Fl A-5 _ 4 Dyl —0 ° C C C C 1 + a + a + + + a + + + + + + + + + + 7 TOC1- - EX 1 NL II NL C E1 -- -- C - A-1 �-7 TYP, o 1 L 0. E M A-60 E1 THRU[] Q1 REMOTE EMERGENCY HEAD -TYPICAL. A-31 IRRIGATION CONTROLLER TIE WITH A-51 WP.GFCI J-BOX AT 48" AFF TIE WITH A-21 WP,GFCI SIGNAGE & LIGHTING CONTACTOR • MAIN L _ _ — — — h /- — — — — _f_T � — _ _ J L—.-1_ R � -1� _ — — — �6 \/ I/\I \/ \/ I/\I I /\ I \/ \/ I /\ I II I/\I I/\! !/\I I I A-32 F MDP �� /- \4-___L J----�/__\L___JC_ /\ �1____I_d� I I r_-j___�L_�I___�/_� L----- ----------- ----- - - - - -J L—————————— - - - - - REFER TO THE MECHANICAL DRAWING FOR THE THREE- WAY SWITCHES AT THE EXTERIOR DOORS TO CONTROL THE EXHAUST FAN. SEE ALSO THE DETAIL ON THE MECHANICAL SHEET FOR THE WIRING OF THE CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTOR TO THE EXHAUST FAN. A-34 CAR BRAKE 11 _ - 11 t1► t��ti► �=-�=�11 ti► t�� � tE� �=•-' i � tit' t1� jam-..—�- tl► t1► ��I' tl�=-=' � �� l 1 CU G _1 A-47 A-29 A-54 A-50 -41 A-39 MDP-44;35/3 ° A-45 A-3 TIE WITH A-29 60/3F/W ; 9 MDP-15/17 MDP-7/9 A-16,18,20.�3 CU-1 IG 30A NON -FUSED COMPLY WITH NEC ARTICLE MDP-11 / 13 -36;30 2 511 FOR COMMERCIAL / GARAGES FOR METHODS OF 0 A�VE MDP-37;35/3 A-4 BKR PLATFORM - ELECTRICAL AND CONDUIT INS! LATION THIS AR kT 59RUMDP-19;50/3 , + + + + + + + + + + + A PAD LIFT A-40 42 A-23,( LIGHTING FLOOR PLAN SCALE: 1 /8" = 1'-0" !�j T i • • Q 1 "C4 mod, • 3 CL i �il����t I i A-35 THRU O A-2 A-14 01 I I A-33 THRU I WP,GFCI 1 , IG �' '�A�WP,GFCI ^ MDP-16/18 MDP-20/22 MDP-25/27 DP-31/3 DP-24 26 MDP-28 30 MDP-29 1 IG } MDP-12%14 'i J J IG G J J 6 6 6 6 60" AFF A_ WP,GFCI 1 3/4" EMT FROM COMPRESSOR " THRU [C� THRU THRU 2 EMPTY BELOW TO THE JUNCTION BOX 30A.,120V. TWISTLOCK FLOOR DATA/PHONE CONDUIT OVER TO WALL AND UP INTO THE CEILING SPACE FOR OWNER'S CABLES (TYP OF 3) ' 4 POWER SYSTEMS FLOOR PLAN SCALE: 1 /8" = 1'-O" LIGHTING PLAN KEYNOTES: to NIGHT LIGHT FIXTURE - DO NOT SWITCH. Q VERIFY FIXTURE MTG HEIGHT WITH ARCHITECTURAL ELEVATIONS.. d SEE OUTSIDE LIGHTING CONTROLS 10 ON E2. O ROUTE CONDUIT AS HIGH AS POSSIBLE IN JOIST SPACE. ROUTE PARALLEL AND PERPENDICULAR; (NO DIAGONALS.) Q SEE ARCH. SECTIONS FOR MOUNTING FIXTURE. Q AT MAX HEIGHT ABOVE ACCESS DOOR TO PLATFORM. Q FIXTURE TO BE ATTACHED TO BOTTOM OF JOIST WITH UNITSTRUT. VERIFY MOUNTING LOCATION WITH THE ARCHITECTURAL REFLECTED CEILING PLAN AND WITH THE FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM SHOP DRAWINGS AND SYSTEM INSTALLER. GENERAL NOTES: A. CONDUIT, LIGHTS AND OTHER ELECTRICAL ITEMS SHAH NOT INTERFERE WITH TIRE STORAGE RACKS. ROUTE CONDUIT IN JOIST SPACE. MC CABLE ALLOWED WHERE APPROVED BY LOCAL INSPECTOR. B. TRANSFORMER -SEE CIVIL DRAWINGS AND POWER CO. C. ALL ELECTRICAL FIXTURES ARE TO BE PURCHASED FROM THE NATIONAL VENDOR WITHOUT SUBSTITUTION. POWER: PROGRESS ENERGY FLORIDA, INC. 36453 EILAND BOULEVARD ZEPHYRHILLS, FLORIDA 33542 TELEPHONE: VERIZON FLORIDA INC. 1778 PARK AVENUE NORTH, SUITE 200 MAITLAND, FLORIDA 32751 PHONE: (407) 539-0644 CABLE: BRIGHT HOUSE NETWORKS 30432 SR 54 WESLEY CHAPEL, FLORIDA 33543 PHONE: (813) 856-5129, x84402 POWER/SYSTEMS PLAN KEYNOTES: Q MOUNT RECEPTACLE 8" ABOVE WINDOW. 20 OUTLET CONCEALED - COORDINATE WITH UNIT SUPPLIER. 0 RECEPTACLES AND DISCONNECTS IN BAY SERVICE AREA SHALL BE 48" AFF, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. ALL 120V RECEPTACLES SHALL BE GFCI, EXCEPT SIMPLEX RECEPTACLES FOR THE FANS (SEE NOTE 5 BELOW). Q REFERENCE ARCHITECTURAL ELEVATION/DETAILS FOR MOUNTING HEIGHT. RECEPTACLES TO BE MOUNTED HORIZONTALLY. Q FOR WALL FAN, +92" AFF. GFI NOT REQUIRED. d 30A, 250V. TWIST LOCK FOR LIFT CONNECTION - COORDINATE W/SUPPLIER. USE 30A, 120V. FOR PAD LIFTS. MOUNT 24" AFF. Q NOT USED. ® CONNECT TO AIR COMPRESSORS AND AIR DRYERS PER VENDOR REOUIREMENTS. 0 STUB UP LOCATION FOR TELEPHONE AND CATV SERVICE. USE 4"C. FOR TELEPHONE AND 2"C. FOR CATV TO SERVICE LOCATIONS REQUIRED BY UTILITY COMPANIES. REFER TO SHEET ES1 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 1 U USE MAXIMUM 3 CIRCUITS PER HOMERUN. TYPICAL THROUGHOUT. tt NOT USED. t2 FUSE PER NAMEPLATE OF UNIT. t 3 CONNECTION FOR BUILDING SIGN. PROVIDE J-BOX ABOVE AND BELOW THE ROOF LINE AND CONNECT WITH 1" CONDUIT BETWEEN J-BOXES. COORDINATE WITH ARCH. ELEVATIONS FOR SIGN LOCATIONS. t 4 TO EXTERIOR PYLON SIGN. COORDINATE WITH SUPPLIER. PROVIDE 30/} F/WP DISCONNECT AT SIGN. t 5 POWER AND DATA FLOOR OUTLETS FLUSH ON FLOOR WITH BRASS COVERS. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH TENANT. TYPICAL. t 6 2"C. FOR CONTROL LINES TO LIFTS. VERIFY WITH SUPPLIER. 17 SATELLITE DISH CABLE ENTRANCE, SEE DETAIL F6. y =o �� W 0M co o > lc': N 00 �~ zN 3 d to U')L N a 0 0 Z 00 IL z o 0 U U) � a = m E U o F_ v +�Uw0mCD z K t; ��QO�r? L,�� w Q C,4 LL. 4 0 0 Llj L o ,,� CO z44Z ID z i- ID UJ YU_ I �Q <® � o � ry N � DO M d = N��745 .TIC q `—^ 6 Z Y ip O C. O 01 �O = C N M M N M � H'nm V cQfm aJp �O in K Z o_ Z3-v CO N YL 03�co O 0 M V 1 Z d l. L l l N d a ISSUE DATE 12-01-08 T dra n8' esign shown is the rop of t . The reproduction, c ng use i d without their wri con t is I d any in fr nge nt w be su I action. LI POWER/ EMS FLOOR P N 8-STRAIGHT PROTOTYPE - REVISION 16 - 06-18-08 t�� a 9MITALS: A. Submrl under provisions of DMSION 1 where specified in this Division. B. Submit stop drawings and product data grouped to include complete submittals of related systems, products. and accessories in a single sutmettol. C. Mark dimensions and values in units to match those specified. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: A. Ap*oble codes as follows: 1. NFPA 70 (NEC) - 2005. 2. Site -specific Budding and Life Safety Codes, B. AD electrical equipment shim be fisted by UL and installed in accordance with that fisting. CONNECTION TO OWNER FURNISHED EOUJIPMENT: A. Certain pieces of shop equipment ore to be Owner furnished. This equipment to be connected by this Contractor in accordance wih manufacturer's brochures and instructions. END OF SECTION PROJECT CONDITIONS. A. Verify (hot fed measurements are as shown on Drawings. B. Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough -in. C. Conduit routing is shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route as required to complete wiring system. Unless noted otherwise, oil conduit shall be concealed. Where shown exposed, conceal in walls at maximum height possible for runs to flush device boxes. CONDUIT REO UIREMENTS: A. Minimum Size: )finch unless otherwise specified, B. Underground Installations: 1. More than Fire Feet from Foundation Wall: Use rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit or plastic coated co rldui, nonmetallic conduit. 2. Wibin Five Feet from Foundation Walt: Use rigid steel conduit or intermediate metal conduit. 3. In or Under Slob on Grade: Use rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit or nonmetallic Schedule 40 PVC. 4, Emerging from slob: Use rigid steel or intermediate metal conduit. C. Outdoor Locations, Above Grade: Use rigid steel. D. In Slob Above Gracile: 1. Use rigid steal conduit, intermediate metal conduit, electrical metals tubing and nonmetallic conduit. E. Wet and Damp Locations: Use rid steel, interWiole metal conduit or electrical metallic tubing, F. Dry Locations: 1. Concealed (including block walls above slob): Use rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit and electrical metallic tubing. 2. Exposed: Use rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit and electrleol metallic tubing. INSTALLATION: A. Install conduit in accordance with NECA 'Standard of Installation." B, install nonmetallic conduit in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation. D. Support conduit using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay -in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, and split hangers. E. Group related conduits; support using conduit rock. Construct rack using steel channel; provide space on each for 25 percent oddiranri conduits. F. Fasten conduit supports to building structure and surfaces under provisions of Section 16190. G. Do not support conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary supports. H. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires or cuing grids, I. Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present neot appearance. J. Route overhoeod exposed conduit parallel and to walla, K. Route conduit installed obove accessible ceilings poorolet and perpendicular to wolfs. L. Route conduit in and under slob from point-to-point, M. Do not cross conduits in slob. N. Maintain minimum 6 inch clearance between conduit and piping. 0. Maintain 12 inch (300 mm) clearance between conokai and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104 degrees F (40 degrees C). P. Cut conduit square using sow or pipecutter; de -burr cut ends. 0. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely. R. Join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer. Wipe rnonmetolliic conduit dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coal of cement to entire area inserted in fitting. Allow joint to cure for 20 minutes, minimum. S. Use conduit hubs to fasten conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp and wet locations and to cast boxes. T. install no more than equivalent of three 90-degree bends between boxes. Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction. as around teams. Use factory elbows for bends in metal conduit larger than 2 inch (50 mm) size. U. Avoid moisture traps; provide junction box with drain fitting at law points in conduit system. V. Provide suitable filings to accommodate expansion and deflection where conduit crosses seismic, control and expansion joints. W. Provide suindle pull string in each empty conduit except sleeves and nipples, X. Use suitable cops to protect installed conduit ogoinst entrance of dirt and moisture. Y. Ground and bond conduit under provisions of Section 16170. Z. Identify conduit under provisions of Section 16195. INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS: A. Install conduit to preserve fife resistance ro(N of partitions and ter elements, Where multi penetrations occur, provide a 2 inch gyration between sides of conduit. Use approved methods outlined in Division 7. B. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork or through suitable roof jack with pitch pocket. Coordinate location with rooting installation specified. C. Do not route conduit within corrugations of metal roof deck, END OF SECTION 1$;il_'[49!tl21 iff,NS A. Verify that field measurements ore as shown on drawings. B. We and cable routing indicated is approximate unless dimensioned. Route wire and cable as required to meet Project Conditions, Include wire and cable lengths within 10 feet of length shown. C. Where wire and cable routing is not shown, and destination only is indicated, determine exact routing and lengths required. WIRING METHODS. A AN Locations: AD twang circuits and feeders shall use single conductor cropper building wire, Type THHN/THWN insulation, in raceway. B. Use wiring methods indicated. Unless otherwise noted, all wiring shall be installed in conduit. INSTALLATION: A. instal products in accordance with rrionufoctuuer's instructions. B. Use solid conductor for feeders and branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller. C. Use stranded conductors for control circuits. D. Use conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighd ng circuits. E. Use conductor not smaller than 16 AWG for control circuits. F. Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 120 vaK branch circuits longer than 75 feet. G. Make splices, taps, and terrninotions to carry full ompority of conductors with no perceptible temperature rise. H. Use split bolt connectors for copper conductor splices and tops, 6 AWG and lager. Tape urnnsulated conductors and connector with electrical tape to 150 percent of insulation rating of conductor. L Use solde►less pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper conductor splices and tops, 8 AWG and smaller. J. Use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic cops for copper conductor splices and taps, 10 AWG and smaller. K. Install worning tope along entire length of direct burial cable, within 3 inches of grade, L. Identify wire and cable under provisions of Section 16195. Identify each conductor with is circuit number or other designation indicated. END OF SECTION SUBMITTALS FOR CLOSEOUT: A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Accurately record actual locations and mounting freights of outlet, pull, and junction boxes. OUTLET BOXES: A. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: ANSI/NEMA OS 1, sized steel. 1. Lurrimrure and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for wegght of equipment supported; includeiinch (13 mm) mole fixture studs where required. 2. Concrete Ceiling Boxes: Concrete type. B. Cost Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, cost ferolloy. Provide gasketed cover by box manufacturer. Provide threaded hubs, C. Wall Plates for Finished Areas: As specified in Section 16141. PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES: A. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1. galvanized sleet. B. Surfoce-Mounted Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type 4; flot-flanged, surface -mounted junction box. 1, Material: Galvanized cast iron, 2. Cover: Furnish with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover screws. INSTALLATION: A. install boxes in accordance with NECA 'Standard of Instolkation' for flush mounting. B. Set wall mounted boxes at elevations to occonmodote mounting heights indicated and specified. C. Electdcol boxes ore shown on Drawings in approximote locations unless dimensioned. Adjust box location up to 10 feet if requhed to accommodate intended purpose. D. Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices oriented as specified in Section 16141. E. Maintain headroom and present neol mechanical appearorim F. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only, G. Inaccessible Ceiling Arens: Install outlet and junction boxes no more (bon 6 inches (150 mm) from ceiling access panel or from removable recessed furnmoire H. Instal boxes to preserve fire resistance rating of petitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Division 7. 1. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, and bocksploshes. J. Locate outlet boxes to allow luminaries positioned as shown on reflected ceiling pion. K. Align adjacent wait mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similor deKes, L. Use flesh mounting outlet box in all areas, unless noted otherwise. M. Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit comer only. Coordinate masonry cutting to aches meat opening. N. Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls; provide minimum 6 inches (150 mm) separation. Proves minimum 24 inches (6000 min) separation in ocoustle and Ire rated walls: O. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and portion studs. Accurately position to allow fa surface finish thickness. P. Use stomped sleet bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs. 0. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness. R. Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box. S. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support mires. T. Support boxes independently of conduit. U. Use gag box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box, V. Use gong box with plaster ring for she device outlets. W. Use cost outlet box in exterior locations (exposed to the weather) and wet locations. X. Large Pug Boxes: Use hinged enclosure in interior dry locatiwns, surfore-mounted cost metal box in other locations. INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS: A. Coordinate instalbt'ion of outlet box for equipment connected under Section 16180. ADJUSTING: A. Adjust flush -mounting outlets (a make front flush with fini lied wag material. B. install knockout closures in unused box openings. END OF SECTION WALL SWITCHES A. Dkxdpliorr NEMA WD 1, generol-duly, AC only snap switch, quiet operating. B. Device Body: Ivory plastic with full size toggle handle. C. Voltage Rating: 120-277 volts, AC, D. Current Rating: 15 omperes. E. Ratings:. Match branch circuit and food chorocteristics when controlling on entire branch circuit load. RECEPTACLES: A. Descript'urn: NEMA WD 1; heavy-duty receptacle, specification grade. B, Device Body: Ivory plastic, C. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, type as specified and indicated. D. Convenience Receptacle: Type 5-15. E. GFCI Reeeptocle-_ Convenience receptacle with integral ground fowl circuit interrupter to meet regulatory requirements. WALL PLATES: A. Decorative Cover Prate: Smooth stainless steel. B Weolherproof Cover Plate: Gasketed cost metal with hinged gasketed device cover. C. Receptacles in wet locations shall be installed with on outlet enclosuire clearly marked "Suitable For Wet Locations While in Use'. The outlet enclosure shalt be listed by underwriters Lobootories, Inc, INSTALLATION - A. Install products in accordance with manufacturers instructions and NECA 'Stondard of Initagalion*. B, install devices plumb and Level. C. install switches with OFF position down. D. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to outlet box with bonding jumper and to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. E. instoll decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas. F. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor around screw terminal. G, Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and *lion boxes in unfinished areas, above accessible ceilings, and on surface mounted outlets. INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS: A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 16130 to obtain mounting heights specified and Indicated on Drawings. Coordinate all rough -in with architectural interior elevations. B. install wall switch 48 inches above finished floor, to centerline; Where located near doors, install switches on the lock side and clear of door trrn a maxmum of 2 inches and o maximum of 10 inches. C. instal convenience receptacle 18 inches above finished floor, to centerline. D. Install convenience receptacle 2 inches above bocksptosh of crannter. to bottom. E. Instal telephone outlet 18 inches above finished Rorer, to centerline. F. install telephone outlet for wag telephone 48 inches above firm floor, to centerline. END OF SECTION GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM: A. Metal underground water pipe. & Metal from of the budding, including footing. C. Rod electrodes. PERFORMWE REOUIREMENTS: A. Grounding System Resistance: 10 ohms. ROD ELECTRODE: A. Materiel: Copper or Capper -clod steel. B, Diameter: flinch. C. Length: 10 feet. GROUND CONNECTORS - A. Burndy, Hy -Ground or Cadweld. WIRE: A. Material: Stranded cower. B Grounding Electrode Conductors: Size (a meet NFPA 70 Requirements. See plans for minimum sizes. INSTALLATION. A. Install Products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install rod electrodes at locations required by local outhony. Install additional rood electrodes as required to achieve specified resistance to ground, C, Provide grounding electrode conductor and connect to reinforcing steel in foundation footing. Band steel together. D Provide boriding to meet Regulatory Requirements. E. Bond together metal siding not attached to grounded structure; bond to ground. F. Provide bonding of the above ground potion of the gas piping system inside the building to meet the requirements of NFPA 54 and NFPA 70. G. Provide bonding of shielding cable serving fire olorm oddreseable adopter modules on oil exterior equipment. Probate bonding of exterior equipment device lugs. H. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Provide separate, insulated conductor within each feeder and broach circuit ro ewoy_ Terminate each end on suitable lug, bus, or bushing. END OF SECTION 91 8-STRAIGHT PROTOTYPE - REVISION 16 - 06-18-08 Tn �j = O W p .1..)Z V)� a9 r . P-4 z aj u°'i > ar a N Q a� ZN r 04 QoZ o � N Y O 7 !_ V m U ►Z— C. tY � 00 L cnUi-'-'Q�'�� pLU Zd�r� YPQC)Mci co � �n'n V � w L nCe -� 3 Lu Q fV to m a lit r 4 0 0 co �. w LO � C , � z tt�m N >_w " en ry:7- LLJ <nY :E Q eL m -�� cTti Z_� . _2T� N ry.0 ti'''';; aCM ryt0 H M N V � s g f M Z p U 25 cS ° X 0 o c' ISSUE DATE 12-01-08 and the design shown is the e architect. The reproduction, of this drawing without their L% is prohibited and any AI subject to legal action. 'AfiXCAL COORDINATION: A. Coordinate work under provisions of Division 1, Division 11, Division 12, Division 14, and Divisim 15. Responsibility for fumishiruj and installing components, mated, conduit, wk'ng, etc., is as assigned in those Divisions. Control wiring at 120 volts or higher shall be furnished and installed by Division 16. Where responsib,Tty is not specifically assign, labor and materials shall be furnished by Division 16. Installer shall meet requirements of this Section. B. Determine connection locations and requirements based on installation requirements in each Division or Section. CORDS AND CAPS: A. Attachment Plug Construction: Conform to NEMA WD 1. B. Configuration: NEMA WD 6; match receptacle configurofion at outlet provided for equipment and to match circuit voltage and amperes. C. Cord Construction: NFPA 70, Type SO mull'xcorductor flexible cord with identified equipment grouuufing conductor, suitable for use in damp locations. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS. A Make electrical connections in accordance with equipment manufacturer's instructions. B. Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use Liquidtight flexible conduit with watertight connectors in damp or wet locations. C. Connect heot producing equipment using wire and cable with insulation suitable for temperatures encountered. D. Provide receptacle outlet to accommodate connection with attachment plug. E. Provide cord and cop where field -supplied attachment Mug is required. F. Insloll suitable strain-retef clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes and equipment connection boxes. G. Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control device to complete equipment ruing requirements. These devices shall not be mounted to equipment, only to adjacent structural elements. H. Install terminal block jumpers to complete equipment wiring requirements. 1. Install interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment to complete equipment wiring requirements. END OF SECTION PRODUCT REOUIREMENTS: A. Materials and Finishes. Corrosion resistance. B. Select materials, sizes, and types of anchors, fasteners and supports to carry the loads of equipment and conduit, including weight of wire in conduit. C. Anchors and Fasteners: 1. Concrete Structural Elements: Use precast inserts, expansion anchors, powder actuated anchors and preset inserts. 2. Steel Structural Elements: Use beam clamps, steel romset fasteners and welded fasteners. 3. Concrete Surfaces: Use self -drilling anchors and expansion anchors. 4. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Use toggle bolts and hollow wan fasteners. 5. Solid Masonry Wolls: Use expansion anchors and preset inserts. 6. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws. 7. Wood Elements. Use wood screws. INSTALLATION: A Locate and install anchors, fosterers, and supports in accordance with NECA 'Standard of Installation'. 1. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, T-bars, T-bor supports or conduit. 2. Do not use spring steel clips and clamps. END OF SECTION NAMEPLATES AND LABELS - A. Nameplates- Engraved three-loyer laminated plastic, white letters on block background. B. Locations:. 1. Each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure. 2. Communication cobinets. C. Letter Size: 1. UsAnch letters for identifying individual equipment and hods. 2. Usehinch letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads. D. Lobels: Engraved coverplotes witt&' xh letters. Use only for identification of individual wall switches and receptacles and control device stations on emergency systems. WIRE MARKERS: A. Description: Cloth, tape, split sleeve, or tubing type wire markers. B. locotioim Each conductor at ponelboord gutters, pull boxes, outlet and junction boxes and each load connection. C. Legend: 1. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number indicated. 2. Control Circuuits: Control wire number indicated on stop drowi ngs. APPLICATION: A Secure nameplate and labels to equipment front using screws, (wets or permanent adhesive. B. Identify conduit using field painting under provisions of Division 9, or provide plastic tope. C. Install or point colored band on each conduit for" than 10 feet. D. Provide conduit bands 20 feet on center or use poinnted fittings. E. Color: 1. 208 Volt System: Blue. 2. Fire Nam System: Red. 3. Telephone System: Gray. END OF SECTION SECTION 16421 - UTILITY SERVICE ENTRANCE SYSTEM DESCRIPTION: A. Utility Company: Site specific local utility. B. System Characteristics: 208Y/120 volts, three phase, four -wire, 60 Hertz. C. Service Entrance: Underground to pole mounted or pad mounted transformer. Coordinate with Utility Company. UTILITY METER/BASE: A. Meter base will be furnished by Utility Company. TRANSFORMER PAD (WHERE REQUIRED): A. Description: Reinforced concrete sized and constructed in accordance with utility requirements. PREPARATION: A. Make arrangements with Utility Company to obtain permanent electric service to the Project. Include oil fees. B. Coordinate location of Utility Company's facilities to ensure proper access is available. INSTALLATION: A. Install service entrance conduits in concrete envelope from Utility Company's terminal pole or Utility Company's pad -mounted transformer to building service entrance equipment. END OF SECTION FUSIBLE SNITCH ASSEMBLIES A. Description: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, enclosed load interrupter knife switch. Handle lockable in OFF positron. B. Fuse cups: Designed to accommodate NEMA FU1, Class R and/or Class J fuses. NONFUSIBE SNATCH ASSEMBLES A. Description: NEVA KS 1, Type HD enclosed laod interrupter knife switch. Handle lockable in OFF position. MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS A, Description: Manual motor starting swlches complete wish thermal overkwd protection sized to match unto horsepower. ENCLOSURES A. Fabrication: NEMA KS 1. 1. Interim Dry Locations: Type 1. 2. Exterior Locations: Type A INSTALLATION A. Install fuses in fusible disconnect switches, sized as per nameplate data of equipment served. B. Apply adhesive lag on inside door of each fused switch indicating NEMA fuse doss and size installed. END OF SECTION DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS: A. Manufacturers: 1. Square D Model I -line. 2. Generol Electric Model SCP. 3. Siemens Model P5. 4. Cutler-Hommer Moab PRL5P/PRL4. B. Description: NEMA PB 1, circuit breaker type. C. Ponelboord Bus: Aluminum, ratings as indicated. Provide copper ground bus in each ponelboord. D. Minimum short circuit rating: As indicated. Series rating is not acceptable.. E. Molded Case Circuit Breakers. NEMA AB 1, circuit breakers with integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole. Provide circuit breakers UL listed as Type HACK for air conditioning equipment branch circuits. F. Circwl Breaker Accessories. Trip units and auxiliary switches as indicated. G. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1, Type 1 for interior dry locations and Type 31? for exterior locations, 12 Inches deep, 42 Intros wile, cabinet box. H. Cabinet Front:. Surface type, fastened with hinged door with flush lack, finished in a mufacturers standard groy enornel. L Provide service entrance label wlrore required. BRANCH CIRCUIT PitNELBOARDS: A. Manufacturers: 1. Square D Model NOOD f tub. 2. General Electric Model AO/AE. 3. Siemens Model P1. 4. Cutler-Hommer Model PRL la/20o. B. Description: NEMA PBt, circuit breaker type, fighting and oppfione branch circuit ponelboord. C. Ponelboord Bus: Aluminum, ratings as indicated. Provide copper ground bus in each ponelboord; provide insulated ground bus where indicated. D. Minimum Shot Circuit Rating: As indicated. Series rating is not acceptable. E. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, bolt -on type thermal magnets trip circuit breakers. with common trip handle for all poles, fisted as Type SWD for lighting circuits, Type HACR for air conditioning equipment circuits, Goss A ground fouit interrupter circuit breakers where scheduled. Do not use tondem circuit breakers. Visual trip indicators ore required. F. Enclosure. NEMA PB 1, Type 1 for anterior dry location and Type 31? for exterior locations. G. Cabinet Box: 6 inches deep, 20 inches rude. All double section ponelboords stall be of equal height. H. Cabinet Front: Flush or Surface cabinet front as indicated with concealed trim clamps, concealed linage, metal directory frome, and flan lock all keyed ofike. Finish in manufacturer's standard gray enamel. L Provide service entrance label where required. J. Provide lack -on devices for installation of circuits required by local oalhatRies. INSTALLATION. A. Install ponelboords in accordance with NEMA PB 1.1 and the NECA 'Standard of installation." B. Install ponelboords plumb. C. Height: 6 feet (1800 mm) to top of ponelboord, install ponelboords toiler than 6 feet (1800 mm) with bottom no more than 4 inches (100 mm) above floor. D. Provide fitter plates for unused spaces in ponelboaurds. E. Provide typed circuit directory for each branch circuit ponelboord. Revise directory to reflect circuiting charges required to balance phase loads. Revise directory to reflect change in room names and numbering as required by Owner. Also, identify the ponelboord source on the directory cord. F. Provide engraved plastic nameplates wider the provisions of Section 16195. G. Prove spare conduits out of each recessed ponelboord to on access*& location above ceiling below floor. Minimum spare conduits: 5 empty 1 inch, Identify each as SPARE. H. Ground and bond ponelboord enclosure according to Section 16170. END OF SECTION CLASS RK1 (DUAL ELEMENT/TIME DELAY) FUSES: A, Manufacturers. 1. Bussmon Model LPN/LPS. 2. Gould-Showmut model A2D/A6D. 3. CEFCO Model LON/LDS. CLASS RK5 (DUAL ELEMENT/TIME DELAY) FUSES: A. Morurfacturers: 1. Bussmon Model FRN/FRS. 2. Gould-Showmui Mabdel TR/TRS. 3. CEFCO Model CRN/CRS. END OF SECTION LUMINAIRES: A. Furnish products as specified on Drawings. For fire rated ceiling esembfxes, furnish products fisted for installation in the ossembly. INCANDESCENT EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS: A. Description: Self-contained emergency fighting unit. B< Battery: Type as shown in schedule with 1.5 hour capacity. C. Battery Charger: Dust -rote type, with sufficient capacity to recharge discharged battery to Gull charge within twelve hours, D. Lormps: Sealed beom type as ncceduled. E. Rewrote Lamps: Match lamps on twit. F. Housing as scheduled by manufacturer's catalog data. G. Indicators: Provide lamps to indicate AC ON and RECHARGING. H. Prom TEST switch to transfer unit from external power supply to integral battery may. L Electrikof Connection. Conduit connection. EXIT Ste: A. Description: Exit sign fixture suitable for use as emergency fighting unit. B. Face and Housing: As scheduled by manufacturer's cotes data. C. Directional Arrows: universal type for field adjustment. D. Mounting: Universal, for field selection. E. Battery: As scheduled, with 1.5 hour capacity. F. Battery Choral. Dual -rate type, with sufficient capacity to recharge dischorged battery to full charge within twelve hours. BALLASTS: A. Fluorescent Ballast.- 1. Description: Electronic tit. UL listed, class P, non PCB ballast. 2. Voltage: Math lumiunoire voltage. 3. Source Ouohly Control: Certify ballast design and construction by Certified Ballast Manufacturers, Inc. meet FCC Port 18, 15J for EM1/RFI and Federal Efficacy Standard Low 100-357. 4. Temperature, 60 degrees F - energy saving lamps; 50 degrees F - standard lamps. 5. Minimum fine transient as shown in IEE 587, category A and ANSI-62.41. 6. Power factor equal to .95 or greater. 7. Maximum lamp nest factor 1.7. & Minimum documented 3 yea ballast manufacturer's warranty. 9. 20% Total Harmonic Distortion (THD). B. High Intensity Discharge (HID) Bolt: 1. Description: ANSI C82.4, HID lamp ballast to match comp specified. LAMPS: A. Fluorescent Four Foot Lamp: T-8, 32 watt. 1. 3050 initial lumens (2850 design Lumens). 2. Med Bi Pin, 3. Tri-Phosphorus. 4. 20,000 average hours fife at 3 hours per start. 5. Electrode Guard. 6. CRI of 85. 7. Colo Temperature- 3500K. B. Compact Fluorescent Comp: Triple Tube, 32 watt, 1. 240D inTt d lumens. 2. 4-pin base. 3. CRI of 82. 4. Color Temperature: 3500K. INSTALLATION: A. Instal in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install suspended luurmaires uelrhg pendants supported from swim hangers. Provide punt length rearmed to suspend luminoire at indicated height. C. Support fuminaires larger thon 2 x 4 foot (600 x 1 200 mm) size independent of €eliing fromi ng. D. Locate recessed ceiling luminaires as indicated on reflected ceiling plan. E. Install surface mounted luminaires and exit signs plumb and adjust to ofign with building fires and with each other. Secure to prohibit movement. F. Instal[ recessed "noires to permit removal from below. G. Install recessed lumirroires using accessories and firestoptsrg moterrots to meet regulatory requirements for fire toting. H. Install clips to secure recessed grid -supported luminaires in place. I>,stall seismic support where required. L Install wall mounted luminaires, emergency fighting units and exit signs at height as indicated on Drawings. ,Outlet boxes are required. J. Connect lunmoire% eme:rgerxy fghtkg units and exit signs to broach circuit outlets provided wider Section 16130 using flexible conduit. K. Mount fixture as called for in schedule on drawings. Determine type of ceiling to the installed in each space from the architectural drawings and schedules and fumish fixtures suitable for the exact type. L. Lighting fixtures shot be structurolly supported. Norescent fixtures mounted in suspended ceding shall be supported by, and attached to, the ceifing suspension system as required by N.E.C. 410-16(c). Incandescent fixtures mounted in impended ceiFings shall be supported by fixtures chonnels, furnished under this Division, eel across ding support channels. Surface mounted fixtures shot[ be supported from the buU g structural system by Fads, or rods and camps, or by the fixture outlet box, which in turn shall be supported by rods. Provide fixture studs as required. M. Wall mounted fixtures shah be secured to masonry woks with bolts and lead anchors, and to metal stud, dry wad partitions by sheet metal screws driven into metal studs. END OF SECTION �� to W �} Z M 1 N �C}W ¢� N` Q 0 -o Z N 3 rub 0 QD a Z {3 0o a Z rn az U to I,, N o _ 1= v rO -' Z _ � 00 i + cn U o� cis N U LLI pCe -=)ne o w Q c V to m 0- LL. O 0 wL0 M O z >z � :D LLJ c� i :Ei O y� ISSUE DATE 1 2-01-08 and the design shown is the e architect. The reproduction, e of this drawing without, their s prohibited and any P subject to legal action. E-5 8-STRAIGHT PROTOTYPE - REVISION 16 - 06-18-08 q2- 0 `7f � s,T �fy CoMp :=ram.